e

TRANSACTIONS AND. PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ROYAL, SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(INCORPORATED).

VOL. LI.

| Wire Twenty Pirates, anp One Hunprep Anp Firreen Ficures 1n tHe Text.]

“EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G.S. -
Assistep sy ARTHUR M. LEA, F.ES.

|The Editor of the Transactions ts dwected to make it known to the Public
that the Authors alone are responsible for the facts and opinions contained in
their respective Papers.| ie

PRICE, TWENTY-SIX SHILLINGS.

Adelaide:

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE,
DECEMBER 23, 1927.

Prinvep By GILLINGHAM & Co. Lruitep, 106 anp 108, Currie STReEt,
ADELAIDE, ‘SouTH AUSTRALIA.

Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States
of America can be forwarded through the Srcithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.

TRANSACTIONS AND PROCEEDINGS

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

VOL. LI.

EDITED BY PROFESSOR WALTER HOWCHIN, F.G:S.
Assistep By ARTHUR M. LEA, F.E.S.

[The Editor of the Transactions is directed to make it known to the Public
that the Authors alone are responsible for the facts and opinions contained in
their respective Papers.|

PRICE, TWENTY-SIX SHILLINGS.

Adelaide:

PUBLISHED BY THE SOCIETY, ROYAL SOCIETY ROOMS, NORTH TERRACE,
DECEMBER 23, 1927,

Printep By GILLINGHAM & Co. Limitep, 106 anv 108, Currre Street,
ADELAIDE, SoutH AUSTRALIA,

Parcels for transmission to the Royal Society of South Australia from the United States
of America can be forwarded through the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, D.C.

ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA

(INCORPORATED).

K.C.B., K.C.M.G., D.S.O.

OFFICERS FOR 1927-28.

President:

Patron:
HIS EXCELLENCY LIEUT.-GENERAL SIR G. T. M. BRIDGES,
PROF. J. B. CLELAND, M.D. |

|

Vice-Presidents:
EDGAR R. WAITE, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S. L. KEITH WARD, D.Se.

Hon. Editor:
PROF. WALTER HOWCHIN, F.GS.

Hon. Treasurer: Hon. Secretary:

B. S$. ROACH. R. H. PULLEINE, M.B., Ch.M.

Members of Council:
ARTHUR M. LEA, F.E.S.
SIR JOSEPH C. VERCO, M.D., F.R.C.S.
PROF. T. HARVEY JOHNSTON, M.A., D.Sc., Representative Governor.
J .M. BLACK.
C. FENNER, D.Sc.
PROF, J. A. PRESCOTT, M.Sc. A.I.C.

Hon. Auditors:
W. C. HACKETT. H. WHITBREAD.

CONTENTS.
Page
Rocers, Dr. R. S.: Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia .. my bare
Teese: Norman B., and Harotp L. SkeARD: Aboriginal Rock Paige. South Para
River, South Australia. Plates 1. and it, ee ec
Suearp, Harotp L.: Aboriginal Rock Carvings at Devon Downs, River Murray, South
Australia. Plates ili, to v. a Ee ae = Ke dts)
ALDERMAN, A. R. (Communicated by ae . Madigan) : ’Petrographic Notes on Tonalite
from the Palmer District and Doce Notite from South Black Hill... 20
CLELAND, Pror. J. B., and J. M. Brack: An Enumeration of the Vascular Plants of Kan-
garoo Island. (Orchids by Dr. R. 5S. Rogers) . 24
CLeLanp, Pror. J. B.: Notes.on a Collection of ‘Australian My xomycetes.. "Identified by
Miss Gulielma Lister a : ay oe ae more (Vs
ADELAIDE ee a LD ANTHROPOL OGY: ” Central Australia—
CAMPBELL, Dr. and Ceci, J. Hackett. No. 1, Introduction: Descriptive and
panes eA gees vations .. ae Ma a iis te (65
Ray, Dr. Wittiam. No. 2, Physiological Observations _. 76
CLELAND, Pror. J. B. No. 3, Blood-Grouping of Australian ‘Aboriginals at Oodnadatta
and Alice Springs : ‘ 8 3 : 78
Davies, Dr. E. Harorp., No. 4, Aboriginal Songs a3 Be mm al sa call
Lea, Artuur M.: On New Species of Emplesis (Curculionidae) ' a Seg)
CHAPMAN, FrrepK.: On a New Genus of Calcareous Algae, from the Low er Cambrian (EA
West of Wooltana, South Australia. Plate vi. .. % aS vanliZs
Goopr, B. fF. (Communicated by Sir D. Mawson): The Mannum Granite .. af .. 126
JOHNSTON, Pror, T. Harvey: New Trematodes from an Australian Siluroid ia 129
SuHeEarD. Harorp L.: Aboriginal Rock Shelters and Carvings—Three Localities on the
Lower Murray 137
CLELAND, Pror. J. B.. and Crcr. J. Hackett: Observations | ona New-born Australian
Aboriginal Infant. Plates vii. and viit. .. .. 141
LEA, ARTHUR M.: The Clawless and Apparently ‘Claw ese Curculionidae of Australia .. 144
Mocntrorp, C, P.: Aboriginal Stone Structures in South Australia. Plates ix. and x. .. 169
Suearp, H, L., C. P. Mountrorp, and C. J. Hacxerr: An unusual disposal of an Aborig-
inal Child’s Remains from the Lower Murray, South Australia. Plates xi. and xii. .. 173
Jennison, Rev. J. C.: Notes on the Language of the Elcho Island Aborigines .. aelZe
FENNER, De C: Adelaide, South Australia : A Study in Human Geography we eles)
MACKLIN, Eiten D.: A Revision of the “Distyla Complex” of the Genus Casuarina.
Plate xiii, a a = ie 5 he ai A an a ie, MP D57
Prescott, Pror. J. A.: The Reaction of South Australian Soils an es. he ee ay
Rocers, Dr. R. S.: Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia .. re ie .. 291
CLELAND, Pror. J. B.: Australian Fungi: Notes and Descriptions. No. 6 .. ae .. 298
Fauna or Kancaroo IsLtanp, SourH AUSTRALIA—
Hare, H. M.: No. 1, The Crustacea .. = ay ny, at ¥ ty ne 307
Waite, E. R., and Pror. F. Woop Jones. No. 2, The Mammals .. PP iby 21 e22
Warts, E. R.: No. 3, The Reptiles and Amphibians ss if Ss ik oe
HowcuHin, Pror. W.: The Sturtian Tillite in the Neighbourhood of Eden, and in the Hun-
dreds of Kapunda, Neales and English, South Australia. Plates xiv. and xv. .. .. 330
Exsron, A. H.: Revision of the Australian Elateridae. Coleoptera. Part ii. ; 350
TFINLAYSON, H. H.: Observations on the South Australian Members of the Subgenus
“Wallabia.” Plates xvi. to xviii. .. a rte si so ede)
Brack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia. No. 25 R 2-678
Mawson, Sir D.: Geological Notes on an Area along the North-eastern Margin of the
North-eastern Portion of the Willouran Range A oF i. sh i: .. 386
Mawson, Sir D.: The Paralana Hot Spring. Plate xix. a Re £ wes a OO
Manican, C. T.: The Geology of the Willunga Scarp. Plate xx, .. 398
Davin, Pror. T. W. Epcewortu: Note on the Geological Horizon of the Archacocy athinae 410
MISCELLANEA a ni vs a A. is mF, $f aa i .. 414
ABSTRACT OF PROCEEDINGS ne) ah Es a fF a x a i .. 415
ANNUAL REpoRT .. be ie ms ii ae Af 5 6 &, & Re tea
BALANCE-SHEETS ae oe: cr ii , tf es sa Pe ae .. 425
Osituary Notices i ae at “id ti Hy xy i a Ax .» 427
Donations To Liprary .. * a = a A -* sel aes .. 430
List or FELLows.. Ki he Ee ats in % a a x .» 437
APPENDIX—
Field Naturalists’ Section; Annual Report, ete. 4 me .. 440
Thirty-ninth Report of the Flora and Fauna Protection Committee ao ah 5 |
Annual Report of the Shell Collectors’ Committee .. % AS, Bs os .. 442
INDEX me A os ae = es ee Ae i. As a .. 444

Transactions

of

The Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated)

VOL. LI.

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ORCHIDOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA.
By R. S. Rocers, M.A., M.D., FL.
|Read November 11, 1926. ]

Sarcochilus (§ Eu-Sarcochilus) spathulatus, Rogers. n. sp. Species
epiphytica. Radices elongatae, filiformes, flexuosae, glabrae. Caulis brevis,
circiter 1-5 em. longus, omnino vaginis persistentibus truncatis foliorum obtecto.
Folia 4 vel 5, erecto-patentia, falcata vel elliptico-falcata, circa 4-5 cm. longa,
1°0-1°3 cm. lata, ad basin sensim altentuata, acuta. Inflorescentia racemosa, phuri-
flora. Flores parviusculi, odorati, in diametro circa 1°3 cm., perianthio subviridi-
brunneo, labello albido cum notationibus purpureis. Sepalum dorsale erectum
vel subretroflexum, oblongo-ellipticum, obtusum, subconcavum, 3-nervium, circiter
6 mm, longum, 2°75 mm. latum; sepala lateralia obtuse falco-oblonga, concava,
sub iabello porrecta, libera, basibus antico dimidio pedis columnae adnata, 3-
nervia, circiter 7 mm. longa. Petala retroflexa vel patentia, obtuse falcata,
3-nervia, sepalo dorsali subaequalia. Labellum mobile, unguiculatum, apice pedis
columnae adnatum, scpalis lateralibus subaequale, 3-lobatum ; lobi laterales erecti,
spathulati, circiter 4 mm. longi, lobum intermedium et antheram multo superantcs,
apicibus abrupte dilatati; lobus intermedius brevis, pulvinatus, dente incurvo
instructus, antica notationibus purpureis conspicuis ornatus; protuberantia plana,
carnosa, late oblonga, obtusa, cava. Columna brevissima; clinandrium amplum.
Anthera opercularis, abrupte rostrata. Pollinia 4, didyma. Ovarium cum
pedicello gracile circa 6 mm. longum. ;

A small epiphyte. Roots clongated, filiform, flexuose, glabrous. Stems
short, in my specimen about 1-5 cm. long, entirely covered with dry persistent
truncate bases of leaves. Leaves erecto-patent, falcate or elliptic-falcate, acute,
about 4-5 cm. long, 1°0-1°3 em. wide, gradually narrowing towards the base.
Inflorescence racemose, several-flowered, pedicel with ovary about 6 mm. long,
slender. Flowers small, about 1-3 cm. in diameter, with greenish-brown perianth
and cream labellum with purple markings, scented. Dorsal sepal erect or slightly
retracted, oblong-elliptical, blunt, slightly concave, 3-nerved, about 6 mm. long,
2°75 mm. wide; lateral sepals bluntiv falco-oblong, concave, porrect below the
labelium, tree, obliquely adnate to the distal hali of the foot of the column,
3-nerved, about 7 mm. long. Petals retroflexed or spreading, bluntly falcate,
3-nerved, about as long as the dorsal sepal. Labellum attached by a short movable
claw to the tip of the slender column-foot, about as long as the lateral sepals.
3-lobed; lateral lobes large, erect, narrowly oblong or linear-spathulate, about
4mm. long, much longer than the middle lobe and greatly exceeding the anther
in height, abruptly dilated at the apices; middle lobe shart, cushion-like with an

A

2

inturned tooth, its anterior margin convex conspicuously purple and pubescent
with 2 purple vertical tooth-like markings immediately below it; the protuberance
flat, blunt, oblong, hollow. Column very short, not reaching above the middle
of the lateral lobes of the labellum, its foot slender and greatly elongated;
clinandrium capacious. Pollinia 4, attached to the gland by a common rather
long broad caudicle splitting at the polliniar end into two short elastic divisions.

Queensland. Tambourine Mountains, Miss H. Geissmann; epiphytic on
shrubs in company with S. olivaceus, Lindl.; 8th Oct., 1925.

New South Wales. Barrington lops, Rev. H. M. Rupp; October, 1925.

Miss Geissmann, to whom botanists are indebted for many rare plants from
her native mountain, has the honour of having first discovered this charming little
plant. Mr. Rupp discovered it independently in N.S. Wales a weck or two later.

It approaches S. olivaceus, Lindl., very closely, but differs in the relative |
length of the lateral sepals to the labellum and in the site of their attachment to
the column-foot. The shape of the lateral lobes of the lip and the purple mark-
ings on the face of the latter are also characteristic. The specific name has
reference to the spathulate lateral lobes of the Jabellum.

Bulbophyllum Elisae, F. v. M., in Fragm. vi., 120. This species has
very characteristic pseudobulbs, no clear description of which appears to have
becn published, and which are difficult to recognise even in Fitzgerald’s otherwise
excellent illustrations. Though hardly crowded, they are rather closely
approximated on a shortly creeping rhizome, about 1°5-1-75 cm. high, and
1-1-1-3 cm, wide, more or less ovoid in shape, and beset with shortly pointed
tubercles arranged in about 7 somewhat irregular vertical rows with furrows
between them. This appearance is natural to the mature pseudobulb, and is not
due to “wrinkling” following its decline. The single apical leaf is smooth, rather
rigid, blunt, moderately thick, frequently flat, oblong or oblong-elliptical, from
about 5-7 cm. long, and 1°0-1°25 cm. wide.

The inverted flowers are usually, but not invariably secund, green in colour
but acquiring a yellowish tint with age and may be at once distinguished by the
great disproportion in length between the dorsal and lateral sepals (1:4 in my
specimens). The diminutive petals are completely concealed by the sepals. The
short, fleshy, reddish-brown, tongue-shaped labellum forms a marked contrast to
the prevailing colour of the perianth-segments. There is no evidence of any
tendency to “twisting” of the lateral sepals, such as occurs in Cirrhopetalum,
Lindl.

The column is produced upwards at the back of the clinandrium into a tooth,
to which the anther is lightly affixed, and on each side in front the column-wings
terminate above in a short truncate tooth. The stigma lies at the back of a large
deep cavity below the floor of the clinandrium. Pollinia 4, unequal, in 2 pairs.

If this plant is to be retained in Bulbophyllum, Thou., taxonomic difficulties
will arise, and a special section will probably have to be created for it. On the
other hand, Bentham appears to think that it should be excluded from Cirrho-
petalum, Lindl., owing to the absence of some of the essential characters of that
genus.

Some plants received by me from Miss Geissmann, Queensland, bloomed on
some débris from a wood-heap in Adclaide, with unexpected case, and without
care or attention. The identity of the pseudobulbs was thus definitely established.
Fitzgerald states that he has found it growing on “fig trees” in the Blue Mountains.

Queensland. Tambourine Mountains, Miss H. Geissmann.

New South Wales. Dunn’s Creck, near Paterson, Rev. H. M. Rupp.

Gastrodia sesamoides, R. Br. As was anticipated, this plant has at
last been discovered in South Australia. It has also reached me from New
Zealand, and every State in Australia, except the Northern Territory, It has

3

therefore a very extensive geographical range. So far as is known, it is the sole
representative of the genus in the Commonwealth, having covered this vast area
without modification.“? A second species, G. Cunninghamii, Hook f., has alse
been recorded from New Zealand.

Like other members of the genus, our species is leafless and saprophytic.

Its mode of fertilization does not appear to have received consideration,
although in the case of an orchid so widely distributed and so suggestive in
structure, this problem should not present insuperable difficulties in a locality
where it is common.

The inconspicuous flowers are arranged on short pedicels in a loose raceme.
They are brownish-yellow in colour with whitish tips and bell-shaped in form,
owing to the union of the perianth segments. In some living material before me,
the uppermost flowers on the inflorescence are usually erect, the others nodding
with the labellum above (inverted). he lateral sepals are united for a little
more that half their length and are gibbous at the base; the other segments are
more completely united, but their blunt apices are free. ‘Thus a V-shaped space
is left between the free portions of the lateral sepals, affording easy access
between the labellum and column, the apices of which are exactly the same height.
When the flower is erect the labellum falls a little away from the anther; when
the flower nods, it rests ever so lightly against the latter, and in such a way that
it may be easily raised by an insect attempting to enter the bell. It would also
have the effect of causing such a visitor to brush against the granular pollen
extruded between the front of the anther-cap and the smooth anterior margin of
the column summit. In the erect position, any pollen escaping from the anther
must fall downwards on the stigma, which is situated on a sloping surface at the
extreme base of the elongated column. The stigmatic surface is very moist and
this exudate may be attractive to insects. As the column is 1 cm. in length, the
distance between pollinia and stigma is very considerable. The anterior margin
of the column top is horizontal, reflexed against itself, and is not at all viscid.
It does not therefore serve the function of a rostellum. The column itself is flat
and erect but quite hollow throughout its length, being traversed by a wide
stigmatic canal. It is dilated at the summit in both diameters, so as to form a
sort of cup, which receives the anther. It is produced into a blunt tooth at
the back of the anther, and into a similar tooth on each side of the latter in front.
The anther which is lid-like and hemispherical sits on the summit between these
three teeth, and only appears to be attached by a little mucus to the pastertor one.
It is capable of easy removal. It is bilocular, cach cell being incompletely sub-
divided by a short septum from its vault. The pollinia are very granular and
remarkably like those of the genus Prasophyllum. There are 4 masses, united
by a little mucus by their apices just above the anterior margin of the column
summit. Their under surfaces are freely exposed over the pseudo-clinandrium,
which in turn communicates freely with the wide stigmatic canal. There is no
caudicle or definite disc. The pollinia may be extracted en masse with little
difficulty, especially if the tip of the needle be first brought into contact with the
stigmatic exudate.

The labellum is white and movable on a wide claw, which is adnate to the
gibbosity at the base of the sepals. Including the claw, it is 1 cm. long, straight,
erect against the column, ovate-oblong in outline or obscurely 3-lobed, apex
truncate; margins upraised, lacerated or fringed; lamina with a conspicuous
raised yellow central guide-line from apex to the middle of the lamina, where it
bifurcates as far as the base; at the base and on the claw there are two large
undulate or sigmoid yellow callosities.

(1) Bailey described from Queensland a species G. ovata, but this is now known to belong
to the genus Cheirostylis, Bl.

The plant is evidently capable of cross-pollination, but like Prasaphallwimn
gracile, Rogers, it may have other means of effecting this purpose. ,

South Australia. Flinders’ Chase, Kangaroo Island; Prof. F. Wood
Jones, October 31, 1924.

The genus itself, extends northwards to India, Malay Archipelago, New
Guinea, Celebes, Philippines, China, and Japan.

Calochilus imberbis, Rogers, n. sp. Species terrestris, subrobusta,
habitu C. Robertsonii, Benth., circiter 20-37 cm, alta. Caulis glaber, prope
medium bractea elongata subulata. Folitum subrigidum, carnosum, canalicu-
latum, exteriore carinatum, lineari-lanceolatum, ad basin inflorescentiae vulgo
attingens. Inflorescentia raccniosa. Flores 3 vel 4, virides vel subvirides, longe
pediccllati, bracteis 1°3-4-0 cm. longis. Sepalum dorsale erectum, ovatui,
acutum, cucullatum, pluri-nervium, circiter 1:6 cm. longum, 1-0 cm. latum; sepala
lateralia libera, sub labello patentia, divaricata, circiter 175 cm. longa, 6 mi. lata,
pluri-nervia. Petala late triangularia, falcata, erecta, obtuse uncinata, concava,
nervis purpureis parallelis conspicttis ornata, circiter.7 mm. longa, 4 mm. lata.
Labelium petaloideum, sessile, planum, ovatum, acutum, patens, marginibus
integris, concavum, nervis purpureis conspicuis ornatum, circiter 1-1 em. longum,
6 mm. latum, callis nullis. Columna brevis, post basin antherae producta, antice
alis lamina conspicua scutiforme alta conjunctis, utrimque glandula purpurea.
Anthera obtusa, breviuscula.

A rather stout species with the habit of C. Robertsonti, Benth. About 20-37
cm. high. Stem with a long loose subulate bract near the middle. J.eaf some-
what rigid, fleshy, channelled, kecled on the outside, linear-lanceolate, reaching
to about the base of the inflorescence. Inflorescence racemose; with 3 or 4 green
or greenish flowers, on rather long slender pedicels, subtended by a floral bract -
1°3-4:0 cm. long. Dorsal sepal erect, ovate, acute, hooded, plurinerved, about
16 mm. long, 10 mm. wide; lateral sepals free, ovate, acute, concave, spreading
below the labellum, divaricate, about 15 mm. long, 6 mm. wide, plurinerved.
Petals widely triangular-falcate, erect, uncinate, concave, traversed by conspicuous
purple veins, about 7 mm. long, 4 mm. wide. Labellum petaloid, sessile, simple,
ovate, acute, spreading, margins entire, with 7 conspicuous purple nerves, concave,
lamina without calli hairs or other processes, about 11 mm. long, 6 mm, wide.
Column short, produced behind the base of the anther; the wings connected in
front by a high conspicuous shield-like plate. a purple gland at the base of cach.
Anther blunt and rather shorter than in C. Robertsoni, slighly inclined forward.

Victoria. Rushworth, Mrs. Fred. Rich, October 3, 1923; Ringwood,
Mrs. Coleman, October, 1924.

This plant is well separated from other members of the genus by its beardless
labellum, and by the conspicuous plate at the base of the column. The flowers,
though not so regular as in the genus 7helymitra, Sw., show an approach to actino-
morphy which is very unusual in orchids. ‘The lip is distinctly petaloid, but the
lateral petals retain the shape which is common to all known species of Calochilus.
It apparently occurs in considerable numbers and has been found in two distant
localities. Mrs. Rich reports that it was found growing in association with
C. Kobertsontt, Benth., the pelorial state of which it may prove to be the repre-
sentative.

Thelymitra chasmogama, Rogers, un. sp. Species terrestris, gracilis,
glabra, basi scapi vagina seariosa, 25-30 em. alta. Folittm anguste lineare, sub-
tenue, subrigidum, canalictilatum, acutum, circiter 10-12 cm. longum, basi vaginans.
Caulis carneus, subflexuosus vel fere strictus; bracteae 2, subulatae, vaginantes.
Flores circiter 2, carnei, illis 7. carneae, R. Br. similes, libere chasmogami; pedi-
cellt graciles; ovaria subgracilia, teretia; bracteae parvae, acutae. Segmenta
perianthit circiter 1°2-1°3 cm. longa, elliptica. Columna circiter 675 mm. longa,

cucullata; lobi laterales penicillati, lutei, lis 7. luteocrliatae, Pitzg. similes;
cucullus tubiformis, marginibus integris, inter lobos laterales productus. Anthera
obtusa, sub lobis penicillatis apice conspicuo; pollinarium facile deportatum.

A slender glabrous plant with a scariose scale at the base, from 25-30 cm.
high. Leaf with a closely sheathing reddish cylindrical base, about 5 cm. long;
its free lamina greenish-yellow, narrow-linear, about 10-12 cm. long, rather thin
and rigid, acute, channelled. Stem pinkish, with tendency to angulation or nearly
straight; bracts 2, subulate, closely sheathing. J*lowers 2, on slender pedicels,
each subtended by small acute sheathing bract, a floral rudiment at the base of
the uppermost bract; ovaries rather slender, terete; pink in colour, resembling
those of T. carnea, R. Br., opening frecly at very moderate temperature (78° F.) ;
segments of perianth about 1°2-1'3 cm. long, elliptical, the inner ones much wider
than the outer. Column about 6°5 mm. long, the lateral wings carried forwards
and upwards into 2 yellow penicillated processes, as in T. futeeciliata, Fitzg.; the
hood produced forwards into a yellow tube with smooth entire margins. Apex
of anther prominent and blunt, showing distinctly from the side and in front
helow the haittufts; anther-case curried high above the stigma, dehiscing and
leaving the pollen-miasses attached to the viscid disc and partly hidden by the
stigma. Stigma semi-oval, viscid disc in a slot in its upper border. Pollinia
attached directly to the disc without intervention of a caudicle.

South Australia. Golden Grove; Dr. and Mrs. Rogers, October 23, 1921.

This plant may be the plains representative of T. Iuteociliata, Vitzg., which
is a mountain form. It differs from the latter in the shape of the hood, which
is incomplete in Fitzgerald’s plant. It likewise completely differs in the structure
of its pollinarium, which is adapted for cross-pollination, whereas in the hills
form self-pollination is accomplished very early in the bud-stage, and the flawers
very rarely open, and then only for a brief interval. It is easily separated from
T. carnea, R. Br., by the presence of penicillate lateral lobes.

In three plants, all fully expanded, which [ examined, the pollinia were still
in situ, but were easily removed on a needle. Such removal is impossible in
T. luteociliata, Fitzg.

Thelymitra Elizabethae, F. v. M., in Vict. Nat., vii, 1890, p. 116, In
his very bricf and imperfect description of this plant, the Baron refers to it as
“a variety of T. curnea, R. Br., or as a distinct species.” Iam of opinion that it
is a valid species and should be regarded as quite distinct from 7. carnea, R. Br.
It is not included in “A Census of the Plants of Victoria.” 1923, issued by the
Vicld Nat. Club. As the column and appendages dry more or less black, the dis-
crepancies regarding colour details, between the following description (made
from living material) and that of the Baron (probably made from dried material)
will be understood.

A very slender species, 12-18 em. high. Leaf reddish at the base where it
embraces the stem, terete, or linear-ierete and very slightly channelled, 8-9 cm.
long, usually erect. Stem very slender, usually reddish, straight or slightly
flexuose, with 2 closely sheathing subulate bracts. Flower solitary, very rarely 2,
very small, red (not pink), on large clongated ovary; perianth segments about
7 mm. long. Column about 4 mm. long, pink, with a yellow apex; the latter
3-lobed; the middle lobe yellow. imperfectly hooded, arched, slightly denticulate,
with concave anterior margin and smooth dorsum; lateral lobes yellow, oblong,
blunt, smooth on outside, edges minutely dentate, about as high as the anther and
a little higher than intermediate lobe. [ower margins of the column wings united
in front to a much higher level than in T. carnea. Base (only) of the anther
concealed by the stigmatic plate, the apex showing prominently between the lateral
lobes. A self-pollinating species, absorption of the rostellum proceeding in
flowers wuder examination.

6

Victoria. Ringwood; A. J. Tadgell, October 28, 1923.

The rediscovery by Mr. Tadgell, of this plant, which seems to have been lost
sight of for many years, is interesting. It is much more slender than 7. carnea,
with a different leaf and much smaller flowers, the latter being slightly smaller
than those of 7. flexuosa, Endl.

In several specimens staminodia representing anther a, were present.

Microtis orbicularis, Rogers. The range of this orchid has now been
considerably extended by its discovery in the Western State. Until recently it
had only been found in the Myponga district. It is now known to occur also at
Encounter Bay.

South Australia. Encounter Bay, November 3, 1924, J. B. Cleland.

Western Australia. Kenwick, OQ. Sargent, September 10, 1921; High-
bury, growing in water in winter swamp, Col. B. T. Goadby, end October, 1924.

Cryptostylis subulata (Labill.), Reichb. f. Beitr. 15. Synonyms.
—Mataxis subulata, Labill., Pl, Nov. Holl., it, 62, t. 212; Cryptostylis longifolia,
R. Br., Prod. 317,

Diuris fastidiosa, Rogers, n. sp. Species terrestris, humilis, gracillima,
circa 5°5-20 cm. alta. Folia 7 vel 8, setacea, ad 11 cm, longa. Caulis glaber,
basi vagina cylindrica scariosa; bracteae 2, infera laxa elongata subulata, supera
breviore vaginante. Flores 1-3, racemosi, lutei, notationibus badiis ornati; pedi-
celli longi gracillimi; ovarium anguste elongatum pedicellos excedens. Sepalum
dorsale subovale, erectum, subactttum, apice recurvum, basin columnae amplexans,
9-nervium, inferiore dimidio notationibus badiis ornatum, circiter 11 mm. iongum,
6 mm. latum, labellum aequans; sepala lateralia subviridia, linearia, parallela,
patentia, canaliculata, circiter 1:75 cm. longa, segmenta cetera multo excedentia.
Petala 7-nervia conspicue stipitata, circa 1:3 cm. longa, scpalis lateralibus
breviora; lamina elliptica, lutea; stipes badius, cirea 4 mm. longus. [Labellum
verticale vel subverticale, notationibus badiis irregularibus ornatum; 3-lobatum,
bene supra basin divisum; lobi laterales oblongi, obtusi, marginibus cxterioribus
leviter dentati, circa 6 mm. longi, dimidium labelli paululo excedentes ; lobus inter-
medius obtuse spathulatus, inter lobos laterales in unguem abrupte attenuatus,
marginibus integris, circa 11 mm. longtis; unguis lobi intermedii lineis duo late
separatis elevatis pubescentibus parallelis instructus. Anthera obtusiuscula, in
altitudine rostellum et lacinias laterales aequans. Laciniae laterales colummnae
late membranaceac, apice longe subulatae, marginibtts trregularibus.

A small species, very slender, from 5-5-20 cm. high. Leaves 7 or 8, sctaceous,
about half the height of the scape. Stem glabrous with 2 bracts, one loose
elongated subulate, the other much shorter and closely sheathing, a membranous
cylindrical sheath at the base. Flowers racemose, 1-3 in my specimens, on long very
slender pedicels, yellow with dark-brown markings ; ovary narrow elongated ; bracts
loose subulate exceeding the pedicels. Dorsal sepal more or less oval, crect, sub-
acute, recurved at the apex, clasping the column at the base, 9-nerved, brown
markings in the lower half, about 11 mm. Iong, 6 mm. wide, equalling the labellum
in length; lateral sepals greenish, linear, parallel, spreading, channelled above,
about 1°75 cm. long, greatly exceeding the other segments, no tendency to cross.
Petals 7-nerved, markedly stipitate, about 1-3 cm. long, shorter than the lateral
sepals; lamina yellow elliptical, stipes dark brown about 4 mm. long, Labellum
vertical or subvertical, with irregular brown blotches or markings; 3-lobed, the
division well above the base; lateral lobes oblong, blunt, slightly dentate on the
outer margins, about 6 mm. long, slightly exceeding half the length of the labellum;
middle lobe obtuse spathulate, narrowing posteriorly between the lateral lobes into
a claw, margins entire, about 11 mm. long; lamina with 2 well separated pubescent
raised parallel lines on the claw of the middle lobe, succeeded by a single keel to
the apex. Anther rather blunt, equalling in height the rostellum and lateral

46

é

appendages. Lateral appendages membranous, wide with irregular borders and
long subulate apex.
Victoria. Tottenham, W. H. Nicholls. Blooms August and September.

This species approaches D. paluchila, Rogers, very closely in the flower, but
is well separated by its setaceous leaves and lowly habit. Whereas the lateral
scpals are about equal in length to the petals in D, palachila, they are considerably
longer than all the other segments in the new species, and there is no tendency to
cross. Mr. Nicholls states that “all the flowers point to the sky,” i.c., the labellum
ig more or less vertical. From this habit, the specific name is derived. Another
closely related species with setaceous leaves, D. setacea, R. Br., is a native of
Western Australia; but here the lateral sepals and petals are about equal in length,
and the raised lines are closely contiguous; likewise the intermediate lobe of the
lip is trapeziform in shape. From D. palustris, Lindl., another species with
setaceous leaves, there is no difficulty in distinguishing the Tottenham plant, owing
to the extremely short petals and large lateral lobes of the lip mn Lindley’s
plant.

Prasophyllum validum, Rogers, 1. sp. Specimina mea imperfecta. Spica
validissima, ad 17 cm. longa, 28-flora. Flores in genere inter maximos, stblax,
sessiles; bractca parva, acuta, appressa. Sepalum dorsale ovatum, acutum,
incurvum erectum, in floribus senilibus recurvum, 1*3 cm. longum, 4-75 mm. latum ;
sepala laeralia arcuata, patentia, inferne ultra medium connata, apicibus liberis,
circiter 1°35 cm. longa, 5 mm. lata (conjuncta), acuminata. Petala erecta, incttva,
lineari-lanceolata, sepalis angustiora et breviora. [abellum breviter unguiculatum,
in ambitu subovatum, apice subacutum, basi contractum, in dimido inferiore
erectum concavum, deinde horizontale patens; pars callosa conspicue viridis,
elevata, triangularis, prope apicem abrupte terminans; margines albidi, lati, in
dimidio inferiore integri, deinde crenulati, flexu latcraliter contracti. Anthera
badia, apiculata, apice recurva, rostello multo brevior; laciniae laterales oblongo-
falcatae, erectae, lobo basilare satis magno, rostello breviores, antheram aequantes 5
rostellum erectum, subgracile, apice discum conspicuum geranis; caudicula
moderate longa.

Specimens incomplete, stem and leaf absent. Spike very robust, upwards of
17 cm. long, with about 28 flowers. Flowers amongst the largest in the genus,
green, not crowded, sessile, subtended by a small acute appressed bract. Dorsal
scpal erect, ovate, acute, incurved, later recurved, about 1-3 cm. long, 4°75 mm.
wide; lateral sepals spreading, arched, connate to within a short distance of the
apex, about 1°35 em. long, 5 mm. wide (conjoined), acute. Petals erect, incurved,
linear-lanceolate, narrower and shorter than the sepals. Labellum shortly clawed,
somewhat ovate in outline, subacute at tip, contracted at base; in the lower half
erect, concave, thereafter recurved at right angles; callous part conspicuous,
green, triangular from the base, elevated, ending abruptly near the apex ; margins
white, voluminous, entire in lower half, thereafter crenulous, laterally contracted
at the bend. Anther reddish-brown, apiculate, apex retracted, much shorter
than the rostellum; lateral appendages oblong-falcate, erect, with a rather large
rounded basal lobe, shorter than the rostellum, about equal to the anther ; rostellum
erect, rather slender, with a distinct disc at its apex; caudicle moderately long.
Lateral index=82.

South Australia. Melrose, Dr. J. B. Cleland, October 27, 1926.

This plant has the robust habit of P. elatum, R. Br., but with a very different
labellum, The flower in its structure most closely approaches the prunc-coloured
P. constrictum, Rogers, a plant which T received some years ago from Tailem
Bend in this State, but the flowers are very much larger, differ in colour, con-
siderably in the column, and in several important respects also in the labellum.

8

Prasophyllum Hartii, Rogers, n. sp. Species validissima, ad 60 cm. alta.
Folium erectum, inflorescentiam vtilgo excedens. Inflorescentia laxiuscula,
15-30-flora ; bracteae appressae obtusissimae. Flores majusculi, badii, subsessiles ;
ovarium magnum, viride, obconicum, turgidum. Sepalum dorsale erectum, apice
recurvo, ovatum, acutum, concavum, circa 5-nervium, dorso glandulosum, circa
8 mm. longum, 5-25 mm. latum; sepala lateralia elliptico-falcata, acuminata libera,
10 mm. longa, 3 mm, lata, 3-nervia, intus concava, patentia, parallela. Petala
erecta, elliptico-falcata, obtustuscula, 8 mm. longa, 2:5 mm, lata. Labellum
breviter unguiculatum, purpureum, ovatum, acutum, basi ample ventricosum, fere
erectum, marginibus integris latissimis; in parte tertia terminali recurvum; pars
callosa flexu conspicue elevata, hastata, carnosa, perglandulosa. Columna
brevissima, latissima. Anthera badia, ovata, erecta, subplana, obtusiuscula,
rostello brevior. Laciniae columnae Jatissime oblongae, erectae vel incurvac, basi
bilobulatae; apices sublaceratae, truncatae, dente posteriore parvo subulato
instructae, rostellum aequantes, Rostellum cerectum, bifidum, Caudicula
mediocris gracilis.

A very robust species, attaining a height of 60 cm. T.eaf usually exceeding
the inflorescence. Inflorescence not crowded, consisting of about 20-35 reddish-
brown or prune-coloured flowers rather large for the genus. Flowers subsessile,
subtended at the base by a short very obtuse bract. Ovary relatively large, green
and turgid. Dorsal sepal erect, but recurved at the apex, ovate, acute, concave,
about 5-nerved, glandular on the outside, about 8 mm. long, 5-25 mm. wide;
lateral sepals elliptic-falcate, acuminate, free, 10 mm, long, 3 mm. wide, 3-nerved,
concave on the upper surface, spreading, parallel. Petals erect, elliptic-falcate,
rather blunt, 8 mm. long, 2-5 mm. wide. Labellum shortly and broadly clawed,
prtune-coloured; the basal two-thirds more or less erect, voluminous, ventricose,
very concave, the margins very wide rounded and entire; thereafter recurved at
right angles into a triangular acute tip with somewhat crenulate narrow margins ;
callous part conspicuously raised, hastate, with thickened very glandular margins,
extending a little beyond the bend. Column more or less prune-coloured, very
short and wide. Anther dark brown, ovate, erect, rather flat, not apiculate, dis-
tinctly shorter than the rostellum and lateral appendages. Lateral appendages
very widely oblong, erect or incurved; apices truncate, notched or lacerated, with
a small subulate tooth posteriorly; basal lobe rounded about half the height of
anterior lobe. Rostellum erect, bifid. Caudicle slender, of medium length.
Lateral index 80.

Victoria. Bairnsdale, Mr. T. S. Hart, M.A., November 9, 1925.

This prasophyllum is not likely to be confused with any other published species,
Its robustness, colour of flowers, most characteristic and extremely wide labellum
cause it, in my opinion, to stand apart from all other members of the genus. The
contrast between the green ovary and the dark flowers is noticeable even in dried
specimens,

Corysanthes undulata, Cunng. Among some orchidaceous material
received in 1924 from the Rev. Il, M. Rupp, of New South Wales, there was
found an apparently undescribed species of the genus Corysanthes, R. Br.

The investigation of this plant rendered it necessary to refer to Cunning-
ham’s original description of C. pruinosa, which appeared in that short-lived and
long forgotten publication, the New South Wales Magazine, No. 1, 1833, p. 41.
A photostat copy, supplied by the Public Library, Sydney, unexpectedly revealed
the description of another erchid. C. undulata, Cunng., which had evidently been
overlooked by the earlier botanists, and had consequently not passed into current
literature. There was little difficulty in recognising in this the description of the
plant under observation,

In appending Cunningham’s description of this long-lost species, I take the
opportunity of also including that of C. pruinesa, which immediately preceded it,
as the reference appears to be little known to botanists :—

“C. pruinosa labello ecalcarato, intra cucullato, supra dilatato, disco hirsuto,
marginibus inflexis fimbriatis, galea basi attenuata erecta, apice mucronato.”

“C. undulata labello basi bicalcarato. infra cucullato, supra dilatato, mar-
einibus inflexis undulatis.”

The species must probably be regarded as the smallest Australian member
of the genus, as my specimens are hardly as large as C. unguiculata, R. Br.

‘To mect modern requirements Cunningham's brief description should be
amplified as follows :—Leaf variable in size, definitely cordate, subpeltate, upper
surface green, grey below, about 7-12 mm. long, 6-10 mm. wide; an intramarginal
vein fed by others radiating from the insertion of the stem. Flower single,
dark-purplish red except for a whitish disc on anterior surface of labellum, about
10-12 mm, high from leaf to top of galea. Dorsal sepal scaphoid, very concave,
galeate, only slightly concealing labellum, ailenuated towards the base, margins
entire, quite blunt or slightly apiculate at apex, ebout 6-10 mm. long; lateral sepals
vestigial, white, membranous, linear-lanceolate, erect between the spurs, about
3-5 mm. Jong. Petals minute, white, membranous, shorter than the lateral
sepals, about 1°75-2:5 mm. Jong. Labellum voluminous, margins at the base in
apposition forming an erect split tube around the column; rather sharply recurved
about the middle and expanding into a trumpet-shaped orifice with minutcly
denticulated margins; jamina of the recurved part furnished with a large whitish
glandular pubescent boss in the centre; produced on each side at the base into a
short spur. Column very shori, about 2-5 mm. high.

New South Wales. Bulladclah, Rev. H. M. Rupp, June 10, 1924, “grow-
ing in a scrub of Melaleuca nodosa, on hard damp clay.” Mr. Rupp adds that the
species appeared numerous, but difficult to find on account of its small size.

An examination of my specimens shows a tendency to Iebulation of the leaf,
so common in members of this genus,

Caleana Sullivanii, F. v, M., in Metbourne Chemist and Druggist, 1882,
p. 68 Apart from the description by the author of this species, the plant
remained practically unknown until it was rediscovered by Mr. C. W. D’Alton
forty-two years later. As the plant appears to be of extreme rarity, it may be of
interest to supplement the original description from my observation of living
material recently supplied by Mr. D’Alton:—

Plant very slender, with the habit of C. minor, R. Br., reddish-green, entirely
glabrous, about 8-10 cm. high. Leaf rusty-grecn, basal or nearly so, very narrow-
linear, about 4 cm. long, 0-75 mm. wide. Stem erect, reddish-brown, ebracteate.
Flowers inverted, usually 2 or 3, with a floral rudiment within the uppermost
flower-bract ; pedicels slender, about 4-5 mm. long, subtended by a short subacute
and relatively wide bract; unpollinated ovary ellipsoidal, about equal in length
to the pedicel. Sepals subequal, narrow linear in lower half, dilated above, about
6-7 mm. long; dorsal sepal subulate, erect or slightly incurved, subacute; lateral
sepals ercet, their bases entirely adnate to the column-foot. angulated, narrow-
linear, subacute. Petals narrower and rather shorter than the other segments.
Labellum cuneate-ovate, atlached by its rather long and claw-like base to the apex
of the column-foot, without the intervention of a movable joint; the margins
entire; lamina more or less horizontal, about 6 mm. long (including the basal
part), dome-shaped above, tapering into a bare rather blunt triangular apex,
traversed along the middle of the convex surface by more or less numerous sessile
purplish glandular calli arranged in 2-4 ill-defined rows; the lower surface very
concave, Column subequal in height to the laterai petals; refracted almost at
right angles with the ovary; very widely winged as high as the stigmatic base and

10

produced on each side of the latter mto wide blunt membranous lobe; the apex
split transversely into 2 short unwinged stipes, the longer or posterior one bearing
the anther, and the anterior bearing the stigma; produced at the base into a
definite, though not very long foot. Anther erect, stipitate. Stigma large,
ovate, pediccllated, forming a prominent disc in front of the basal part oi the
anther,

Victoria. On Wonderland Range in the Grampians, C. W. D’Alton,
December 19, 1924.

The above locality is within 20 miles of Mount Zero, where it was first dis-
covered in 1882.

Mr. D’Alton found it growing very sparingly, in company with many speci-
mens of C. minor, R. Br., “in mossy crevices on open rock-surfaces, facing the
sun, which they evidently like.”

In C. minor, R. Br., there is no transverse splitting of the summit of the
columm, which is widely winged throughout, the stigma being sessile. It is possible
that this orchid may have been overlooked by collectors owing to its close super-
ficial resemblance to C. minor, with which it is found associated.

Eriochilus cucullatus (Labill.), Reichb. f. Beitr. 27. Synonyms.
-—Epipactis cucullata, Labill., Pl. Nov. Holl, ii, 61, t. 211, £. 2; Eriochilus
autumnalis, R, Br., Prod. 323.

Caladenia triangularis, Rogers, n. sp. Herba terrestris, circa 17 cm. alta.
folium oblongum, hirsutum, subacutum, circa 4°5 cm. longum, 0-7 cm. latum.
Caulis subrigidus, hirsutus, prope medium bractea laxa subulata circa 1°5 cm.
longa. los solitarius, albidus, lineis porphyreis ornatus, in diametro fere 8 cm.;
bractea appressa, circa 1-0 cm. longa; pedicellus cum ovario gracilis, circa 2°7 cm.
longus; segmenta perianthii similia. Sepalum dorsale erectum, in medio 3 lineis
porphyreis longitudinalibus, cirea 3:4 cm. longum, deorsum dilatatum, sub-
breviter acuminatum, apice giandulosum; sepala laieralia patentia, in medio linea
porphyrea, sepalo dorsali latiora sublongioraque. Petala patentia, in medio linea
porphyrea, sepalo dorsale subangustiora. Labellum unguiculatum, in ambitu
triangulare, circa 1-5 em. longum, 1:0 cm, latum, 3-lobatum; lobi laterales sub-
longe pectinati; lobus intermedius sublongus, plus minusve breviter dentatus ;
lamina basi lineis porphyreis radialibus ornata; calli lincarcs biseriati lutei, medium
non transeuntes. Columna circa 1°0 cm. alta, incurva, plus minusve erecta, in
dimidio superiore late alata; basi biglandulosa. Anthera longe mucronata.

Species terrestrial, with the habit of C. Patersonti, R. Br., about 17 cm, high,
Leaf oblong, hairy, subacute, stem with a single loose subulate bract about 1-5 cm.
near the middle. Flower solitary, cream-coloured, with reddish-brown lines,
relatively large, nearly 8:0 cm. in diameter; flower-bract about 1:0-cm. long,
appressed; peclicel with ovary slender, about 2°7 cm. long; segments of perianth
nearly similar. Dorsal sepal erect, traversed by 3 reddish longitudinal lines, about
3-4 cm. long, dilated below, contracting gradually into a moderately short
glandular point as in C. hirta, Lindl.; lateral sepals similar to dorsal sepal, but
wider and rather longer, spreading. Petals similar, spreading, rather narrower
than dorsal sepal, with one red longitudinal line. Labellum clawed, ovate-
triangular in outline, about i:5 cm. long, 1:0 cm. wide; the lateral lobes rather
deeply combed; middle lobe triangular, rather long, subacute, shortly fringed or
dentate ; lamina with radiating red lines at the base; calli linear, orange, in 2 rows,
not extending beyond the middle. Column about 1-0 cm, high, curved, more or
less erect, widely winged above, more narrowly below ; 2 yellow glands at the base.
Anther with long point.

Western Australia. [lighbury, between Wagin and Narrogin; Colonel
B. ‘Tl. Goadby; late September, 1924.

{1

I am indebted for this plant to the kindness of the well-known botanist, Col.
B. T. Goadby, of Western Australia. It belongs to the Section Calonema, but
inasmuch as it has the habit of C. Patersont, R. Br., the perianth segments of
C, hirta, Lindl,, and the biseriate calli of C. filamentosa, R. Br., it is rather difhcult
to arrange in orderly sequence. I think for the present it had better precede
C. hirta, Lindl. It is readily distinguished by its habit and short segmental points
from C. filamentosa, R. Br., on the one hand, and on the other from C. Patersonii,
R, Br., and C. hirta, Lindl., by its calli.

Caladenia lavandulacea, Rogers, n. sp. Species terrestris, gracillima,
citea 22°5 em. alta. Folium angustc lineare, hirsutum, canaliculatum, circa 11 cm,
longum. Caulis badius. gracillimus, hirsutus, supra medium bractea subulata
gracilis, Flos solitarius, lavandulaceus, fere 5 cm. diametro, lineis atro-
lavandulaceig conspicue ornatus. Segmenta perianthii clavata, lavandulacea,
lanceolata, apicibus glandulosis, similia, subaequalia; sepalum dorsale circiter 2°0
cin. longum, retroflexum; segmenta cetera patentia. Labellum gracillime unguictu-
latum, fere transverse ovale, marginibus intcgris; lobi laterales magni, rotundati;
lobus intermedius parvissimus, obtusum, recurvum, atro-purpureum; Jamina nervis
radialibus atro-lavandulaceis conspicuis ornata. Calli atro-pupurei, carnosi,
stipitati, ad basin laminae in linea mediana conferti, prope unguem in laminis
geminis duobus instructi. Columna basi retracta, incurva, diniidio superiore late
alata, basi 2 glandulis luteis. Anthera subluteo-viridis, obtusissima.

A very slender species with the habit of C. Roei, Benth., but differing from
that species in the segments of the perianth, in the conspicuous veining of the
labellum and in the calli of the disc. Height in my specimen, 22-5 cm. Leaf
narrow-linear, acute, hairy, channelled, 11 cm. long. Stem reddish, very slender,
hairy, with a single slender subulate bract above the middle. Flower lavender,
of medium size, nearly 5 cm. in diameter, conspicuously ornamented with radiating
lavender tines. All segments of the perianth with conspicuously clavate darx
glaudular tips, lavender in colour, traversed by darker longitudinal lines, lanceolate,
subequal in length and similar in shape; dorsal sepal about 2 cm. long, retracted
backwards, the other segments spreading; petals rather narrower than dorsal sepal.
Labellur mobile, very slenderly clawed, almost transversely oval in outline, with
entire margins, large rounded lateral lobes; the middle lobe relatively very small,
blunt, dark purple, recurved; lamina with conspicuous radiating dark lavender
veins. Calli dark purple, fleshy, stipitate, compactly crowded along the posterior
half of the middle line of the lamina as in C. Roei, Benth., at the very base of the
lamina the calli enlarged and fused, so as to form 4 plates arranged didymously.
Column at first retracted, then incurved, about 1-0 em. long, widely winged in the
upper half, 2 yellow glands at the base. Anther very blunt, greenish-yellow.

Western Australia. Between York and Narrogin; Miss Winnie Dedman;
end of September, 1926,

The new species, for which I am indebted to Mr. KE. E. Pescott, differs from
C. Roei, Benth., in the colour of the flower; in the clubbing and spreading of all
perianth-segments, which are also subequal in length; in the very great disparity
between the length of the dorsal sepal and the column; in the conspicuous veining
of the labellum and the arrangement of the large calli at the base of the lamina.

In C. Deutchae, Sargent, the leaf is glabrous on the upper surface, but hairy
on both sides in the new species. Also in the former only the lateral sepals are
clavate, the other segments being finely acuminate and the apices of the petals
circinate ; the colour of the flower is greenish-red and the calli are long lincar and
very slender with little tendency to fusion and without the 4 conspicuous fleshy
plates near the claw of the labellum.,

C. lavandulacea, Rogers, and C. Doutchae, Sargent, appear to constitute mem-
bers of a new Section, grouping themselves around (. Reei, Benth., and all

possessing an exceedingly wide, short labellum, with calli arranged in the posterior
half of the median line of the lamina.

Caladenia alpina, Rogers, n. sp. Species terrestris, robustiuscula, circa
12-27 cm. alta. Caulis subruber, hirsutus, unibracteatus. Folium elliptico-
lanceolatum vel falco-lanceolatum, suberectum, ad basin inflorescentiae vulgo
attingens, leviter hirsutum, circa 0°6 cm.-1-0 em. latum. Flores 1 vel 2, raro 3,
vulgo nivei vel carnei; pedicelli graciles, longiusculi; bracteae acutae, Segmenta
perianthii extrinsecus glandulosa, minute hirsuta. Sepalum dorsale late ovaturn,
cucullatum, multo ineurvum, apice obtusum, 1°2 cm. longum, 0-9 cm. latum;
sepala lateralia libera, clliptico-lanceolata, patentia circa 1°5 cm, longa,
0-6 cm, lata. Petala falco-lanceolata, patentia, 1-3 cm, longa, 0-6 cm.
lata. |abellum breviter unguiculatum, obscure 3-lobatum, late ovatum, 0-9 cm.
longum, 0-7 cm. latum, basi ad columnam erectum, versus apicem recurvum ; lobi
laterales obscuri, marginibus integris; lobus intermedius serratus, breviter
triangularis; lamina notationihbus transversis carneis vel punctis ornata; calli
lineares, albi vel flavi, 4-seriati, prope apicem sensim sessiles. Columna sepalo
dorsali obtecta, circiter 0-7 cm. longa, incurva, late alata. Anthera mucronata.

A moderately robust plant for the section to which it belongs, 12-27 em. high,
a cylindrical membranous sheath investing the base. Leaf usually reaching at
least to the base of the inflorescence, elliptic-lanceolate to oblong- or falco-
lanceolate, suberect, sparsely hirsute, ribbed, 5-10 mim. wide, Stem reddish, hairy;
a loose or sheathing acute bract at or near the middle. Flowers usually 1 or 2,
rarely 3; usually pale pink or steely-white; pedicels rather long and slender, sub-
tended by an acute bract, the latter sometimes including a floral rudiment.
Segments of perianth beset on the outside with minute glandular-tipped hairs.
Dorsal sepal broadly ovate, cucullate, very much incurved over the column, blunt
at the apex, about 9 mm. wide, 12 mm. long; lateral sepals free, elliptic-lanceolate,
spreading, about 13 mm. long, 6 mm. wide. Labellum on a short claw. broadly
ovate, about 9 mm. long, 7 mm. wide. partly hidden by the dorsal sepal, crect
against the column in the lower threc-fourths, thereafter recurved; lateral lobes
erect, not well defined, their margins entire except for 2 or 3 small anterior crenu-
lations ; middle lobe shortly triangular, much recurved, dentate or serrate; lamina
with transverse interrupted red or purple stripes or sometimes spotted; calli
linear or golf-stick type, yellow or white, in 4 rows, gradually becoming sessile
and irregular, extending almost to the tip; apex not very acute. Column hidden
by the dorsal sepal, about 7 mm, long, dorsum red-spotted, incurved, rather widely
winged, Anther incumbent, mucronate,

Victoria. Mount Hotham and Mount Bogong, Mr. A. J. Tadgell,
December, 1921, January, 1924; Baw Baws, W. H. Nicholls, January 3, 1925.

New South Wales. Mount Kosciusko, Mr. G. V. Scammell, January,
1924,

Mr. Tadgetl, to whom we are indebted for this alpine species, writes -—“It
is fairly plentiful, but only on ridges or stony rises; sometimes sheltered, but
more often in the open; sometimes 20 to 30 plants together, but usually only
Zor 3. Collected at an elevation of 5,000-5,500 feet.”

Mr. Nicholls, who collected on the Baw Baws, states that the flowers never
remain open for more than 2 days, and that in this station they are always white,
“the petals on the outside with a pale purple line down the centre and very pale
green shading on each side of it, on the inside all segments pure white. Labellum
white execpt for yellow-headed calli and purple transverse markings. Column
white with purple markings, the wings pale green near the stigma. Bracts dark
purple, stem purple. Jeaf dark green.”

The new species approaches very closely to C. cucullaia, Fitzg., and C,
aingustata, Lindl., in both of which, however, the leaf is narrow-linear. From the

13

former it is also to be distinguished by its long slender flower-pedicels, the mark-
ings on the labellum and absence of the fimbriated calli; and from the latter by
its wide blunt and extremely incurved dorsal sepal and by the transverse markings
on the lamina.

Caladenia carnea, R. Br. When we consider the extensive range of this
well-known orchid, throughout the entire eastern half of Australia and as far
north as Java, it is rather remarkable how persistently some of its minor characters
are transmitted, and how otherwise trivial are the variations in regard to form
and colour. Slight differences in the degree of acuteness of the perianth segments
are often observed, and albino forms are not uncommon; occasionally also four
rows of calli are to be found instead of two, but the transverse bars on the
labellum and the markings on the column are rarely absent, and characterise even
allied migrant forms, such as occur in Timor and New Zealand. Perhaps, how-
ever, the most notable variations have reference to size and development. The
two extremes are represented by the pigmy form on the one hand, measuring Irom
3-5 cm. in height, and on the other, the vigorous plant which may attain a height
of 53 em., and perhaps more. Such extreme variations are to be found in my
folders with a considerable degree of frequency, and do not appear to depend
on nutritional factors, as in this State at all events, their occurrence is very
localised and the pigmies are to be found growing in small colonies in the
iminediate vicinity of ordinary individuals, which measure from 10-15 cm. high.

T have received these diminutive forms from other States, and am of opinion
that they, as well as the giant forms, are sufficiently important to be recognised
as varieties,

C. carnea, Rk. Br. var. pygmaea, Rogers, n. var. An extremely slender
plant, irom 3-5 cm. high, with flowers much smaller than in the type.

South Australia. Scott’s Creek, Dr. and Mrs. Rogers, November 13, 1908.

Victoria. Healesville, Mrs. Coleman and Mr. Williamson, November 2,
1923; Mr. J. B. Howie, October 10, 1926.

Tasmania. Flinders Island, Dr. C. S. Sutton, November, 1912.

C. carnea, R. Br., var. gigantea, Rogers, n. var. A sparsely hairy plant,
attaining a height of 53 cm., flower larger than in the type, perianth segments
rather acute.

New South Wales. Bulladelah, Rev. H. M. Rupp, September, 1924.

14

ABORIGINAL ROCK PAINTINGS, SOUTH PARA RIVER,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By Norman B, Trnpare and Harorp L. SHEARD.
[Read November 11, 1926.]
Pirates I. anp II.

This paper places on record several relics of aboriginal art in rock shelters
along the course of the South Para River between Yatalunga and Gawler.

We recently examined the river for a distance of 10 miles, in company with
Mr, P. Stapleton. Many shelters were noticed, four of which contain paintings,
the pigments used being red, white, and black only. Two of this series of shelters,
namely, the upper and lower ones at Yatalunga, have already been recorded by
the late Sir Edward Stirling® and by the late Mr. F. R. Zietz.. The Upper
Yatalunga shelter is situated on the northern bank of the river in a conspicuous
position at the lower end of a river flat about 4 chains above the junction of
Tenafeate or Stars’ Creek (Section 1786, Hundred of Barossa). Most of the
paintings have been figured by Stirling, but several are shown again for comparison
with new discoveries. Text figs. 14-21 represent tracings (reduced by camera
lucida to about one-sixth natural size); No. 21, in white pigment, is rather
indefinite and may be due in parts to weathering action.

On the floor, which had been previously disturbed, were found several
hammer stones showing definite but slight signs of use. Zietz (I.c.) records
having found emu egg-shells and the jaw of a bandicoot in the floor of one of
the shelters at Yatalunga. The talus in front of the shelter yielded emu egg-
shells and several mussel shells (Unio angasi). A few quartz chippings were
found here: one example, although crude, was evidently intended for a round
scraper. Interspersed with the earthy débris were regular layers of charcoal,
going down at least 2 feet, showing that the slope had been used for camping
purposes on various occasions and had not becn previously disturbed.

The lower shelter is about 150 yards down stream on the same bank.
Entrance is gained up a steep slope of about 25 feet. Detritus and large slabs
of slate have fallen from the roof, probably in recent years, so that no paintings
now remain in the eastern half of the shelter. Pl. i., fig. 1, shows many of the
paintings. Reduced tracings are shown in text figs. 1-13. Stirling figured only
four of these, namely, Nos. 3, 4, 9, and 13, and we disagree with the rendering
of some of these.

Text fig. 1 shows a complicated group of designs executed partly on a black
background; the figures being in black and red outlined in white. Several
striking examples are noticeable, the central figure being that of a bird, probably
anemu. The bird is partially framed by a painting having some resemblance to
a snake, and there is a boomerang design on the other margin, The white area
in the centre represents a weathered portion of the rock. The application of the
white over black has tended to flake off the whole of the pigment, leaving the
white lines in part represented by the bare rock surface. Text fig. 2 is shown in
its proper position to the right of fig. 1. The characteristic circle and line, the
latter either curved or straight, is repeated several times in this and other caves.
Text fig. 5 is situated on the roof of the small hole shown on the extreme left of

a) Stirling, Sir E., Trans. Roy. Soc. S$. Austr., 26, 1902, pp. 208-211, pls. 3, 4.
(2) Zietz, F. R., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 41, 1917, p. 667.

‘Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate I.

Trans, and Proc. Roy. Soe. S. Austr., 1927.

Vol.

es

LI., Plate II,

Gillingham &

Cw

Limited,

Printers,

Adcelanle.

17

pl. i, fig. 1. Text fig. 6 probably represents a bird track or foot. Figs. 7 and 8 are
the more definite pictures on a badly weathered portion. Text fig. 10 represents
a serics of nearly vertical parallel lines which are alternately red and white and
are crossed by at least two red bands. Text fig. 11, which is badly weathered,
may represent a human foot or track. Text fig. 12 shows another example of
the circle with an appendage.

The third shelter is situated about three miles from Yatalunga on the
left or northern bank just below the big ox-bow bend_ near Waters’
homestead (Section 1033, Hundred of Munno Para). The bank here
is somewhat precipitous, and the shelter, which is well hidden from
casual observation, opens out on to a ledge about 30 feet above the stream (pl. il.,
fig. 1). It is 20 feet wide, 7 feet high at the entrance, with an overhang of
about 10 feet. Only seven drawings occur here, but at Icast three are well pre-
served and remarkably vivid in colour. Text fig. 22 has the form of a circle
with a long appendage; it is executed in red outlined with white, and contrasts
strongly with fig. 23, which is in close proximity. The latter is of similar form
to text fig. 6, but is unusual in being black. ‘Text fig. 24 is snake-like in outline
and similar in some respects, including Icngth, to that shown in text fig. 1. Figs.
25 and 26 are further examples of the circle and line; both are badly preserved
and the outlines are approximate. Text fig. 27 is much faded and has been
traced from a sketch. It represents a circle with two V-shaped appendages
above four nearly vertical short strokes.

From the floor of this shelter Mr. P. Stapleton dug several quartz chippings,
including one very imperfect scraper; there were numerous river pebbles inter-
spersed with charcoal in the débris, and, as in the Yatalunga sheltcrs, Unio shells
were common.

‘The fourth shelter is within two miles of Gawler, on the northern bank;
four similar cavities occur here, but only one contains designs. These are indistinct
and only red ochre patterns are visible; the camera shows, however, that formerly
they were outlined in white, as in the previous examples. Pl. i., fig. 2, shows the
best preserved portion of the design, and text figs. 28-31 the whole of the work.
At one end there is a plain red circle. Text figs. 28, 30, and 31 are connected by
continuous red lines, which fade away to the right. Fig. 30 may represent the
framework of a native hut, and the horse-shoe shaped marks of fig. 29 are similar
to those said to represent wurleys or huts, in northern rock paintings.

Little information is available regarding the natives who inhabited the
locality. The Wirra tribe, or local group of the Adelaide tribe, ranged over the
country between Angaston, Lyndoch, Port Adelaide, Yatala, and Tea-Tree Gully,
and its members were probably responsible for the rock paintings. The name
Yatalunga is probably derived from the words yertala unga, meaning “flood
place,” and the name Yatala has evidently a similar derivation.

About three miles above Gawler there is a camp site where a few crude
hammer stones and quartz chippings were found.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES I. ann I.

Prare I.

. Lower rock shelter at Yatalunga.
Fie. 2. Reck paintings near Gawler.

Loa
1
=

Prater IL.

Tig. 1. Waters’ rock shelter viewed from up stream.
Rock paintings at Waters’ shelter.

=
Lire)
ho

ABORIGINAL ROCK CARVINGS AT DEVON DOWNS, RIVER MURRAY,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By Harorp L. SHearp.
[Read November 11, 1926.]
Prates III. ro V,

This paper records a series of aboriginal carvings on the Lower Murray.
With the single exception of a brief note by Hale and Tindale nothing has
previously been reported from this locality, but in my opinion a thorough search
of the chffs between Mannum and Swan Reach would reveal further examples
of this type of aboriginal art.

The situation of the rock shelter herein described is about the border-line of
the Hundreds of Nildottie and Forster, on the eastern bank of the Murray, and
may also be located from the river immediately opposite Lehmann’s Landing.
Approaching by road it is about 12 miles from Swan Reach following down
stream. An entrance can be made from the road to the river flats except at
flood times and a car may be driven to within a chain of the rock shelter. There
is a slight bend in the river and the main channel leaves the cliffs at this point.
The shelter is at the extreme end of a series of river flats, and a little further
up stream the cliffs rise sheer from the water.

The shelter is the result of erosion, probably when the river was at a higher
level, and extends to 70 feet in length, with an overhang of 16 feet in the deepest
place. The floor to a depth of 3 feet is composed of ashes from old fires and a
small amount of detritus from the cliff. This on being partially examined was
found to contain quantities of bivalve shells (Unio angast), kernels of the native
peach (Santalum acuminatum), bones of the Murray cod (Oligorus macquari-
ensis), many broken fragments of burnt stones, and small animal bones. One
crude upper millstone and a few rough flakes were observed, these being the only
native implements discovered. The height from the present surface of the floor
to the roof varies from 3 feet to 7 fect. The whole of the roof and the walls
are smoke-blackencd, and a grey tinge ascends right to the top of the cliffs. ‘This
smoke stain, while often much weathered, is a good guide to aboriginal occupa-
tion; wherever the cliffs show blackened markings, the ground beneath shows
signs of former aboriginal habitation.

Pl. iti., fig. 1, shows the shelter from the north, and in fig. 2 the camera was
facing directly into the cave in a north-easterly direction. The rock is a soft
fossiliferous limestone of Miocene age, and may be easily scratched or carved
with any hard implement. Portions of the original surface most exposed to the
weather have been eroded, and in several places complete intagliogs have been
recently hewn from the rock. Iverywhere within reach has been carved by the
natives, the marks varying from mere scratches to cuts from 1 inch to 2 inches
wide and about an inch deep. The work appears to have been executed many
years ago, and the natives at present at Swan Reach on being questioned had
no knowledge of the place.

Pew of the intaglios are complete pictographs, but are mostly connected one
with the other by long curving lines which radiate in all directions. P1. iv., fig. 1,

a) Hale, H. M,, and Tindale, N, B., Records of South Australian Museum, ni, No. 1,

1925, pl. iv., fig. 4.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate III.

|

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927.

Vol. LI., Plate IV.

Gillingham

&

Co.

Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Frans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr, 1927. Vol, LL, Plate VY.

Gillinvham & Co. Limited, Mrinters, Adeliaide

19

shows a portion of the ceiling about 6 feet by 4 feet, and is typical of much of
the work. A good idea of proportion will be gained by a comparison of size
with the nests of the Fairy Martin (Petrochelidon ariel) shown in this plate.
Natural holes and excrescences have frequently been used and accentuated in the
designs. Series of short parallel strokes and rows of round holes were observed
in several places, as scen in pl. v., fig. 2. The intaglio in pl. iv., fig. 2, is situated
on the cliff face near the centre of the shelter. The irregular circle therein is
154 inches in diameter with radiating lines which vary from 4 inches to 6 inches
in length. The deep cut on the right of this plate is due to a recent abandoned
effort to hew away a portion of the rock. PI. v., fig. 1, is located at the southern
end of the shelter, and is so placed as to extend from the cliff face to right under
the roof, and then continue in the usual curved lines. The actual pictograph
measures 39 inches in length, and is a serics of lines and holes with a decided
node about the centre. This intaglio may be clearly seen in pl. iii, fig. 2, at the
top and a little to the left from the centre of the plate.

The design shown in pl. v., fig. 2, is situated beyond the southern end of the
shelter on the cliff face, and was partially outlined in chalk for the photograph.
‘The central figure measures 8 inches, the circle therein 34 inches in diameter, and
a hole bored in the centre 3 inches deep. The vertical lines on each side measure

from 6 inches to 9 inches in length and terminate in small round holes.

Carvings fern-like in outline similar to those previously reported by Hale and
‘Vindale [see footnote (1)] were also observed at this place.

‘he cliff face was examined on both the north and south sides from the
shelter. On the northern side many scratchings and holes were observed, bird
tracks being prominent; but the work here was more exposed to the weather,
and only a few places remained where large surfaces were complete; these did
not appear to present the care and ininuteness of detail noticed within the shelter.
Fires had been frequent and the old rock surfaces were smoke-stained.

On the southern side the cliff retreats from the river and about 3 or 4 chains
from the shelter merges into a rough weathered limestone boulder formation.
Two other cavities were examined here, but these were so situated as to be more
exposed to the weather, and very little of the original surface remained. A few
scratchings were observed but no carvings of importance. Both these shelters
contain huge beds of ashes about 3 feet deep, bul a superficial search revealed
nothing of consequetice.

On the opposite side of the river sand drifts have exposed old camp sites
and burial grounds where skeletal remains were observed.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES IIL to V.

Prate III.

Fig. 1. Rock shelter opposite Lehmann's Landing, laoking south.
Fig. 2. Interior of rock shelter opposite Lehmann’s Landing.

PrLate IV.
Fig. 1. Portion of roof of shelter.
Fig. 2. Pictograph on cliff face.

Priate V.
Fig, 1. Pictograph on roof of shelter.
Fig. 2. Pictographs on wall of shelter.

20

PETROGRAPHIC NOTES ON TONALITE FROM THE PALMER DISTRICT
AND BIOTITE-NORITE FROM SOUTH BLACK HILL.

By A. R. Arperman, B.Sc.
(Communicated by C. T. Madigan. )

[Read November 11, 1926.]

The rocks described in this paper occur within the County of Sturt. South
Australia. As the characters of the rocke are very unusual among the igneous
rocks of the southern part of this State, they were deemed worthy of chemical
analysis and petrographical description.

I. In Section 380, Hundred of Finnis, a whale-back outcrop of light-coloured
igneous rock of syenitic facies may be observed adjacent to the main road, roughly
half-way between the townships of Mannum and Palmer. The same rock may be
traced for a considerable distance south of this locality (the outcrops being very
poor), and occurs in a much more prominent manner at a watertall in Reedy
Creck, Section 533, Hundred of Finnis. Owing to the geographical position and
unusual mineral composition of this rock, when compared with the neighbouring
granites at Palmer and Mannum, notes on the petrographical character should
be of interest.

In Section 380, whence the specimens, here described, were obtained, the
outcrop measures roughly 40 yards across, and shows definite jointing in a north
and south direction.

When examined in the hand specimen the rock appears coarsely holo-
crystalline of somewhat porphyritic habit. Large white felspars, often tabular,
are prominent, and, with the black ferromagnesian minerals, give the rock a hand-
Some appearance. Granular quartz seems to show the effects of crushing. The
ferromagnesian minerals are of two distinct kinds, which are of about equal
importance. Black biotite mica may readily be recognised on account of its
cleavage and lustre, but well-formed, tabular crystals of black hornblende,
measuring up to half a centimetre, are equally prominent. Small crystals of a

red colour, resembling sphene, are occasionally visible.

MicroscopicaL DESCRIPTION.

The rock is coarse and holocrystalline, and the crystal components are of
very variable size. The felspars are by far the most plentiful minerals present
in the rock.

Plagioclase is dominant over potash felspar, and being dusty, is decomposed
to a varying extent. The twinning is almost entirely on the albite law, although
occasional Carlsbad twins are present. Extinction angles determined in a
plane perpendicular to O10 give the composition of the plagioclase as Abos
Ange, Ot a normal andesine. The refractive index is higher than that of Canada
Balsam. The composition of the plagioclase seems to be constant throughout
the section.

Orthoclase is present but to a far less extent than the plagioclase. Many
sections of the former have suffered extreme kaolinisation. The ortheclase is
always present in subhedral or anhedral forms, and the dimensions of the indi-
viduals are less than those of the plagioclases.

Microcline is represented by a few small crystals which show the char-
acteristic cross hatching, due to heth pericline and albite lamcllae.

21

After the felspars quarts is the most important mineral in the rock. It
occurs irregularly in grains and generally shows the effects of severe strain, the
extinction being shadowy. For the most part the quartz appears to be inter-
stitial, but it very rarely shows a graphic intergrowth with the plagioclase iclspar.

Of the ferromagnesian minerals biotite and green hornblende are present in
approximately equal proportions.

The biotite shows no particular orientation and is present in its usual flaky
form. The pleochroism is normal and strong. In some sections the biotite has,
in part, undergone change to chlorite, which is light green and_pleochroic,
and retains the micaceous cleavage. Pleochroic haloes, surrounding minute
crystals of apatite, are occasionally to be observed in the cleavage flakes.

Primary. green hornblende is present in euhedral or subhedral crystals, which
show the cleavage net characteristic of hornblende, and also marked pleochroism.
Occasional crystals are twinned. This mineral appears to have been very resistant
to decomposition, but a very small amount of chlorite, evidently derived from the
hornblende, may occasionally be found connected with that mineral.

Litaniferous iron occurs in irregular masses and is evidently a primary con-
stituent of the rock, although a small amount seems to be associated with the
chloritization of the ferromagnesian minerals. ‘that the iron is tilaniferous is
proved by the change to leucoxene.

Apatite as an accessory mineral is plentifully distributed, both as irregular
grains and rods, and occasional hexagonal crystals. Very often the apatite is
enclosed by biotite or hornblende.

Sphene is a notable constituent. In the hand specimen it appears in reddish
crystals, with occasional wedge-shaped outlines. Microscopically, it is present in
subhedral fragments, with occasional euhedral crystals of a light-brown colour. A
weak pleochroism is shown.

The Chemical Analysis.

Percentage. Percentage.
Silica (SiO, ) wee ne 63°88 Water (combined ) we we O45
Alumina (Al,O,) ..0 .. .. 16°87 Water (hygroscopic) .. .. 0°21
Ferric oxide (FesO,) .. .. 1°99 Carbon dioxide (CO,) .. None
Ferrous oxide (FeO) .. .. 2°96 Titanium dioxide (TiO,) .. 0°86
Magnesia (MgO) fe San ere Phosphorus pentoxide (P,0,) 0°23
Calcium oxide (CaO) .. .. 5°18 Manganous oxide (MnQ) .. 0°07
Soda (Na,O) ep are se) 2°OG ——
Potash (K,O) rs 1-61 Total .. .. 99°71

The specific gravity is 2°792.
Lhe Nori,

Percentage.

Quartz te WE Gas coe, <2d066 Q = 21:66 eee
Orthoclase .. .. .. .. 9°45 ) ees
Albite ha ire a ka Bip Fo == 64-00 5 BP 00%,
Anorthite .. oo... .. .. 23°63 rf 7

Diopside oe (ae SE may 0-89 } > @,

Hypersthene ee ee FSA Pee aay | Hunt Greae
Magnettié 12 4: a: (4: S02 43 af — die , ee
Tides) OE an Mem Re green me eS UE? 13-46%
Apatite pega cee pene “ONS A= 0°34 |

Water eR gee” E66

Total .. 1. 99°78

22

In the C.I.P.W. classification, the rock is therefore IL., 4, 3, 4. The mag-
matic name is Tonalose.
Discussion of the Analysis.

As might have been expected from the general nature and appearance of the
rock, it is not quite acid enough to be classed in the Acid Group. ‘The high per-
centage of lime, a considerable quantity of which evidently forms part of the
hornblende, and the low potash content, gives the dominance of calc-alkali felspar
over potash felspar. Titanium has a high percentage, but with a rock containing
notable amounts of titaniferous iron and sphene, this should be expected.

Vrom the chemical nature of the rock, the dominance of andesine felspar
over the potash varieties, and the presence of notable quantities of biotite and
hornblende, the rock must be classed with the quartz diorites, and may thus be
referred to as a Tonalite,

Il. In Section 240, Hundred of Ridley, at the locality known as the South
Black Till, a stock of biotite norite forms a very prominent feature of the
landscape. This rock occurs as an inlier in the surrounding Tertiary and alluvial,
and unfortunately no contact rocks can be observed. The character of the rock
over all the outcrop is very uniform, and only one specimen (not in situ) was
collected which showed any variation from the main mass.

The mineralogical character of the rock has been briefly described by Dr. C.
Chewings, but owing to the striking nature of the rock it deserves more detailed
investigation.

When examined macroscopically the rock is coarsely crystalline, melanocratic,
and of hypidiomorphic texture. Minerals distinguishable are (1) black pyroxene
and iron ore, (2) telspar, (3) biotite mica.

Microscopical Examination,

The most plentiful mineral in the rock is the pyroxene diallage. It is of a
light-green colour with weak pleochroism, and contains numerous inclusions of
magnetite which are mostly arranged parallel to the cleavage. Also included
in the diallage are small fragments of biotite and rods of apatite. Chlorite is
present as a decomposition product.

Aivpersthene is very nearly as plentiful as diallage and shows a distinct pink
to green pleochroism. ‘his mineral has been somewhat decomposed to a fibrous
ageregate of bastite. Inclusions of magnetite, apatite, and biotite are common.
The hypersthene evidently crystallised before the diallage. It occasionally shows
lamellar twinning due to intense strain.

Of the felspars plagioclase is predominant, and the maximum extinction
angles observed on a plane normal to 010 give the composition as a labradorite,
This mineral exhibits the usual polysynthetic twin lamellae, following the albite
law.

Carlsbad twins are also of frequent occurrence. ‘The effects of strain are
shown by bending of the albite lamellac, and the development of “secondary
twinning.” The dusty appearance of the felspars is due to slight decomposition,

Orthoclase is mainly interstitial and gives a shadowy extinction. It contains
numerous inclusions and was the last mineral to crystallise,

Biotite is present in its usual platy form, but occasional radiating and plumose
aggregates are visible in the section. The biotite is intimately associated with, and
mostly includes, opaque iron ore. The pleochroism is very strong, and some

(2) Judd, O.J.G.S., 1885, pp. 363-366.

23

Ilmenite, in large grains, is very plentiful, and is included in most of the
ferromagnesian minerals. It exhibits decomposition to leucovene. Ilmenite was
probably the first mineral to crystallise.

Apatite in subhedral crystals is a very frequent accessory.
This description agrees in almost every respect with that of Chewings.

The Chemical Analysts.

Percentage. Pereentage.

Silica (SiO3) hn. Mls, eat OBA Water (hygroscopic) .. .. 0°22
Alumina (Al,O,).. 0 .. .. 14°25 Carbon dioxide (CO, ) .. None
Ferric oxide (FesO,) .. .. 2°55 ‘Titanium dioxide (TiO,) .. 1°70
Ferrous oxide (FeO) .. .. 7°44 Phosphorus pentoxide (P,O,;) 1°24
Magnesia (MgO) ye oan Sos Ferric disulphide (I'eS,) .. Trace
Calcium oxide (CaO)... .. 8°87 Manganous oxide (MnO) .. 0°15
Soda (Na,O) Cioe “arn tee ZOO

Potash (K,O) we te ZF 96 —
Water (combined) , 0-19 Total .. 100-48

The specific gravity is 3:128.

The Norm.

Percentage.

Quartz oe tesa te eee ORO O= 3:84 He .
Orthoclase .. .. .. .. 17°79 i i. } Salic Minerals=
Albite Oe be AOS Hie 7 S8- 61-22%,
Anorthite .. .. .. .. 18°63
Diopside .. .. «.. «. 1456 3 is
Hypersthene (oe ee 14557 5 P= 29°13 _ ,
Ilmenite eee a ee Ce ; pa ape Minerals
Masnefite ce i.e a SL. 2) M= 6°90 38-72%
Apatite ubeNes we ee, 2209 A = 2°69
Water ty eas ee ee Oe

Total .. .. 100°35

In the C.LP.W. classification the rock is therefore III, 5, 3, 3.
The magmatic name is Shoshonose-Kentallenose.

Discussion of the Analysis.

The analysis shows several points of interest, of which the most notable
feature is the comparatively high potash content. ‘This may, however, be
accounted for, firstly, in the orthoclase, and secondly, in the biotite, which may
contain up to 10 per cent. of potash. Silica appears higher than would be
expected in such a rock, and the high percentages of titanium and phosphorts
are also notable. :

AN ENUMERATION OF THE VASCULAR PLANTS OF
KANGAROO ISLAND.

By J. B. Crerann, M.D., and J. M. Brack.
(Orchids by R. S. Rocrrs, M.A., M.D.. F.L.S.)

[Read April 14, 1927.

The present contribution is a Ust with localitics of the recorded vascular
plants of Kangaroo Island, with the nomenclature brought up to date so as to
conform with the new Flora of South Australia now nearing completion, and
with the addition of a number of species (about 79 in number) not hitherto
recorded for this locality, No attempt is made in this paper to discuss the
peculiarities or affinities of the plants of this region. This list is merely the
“jumping-off ground” brought up to date for workers on the ecology and other
aspects of the vegetation.

‘fo the late Professor Ralph Tate we owe most of our systematised know-
ledge of the plants of Kangaroo Island. He, Dr. R. S. Rogers, and the late
J. G. O. Tepper have been its most extensive botanical collectors. The work
of our predecessors has been incorporated in this list. It is therefore advisable
to show what this work was and how we have utilised it. Our starting point
has been Professor Ralph Tate’s paper on “The Botany of Kangaroo Island” in
these Trans., vi., 1882-3, pp. 116-171. He has summarised the work of his
predecessors, Robert Brown, the Raudin Expedition, Messrs. Sealey, Bannier,
and Lleuzenroeder, and Mr. F. G, Waterhouse. These workers were responsible
tor recording 160 species of plants. Tate’s first list brought the total up to 350
with 40 additional introduced species. To these Trans, for 1888-9 (xii., pp. 62-66)
Tate contributed “A Revision of the Flora of Nangarvo Island and other Botanical
Notes relating thereto,” which brought the known native species to 513. Tate’s
records, including those of his predecessors, appear in this paper thus (R. T.),
the name of his predecessor where necessary appearing in brackets after the
locality.

Tepper contributed three papers on this subject to these Trans., wis., vii.,
1883-4, pp. 50-53; ix., 1885-6, pp. 114, 115; and x., 1886-7, pp. 288-292. The
species were identified for him by Baron von Mueller. ‘late revises some of the
determinations in his second paper. Tepper’s records appear as (Tepper).
Tepper’s extensive collection of plants, including many of those gathered on
Kangaroo Island, is now in the possession of the Field Naturalists’ Section of
this Society, to whom we are indebted for permission to examine them. Localities
unrecorded otherwise and based on these herbarium specimens appear as (‘Tepper
Herb.).

The late |. H. Maiden, in “A Contribution to the Botany of South Australia”
(these Trans., xxxii., 1907-8, pp. 252-258), gave a numbcr of localities, and a
few new records, and described a new species. (J. H. M.) indicates this source.
Dr, R. 5. Rogers (these Trans., xxxiii., 1908-9, pp. 11-17) brought the knowledge
or the orchids of the Island up to date and described two new species. ‘lo him
we are indebted for revising the list of orchids and supplementing the published
list with his records since that date. We are also greatly indebted to him far
allowing us to use his typescript, “Flora of Kangaroo Island,” with its additional
MSS. notes, in compiling the present list. Apart from the orchids, bis extensive
collections on the Island were in many cases identified either by Kaiph Tate or
by J. Hl. Maiden. (R.S. R.) indicates this source of information.

25

One of us (J. M. B.) has recorded and described various species and varieties
of plants from the Island in his “Contributions to the Flora of South Australia”
appearing in these Trans. ‘These, together with plants collected by Prof. T. G.
B. Osborn, one of us (J. B. C.), and other collectors, which have been identified
by J. M. B., are responsible for records of the locality “Kangaroo Island” in the
new “Flora of South Australia,” in those cases where such species have not
previously been recorded for Kangaroo Island by others. We are specially
indebted to Prof. Osborn, who has made extensive collections of plants on I’linders
Chase, at the western end of the Island, in his study of the ecological aspects of
the flora, for enabling us to make use of his material. Much of his collecting is
embodied in the new Flora, but further additions of localities appear under his
name. This list will, we hope, aid him in his special studies. One of us (J. 3. C.)
has had two opportunities of collecting in the western half of the Island—with
Dr. R. S. Rogers in November, 1924, and with Dr. A. Lendon in March, 1926.
This has enabled a number of localities to be tabulated, has added about 52 species
of native plants, as well as 21 species of introduced plants, to the flora, and has
resulted in the discovery of two, probably threc, new species, necessarily, as yet
at least, confined to Kangaroo Island. The following list shows that the vascular
plants of Kangaroo Island now total :—

653 native species, of which 8 are doubtful, with 19 additional varieties, and
72 introduced plants, with 1 additional variety. Introduced plants are indicated
by *, new records (mostly found by one of us) by x or f. Ags, in the much smaller dis-
trict of Encounter Bay, nearly 530 native species are now known to occur, it may
be considered certain that many more native species than the 653 included in this
list will be eventually found on Kangaroo Island. We might hazard the guess
that further exploration will reveal a total of about 750.

The localities given for a particular species, and the number of collectors
who have recorded it, are in a measure indicative of its geographical distribution
and abundance. In a number of cases, it will be seen that a plant has only been
recorded as having been found on one occasion. This usually indicates that the
species is rare, perhaps nearing extinction, unless in some of the earlier records
it be due to a misdetermination.

In the present paper, there has been a division of labour between the authors.
Dr. R. 5. Rogers has kindly revised the orchids, J. B. C. has been responsible
for the gathering together of previous records which have then been revised
by J. M. B. The former's collections on the Island, totalling approximately 350
native species (including varieties) and 39 introduced, have been in great part
examined by the latter. New records have thus passed under the view of the
second author.

PLANTS FoR KanuARvo ISLAND.

x, new record; *, introduced.
FInteaLes.,

xLindsaya linearis, Swartz—(J. B. C.) Rocky River, telegraph line to Cape
Borda.

Adiantum aethiopicum, T.—(R. Brown) K.I.; (CR. T.) Stun’ Sail Boom
River; (Tepper Herb.) Karatta (13/11/86) ; (R. S. R.) Western
River: (J. B.C.) S.W. River.

Chetlanthes tenuifolia, Swartz —(R. T.) American River, North Dudley Pen-
insula. Deep Creek, Hog Bay River, De Mole River; ({. B.C.) Vivonne
Bay.

Pteridium aquilinwm, (1.) Kubn.—(R. 1.) Western Cove, American River,
Harriet and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers, De Mole River; (J. B. C.) near
Kingscote, Middle River, Ravine des Casoars.

26

Blechnum discolor, (Willd.) Keys-—(R. T.) Stun’ Sail Boom River, De
Mole River.

B. capense, (L.) Schlecht —(R. T.) Stun’ Sail Boom River; (Tepper Herb.)
Ravine des Casoars; (J. B. C.) Ravine des Casoars.

Gymnogramme leptophylla, (L.) Desv—(R. T. as Grammiitis leptophylla)
Deep Creek and gullies on N.W. coast of Dudley Peninsula.

?xGleichenia circinata, Swartz, doubtful records only——(J. B. C.) Mouth of
Breakneck River (teste Mr. May), young plants (7) at the ford between
Vivonne Bay and Rocky River.

Schizaea fistulosa, Labill—(Tepper) Head of 5.W, River.

Ophioglossum coriaceum, A. Cunn.—(R. T. as QO. wulgatum, L.) Karatta
(coll. Tepper); (Tepper Herb.) Capsize Creek (4/11/86).

LyCoPODIALES.

Lycopodium laterale, R, Br-—(R. T.) Head of South-west River (coil.
Tepper).

Phylloglossum Drummondii, Kunze—Vlinders Chase, swamp near Rocky
River (T. G. B. O.).

Selaginella Preissiana, Spring—(R. T.) Murray Lagoon and Karatta (coll.
Tepper).

Isoctes Drummondii, A. Br—Flinders Chase, swamp near Rocky River
(Pb. G. B. O.).

12. PINACEAE. .

Callitris cupressiformis, Vent., var. tasmanica, Benth—(R. T. as the type)
Four miles from Cygnet River towards Birchmore Lagoon; (J. B. C.)
Rocky River.

C. robusta, R. Br—(R. T. as C. verrucosa) Hog Bay River to American
Beach and American River, Western Cove, Bay of Shoals; (J. H. M. as
C. propinqua) Tog Bay.

13. TyPHACEAE.
Typha angustifolia, L.—(Tepper) South-west of Karatta (Harpur ) ;
(J. B. C.) Cygnet River.
14. PoTAMOGETONACEAE.
xZostera nana, Roth—(J. B. C.) Kingscote.
?xZ, tasmanica, Martens——(J. B. C.) Kingscote.

Althenia Preissii, (Lehm.) Graebn—( Tepper as Lepiluena Preissii) Karatta.
xCymodocea antarctica, (Labill.) Endl.—(J. B.C.) Middle River.
xPosidonia australis, Hook. £—(J. B. C.) Bay of Shoals, very broad leaves,

washed up, possibly a new species, Middle River (ordinary leaves), Pen-
nington Bay (very narrow leaves).

Potamogeton ochreatus, Raoul—(R. T. as P. obtusifolius) Cygnet River ;
(J. B. C.) Lower Cygnet River (Feb.).

P. pectinatus, L—(R. T.) Cygnet and Eleanor Rivers.

P. Tepperi, A. Benn. in Tate’s Census for K.I.—(R. T.) P. natans for Lower
Cygnet River and Stun’ Sail Boom River presumably refers to Tate’s
later reference in the Census to P. Tepperi; (Tepper) Cygnet and Stun’
Sail Boom Rivers.

xP, tricarinatus, A. Renn.—(T. G. B. O.) Harriet River; (J. B. C.) Cygnet
River.

Ruppia maritima, L—(R. T.) Cygnet, Eleanor, and Hog Bay Rivers, Deep

Creek; (Tepper as Vallisneria, teste Tate) Karatta.

17. SCHEUCHZERIACEAE,
Triglochin striata, Ruiz et Pav-—(R. T.) Cygnet, Eleanor, Stun’ Sail Boom,
and Hog Bay Rivers.
T. mucronata, R. Br—(R. T.) For K.I. in Fl. Austr,

27

T. centrocarpa, Hook.—(R. T.) N.W. Dudley Peninsula.
T. procera, R. Br—(R. T.) Cygnet, Eleanor, and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River; (R. S. R.) Western River.

19, HyprocHARITACEAE.

Ottelia ovalifolia, (R. Br.) L. C, Rich——(R. T.) Cygnet River; (J. B.C.)
Lower Cygnet River, Rocky River.

?xIallisneria spiralis, L—(J. B. C.) Lower Cygnet River (not in flower).

Halophila ovalis, (R. Br.) Hook f.—(R. T.) Bay of Shoals, Nepean River ;
(J. B. C.) Kingscote.

20, GRAMINEAE,
[x?Themeda triandra, Forsk—(J. B.C.) K.I. ? requires confirmation. |
+Neurachne alopecuroides, R, Br-—(J. B. C.) Between Kingscote and Vivonne
Bay (Nov.).

Spinifex hirsutus, Labill—(R. T.) Bay of Shoals, Nepean Bay, D’Estrees
Bay, ete, American Beach; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Bay of
Shoals, Beatrice Island.

Microlaena stipoides, (Labill.) R. Br—(R. T. as Ehrharta stipoides) Cygnet
River, shady places throughout Dudley Peninsula; (Tepper as Aristida
Behriana, F. v. M., teste Tate) Karatta; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

*Phalaris minor, Retz—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) K.I.
*Ph. canariensis, 1.—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

*Ph. paradova, L.—Kingscote in Black’s Flora.

+Stipa clegantissima, Labill—(J. B. C.) Kingscote.

S. teretifolia, Steud—(R. T.) Rocks by the sea, north coast of Dudley Penin-
sula; (J. B. C.) Near the sca, Hog Bay, Bay of Shoals, Pennington Bay.

+S. eremophila, Reader—(J. B. C.) Kingscote (Nov.).

S. pubescens, R. Br—(R. T. as S. aristiglumis) American River, Discovery
Flat, throughout Dudley Peninsula.

S. semibarbata, R. Br—-(R. T.) Between American River and D’Estrees
Bay; (J. H. M.) Cape Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B. C.)
near Vivonne Bay.

S. McAlpinei, Reader —(J. B. C.) “One Year Grass,” on recently burnt soil,
Rocky River (Nov.).

+S. variabilis, Hughes—(J. B. C.) Between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

Echinopogon ovatus, (Forst.) Beauv.—(R. 1.) Cygnet and Hog Bay Rivers.

Sporobolus virginicus, (L.) Kunth—(R. T.) Cygnet and Eleanor Rivers,
north and north-west coasts of Dudley Peninsula, Hog Bay River, De
Mole River; (J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay (March).

*xPolypogon monspeliensis, Desf-—-(J. B. C.) Besides streams, Cygnet River,
between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

Calamagrostis filiformis, (Forst.) Pilger—(R. T. as Agrostis solandri)
Towards Freestone Range, Nepean Bay, American River, Cygnet River,
Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

+C, filiformis, var. Billardieri, Maid. et Betche—(J. B. C.) Cape du Couédic,
near the sea.

C. quadriseta, (Labill.) Spreng—(R. T. as Agrostis quadriseta) Cygnet and
Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

+C. minor, Benth, (J, M. Black).—(J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

Dichelachne crinita, (L. f.) Hook. £—(CR. T.) North of Dudley Peninsula,
Rocky Point, Hog Bay River.

D. sciurea, (R. Br.) Hook. f—(R. T.) Heath near American River, through-

out Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

28

*Lagurus ovatus, L—(Vepper) Queenscliff; (R. T.) Roll’s Point, Telegraph
Reserve, Eleanor River; see H. M.) Kingscote, well goblituatised
(J. B. C.) widespread, Bay of Shoals.

*t+dira carvophyllea, L.—(J. B.C.) KL

*Avena fatua, L—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

Amplibromus nervosus, (R. Br.) Hook. £—(R. T, as Danthonia nervosa)
Cygnet and ee Rivers

Danthonia carphoides, ¥. v. M—(J. B. C.) Rocky River.

1), penieilata, (Labill.) F. v. M-~-(R. T.) American River, Eleanor and
Cygnct Rivers, ee Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M. as var. setacea)
Kingscote ; ‘an B.C.) Rocky River, Kingscote.

*Briga marina, L.—(]. " (2) 1,

*B. minor, L.—(CR. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.) KI.

*xDactylis glomerata, L.—(J. B.C.) K.1.

Distichlis spicata, (L..) Greene-—-(R. TY. as D. maritima) KI. (Heuzen-
roeder), Bay of Shoals, Nepean Bay, north coast of Dudley Peninsula ;
(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay.

Poa caespitosa, Forst—(R. T.) Sea cliffs along south coast, Bay of Shoals,
throughout Dudley Peninsula; (J. 11. M.) Cape du Conédie (coll.
R.S. Rogers) ; (J. B.C.) between Kingscote and Rocky River, Cape du
Couédic (Nov.).

P, caespitosa, var. Billardieri, Hook. £—-Sca coast of K.I. in Black’s Flora:
(J. B.C.) ee du Couédic (Nov.).

*P. annua, a ag es ) Dudley Peninsula.

Le lepida, F. v. J M—(Teppes) Cape Willoughby (coll. Horswill).

Glyceria stricta, Hook. f£—(Tepper as Poa syrtica, F. v. M.) Beach, Brown-
low to Cygnet River.

Festuca littoralis, Labill--(R. T.) Sand-dunes at Hog Bay River.

*F. bromoides, ia (R. T.) Freestone Hill Range and throughout Dudley
Peninsula.

*F. elatior, L., var. arundinacea, Hack—Tate records #. elatior (2) for

Dudley Peninsula.
‘FP, rigida, (1..) Kunth.—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

Bromus arenarius, Labill—(R. T.) Sand-dunes at Hog Bay and American
Beach,

*B. hordeaceus, L—(R. T. as B. mollis) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.) KUT.

*B.amaxtmus, Desf.—(R. T. as B. sierilis) Dudley Peninsula.

*Lolhum temulentum, L—(R. VT.) Dudley Peninsula.

*L. perenne, L—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

S. sculptus, BigenkiSet R. T.) By runnels, heathy ground, Central Dudley
Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Bay of Shoals.

gropyrum Sa, (Labill.) Beauv —(R. T.) Towards Freestone Hill,
American River, throughout Dudley Peninsula,

*Hordeum murinunt, L— CR. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay ;

(J. B. C.) Kingscote, Beatrice Island.
21. CYPERACEAE.

xCyperus vaginatus, R. Br.—(J. B. C.) Middle River.

Schocnus apogon, Roem et Sch——-(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula;
(J. B. C.) Rocky River.

S. sculptus, Boech—(R. 7.) By runnels, heathy ground, Central Dudley
Peninsula.

S. nitens, (R. Br.) Poir—kK.1.. in Black’s Flora.

S. Tepperi, ¥. v. M—(R. T.) De Mole River, near D’Estrees Bay, White
Lagoon, frequent in open heath land to beyond the Eleanor River.

ea

29

S. discifer, Tate—(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula.
xS\, brevifolius, R. Br. 2—(J. B. C.) 20 miles east of Cape Borda.

S. fluttans, Hook. £-—-(Tepper) Head of South-western River; (J. B. C.)
Breakneck River.

Heleocharis sphacelata, R. Br.—-(R. T.) Cygnet, Harriet, and Stun’ Sail
Boom Rivers; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River, Squashy Creek 27 miles east of
Cape Borda, between Vivorine Bay and Rocky River, Rocky River.

FH, acuta, R. Br—(R. T.) Cygnet River at the ““Sheep-wash.”

AH. milticaulis, Sm.—(R. lV.) Stun’ Sail Boom River; (J. B. C.) Squashy
Creek 27 miles east of Cape Borda,

Scirpus fluitans, 1.—(R. T.) Cygnet, Stun’ Sail Boom, and Hog Bay Rivers:
(J. B. C.) Tin Hut (on telegraph line to Cape Borda); (1. G. B. O.)
Harriet River.

S. setaceus, L.—(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula.

». cernuis, Vahl—(R. T. as S. riparius) Eleanor River, Hog Bay (soakage at
Frenchman’s Rock, Central Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

S. antarcticus, L—(R. T. as S. cartilagineus) North Dudley Peninsula,
American River; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

S. mundatus, (R. Br.) Poir--(R. T.) Cygnet and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River, Squashy Creek and Tin Hut (27 and 35 miles
respectively from Cape Borda).

S. nodosus, Rotth—(R. T.) Nepean Bay, American River, Vivonne Bay,
American Beach, Hog Bay River; (J. B. C.) between Vivonne Bay
and Rocky River, etc.

Chorisandra enodis, Necs—-(R. ‘T.) Discovery Flat, Birchmore’s Lagoon,
White Lagoon; (J. B. C.) near Cygnet River; (T. G. B. O.) Harriet
River.

Cladium junceum, R. Br—(R. Tt.) Between Eleanor and Stun’ Sail Boom
Rivers; (J. B.C.) Rocky River, Tin Hut (35 miles east of Cape Borda).

+C, Guunii, Hook. f£—(J. B.C.) Squashy Creck (27 miles east of Cape
Borda). In Black’s Flora it is stated that Bentham recorded this species
for the Mount Lofty Range, “but it does not appear to have been found
since.”

TC. arcuatum, J. M. Black—A new species; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

C. capillaceum, (Benth.) C. B. Clarke-—(Tepper as Schoenus capillaris,
I. v. M.)—Head of South-western River; (J. B. C.) Tin Hut (on
telegraph line to Cape Borda).

C. filum (Labill.) R. Br—(R. T.) De Mole River, White Lagoon, Hawk’s
Nest, Mount Pieasant near Karatta,

C. fetragonum, (Labill.) J. M. Black.—Tepper as C. tetraquetrum) Head of
south-western River; (J. B. C.) Squashy Creck (27 miles east of Cape
Borda).

C. acutum, (Labill.) Poir-—(Vepper as C. schoenoides) Cape Borda, I.ime-
stone Hills; (R. TV. as C. schoenoides) De Mole River.

Gahnia trifida, Labill—K.1. in Black’s Flora; (J. B. C.) Tin Hut (35 miles
east of Cape Borda). Perhaps some of fate’s records of Cladium filum
refer to this species.

(. deusta, (R. Br.) Benth—(R.T. as Cladinin deustum) Coast cliffs between
Pennington Bay and Hog Bay River, stony ground between Mount
Pleasant and Eleanor River; (J. B. C.) in sandy soil near Cape du
Couédic,

TG. psittacorum, Labill— (J. B. C.) Tin Hut and other crecks along the
telegraph line to Cape Borda.
+G. iivstrix, J. M. Black —A new species; (J. B. C.) Cape du Conédic (Nov.).

30

Caustis pentandra, R. Br—(R. T.) De Mole River, between American River
and D’Estrees Bay, near White Lagoon, Karatta; (J. B. C.) near
Vivonne Bay, between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River, telegraph line
20 miles east of Cape Borda; (R. S. R.) South-western River.

xLepidosperma exaltatum, R. Br—(J. B. C.) Rocky River, Breakneck River.

L. gladiatum, Labill—(R. T.) Between Hog Bay River and False Cape;
(J. B. C.) Pennington Bay.

xL. concavum, R. Br —(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay.

L. lineare, R. Br-—( Tepper) Hundred of Haines and elsewhere, larger than on
the mainland as at Clarendon.

L. viscidum, R. Br—(R. T.) Throughout the main mass oi the Island;
(J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

L. canescens, Boeck.—K.[. in Black’s Flora; (J. B. C.) Kingscote, Vivonne
Bay road.

xL, semiteres, F. v. M~(J. B. C.) Tin Hut on Cape Borda telegraph line,
near Vivonne Bay.

L. carphoides, F. v. M—(Tepper) Mount Pleasant; (J. B. C.) between
Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

L. filiforme is given by Tate as common for Dudley Peninsula, also for
De Mole River, but there are no specimens in the Tate Herbarium, and
none have been found since.

Carex appressa, R. Br.—(R. T. as C. paniculata) De Mole River; (Tepper
as C. paniculata) Ravine des Casoars; (J. B. C.) banks of Rocky River,
creek along Cape Borda telegraph line.

C. tereticaulis, F. v. M—(R. T.) Stun’ Sail Boom River.

C. pseudocyperus, L—(R. T.) Stun’ Sail Boom River.

22, LEMNACEAE.
Lemna trisulca, L—(Tepper) Karatta.
L. minor, L.—(Vepper) K.1.

23. RESTIONACEAE.

Leptocarpus tenax, R. Br—(Tepper) Karatta, Birchmore’s Lagoon.

Hypolaena fastigiata, R. Br—(R. T. as Calostrophus fastigiatus) De Mole
River, between American River and D’Esirees Bay, White Lagoon, near
Karatta; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

Lepyrodia sp.—( Tepper) Grassy Creek.

24. CENTROLEPIDACEAE.

Trithuria submersa, Fook. £—(R. T.) By runnels, heath ground, Central
Dudley Peninsula.

Brigula gracilis, (Sond.) Hieron-(R. T. as Aphelia gracilis) By runnels,
Central Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

B. pumilio, (F. v. M.) Hieron —(R. T. as Aphelia pumilio) Mossy banks
in gullies, and cliffs by the sea, north Dudley Peninsula.

Centrolepis polygyna, (R. Br.) Hieron —(R. T.) With the last, North Dudley
Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

C. aristata, (R. Br.) Roem. et Schult —(R. T.) De Mole River, Central
Dudley Peninsula; var. pygmaea, sea slopes south of Kangaroo Mead;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

xC. fascicularis, Labill—(J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.). creek near Ravine
des Casoars, Tin Hut (35 miles east of Cape Borda).

C, strigosa, (R. Br.) Roem. et Schult-—-(R. T.} De Mole River, North
Dudley Peninsula, American River; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

28. JUNCACEAE.

Juncus bufonius, l.—(R. T.) American River, Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.)

Rocky River.

31

xJ. planifolius, R. Br—(J. B. C.) Squashy Creek (27 miles east of Cape
Borda), Rocky River.

J. caespiticius, E. Mey —(Tepper) Ravine des Casoars.

J. maritimus, Lamk., var. australiensis, Benth——-(Tepper as the type) Karatta ;
(J. B. C.) widespread.

J. pallidus, R. Br-—(R. T.} Common throughout the Island, Dg Mole River ;
(J. B. C.) widespread.

+J. polyanthemus, Buch—(J. B.C.) Tin Hut (35 miles east of Cape Borda).
+J. pauciflorus, R. Br—(J. B. C.) Rocky River.

Lusula campestris, DC—(R. T.) Throughout Dudley Peninsula.

29. LILIACEAE.

Dianella revoluta, R. Br—(J. H. M.) Kingscote, Tog Bay; (J. B. C.)
between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River, ete.

D, laevis, R. Br—(R. T.) Cygnet River, Western Cove, towards D’Estrees
Bay, Karatta, Dudley Peninsula; (R. S. R.) Kingscote (Sept.).
Burchardia umbellata, R. Br-—(R. T.) Near D’Estrees Bay, Central Dudley
Peninsula, Hog Bay River; (J. B. C.) Breakneck River (Nov.);

(R. S. R.) Kingscote (Sept.).

Anguillaria dioica, R. Br—(Tepper) Karatta; (R. S. R.) near Cape Borda
(Sept.), Ravine des Casoars.

Thysanotus Patersonii, R, Br—(R. T.) De Mole River; (R. 5S. R.) Harvey’s
Return (Oct.).

Th. tuberosus, R. Br-—(Tegper) Karatta.

Th. dichotomus, (abill.) R. Br—(J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) between
Kingscote and Vivonne Bay (Nov.); telegraph line to Cape Borda
(Feb.).

Chamaescilla corymbosa, (R. Br.) F. v. Mi—(J. B.C.) KE

Tricoryne elatior, R. Br.—(Tepper) Mount Taylor.

Bulbine semibarbata, (R. Br.) Haw.—(R. T.) De Mole River; (J. H. M.)
Hog Bay; (R.S. R.) Middle River (Oct.); (J. B. C.) between Kings-
cote and Vivonne Bay.

Dichopogon strictus, (R. Br.) J. G. Bak. —(R. T. as Arthropodium strictum)
North-west parts of Dudley Peninsula, gorge of Hog Bay River.

D. fimbriatus, (R. Br.) J. M. Black—%In Tate’s list as Arthropodium laxum,
Kingscote Point.

Barilingia sessilflora, (Dene) F. v. M—(Tepper) Karatta; (J. B.C.) KL;
(T. G. B. O.) Harriet River.

Xanthorrhoca quadrangulata, F.v M—(R.'l., probably X. Tateana is meant)
South side of Cygnet River to D’Estrees Bay and Stun’ Sail Boom River,
Central Dudley Peninsula; (J. TI. M.) Hog Bay.

X. Tateana, F. v. M.—(R. T. as X. Tatei) De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Rocky
River, Vivonne Bay, etc.

TRIDACEAE,

Patersonia glauca, R. Br—(R. I.) White Lagoon, near Karatta, De Mole
River; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

Orthrosanthus multiflorus, Sweet —(R. ‘T. as Sisyrinchium cyaneum) K.1.
(R. Brown), widely distributed throughout Dudley Peninsula, common
on the north coast and extending to Karatta, occasionally at Mount
Mary and American Beach; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (R. S. R.) Kings-
cote (Sept.), Ilarvey’s Return (Sept.); (J. B. C.) Kingscote (Nov.),
Rocky River, Cape Borda.

ORCHIDACEAE.
xGastrodia sesamoides, R. Br-(R. S. R.) Flinders Chase (Prof. Wood
jones), Oct.

32

Calochilus Robertsonii, Benth—Middle and Western Rivers, Cape Borda
(Nov.).

xThelymitra ivioides, Sw—(R. S. R.), Cape Borda (Oct).

I. lutteociliata, Fitzg—Kingscote, Birchmore Lagoon, a swamp form, blooms

September,

YT. grandiflora, Fitzg—lIronstone Hill, near Western River. Numerous in
this locality, with exceptionally large leaves. In bud at end of Sep-
tember. Bloomed early in October when transplanted to Adclaide.

. aristata, Lindl—Ilog Bay River (South Coast). September and October,

. longifolia, Forst—Dudley Peninsula. October and November.

. pauciflora, R. Br.—Kingscote, Ravine des Casoars Creek. September,

. fusco-lutea, R. Br.—Ironstone Hill, near Western River, Cape Borda
(Nov.); (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase and between Kingscote and
Vivonne Bay (ironstone tablelands).

T. carnea, R. Br—Stun’ Sail Boom River. October,

LT. flexuosa, Endi.—Widely distributed on the tableland between Ravine
Creek and Tin Hut. October.

T. antennifera, Hook. f.—-Widely distributed: Stokes’ Bay, Stun’ Sail Boom
River, Western River, S.W. River, Harriet River, Timber Creek, Dudley
Peninsula. September and October.

Microtis porrifolia, R. Br—Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote, Cygnet River,
Salt Creek, Stokes’ Bay, Western River. October and November.

xf. parviflora, R. Br-—(R. S. R.) Vivonne Bay. November.

Prasophyllum australe, R. Br—(R. S. R.) Harriet River. December and
January.

P. elatum, R. Br—Snug Cove, Harvey’s Return, Cape Borda, Dudley Penin-
sula. Almost black in colour. Locally known as the “Blackboy.” I
have not so far met the lighter-coloured forms which are found on the
mainland. October and November. (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase,
near Rocky River. October.

P. patens, R. Br.—Kingscote, Dudley Peninsula. October.

P. fuscum, R, Br—Retta’s Lagoon, Kingscote. October.

P. nigricans, R. Br.—lt seemed probable that the smaller species of Praso-
phylum would be represented on the Island, especially as one of these
occurs on Yorke Peninsula. I was fortunate enough to find a single
late bloom in May when on a visit to Harcus Camp, on the tableland
south-west of the Kohinoor Mine. It was not the Peninsula species,
however, but one much more widely distributed. Later we found it
in seed at Kingscote in September.

Corysanthes pruinosa, A, Cunn—Swamp near Harvey’s Return (Mrs. R. &.
Rogers). July and August. |ate bloom in September.

Actanthus caudalus, R. Br—De Mole River. September.

A. exsertus, R, Br—Ilog Bay River, Kingscote, Harvey’s Return. Alay,
June, and July. |

Cyrtostylis reniformis, R. Br—Dudicy Peninsula, Harvey’s Return, Ravine
des Casoars Creck. July to September.

Lyperanthus nigricans, R. Br—Hog Bay River, Stokes’ Bay, Ilarriet River,

“ Eleanor River, Mount Pleasant, Retta Lagoon, and Cyenet River.
September and October. ] :

Eriochilus autumnalis, R. Br-—-l have found this species at Harcus Canyp in
seed in May; probably it bas a much wider distribution, but has not been
recorded owing to its early time of blooming.

Leptoceras fimbriata, Lind|—Leaves fairly numerous at Stokes’ Bay and
Rocky River. Should be looked for in May and June.

SSNS

33

Caladenta cardiochila, Tate-—Kingscote.

C. ovata, Rogers.—1 have not seen this species on the North Coast, but have
found it in considerable numbers on the South Coast about Wilson River
and the Eleanor. I have never met it on the mainland. It blooms in
September and October.

C. reticulata, Fi
September.

C, Patersonii, R. Br—This species has so long been considered a legitimate
dumping-ground for divergent forms, that perhaps no apology is required
for placing still another under this heading. The Kangaroo Island form
may conveniently be placed here for the present, although it secms to
me a very distinct type. So far, I have been unable to discover the
presence on the Island of the forms which are so prevalent on the con-
tiguous mainland, e.g., Yorke Peninsula. As in the case of C, flamentosa,
the only place in the State in which I have known the Kangaroo Island
form of C. Patersonii to occur is Monarto, where [ have collected it
at about the same time of the year. It has a narrow leal, varying [rom
linear-lanceolate to oblong-lanceolate. The flower is usually solitary,
the general colouring being yellow with red markings. ‘Vhe latter are
shown by a red line running down the middle of each perianth segment,
by the strongly- -marked red clavate points of each sepal, and by the red
‘p of the labcllum. There are four rows of calli, and the margins of

the labellum are denticulated, though not deeply so.: The caudae are

comparatively short, and not hairy, as in the typical forms of C. Pater-
soni. Next ta C. filamentosa this is the most prevalent “spider” west
of Kingscote,

C. dilatata, R. Br.—Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote, Ravine des Casoars. Sep-
tember and October.

C. filamentosa, R. Br.—This beautiful dark crimson form is widely dis-
tributed throughout the Island. I know only one locality on the
mainland where it is to be found, vis., Monarto, near Murray Bridge.
It has struck me as an interesting fact that C. tentaculata, a closely allied
light-coloured species, so common around the northern and western
sides of the Gulf, does not occur on the Island. I have found both forms
at Monarto. September and October.

C. bicalliata, Rogers—A single specimen of this dainty little orchid was
found by Mrs. R. S. Rogers near Kingscote on September 20, 1908. It
was growing in rather sandy soil near the roadside on the margin of
the serub.

C. Menstesii, R. Br—Stokes’ Bay, Cape Borda, Ravine des Casoars, Harvey's
iceturn. September and October. (T. G. B. ©.) Flinders Chase, near
Rocky River.

C. latifolia, R. Br.—Kingscote, Harvey’s Return, Ravine des Casoars Creek.
and very common on Dudley Peninsula. September.

C. carnea, R. Br—Not common, but widely distributed. IT have found it on
Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote, Rocky River, vicinity of Cape du Couédic,
South-west River, Harriet River. September.

xC. caerulea, R. Br—(R. S. R.) Flinders Chase (Prof. F. Wood Jones).
September,

C. deformis, R. Br—This probably shares the place of honour with Diuris
longifolia in being the most common orchid on the Island, some parts
being literally converted into blue carpets in September, when it is at its
best. It became scarcer as we skirted the Western Coast, but is repre-
sented everywhere.

River, Mount Pleasant, Eleanor River.

34

Diuris longifolia, R. Br—This orchid is extraordinarily prolific and is to
be found in vast quantities from one end of the Island to the other.
September and October.

D. brevifolia, Rogers—(R. S. R.) Flinders Chase. November,

xf). sulphurea, R. Br—(R. S. R.) Harriet River. December.

P. nutans, R. Br—Ravine des Casoars Reserve, Cape Borda. A few good
blooms last week in September.

Pterostylis nana, R. Br—Widely distributed throughout the Island. August
and September.

xP. peduncidata, R. Br-—(R. S. R.) Harvey’s Return, Cape Borda. August.

P. furcata, Landl.—Late blooms found in January near Karatta on Stun’ Sail
Boom River. I described this orchid as a species new to the State in
Trans. Roy. Soc. 5S. Austr., 1907, vol. xxxi., p. 125, pl. xxii.

P, reflexa, R. Br.—tlarvey’s Return (Mrs. R. S. Rogers). June, July, and
August.

P. alata, (Labill.) Reichb. f—(R. 5. R.) Dudley Peninsula, Ravine Creek.
May, June, and July.

P, obtusa, R. Br.—Ravine Creek, near Cape Borda, in moist shady ground.
Half a dozen withered specimens found end of September, 1908 (Mrs.
R. S. Rogers). Blooms probably July and August. This species has
only been previously recorded from the Port Victor district.

P. barbata, Lindl—tlog Bay River, S.W. River, Tarriet River, Eleanor
River. September and October.

P. longifoha, R. Br—This plant bears rather a striking contrast to our
mainland form, the lowers being much smaller (galea 1 cm.. or even less)
and the habit exceedingly slender. ‘he height varies from about 10-30
em. Late blooms found at Kingscote in September.

P. vittata, Vindl—\Widely distributed throughout the Island. June and
August.

33, CASUARINACEAE,

Casuarina stricta, Ait—(R. ‘VT. as C. quadrivalvis) Salt lagoon, Wingscole
Point, Western Cove, American River, north coast of Dndley Penin-
sula, Hog Bay River; (J. B.C.) Vivonne Bay, Harvey’s Return.

?C. Muelleriana, Mig.—-(R. T. This and the next species are included under
C, distyla) Cygnet River to 1)’Estrees Bay, and Stun’ Sail Boom River,
Central Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.) between Kingseote and Vivenne
Bay.

C. sp.—(J. B. C.) Between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

35. Urricackar.

Parieiaria debilis, G. Forst--CR. VT.) K.L Cin Fl. Austr.), throughout
Dudley Peninsula; (T. GB. ©.) Harriet River. October.

*Urtica urens, L.—(CR. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (]. B. C. probably) Rocky
River; (R. S. R.) near Cape Borda.

UL, ancisa, Poir-—-(R. T.) Tower Cygnet River; (J. B. ©.) Ravine des
Casoars.

36. PROTEACEAE.

Petrophila maitisecta, BF. v. W0--(R. VL) IK.1. (Waterhouse), Cygnet River,
eastward to American River, and south-west to Stun’ Sail Boom River,
De Mole River; (J. B. C.) between INingscote and Vivonne Bay,
Rocky River.

[sopogon ceratophyllus, &. Br-—(R. V.) De Mole River; (]. B.C.) Rocky
River, Cape Borda; (R. S. R.) Ravine des Casoars (Oct., 1908).

35

Adcnanthos sericea, Labill., var. breetfolia, Benth—(R. TV. as A. sericea)
KL. (Waterhouse), Cygnet River to Red Banks, American River, and
1)’Estrees Bay, thence to Eleanor River, etc.. De Mole River; (J. B. C.,
ee pinky-red, not yellow as in the generic description in Black’s

Tlora) 20 miles east of Rocky River; (R. S. R.) Kingscote Coopt,
1908), near Cape Borda (Sept., 1908), Chipe du Couédic (Oect., 1908),
Stokes’ Bay to Western River.

Al. terminalis, BR. Br-—-(R. T.) De Mole River; (J. B.C.) between Vivorme
Bay and Rocky River.

Conospermuin patens, Schlechtd.—(R. T.) .1, (Waterhouse). near
IY’Estrees Bay, north of Mount Pleasant, near Karatta, De Mole River;
(J. B.C.) Kingscote, Vivonne Bay road, Rocky River, near Cape Borda;
(RS. R.) Western River.

xAakea vilteia, R. Br—-(J. B.C.) Vivonne Bay.

HH. rostrata, Pov. Me -(R. T.) American River and along the South Coast,
Central Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. B.C.) Ningscote,
Vivonne Bay road, Cape Borda, Harvey’s Return,

HH. rugosa, R. Br—(R. T.) KT. (Waterhouse), American River to D’Estrees
Bay, South Coast of Central Dudley Peninsula (coll. R. 5S. Rogers);
(J. B.C.) KL; (TP. B. G. OO.) Finders Chase, Rocky iver. and
Breakneck Craide (Nov.).

Af. ulicina, R. Br—(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay, Rocky River, Cape Borda.

Al, ulicina, var. fers, Pov. M—(R. T. as H. flewilis) IK.1. (Waterhouse),
west of Bay of Shoals, south of Cygnet River to Birchmore |agoon,
Murray Lagoon, and thence to Karatta; (J. B.C.) Rocky River, Cape
Borda. Tepper records [7, ultcina, var, carimafa, for Cape Borda.

xH., near A. multilineata, Meisn.—(]. B. C.) Several small plants, showing
no signs of flowering, on heathy ground 4 or 5 miles north of Rocky
River Llomestead, leaves differing (Prof. Osborn and Miss Macklin)
microscopically from those of S.A. specimens of (1. miultiineata,

Banksia marginata, Cav. CR. Vo) KL (Waterhouse), Cygnet River to
I’Estrees Bay and Stun’ Sail Boom River, De Mole River: 5 (ROS. RD
Rocky River; (J, B.C.) near Harvey’s Return.

B. ornata, F. v. Mi—(R. T.) KL. (Frag. Phot), Cygnet River, and Birch-
more Jagoon, between American River and D’Estrees Bay. White
Lagoon, and frequently to Stun’ Sail Room River, De Male River;
(]. B.C.) near Cape Borda. ete.

Grevillea ilicifolia, R. Br-—tR. TL) KT. (Waterhouse), Kingscote, south
of Cygnet River, American River, White’s Lagoon to Eleanor River;
(J. B.C.) between Kingscote and Vivenne Bay (flowers greenish)
Vivonne Bay, Rocky River; (R. S. BR.) Stokes’ Bay to Western River
(Oct., 1908).

1. parviflora, R. Br —(R. T. as var. 7) WAL, (Waterhouse), Stun’ Sail Boom
River at Karatta; K.I. (Black’s Flora).

oN

Gs. parviflora, var. acuaria, Fv. M-—(R. F.. as above, probably in part)
KT. (Black’s Flora); (J. fC.) Rocky River; CP. G. BL ©.) in
dense serub, Flinders Chase (Oct. 1924). 7

G. pauciflora, R. By—(C Lepper) Head of the S.W. River; (R. 35. R.) 5.W.
River, Cape du Couédic (Oct., 1908), near isarattla. Ravine des Casoars:
(J. B. C.) between Cape du Couedie and Rocky River, near Cape
jorda. _

G. quinguenervis, |. M. Black—Snug Cove and near Cape Borda (Black's

Flora); (J. B.C.) Rocky River, near Cape Borda.
7, aspera, R. Br—(R. VT.) De Mole River.

oO

36

CG, davandulacea, R. Br—(R. T.) De Mole River.
G. Rogers, Maiden—(R. S. R.) Marvey’s Return (Oct., 1907), Ravine
des Casoars; (J. B.C.) Harvey’s Return, Kingscote-Vivoune Bay road.

37, SANTALACEAE.

Lvocarpus cupressiformis, Labill—(R. T.) K.I. (Waterhouse), Stun’ Sail
Boom River, throughout Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River,
between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River.

Leptomeria aphvlla, R. Br—(R. T.) Near the Eleanor River, Waratta;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

Choretrum glomeratun, R. Br—(R. T.) Bay of Shoals, Kingscote to
D’Estrees Bay and Stun’ Sail Boom River, Central Dudley Peninsula,
De Mole River; (J. H. M.) Kingscote; (J. B. C.) Bay of Shoals,
Harvey’s Return; (T. G. B. ©.) Flinders Chase.

Ch. spicatum, F. v. M—(R. T.) K.I. (Bannier); (J. B. C.) Rocky River,
Cape Borda, near Harvey’s Return.

Lusanus acuminatus, R. Br-~In Tate’s Census for KI.

J, persicarius, F. v. M.—(Vepper) Cape Willoughby (coll. Horswill).

38. OLACACEAE.

Olax Benthamiana, Miyg—(Tepper) Scrub land near Cape Borda;
(J. H. M.) Cape Borda (coll. R. 5S. Rogers); (J. B.C.) near Cape
Borda.

40, PoLyGONACEAE,

Rumev Brownti, Campd—(R. T.) KI. (ITleuzenroeder), Cygnet River,
throughout Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

*xR. crispus, L.—(J. B. C.) Kingscote, Middle River.

*xR, Acetosella, .—(]J. B. C.) Rocky River.

*Polygonum aviculare, |.—(R, T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky
River.

Muechlenbeckia adpressa, (abill.) Meisn—(R. T.) K.I. (Waterhouse),
bushy places and heath ground, especially near the sea, mallee scrub and
thickets throughout Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay, Cape
Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B. C.) Ravine des Casoars, ete. ;
(T. G. B. 0.) Rocky River.

41. CHENOPODIACEAE,

tithagodia baccata, (Labill.) Mog—(J. B. ©.) Vivonne Bay, Pennington
Bay, Kingscote.

kh. crassifolia, R. Br.—(R. T.) K.I. (R. Brown), seacliffs and salt swamps
from American River to Bay of Shoals, North and West Dudley Penin-
sula; (J. B. C.) WKingscote, Vivonne Bay, American River;
(T. G. B. O.) Cape du Couédic (Nov., 1923).

Rh. nutans, R. Br—(R. T.) K.1. (R. Brown), rocks by the sea on north
coast of Dudley Peninsula and to American Beach; (J. B. C.) Bay of
Shoals (?).

Chenopodium carinatum, R. Br.-(R. T.) K.L (R. Brown as Ch. pumilio,
R. Br., grassy slopes by the sea on north coast of Dudley Peninsula).
(Probably a smail form of the preceding—J. M. B.)

*xCh. murale, L—(J. B. C.) Kingscote.

*Ch. glaucum, L—(R. T.) KL, probably Cygnet River (\Waterhouse),
Dudley Peninsula; (Tepper as Rhagodia parabolica}) (tesie Tate),
Kinch’s, Cygnet River; (J. B. C.}) mouth of Cygnet River, Bay of
Shoals (?), Middle River. :

37

Atriplex paludosum, R. Br-—(R. T.) K.1. (R. Brown, Waterhouse), Bay
of Shoals, north coast of Dudley Peninsula to American River;
mouth of Cygnet River, Beatrice Island.

A. cinerewm, Poir—(R. T. y K.I. (Waterhouse), Kingscote Point, Bay of
Shoals, Hlog Bay, American Reach; (J. B. C.) Kingscote, Vivonne
Bay, Pennington Bay.

A. prostratum, R. Br. R. T.) KL (R. Brown),

Kochia oppositifolia, F. v. M-—-(R. T.) Rocks by the sea between Penne-
shaw and Kangaroo Head; (J. B. C.) American River, mouth of
Cygnet River, Bay of Shoals.

xSalsola kali, L.—(J. B.C.) faeces

Suaeda australis, (R. Br.) Moq-—CR. T. as S. maritima) Rocks by the sea,
north coast of Dudley Peninsula, sandhills at American Beach and Ilog
Bay.

Enchylaena tomentosa, R. Br—(R. T.) eahesele Christmas Cove and
American Beach, Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Kingscote (yellow
fruits), Beatrice Island.

Threlkeldia diffusa, R. Br—In Vate’s Census for K.1.

+Arthrocnemum halocnemoides, Nees-—(]. B. C.) Near Kingscote.

A, arbuscula, (R. Br.) Moy.—(R. T. as ane arbuscula) Nepean Bay,
American River, Christmas Cove; (]. C.) American River (?).
Salicornia australis, Banks et Sol—( RX. £ Common in salt swamps;

(J. H. M.) Kingscote; (J. B.C.) mnidioha River, Eleanor River (?),
forming low grcen patches left by the receding tide at Bay of Shoals;
(T. G. B. 0.) Cape du Couédie (Nov., 1923).

42. AMARANTACEAE.

Hemichroa pentandra, R. Br-—(R. T. as Polycnemon pentandrum) Saline
swamp at head of Bay of Shoals, east of Pelican Lagoon; (J. B. C.)
Vivonne Bay (March), Bay of Shoals (probably).

Trichininm Beckerianum, F. v. M—-(R. T. as Pitlotus Beckeri) On iron-
stone gravel after fire, about Mount Pleasant, and hence to Itleanor
River.

A. denticulata, R. Br —(R. T. as A. triandra) Banks of Cygnet River.

44. PHYTOLACCACEAE.

Didymotheca thesioides, Hook, f—(R. T.) Hog Bay Rive: to Rocky Point,
American Beach; (J. B. C.) near Pennington Bay, between Kingscote
and Vivonne Bay, Rocky River (Nov.).

Gyrostemon australasicus, (Moqg.) Heimerl—(R. T. as Didymotheca
pleiococca) K.T. (Waterhouse), between American River and D’Estrecs
Bay, between White Lagoon and [lawk’s Nest, towards the Eleanor and
Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers; (R. S. R.) Kingscote, Parrot Paddock;
(J. B. C.) near Pennington Bay, between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay
(Nov,).

45. AIZOACEAE,

Mesembrianthemum aequilaterale, HWaw—-(R. T.) Satid dunes, common;
(J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Bay of Shoals, etc.

M. australe, Soland—R. T.) Bay of Shoals, Nepean Bay, north coast of
Dudley Peninsula, ‘De Mole River; (J. H, M.) Cape du Couédie (coll.
R. S. Rogers); (J. B.C.) KL

Tetragonia implexicoma, (Moq.) Hook, f—(R. ‘V.) D’Estrees Bay, north
and west coasts of Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C. 5. widely distributed near
the coast.

38

46. PorruLAcacEAE.
Calandrima volubilis, Benth—(R. I. as Claytonta volubilis) North coast of
Dudley Peninsula.
C. ealypirata, Hook. f£.—(R. T. as Claytonia calyptrata) Kangaroo Head,
gorge of the Hog Bay River, De Mole River.

47, CARYOPTTYLLACEAR,

Sagina procumbens, ere in Black’s Flora,

S. apetala, Ard—— eR. ) Western Cove, Nepean Bay, throughout Dudley
Peninsula, capeeialty” near the coast.

*Cerastium glomeraluan, eS ae Toas ©. vulgatum) Dudley Peninsula.

Stellaria palustris, Retz—(R. T. as S. glawea) Christmas Cove, gullies of
North Dudley Peninsula, Hog Bay River.

*S. media, (1...) Vitl—(R. Tj Dudley Peninsula.

Splvouiletin rubra, (1..) J. et C. Preslk—(R. 7.) North coast of Dudley
Peninsula; (J. B. C.} Middle River (?).

S. margiata, (DC.) Kitt. (2). —CR. T. as S. marina) Saline swamps. Bay
of Shoals, Nepean Bay, salt-water creeks, North Dudley Peninsula.

*Silene gallica, 1.—(R. VT.) Dudley Peninsula: (J. B.C.) KE.
*Tunica prolifera, (1..) Scop. (Dianthus prolifer, L.j—(]. B.C.) Ningseote,
Rocky River.
49. RANUNCULACEAE.

Clematis microphylla, DC—(R. J.) Common near the coast; (J. 1. Ma
Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Kingscote.

Ranunculus trichophyllus, Chaix—(]. B.C.) Leaves in water at Ravine
des Casoars suggesting this species.

R. rivudaris, Banks et Sol—-(Tepper) Ravine des Casoars; (CR. 1.) De
Mole River; (J. B.C.) between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River:
(T. G. B.O.) in peaty swamp, Rocky River (Oct.. 1924).

RK. parviflorus, Ja—(R. V2) Near Kangaroa Head.

50. LAURACEAR,

Cassytha glabella, R. Br—(R. TL) KA (Sealey). sandy heath ground.
parsitic on Lepidosperma fliforme chiefiv; (J. B.C.) widely distributed,
Vivonne Bay, Rocky River, Cape Borda.

C. pubescens, R. Br—(R. 7.) Parasitic on small heathy shrubs and Melaleuca
uneimnata, De Mole River, cte.; (Pepper as Cassytha sp.. teste Tate)
KKaretta; (J. 1. M.) Cape du Couédic (coll, RS. Rogers); (]. B.C.)
between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Vivonne Bay.

C. melantha, R. Br—(R. VT.) Parasitic on uhe smaller Eucalyptus chichy:
(J. B.C.) Bay of Shoals.

51. DAPAVERACEAE.

Papaver aculeatim, Phunkh—(R. VT.) Sandhills at American Beach and rocky

ground northward Ag oe garoo Head, Kingscote, 1D’ Estrees Bay.
eas Avbridum, Lo—(RoS. Ro) Cape du Couédie (Oct., 1908)

52. CRUCIFERAF,

*Sisymbriin officinale. V..-(R.V.) Duley Peninsula,

*xDiplotaris muralis, (1...) DC—(}. B.C.) Ningscote.

Lepidium foliosum, Desv.—CR. T.) KL. (Bannicr ); (). HL Mo) Cape du
Couédie (coll, R. S. Rogers); (J. B.C.) mouth of Cygnet River.

L. pseudo-ruderale, Thell.—(R. Te, Be ks, pid eaten Dudley Peninsula. Mlour
Cask Day, Eleanor River, Kingscote, Bay of Shoals.

*Capsella Bursa-pastoris, (1..) Moench—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

Huichinsia procumbens, (1) Desv-—(R. VT. as Capsella procuntbens and in
the Census as C. edfipticu) North Dudley Peninsula, near Pelican Lagoon.

39

*kCoronopus didymus, (L.) Sm--(R. TL as Seniebiera didyma) Dudley
Peninsula.
Cakile maritima, Scop—(R. T.) D’Estrees Bay; (J. B.C.) Vivonne Bay,
Pennington Bay, Middie River.
54. RESEDACEAK.
*Reseda alba, 1.—(]. H. M.) Kingscote.

55. DROSERACKEAE,

xProsera binata, Labill—(}. B. C.) Breakneck Isiver.

D, glanduligera, Lehm.-—(Tepper) Karatta, near inch’s Station; (R. S. RB.)
Middle River (Oct., 1908); (T. G. B. O.) Harriet River (Oct., 1922).

1). Whittakeri, Planch—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula (coll. R. S. Rogers), near
D’Estrees Bay.

D. pygmaea, DC--CR. VT.) Central Dudley Penisula, De Mole River;
(J. B.C.) Breakneck River, Squashy Creek (27 miles east of Cape
Borda).

1). Planchonii, look. £—(R. T. as D. Mensziesit) Near 1)’Estrees Bay, near
Kingscote (coll. R. S. Rogers); (R. S. BR.) Harvey’s Return (Oct.,
1908), Middle River, Western River. Ravine'des Casoars.

1D, euriculata, Backh—(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula, near D’Estrees
Bay, Kingscote, De Mole River; (R.S. R.) Middle River (Oct., 1908) ;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

1), peltata, Sm.—(R. S. R.) Middle River (Oct., 1908).

38. CRASSUT.ACKAR.

Crassula Sieberianu, (Schult.) Ostenf.—CR. T. as Villaea verticillarts)
Dudley Peninsula, Bay of Shoals, Western Cove, De Mole River.

C, bonariensis, (DC.) Cambess. (as Tillaea purpurata) —(R. 5. R.) Cape du

Conédic (Oct., 1908).

C. recurva, (look. £.) Ostenf—(R. T. as Tillaea recurva) Eleanor River.

C. macraniha, (Fook. £.) Diels et Pritzel —CR. T. as Tillaea macrantha)
Gullies of North Dudley Peninsula.

57. SAXIFRAGACEAE.

Banera rubioides, Andr—( Tepper) Grassy and other creeks and at the head
of the S.W. River; (J. B. C.) Breakneck River, Squashy Creek (27
miles cast of Cape Borda); (P. G. B. O.) in peaty swamp near Rocky
River, October and November,

58. DITTOSPORACEAE.

Pittosporum phillyreoides, DC.—(R. T.) KL (Waterhouse), east side of
Bay of Shoals, about Salt |agoon.

Bursaria spinosa, Cav.—-(R. T.) Sandhills at Hog Bay, banks of Hog Bay,
Cygnet, Harriet, and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers; (J. H. M.) Hog Tay;
(j. B. C.) Cygnet River, Vivonne Bay, and Rocky River.

Marianthus bignoniaceus, F. v. M—(R. T.) Thickets under the shade of
sugar-gum trees at Harriet and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers; (J. B. C.)
Rocky River (Nov.).

Cheiranthera linearis, A. Cann—(R. ‘T.) K.1. (Waterhouse ).

Ch. volubilis, Benth—(R. T.) Serub in K.I. (Waterhouse); (J. B. C.)
between Breakneck and Rocky Rivers (Nov.).

Billerdiera cvmosa, Fo v. M-(R. T.) KL. (Waterhouse), throughout
Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote, American River, Elarriet and Stun’ Sail
300m Rivers; (J. B C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay (Nov.).

B. scandens, Sm.—( Tepper) West of Cape Willoughby, Karatta; (J. B. Cc)
between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay (Nov.); (T. G. B. O.) Rocky

River, (Nov., 1922).

40

59. ROSACEAE.
Rubus parvifolins, .—(R. T.) Hog Bay River.
"xR. fruticosus, 1. (Blackberry).—(J. B. C.) Middle River.
*x Rosa rubiginosa, 1. (Sweetbriar)—(TJ. B. C.) Cygnet River.
*Alchemilla arvensis, Scop.—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula,
Acaena ovina, A. Cunn—(R. T.) Pasture slopes by the sea, south of Kan-
garoo ead.
1. Sanguisorbae, (1.. f.) Vahl—(R. T.) K.1. (R. Brown), Dudley Penin-
sula, Kingscote, ete., Mount Pleasant to Stun’ Sail Boom River;
(J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B.C.) Cygnet River,
60. LEGUMINOSAE,

Acacia armata, R. Br.—(R. T.) K.L (R. Brown), common throughout the
Island, forming dense thickets in the calciferous sand-rock formation :
(J. B. C.) Kingscote, Bay of Shoals, Ravine des Casoars; (R. S. Ro)
Harvey’s Return (Oet., 1908).

A. acinacea, Lindl—Near Mount Thisbe (coll. H, Griffith).

A. microcarpa, F. v. M~—(R. T.) Between Rocky Point and Salt Lagoon,
Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) 2? Vivonne Bay.

A. spinescens, Benth—(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula; (R. S. R.)
Harvey’: Return, Ravine des Casoars (Oct., 1908),

“1, dodonarifolia, (Pers.) Willd—(R. T.) K.I. (Batdin’s Expedition ) ;
(R. 5S. R.) Middle River, Stokes’ Bay, Western River (Oct., 1908).

A. brachybotrya, Benth—(R. T.) Murray’s Lagoon (A. acinacea (?) ot
‘Tepper’s List, White’s Lagoon, is, teste Tate, probably this species),

A. rhetinodes, Schl.—(R. T. as A. retinodes) K.I. (Waterhouse), thickets
along watercourses in south-western parts, sandhills round Vivonne Bay
and Hog Bay River, De Mole River; (J. B.C.) Rocky River, between
Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Ravine dés Casears; (R. S. R.) Ravine
des Casoars.

A. ligidata, A. Cunn.—( Tepper as A, salicina, | andl.) Karatta; (R. S. R. as
A. salicina, var. Wayae, Maiden) K.1.; (J. B.C.) Bay of Shoals, Kings-
cote, Rocky River.

A, myrtifolia, (Sm.) Willd., and as var. angustifolia, Benth—(R. T. as A.
myrtifolia with note) De Mole River; (Tepper) between Grassy Creek
and Ravine des Casoars; (J. B. C.) between Kingscote, Vivonne Bay,
and Rocky River, widely distributed; (R. S. R.) Stokes’ Bay, Western
River (Oct., 1908), Mount Pleasant, Rocky River (all as 4. myrtifolia),
Snug Cove (Oct., 1908), Sandy Creek, S.W. River (as var. angustifolia).

A. pycnantha, Benth—(R. T.) North Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.) Cygnet

River, Rocky River; (R. 5S. R.) Rocky River.

“l. notabilis, F. v. Mi—( Tepper) Near Brownlow and elsewhere; (R.S.R.,
identified by J. H. Maiden) Stokes’ Bay, Western River, (Oct., 1908),
Mount Pleasant.

<1. calamifolia, Sweet, var. euthycarpa, J. M. Black.—(R. T. A. calamifolia
is presumably the variety) K.l. (Flora Austr.), Bay of Shoals, south
of Cygnet River, White’s Lagoon; (R.S. R. as 4. calamifolia) Kingscote
(Sept., 1908), Stokes’ Bay, Western River (Oct., 1908),

A, rupicola, PF. v. Mi—(R. ‘l.) Mount Mary, Karatta; (J. B. C.) Vivonne
Bay.

A, farinosa, Lindl.—(R. ‘I.) K.I. (Waterhouse); K.L. in Black’s Flora;
(R. 5. R.) Harriet River, SW. River, Western River, Middle River.
Stokes’ Bay (Oct., 1908); (Tepper) as 4. Whanii, F. v. M., south-
west of Birchmore’s Lagoon.

41

A, verticillata, (L’Ifér.) Willd-—(R. T.) Near Karatta; (J. B. C.) Squashy
Creek; (R. S. R.) De Mole River, Stokes’ Bay (Oct., 1908), Mount
Pleasant; (T. G. B. QO.) Rocky River (Nov., 1923).

A. longifolia, (Andr.) Willd., var. Sophorae, I’. v. M.—A. brevifolia, Tepper’s
List, Stun’ Sail Boom River, is, teste Tate, probably 4. longifolia.
(Tepper) White Gum Valley, south of Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) between
sandhills near the coast, Middle River, Vivonne Bay. Pennington Bay.

Gompholobium minus, Sm—(R. T.) K.-T. (Waterhouse), between American
River and D’Estrees Bay, between Birchmore’s Lagoon and Mount
Pleasant, De Mole River; (J. B.C.) flowers salmon coloured, somctimes
yellow (on mainland usually yellow), Kingscote, Vivonne Bay, Rocky
River road, Rocky River.

Viminaria denudata, Sn—(J. B. ©.) Breakneck River,

Daviesia corymbosa, Sm—(Tepper as var. mimosoides, R. Br.) Karatta,
Stun’ Sail Boom River.

xP), ulicina, Sm.—(R. S. BR.) Harvey’s Return (Oct., 1908); (7. B.C.)
Rocky River. ;
TD. pectinata, Lindl—(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

PD. incrassata, Sm—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), Karatta.

D, genistifolia, A. Cunn.—(R. TV.) Near Kinescote, between Eleanor and
Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers, Central Dudley Peninsula; (R. S. BR.) Stokes’
Bay, Western River (Oct., 1908); (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and
Vivonne Bay, Rocky River.

D. brevifolia, Lindl—(R. T.) Between American River and D’Estrees Bay,
towards Eleanor River, De Mole River; (J. B. C.) between Kingscote
and Vivonne Bay; (R. S. R.) Ritta’s Lagoon (Oct., 1908), Timber
Creek.

Eutaxia microphylla, (R. Br.) J. M. Black—(R. T. as E. empetrifolia)
Kingscote, Mount Pleasant, Eleanor and Harriet Rivers, Central Dudley
Peninsula, Hog Bay River. De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Middle River,
Vivonne Bay road, Rocky River; (R. S. R.) Stokes’ Bay (Oct., 1908),
Western River.

Pultenaca daphnoides, Wendl.—(R. T.) De Mole River; (Tepper) head
of S.W. River; (R. S. R.) De Mole River (Oct., 1908) ; (J. B.C}
between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Rocky River.

P. scabra, R. Br. (uncertain) —(Tepper) Head of S.W. River; “known
by a single specimen in leaf only, collected in 1886 near Birchman’s
(Birchmore’s) Lagoon, and therefore uncertain” (Black’s Flora).

P. teretifolia, Il. B. Williamson, var. brachyphvlia, H. B. Will—Harriet
River (coll. J. G. O. Tepper).

P. involucrata, Benth—P. prostrata in Tepper’s List, Queenscliff, is this
species (Tate).

P. rigida, R. Br-—( Tepper as var. angustifolia, F.v. M.) Mount Taylor; K.1.
in Black’s Flora; (R. S. R.) Western River (Oct., 1908); (J. B.C.)
Rocky River.

P. villifera, Sieb., var. glabrescens, J. M. Black—Western River in Black’s
Flora; (T. G. B. QO.) Cape du Couédic (Nov., 1923). P. willifera of
Tepper’s List, Harriet River, is P. canaltculata, probably (teste Tate ?)
this variety.

TP. laxiflora, Benth—(J. B. C.) Rocky River, betwecn Kingscote and Vivonne
Bay.

+P. laxiflora, var. pilosa, H. B. Williamson—(J. B. C.) Between Kingscote
and Vivonne Bay.

P. acerosa, R. Br—(R. T.) Near D’Estrecs Bay, Central Dudley Peninsula.

42

P. acerosa, var, acicularis, H. B. Williamson.—Harriet River (coll, T. G. B-
Osborn).

P. densifoha, F. v. M—Harrict River (coll. J. G. O, Tepper).

P. rifda, J. M. Black—Snug Cove and telegraph track 12 miles east of Cape

Borda (coll. H. Griffith), bead of Cygnet River (coll. J. G. O. Tepper) ;

(J. B.C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay. ,

P, vestita, R. Br.—Near Karatta (coll. Mrs. Ayliffe).

P. vise idula, Tate—(R. T.) De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Rocky River:
(T.G. B. O. ) Hundred of Ritchie and Breaknoeks Creek (Nov., 1923).

P. tenuifolia, KR. Br—(R. T.) K.I. (Bannier).

P. cymbifolia, J. M. Black.—Between Kingscote and Hundred of Cassini (coll,
H.W. Andtew

IP. (R. T.) Sugar-gum forests at Karatta.]

Phiyllota pleurandroides, EF. v. M—(R. T.) KLL (Waterhouse), south of
Cygnet River, thence common to D’Estrees Bay and Stun’ Sail Boom
River; (J. B. C.) near Cape Borda, Rocky River.

Dilleoyiria hispida, Lindl—(Tepper) Eleanor River; (R.S. R. ) Cape Borda,

D. floribunda, Sm.—(R. T.) K.P. (Waterhouse), near D’Estrees Bay, Dudley
Peninsula (‘T. Willson), De Mole River; (R. 5S. R.} Rocky River, Cape
du or (Oct., 1908), De Mole River (Oct., 1908), Western River,
Stokes’ Bay (Oct., 1908); (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne
Bay. Rocky River (plant with rose-coloured flowers).

Platwlobiuim obtusangulum, Hook—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), Eleanor
pai to Karatta, De Mole River; (R. S. R.) Middle River, Stokes’
Bay, Western River (Oct., 1908); (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and
Vivonne Bay.

Fempletonia relusa, (Vent.) R. Br—(Tepper as Templetonia, probably 7.
retusa) West of Mount Vhisbe, K.1. Gin Black’s Flora).

Goodia lotifolia, Salisb—(R. T. as G. medicaginea) K.I. (Waterhouse),
Kingscote, Cygnet River, throughout Dudley Peninsula; (J. 3. ©.)
Kingscote, Rocky River, Ravine des Casoars; (R.S. R.) De Mole River,
Cape du Couédic, Hlarvey’s Return, Middle River (Oct., 1908).

*x Trifolium procumbens, L.—(J. B. C.) Middle River.
*Melilotus indica, All—(R.T. as M. parviflorus) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.
Rocky River.

*Medicago denticulata, Wilid—(k. T.) Dudley’s Peninsula.

Lotus australis, Andr—(R. 7.) K.l. (Waterhouse), Hog Bay River:
{J. B.C.) Pennington Bay,

TAINSONG lessertiifolia, DC—(R. T.) Hog Bag, American Beach to -log
Bay River, American River, Eleanor Wiser Mount Mary; (J. B. ©.)
Middle River, Rocky River, Cape du Couédic (Nov.); (R. 5S. R.) Stokes’
Bay, Ravine des Casoars (Oect., 1908).

*Vicia sativa, L—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) KI.

*71. sativa, var. angustifolia, Wahl —-(|. B. con Between Vivonne Bay and
Rocky River.

Kennedya prostrata, R. Br—(R. T.) Mount Pleasant to Eleanor River, De
Mole River; (J. B.C.) K.1.; CR. S. R.) Middle River (Oct., 1908).

Llardenbergia monophylla, (Vent.) Benth—(R. T. as Kennedyva monophalla)
South-west of Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula, American River;
(R. S. R.) Cape du Couédic and Stokes’ Bay (Oct., 1908), Western
River, Rocky River.

61, GERANTACEAR,
Geranium pilosuim, Forst., var. potentilloides, Benth. (var. australe, Ostenf.).
—(R. T. as G, Carolinianimn) Dudley Peninsula.

43

Erodiunt cyguorum, Nees —(R. T.) KL in FL Austr.

“2 cicutarium, (L.) LIlér—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

Pelargonium australe, Willd.—(R. ) Dudley Peninsula; CR. S. R.) Cape
du Couédie (Oct., 1908).

2. australe, var. erodioides, Benth——(CR. T.) Bingscate, American River,
D’Estrees Bay, Mount Mary, Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.) Rocky River,
Kingscote, Vivonne Bay road.

62, OX ALIDACEAE.

Ovalis corniculata, L.——(R. T.) Cygnet River, Dudley Peninsula; (R. S. R.)

Harvey's Return; (|. B.C.) Rocky River, Bay of Shoals.
64, ZYGOPHYLLACEAE.

Nitraria Schoberi, 1.—(R. ‘V.) WKingseote, American Beach; (J. B.C.)
Kingscote, The Spit (Beatrice Island).

Zygophyllum Billardieri, DC—(R. T.) KI. (CR. Br.), D’Estrees Bay;
(R. S. R.) Ravine des Casoars (Oct., 1908); (J. B.C.) Pennington
jay, Cape du Couedic (Nov.).

4, anamophilim, F.v. M.—( Tepper) Coast hills, Karatta ; Bes (RS. R.).

[x?Z. prismatothecum, BF. v. M—(R. S. R., so identified by J. H. Maiden. Black
gives this species for |cigh’s Creek to Marree only) Cane du Couedic
Cet., 1908) }.

65, RuvAcEAE.

Zieria veronicea, Fo ve M—cR. 1.) KL in FL Austr., between American
River and D’Estrees Bay.

Boronia Edwardsit, at gen T.) De Mole River; (Tepper) head of
S.W. Rivers (R.S. R.) Stokes’ Bay, Western Riv er. Snug Cove (Oct.,
1908); (J. B. = 9 Rocky ee

B, Soup sce ns, F. v. M.—(R. T.) Between American River and D’Estrees
Bay.

xB. polygalifolia, Sm.—(R. 5. R.) Near Cape Borda (Sept., 1909),

B, filifolia, BL v M—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), D’Estrees Bay, Hawk's

a and Mount Pleasant to Stun’ Sail Boom River, Dudley Peninsula
(T, Willson), De Mole River; (R. S. R.) Kingscote (Sept., 1908},
take du Couédic (Oct., 1908), SW. River: (J. B. C.) between Kings-
cote and Vivonne Bay; (T. G. B. ©.) Flinders Chase, on ironstone
tablelands (Nov.).

B. palustris, Maid. et Black—(R. T. as B. parviflora, probably), De Mole
River, western part of K.I. in Black’s Flora; (J. B. C.) in swamps,
Breakneck River.

Correa aemula, (Lindl.) F. v. M.—( Tepper) Head of S.W. River; (J. B.C.)
on banks of Breakneck River over water; (FP. G. B. ©.) banks of
Rocky River in dense scrub (Nov.).

C. alba, Andr—(R. T.) K.T. (Waterhouse), Dudiey Peninsula, Kingscote
(coll, R. S. Rogers), Cygnet River, Western Cove to American River;

*(R. S.R.) Cape du Couédic (Oct., 1908).

C. rubra, Sm—(R. T. as C. speciosa) Cygnet River, between Birchmore’s and
White’s Lagoons, Eleanor, [farriet, and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers, Mount
Mary, De Mole River; (Tepper) Queenscliff to American Beach;
(R. S. R.) Harvey’s Return (Oct. 1908), Rocky River; (J. B.C.) Cape
du Couédic,

C. rubra, var. glabra, Renth.—( Tepper) Queenscliff; (R. 5. R.) Middle River,
Stokes’ Bay (Oct., 1908), ee “River, Parrot Paddock, Ravine des
Casoars. Rocky River; (J. 2. C.) Kingscote ; (T. GB. ©.) Flinders
Chase, Vivonne Bay (Oct. .

44

C. decumbens, F. vy. M—-(R. T.) KI. (Waterhouse); (J. B. C.) Breakneck
River, Vivonne Bay.

Asterolasia muricata, J. M. Black—On Kingscote road, near Mount Thisbe
(coll, H. Griffith).

Eriostemon brevifolius, A. Cunn—(R. T. as E. difformis) De Mole River:
(R. 5S. R. as E. difformis) Stokes Bay, Middle River (Oct., 1908),
Western River; (J. B, C.) near Vivonne Bay.

Phebalium pungens, (Lindl.) Benth.-De Mole River (coll. H. Griffith).

Microcybe pauciflora, Turez——(R. T. as Eriostemon capitatus) D’Estrees
Bay, between Mount Pleasant and Eleanor River; (j. B. C.) between
Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

Geijera linearifolia, (DC.) Black—(R. T. as G. parviflora) Kingscote, Bay
of Shoals.

66. TREMANDRACEAE,

Tetratheca ericifolia, Sm—(R. J.) K.1. (Heuzenroeder) ; (R. S. R.} Stokes’
Bay, Middle River (Oct., 1908), Western River, Snug Cove; (J. B. C.)
Rocky River (also a scabrous form as mentioned by Bentham } ;
(T. G. B.O.) Flinders Chase, uncommon on ironstone tablelands (Noy. ).

LT. halmaturina, J. M. Black—Cape Cassini (coll. H. Griffith) ; (J. B.C.)
between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River, Rocky River.

67. POLYGALACEAE.

Comesperma volubile, Labill—(R. T.) South parts of Dudley Peninsula.
Western Cove, Kingscote, Salt Lagoon; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.),
Kingscote,

C. calymega, Labill—(R. T.) K.I. (Waterhouse), Central Dudley Peninsula,
near D’Estrees Bay; (J. B. C.) Rocky River, between Kingscote and
Vivonne Bay (Nov.).

C. polygaloides, F. v. M—(R. T.) KL. ( Waterhouse).

68. EupHORBIACEAE,

Phatlanthus australis, Hook. £—(R. T.) White’s Lagoon, Eleanor River:
(J. B. C.) Rocky River, between Kingcote and Vivonne Bay.

P. thymoides, Sieb.—(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula (not given for S.A.
in Black’s Flora).

*tLiuphorbia peplus, L.—(J. B. C.) Kingscote,

Aldriana Klotgschii, (F. v. M.) Muell. Arg-——-(R. T. as <1. quadripartita)
K.I. (Waterhouse), Hog Bay River, Mount Mary; (J. B. C.) Middle
River, Rocky River, between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

Poranthera microphylla, Brongn—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula, American
River; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

P. ericoides, Klotzsch—(R. T.) D’Estrees Bay, White’s Lagoon, between
Mount Pleasant and Eleanor River; (R. S. R.) Harvey’s Return (Oct..
1908), Parrot Paddock; (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

Micranthemum demissum, F. v. M., var. microphyllum, Griining —Snug Cove
(in Black’s Flora), Tate’s record of M. hexandrum, between Harriet
and Eleanor Rivers, is this species; (J. B. C.) Rocky River; (T. G. B.O.)
ironstone tablelands near Timber Creek (Oct.).

Bevyeria Leschenaultii, (DC.) Baill—(R.T. RB. opaca refers probably to this
species on the Island) Common on sandy and stony heath ground,
bushy places and by the sea coast; K.1. (in Black’s Flora); (J. B. C.)
Vivonne Bay, between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Rocky River, Bay
of Shoals.

B, subtecta, }. M. Black—-Cygnet River (in Black’s Flora).

45

Beriva rotundifolia, F. v. M—(R. T.) Cygnet River (Waterhouse), Kings-
cote to American River and Stun’ Sail Room River; (J. B. C.) Lower
Cygnet River, Vivonne Bay; (R. 5S, R.) Stokes’ Bay and Middle River
(Oct., 1908), Western River.

70, STACKITOUSIACEAR.

71.

Stackhousia monogyna, Labill—(CR. T. as S. linariifolia, Records of S. flawa
are probably also this species) NKingscote, Eleanor River, near D’Estrees
Bay (as var. ?), De Mole River (as S. flava); (R. S. R.) Ilarvey’s
Return, Middle River, Stokes’ Bay; (J. B. C.) Cape du Couédic, Rocky
River, between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

S. spathulata, Sieb—(Tepper) Cape du Couédic (coll. A. Molineux);
(J. B.C.) Cape du Couédic, Rocky River.

SAPINDACEAE.

Dodonaea viscosa, L—(R. T.) KL. (Sealey, Waterhouse). See under
D. attenuata; (R. 5S. R.) Kingscote.

YD), attenuata, A. Cann—(R. ‘TV. 2. viscosa, chiefly in the form aflennata)
Kingscote, Western Cove, American River, Hog Bay River, American
Geach, in thickets in the elevated parts of the interior as between
Birchmore’s and White’s Lagoons, along the banks of the south-western
rivers and North Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B.C.)
Kingscote; (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, damp places near Rocky River.

D, Bauer, End—(R. T.) About Kingscote to Emu Creek, American River:
(J. B. C.) Kingscote.

D. bursartifolia, Behr. et F. v. M.—(Tepper) Ravine des Casoars.

D. humilis, End—(R. T.) Near D’Estrees Bay, Eleanor River, Hog Bay
River to Rocky Point, American Beach; (J. H. M.) Cape du Couédic
(coll. R. S. Rogers); (R. S. R.) Cape du Couédic (Sept., 1908) ;
(J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay. Rocky River.

. RITAMNACEAE.

Pomaderris halmaturina, J. M. Black—(J. M. B.) Cygnet River and Hog
Bay River; (R. T. as P. apetala, obviously this species) K.1. (Water-
house).

P. racemosa, Wook.—(R. T.) About American River and Mount Mary, near
Rocky Point, American Beach; var., shady banks of the Cygnet River,
gorge of the Hog Bay River and Deep Creek, Dudley Peninsula.

P. obcordata, Fenzl—(R. T.) Sand-dunes, Mount Mary, between American
Beach and Salt Lagoon, Dudley Peninsula; (R. S, R.) Timber Creek,
Mount Pleasant (Oct., 1908), Parret Paddock; (J. B. ©.) Cape du
Couédic.

Trymalium Wavyi, F, v. M. et Tate-—-Near Kingscote (coll. H. Griffith).

Spyridium spathulatum, F. v. M—(R. T. as S. spathulatum) KA. (Water-
house), Kingscote, American River, etc., to Stun’ Sail Boom River,
Central Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B.C.) Vivonne
Bay road.

S. thymifolium, Reiss—(R. T. as S. obovatum) Forest on the Stun’ Sail
Boom River; (Tepper as Spyridinm pomaderroides, Reiss. (?), and
S. coactilifolium), IX. v. M., which, teste Tate, are Cryptandra obovata,
te., S. thymifolium) Grassy Creek, scrub west of Harrict River.

S. vexilliferum, (Hook.) Reiss —(R. T. as S. vexilliferum) American River,
Kingscote, De Mole River; (J. Il. M.) Ilog Bay {from J. M. Black),
Cape du Couédic (coll. R. S. Rogers), Cape Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers) ;
(CR. S. R.) De Mole River, Rocky River.

7A.

75.

46

S. vevilliferum, var. latifolinm, Benth.—(J. B. C.) Several places on overland
telegraph line to Cape Vorda.

S. phvlicoides, Reiss.—(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road. Rocky River.

S. eriocephalum, Fenzl—(]. H. M.) Hog Bay (from J. M. Black).

S. eriocephatum, var. glabrisepahiun, |. M. Black—Cvgnet River (coll. H.
Griffith).

So halmaturinum, Fo. vy. M.—(R. T.) K.I, (Sealey), Freestone ITill Ra.
(Waterhouse), Western Cove to American River and D’Estrees. Bay.
Cygnet River to the south-west coast. near Rocky River, Dudley Penin-
sula; (R. S. R.) SW. River; (J. B.C.) Vivonne Bay. Rocky River.
near Cape Borda.

S, halmaturinum, var. scabridum, (Tate) J. M. Black.—Between Kingscote
and Karatta (coll. Mrs. Ayliffe), near Cape Borda (coll. S. A. White
and JT, Griffith); (Tepper as Spyridtuim bifidum, F. vy. M., which, teste
Tate, is Cryptandra scabrida, i.e, S. halmaturinum, var. scabridyin)
Karatta; (J. B. C.) near Cape Borda.

S. halmaturinium, var. integrifolium, J. M. Black-—Near Harvey’s Return
(coll. H. Griffith); (J. B.C.) Cape Borda (March).

Cryptandra hispidula, Reiss—(Tepper) Diggers’ Canip, serub south-west of
Kinch’s, Cygnet River (as C. amara, which, teste Tate, is C. hispidula) ;
(J. B.C.) telegraph line 20 miles east of Cape Borda (March), creek
near Ravine des Casoars.

C. leucophracta, Schlecht —(R. TV. as Spyridium leucophractum) K.1.( Water-
house), towards the Eleanor River.

C. Waterhousei, F. v. M.—(R. T. as Spyridium Waterhouse’) At the foot
of the Freestone Hill Range (Waterhouse), American River, White’s
Lagoon, thence to the forest of sugar-gum trees at Karatta, Central
Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road, near
Cape Borda; (R. S. R.) Kingscote, Middle River, Stokes’ Bay.

MALVACEAR.

Lavatera plebeja, Sims—(R. Tl.) Hog Bay River; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

*Walva rotundifolia, .—Tate records M. rotundifolia, as introduced, for
Dudley Peninsula. (This 1s an error of very long standing for *1/.
parvifolia, lL... or *M. nicacensis, All—]. M. B.)

Plugtanthus spicatus, (Hook.) Benth—(R. T.) Salt Lagoon, Emu Creek,
between Kingscote and Cygnet River; (J. B.C.) Curly Creek on Vivonne
Bay road, Rocky River, Bay of Shoals, Pennington Bay, American River.

STERCULIACEAE.

Lasiopetalum discolor, Hook.—(R. T.) K.f. (Waterhouse), near Kingscote ;

,

(J. B. C.) Cape du Couédic (Nov.) ;(R.S. R.) Cape du Couédie,
Ravine des Casoars; (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase.

LL, Behrii, F. v. M~—(R. T.) K.L (Waterhouse); (R. S. R.) Kingscote.

L. Baueri, Steetz—(R. T.) KL. (Waterhouse), Dudley Peninsula and west-
ward to Kingscote and Stun’ Sail Boom River; (J. H. M.) Hog Day;
(J. B.C.) Kingseote (Nov.); CT. G. B. ©.) between Kingscote and
Vivonne Bay.

L, Schulsenti, ¥. vy. M—(R. T.) KL. (Waterhouse), near Rocky Point, at
American Beach, American River, and elsewhere near the coast, rarely
in the interior parts, De Mole River; (R, S. R.) Kingscote, Western
River, Timber Creek, near Karatta, Harvey’s Return; (J. B. C.) Kings-
cote (Nov.), between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay; (1T. G. B. 0.)
Flinders Chase.

76.

79

80

at

47

Thomasia petalocalyx, F. v. M-—(R. T.) KAT. (Waterhouse), American
River, near D’Estrees Bay, Harriet, Eleanor and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers,
Cygnet River, towards Freestone Till Ra., De Mole River; (J. B.C.)
Kingscote. between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay (Nov.); (T.G.B.O.)
Flinders Chase.

DILLENIACEAF,

Hibbertia sericea, (R. Br.) Benth—-(R. TV. as H. densiflora; sce under
H. virgata, var. crassifolia) Near American River; (R.S. BR.) Cape du
Couédic (Oct., 1908), Parrot Paddock, Rocky River, Sandy Creck;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

IT. sericea, var. major, |]. M. Black—(J. M. B.) K.L.

If, sericea, var. scabrifolia, J. M. Black—Cape Borda (coll, H. Griffith);
(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

Hf. stricta, R. Br—(R. T.) Common on sandy and stony heath ground, De
Mole River; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay, Cape Borda (coll, R. S. Rogers ;)
(J. B. C.) Kingseote, Vivonne Bay road, Rocky River.

H. stricta, var. glabriuscula, Benth.—(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road.

H. stricta, var. oblonga, ). M. Black —(J. M. B.) Ravine Creek.

H, Billardieri, F. vy. M.-(R. VT.) Not uncommon on sandy heath ground.
De Mole River; (R. S. R.) S.-W. River, De Mole River, Harvey’s
Return, Western River (Oct., 1908); (J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road,
Rocky River.

Il, virgata, R, Br—( Tepper) Karatta; CR. S. R.) Harvey’s Return (Oct.,
1908), Parrot Paddock. '

H. virgata, var. crassifolia, (Benth.) J. M. Black. American River (in ‘Tate
Herb. as “H. densiflora vel stricta”).

H, fasciculata, R. Br-~-(R. T. as H. fascienlaris) Wet heath ground three
miles east of Karatta, Harrict River; (R. S$. R.) De Mole River (Oct.
1908); (J. B. C.) in grassy glade on bank of Rocky River, telegraph
line 20 miles from Cape Borda.

. GUTTIFERAE,

Hypericum gramineum, Forst. £—(R. T., probably, as 17. japonicum)
Among rocks on the upland country about American Beach; K.L. (in
Black’s Flora); (Wood Jones) Rocky River.

. FRANKENIACEAE,

Frankenia pauciflora, DC—(R. T. as I. laevis) Bay of Shoals, Nepean Bay,
Flour-cask Bay, Pelican Lagoon; (J. H. M.) Cape du Couedic (coll.
R. S. Rogers}; (J. B. C.) mouth of Cygnet River, Middle River.

. VIOLACEAE,

Viola hederacea, Labill—(R. TV.) KI. (Waterhouse), De Mole River;
(R. S. R.) Ravine des Casoars; (J. B. C.) Cape du Couedic, Rocky
River.

xV. Sieberiana, Spreng—(C]. BR. C.) Rocky River.

. THYMELAEACEAE,

Pimelea glauca, R. Br-—(Tepper) Coast hills, Naratta; (J. H. M.) Cape
Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers), Cape du Couédic (coll. R. S. Rogers);
(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road, Rocky River.

P. stricta, Meisn.—-(R. T.) K.1. (Heuzenroeder); (R. 5. R.) Stokes’ Ray
Middle River, S.W. River.

P. spathulata, Labill—-(R. TP.) Near American River, Kingscote (coll. R. 5.
Rogers), Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River.

48

P. macrostegia, (Benth.) J. M. Black.—(J. M. B.) K.1.; (R. T. has P.
ligustrina) Sandy scrub, K.1. (Waterhouse), Hawk's Nest, Eleanor
River, De Mole River; (CR. 35. R.) S.W. River, Ritta’s Lagoon; GC. B.C.)
Vivonne Bay road.

[P. microcephala, R. Br r—(R.T.) KL. CR. Brown). In spite of R. Brown’s
record its occurrence seems doubtful. In Black’s Flora the species is
given for Murray lands and north thereof. |

P. flava, R. Br—(R T.) Near American River (Waterhouse), Mount
Pleasant to the Eleanor River, Central Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River;
(J. B. C.) Rocky River; (R, Ss. R.) Middle River, Western River,
Sandy Creek; (T. G. B. 0.) Harriet River rg

P. serpyllifolia, R. Br—(R.. T.) Kingscote (coll. R. S. Rogers), between
American River and D’Estrees Bay, Vivonne Bay, coast tracts of Dudley
Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Kingscote, between Vivonne Bay and Rocky
River, Middle River; (R. S. R.) Ravine des Casoars.

P. curviflora, R. Br see Thy T.) Hog Bay River.

P. octophylla, R. Br—(R. T.) K.I. (Waterhouse), Cygnet River, Redbanks
to American River and byRetres Bay and along the south coast, De
Mole River; (R. S. R.) Stokes’ Bay, Middle River, Sandy Creek;
(J. B.C.) Vivonné Bay Road; (T. G. B. ©.) Flinders Chase (Nov.).

P, phaticotdes, Meisn.—(R. T.) Between American River and D’Estrees Bay.
De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road, Rocky River.

82. LYTHRACEAE.
xLiuthrum Hyssopifolia, L—(J. B. C.) Lower Cygnet River,
83. MvyRTACEAE,

Baeckea ramosissima, A. Cunn.—(Tepper as B. diffusa, Sieb.) Dudley
Peninsula; (R. T. as B. diffusa) De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Rocky
River; (R. S. R.) Hatvey’s Return, Western River.

B. ericaea, F. v. M—(R. T. as B. crassifolia, probably really B. ericaea)
K.I. (Waterhouse).

Leptospermum coriaceum, (F. vy. M.) Cheel—(R. T. as L. laevigalum)
KI. (Fragm., Phyt.); (Tepper as L. erubescens, which, teste Tate,
is L. laevigatum, te., L. corraceum) head of S.W. River.

L. scoparium, Forst. et ‘£—(R. T.) K.I. (Waterhouse), common on the
wet sandy heaths of the main mass of the Island, De Mole River;
(J. B. C.) between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River, telegraph line to
Cape Borda.

L. pubescens, Lamk.—(R. T. as L. lanigerum) Margins of the south-western
rivers; (J. B. C.} between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River, Stun’ Sail
Boom River, Rocky River, Squashy Creck (27 miles east of Cape
Borda), widespread in marshes.

L. myrsinoides, Schl.—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), Stun’ Sail Boom River;
(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road.

Kunzea pomifera, F. v. M.—(R. T.) Sandhills, Vivonne Bay; (J. B.C.)
Pennington Bay, between Vivonne Bay and Rocky River.

Callistemon rugulosus, DC-—(R. T. as C. cocctneus) KI. (in FL. Austr.),
claypans throughout the Island, Hog Bay River, Central Dudley Penin-
sula; (J. Il. M. as C. coccineus) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Bay of Shoals,
Middle River, Vivonne Bay road, widely spread; (T. G. B. O.) Rocky
River (Nov.).

Melaleuca gibbosa, Labill——(R. T.) K.I. (Waterhouse), Common on heathy
ground and around claypans; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay, Cape du Couédic
(coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B. C.) near Vivonne Bav; (R. S. R.)
Kingscote.

49

M. decussata, R. Br., var. ovoidea, J. M. Black.—(Tepper, probably, as
M. decussata) Mount Tisbet; (J. B. C.) widespread on barren hills.

M. squarrosa, Donn.—(R. T.) KL. CR. Brown); (J. H. M.) Kingscote.

M. acuminata, F. v. M—(R. T.) KI. (R. Brown, Waterhouse), Kings-
cote, common throughout Dudley Peninsula.

M. halmaturorum, F. v. M.—(R. tT. as M. pustulata) KI. (Waterhouse),
generally distributed in salt swamps and by the sea, Murray’s [agoon,
about Mount Pleasant; (J. B. C.) near salt water, widely distributed.

M. squamea, Labill. var. glabra, Cheel—(Tepper as L. squamea, Labill)
S.W. River; (J. B. C.) in swamps, Tin Hut and Squashy Creek (on
telegraph line to Cape Borda). Rocky River.

M, pubescens, Schau.—(R. T. as M. parviflora) KI. (Waterhouse), Kings-
cote to the Freestone IIill Ra., Mount Mary, common throughout Dudley
Peninsula; (Tepper as M. ericifolia, Smith, which, teste ‘Tate, is
M. parviflora) Kingscote, Cape du Couédic (coll. R. S. Rogers) ;
(J. B.C.) widely distributed, known as “Black Tea-Tree,” Kingscote,
Vivonne Bay road, etc.

M. uncinata, R. Br-—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), the chief constituent of
the sandy heath ground, Central Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog
Bay; (J. B.C.) abundant along the Vivonne Bay road, but not extending
far along the telegraph line to Cape Borda.

M. fasciculiflora, Benth—(J. B. C.) Prostrate shrubs a few inches high on
exposed slopes at Cape du Couédic and Cape Lorda, 5 feet high and
upright between Rocky and Breakneck Rivers.

[M. cylindrica, reported by Tate for “B.L, R. Brown,” is an error as to
locality, vide Black’s Flora. |

Eucalyptus obliqua, L’Herit—(R. J.) Dividing ridge between Birchmore’s
Lagoon and Mount Pleasant, De Mole River; (J. B.C.) Tin Hut
(telegraph line to Cape Borda).

L. diversifolia, Bonpl—(R. T. as £. santalifolia) KI. (R. Br.), chiefly near
the coast around Dudley Peninsula, Cygnet River, American River, W hite
Lagoon; (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Rocky River
(also as a small fruited form with clean stems on hills).

E. Baxteri, (Benth.) Maiden et Blakely.—(R. T. as E. capitellata) Between
Mount Pleasant and Stun’ Sail Boom River, De Mole River; (J. B. C.)
telegraph line to Cape Borda, Rocky River.

[E. largiflorens, no author.—Cygnet River (Waterhouse), mentioned by Tate,
cannot be the River Box of the Murray, E. largiflorens, F. vy, M., syn.
E. bicolor, A. Cunn. Perhaps it is E. fasciculosa (see Black’s Flora) |.

E. odorata, Behr et Schlecht—-(Tepper) Near Antechamber Bay.

E. hemiphloia, K.1. (R. Brown), The Wells, Western Cove, Nepean Bay, of
Tate’s List, is not likely to be E. mierocarpa, Maid., syn. E. hemiphloia,
F. v. M., partly, of Black’s Flora.|

E. leptophylla, F. v. M.—(Tepper as E. uncinata, Turcz.) Scrub west of the
Harriet River; (R. S. R.) Harriet River, Timber Creek.

E. cneorifolia, DC-—(R. T.) KL (R. Brown), northern and western parts
of Dudley Peninsula and westward along the north coast to Smith’s
Bay; (J. B. C.) near Kingscote to 24 miles on Vivonne Bay road, to
American River, and to about 10 miles on the Middle Bay road at
Wishanger.

E. oleosa, F. v. M—K.1, (in Black’s Flora).

E. cladocalyx, F. v. M—(R. T. as £. corynocalyx) Freestone Till Ra.,
American River, chief constituent of the forest growth on the Cygnet,
Eleanor and other rivers, De Mole River; (J. B. C.) widely distributed
on better land.

Ba

an

0

E, cosmophylla, F. vy. M—(R. T.) KT. (Waterhouse), a chief constituent
of the scrub on stony ground, from the Cygnet River to American River
and Stun’ Sail Boom River, De Mole River; CR. S. R.) Harriet River.
Timber Creek; (J. B. C.) widely distributed,

fi, rostrata, Schl—(R. T.) Cygnet River (Waterhouse, Tate), Discovery
Flat; (J. B.C.) Lower Cygnet River.

&. viminalis, Labill—(R. T.) KL (R. Brown), Cygnet River among
E. corynocaly; (J. B. C.) Rocky River, Cygnet River.

E. angulosa, Schau—(R. T. as E. incrassata, probably in part; see under
E, dumosaj; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

£. conglobata, (R. Br.) Maiden, var. anceps, CR. Br.) Maiden.—(R. T..
E. incrassata, probably in part; see under £, dumosa); (J. B.C.)
Rocky River.

£, dumosa, A. Cunn—(R. T. as FE. incrassalta, chiefly) K.T. (Baudin’s
Eexped.), Freestone Hill Ra., Bay of Shoals, American River, Eleanor
River. The varietal form duimosa constituted the chief mass of the
mallee scrub throughout the Island; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River,

E. elaeophora, ¥. v. M.—(Vepper as FE. goniocalyx, F. v, M.) Hog Bay
River; KI. Gin Black’s Flora).

£. ovata, Vabill—k.1. (in Black’s Flora) ; (J. B.C.) on flats, Rocky River.

FE, leucoxylon, F. v. M.—(R. I.) Western and southern parts of Dudley
Peninsula, Twelve-tree Flat between Bay of Shoals and Cygnet River,
banks of Cygnet, Eleanor, and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers (probably
var. macrocarpa included); (J. B. C.) Eleanor River, Stan’ Sail Boom
River (probably var. macrocarpa included),

E, leucoxyion, var. macrocarpa, J. E. Brown—K.1. (in Black’s Flora).

+. calycogona, Turez.—(R. I. as E. gracilis, probably ) stony heath ground
from Mount Pleasant to Stun’ Sail Boom River.

E. fasciculosa, F. v. M—(R. TV. as E. paniculaia} Banks of the Cygnet
River (Waterhouse); (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

[Z£. Steberiana, Y. v. M., recorded by Tepper for Harvey’s Return and in
‘Tate’s Census for K.I. and the south-east of S.A., may be #, vitrea,
R. T. Baker, The locality (Harvey’s Return) will hardly ft F.
cneorifolia. |

Darwinia micropetala, (F.v. M.) Benth—(R. T.) K.1, (Bannier) ; (J. B.C.)
Vivonne Bay, Rocky River, telegraph line to Cape Borda; (R. S. BR.)
‘Lumber Creck.

Micromyrtus ciliata, (Sm.) J. M. Black—(R. T. as Thryptomene ciliata)
De Mole River.

Thryptomene ericaea, F. v. M—(R. T.) KI. (Bannier, Waterhouse), heath
near Kingscote and American River; (J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay road;
(R. S. R.) Ritta’s Lagoon, VTimber Creek.

Calythria tetragona, Labill—(R. T.) K.1. Gn Fl, Austr.), Kingscote, Bay
of Shoals, American River, Mount Pleasant to Karatta, Hog Bay River;
(Tepper as Calycothrix sp. or var., which, teste Tate, is not distinct from
C. tetragona except by its smaller pubescent leaves) west of Western
River; (J. H. M.) Cape Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B. C.) Cape
Borda, Vivonne Bay, widely distributed; (R. S. R.) Stokes’ Bay,
Harvey’s Return, Middle River, Western River. ,

Lhotskya glaberrima, F. v, M—(R. T.) KI. (Bannier), sandy heath ground
near D’Estrees Bay and from Mount Pleasant to Karatta; (J. B.C.)
Vivonne Bay road, Vivonne Bay; (R. S. R.) Kingscote,

51

L. glaberrima, var. magnisepala, J. M. Biack.—Middle and western end of
K.1. (Black’s Flora); (J. B. C.) near Cape Borda (March), Vivonne
Ray road; (‘T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, sandy soil on road to Cape du
Couédie (Nov.).

L. Smeateniana, F. v. M.—( Tepper) Waratta.

84. OENOTITERACEAE.
*xOenothera, probably O. odorata, Jacqg—(}. B. C.) Rocky River.
xEpilobinan junceum, Sol—(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

E, glabellum, Forst—(R. T., probably as £. fetragonum) Inundated ground
throughout Dudley Peninsula, Discovery Flat, Cygnet River, Tlawk’s
Nest, American River; K.J. (in Black’s Flora); (T. G. B. O.) Flinders
Chase, by waterhole in Rocky River (Oct.).

85. TLALORRITAGIDACEAE.

Loudonia Behrii, Schlecht —(R. ‘T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), American River to
Karatta, De Mole River; (R.S. R.) Kingscote, Middle River; (Tepper )
Karatta (15/11/86); (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay,
along telegraph line to Cape Borda, Rocky River.

[L.. aurea, Lindl—(Tepper) Banks of a lagoon south of the head of the
S.W. River, head of Cygnet River to Karatta (4/3/86). Not given for
k.L. in Black’s Flora. |

Halorrhagis tetragyna, (Labill.) Hook. [.—(R. T.) Discovery Flat; (J. B.C.)
Rocky River; (T. G. B. ©.) Ilarrict River,

H. teucrioides, DC-—(R. T.) Kingscote to D’Estrees Bay and Eleanor River,
Central Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. H. M.) Cape Borda
(coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.
Lake Ada.

H. teucrioides, var. megiana, (Schind.) J. M. Black—K.T. Gin Black’s Flora).

H. micrantha, (Vhunb.) R. Br—tJ. B.C.) Squashy Creek (telegraph line to
Cape Borda).

H. elata, A. Cunn.—In Vate’s Census; ? (J. B.C.) Rocky River.

x1. heterophylla, Brongn.—(J. B. C.) Rocky River.

H. mucronata, (Nees) Benth.—(R. ‘T.) KL. (CR. Brown).

H. Brownii, (Hook. #.) Schindl.—K... (in Black’s Flora); (J. B. C.)
Squashy Creck (27 miles east of Cape Borda).

H. acutangula, ¥. v. M-—(J. B. C.) Tn sandhills, Rocky River.

Myriophyllum amphibiwm, Lab—(J. B.C.) Creck near Ravine des Casoars
(March, 1926).

M. propinguwm—(R. T. as M. variifolium) Eleanor and Stun’ Sail Boom
Rivers; (J. B. C.) Rocky River, Squashy Creek (27 miles east of Cape
Borda). :

M. clatinoides, Gand.—(R. T.) Cygnet River; (T. G. B. O.) Finders Chase.
watcrhole in Rocky River (Nov.).

M. Muelleri, Sond—(Tepper) Stun’ Sail Boom River (Oct., 1886);

(J. B. C.) Lower Cygnet River; (Tf. G. B. O.) fresh-water swamp near
Harriet River (Nov.).
UMBELLIFERAE.

Centella asiatica, (L.) Urb. —(R. T. as Hydrocotyle asiatica) Cygnet and

Eleanor Rivers.
xXanthosia pusilla, Bunge—(J. B. C.) Rocky River,

X. dissecta, Hook. f.--(R. T.) K.I. (in FL. Austr.), near American River,
Eleanor River; (Tepper) Mount Pleasant to Birchmore’s Lagoon
(8/11/86), Ravine des Casoars (28/2/86); (J. B.C.) Rocky River.

oe

Hydrocotyle laxiflora, DC—(R. T.) Under Eucalyptus leucorylon in the
gorge of the Elog Bay River.

ff, hirta, R. Br —(R. T.) Thickets, White Gum Valley, Dudley Peninsula.

H. comocarpa, F. v. M.—(Tepper) K.1.

fT. tripartita, R. Br—(R. T.) Cygnet, Eleanor and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers.

H. callcarpa, Bunge—(R. ‘T.) Mossy banks in gullies, under shade of
thickets, and wet heath ground, Central Dudley Peninsula; (Tepper)
Karatta (15/11/86); (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

Af. crassiuseula, Fv. M—(R. T.) Heath ground, Central Dudley Peninsula ;
(J. B.C.) Rocky River (Nov.),

A, capillaris, F. v. M—(R. T.) KL. (in FL. Austr.), wet banks of creeks.
Dudley Peninsula, on burnt heath ground, Central Dudley Peninsula.

FT, diantha, DC—(Tepper) Karatta (9/11/86).

Didiscus pusillus, (DC.) F. vy, M—(R. T.) Near Rocky Point, Dudley
Peninsula.

Lilacopsis ausiralica, (F. v. M.) A. W. Hill—(R. T. as Crantzia lineata)
Harriet River, Cygnet and Eleanor Rivers.

Eryngium rostratum, Cav.—K.I. (in Black’s Flora).

£. vesiculosum, Labill—(R. T.) Birchmore’s Lagoon, Hawk’s Nest, Eleanor
and Stun’ Sai! Boom Rivers; (Tepper) Karatta (5/3/86).

Daucus glochidiatus, (Labill. ) Fisch—(R. T. as D. brachiatius) Emu Creek,
Kingscote, De Mole River, Western Cove, American River, throughout
Dudley Peninsula ; (Tepper) Karatta (16/11/86).

*Torilis nodosa, (L.) Gacrtn.—K.1, (in Black’s Flora).

Lrachymene heterophyllc, F. v. M.—(R. T.) Between American River and
D’Estrees Bay, White Lagoon, Eleanor River; (J. B. C.) Cape Borda.

Apium australe, Pet.-Thou.—(R. T. as A, prostratum) Salt Lagoon, Bay of
Shoals, ete., seacliffg on the south coast, Cygnet, Eleanor, and other
rivers, throughout Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. H. M.) Hog
Bay; (Tepper) Karatta (15/11/86); (J. B. ©.) Middle River ;
(T. G. B. O.) Cape du Couédic.

*xFoeniculum vulgare, Mill—(J. B. C.) Bay of Shoals,
87. EPACRIDACEAE,

Styphelia exarrhena, F. vy. M., var. hirtella, J. M. Black—(Tepper as
Styphelia hirtella) Scrub lands, Mount Pleasant.

Astroloma humifusum, (Cav.) R. Br.—(R. T. as Styphelia humifusa) 1.1.
(in Fl. Austr.), common on heaths, sandhills at Mount Mary; (J. B.C.)
Vivonne Bay.

Al. conostephioides, (Sond.) F. v. M.—(R. T. as Styphelia Sonderi) K.1,
(in Fl. Austr.), heathy grounds at American River, Mount Pleasant.
Eleanor River and Central Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. H. M.)
Cape Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B.C.) KL; (T. GB. O.}
Flinders Chase, in dense scrub (Oct. and Nov.).

Lissanthe strigosa, (Sm.) R. Br.—(R. T. as Styphelia strigosa) Mount
Pleasant; (R. S. R.) Middle River, Timber Creek, Stokes’ Bay, Mount
Pleasant.

Leucopogon parviflorus, (Andr.) Lindl—(R. T. as L. Richei) K.I. (in FI.
Austr.), sand-dunes, Nepean Bay, American River, Vivonne Bay,
American Beach; (R. S. R. as L. Richei) Ravine des Casoars.

?L, lanceolatus, (Sm.) R. Br.—See remarks in Black’s Flora on a small
specimen from Rocky River, K.I., which may be this species.

L. harsutus, Sond —(Tepper as Styphelia hirsuta, Y. vy. M.) On the banks of
swampy rivulets; K.T. (in Black’s Flora).

53

I. costatus, F. v. M.—K.1. (in Black’s Flora).

L. concurvus, F. v. M—(R. T. as Styphelia concurva) Stony heath ground,
Harrict and American Rivers, stringy-bark scrubs near Birchmorc’s
Lagoon, De Mole River; (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase,

L. rufus, Lindl—(R. T. as Styphelia rufa) KA (Sealey, Waterhouse),
sandy heath ground, near American River, Birchmore’s Lagoon to Mount
Pleasant and Karatta, Central Dudley Peninsula; (T. G. B, O.) Vivonne
Bay (Oct.)

L. Woodsit, F.v. M—(Tepper as Stvphelia Woods) Limestone hills west of
Mount Tisbet.

L. Clelandii, Cheel—Described from Coonalpyn (in flower). A specimen
from K.I. in fruit only appears to be the same species (Black’s Flora).

(Styphelia striata, Spreng. (L. striatus, R. Br.), is given by Tate for heaths
about American River and from Mount Pleasant to Karatta. In his
Flora he refers it to his W. District (west of Lake Torrens). Perhaps
a confusion with L. costalis.)

Acrotriche serrulata, (Vabill.) R. erigh er acd Styphetia serrulata, Lab.,
var.) Head of South-western, ete.; (J. ) Middle River.

A, patula, R. Br.—(R. T. as Sivphelia i ain KL Gin Fl, Austr.), Western
Cove, stony ridge south of Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula.

A. cordata, (Labill.) R. Br—-(R. T. as Styphelia ovalifolia) Sand-dunes,
Vivonne Bay,

A, depressa, R. Br —(R. T. as Stypheha depressa) Kl. (OR. Brown), widely
distributed, Dudley Peninsula, Kingscote, White Lagoon, etc; (J. B. C.)
Bay of Shoals, telegraph line to Cape Borda, ete. ; S(T, G. BO. VE indbes
Chase, in dense scrub.

A fasciculiflora, (Regel.) Benth--(R. T.) De Mole River; (Tepper)
Grassy Creek.

Brachyloma ericoides, (Schlecht.) Sond. —(R. T.) Kil. Gn Fl. Austr.),
sandy heath ground between American River and |)’Estrees Ray.

Epacris impressa, Labill—(R. YT.) De Mole River, S.W. River (coll.
Tepper): (J. B. C.) near swamps in centre of the Island; (R. S. R.}
Middle River, Stokes’ Bay, Western River, Rocky River, Sun Cove.

Sprengelia incarnata, Sm.—(R. T.) S.W. River (coll. Tepper); (J. B.C.)
Squashy Creek (27 miles east of Cape Borda) and other swamps along
the telegraph line; (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, peaty swamp near
boundary at Rocky River.

88. PRIMULACEAE.

* TS pee terat I.—(R. TP.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay;
J.B.) K

*A. femina, a. B, C.) Cygnet River.

Samolus repens, (Forst.) Pers-—(R. T.) Cygnet River, Bay of Shoals,
Murray’s Lagoon, Eleanor River, Salt Lagoon, seaclitfs at Hog Bay
River, Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Middle River, cliffs at Cape du
Couédic.

mT

91. LOGANIACEAE.

Mitrasacme paradoxa, R. Br.—(R. T.) Mossy banks and wet sandy heath
ground, Dudley Peninsula) De Mole River; (Tepper) Karatta
(15/11/86).

M. distylis, Y. v. M—(R. T (coll. ‘Lepper, recorded by Baron von
Mucller, Vict. Naturalist, 1880).

Logania cras. sifolia, R. Br—(R. T.) Seaclitis, D’Estrees Bay; (J. TR. ©.)
Vivonne Bay, cliffs at Cape du bousiic,

54

L. ovata, WK. Br—(R. T.) KT. (Waterhouse), American River, White’s
[.agoon, Mount Pieasant to Karatta, between Rocky Point and Salt
Lagoon, Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (Tepper. 71. crassifolia)
Karatta (15/11/86), Ravine des Casoars; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River,
Rocky River, between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay; ¢(R. S. RY De
Mole River, Middle River, Stokes’ Bay, Ravine des Casoars.

L. lintfolia, Schlecht.—-K.1. (in Black’s Flora).

L, msularis, |. M. Black——Cape Borda (Oct.) (in Black’s Flora); (J. B.C.)
Cape Borda.

92. GENTIANACEAE,

Sebaea ovata, R. Br—(R. T.) KI. (Heuzenrocder), Eleanor River,
D’Estrees Bay, throughout Dudley Peninsula; (Tepper) Karatta
(14/11/86); (J. Il. M.) Cape du Couédie (coll, R. S. Rogers):
(J. B. C.) Rocky River.

Lrythraea australis, R. Br—(J. H. M.) Hog Bay.

“xl, Centaurium, Pers—(J. B.C.) Rocky River.

Villarsia exaltata, (Sims) F. v. M—(Tepper as Limnanihemun sp.. pro-
bably) Ravine des Casoars; (Tepper Herb.) Karatta (16/11/86), head
of SW. River (3/3/86); (J. B.C.) Squashy Creek (27 miles east of
Cape Borda), Rocky River; (TV. G. B. ©.) Harriet River, Flinders
Chase (Breakneck River).

93, APOCYNACEAE,

Alyxia buxifolia, R. Br—(R. T.) Seaclitfs, Bay of Shoals, Kingscote,
Western River, American River; (J. H. M.) Kingscote; (J. B. C.)
Kingseote, Middle River.

95, CONVOLVULACEAE.

Convolvulus erubescens, Sims—-( Tepper) Coast hills, Karatta (12/11/86),
Bay of Shoals, Queenscliffe (20/11/86) ; (J. B. C.) Kingscote.

Dichondra repens, Forst. et {—(R. 1.) Throughout Dudley Peninsula, Free-
stone Hill Range, Kingscote, American River, Eleanor River; (Tepper)
Karatta (15/11/86); (J. B. C.) Cygnet River.

IWilsonia humilis, R. Br—(R. T.) Salt Lagoon by Pelican Lagoon.

W. rotundifolia, Jlook—(R. T.) Bay of Shoals and Salt Lagoon, Murray's
Lagoon,

I’. Backhouse, Hook. £—(R. T.) Margin of Salt Lagoon by Flour-cask
Bay.

G6. ORRAGINACEAE.

Halgania lavandulacea, Endl.—(Tepper) Head of the S.W. River to Ravine
(28/11/86),

ATyosotis australis, R. Br—(R. TY.) Shady gullies and thickets throughout
Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (Tepper) Karatta (2/11/86).

*Lithospermum arvense, 1.—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula.

98. LABLATAE.

Ajuga australis, R. Br—(R. T.) KL. (Waterhouse), Cygnet River, Hog
Bay River.

“Marrubium, vulgare, L—(R. 7.) Kl; (J. H. M.) Kingscote; (7. B.C.)
Bay of Shoals, Pennington Bay.

Sceutellaria iuemilis, R. Br-—-(R. T.) K.I. (UR. Brown, Sealey), thickets on
the sand-dunes at Hog Bay and American Beach, at Hog Bay River.
Mopehawk Gully.

53

Prostanthera spinosa, F. v. M-(R. T.) Near Wallan’s Hut and Cygnet
Bay (Waterhouse, in Frag. Phyt.), bushy places, Cygnet and Stun’ Sail
300m Rivers, etc., heath ground from Mount Pleasant to Karatta, De
Mole River; (Tepper) Diggers’ Camp (26/2/86), Karatta (Nov.,
1886), Cygnet River (28/2/86); (J. H. M.) Cape Borda (coll. RS.
Rogers; (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay; (R. S. RB.)
Ritta’s Lagoon, Harvey’s Return, Middle River; (T. G. B. ©.) Ilinders
Chase, in dense scrub (28/10/24).

P. aspalathoides, A. Cunn—(R. T. as P. coccinea, sec below) Sandy scrub
(Waterhouse), common about Kingscote and American River, near
Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula; K.1. (in Black’s Flora).

P. microphylla, (R. Br.) A. Cunn-~(R. T. as P. coccinea, see above): KL
(in Black’s Flora).

P. chlorantha, F. v. M—(R. T.) Cygnet River (Waterhouse); (J. B.C.)
between Iingscote and Vivonne Bay (Nov.).

Westringia angustifolia, R. Br-—(R. T., W. rigida, refers to this species
ot the following or both) Dudley Peninsula (IT. Willson).

IW. Dampieri, R. Br—Coast of K.I. (in Black’s Flora).

99, SOLANACEAE.

Solaman nigrum, \.—(). H. M.?) Kingscote; (J. B.C.) Wishanger.

S. simile, F. v. M—(R. T.) KL CR. Brown), towards Kangaroo Head and
Hog Bay River, Kingscote, American River, Eleanor River; (Miss
Featherstone) MacGillivray (Sept.); (J. B.C.) Rocky River, Kingscote,
Vivorme Bay road.

*§ sodomaeum, L—(R. T.) K.1.; (J. H. M.) Mog Bay.
Lycium australe, F. v. M—(J. U1. M.) Kingscote, Hog Bay.
*xL. ferocissium, Miers—(]. B. C.) Kingscote, Beatrice Island.

*xDatura Stramonium, 1.—(J. B. C.) Kingscote.

Nicoliana suazcolens, Lehm.—(R. T.) By the sea shore (Leschenault). rocks
by the sea. north and north-west coasts of Dudley Peninsula, gorge of
the Hog Bay River.

Anthocercis mvyosotidea, F. v. M.—(R. T.) Wet sandy heath between -\mert-
can River and D’Estrees Bay.

100. ScropH ULARIACEAE.
*xVerbascum virgatum, With—(J. 8. C.) Wishanger.
*Celsea cretica, L. f£—CR. T.) KL.

Mimulus repens, R. Br—(R. T.) Uog Bay, Cygnet and Eleanor Rivers ;
(J. B.C.) Lower Cygnet River.

Gratiola peruviana, L—(R. T.) K.L. (Waterhouse), Cygnet and Stun’ Sail
Boom Rivers; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River, Rocky River.

Limosella aquatica, L.—(R. 7.) KL. (R. Brown).

Glossostigma spathulalum, Wight et Arn—Crecks and swamps, K.1. (in
Black’s Flora).

Veronica Derwentia, Andr—(Tepper) Ravine des Casoars; (J. B. ©.)
Rocky River, Ravine des Casoars.

V. distans, R. Br.—(R. I.) Sand-dumes and calciferous sandrock, Llog Bay
River, Rocky Point, American River, Mount Mary; (Tepper Herb.)
Eleanor River (18/11/86), Karatta coast hills (12/11/88), Mount
Taylor (13/11/86), Cape du Couédic (coll. A. Molyneux ) (14/11/86) ;
(J. B. C.) Vivonne Bay, Cape du Couédic (in bare soil, sending out
rooting runners), Rocky River.

IV. calyeina, R. Br-—CR. T.) KI. (Waterhouse ).

56

Enphrasia collina, R. Br—(R. T. as E. Brownii) Seacliffs, 1)’Estrees Bay;
(Tepper Herb.) Karatta coast hills (12/11/86), cliffs, Cape du Couédic
(Nov.); (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase.

[Buechnera linearis, R. Br. ?—(J. H. M.) In fruit only, doubtful in absence
of flowers, Cape du Couédie (coll, R. S. Rogers).]

LLENTIBULARIACEAE,

Utricularia dichotoma, Labill——(Tepper) S.W. River, Karatta (17/11/86) ;
(Tepper Herb.) head of Cygnet River (3/3/86); (J. B. C.) Break-
neck River, Squashy Creek (27 miles east of Cape Borda).

Polvpompholyx tenella, Leham.—(R. T.) Margin of runnels on heathy ground,
Central Dudley Peninsula.

106. MYopoRACEAE.

Afyvoporum insulare, R. Br—(R.V.) By the coast around Dudley Peninsula,
Nepean Bay, etc.; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) common near the
coast, between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Ravine des Casoars.

M. viscosum, R, Br—(R. T.) KJ. (in Frag. Phyt.), Kingscote, American
River, Cygnet, Eleanor and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers, sand-dunes at
Mount Mary, common in the mallee scrub, Dudley Peninsula; (J. B.C.)
Kingscote; (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, in dense scrub by Rocky
River, Harrict River.

AM, parvifolium, R. Br-—(R. T.) Hawk’s Nest; (J. B. C.) Rocky River.

Lremophila Behriana, ¥. v. M—(R. T.) KI. (Waterhouse), wet heath,
D’Estrees Bay.

£. glabra, (R. Br.) Ostenf—(R. T. as E. Brownii) K.1. (Waterhouse),
common on heath and coast plains, rare in mallee scrub on the north coast
of Dudley Peninsula; (R. S. R.) Kingscote; (J. B. C.) Kingscote.

107. PLANTAGINACEAE.

Plantago varia, R. Br-—-(R. T.) KI. (R. Brown as P. parviflora),
(Waterhouse), Discovery Flat, Cygnet River, Eleanor River, Dudley
Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. B. C.) Pennington Bay.

*P. lanceolata, (R. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River.

108. Rupracear, .
xOpercularia scabrida, Schl.—(J. B. C.) Rocky River.

QO. hispida, Spr.—(J. H. M., determination doubtful, seeds like those of
O. aspera) Hog Bay.

QO. varia, Hook—(R. T.) Central Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River ;
(Tepper as ©. ovata, J. Hook., which, feste Tate, is this species )
Karatta; (J. B. C.) Lake Ada, Kingscote, Vivonne road, Rocky River.

Asperula Gunnti, Hook. £—(R. T. as A. oligantha, F. ‘vy. M.)
KI. (coll. Tepper), the leaves four in a whorl and broadly ovate;
(J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.), Kingscote, Vivonne Bay road.

A. scoparia, Hook. f—K.I. (in Black’s Flora).

Galium umbrosum, Sol—(R. T.) Western Cove, American River, Dudley
Peninsula,

7G. umbrosum, Sol., var. muriculatum, Benth.—(J. B. C.) On tops of cliffs,
Cape du Couédic; (R. T. as G. australe) Western Cove, Dudley
Peninsula.

G. Gaudichaudii, DC—Ik.1. (in Black’s Flora).

(, australe, DC—(R. T.) KT. (in Fl. Austr.).

G, ciliare, Hook. £.-—(J. B. C.) Cape du Couédic.

*xG, imurale, DC.—(T. G. B. O.) Rocky River; (R. T. as G. umbrosum)
Dudley Peninsula.

111. Dresacrae,
*xScabiosa maritima —(]. B. C.) Kingscote,
113. CAMPANULACEAE.

Lobelia rhombifolia, De Vriesc—(Tepper) Karatta, plentiful on burnt
ground; (R. 5S. R.) Kingscote (Sept., 1908), Middle River (Oct.
1908); (J. B.C.) Kangaroo Island; (1. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, by
Breakneck River (Nov.).

L, gibbosa, Labill—(R. T. as L. microsperma, F. v. M.) K.J. (Waterhouse),
Cygnet River to Mount Pleasant, etc., grassy slopes by the sea, 1)’Estrees
Bay; (J. H. M.) Cape du Couédie (coll. R. S. Rogers),

L, anceps, Thunb.—(R. T.) KI. (Waterhouse), wet banks of Hog Bay,
Cygnet, Eleanor and other western rivers, seacliffs, Hog Bay River;
(J. B. C.) Cygnet River, Rocky River.

L. pratioides, Benth.

Pratia platycalyx, Benth—(R. T.) Mud-banks of the Cygnet River.

Wahlenbergia gracilis, DC—(R. T.) Cygnet River, American River. common
throughout Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River; (J. B.C.) KL

114. GoopENTACEAE.

Goodenia amplexans, F, v. M., var. angustifolia, Krause.—(R. T.) De Mole
River; (J. H. M.) Cape Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers); (R.S. R.) Ilarvey’s
Return (Oct., 1908), Western River; (J. B.C.) Wishanger (March),
Ravine des Casoars, Cape Borda.

G. ovata, Smith—(R. T.) Cygnet River (Waterhouse, Tate}, American
River, Eleanor, Harriet and Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers, Dudley Peninsula;
(J. H. M.) Hog Bay, Cape du Couédie (coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B.C.)
Kingscote.

G, varia, R. Br—(R, T.) Seacliffs of D’Estrees Bay; (R. S. R.) Kingscote
(Oct., 1908), Cape du Couédic (Oct., 1908) ; (J. B. C.) Cape Borda;
CV. G. B. 0.) Flinders Chase.

G, genicudata, R. Br—(R. T.) Sandy heath ground by Cygnet River, at
White Lagoon, Mount Pleasant, De Mole River; (R. $. R.) Cape du
Couédie (Oct., 1908), Middle River (Oct.. 1908), Rocky River;
(J. B.C.) K.L

GC. primulacea, Schlechtd.—(R. T.) Wet heath between American River
and D’Estrees Bay.

Selliera radicans, Cav—(R. I.) Cygnet River, Murray Lagoon, Eleanor and
Stun’ Sail Boom Rivers; (J. B.C.) KJ. (with rust); (Wood Jones)
Rocky River.

Scaevola crassifolia, Lab.—(R. T.) Coast hills, Pennington Bay and east-
ward, Vivonne Bay; (J. H. M.) Cape du Couédie (coll. R. 5. Rogers ) ;
(J. B. C.) Middle River; (T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, amongst malice.

S. aenuda, R. Br-(R. T.) About Mount Pleasant and towards Mount
Mary, abundant over area of burnt heath, Central Dudley Peninsula,
De Mole River; (]. H. M.) Cape Borda (coll, R. S. Rogers); (R. S. R.)
Kingscote (Sept., 1908), Middle River (Oct., 1908), Western River,
Rocky River; (1. G. B. O.) Stirling’s, on ironstone tableland.

?S. humilis, R. Br——(Tepper) Low ground near Tashmar’s Lagoon and
Antechamhber Bay.

S. microcarpa, Cav.—(J. H. M.) Hog Bay.

S. linearis, R. Br—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), wet sandy heath ground
between American River and D’Estrees Bay; (J. B. C.) BELL;
(T. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase, on ironstone tableland.

116,

58

Dampiera lanceolata, Cunn—(R. T.) Near D’Estrees Bay, sandy ground by
the sea near Rocky Point, Dudley Peninsula; (R. 5. R.) S.W. River.
near Karatta (Oct., 1908), Middle River (Oct., 1908). Stokes’ Bay
(Oct., 1908); (J. B.C.) KL

STYLIDIACEAE.

Stvlidium graminifoliian, Swartz.—(R. T. as Candollea qraminifoltim) Wet
sandy heath near D’Estrees Bay and between the Jlarriet and Stun’ Sau
Boom Rivers; (J. B. C.) Rocky River, telegraph line to Cape Borda.

S. Tepperianum, F. v. M—(Tepper) Mount Taylor, in fissures and hollows
of the limestone filled with sand.

S. calcaratum, R. Br—(R. T. as Candollea calearata) Central Dudley
Peninsula.

S. despecti, R. Br—(R. T. as Candollea despecta) Central Dudley Penin-
sula, De Mole River.

Levenhookia pusilla, R. Br—(R. T. as Leewenhoehia dubia) Grassy slopes
by the sea, north-west coast of Dudley Peninsula,

7) COMPOSITAE.

Olearia tubudiflora, Benth—(Tepper as aster tubuliflorus, F. v. M.) Sandy
scrub near Brownlow, ete.

O. axillaris, F. vy. M.—(R. T. as Aster avillaris) K. 1. (R. Brown), near the
coast, Kingscote and American River, widely distributed, Dudley Penin-
sula; (J. B.C.) Vivonne Bay, Middle River; (1. G. B. ©.) Cape du
Couédic.

O, ramulosa, Benth.—( Tepper as Aster raimulosus, Labill.) Cape Willoughby
(coll, Horswill); (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Kingscote, wide-
spread.

QO, floribunda, Benth—(R. T. as Aster floribundus) | larriet, Eleanor, Stun’
Sail Boom and De Mole Rivers.

Q. terctifolia, F. v. M—-(R. T. as Aster teretifolius) KL, ( Waterhouse ).
American River, White’s Lagoon, generally distributed throughout Dud-
ley Peninsula; (J. H.M.) [log Bay, Cape Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers);
UR. S, R.) Kingscote (Sept., 1908); (J. B.C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

O, rudis, F. v. M-—(R. T. as Aster exsul) blog Bay River to American
Beach and American River, Kingscote (coll, R. S. Rogers), and sand-
dunes at Mount Mary; (J. H. M.) Wingscote; (R. 5. R.) Ravine
des Casoars (Oct., 1908); (J. B. C.) Kingscote (Nov.); (T. G. BO.)
Flinders Chase, near Rocky River H.5.

O. ciliata, F. v. M.—(R. ‘I. as Aster Huegelii) 1.1. (Waterhouse), American
River and adjacent south coast, between Mount Pleasant and Yleanor
River; (J. B. C.) between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay.

Vittadinia australis, Rich.—(R. T.) Kingscote and Salt Lagoon to Discovery
Flat, Murray's Lagoon, Mount Mary, widely dispersed over Dudley
Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Kingscote; (J. B. C.) Kingscote, Cape du
Coueédic.

chnophora Tatei, ¥. v. M.—CR. T.) Wet heathy ground, two miles cast
from Karatta, De Mole River; (T. G. B. O.) Harriet River, forming
tussocks by salt creek.

Lagenophora stipitata, (Labill.) Druce—(R. ‘T. as L. Billardieri) Mossv
banks in gullies and under shade of gum trees and thickets, Dudley
Peninsula; (J. B. C.) Rocky River (Nov.).

L. Guanii, (Hook. £.) n. comb. (Emphysopus Guanii, Tools. 1. (1847):
Lagenophora emphysopus, Llook. f. (1860).)—CR. T.as L. emplysopus
Pasture slopes by the sea, south of Kangaroo Head.

59

Brachycome cuneifolia, Tate—(R. T., “showing slight differences from the
type”) K.I. (coll. Tepper).
xStegesbeckia orientalis, 1, nee B.C.) Ravine des Casoars,

Colila filufolia, ‘Thunb.—(R. 1 .) Northern coast of Dudicy Penimsula, basin
of Deep Creck; (TL G. i ©.) Flinders Chase, in swamp of Rocky
River.

C. coronopifelia, L.—(R. T.) KT. (Waterhouse), Cygnet River, throughout
Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B.C) Cygnet River te
CT.LG. B. O.) Flinders Chase, in swamp of Rocky River.

C, australis, Hook. f-—(R. T.) Throughout Dudley Peninsula, towards
Kangaroo Head; oF B, it KI,

Centipeda Cuminghami, F. v. M=—(R. T.) K.L. (Waterhouse), throughout
the Island; (J. B.C.) ‘Rocky hee

fsoctopsis graminifolia, Turcz-—(R. ‘U.) Pasture slopes by the sea south
of Kangaroo Head.

Myriocephalus rhisocephalus, Benth—(R. T.) K.T. (Waterhouse), in-
undated ground, Cygnet River and Salt Lagoon.

Angianthis Preissianus, Benth—(R. T.) Margins of the salt water creeks
and clay flats throughout Dudley Peninsula.

al. sirictus, Benth—(R.T.) Pasture slopes by the sea, north and west coasts
of Dudley Peninsula.

Calocephalus Brown, F. v. M—tk. PA) KT Gn Pl, Austr.), rocks by the
sea, north-east coast a eevee Peninsula, anal and D’Estrees Bay,
De Mole River; (J. M.) Hog Bay, Cape du Couédic Ceol, RS
Rogers); (J. B. J igale River, Cape Borda,

Cassinia laevis, R. ci —(k. T., also as Hinnea punctilata and as Cussinia
punchilata, Fy. M. and Ahan Murray’s Lagoon. on calciferous sand-
stone, Hog Bay River; (J. B. C.) Kingscote (?).

C. spectabilts, R. Br —(R. T. ) al (in FL Austr.), on burnt ground, through-
out Dudley Peninsula, American River, Kingscote, and Emu Creek,
sparsely distributed as far west as Eleanor River; (]. H. M.) Kingscote;
(J. B.C.) Bay of Shoals, Beatrice Island.

Ertochlamys Behrii, Sond. et F. vy. M--(R. T.) Cliffs by the sea. D’Estrees
Bay, and near Hog Bay River.

Toxanthus Mvuelleri, Benth—(R. T., by inadvertence recorded first as
T. perpusillus) Grassy slopes by the sea, south of Kangaroo Head.
Millotia tenuifolia, Cass-——(R. T.) Sandy soil near the coast at Western Cove

and American River, wel banks and thickets, Dudley Peninsula.

Lvioleena supina, F. M.—(CR. 7.) KT. (in Fi. Austr.), seaclitfs around
Dudley Peninsula ane dD’ ie Bay, De ae River ; (J. H. M.) Ilog
Bay, Cane Borda (coll. R. S. Rogers); (RLS. RB.) “Cape du Coneédic
(Oct., 1908), Harvey's Raut (Oct., 1908).

Ixodia achillevides, R. Br—(R. 7.) Kil. Gin EL. Austr.), very abundant
throughout the Island, De Mole River: (J. H. M.) Hog Bay, Cape
Borda (coll. R.S. Rogers, avery distinet form with narrow linear _ almost
filitorm, leaves), Cape du Couédic (coll. R. S. Rogers); (J. B.C.)
widespread, near Cape du Couédic (Nov.).

Podosperna angustifoliwm, Labill-—(R. TP.) Sand ridges, shores of Western
Cove, American Beach and American River, sand-dtines at Moum Mary,
in calciferous sandstone, nes Bay River.

i eee rugata, Lab.—(R. ry Seaclifis of D’ Batre Tiay; of. LL.M.)
Cape du Couédic (coll. R. 4 Rogers); (J. B.C.) Rocky Rigor: between
Kingscote and Vivonne Bay (Nev.).

P. acwnimata, RL Br— (CR. S. BR.) Rocky River (Oect., 1908}.

60

*x/nula graveolens, Desi —(J. B.C.) KT.

Helichrysum obtusifolium, Sond. ct F. v. Mi—(R. T.) K.L (Waterhouse).
near Western Cove, Nepean Bay, between Mount Pleasant and Eleanor
River; as var. tephrodes, De Mole River; (R.S. R.) S.W. River (Oct..
1908), Timber Creek.

H. bracteatum, (Vent.) Andr—(R. T. as H. lucidum) Smith’s Bay;
(R.S.R.) Stokes’ Bay, Western River.

H, leucopsidium, DC—(R. T.) Pasture slopes by the sea, D’Estrees Bay
and towards Hog Bay River, sand-dunes, Vivonne Bay and American
Beach; (J. G. B. O.) Cape du Couédic, Kingscote.

fT. adenophorum, F. v. M.—(R. T.) Scrub near Wallan’s Hut (Waterhouse),
Smith’s Bay, heathy ground from Cygnet River to Mount Prospect, and
the Stun’ Sail Boom River; (J. B. C.) near Lake Ada, Cape Borda.

I. apiculatum, DC—(Tepper) Coast hills, Karatta; (J. BR. C.) Middle
River; (T.G. B.O.) Vivonne Bay.

H, semipapposum, DC—(R. S. R.) Western River.

HA. retusum, Sond. ct F. vy. M—(R. T.) Heathy ground at Kingscote, and
Red-banks to American River, mallee scrub, North Dudley Peninsula.
near Rocky Point; (J. H. M.) Kingscote, Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Kings-
cote (Noy.).

Helipterum exiguum, F. v. M-——TIn Tate’s Census for K.f.

H. australe, (A. Gray) Ostenf.—(R. T. as H. dimorphole pis) Grassy slopes
by the sea, south of Kangaroo Head.

Guaphalium luteo-album, L—(R. T.) K.1. (in FL. Ausir.), American River
and about Mount Mary, widely dispersed over Dudley Peninsula;
(R. S. R.) Harvey’s Return (Oct., 1908).

Gn, japonicum, Thunb.—(R.T.) K.I. (Waterhouse), Discovery Flat, White’s
Lagoon, Eleanor River, common on Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River:
(J. H. M.) Hog Bay; (J. B. C.) Cygnet River.

Gn. indutum, Hook. {—(R. T.) Cliff slopes in the north and west coasts,
clay flats and under shade of thickets, Dudley Peninsula.

Stuartina Muelleri, Sond-—(R. VT.) Dudley Peninsula (as for Guaphalium
indutum) De Mole River.

Erechthites prenanthoides, DC.—(R. T.) Sandy ground, Cygnet River,
sparsely distributed throughout Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River;
(R. 5S. R.} Harvey’s Return (Oct., 1908).

EL. picridioides, Vure-~—In Tate’s Census for K.L.; (J. B.C.) Rocky River
(March); (TY. G. B. O.) Flinders Chase (Oct.).

E, arguta, DC—(R. T.) KL Gin FL Austr.), Kingscote, Cygnet River.

E. quadridentata, DC—(R. T.) Open mallee scrub and extending to heathy
ground, North Dudley Peninsula.

pScuecio magnificus, F. v. M.—(J. B. C.) Breakneck River.

S. dautus, Sond—(R. T.) KJ. Cin Fl. Austr.), seacliffs D’Estrees Day to
Iiog Bay River, north coast of Dudley Peninsula, sand-dunes of Vivonne
Bay; (J. H. M.) Cape du Couédie (coll. R. S. Rogers, very sticculent) ;
(R. 5. R.) Cape du Couédie (Oct., 1908), Ravine des Casoars; (J. B.C.)
Rocky River.

S. Georgianus, DC—In Tate’s Census for K.I.; (T. G. B. O.) Vivonne Bay
(26/10/24).

S. odoratus, Horn—(R. T.) K.-T. (R, Brown), bushy places, widely dis-
tributed; (J. H. M.) Kingscote; (J. B. C.) Rocky River, Kingscote.

S. Cunninghamit, DC—(R. T.) Ravine des Casoars (coll, Tepper) ; (J. B.C.)
Ravine des Casoars. between Kingscote and Vivonne Bay, Rocky River.

61

Cvmbonotus Lawsonianus, Gaud.—(R 1.) Natural pasture lands and grassy
glades in mallee scrub throughout Dudley Peninsula, De Mole River.
*Cryptostemma calendulaceum, R. Br—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (J. H. M.)
Hog Bay; (f. B.C.) KI.
*Silybumt marianum, Gaertn—(J. H. M. as Carduis marianus, L.) Llog Bay.
*Onopordon acanthium, L.-(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula, “known during the
last two or three years (i.c., about 1880) about the Gap.”
“Cirsium lanceolatum, Scop—(J. H. M. as Carduns lanceolatts), Hog Bay;
(J. B.C.) Kingscote.
*xCarduus tenuiflorus, Curtis—(J. B.C.) K.T.
*Centaurea melitensis, L—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula; (]. H. M.) Ifog Bay.
Microseris scapigera, (Forst.) Schultz-Bip—(Tepper as M. Forsteri) Coast
hills, Karatta, and at the coast, Queenscliffe, but rare and very dwarfed;
(T.G. B.O.) Flinder Chase, in sandy soil near Rocky River (27/1/23).
*xfivpochacris radicata, L..—(J. B. C.) Kingscote.
*AT. glabra, |.—(R.‘V.) Dudley Peninsula; (J.B. C.) BAL.
*Sonchus oleraceus, L.—(R. T.) Dudley Peninsula ; (J. B.C.) KL
x. asper, IIill, var. littoralis, J. M. Black—-(J. B.C.) Pennington Bay;
CT. G. B. O.) Cape du Couédie (Nov.).
*Picris hieracioides, L.—(R. T.) K.1. (Waterhouse), Discovery Flat, Dudicy
Peninsula.

NOTES ON A COLLECTION OF AUSTRALIAN MYXOMYCETES.
(Identified by) Miss Gulieima Lister.)

By J. Burrox Creranp, M.D.
[Read April 14, 1927.]

During the collection of Basidiomyectes in Australia, the writer has pre-
served a number of Myxomycetes, of which he submitted duplicate specimens
to Miss G. Lister, who kindly reported on them. Ile has now arranged the
results of Miss Lister’s identifications, adding where possible the exact localities
and dates where and when the specimens were obtained. He has also added.
where these were noted. the colours and some other macroscopic feattres, as
well as his own notes on the size and characters of the spores as these were
examined shortly after collection. The gatherings contained altogether 31 species.
Miss Lister records Badhamia folticola, [}. capsulifera, Physariwn reniforite,
P. didermoides (probably), P. cinerewm, and Muctlago spongiosa as new for
Australia, and several species as new for particular States.

Ceraliomyvrd fruticilosa, (Muell.) Machr—Branches with numerous pro-

eting spines 12 p long. Spores very white, finely granular, subspherical to oval or
ge e-shaped. NuS. W rales: Mummulguni, Dec. (No. 61); Mosman, Dec. (No.
5); Narrabeen, Jan.; Neutral Ray, Mar. (No. 54).

Badhamia capsulifera, Berk—Spores spherical, somewhat triangular, fincly
rough, with a cap of stronger warts, 105. Orange, N.S. Wales, Oct., 1916
cM, pik Not recorded before for ‘Siketral la,

. foliicola, List —Rright orange-vellow when immature, turning dark grey.
On grass, twigs, etc, Mount Lofty, S.A.. June, 1920. Spores purplish, slightly
rough, subspherical, 10 to 10-7 p. “Very near B. utricilaris, but with spores
paler, smoother, and very little if at all clustered. The plasmodium also feeds
on decayed leaves. not on living fungi. New for Australia” (No. 28)

Physartan viride, Pers—Milson Island, Hawkesbury River, Nov., 19ot4,
ulphur-yellow, spores spherical, finely warted, dark purplish, 7°8 to 82 (No,
).

jee
e
3

Qe

su
5

P. diderimoides, Rost.—Wollongbar, N.S. Wales. (No. 13.) New ior
Australia

iB nian, Pers.-Neutral Bay, Sydney, Mar., 1919 (No. 6).

PB. compressuin, A. and S.—Spores es warty, purplish. 1LO-4 to
15-5. Middle Head, Sydney, Aug. (No. 15). “I have no record of this before
for New South Wales, though it has eee ah in South Australia.”

fa bees ine, List —Wollongbar, N.S. Wales (No. 13); on mulberry, Milson
Island, Hawkesbury River, June, 1913. spores 13 to 13 4, very dark, with patches
ot aire warts (Na. 388). New for Australia.

P. cinereum, Pers—Milson Island, April, 1913 (No. 22). “A: handsome
gathering on a Eucalypt leaf; the first record for Australia, apparently.”

Fuligo septica, Gmel—Spores vinous purple, usually smooth, spherical.
7to10u. Queensland: Imbil, near Gympie, Aug., 1920 (No. 103). N.S. Wales:
Milson Island, Haw kesbury River, April, 1913 (No, 23), bright canary-yellow ;
same location, Feb., 1915, (No. 73), and Nov., 1914 (No. 86); Hawkesbury
River, Nov., 1914 (No. 85); on stump of tree, The Spit, Sydney, April, 1913
(No. 71); Neutral Bay, Sydney, Nov., 1917 (No. 24), bright orange-yellow,
becoming saimony-red when bruised, several inches long and wide and 4+ inch
high, with a peculiar rather seminal smell; on fomes on a log, ‘Tuggerah, Nov.,

63

1914 (No. 49); at base of an Acacia, Kendall ¢ F 1917 (No. 21); Narra-
been. April, 1916 (No. 79), canary-yellow. eiawase iinders Island, Bass
Straits, Nov., 1912 (No. 70). South Australia: On dead pine stump, Deaumont,
Mar., 1920 (No. 65). more lemon-coloured than crocus; on dead pine stump,
Glen Osmond, Dee., 1920 (Ne. 102); Kuitpo, Mar., 1915; National Par, May.
1921; Myponga, Dec., 1923; loc. (?), Mr. Zietz. Western Australia: T.oc. not
stated (No, 26).

FP. septica, var. candida, Fr.—N.S. Wales: Milson Island, Jan. (No. 74);
Broken Hill, on grass, April. 1917 (No. 16). Tasmania: Flinders Island, at
roots of grasses in damp soil (No. 67), typical pale spores, 6 to 7 diam. Western
Australia (No. 25).

I’, cinerea, Morg.--N.S. Wales: Milson Island, April, 1913 (No. 19a); on
duug, Neutral Bay, Mar., 1914 (No. 34). spores spherical, 10 to re South
Australia: Beaumont, on ground, Mar., 1921 (No. 93), spores rough, 11 to 12 p.

Diachea leucopoda, Rost—N.5. Wales: Neutral Bay, Dec., 1917 (No. 27),
spores smooth, vinous, 8p, apparently new for N.S. Wales.

fhdyminm nigripes, Vr, near var. vanthopus, Lish—N.S. Wales: National
Park, May, 1919 (No, 2), spores dark greyish-brown, smooth, round, 8°5 p;
intermediate between the type and the variety which was found by Mr. Cheeseman
several times in N.S. Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

AMucitlago spongiosa, Morg., var. solida, List——-Queensland: Imbil Stat
Forest near Gympie, spores finely rough, 12» (No. 100). “This is a weak form
with the capillitium consisting of membranous cxpansions enclosing crystalloid
deposits of ‘lime’ instead of the usual network of dark threads. Not recorded
previously for Australia.”

Stemonitis splendeus, Rost-—N.S. Wales: North Bridge, Sydney. April.
1919 (No. 1), spores brown, smooth, spherical, 7°53; Narrabeen (Dr. Darnell-
smith), Nov., 1912 (No, 11). spores warted, purple-brown, 7 to 7-2. South
Australia: Glen Osmond, May, 1920 (No. 89), spores purple, smooth, spherical,
7-2. Tasmania: Flinders Island (No. 8). Loc. (?) (No. 19), “with so broad
a stirface net to the capillitium as to be almost var. H/cbberi, List.”

S. herbatica, Peck—N.S. Wales: Neutral Bay, Mar. 1914 (No. 5);
Mosman, Oct., 1916 (No. 69).

Comuatricha typheides, Rost--N.S. Wales: Neutral Bay, Mar. 1914
(No. 4).

Tubifera ferruginosa, Gmel.—N.S, Wales: On trunk, Neutral Bav, June,
1914, unmature (No. 56). Tasmania: Launceston, Nov., 1912 (No. 46), grow-
ing through cracks in a log, nearly resembling in colour Polysticlus cianabarinus
in an early stage but soft. spores spherical, 7 to 11 p.

Dietydiaethalium plumbeum, Rost-—South Australia: Mount Lofty, Sept.
1920 (No. 101), dried when immature, when fresh rather a coral- pink turing
Carnelian Red (Ridgway’s Colour Standards, pl. xiv.), surface finely granular;
Mount Lofty, June, 1917, and National Park, June, 1917 (No, 30), immature;
Mount Lofty, June, 1920 (No. 62), immature, ‘Light Coral- Re d (Ridg., pL xiii.),
finely warted under a lens.

Eeticularia Lycoperdon, Bull—N.S. Wales: Neutral Bay, Sydney (No. 84);
same locality, May, 1913 (No. 87), on a tree, spores irregularly spherical, warted,
7 to lly. N.S. Wales (?): (No. 92), spores regularly spinulose, spherical io
oval, O84. South Australia: Beaumont, Mar., 1920 (No. 64), speres brown,
spherical, very slightly rough, 7°2 p.

Lyeogala epidendrum, lr—Acthaliium at first pallid brown with minute topaz
warts, spores spinulose, 5:2 ta 7. NS. Wales: Hawkesbury River, Dec., 1914
(No, 4/7); Athol Gardens, Sydnev (No. 68); Comboyne, Sept.. 1918 (Nos. 29

C

64

and 32); Mount Irvine (Dr. Darnell-Smith), Jan., 1915 (No. 36); Mosman,
Oct., 1916.

Trichia verrucosa, Berk.—N.S. Wales: Kurrajong Heights, Aug., 1912
(No. 78); locality not stated (No. 76), spores 17 p.

TY. varia, Pers——N.S. Wales: Leura, June. 1916 (No. 60), spores finely
warted, 13 to 14x 9 yp.

T. floriformis, (Schw.) G. Lister (syn. 7. Botrytis, var. lateritia, List—
N.S. Wales: Neutral Bay, Mar., 1914 (No. 5); Katoomba, Dec., 1916 (No. 4).

Arcyria ferruginea, Sant-—N.S. Wales: On bark, Neutral Bay, May, 1913
(No. 82), spores colourless, elliptical, 11 to 12x8 to 9p.

A. cinerea, Pers—-N.S. Wales: Narrabeen, Jan. 1915 (No. 53), very
immature, spores colourless. rather oval, capillitium warted.

A. denudata, (1..) Wettstein—N.S. Wales: Mount Kembla (Dr. Darnell-
Smith), Nov., 1914 (No. 83), spores colourless, smooth, 7°5 y, capillitium branch-
ing, rough with warts, 3-4 thick; Leura, fune, 1916 (No. 10), spores pallid,
smooth, 8», capillittum warted, 4 thick; no locality (No. 81), spores whitish,
irregularly spherical, 7 x.

A, insignis, Kalchbr. and Cooke—Probably N.S. Wales (No. 51), ‘rare in
Europe.”

A. nutans, Grev.
(No. 80).

Perichaena depressa, Lib—-N.S. Wales: Hawkesbury River (No. 41).
yellow, rounded, finely echinulate spores, 104, “new to N.S. Wales, found by
Mr. Cheeseman in Victoria.”

N.S. Wales: Neutral Bay, Mar., 1919 (No. 7); no locality

65

ADELAIDE UNIVERSITY FIELD ANTHROPOLOGY:
CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

No. 1—INTRODUCTION: DESCRIPTIVE AND ANTHROPOMETRIC
OBSERVATIONS.

By T. D. Campzretrt D.D.Sc., and Cecm J. Hackett,
[Read April 14, 1927.]

The Adelaide University Field Expedition to Central Australia in the early
part of this year for anthropological research was made possible by an allocation
from the Rockefeller Fund and a private donation. The Anthropological Com-
mittee of the Australian National Research Council allotted a sum for field work
in physical anthropology in this State and Central Australia. Also through the
generosity of Mr. E. W. Holden, B.Sc., it was possible to engage the services of
a professional photographer, and so secure some cinematographic, as well as
ordinary photographic records.

The success of the Expedition was in no small measure due to the hearty
co-operation obtained from various interested helpers; the Board for Anthrop-
ological Research and members of the party are much indebted to the following
for their very generous assistance:

Mr. Ernest Kempe (manager Macumba Station); Messrs, Wallis Fogarty
and Staff; Sergeant R. Stott and Mr. E. Kramer, of Stuart Town; the Board
of Governors $.A. Museum; Dr. L. Keith Ward; and Mr. Blyth (manager S.A.
Phonograph Coy.).

In arranging for the work of the Expedition advantage was taken of benefits
derivable from “team work” organisation. The work undertaken was largely
physical anthropology, and the following constituted the personnel for this section
of the work:—Drs,. T. D. Campbell and C. J. Hackett, descriptive and anthropo-
metric observations; Dr. W. Ray, physiology and pathology; Prof. J. B. Cleland,
blood grouping and tests; Dr. E. H. Davies undertook a study of native songs
and music; and Mr. F. Jeffrey acted as official photographer and cinematographer.

The party left Adelaide on December 30, 1926, and returned on January 19,
1927. The localitics at which observations were made were:—(1) Ross Water-
hole, on Macumba Station, and about 40 miles north-east of Oodnadatta; (2)
Stuart Town, Central Australia.

On the first stage of the trip—spent at Ross Waterhole—routine observations
were made on a number of natives; also cinema films were exposed on various
ceremonies associated with the Lartna, or circumcision rite—the initiation of a
youth having synchronized with our visit to the locality.

‘Vhrough the kindness of Mr. and Mrs. E. Kempe, the arrangements for our
stay and work at Ross Waterhole were greatly facilitated, and valued results
were secured.

The latter part of the available time was spent at Stuart Town, Alice Springs,
where a plentiful supply of full-blooded natives was available for routine work.
In this location, through the kindness of Sergeant Stott, the school-room served
as a field laboratory, and so working conditions were made comparatively com-
fortable. Both localities have been occupied for a long time by natives chiefly
of the Arunta tribe, and the ethnography of this group has been lengthily dealt
with by Spencer and Gillen, Strehlow, and others.

c

66

The present paper deals with descriptive notes and measurements of the
natives; also certain useful individual details are included. The results of other
branches of the work undertaken will be dealt with in other papers of this serics.
In order that correlative study may be made, the other records are “Physiological
Observations,” by Dr. W. Ray; “Blood Grouping,” by Dr. J. B. Cleland; and
“Aboriginal Songs,” by Dr. E. Il. Davies. ‘These follow in the present. issue.

Other papers are likely to be published at an carly date dealing with
Pathological Observations, Platyenemia, Dental Notes, and Oral Pigmentation.

Full face and profile photographs were taken of cach native examined in
detail, and besides these, various interesting conditions and views of the natives
were recorded.

Motion pictures were taken of various ceremonies concerned in the Lartna,
or circumcision rite, also other important features associated with the perform-
ances, Native crafts such as firemaking (two methods), string making from
human hair, shelter building, and other items were recorded in detail cincmato-
graphically. An unusual and interesting motion picture record was also secured
on a length of film depicting the striking method of locomotion involved in an
extreme case of platycnemia.

A few objects of ethnological interest were collected. A quantity of chipped
flakes was obtained at Ooraminna Waterhole. Insects, plants, and ornithological
notes were taken en route.

Natives EXAMINED,

Tribal classification —The aboriginals subjected to detailed examination were
nearly all members of the Arunta tribe, the remainder being chiefly Luritchas.
They were all more or less semi-civilized, a condition which is advantageous,
rather than undesirable, when the acquiescence and understanding of the subject
under examination are somewhat necessary factors in the type of investigation
undertaken on this occasion,

With a few intentional exceptions, all examined were full bloods (in so far
as careful discrimination could effect) and adults.

Number—A total of 57 were subjected to routine detailed examination,
while, in addition, various others were dealt with for some special purpose, such
as a blood test, or recording some abnormal or pathological feature,

Sex —Of the above total 44 were males and 13 females,

Age.—The ages given are, of course, in most instances only approximate, but
care was taken to secure all evidence which might lead to a correct estimate.

Personal details —In Table L., given below, are set out various details of each
individual, and the key number will serve for identification in the various sections
of this and associated papers.

DESCRIPTIVE ORSERVATIONS.

Descriptive notes were made on each subject and are set out in Table II.
In these observations we have followed, to a large extent, the suggestions of
Hrdlicka (1).

Skin colour-—For conveniently recording skin colour a shade guide devised
by the present writers was used. It consisted of small cards, each having a
coloured disc on a neutral grey ground. Adjacent to cach disc, a circular hole
of similar diameter was made in the card. By placing the card over the skin to
be examined, a circular patch of skin can be compared with the coloured dise.
Many colour tones were made, and each card being numbered, the skin colour
can be simply recorded. ‘(hese shades were later compared with those of
Ridgway (2), and thus a standard nomenclature applied to the colour recorded.
Thanks are duc to Mr. L. Howie, Director S.A. School of Arts and Crafts, for
his assistance in determining the nomenclature for the colours ot the guide.

67

Tas.r I,

Subjects Examined.

1
Key) Sex| Age White Name Native Name Tribe Group j Totem
| '

1 M | 55 Sandy | Winyooli Arunta Panunga —

2 M | 30 | Macumba Jack | Jakarra Kaitish —_ —_

4 M/aged Charlie Mareltna Luritcha — | —

5 M | 60 ! John i Deneriga Arunta Emu

6 | M] 40 i Big Mick | Wilbilli Urabunna —_— Goanna

10 M/ 35. George ' Kutakulla Turitcha — Emu

11 M] 35 - Louis BKuijakulja Arunta Panunga Emu

12 My] --- | Billie Johnson Akareepa Arunta Bulthara Dingo

15 F — ! Judy —_— Arunta — =

16 M| 35 | Ted Ortda | Arunta Kumara Rain

17 | M! 55 | Vim _ Chimpaliga Arunta Kumara Rain

18, M] 55 | Joe ' Murrunyuli Arunta Kumara Rain

19 Fi/ 40 | Dolly | Aringjilyika Arunta Kumara Rain

21 | Fj 35 | Annie Angkilya » Arunta Panunga Snake

22 Fy; 18 | Fanny Angiyoorupu ' Luritcha Bulthara Snake

23 F; 25 | Lottie Unroha Luritcha = =

24 M; 25 | Dinny Rotalyi | Kaitish Panunga Emu

25 M| 55 | Jack Ankarra Arunta » Purula Kangaroo

26 M| 50 | Mick Qunorra Arunta ' Bulthara Rat

27 Mi! 40 | Sambo Lanya Arunta Purula Rain

28 M! 25 | Ted Wongarra Arunta Panunga Corkwood
29 MJ] 60 | Bind George Yearamba Arunta Bulthara —_

30 M{| 48 | Charlie Orra-orra Arunta Appungerta Corkwood

31 M/ 50 | OL Bill Andunna _ Arunta Bulthara Corkwood

32 M| 25 | Johnnie Ilowia ) Arunta Ungalla Kangaroo

33 M| 25 | Jockey Jim Orranga Arunta Purula Euro

34 M| 30 | Jacky Ubalyamma Arunta Kumura Witchetty grub
35 Mi 55 | Bob Angtjarra Arunta Jmbitchana

36 M| 50 Charlie Cooper Erkakura Arunta - Yalta (a small plant)
3 M/ 45 | Frank Karra-indana Arunta Umhbitchana | Emu

38 M)} 30 | George Kumanya Arunta Ungalla Corkwood
39 Mi! 60 | Bird Jack Ungotarrinyi Arunta Umbitchana Witchetty grub
40 M! 18 ! Toby Yarma Luritcha —_— =
41 M | 35 1 Jack Modna Arunta Kumara | Witehetty grub
42 M | 16 Bumbi Ortoo Arunta Bulthara? —_
43 M| 20 ‘ Ralph — Arunta Ungatla? | oom

Aq Mi! 25 Muller a Aruntla Kumara | Emu
45 M 18 j Willie Balyunk Arunta Bulthara | Witchetty grub
46 Mj, 55 | Jack McKay — Arunta Appungerta | Euro
47 M] 69 | Peter Olterberga ' Arunta Umbitchana | Kangaroo

48 M]| 25 } Barney —_ Arunta Bulthara | Yalta

49 Mi} 60 | Multa Oocabiti » Arunta Umbitchana Yam

50 | M{ 50 | Rob = —— —_ —

51 M| 65 Charlie Jenia Arunta Bulthara Wallaby

52 M| 24 | Peter — Nelpara Appungerta Wallaby

53 Mj 50 | George = Arunta Purula Tectree

54 Ml 26 | Dudley Jawarta Arunta Ungalla Witchetty grub
55, M| 27 | Arthur | Olbalyoron Arunta Kumara Witchetty grub
56 | M| 50 Waggon Jack Ayumba Arunta Umbitchaua —

57 Fl 40 | Annie Oderquondu | Arunta Bulthara _—

58 Fi 35 | Mary Ngtmete | Arunta Bulthara Wallaby

59 F| 48 | Marion Netangaramka | Arunta Ungalla Witchetty grub
60 F] so Polly (old) Ngingara | Arunta Purula Kangaroo

61 F | 43 | Jinnte Kunoowi Arunta Purula —_—

62 F( 42 | Polly (young) Wungara | Arunta * Bulthara Water

63 F| 48 | Mariam Olinga Arunta Bulthara =

64 F] 50 Chieckina Orkatnaka | Arunta Appungerta Grub

68

Tase IT.

HAIR.
Head. Beard and Moustache. | Chest Forearm.

Colour. Character. Colour. Character. Colour Quantity. Colour. ' Quantity.
Ble.Wh, | LW. White Straight | White Marked BLce.Wh. Medium
Black D.W. | Black L.W. jo | Nil Black Medium
White | LW. White Straight | White | Scant White i Scant
Grey ) Straight Grey Straight White | Seant Bl.c.Wh. | Scant
Ble.Wh. (Cut) Ble. Wh. Straight tA ' Seant — Scant
Black LW. Black (Cut) Black Medium Black Medium
Bl.c.Wh. | L.W. Grey L.W. i Blc.Wh. Medium Black Medium
Bl.c.Wh. (Cut) Bl.c.Wh. LW. Bl.c.Wh. | Medium Black Medium
Ble.Wh. i M.W. Grey Frizzy ' Bl.c.Wh. | Scant Bhe.Wh. Marked
Blc.Wh, D.W. Grey Straight BleWh, | Scant BLc.Wh. Scant
BlLe.Wh. Curly Blec.Wh. L.W. Ble.Wh. | Marked Blc.Wh. Marked
Blc.Wh. L.w. — a — — _ V. scant
Br. BL. | L.W. \ — — a bie —_ V. scant
Br, Bl. | TW, _ nant ; — ' Nil tee V. scant
Black L.wW. Black j; (Cut) Black Scant Black Medium
Grey (Cut) Wh.c. Bl. (Cut) | Ble.Wh. Medium Black Medium
Bl.c. Wh. D.W. Ble.Wh. M. copious | Ble.Wh. Medium Black Medium
Ble.Wh, LW. Ble. Wh. | M. copious : Blc.Wh. Marked Black Marked

— LW. | Black M. copious | Black ' V. scant Black Medium
W hite M.W. | White Straight Black V. scant Black Medium
Grey D.W. : Grey M.W. Black Scant Black Marked
Black DW. ' Ble.Wh. L.W. Ble. Wh. Marked Black Medium
Br. BL. (Cut) Black | (Cut) Black Medium Black ‘Marked
Br. Bl. (Cut) — ; (Cut) Black Scant Black Scant
Black | DLW, Black | (Cut) Black Medium Black Marked
Grey 1 TDW, White LW. White | Medium Black Medium
Br. Bl.c. Wh.’ MW. Le.Wh. Straight Bl.c. Wh. Medium Black Medium
Black » CCut) Ble.Wh. Frizzy Black Medium Black Scant
Br. Bl. | (Cut) Br. Bi. M. copious ! Black Marked Black Marked
White M.W. White L.W. White Marked White Scant
Dk. Br. DLW. Black Seant | = | WV. Scant _— V. scant
Br. Bl. : LW. BlLe.Wh. (Cut) White | Scant Black Meditum
Br. Bl. | MAW. Black Seant Black ! OV. scant Br. Bl. Scant
V.DkK. Br, | LW. — (Cut) Black | V. scant Black Scant
Dk. Br. LW. = (Cut) Black ; Medium Dk. Br. Scant

L.w. | Br. Bt. Scant = j Nil Dk. Br. ' VW. scant
Grey Dw. Grey Straight 2h Nil _ | Nil
Grey / DW. White Straight White V. scant White | V. seant
Br. BI. | L.W. — (Cut) Black V. seant Dk, Br. Scant
Grey | low. White LW. White | Scant Black Scant
Bic. Wh, Curly Grey | Frizey Bie.Wh. | Medium Blc.Wh. Medium
White L.W. White ' Straight White | V.scant White V. scant
Black Curly Black (Cut) Black V. scant Black V. seant
Grey | M.W. Grey Straight Grey Marked Black Medium
Br. Bl. 1 (Cut) Black M. Medium | es | Nil Black ¥V. scant
Grey L.w. Grey Straight BleWh, Medium Black Medium
Dk. Br. L.w. _ Pm ! —- — Black V. scant
Dk. Br. L.W. — —_ — a — —
Dk. Br. (Cut) ; _ _— = ete Black V. scant
Grey | Curly | a Scant = 4 Black V. scant
Br. Bl. ; DW. — | —_ =. Nil —- ‘ V. scant
Dk. Br. ; LW. — ! —_— | — =4 — _ Vi secant
Dk. Br. L.w. I =— — | —_ Nil Black { Vo scant
Grey M.W. | White SL Bald i stad Nil Black i V. scant

No.

nh ye

a

10
11
12
16
17
18
19
21
22
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
at
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64

69

TasLe IT.

Eyebrows.

Quantity.

Mcdium
Scant

Medium
Scant

Medium
Medium
Medium
Scant
Marked
Mec
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Scant

Marked
Scant

Medium
Medium
Medium
Medium
Scant

Medium
Medium
Seant

Medium
Scant

Marked
Medium
Marked
Medium
Medium
Marked
Seant

Scant

Medium
Scant

V. scant
Scant

Mcdiam
Medium
Medium
Scant

Medium
Medium
Scant

Medium
Medium
Medium
Scant

Medium

jum

SKIN COLOUR.
SR ea -_—--——-——-- | Body Build. Nasal Septum. | Sears.
Face. | Deltoid. Biceps. :
gg dd £ Medium ! N.P Nil
ff ee ee Muscnlar P. Chest, Abdomen
ff ec dd ' Lank Pe | Chest
ff dd ff Plump P. Chest, back
gg ee dd Muscular : N.P. Nil
ff dd bb Muscular N.P. Chest, abdomen
—_ — - Plump N.P. Nil
ff ; dd dd Medium i N.P. Nil
ff ce dd Muscular | : 1 Nil
ff dd dd | Qhese i NLP. | Chest
= dd dd Muscular | NLP. | Deltoid
da dd hb Medium P. Back
dd dd bb i Mediuin | P. Chest
dd dd dd | Plump NLP Chest, abdomen
aa ff bb | Medium _
ff dd dd Musenlar ‘ Chest, abd., delt., scapula
ec bb | dd Muscular | a Scapula, abdomen
dd bb ! bb Plump | P. Chest, abdomen, scapula
wa | aa ff | Muscular — Chest, abdomen
aa ; dd dd Plump — Chest, deltoid, abdomen
ee i aa aa Muscular s — Chest, L. scapula, abdomen
aa aa na | Medium P. Teltoid, back, abdomen
aa bb bb Muscular N.P Chest, abdomen
hh \ dd bb Muscular NP Abdomen
aa dd bb Muscular | NP | Nil
aa dd bb Plump Pp. Chest, deltoid, back, abd.
aa aa i aa Muscular N.F. Chest, deltoid, scapula
aa dd | dd | Medium N.P. Deltoid, abdomen
aa dd dd Muscular NUP, Abdomen
ff dd dd Medium Pp. Chest, scapula, back, abd.
aa ff ee Muscular — i. scapula
ff ff dd Muscular | Chest, delt., L. scap., abd.
aa aa ff Medium : N.P Nil
aa ee ec Muscular a Nil
hh ) ee dd Muscular N.P. 1 Nil
ee dd dd Muscular NLP. Nib
ff ff dd Slim Pp, Chest, deltoid, abdomen
ff dd dd Plump P. Chest, L. scapula, abdomen
ff dd dd Medium N.P. Nil
ff dd dd Medium Pe Chest, delt., abd., L. scap.
aa ff ff Muscular PF. Chest, delt., abd., L. scap.
hh aa aa Medium Pp, Chest, delt., abd., L. scap.
aa gg ff Muscular i P. Abdomen, deltoid
aa dda dd Muscular P, | Chest, deit., abd., L. scap.
aa | dd dd Medium ! N.P. | J. Deltoid
aa aa aa Muscular —- Abdomen
dd dd dd Medium N.P. Chest, abdomen
ce dd dd Medium Pe Chest, abdomen
— — — Plump P. Deltoid, abdomen
aa aa aa Plump N.P. Nil
aa j ee ee Piump N.P. Chest, deltoid, abdomen
aa aa aa Plump P. Nil
aa aa aa Medium N.P Chest, abdomen
dd aa aa Slim Pp. Chest, abdomen

70

Hair samples—aA collection of fifty samples of hair was obtained, represent-
ing the head and other parts of the body. These should provide useful material
for detailed work on this subject.

Data recorded—The majority of the descriptive observations are set out in
Table II., the remainder being more conveniently recorded in subsequent para-
graphs.

Key to colours recorded—The skin colours are recorded in Table IT. as
double letters, It was found very difficult to match exactly the colours of our
guide with the browns given in Ridgway, therefore the following small table is
provided to make clear the nature of our findings :-—

Shade guide. Ridgway. Variation from Ridgway.
aa... .. Vandyke Brown .. Darker than standard
bb .. .. Mars Brown .. Warmer and lighter than standard
ce .. .. Bister .. .. Warmer and lighter than standard
dd =... .. Warm Sepia
ec .. .. Vandyke Brown .. Warmer than standard
ff -. .. Light Seal Brown Warmer and lighter than standard
ge .. .. Bone Brown .. Warmer and darker than standard
hh Vandyke Brown .. Warmer and lighter than standard

Abbreviations used in Table I1—The following are used in connection with
hair colour:—BL=Black; Wh.=White; Bl.c.Wh.—Black with sparse White;
Br. Bl.=Brownish-black; Dk. Br.=Dark Brown.

Hair character:—L.W.=low waves; M.W.=medium waves; D.W.
==deep waves. “M. copious” denotes beard shaved off, with a copious moustache.

Nasal septem:—P=pierced; N.P.—not pierced.

From Table II. the following conclusions may be arrived at :—

Head hair —Usually black, with an increase of white hairs with advancing
years. Several white-haired old natives were included in the series. The hair
character varied gencrally between ow and dcep waviness.

Body hair taken generally cannot be considered very marked in quantity,
for the remarks under chest, forearm, and eyebrows show that “scant” and
“medium” predominate, the “marked” condition being only occasionally recorded.

Skin colour—Face, “Vandyke Brown” and “Light Seal Brown” predominate ;
deltoid region, “Warmer Sepia” and “Vandyke Brown” predominate ; inner biceps
region, “Warm Sepia” predominates.

Body build.—Taking into consideration the quantity of food apparently
available to the natives, the state of nutrition was at once noticed. With very few
exceptions, most were noted as “plump” or “muscular.” Subcutaneous tissue
was nearly always sufficient to round off any bony or muscular prominences.

Nasal septum.—Of 43 observations, in 20 cases the nasal septum was pierced.
In several instances the lower border of the perforation was broken through.

The following features were also noted :—

Darwinian tubercle-—Out of 53 observations, the tubercle was present in
5 cases and absent in 48.

Lar lobule—Fifty-three observations showed that the lobule was adherent
in 14 instances, and free in 39,

Supraorbital ridges——These were fairly consistently “pronounced” excepting :
—-“Medium,” Nos. 1, 5, 6, 11, 12, 19, 21, 22, 28, 38, 41, 45, 47; “very pronounced,”
Nos, 44, 52, 55, 60.

Lip protrusion.—‘Pronounced” in 44 cases; “very pronounced” in 6, and
“medium” in 4.

Breasts. —In all the females the form of the breasts was full and pendulous,

71

Hand.—In all cases the “longest digit” was the third; the “second longest
digit” was the fourth in 32 cases, the second in 5 cases; in 11 the second equalled
the fourth.

Foot—The “longest digit” in 30 instances was the first, in 20 the second,
in one case the first equalled the second.

Eye colour——In the younger subjects the iris colour was a light chocolate-
brown, but appeared to become much darker with advancing age. The colour was
frequently obscured by corneal opacities. The conjunctiva in the young subject
is bluish-white, but became yellowish in the adult and a dirty yellow colour with
approaching senility.

ANTUROPOMETRY,

Measurements adopted —The measurements used on this occasion are in
accordance with the suggestions of the International Agreement (see Hrdlicka),
and the set chosen is almost identical with the series used on previous occasions
by one of the present writers as collaborator with If. Wood Jones (3) and A. j.
Lewis (4). ‘Those adopted in the present record are given in Table III.

Instruments used.—Martin’s stature rod, spreading and sliding calipers, and
a non-metallic tape. For the loan of most of these instruments we are indebted
to the Board of Governors, S.A. Museum.

Data recorded.—The results of this section of the work have been set out in
Tables LV. and V. The mean values of cach observation are given at the bottom
of the columns.

Comparative notes —The following lists will show a comparison between the
results of the present work and the figures published by Wood Jones and
Campbell, and Campbell and Lewis. Only a few of the more important measure-
ments are tabulated.

Tagie IIL.
Rody <A .. Stature Head BB .. Breadth
B .. Sitting height CC ., Height
C .. Height to supra sternal Face DD .. Height meuton crinion
notch EE .. Height meuton nasion
D .. Shoulder height FF .. Diameter minimum frontal
E .. Shoulder breadth GG .. Diameter bizygomatic
F .. Arm span HH .. Diameter bigonial
Arm G .. Total length arm II .. Maximum interorbital
H .. Length upper arm JJ .. Maximum intercanthal
I .. Length lower arm KK .. Minimum intercanthal
Hand J .. Tength LY. .. Bi-orbito-nasal are
K .. Breadth Nose MM .. Length
Leg L .. Total length leg NN .. Height
M .. Length upper Jeg OO .. Breadth
N .. Length lower leg Mouth PP .. Breadth
Foot O .. Length OO .. Height
P .. Breadth Ear RR .. Length
Head AA .. Length SS .. Breadth
Wood Jones and Campbell and Campbell and
Observation. Campbell. Lewis. Hackett.
Number. Mean. Number. Mean. Number. Mean.
Stature .. .. 309 1636 25 1593 56 1630
Head length .. 173 187-9 25 187 56 189°6
Head breadth .. 173 137-6 25 135 56 142
Nose height .. 10 44-6 25 43:2 57 52°1

Nose breadth .. 10 46:3 25 44-8 57 48-6

72

It will be seen from these figures that the natives in the regions of the present
enquiry give (a) a mean stature close to the other records; (b) closely similar
head length, but relatively greater breadth; (c) mean nasal measurements which
show a larger nose than that indicated by the other records, this probably being
due to the marked numerical preponderance of males over females in the present
data.

Indices ——A number of the more important indices have been derived from
the figures obtained. They are set out in the table given below, and for com-
parison the results of the two papers referred to above are also included.

Wood Jones and Campbell and Campbell and
Index. Campbell. Lewis. Hackett.

Number. Mean. Number. Mean. Number. Mean.
Cephalic .. 8l 73°3 25 72:2 56 74:7
Facial noe ee 86 25 81:7 57 81°3

Nasal .. 81 100°7 25 104-6 57 93
Ear .. 50 56°6 25 53-1 57 52°7
Radio-humeral 10 81:4 25 81°5 57 75°8
Tibio-femoral .. 10 95:9 — — 57 89-4

From these results it will be seen that the natives of the present enquiry come
under the following classifications :—

Head... af “i .. Dolichocephalic
Face i Fs 145 . BL 813%
Nose a a oe .. Platyrhinic

Ear _ as ch .. B:L 52°7%
Ratio lower to upper arm .. Mesatikerkik
Ratio lower to upper leg .. Dolichocnemic

Taking the present figures and those of Campbell and Lewis in the above
table, two definite regions are represented, namely, Central Australia and an area
north of Ooldea on the Trans-Australian Railway. The indices for Central
Australia show a relatively broader head, similar breadth of face, narrower nose,
similar ratio for ear dimensions, and a relatively shorter forearm. The figures
given by Wood Jones and Campbell represent a compilation of all the available
data from various localities up to the time of publication.

Summarized data.—By combining the data given for three investigations, we
may derive some appreciable estimation of certain physical characteristics as
indicated by their index values; that is, based on data which have been recorded
in a manner at all conformable with standardized requirements.

Number of Mean of

Feature. Observations. Indices.
Head ts .. 162 73°6 Dolichocephalic
Face $5, .. 133 83-1
Nose ie .- 163 98-6 Platyrhinic
Ear a .. 132 54-2
Radius: humerus .. 92 77°8 Mesatikerkik
Tibia: femur me 67 90°3 Dolichocnemic

GENERAL SUMMARY.

In investigations of this nature, the ultimate aim should be, we believe, to
arrive eventually at some clearly-cut account which tells just what a typical
Australian native looks like: this, rather than express his physical features in
abstruse biometric formulae, or, on the other hand, to describe him in long

73

Tab_e IV.

Body and Limbs,

|
| A R Cc D E F G H T J K |] L M N 18) P

1... | 1578 | 779 | 1298 | 1317 | 354 | 1660 | 739 | 322 | 222 | 178 | 85 | 847 | 410 | 382 | 246 97
2...) 1674 | 829 | 1405 | 1402 | 393 : 1834 | 794 | 344 | 253 | 202 | 89 | O48 | 458 | 427 ; 259 98
4...) 1673 | 760 | 1399 | 1413 | 386 | 1790 | $18 | 348 | 273 | 192 | 84 | 946 | 462 | 430 | 273 97
5.4.]/ 1597 | 820 | 1336 | 1322 | 354 | 1686 | 750 | 330 232 | 188 } 91 | 873 | 427 | 378 | 258 | 1u2
6.../ 1733 | 818 | 1424 | 1424 | 392 | 1846 | 772 | 353 | 233 | 198 | 93 | 978 | 501 | 422 | 261 | 104
10... | 1671 | 868 | 1386 | 1413 | 384 | 1921 | 794 1 345 | 251 | 193 | 93 | 906 | 474 | 365 | 273 | 105
11...) 1651 | 850 | 1357 | 1360 | 745 | 316 | 241 | 185 | 91 | 894 | 444 | 379 | 242 91
12... 1731 | 820 | 1441 | 1436 | 368 | 1885 | 842 | 361 | 273 | 200 | 92 | 988 | 408 | 404 | 272 99
15...) 1487 | 752 | 1230 | 1223 | 317 | 1532 | 659 | 284 | 209 | 161 | 71 | 820 | 386 | 372 | 222 88
16..,; — — | 1379 | 1400 | 371 | 1849 | 815 | 340 | 253 | 207 | 92 | 922 | 434 | 429 | 286 | 102
17..../ 1616 | 782 | 1348 | 1339 | 390 | 1762 | 751 | 308 | 253 | 189 | 92 | 919 | 456 | 399 | 264 1 105
18... 1591 | B11 | 1317 | 1321 | 323 | 1657 | 771 | 300 | 233 | 180 | 86 | 866 | 433 | 377 | 239 93
19...) 1364 | 791 | 1288 | 1334 | 328 | 1440 | 724 | 313 | 233 | 166 | 76 | 850
21...) 1459 | 793 | 1289 | 1289 | 316 | 1568 | 697 | 300 | 226 | 165 | 76 | 816 | 377 |
22...) 1861 ] 778 | 1311 | 1322 | 314 | 1594 | 678 | 300 | 210 | 169 | 78 | 846 | 434 | 357 | 238 90
23....| 1263 , 775 | 1303 | 1297 | 328 | 1670 | 745 | 300 | 265 | 170 | 76 | 879
24... | 1830 | 891 | 1537 | 1542 | 369 | 1973 | 876 | 367 | 337 | 201 | 89 |1030 | 510
25.....| 1686 | 811 | 1419 | 1421 | 371 | 1839 | 809 | 347 | 279 | 195 | 91 | 954 | 455 | 429 | 270 | 100
26...! 1611 | 840 ; 1324 | 1317 | 368 | 1738 | 751 | 317 | 237 | 197 | 91 | 860 | 459 112
27... | 1707 | 832 | 1458 | 1424 | 377 | 1853 | 805 | 353 | 259 | 191 | 90 ]1013 | 506 | 426 | 269 | 109
28... | 1639 | 805 | 1366 | 1382 | 354 | 1738 | 766 | 342 | 238 | 185 | 87 | 903 | 418 | 418 . 258 ' 100
29...) 1602 | 854 | 1320 | 1333 | 331 | 1628 | 690 | 306 | 236 | 175 | 84 | 839 | 403 | 367 | 244 95

w
“I
tn
=
“I
wn
2

fe
aa
w
fw OY
ax
Sa
tb
ee
sb
co
BO

&
aa
ay
w
a
NI
iS)
w
a
Ral
to

a)
toa
wo
b>
OF
a

30... 1616 | 815 1326 | 1323 | 374 | 1757 | 738 | 311 | 237 | 191 | 89 | 883 483 | 339 | 256 94
31... | 1838 | 739 | 1287 | 1260 | 312 | 1629 | 759 | 324 | 251 | 182 | 80 | 853 1 413 | 377 | 238 91

32...) 1657 | 846 | 1361 | 1344 | 369 | 1754 | 745 | 316 | 238 | 184 | 89 | 860 | 425} 363 | 260 | 103
33... | 1878 | 812 | 1312 | 1304 | 339 | 1644 | 725 | 313 | 232 | 175 | 82 | 852 | 411 | 379 | 228 | 92
34... | 1663 | 831 | 1366 | 1380 | 362 | 1787 | 778 | 332 | 253 | 188 | 91 | 913 | 465 | 376 | 266 | 103
35... | 1862 | 763 | 1296 | 1323 | 350 | 1658 | 755 | 319 | 250 | 178 | 87 | 876 | 435 | 378 | 246] 95
36... | 1594 | 793 | 1333 | 1305 | 345 | 1702 | 736 | 327 | 226 | 198 | 87 | 884 | 441 | 375 | 255 | 99
37 4. ! 161f | 807 | 1330 | 1317 | 345 | 1709 | 753 | 314 | 251 | 189 | 83 | 868 | 397 | 398 | 255 | 103
38 | 1613 | 812 | 1343 | 1328 | 350 | 1712 | 748 | 308 | 251 | 192 | 85 | B85 | 433 | 384 | 245 { 94

39...) 1882 | 746 | 1317 | 1318 | 341 | 1703 | 735 | 306 | 219 | 177 | 82 | 905 | 433 | 393 | 247 94
40... 1661 | 822 | 1384 | 1371 | 366 | 1799 | 792 | 339 | 253 | 192 | 88 | 911 | 430 | 414 | 256 | 104
41...| 1738 | 849 | 1476 | 1456 | 381 | 1872 | 840 | 356 | 267 | 197 | 89 | 956 | 448 | 434 | 278 | 100
42... 1703 | 819 | 1423 | 1417 | 351 | 1803 | 809 | 345 | 269 | 192 | 88 | 958 : 461 | 431 | 259 | 102
43... 1787 | 895 | 1504 | 1480 | 400 | 1946 | 869 | 365 | 281 | 209 {101 | 975 | 480 | 421 | 282 | 108
44...) 1726 | 879 | 1428 | 1419 | 376 | 1851 | 818 | 350 | 267 | 198 | 92 | 908 | 437 | 417 | 266 | 101
45... | 1684 | 834 |. 1418 | 1408 | 374 | 1818 | 786 | 328 | 258 | 193 | 89 | 938 | 463. 391 | 268 | 100

46...' 1704 | 854 | 1424 | 1425 | 350 | 1799 | 780 | 334 | 259 | 197 | 82 | 923 | 447 | 414 | 258 98
47 1. | 1661 | 815 | 1393 | 1403 | 330 | 1771 | 775 | 337 | 247 | 184 | 92 | 916 | 455 | 388 | 245 99

48... | 1650 | 822 | 1379 | 1370 | 349 | 1775 | 792 | 341 | 250 | 195 | 87 | 904 | 442 ] 394 | 245 95
49 ....| 1659 ; 806 | 1395 | 1406 | 334 | 1742 | 773 | 326 | 256 | 185 | 81 | 931 | 454 | 407 | 258 96
50... ] 1627 | 823 ' 1373 | 1354 | 249 | 1760 | 766 | 320 | 242 | 193 | 88 887 | 425 | 383 | 249 99
51...) £666 9 775 | 1387 | 1408 | 335 | 1799 | 840 | 349 | 284 | 197 | 89 | 960 | 453 | 446 | 262 | 100
52... | 1672 | 823 | 1401 | 1375 - 358 | 1773 | 783 | 342 | 259 | 178 | 83 | 910 | 448 | 393 | 256 88
53.4.) 1646 | 787 ] 1369 | 1374 | 324 | 1786 | 794 | 330 | 254 | 193 | 94 | 990 | 488 | 420 | 269 | 102

54... ] 1656 | 822 | 1368 | 1372 | 368 | 1760 | 792 | 332 | 254 | 192 | 90 | 923 | 455 | 403 | 263 | 105
55.....] 1662 | 852 | 1386 | 1400 | 341 | — 762 | 328 | 250 | 177 | 86 | 924 58 | 405 | 259 89
56... 1689 | 861 | 1393 | 1394 | 355 | 1783 | 789 | 316 | 265 | 198 | 90 | 917 | 429 | 412 | 262 | 109
57... | 1537 | 763 | 127 1292 | 314 | 1613 : 695 |
58...) 1560 | 763 | 1299 | 1299 | 311 | 1644 | 727 | 315 | 221 | 171 | 77 | 862 | 411 | 393 | 225 83

wa
an
NY
he
Oo
I
Q
ae)
Nr
fox
oo
an
iS)
&
Ss
pres
i
oo
bo
DS}
Ga
as
i2)
Nes

59...) 1359 | 810 | 1311 | 1314 | 324 | 1567 > 698 | 280 | 231 ] 177 | 82 | 823 | 394 | 368 | 265 89
60... | 1562 | 755 | 1313 | 1313 | 327 | 1627 | 749 | 314 | 240 | 176 | 78 | 862 | 414 | 393 | 234 79
61... | 1609 | 763 | 137 1368 | 328 | 1716 752 | 304 | 256 | 181 } 79 ) 903 | 428 | 394 } 241 99
62... | 1475 | 739 | 1227 | 1219 | 301 | 1504 | 666 | 286 | 211 | 167 | 73 | 798 | 372 | 364 | 228 &2
63... | 1564 | 74 1316 | 1305 | 314 | 1644 | 714 | 309 | 213 | 174 | 75 | 869 | 410 403 | 237 89
64... | 1589 | 761 : 1337 , 1345 | 300 | 1619 | 749 | 311 | 246 | 180 | 77 240 88

Mean | 1630.41 806.3] 1362,5) 1359,8| 349.2| 1736.5 766.3| 325.6] 247.0] 186.6] 85.6] 902.6) 438.8] 394.5) 253.8] 96.9

AA | BB | CC
138 | 128
146 | 134
148 | 125
142 | 135
144 | 129
146 | 123
147 | 134
143 | 131
143 | 128
139 | 131
142 | 133
138 | 122
142 | 128
138 | 121
132 | 114
145 | 136

48 |°118
42 | 130
| 142 | 127
145° 128
145 | 123
46 | 121
42, 116
148 | 124
141; 125
38 | 139
141 | 142
42 | 131
151 | 126
133, 109
138 | 111
143 | 124
143 | 117
145 123
145 | 128
135 | 130
139 128
148 | 135
141 | 133
143 | 133
143 | 131
147 | 121
153 | 133
138 | 131
| 133 | 124
144} 119
148 | 123
| 143 | 129
130 | 113
138 | 116
137 | 121
136 | 114
| 145 | 127
140 | 119
137 | 115
142 ) 121
Mean | 190.5} 142.11 122.2

TABLE V,
Head.

, — ee — a —
FF | GG | HH] Il | JJ [KK] LL |MM|NN GO] PP|QQ/RR|SS
; 97 | 138 | 102 117 | 87 | 30 [ 105 | 55 | 5S | 59 | 57 | 18 | 79 | 40
| 100 | 136 | 99, 112 | 91 | 30] 130 | 52 | 48 | 47 | 59 | 14 | 62 | 36
114 | 145 | 108 | 116 |102 | 41 | 140; 56 | 54} 63 | 76] 11] 74 39
97 | 134 | 107 | 111 | 85 | 31 | 130, $6 | 53 | St | 53) 12. 69 | 39
113 | 137 | 106 | 115 | 93 | 39 | 140 | 59 | 53 | 48 | 68 | 16] 69 , 39
104 143 | 111 | 122 j101 | 37 | 140) 54 | 57 | 53 | 64 | 21 | 72. 38
107 , 137. 106} 110 | 87 | 35 | 130 | 51 | 51 | 44] 58 | 17 | 64 | 33
101] 143 95 | 121 | 98 | 31 | 130 | 54 §5 | 50 | 62 | 10 | 72! 36
101 | 127 89 | 104 | 84 | 34 | 125 | 49 52) 44 | 55 | 31 | 63 | 36
107 | 147 © 101 | 125 j103 |] 33 | 130 59 | 59 | 51 | 59 | 13 ] 76 | 36
99 143 | 113 | 115 | 95 | 33 | 130 | 36 | 53} 58 | 58] 13° 69 | 39
101 | 133 | 96} 109 | 91 | 33 | 120 | 54] 57 | 47 | 62] 19 | 64 | 34
101 | 131 | 94} 131 | 81 | 29 | 115 | 50 49 | 397] 55 1 14] 63} 31
| 96 | 127 | 93) 104} 80 | 32) 115 | 50. 50 |] 40] 51 113] 62 | 31
101 | 129 | 96) 108 | 94 | 34} 120 | 46 | 48 | 46 | 53 | 16 | 62 | 32
99 1125 | 87 | 106 | 84] 31} 110150 50] 391) 50 | 16 | 63 | 33
| 106 | 144) 91] 113 | 94 | 29 | 125 | 51° 53 | 50 | 50 | 18 | 69 | 36
96 | 147 | 95) 117] 87 | 31, 120 | 59, 57 | 49 | 62 | 5 | 67 | 40
99 | 139 | 96 112 | 91] 35] 115 |] 55 | 55 | 47 | 57 | 16 | 66 | 33
94] 142 | 116 | 112 | 93 | 31} 125 | 54 56] 531 60] 5} 65 | 29
99 | 145 | 96| 116 | 97 | 32} 125 | 57° 57 | 481 61} 16 | 69 | 38
108 | 147 | 102 | 119 | 93 | 35 | 125 | 57 0 58 | 49 | 54] 15 | 64 | 35
100 | 143 | 115 | 116 | 86 | 35 | 115 | 54) 55] 45 | 55 | 18} 58 | 32
100 | 143 | 102 | 114 | 95 | 37 | 125 | 57 | S@ 53] 66 | 12 | 73 | 33
104 | 145 | 117 | 112 | 95 | 34 | 125 | 50 | 48 ° 54 | 58 | 14 | 62 | 35
93 | 136 | 94] 112 | 86 | 28 | 117 | 51; 50) 46 | 53 | 14 | 64} 34
105 | 139 | 111] 116 | 91] 31} 117 | 56 53 | 51} 63 | 18 | 68 | 34
97 | 140 | 99 | 116 | 92} 34} 125 | 55 53 | 49 | 67 | 14] 71 | 39
105 | 142 | 97) 114 | 90 | 35 |} 120 | 53 | 55 | 48 | 62 | 14 | 70] 35
106 | 144] 100 | 113 | 92 | 36 | 120 | 57 | 34° 54 | 64 | B | 72) 34
92 | 135 | 961112 | 91} 31 | 120 | 55 | 56 | 50 | 62] 10 | 62 | 34
97 | 145 | 103 | 114 | 89 | 32; 115 | 53 | 33° 57 | 70] 417 | 70 | 34
100 | 127 | 93 | 111 | 95 | 34 | 120 | 52 | 54 | 49 | 57 | 21 | 65 | 36
101 | 143 ] 104/113 J102 | 33 | 103 | 54° 354] 50 | 57 | 16 | 67 | 37
198 | 135 | 97! 111 | 96 | 34} 120 | 54! 54 | 45 | 54 | 20 | 66 | 39
1t1 | 140 | 961116 | 98 | 364 125 | 50 52) 48] 57) 21 | 68 | 37
101 | 136 | 109 | 114 | 91} 30 | 123 | 51. 51 | 46 | 59} 10 | 68 | 35
106 137 102 114 98 37 125 50: 50 47 51 21 62 37
93 | 140 | 99} 115 | 86 | 32 | 120 | 53 | 52 46 | 60 | 19 | 70 | 40
104 | 148 | 102 | 118 | 93 | 34 | 125 | 49 | 49 ° 50 | 64 | 11 J 81 | 37
06 | 137 | 94} 108} 89 | 28} 119 | 50 | 511 45 | 54) 16 | 67 | 34
107 | 141 | 107 } 114 | 90 | 33 | 120 | 55 | 54/51 | 64118 | 70 | 36
109 | 144 213 | 123 | 95 | 32 | 130] 54 53 | 50] 65 | 19 | 71 | 36
05 | 144} 98 | 115} 91 | 34] 120 | 54 53) 53 | 69 | 14} 79 | 40
99 142; 931199] 88) 30] 118; 46 41 | 46 | 58517 | 60} 31
05 | 137 ° 100 | 111 | 89 | 31 | 125 | $3 + 51 | 60 | 66 | 25 | 74 | 38
107 » 141 | 104} 117 | 98 | 32 | 125 | 34 53 | 47 | 63 | 16 | 64 | 35
106 | 147. 108 | 117 | 93 | 35 | 125 «50 | 49 | 47 1 57 |; 14] 58 | 36
04 ) 151; 104 | 124 | 95 | 35 | 132] 56 55 | 51 | 62 | 11 | 76 | 35
95 124 | 87 | 104 | $1 | 32} 115 | 30 49 | 42 | 59 | 17 | 59 | 32
98° 131 | 94/109 | 85 | 30 | 112) 47 | 46} 45] 58115 | 62 | 233
03 139 | 105 | 111 | 87 | 31 | 120 52] 51] 48 | 63 | 17 | 71 | 38
96 1385 | 96/111 | 87 | 33, 115 | 47 | 43 | 52 | 62 | 14 | 74 | 32
102; 132 | 94 | 109 | 87 | 35 | 126 49 | 48 | 42 | 63 | 24 | 72 | 36
07 132 | so |1os | 87 | 34] 115° 53 | 51 | 47 | 57 | 13] 60 | 35
99 | 128 | 93105 | so | 31 | 112 53 | 47 | 44 | 50 | 15 | 65 | 34
97 | 129} 91102 | 75 | 34] 110; 45 | 44 | 41 | 57 | 16] 66 | 32

{ i
102.0) 138.1 10.0]/113.3' 91,1] 32.9) 121.7| 52.7) 52.1) 48.8) 57.7, 15.5] 67.4! 35.2
| |

75

drawn-out descriptive detail, the value of which is often too much distorted by
the personal equation.

The data we now have available, based on systematic recording, are, as yet,
quite insufficient to constitute anything in the nature of a comprehensive survey;
nevertheless, we are gradually attaining a stage when some tentative analysis of
the observations on certain physical features may be granted. Without relying
too much on mathematical expression or lengthy description, we may safely say
that from the data available, the Australian native seems to present fairly con-
sistently the following physical characteristics :-—

In stature he is slightly less than the average httman height (1675 mm.,
Haddon),

He is definitely dolichocephalic or iong-headed.

He is always platyrhinic, that is “flat-nosed,” and generally has a relatively
broad face. His supraorbital ridges are pronounced and his lips protrusive.

The character of his scalp hair varies from low to deep waves and is only
oceasionally curly, and seldom frizzy.

Lis general bodily birsuteness is by no means marked, and excessive hairiness
seems to occur with no greater frequency than in white persons.

fis skin is a dark-brown colour, or more definitely, a vandyke brown, but
rarely approaching a real black.

REFERENCES.

(1) Tfgpircxa, A., “Anthropometry,” 1920.

(2) Ripeway, R., “Colour Standards and Colour Nomenclature,” Washing-
ton, 1912.

(3) Woop Jonrs, F., and Campnect., T. D., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. xlvii., 1924, pp. 303-12.

(4) Campsety, T. D., and Lewis, A. J., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. 1,
1926, pp. 183-191.

76

ADELAIDE UNIVERSITY FIELD ANTHROPOLOGY:
CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

No. 2.—PHYSIOLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS.
By Witttam Ray, M.B., B.Sc.
[Read April 14, 1927.]

While physical measurements were being made by members of the University
Anthropological Expedition, in January of this year, it was felt that some observa-
tions on full-blooded Australian natives from the physiological point of view
might be valuable. It was, moreover, felt that such observations might answer
the question whether full-blooded natives, in a comparatively native condition,
could be brought to submit to more extensive observation requiring aid to the
observer on their part, such as the determination of basal metabolic rates.

The observations here made were :-—
(1) Blood pressure.
(2) Pulse-rate.
(3) Vital capacity meastirements.
(4) Hacmoglobin estimations.
(5) Temperature.

(1) The blood pressure was measured by a Vycos instrument with spring
pressure gauge on the right arm with the subjects resting quietly. No difficulty
was experienced with the natives whatever in obtaining muscular relaxation,
nor did any psychic factors enter, judging from the steadincss of the pulse-rates.

The average pressure of the males, 42 in number, was :—

Diastolic - .. 79°07 mm. of mercury.
Systolic ae .. 125-35 mm. of mercury.
Pulse pressure .. 46°3 mm. of mercury.
Of the females, 13 in number, the pressures were slightly smaller, being :—
Diastolic £3 .. 73°35 mm. of mercury.
Systolic ae .. 116-0 mm. of mercury.
Pulse pressure .. 42°35 mm. of mercury.

These pressures almost exactly coincide with the standards given for healthy
Europeans, but are distinctly lower than healthy white Australians by 5-10 mm.

of mercury.

The highest systolic pressure recorded in the males was 150 mm. The
highest diastolic, 90 mm.

The lowest systolic (males) was 105 mm.

The lowest diastolic (males) was 65 mm.

The ratio of the pulse pressure to the diastolic and systolic pressures is what
is regarded as theorctically perfect for normal Europeans.

No relationship can be traced in this small number of observations between
the blood pressure and height and weight.

a7

(2) The pulse was taken in the sitting posture. The averages were :—
Males (48), 84 per minute; females (12), 88 per minute. These are slightly
above the European standard.

(3) Vital capacity. It was here that great trouble was experienced, and
only a proportion of the natives could manage the required breathing and exhaling
through the spirometer. The same difficulty was experienced in measuring the
chest expansion. his is in great contrast to the facility with which they can
control the movements of the abdominal muscles, their abdominal respiration
being extremely complete. The observations recorded are of those natives who
“seemed” to understand the manoeuvre required and where several observations
upon each native showed that he had reached the limit of his respiratory capacity.
The obviously inaccurate measurements have been completely deleted.

_ The vital capacity, judged on European standards, is low, the maximum effort
3800 cc. in a native weighing 176 Ibs.

Dividing them into weight groups the following were the figures :—

Weight range. Individuals. Av. weight. Av. vital capacity.
(1) 100-120 Ibs. 4 113 Ibs. 2562 ce.
121-140 Ibs. 6 129 lbs. 2936 cc.
141-159 Ibs. 8 149 Ibs. 3382 cc.
Over 160 Ibs. 4 166 Ibs. 3425 cc.

The impression was gained that if further metabolic experiments are to be
done a strict selection of natives must be made, and the greatest watch kept for
“auspumpung” and other disturbing factors.

(4) The haemoglobin estimations were made with a Tallquist Haemoglobino-
meter, and though this method does not give absolute results, yet they are
sufficiently accurate, and we may judge from the figures that the haemoglobin
percentage is 100 per cent. when compared with European standards. Out of
41 individuals there are 5 below 90 per cent.

Per cent. Males. Females, Total.

100 26 5 31
95 0 1 1

90 3 1 4

85 2 0 2

&0 1 1 2

70 1 0 1

33 8 41

(5) The temperatures were taken in the mouth and were higher than those
of the party by 0°6 of a degree Fahr. ‘Che temperature of the room in which
the work was done varied from 93°-97° Fahr.

The males showed the same temperature as the females, the respective
fisures being:—Males (21), 99-4; females (8), 99°5.

The average temperature of the members of our party during the same period
was 98:9° Fahr,

78

ADELAIDE UNIVERSITY FIELD ANTHROPOLOGY:
CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

No. 3—BLOOD-GROUPING OF AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINALS AT
OODNADATTA AND ALICE SPRINGS.

By J. Burton CLeLanp, M.D.
[Read April 14, 1927.]

During the recent University Expedition, financed in part by the Rockefeller
Foundation through the Australian National Research Council, the blood groups
of 57 pure-blooded aboriginals and of 3 half-castes were determined. The pure-
blooded aboriginals all belonged to Group II. (27) or Group TV. (30) of Moss’
Classification. Of the three hali-castes one belonged to each of Groups IL.,
IIL, and IV., and it is rather interesting to note that the Group III. indivdual had
a father who was half a Japanese.

During the trip an estimation of the blood groups had to be undertaken
frequently under difficult conditions. The weather almost throughout was
intensely hot, ranging usually from about 105° to 111° in the shade. ‘This intense
and dry heat caused rapid evaporation of any fluids. Nineteen tests carried out
at our camp at Ross’ Waterhole, on the Macumba River, near Oodnadatta, had
to be done in the open air, and it was sometimes difficult to escape from wind
and dust. Forty-one tests carried out at Alice Springs were done under better
and more comfortable conditions through the kindness of Sergeant Stott, who
placed at our disposal a suitable room.

The method adopted in carrying out the tests consisted in drawing blood from
a needle-prick of the pulp of one of the fingers of the left hand and running a
small quantity into a narrow tube containing citrated saline. Following on this
the finger was dried and further blood collected in a dry, narrow-bored tube in
which it was allowed to clot, and the separated serum was then used for testing
with citrated red cells of Groups Tl. and 1L1. In this way the red cells of the
aboriginals were obtained for testing against known sera of Groups IJ. and IIL,
and reversing, the aboriginals’ serum was obtained for testing against citrated
red cells belonging to known Groups IT. and IIT.

No difficulty whatsoever was experienced in obtaining blood from adult
aboriginals, cither male or female. They had probably been told at both localities
where we carried out the tests that they were to allow us to carry out such
examinations as we required, though they were not in any way forced to
acquiesce. We explained to them in pigeon English that we wanted to see
whether the blackfcllow’s blood was more like the white man’s than that of a
Chinaman or an Afghan, and they all assented by nods to our request for obtaining
samples of blood. Some jumped when the puncture was made, and one strong
young man vomited suddenly and unexpectedly a large quantity of watery fluid
apparently as a reflex act. When, however, we desired to obtain blood from the
children, these proved so unwilling and frightened that we had entirely to desist.

The results may be bricfly tabulated as follows, it being noted that Moss’
Classification is adopted, and not that of Jansky. In Jansky’s Classification
Group [., of Moss, becomes Group [V., and Group TV. becomes Group I. :—

Of 57 pure-blooded aboriginals 27 belonged to Group II, and 30 to

Group IV.; 13 of these were women, 7 belonging to Group IT. and 6 to
Group LV.

79

16 pure-blooded aboriginals cxamined on the Macumba River near
Oodnadatta showed 8 belonging to Group IL. and 8 to Group IV.

3 mixed bloods (a father and 2 sons), all with an intermixture of Japanese,
belonged respectively to Groups IJ., HL, and IV.

41 natives tested at Alice Springs showed 19 of Group IL. and 22 of
Group IV.

The key sera belonging to Groups IT. and III. had been prepared before
leaving Adelaide from two members of the Expedition, the writer of this article,
who belonged to Group IL, and Mr. Ilackett, who belonged to Group II}. The
Expedition thus had with it and constantly on tap the blood of individuals known
to belong to Groups IT. and [1]. As far as possible it is intended that these two
individuals shall be the source of supply of serum and corpuscles during further
investigations. As members of the medical profession both will be available, and
any anomaly or peculiarity in reaction occurring with while people’s bloods and
their serum or corpuscles can be noted. It will be seen that certain anomalous
results have been met with in tesling the aboriginals which will necessitate some
further comparative work on white Australians.

Employing key sera II. and II. the issues of all the tests with the aboriginal
red cells were clear cut, except on one occasion where a Group II. man gave no
agglutination with the Group III. serum owing to the corpuscles being too
numerous, but gave agglutination when they were fewer.

To confirm the grouping determined by employing Group II. and Group ITI.
sera, the reverse was attempted, the serum being obtained from the aboriginal
and the citrated red cells belonging to Group IL. and Group IV. from the two
members of the Expedition. ‘This reversing yielded some anomalous results of
considerable interest. When using Group II. citrated red cells the positive and
negative results were always clear cut, and only once was a positive recorded
as rather weak. The agglutination usually occurred more quickly and was more
marked and coarser than that with the Croup ILI. reds.

Using the Group III. red cells we found that the agglutination of these by
an aboriginal Group IV. serum was recorded in 4 out of the 30 individuals of
this group as being “fine and slow,” or “rather fine and slow,” and once as “rather
weak” (in this case the agglutination with the Group IL. red cells was also rather
weak), and once a negative result was obtained when the red cells were too con-
centrated, agglutination occurring on repeating with more diluted red cells.

‘The remaining 24 gave typical agglutination results.
The 27 aboriginals belonging to Group IT., which should all have agglutinated
the Group ITI, red cells, gave the following results -—
In 16 the agglutination was definite and no comments were made indicating
any departure from what was expected.
In 3 agglutination took place slowly and the clumping was fine.
In one it is called “fine.”
In one “rather fine.”
In one “very fine, appearing only with much dilution.”
In 2 it was “fine and rather slow.” and the use of the compound microscope
showed only some of the corpuscle clumped.
In one the compound microscope showed the corpuscles mostly clumped.
Once no agglutination occurred, the test being repeated four times with
two separate samples of blood.
Once there was no agglutination to the naked cye, but examined with a
compound microscope occasional doubtful clumps were secn.

80

(It may be mentioned here that the compound microscope was only used occasion-
ally in doubtful cases, the issue being usually perfectly clear cut to the naked eyc,
or, if a little doubtful at first, a hand lens would reveal the presence or absence
of agglutination. )

As the result of the examinations made by us on this Expedition it would
appear that in our Southern Australian aboriginals the agglutinable substance A
characteristic of Group II. is present in nearly half of the individuals examined,
the red corpuscles of the other half lacking both agglutinable substances A and B.
Now with the presence of the agglutinable substance in the red corpuscles there is
the necessary absence from the serum of the corresponding agglutinin. When
both agglutinable substances are present in the corpuscles both the corresponding
agglutinins are absent. When only one agglutinable substance is present in the
corpuscles, the agglutinin corresponding to the other agglutinable substance is
present in the serum in the case of most human races, When both agglutinable
substances are absent from the corpuscles, both kinds of agglutinins would be
expected to be present in the serum. In our Southern Australian aboriginals we
found that nearly half contained only the agglutinable substance A characteristic
of Group II.; the other half contained no agglutinable substance in their red cells,
In the serum of the former we should expect to find the agglutinin A capable of
clumping the corpuscles of Group II. individuals, and in the serum of the latter
we would expect to find the presence of both agglutinins A and B.

The sera of our Group IV. aboriginals showed characteristically the presence
of agglutinin A. The presence of the agglutinin B was also found in all cases,
though the amount of this agglutinin seemed sometimes less than the amount of
agglutinin A.

The 27 sera of our aboriginals of Group II. should all have contained the
agglutinin B for Group III. red cells. In the majority of instances (16) the
serum did contain this agglutinin. In 9 cases it was present, but apparently
in diminished amount. In one case it was almost entirely absent, and in one case
it could not be detected. It is seen, therefore, that in our Southern Australian
aboriginals the agglutinin B is present in the serum of Group IV. individuals, but
sometimes in somewhat diminished amount, and in the serum of Group IT. indi-
viduals in an appreciable number of cases it is diminished in amount and
occasionally cannot be detected. It is interesting to see here the presence sometimes
in the serum of an agglutinin the corresponding agglutinable substance of which
has not yet been detected in our Southern Australian aboriginals.

We have now tested 158 full-blooded aboriginals of Central Southern Aus-
tralia, and these have all belonged to Groups IT. and 1V. of Moss’ Classification,
namely, 82 to Group IL. and 76 to Group IV.

SUMMARY.

Fifty-seven pure-blooded aboriginals were tested, of whom 2/ belonged to
Group IL and 30 to Group IV. (Moss’ Classification), The sera of all the
Group IV, individuals showed the presence of the agglutinin A for Group IL. red
cells. All of the 57 individuals should have shown the presence of the agglutinin B
for Group III. red cells. but this agglutinin was sometimes poorly developed or
even absent in Group II. individuals. Of three hali-castes with Japanese blood,
one was found to belong to Group III. The results obtained support still further
the view of the Australian aboriginal being a pure race in whom only Groups I.
and IV. (Moss’ Classification) occur.

81

ADELAIDE UNIVERSITY FIELD ANTHROPOLOGY:
CENTRAL AUSTRALIA.

No. 4—-ABORIGINAL SONGS.

By E. Harotp Davirs, Mus.Doc., Elder Professor of Music,
University of Adelaide.

[Read April 14, 1927.]

T.— INTRODUCTION.

An investigation into the vocal characteristics, musical susceptibilities, and
folk-songs of the natives of a portion of South Australia and the Northern
‘Territory has formed one part of the work of the University Anthropological
Expedition, under Dr. T. D. Campbell, which journeyed from Adelaide to Alice

Springs (Northern Territory) in December, 1926.

The Expedition—made possible by a special grant of the Rockefeller
Foundation—was more in the nature of a preliminary survey, and although the
scope of its observations was limited to a comparatively brief period, mainly
spent at Macumba River (40 miles N.E. of Oodnadatta) and at Stuart, in the
Northern Territory, it served to establish the existence of large and fruitful
fields for further investigation. In South Australia and the Northern Territory,
more than in any other part of the Commonwealth, it appears that the living
subject is still easily accessible, and available for research. Surely, therefore, no
opportunity should be lost in the immediate pursuit of this important work.

On the particular matter to be now dealt with, the following tentative observa-
tions, though carefully considered, are put forward as a basis only for more
detailed and comprehensive study.

And such study, besides securing the fullest possible. records of aboriginal
songs, might also be extended to the more general questions of phonetics and
speech peculiarities.

Hitherto very little appears to have been done along these lines. Sir W.
Baldwin Spencer, in various expeditions, has made a number of phonographic
records (now lodged in Melbourne Museum). A. W. Howitt in “Native Tribes
of South-East Australia” devotes only a few pages of his monumental work to
“Songs and Song-Makers,” quoting in all three songs, taken down from dictation

by the late Dr. Torrance, who also submitted an aboriginal—Berak—to certain
auditory muscial tests.

Passing reference to corroboree songs may also be found in such standard
books as “Savage Life in Central Australia,” Horne and Aiston; “Natives of
Australia,” N. W. Thomas; “North Queensland Ethnography,” by W. E. Roth;
and “Aborigines of Victoria,” Brough Smyth; while Dr. Herbert Basedow
devotes a whole chapter of his “Australian Aboriginal” to the subject of “Music
and Dance,” discussing certain features in a general way. In none of these
works, however, is there any detailed analysis of individual songs, nor any critical
estimate of their value in relation to the evolution of the art of music. Even
such scientists as the authors of these various treatises are seldom competent to
deal with a purely musical investigation; ner, on the other hand, are musicians
often disposed to the pursuit of ethnology.

Yet it may be strongly urged thai, beyond the mere objective evidence of
musical tendencies in a primitive race, there is the deeper subjective interest;

82

and the question must be constantly asked—if not immediately answered—‘Why
does the aboriginal do these things?”

I].—Tue Recorpinc or Soncs.

(a) Apparatus used—tIn connection with the present Expedition much pre-
liminary time was spent in searching for, and experimenting with, a machine
suitable for work in the field under any possible conditions.

Mr. Blyth, Manager of the South Australian Phonograph Company, was
able to furnish a second-hand Edison phonograph of the old cylinder type, and
with his enthusiastic help this was brought to a point of comparative efficiency.
The recording horn was the subject of close attention, and no less than four
horns of different shapes and calibre were made, and tried out, before the final
choice was reached. This consisted of the bell of a euphonium (a large-sized
brass band instrument) which was lengthened by the addition of a tapering cone
of block tin to about 2 feet over all. Of all the horns tried, this proved to be the
most sensitive acoustically, as well as freest from “blasting,” but further experi-
ment may result in considerable improvement of this most important part of the
apparatus.“

It was also found that the two-minute speed of recording was better than the
four-minute speed, cutting a wider track and giving a greater margin of safety
over possible irregularities on the surface of the wax cylinder.

In actual operation this machine gave fair results, though all the recording
was done at a temperature of 100 degs. or more in the shade, while dust and
grit were a constant hindrance to its smooth working. ‘he intense heat also
caused a rapid perishing of the fine rubber gaskets on eithcr side of the
diaphragms in the sound boxes used both for recording and reproducing,

It is very necessary that the attention of those who are skilled in the making
of apparatus for sound recording purposes should be directed to the production
of a simple and reliable instrument for field uses. A portable battery, with a
microphone and a long length of flex, might conceivably be devised as an exten-
sion for readily securing more delicate sounds, as well as those which cannot be
brought into close proximity to the horn of the ordinary phonograph. In any
case, simplicity and reliability are absolutely essential.

(b) Recording methods adopted —tIn previous attempts at securing aboriginal
songs, such as those of Sir Baldwin Spencer, the great majority of the records
made consist of the whole body of singers taking part in each song.

From the outset I felt sure that better results might be obtained by selecting
an individual singer who could be seated directly in front of the recording horn.
The following reasons will make this clear :—

(1) In massed singing of relatively untrained performers, there arc always
many of inferior ability who mar the general effect of the song. This may be
observed even among our own people, where in popular airs such as the ‘National
Anthem” or “Auld Lang Syne” the total result is very far from being a truc
representation of the musical value of the song itself. Further, in listening to
collective aboriginal songs, it is always easy to single out the song Icader (pre-
centor) who commences each strophe, and is immediately followed by the others.
It is certain, therefore, that stich a leader, performing alone, would give a truer
rendering of the song to be recorded.

(2) Again, in massed singing without instrumental support, the pitch of the
song is both fortuitous and arbitrary. It may chance to be too low at the outset,
and then the lowest notes in the descending scale of sounds become an almost
inaudible rumble. Or, on the other hand, commencing too high, the voices of

(1) Note-—More recent experience goes to show that a covering of soft felt on the
recording horn is of much value in obviating the tendency to “blast.”

83

the chorus are strained upwards, with ludicrous and unmusical effect. (Again
one may observe that such accidents as these are not peculiar to aboriginal folk.)
Frequently the songs heard showed a sudden change of pitch “in mediis rebus,”
due to the impulse of the singers to secure either greater effect, or a more com-
fortable range of tones. ‘Thus great care was necessary in order to determine
the true melodic outline of the song. For this reason also an individual performer
offers the safer course. If his initial pitch be either too low or too high, it can be
corrected by suggesting another note for the starting point, and this | fre-
quently did.

On the whole, very little difficulty was experienced in securing the songs, and
the only persuasion necessary was at the very outset. The plan was to begin
with a chosen man, who, after a little preliminary discussion, would usually be
willing to quietly hum through a song, beating the rhythm on two sticks. He was
then gradually induced to repeat it more and more loudly until, by judicious
encouragement (and the prospect of reward) he reached such a point of con-
fidence as to sing right into the horn of the phonograph. Tminediately the record
had been made it was reproduced for his own hearing, and the effect was instant.
Not only was he gratified and willing to make further records, but his pride was
soon communicated to other natives, who came forward quite readily at later
sittings. ‘Lhe lubras were morc difficult, and in some cases (as at Alice Springs)
a good deal of patience was required before they could be persuaded to sing.
Llowever, the course described above was ultimately effective, and one of the
young lubras proved quite a valuable ally in obtaining other subjects. A portable
eramaphone, with a varicd selection of records, was also an excellent aid in
developing both interest and confidence. It was further of some value in deter-
mining aboriginal reactions to European music.

Utl.—Tre Sones.

(a) Their general character.—Ot the thirty records taken at Macumba River
and Alice Springs (certain of these heing duplicates and variants) all were made
by members of the Arunta tribe, the largest and most widely diffused tribe of
Central Australia. The principal facts noted as to their general character were
as follow :—

(1) No trace of a purely lyric impulse was observable, and apparently the
emotions of love, of grief, or of joy, to whatever extent they exist among
paleolithic men do not find instinctive expression through this medium. Further
enquiries, however, may prove otherwise.

The songs examined show a mildly epic (narrative) or descriptive tendency,
suggestive of the child mind. They are not usually heroic, but rather sung to
words which speak of obvious natural things (as might be expected from their
association with the infinite variety of totems.) Jt is not safe to dogmatise on
the strict meaning of these words; in fact, it would often seem that they are
traditional and not always fully understood by the singers themselves. Careful
questioning, however, elicited such slight explanations as the following -—

Goanna Song—Meaning “Him run away in the bush—catch ’um, make ’um
fat and eat *um.”

Rai Song—Meaning “Rat come out of your hole.”

he words of the songs was not
the immediate object of this investigation, and the opinions here expressed may therefore
be considered as open to challenge. However, a very exhaustive review of their verbal
text is available, published in the Proceedings of the Stadtischen Voélker-Museum, Frank-
furt am Main, 1907, by Carl Strehlow, Missionar at Hermannsburg, and Von Leonhardi.
A perusal of the many Arunta totem songs therein quated only serves to support the
impressions here set down.

84

Witchetty Grub Song—Meaning “Grub gone away into roots of the tree—
can’t find him.”

Old Lubra’s Song—Meaning “Tell ’um all come together in one camp” and
then later “walk along the track.”

Dead Man's Song—Meaning “Dead man all smashed up, lubras dance
around”; or “Dead man buried, all finished.”

Wild Dog Song—Meaning (addressing another pack of dogs) “This is my
country—you go away.”

The colloquial “pidgin” renderings are the actual words used by native
interpreters, but whatever reliance may be placed on such translations, they
certainly suggest a very elementary association of ideas; nor would they tend to
such a level of emotional excitement as might naturally produce the “sing-song”
(recitative) or “chant” style of declamation. It is more likely that the exalted
feeling necessary to song belongs rather to the actual ceremonials with which the
various chants are so closely linked, and that the several dances and ritual
observances (calling, as they do, for concerted utterance and movement) are
responsible for the tendency to sing words which intrinsically are not in the Icast
emotional. This suggestion of a concerted utterance gains strength also from the
thythmic stick beating on the ground which is an invariable accompaniment.

(2) No rhapsodic songs were met with, but all of those recorded were of
fairly definite form, and strophic in character, consisting apparently of brief
verses sung to the same music over and over again. Except for slightly varying
inflections the only difference noted in any given song was an occasional sudden
change of pitch—generally to a higher key—incidental to an access of excitement ;
but the melodic outline remained virtually the same. Furthermore, in the great
majority of cases—but with a few notable exceptions—the commencement of
each song was a relatively high note followed by a gradual falling of pitch until
the lower octave was reached, the final note being reiterated at some length with
a diminishing intensity of tone which at last died away to nothing. In most
instances a middle note (corresponding to the “dominant” of the Greek and
European systems) was also strongly emphasised, and even returned to from
below, before the final drop. ‘Two outstanding observations are, first, the strong
insistence on the relationship of the octave; and, second, the natural perception
of the cadence as a falling progression.

(6b) Rhythm—Some kind of rhythmic reinforcement was an inevitable
feature of all the songs that were heard. It is evidently an instinctive association,
since, when deprived of it, the men singers who made the various records were
obviously uneasy. Two small sticks always sufficed to supply the need, and in
one case a native picked up an empty condensed milk tin lying on the camping
ground, as the nearest thing to hand, and hummed through his song, at the same
time drumming with two fingers on the bottom of the tin,

In the collective songs of the various ceremonials that were witnessed the
stick-beating showed a constant synchronism with the pulse of the song. The
strength of the beats was always proportioned to the fluctuating intensity of the
feeling, but occasionally, as the excitement rose to a climax, or the speed of the
song increased, the single pulse beat was exchanged for a two-pulse beat of
tremendous emphasis, thus :—

Lac f

At the same time the accented note, with its associated syllable, was “pounded
out” in a manner more suggestive of vociferous speech than song.

85

Most of the songs showed a simple duple rhythm, but in one or two cases
a remarkable variant was heard consisting of a duple beat to a song in triple
rhythm, thus :-~

2 eh
Stich beat

The relative complexity of such an association of sounds and beats is interesting ;
and since it happened both at Macumba and Stuart (350 miles apart) it could
hardly be regarded as due to accident or lack of attention on the part of the
performers :—

Apart from this unusual departure from the normal coincidence of song-
pulse and stick-beat, the only other noteworthy peculiarities of rhythm occurred
at Macumba, where one of the men sang a “Witchetty Grub” song in triple
measure, accompanying it with a syncopated beat, thus :—

Roth of these are unusual variations of the more normal and primitive rhythms,
indicating a considerable advance in mentality. The first of them should, how-
ever, be viewed with some caution, since the native in question had possibly
caught the more difficult rhythm from chance hearing of the ubiquitous
gramaphone.

TV.—AvRAL IMPRESSTONS.

3efore making any phonograph records, 1 was present at certain ceremonials
belonging to the initiation of a young man into tribal mysteries. Rough notes
were made of a few of the songs associated with these rites, and although close
attention was given to their main characteristics, only a limited value may attach
to such casual observations, jotted down in the midst of an aboriginal drama of
surpassing interest, viewed for the first time. ‘Uhe following are, therefore, set
out for what they are worth, cach of them embracing only one or two outstanding
features of the song in question.

1. Initiation Song—Main compass from middle C down to the octave (tenor

C), with occasional but very definite use of the upper D as an ornamental note,
thus :—

Lx SF and also frequent 4%6
iw - corresponding em-

phasis on the middle

notes A & G,thus :—

‘ a

2. Women’s Corroboree-—Six women danced, the men only singing a con-
tinuous serics of short strophes (led by a precentor) each lasting about three-
quarters of a minute, with a half-minute interval between the verses. The

86

initial pitch remained constant, commencing with a definite A and clearly embracing
the following notes in various rhythmic permutations :—

fix 7 o :
but rising at times to

a corresponding :—

The pitch of the note marked with an asterisk was indefinite, suggesting again an
ornamental function. The striking feature is the decisive descending fourth
interval and an incomplete tetrachord evolving out of it by the use of an additional!
decorative note. Furthermore, two such incomplete tetrachords linked together
give rise to the pentatonic scale which is prominent in certain of the phonographic
records made later,

Lx GQ an

See”

A persistent aural impression, increasing with the subsequent hearing of these
records, would indicate that while cach song presents certain notes of very definite
pitch (and clearly related) the in-between notes, used ornamentally, are of more
elastic pitch (enharmonics), and while one cannot speak with absolute conviction,
the feeling seems to grow that in unaccompanied songs these enharmonic intervals
present a richer and more varied effect than the mathematically ordered sequence
of conjunctive tones and semi-tones belonging to the European system,

3. Kurdaitcha (man-killing) Song presents different features,

Main compass :— A new rhythmic opening :—

Leoc IO Lx ll

Followed by the now familiar
bia Lh?

suggesting A and E as the principal notes with B and F as ornamental.

Sudden bursts of high pitch thus :—

Tt was in these momentary frenzies that the normal crotchet or quaver stick-
beating gave place to the furious emphasis of the single minim.

87

4. Kangaroo Song, pitched very high :—

Lc l# z a

&

or varied :—
Exch

dropping presently with more or less of a vocal slide to the lower octave. The
whole song was rather rhythmic than melodic, but one significant feature appears
in the itollowing quite startling :—

Lac lO x
PY = i
eat tet tet

yr. | ol lg tl | lg lea

=
indicating a very decisive sense of the major 3rd*.
It remains to cite one or two further notes taken of individual songs.

Emu Song.

In varying degrees and with a suggestion of patterning on its downward progress.

Possum Song, all the quaver beats being tapped.

Again with a downward patterning.

Witchetty Song presents an opening phrase of quite remarkable melodic

beauty -—
£220

[<=

88

V.—Tur Recorps SECURED.

Of the thirty or so of actual records, about a third are good reproductions, a
similar number being less satisfactory, and the balance more or less defective and
unreliable. A faithful transcription of those which are entirely good presents
many difficulties:—(1) The speed is often from “Allegro” to “Presto,” and the

slight changes of inflection in the many ornamental notes are extremely elusive;
(2) the constant use by the singer of a sliding progression between two firmly
intoned sounds—it may be a 3rd or 4th apart—is almost beyond reproduction in
printed terms, especially at the rapid tempo; (3) additional to these are subtle
rhythmic deviations, of comparatively frequent occurrence.
To the musical hearing, however, a purely melodic art seems rather to gain
by the greater elasticity of such devices, and while the effect of a certain indefinite-
ness is always perceived, it is only just enough to veil the clear rhythmic and
tonal outlines underlying. The followi
1. “Rat” Song, sung by an aboriginal at Stuart, consists of a single phrase

repeated six or eight times without a patise:—
LXE: resto

The interest of this is wholly tonal, since it presents the widely used pentatonic
scale characteristic of Gaelic and Chinese music equally. Rhythmically and
structurally it is quite elemental. The pitch relations were faultlessly intoned.
2. “Possum” Song, by the same singer, has a slightly more organic character,
showing a sense of phrase balance, as well as the “pattern” instinct -—

Ex22 Presto

In this there is also the clearest possible indication of the hexatonic scale, which
occurs again in the “Ring Neck” Song.
3. “Ring Neck Parrot’ Song, by a lubra at Stuart, first as a solo, three times
repeated, and then by a chorus of four lubras, twice over :—
Ec 23 @ndante x
a wit a _ Se ees
(ay ee SS A

re

In this example, besides its definite tonal formation, is seen a more highly
organised structure, and the rhythmic diversity of the interpolated 6/4 bars, as
well as the figure of bar 3 repeated in bar 5, seem to indicate an instinctive sense
of the universal art principle of “variety in unity.”

89
4. “Writchetty Grub” Song, by a native at Macumba, in its several repeats
presents many slight variations of detail, but in substance is as follows :—
bixc24 findante espressis'o ~~

a, “ol, ‘PO A

Fae bp fo ye eg es , §

(a Se eS Os
[es ee a ee ee

5. “Pelican” Song, a rollicking and vigorous tune, sung first as a solo, and
then repeated as a chorus with great gusto :—~

Fxe26 Qllegro t4UAce

ae: Se So al :
' = aa A an NS EP
A Ee Lo”

130 4 ©

Its tonal interest specially lies in the use of the melodic minor scale, the sense of
which is so strongly enforced by the sound of the initial note. As usual, slight
variations of both time values and inflections are frequent, but the above notation
is substantially accurate.

90

Since making the records above, | have had an opportunity of visiting
Swan Reach, on the River Murray, and of obtaining there what is probably the
only remaining song of the River Murray tribes. This is now submitted as
follows :—

It may be noticed that the general structure of this song, sung by an old
blackfellow named Fletcher, nearly 70 years of age, is practically identical with
many of the songs obtained in Central Australia, although a thousand
geographical miles lie between them. The range of the song covers the compass
of an octave, with stress on an ornamental note above the upper keynote, and
emphasis also upon the middle note G. ‘The resemblance is very remarkable,
and points to a prevailing idiom which has evolved out of common expericnice.

VI—GrneraL Musica, Suscepripitity or NATIvEs.

On this point a few observations may be offered. Many tests were made
stich as those mentioned by Howitt, and it was found that the aboriginal readily
responded to the pitch of any given note. In order to ascertain this, a single
sound was either sung, or a tuning fork struck, and in most instances the native
immediately imitated the sound at an absolutely true pitch. In certain cases
two or three attempts were necessary before succeeding, and it was curious to
watch the gradual process of co-ordination between the auditory and vocal nerve
centres, the difficulty being obviously not in a true hearing but rather in conscious
voice-control. Further tests showed an equal ability to imitate two, three, or
more, successive sounds of different pitch, proving the existence of a ready
susceptibility to the various degrees of our own scale systems.

As bearing upon and confirming this natural sensibility, it was also noticed
that the aboriginal has a highly developed ear in the matter of vowel distinctions.
While endeavouring to pronounce words in the Arunta language, | was corrected
time after time, with the utmost patience and insistence (always good-humored )
on the part of the blackfellow, until he had secured the exact inflection desired.
These distinctions resembled the delicate differences between the French nasals
an, en, and in, which are often almost insuperable to an Englishman.

In the matter of reactions to various types of European music, no extensive
trials were made, but it was noticed that a general preference was shown for
the more serious gramaphone records, especially of good songs, to which the
aboriginals listened with avid interest, frequently asking for their repetition.
Beyond this, no serious attempt was made to gauge their sense of musical
appreciation.

91

VII—TuHeE Voices or THE NATIVES.

Usually a remarkable difference exists between the voices of Australian
natives in speech and in song. In specch there is not the slightest trace of harsh-
ness, but rather a uniformly beautiful and musical quality, suffused with a slight
breathiness, or huskiness, which rather adds to its charm. The voices are never
raised (except in calling at a distance, or possibly in recrimination), but more
often sink to a whisper, In actual song, however, the voice often suffers an
unpleasant transformation, due entirely to an ignorance of methods of woice
production. From the beautiful natural speech quality it is often raised to a
high nasal whine, in which a forced use of the chest register is the prominent
fault. The higher the pitch of the song the more unpleasant the sounds become.
That this is abnormal was proved in several instances. One of the singers at
Macumba, who was responsible for several phonographic records, in preliminary
attempts sang in a natural way, with a tone that was definitely musical and
agreeable to hear. Similarly, at Stuart a young lubra instinctively used her
medium register to hum through a little song called the “Ring-necked Parrot,”
and then, when placed in front of the recording horn, instantly started off in high,
forced, chest notes which completely destroyed the purely musical effect of her
performance. That a very little teaching will correct this habit is proved by my
own previous experience of two aboriginal children who, under civilized influences,
have developed singing voices of real beauty, as well as showing a quick aptitude
for our own musical idioms.

In point of range the men’s voices showed a baritone or tenor quality, no
18) v4
deep bass voices being heard.

VIII.—Brirer Norrs on Pronetics.

In passing it may be noted how rich the Arunta language is in vocal (vowel)
content. The following translation of the first two verses of the Song of Mary,
Luke i. 46, 47, will make this clear :—

46. Mariala ilaka tuta: Guruna nukanala Inkatana tnantjama.

47. Ltana nuka arganerama Altjira, lunaluna nukibera tuta.

(And Mary said: “My soul doth magnify the Lord
And my spirit hath rejoiced in God my Saviour.’’)

be

The overwhelming prevalence of the full-throated “ah” (an invariable
terminal), as well as the total absence of sibilants (S and Z) and the consonants
F and V combine to intensify the musical effect. The free use of double initial
consonants such as tm, tn, nt, nk, nd, ng, mb, ete., also suggest a likeness to
certain African languages.

Incidentally it is a matter of much speculative interest as to how far natural
musical tendencies in a race may be reflected in the character of its language.
That languages differ very markedly in vocal content is clear; a comparison
between English and Italian affords convincing evidence of this fact. And
since the only essential difference between speech and song lies in the lengthening,
or sustaining, of the vocals at definite musical levels, it follows that that language
which is richest in vowels (vocals) may be so simply by virtue of a primeval song
instinct, developing co-incidentally with speech. On the other hand, it may
appear that such languages will subsequently favour an earlier development of
the art of music in those who speak them.

(3) Note.—The Gospel according to St. uke has been rendered into Arunta by Carl
Strehlow, of the Hermannsburg Mission, and is published by the British and Foreign
Bible Society.

92

IX.—Native Musica, INSTRUMENTS.

No musical instrument was used in any of the songs that were heard, nor
was any trace of one seen on the present Expedition. Enquiries among available
sources of information disclose the fact that a hollow. tree branch or bamboo
(producing a single note, like a horn blast) is sometimes used, and this 1 have
heard in certain of Sir Baldwin Spencer’s records. Mr. Johannsen, an old
resident of Central Australia, also states that a rude pan-pipes made of hollow
bones was occasionally to be met with, never, however, played alone as a musical
instrument, but rather (as in the case of the horn) to add to the general noise,
and particularly to enforce the rhythmic pulsation of the songs.

It would, therefore, seem to be certain that the various pitch relationships,
corresponding to those in use in the European musical system, have been arrived
at by the Australian aboriginal from an instinctive sense of effective tone con-
trast, and as a result of purely vocal experience. This fact is of considerable
importance, since the general view of musical evolutionists has hitherto been that
the existence of rude instruments (either strings or pipes) would probably
precede, and lead to, definite pitch associations in the form of organised melody.

X.—SUM MARY.

In brief, the following conclusions may be advanced from the materials now
presented :—

1. A considerable variety exists in the gencral character of the songs, tonally
and rhythmically, as well as in their emotional content; and these marked
differences are apparent in spite of a certain sameness of idiom due (a) to the
prevalent falling progression from an upper keynote to the octave below, and
(b) to the prominence of the downward fourth interval, coupled with the orna-
mental notes immediately above both key note and fourth below.

That the aboriginal himself is.conscious of wide differences in the character
and identity of his songs is proved by his ability to make two strongly contrastive
records on the same cylinder, with only a moment’s pause between. This hap-
pened in three or four instances, and notably at Stuart, where both rhythm and
tonality were changed in quick succession by the same singer,

2. In point of form (structure) the songs are quite definite, and for the most
part strongly coherent and logical. With the exception of No. 1 cited above,
which is limited to a single phrase, they are well organised and surprisingly
effective.

3. Such a development of the expressive sense in so primitive a race is
worthy of further enquiry and close study. Vocal utterance of the purely
instinctive order is apparently not confined to language only.

It is hoped at a later time to add to the examples here given which, though
few in number, are of great evidential value.

The material of the records already made is by no means exhausted as yet,
and doubtless there will be future opportunities of securing many further records
from other localities.

It will also be necessary to convert the highly perishable wax cylinders into
some more permanent substance, perhaps re-recording them in disc form, with
such amplification of tone as will secure their effectiveness for public hearing.

93

ON NEW SPECIES OF EMPLESIS (CURCULIONIDAE).

By ArtHur M. Lea, F.ES.

(Contribution from the South Australian Museum.)
[Read June 9, 1927.]

The genus Emplesis consists of a large number of small weevils, many of
which live beneath the bark of eucalypti, and may be obtained in very large num-
bers. In general it appears to be close to Storeus, and at one time I proposed
amalgamating the two genera. As the claws, however, are simple, except for a
slight basal swelling, in Emplesis, and truly appendiculate, in Storeus (although
it is often necessary to use a compound power to examine them), I recently again
separated them, and dealt with the species of the latter genus in the Records of
the Queensland Museum.

ry 2 , AN
Vn) : 3

“>

a nn,
aa
W ai 14 uu VW
12
ie
i
may ‘ 18

Fig. A. Claws of species of Emrplesis. 1, filirostris, Pasc.; 2, scolopax, Pasc.;

3, assimilis, Blackb.; 4, mundas, Blackb.; 5, 6, amoena, Lea; 7, bifoveata, Lea;

8, composita, Lea; 9, grata, Lea; 10, lata, Lea; 11, lithostrota, Lea; 12, longicollis,

Lea; 13, microsticta, Lea; 14, muitiariteulata, Lea; 15, nigrofasciata, Lea; 10,
parilis, Lea; 17, parvidens, Lea; 18, picta, Lea; 19, tibialis, Lea.

EMPLesis assimitis, Blackh.

Numerous specimens from the Fortescue River (North-Western Australia )
appear to represent a variety of this species; they differ from typical specimens
in being somewhat more brightly coloured, and with the rostrum of the female a
little longer. They are also extremely close to E. aenigmatica. On the apical
segment of the abdomen the clothing in some lights appears golden.

94

EMPLesis 1GNontits, Lea,

The type of this species was in rather poor condition. Numerous specimens
now under examination (from New South Wales, Tasmania, and South Aus-
tralia) have the scales mostly of a rusty-red colour, with numerous ochreous and
black spots alternately arranged, especially on the odd interstices, on the third
there are usually four black and five ochreous ones (but on several specimens the
contrasts are not very obvious); on the pronotum there are two dark triangles
at the base, and a conspicuous median line. On the head there is a remnant of a
crest, fairly distinct but much less elevated than on EF. scolopax. Vhe female
differs from the male in having the rostrum much longer, strongly curved, polished
and almost impunctate, abdomen gently convex and the fifth segment shorter.
The species is slightly larger than FE. suturalis, the rostrum of both sexes is longer,
and the blackish spots on the elytra are more numerous and isolated. The rostrum
of the female is somewhat shorter than on EF, dispar and more curved. The type
was stated to have the “elytra without lines of setae.” They are, however, present,
although depressed on it, but on many of the fresh specimens they are conspicuous.

EMPLESIS NIGROFASCIATA, Lea,

Some specimens from Lucindale (South Australia) are larger, up to 3°5 mm.,
than usual.
EMPLESIS BIACHYDERES, I-ea.

A male from Mount Lofty (South Australia) has the three vittae of the
pronotum darker and more conspicuous than usual, and the dark scales of the
elytra more numerous. One from Gosford (New South Wales) is unusually
small, 2°75 mm.

Emplesis ovalisticta, n. sp.

é. Dark reddish-brown, metasternum more or less blackish. Densely
clothed with ochreous-brown scales variegated with paler and darker spots, and
with a conspicuous sub-oval blackish patch beginning at the suture on the basal
half of the elytra; scales on under surface and legs stramineous or whitish.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, slightly dilated
between antennae and base; with fine costae, alternated with rows of squami-
ferous punctures to insertion of antennae, at apical third, beyond which there
are only punctures. Prothorax widely transverse, apex suddenly narrowed and
sub-tubular ; with crowded, concealed punctures. Elytra elongate, base trisinuate
and not much wider than widest part of prothorax; with regular rows of large,
partially concealed punctures. Two basal segments of abdomen with a wide
shallow depression, continued on to metasternum. Femora stout, grooved and
edentate. Length, 4-4-5 mm.

9. Differs in having rostrum longer, much thinner, more strongly curved,
without ridges, with minute punctures, and clothed only at extreme base ; antennae
inserted just perceptibly nearer base than apex of rostrum; abdomen evenly
convex, and fifth segment slightly smaller.

Australia (J. Faust from C. A. Dohrn). Queensland: Atherton (Dr. FE.
Mjéberg), Stradbroke Island (J. H. Boreham), Brisbane (T. G. Sloane). Type,
I, 16237, in South Australian Museum, cotypes in Queensland and Stockholm
Museums.

A tessellated species, but distinct by the dark and more or less oval patch on
the elytra, slightly variable in extent, but constant on the 48 specimens under
examination. On the elytra of specimens in good condition there are numerous
pale and dark spots, and the former form one or more feeble wide V’s on the
apical half; on the pronotum the clothing is slightly variegated, but there is a
narrow blackish triangle on each side of the base.

95

On this and all the other new species, unless otherwise noted, the prothorax
has dense punctures more or less concealed by the scales; the elytra have regular
rows of punctures of moderate or large size, but always appearing much smaller
through the clothing and often simulating striae on the sides; the punctures on
the interstices are small and always concealed except where scales have been
removed, The antennae are uniformly coloured, or at least the club is not black.
The femora are edentate, and grooved, the grooves distinct on the hind ones,
less distinct on the middle ones, and feeble or absent from the others.

Emplesis suturalis, n. sp.

&@, Dark reddish-brown. Densely clothed with rust-brown scales, con-
spicuously variegated with paler and darker spots; under surface and legs with
whitish scales.

Rostrum feebly curved, parallel-sided, slightly longer than prothorax; with
fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures from base to apical
third (where the antennae are inserted), thence with dense, sharply defined, naked
punctiures. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides parallel to near apex, which is
suddenly sub-tubular. Elytra elongate, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen with
a shallow depression common to two basal segments, fifth slightly longer than
second and third combined. Femora stout, the hind ones strongly grooved.
Length, 3°5-4 mm.

9. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more curved, clothed
only at extreme base, without ridges and almost impunctate; antennae inserted
almost in exact middle of sides of rostrum; abdomen evenly convex and fifth
segment shorter than second and third combined.

Western Queensland (Blackburn’s Collection). Type, 1. 16238, in South
Australian Museum, cotype in Queensland Museum.

A tessellated species, with the sutural clothing dark throughout; two or three
wide V’s [ormed by pale spots may be traced on the elytra, there are four distinct
dark spots on the third interstice, and they are fairly numerous on the sides and
apical slope; on the pronotum two narrow dark triangles are conspicuous, and
there is usually a narrow and moderately dark median line. The clothing of the
scutellum, as on most of the tessellated species, is conspicuously whitish. The
rostrum of both sexes is shorter than on Z. aenigmatica, and the clothing 1s
brighter; on that species the dark spots on the elytra are isolated, on this species
many of them are obliquely connected with the suture.

var. meridionalis, n. var.

Some specimens from South Australia appear to represent a varicty of this
species, the general clothing is slightly paler and the rostrum of the male is very
slightly shorter; on sevcral of them the pale V’s extend quite to the suture.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt), Mount Lofty Ranges (N.
B. Tindale), Gawler (A. M. Lea).

Emplesis cylindrirostris, n. sp.

¢@. Dark reddish-brown, suture infuscated. Densely clothed with muddy-
grey scales, variegated with paler and darker spots, and with a fairly large dark
fascia crowning the apical slope of elytra; under suriace and legs with whitish
scales.

Rostrum almost straight, the length of prothorax, parallel-sided, apical third
with naked punciures, elsewhere with dense scales, partly concealing punctures
and ridges. Prothorax strongly transverse, almost parallel-sided to near apex,
which is suddenly narrowed. L‘lytra narrow, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen

96

with a shallow depression common to the two basal segments, fifth slightly longer
than second. Femora stout, feebly grooved. Length, 3-3-25 mm.

9. Differs in having the rostrum considerably longer and thinner, almost
impunctate, antennae inserted slightly nearer base than apex (instead of at apical
third), basal segments of abdomen flat in middle and fifth no longer than second.

Queensland: Townsville (F. P. Dodd), Magnetic Island (A. M. Lea). Type,
I. 16239.

A narrow, faintly tessellated species, with the rostrum almost straight in
both sexes. The dark fascia extends across about four interstices on each elytron,
but on two (of the five) specimens before me is rather feeble; it is followed by
a narrower fascia of pale spots, between it and the base the pale spots are fairly
numicrous but feebly defined; on the pronotum the median line and the two dark
basal triangles are inconspicuous.

Emplesis submunda, n. sp.

é. Reddish-brown, metasternum slightly darker than abdomen. Densely
clothed with brownish scales, variegated with paler and darker spots, under
surface and legs with whitish scales.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, feebly curved, parallel-sided; with
narrow ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third
(where the antennae are inserted), in front with naked, sharply defined punctures.
Prothorax moderately transverse. Elytra rather narrow, parallel-sided to beyond
the middle, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen with a feeble depression common to
first and second segments, fifth distinctly longer than second and third combined.
Legs short and stout. Length, 3 mm.

Queensland: Mount Tambourine. Type (unique), I. 16240.

A narrow, tessellated species, in general appearance like small narrow
E. munda, but rostrum distinctly shorter and thicker. The elytra have pale spots
in three oblique series on each, or four if a less distinct sub-apical series is
included, the darker spots are very feeble; on the pronotum the variegation is
feeble, and the two basal triangles are ill-defined.

Emplesis intermixta, n. sp.

é. Reddish-brown, metasternum somewhat darker. Densely clothed with
variegated scales, becoming almost white on under surface and legs.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, slightly curved, parallel-sided, with narrow
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are inserted), apex with small, sharply defined, naked punctures. Pro-
thorax modcrately transverse, sides gently rounded to near apex, which is sub-
tubular. Elytra somewhat wider than prothorax than is usual, base feebly
trisinuate. Abdomen with a shallow depression common to two basal segments,
fifth very little longer than second. Length, 3-5 mm.

Queensland: Cairns. Type, I. 16241.

A tessellated species, with the dark scales, except for a few small spots,
covering the median half of the pronotum; on most of the elytral interstices
there are small dark-brown spots, alternated with longer and paler ones, and
there is a fairly large dark spot crowning the apical slope, followed by a fascia
of pale spots. At first glance it seems fairly close to some of the darker forms
of £. aenigmatica, but, in addition to the different tessellation, the claw joint of
the front tarsi scarcely projects beyond the lobes of the third, the claws themselves
appearing to rest on its fringe. The eyes are separated less than the width of
the base of rostrum.

97

Emplesis subuniformis, n. sp.

6. Dull reddish-brown, suture narrowly infuscated. Moderately clothed
with pale brownish-stramineous scales, feebly variegated on upper surface, and
slightly paler on under surface and legs.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided ;
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures between base
and apical third (where the antennae are inserted), in front with dense, naked
punctures. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides gently rounded, apex sub-
tubular. Elytra elongate, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen with a shallow
depression, common to the two basal segments, the fifth slightly longer than
second and third combined. Length, 3-25-5 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrum thinner, longer and strongly curved,
antennae inserted just perceptibly nearer apex than base, rows of punctures and
ridges feeble behind them, almost impunctate in front, abdomen evenly conven
and apical segment shorter than second and third combined.

Queensland: Blackburn’s Collection. Type, I. 16242.

The tessellation is so faint that the clothing might almost be regarded as
uniform, nevertheless on some of the lateral interstices the alternation of pale
and dark spots is fairly distinct; the two dark spots at the base of the pronotum
are scarcely evident. In some lights some of the scales on the head and front
of pronotum have a faint golden lustre. The rostrum of the female is strongly
curved, almost as on E. femoralis, to which in other respects it is fairly close,
except for the weaker tessellation; it is larger than FE. mediocris, and the female
rostrum is more strongly curved.

Emplesis bituberculata, n. sp.

é. Dull reddish-brown, antennae and tarsi paler. Densely clothed with
stramineous, brown and blackish scales, becoming whitish on under surface of
body and of legs.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, almost straight, parallel-sided, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamifcrous puncttires to apical fourth (where
the antennae are inserted), in front with crowded, naked punctures. Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides gently rounded but apex sub-tubular. Elytra
nowhere quite parallel-sided, base feebly trisinuate. Under surface with a
depression continuous from near base of metasternum to apex of abdomen, and
deeper on basal than on apical hali, on each side of it on basal segment of
abdomen a conspicuous rounded tubercle. Length, 3°25-3-5 mm.

Queensland: Mount Tambourine (IJ. Ilacker in November, A. M. Lea in
January). Type, L. 16243, in South Australian Museum, cotype in Queensland
Museum.

A tessellated species, but readily distinguished from all previously described
ones by the bituberculate abdomen. ‘here is a large elongate patch of black
scales on the side of each elytron, elsewhere brown and stramineous scales are
irregularly mingled; on the pronotum the usual two basal dark triangles are
searcely defined.

var. taSsmaniensis, fi. var.

Four specimens from Tasmania evidently represent a variety; they diifer
in being considerably darker, blackish, except for the antennae and tarsi, but the
elytra are without black patches of scales, stramineous and dark-brown ones
being irregularly intermingled on the upper surface, the rostrum is slightly longer
and the depression on the under surface is not continued beyond the second seg-
ment of abdomen, the apical segment is longer, and the two basal tubercles are
slightly larger.

D

98

9. Differs from the male in having the rostrum longer, thinner, cylindrical,
polished black, and without punctures or ridges, antennae inserted nearer base
than apex of rostrum, abdomen gently convex, non-tuberculate, and apical seg-
ment not as long as second and third combined, instead of slightly longer.

Tasmania: Hobart and Burnie (A. M. Lea).

Emplesis alphabetica, n. sp.

8. Reddish-brown, rostrum, antennae and tarsi somewhat paler. Moder-
ately clothed with stramineous-brown scales, variegated with paler and darker
spots; on under parts uniformly whitish,

Rostrum slightly curved, about the length of prothorax; with narrow ridges
alternated with squamiferous rows of punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are inserted); in front with dense, naked punctures. Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides comparatively strongly rounded and apex not
suddenly sub-tubular. Elytra narrow, basal third parallel-sided, base very feebly
trisinuate. Abdomen more convex, and with a smaller depression than is usual
on two basal segments. Legs comparatively short and stout. Length, 2°5 mm.

Queensland: Dalby (Mrs. F. H. Hobler), unique.

A small, tessellated species, narrowly elliptic in appearance, although the
outlines of the prothorax and elytra are not continuous. On the middle of the
fifth interstice, on each elytron, there is a narrow whitish spot, and one on each
interstice to the suture half-way down the apical slope, the whole forming a
rather conspicuous V; there are also a few other pale spots on the elytra, the
dark spots are more numerous but less conspicuous; on the pronotum there are
two dark basal spots and a less distinct median line, with a few feeble scattered
spots.

Emplesis pulicosa, n. sp.

4. Of a dull, pale reddish-brown. Densely clothed with stramineous-grey
scales, the elytra conspicuously tessellated, and with a deep black patch crowning
the apical slope, scales on under surface and legs almost white.

Rostrum rather thin, parallel-sided, slightly curved, almost the length of
prothorax; ridged and punctate to insertion of antennae (at apical third), thence
with rather dense punctures. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides almost parallel
to near apex. Elytra thin, base very fecbly trisinuate, basal third parallel-sided.
Two basal segments of abdomen feebly depressed in middle, the fifth not quite
as long as second and third combined, Jegs short. Length, 2-5 mm.

Queensland: Longreach (A. M. Lea). Type (unique), I. 16244.

A narrow, tessellated species. The pale scales on the elytra form numerous
narrow spots, alternated with smaller dark ones, similar in colour to the derm;
the patch of black scales extends across about six interstices on each elytron, and
the pale spots preceding and following it are more conspicuous than the others;
on the pronotum the two dark sub-triangular basal marks are distinct, and there
is a fairly distinct median line, narrowing in front, the setae are numerous and
give the surface a speckled appearance, although of much the same colour as the
scales amongst which they are set. The clothing of the rostrum completely conceals
the sculpture of the basal fourth, and from there to the apical third the ridges
are distinct, but the scales thin out. The tessellation is more conspicuous than
on £. cylindrirostris, there is more black on the elytra, the rostrum is more curved
and the size is less.

A female from New South Wales (H. J. Carter) probably belongs to the
species, Its rostrum is slightly longer, thinner, and more curved on the male,
and its abdomen is evenly convex; its elytra have the suture blackish, and the
regular black patch at the summit of the apical slope appears as a black spot on
cach elytron, separated from the suture by the second and third interstices. It

99

is considerably narrower than E. sublecta, but the markings approach those of
some specimens of that species.

Emplesis curvirostris, n. sp.

9. Reddish-brown, metasternum and club blackish. Clothed with
stramineous and brownish scales, becoming white on under surface and legs.

Rostrum long, thin, strongly curved, glabrous and minutely puitctate.
Antennae inserted just perceptibly nearer apex than base of rostrum, Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides rounded, apex about half the width of base. Elytra
elongate-subcordate. Fifth segment of abdomen scarcely longer than second.
Length, 2 mm.

Queensland: Bribie Island (H. Hacker and A. M. Lea). Type, 1. 16245,
in South Australian Museum, cotype in Queensland Muscum.

A small species, apparently intermediate between the fessellata and niveiceps
groups. The pale spots on the elytra are narrow, and each is confined to a single
interstice, as on other tessellated species, but they are not sharply defined; several
of them may be regarded as forming a fecble fascia just before summit of apical
slope, and another half-way down it; on the pronotum two dark basal marks are
fairly large, and there is a median line, but they are not sharply defined, the rest
of its surface has a speckled appearance.

Iive specimens, all females, were obtained, but the species is distinct by the
small size, long curved rostrum and black club; it is about as long as EF. impotens,
but is wider,

Emplesis macrosticta, n. sp.

@. Dull reddish-brown, metasternum darker. Densely clothed with whitish
. scales, a large black spot on elytra, and some fecble brownish ones.

Rostrum long, thin, moderately curved; with rows of fine punctures to
insertion of antennae (slightly nearer apex than base), and glabrous, except at
extreme base. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather strongly rounded.
Elytra, for the genus, comparatively wide, base very feebly trisinuate. Fifth
segment of abdomen the length of second. Length, 2°75 mm.

Northern Queensland (Blackburn’s Collection), Type (unique), [. 16246.

This should probably be regarded as a tessellated species, but the tessellation
is feeble and confined to the apical half of elytra. The large spot commences
near the base, terminates before the middle, and is sharply terminated by the
third stria on each elytron, the clothing margining it is whiter than elsewhere;
on the pronotum there is a median line, and two sub-triangular basal spots of
brownish scales.

Emplesis squamivaria, n. sp.

é. Blackish-brown, legs, rostrum and antennae obscurely paler. Densely
clothed with variegated scales, becoming sparser and almost white on under surface
and legs. .

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, slightly curved, parallel-sided, with
fine ridges alternated with squamiferous rows of punctures from base to apical
third, where the antennae are inserted, in front with small naked punctures.
Prothorax strongly transverse. Elytra elongate-subcordate, base moderately tri-
sinuate. First and second segments of abdomen with a wide depression continued
on to metasternum, and feebly on to third and fourth, fifth slightly longer than
second and third combined and with a large round depression. Femora stout,
the middle and hind ones distinctly grooved. Length, 3-5 mm.

Northern Territory: Darwin (G. F. Hill and W. K. Hunt).

A fairly stout somewhat tessellated species. The clothing of the upper sur-
face is white, ochreous and brown irregularly mingled, and on the elytra there is
a large black spot on each side, although not quite as on E. bituberculata. ‘Vhe

100

derm of the type is almost entirely blackish; the second specimen is much paler,
being pale reddish-castaneous (probably from immaturity); its clothing is less
variegated, the dark elytral spots being scarcely black, and the scales of the pro-
notum being silvery-white and brown, in irregular alternate vittae.

Emplesis vitticollis, n. sp.

8. Dark reddish-brown, antennae and tarsi somewhat paler. Densely

clothed with slaty-white, stramineous and brown scales, becoming white on under
arts.

Rostrum rather stout, slightly shorter than prothorax, almost straight,
parallel-sided; ridges and punctures completely concealed by scales to apical
fourth, where the antennae are inserted, tip with dense and small but sharply
defined punctures. Prothorax almost as long as the basal width, sides gently
rounded but strongly narrowed at apex. Elytra thin, almost parallel-sided to
beyond the middle. Abdomen with a shallow depression continuous from near
base to base of fifth segment, fifth slightly longer than second and third combined.
Length, 2°25-2:75 mm.

Northern Territory (Capt. S. A. White). Type, I. 16249.

A narrow somewhat obscurely tesscllated species. ‘The clothing on the inner
half of the elytra is irregularly intermingled, on the sides the tessellation being
more pronounced; on the pronotum there are three fairly well-defined dark vittae
and two pale ones, the sides being irregularly spotted. The prothorax is longer
than is usual and the claws are more strongly exserted. In appearance it is fairly
close to E. submiunda, but the tessellation of both prothorax and elytra is on a
somewhat different plan, and the rostrum is stouter.

Emplesis microsticta, n. sp.

Blackish, antennae (club blackish) and tarsi obscurely reddish, Densely
clothed with ochreous scales intermingled with small black and white spots, under
parts with stramineous clothing.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided, with
seven distinct ridges alternated with rows of punctttres between base and antennae
(at apical fourth), in front with numerous sharply defined punctures. Prothorax
about as long as the basal width, sides rather strongly rounded. Elytra elongate-
subcordate, sides nowhere parallel. Abdomen somewhat flattened but not
depressed along middle, third and fourth segments combined slightly longer than
hfth and decidedly longer than second. Legs somewhat longer than usual; front
femora moderately, the others deeply grooved. Length, 4°35 mm.

New South Wales; Blue Mountains (Dr. E. W. Ferguson), unique.

A speckled species somewhat resembling Storeus albosignatus on an enlarged
scale, but with claws swollen at the base instead of appendiculate. The seriate
punctures on the elytra are narrower than usual and*each contains a thin seta.
On the elytra the black and white spots are about equally numerous, but the white
ones are usually smaller and more conspicuous, occasionally a single white seta
is isolated; on the pronotum there are no white scales, and the black ones are
irregularly distributed; on the head the clothing is entirely ochreous. The
abdomen is without a longitudinal depression and its fifth segment is compara-
tively short, these being feminine characters, but the structure of the rostrum
(although the seriate punctures are not squamiferous), and the insertion of
antennae appear to render it certain that the type is a male.

Emplesis brevimana, n. sp.

4. Pale reddish-castaneous. Densely clothed with pale buff scales
tessellated with pale-brown ones, on under parts becoming white.

101

Rostrum long, rather thin, moderately curved, with fine ridges alternated
with rows of squamifcrous punctures on basal half, slightly beyond which the
antennae are inserted, apical half with small naked punctures. Prothorax
moderately transverse, apical third rather strongly narrowed. Elytra rather
natrow, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen shallowly depressed along middle of
first and second segments, fifth slightly longer than second and third combined.
Legs short, femora feebly grooved, claw joint of front tarsi just passing lobes of
the third, of the others not at all, Tength, 2-2°5 mm,

9. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more strongly curved,
glabrous and almost impunctate, without ridges, antennae inserted slightly nearer
its base than apex, and fifth segment of abdomen shorter than first and second
combined.

New South Wales: Barcllan (A. M. Lea), Bogan River (J. Armstrong).
South Australia: Quorn (A, H. Elston). Type, 1. 16250.

A small species, with soft tessellated scales, and without seriate rows of
elytral setac; about the size of E. juvenca, but very distinct by the unusually
short claw joint. The tessellation of the scales is fairly sharply defined, although
the two colours are not strongly contrasted; but the pattern is not alike on any
two specimens before me. The type male, from Larellan, has the metasternum
no darker than the adjacent parts; of two femalcs from the Bogan River one
has the metasternum slightly darker than the adjacent parts, but on the other it
is black. A male, from Quorn, has the metasternum and part of the abdomen
black; the tessellation of its wpper surface is so faint that the clothing might
fairly be regarded as uniform.

Two males and a female have just becn received from the Bogan River; of
these the males have the metasternum and abdomen (except the apical segment)
black, densely covered with white scales; the female has the metasternum only
black, and the tessellation of its upper surface fairly pronounced.

Emplesis nigrirostris, n. sp.

9. Black, apex of prothorax, claw joints, scape and basal joint of funicle
reddish. Densely clothed with sooty and whitish scales, irregularly intermingled
on upper surface; on seutellum and under parts white.

Rostrum distinetly longer than prothorax, thin, strongly curved, shining and
impunctate; antennae inserted scarcely perceptibly nearer base than apex. Pro-
thorax strongly transverse, sides strongly rounded. Elytra feebly trisinuate at
base, basal third almost parallel-sided. Abdomen gently convex, fifth segment
almost as long as second and third combined. Middle and hind femora very
feebly grooved, the others not at all. Length, 4 mm.

Victoria: Mount Buffalo (Rev. T. Blackburn). Type (unique), I. 16253.

The type was named, although a female, as it is very distinct by the black
colour of its body and most of its antennae. It has the strongly curved and
polished black rostrum and partly black antennae of LE. monticola, but is larger,
elytra black and clothing different. Parts of the elytra might he regarded as
obscurely tessellated.

Emplesis squamirostris, n. sp.

g. Black, antennae and claw joints reddish. Densely clothed with muddy-
grey scales, feebly tessellated with sooty-brown spots, becoming almost white on
under parts.

Rostrum distinctly longer than prothorax, almost straight, parallel-sided,
with a conspicuous swelling at base, clothed almost to tip with the ridges and
seriate ptnctures concealed, tip with small crowded punctures. Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides gently rounded, but apex suddenly narrowed. Elytra
rather narrow, basal half parallel-sided, base very feebly trisinuate. Abdomen

102

flattened but not depressed along middle, fifth segment slightly shorter than
second and third combined. Length, 3-3-5 mm.

Victoria: Birchip in July (J. C. Goudie).

A dingy species like EZ. gravis, but the rostrum much as on E. tuberculifrous ;
the elytra, however, have but two obscurely contrasted shades of colour, not
three distinct ones, as on that species, On E. scolopax the interocular clothing
is in the form of fascicles and the general clothing is paler. £. lineigera is
evidently allied, but appears to be a paler and more conspicuously tessellated
species. The clothing of the rostrum is continued well beyond the insertion of
antennae (at apical two-fifths), a rather unusual character. There are lines of
setae on the elytra, but being pressed flat amongst the scales they are inconspicuous.

Emplesis nigriclava, n. sp.

é. Black, antennae (except club) and tarsi reddish. Densely clothed with
dark-brown and stramineous scales, becoming whitish on under parts and snowy
on scutellum.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, slightly curved, parallel-sided; with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures from base to insertion of
antennae (at apical two-fifths) beyond which the punctures are crowded and
naked. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather strongly rounded. Elytra
comparatively wide, base gently trisinuate, sides nowhere quite parallel. Abdomen
with a wide depression on first and second segments, continued on to meta-
sternum and feebly on to third and fourth, fifth about as long as second and third
combined. Legs stout, femora scarcely grooved. Length, 3:5-4 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrum considerably longer, thinner, strongly
curved, shining throughout, rows of punctures faint behind antennae (these
median) and not squamiferous, abdomen with a smaller and shallower depression
and fifth segment smaller.

Victoria: Gishorne (A. H. Elston from G. Lyell). New South Wales:
Forest Reefs (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 16318.

An obscurely tessellated species, with the black rostrum club and under sur-
face of E. monticola, but with a wide median space on the pronotum clothed with
dark scales, conspicuously bounded on each side by a patch of pale ones; the
elytra also have a fairly distinct, interrupted, pale fascia (sometimes reduced to
isolated spots) crowning the summit of the apical slope. At first glance it is
somewhat like the Tasmanian variety of E. bituberculata, but the abdomen is non-
tuberculate and the club is black. The elytral setae are numerous but distinct
only from the sides.

Emplesis interrupta, n. sp.

6. Reddish-brown, metasternum darker. Densely clothed with dingy
stramineous scales becoming whitish on under parts and snowy on scutellum.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, slightly curved, parallel-sided, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half, apical half
with naked punctures. Antennae inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum.
Prothorax moderately transverse, sides well rounded. Elytra rather thin, base
not trisinuate, parallel-sided to beyond the middle. Two basal segments of
abdomen shallowly depressed in middle, fifth as long as second and third combined.
Length, 2-5-3 mm.

?. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, moderately curved, punc-
tures very feeble, clothed only at extreme base, antennae inserted in middle of
rostrum and abdomen gently convex with the fifth segment shorter,

Victoria: Birchip (J. C. Goudie, No. 217).

A tessellated species with markings faintly suggestive of [. dorsalis. On
the elytra there is a fairly large but much interrupted dark patch that is terminated

103

just below the summit of the apical slope by a fascia of paler scales than else-
where; on the pronctum there are three dark longitudinal markings, but only
the median one is complete, the rest of its surface has a speckled appearance due
to setae; all the setae on the upper surface are sub-depressed. On the male the
metasternum is black, on two females it is scarcely darker than the adjacent parts.

Emplesis medfasciata, n. sp.

8. Reddish-castaneous. Densely clothed with rusty-brown scales becoming
paler on under parts, elytra with a conspicuous black median fascia, beneath which
the derm is also darker than the adjacent parts.

Rostrum distinctly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided,
with distinct ridges alternated with rows of squiamiferous punctures to apical
fourth, where the antennae are inserted, beyond which there are no ridges and
the punctures are naked. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides moderately
rounded, Elytra moderately robust, base distinctly trisinuate, parallel-sided to
beyond the middle. Abdomen depressed along middle, the depression continued
on to metasternum but faint on third and fourth segments, these unusually short,
fifth slightly longer than second to fourth combined. Femora scarcely grooved ;
front tibiae longer and more curved than usual, the hind ones with a distinct
swelling in middle of under surface. Length, 4°5-5 mm.

?. Differs in having the rostrum longer (fully twice the length of pro-
thorax), strongly curved, thinner, punctures sparse and small, the seriate ones
smaller and naked; antennae inserted in middle of rostrum; abdomen flat along
middle, third and fourth segments of normal size and the fifth very little longer
than second; and tibiae normal although somewhat longer than usual.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt and F. Secker), Mount Lofty
Ranges (S. H. Curnow), Kangaroo Island. Type, I. 16259.

An unusually distinct species with a conspicuous black median fascia occa-
sionally broken up into irregular spots, beyond which the surface is faintly
tessellated, due more to altcrations in density of clothing than to colour. The
unusually long and curved rostrum of the female passes well beyond the meta-
sternum; the abdomen and tibiae of the male are also distinctive. On some
specimens the head and parts of the under surface are infuscated. At the apex
of the abdomen of the male there are two bristles, much as on many species of
Melanterius and Lybaeba.

Emplesis costirostris, n. sp.

4. Dark piceous-brown, some parts almost black, antennae and tarsi paler.
Densely clothed with rusty-brown, ochreous, blackish and white scales; the
under parts with sparser stramineous ones.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided, with
seven distinct ridges alternated with rows of punctures to antennae (at apical
two-fifths), beyond which the punctures are crowded and narrow. Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides strongly rounded. Elytra elongate-subcordate, sides
nowhere quite parallel. Two basal segments of abdomen feebly depressed in
middle, fifth slightly longer than sccond and third combined. Length, 4-5-5 mm.

?. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer, ahdomen gently convex,
and fifth segment slightly shorter than second and third combined.

South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (S. H. Curnow and A. H. Elston),
Port Lincoln (Rev. T. Blackburn). Type, I. 16260.

At first glance the derm beneath the scales appears to be black. On the
pronotum the scales are irregularly intermingled; on the elytra there is a fairly
large dark patch, sharply limited at the summit of the apical slope by an ochreous
or rusty-red patch, the front edge of which is biarcuate, the dark patch is vague
elsewhere and has scattered white specks on it; there is also a fairly large black

104

patch on each side; on the head the clothing is denser and paler between the eyes
than elsewhere. The sexes are less defined than usual in Emplesis; two specimens
with a slight depression on the abdomen are evidently males, the others on which
it is gently convex are evidently females, but they have the rostrum very little
longer, quite as sharply ridged, and the insertion of antennae almost the same;
on both sexes the rostrum is squamose only near the base. The species is about
the size of the preceding one, but the blackish patch is more posterior, and the
front tibiae are not sub-faleate, are considerably shorter, and the hind ones are
simple. It is also somewhat like EZ. microsticta in general appearance, but the
rostrum is shorter, the antennae are inserted less close to the apex, and the apical
clothing of elytra is different.

A female from Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt) evidently belongs to the
species; it differs from the others in being smaller, prothorax quite black. with
black and white scales only, and the black patch on the elytra sharply defined
throughout and sub-triangular in shape.

Emplesis interocularis, n. sp.

9. Dark reddish-brown, antennae and rostrum somewhat paler. Densely
clothed with pale dingy-brown scales, tessellated with paler and sooty spots, and
not much paler on under parts than on upper ones; head bifasciculate between
eyes.

Rostrum very long (about twice the length of prothorax), thin, strongly
curved, basal fifth squamose, elsewhere with minute but fairly sharp punctures.
Antennae inserted slightly nearer base than apex of rostrum. Prothorax strongly
transverse, sides feebly rounded but suddenly narrowed at apex. Elytra rather
narrow, sides nowhere quite parallel, base distinctly trisinuate. Abdomen with a
slight depression common to first and second segments, fifth scarcely longer than
second, length, 3-5 mm.

South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (N. B. Tindale). ‘ype (unique).
I, 16261.

The species of Emplesis that are crested between the eyes appear to have
females that are quite as distinct as their males, so the type of this species was
described without hesitation. It is slightly longer than E. tuberculifrons, and the
tessellation is somewhat different, the rostrum longer and strongly curved. The
female of L’. scolopax, as identified by Blackburn, has a considerably shorter and
much less curved rostrum. The club is slightly paler than the rest of the antennae.
‘he paler and darker spots are more conspicuous on the three first interstices on
each elytron than on the others; on the pronotum there is a continuous sooty
median line, and two shorter sub-triangular marks touching the base. The
clothing of the under parts is denser and darker than usual and normally conceals
the punctures; even on the scutellum the scales are not distimetly whitish.

Emplesis illota, n. sp.

6. Reddish-brown. Densely clothed with stramineous-brown scales, with
numerous dark spots, under parts with whitish clothing.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided,
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical two-
fifths (where the antennae are inserted), beyond which there are numerous naked
punctures. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides strongly rounded. Elytra
rather narrow, for a short distance parallel-sided, base trisinuate. Abdomen with
a shallow depression on first and second segments, fiith distinctly shorter than
second and third combined. Femora not grooved, tibiae unusually short. Length,
2°25-2°75 mm.

105

¢. Differs in having the rostrum much longer, thinner, strongly curved,
glabrous, with minute punctures, antennac inserted slightly nearer base than apex,
and abdomen evenly convex.

South Australia: Murray Bridge (A. M. Lea). Type, Ll. 16265.

A narrow dingy species, the dark spots on the elytra more or less conjoined
to form several V’s, but not as on &. suluralis, which is a larger species, with the
rostrum of the female shorter and much less strongly curved; some narrow spots
are slightly paler than the adjacent parts, but at first glance the tessellation of
the elytra appears to be due to two shades only; on the pronotum there are three
inconspictious dark marks, of which the median one only is continuous from base
to apex.

Emplesis grisea, n. sp.

@. Reddish-brown. Densely clothed. with slaty-grey scales [eebly mottled
or tessellated with darker spots; under parts with paler and sparser clothing.

Rostrum long, almost straight, parallel-sided, with fine ridges alternated with
rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the antennae are inserted),
beyond which the punctures are dense and naked. Prothorax moderately trans-
verse, sides gently rounded. Elytra rather narrow, parallel-sided to about the
middle, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen with a wide, shallow and almost con-
tinuous depression, but very faint on third and fourth segments, fifth scarcely
lenger than second. Hind femora very feebly grooved. Length, 2:5-3-5 mm,

9. Differs in having the rostrum thinner and much longer (almost twice
the length of prothorax), slightly more curved, bright castaneous, glabrous, almost
impunctate, antennae inserted slightly nearer its base than apex, prothorax more
transverse, elytra less parallel-sided, and abdomen flat along middle.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt), Yorke Peninsula (Capt.
S. A. White), Port Lincoln (Rev. T. Blackburn and A. M. Lea}. Type, I. 16266.

The clothing of the upper surface is sometimes almost uniformly greyish,
on some specimens the paler scales form feeble V’s; on the pronotum the median
line is usually very faint, and there may be but one dark mark on each side at the
base, but on many specimens the sides are rather distinctly mottled. Blackburn had
specimens of this species mixed with E. scolopax, and in a note on that species
remarked “the well-defined fascicles of coarse scales . . . these, however,
are very easily rubbed off.” Many of the specimens before me are quite evidently
in perfect condition, and although the scales between their eyes may be regarded
as forming a feebly depressed pad, this is very different from the erect fascicles
of scolopax; the general clothing is also of a more slaty-grey colour. The general
appearance is sometimes much as on E, cylindrirostris, but the rostrum ot both
sexes is longer and less straight. HE. macrostyla (from Western Australia) has
rostrum of the male (the only sex known) and abdomen somewhat similar, but
its tessellation is of the usual kind. On an occasional female (usually immature)
there is a slight sprinkling of scales on the basal half of the rostrum.

Emplesis invenusta, n. sp.

é. Dark brown, antennae paler, metasternum and abdomen black. Densely
clothed with slaty-grev scales, obscurely mottled with darker ones, becoming
whitish on under parts; briefly hifasciculate between eyes.

Rostrum scarcely longer than prothorax, parallel-sided, slightly curved, with
fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical two-fifths
(where the antennac are inserted), beyond which the punctures are rather dense
and naked, Prothorax moderately transverse, sides strongly rounded, Elytra
rather narrow, nowhere quite parallel-sided, base slightly trisinuate. Two basal
segments of abdomen feebly depressed along middle, fifth distinctly shorter than
second and third combined. Femora very feebly grooved. Length, 2°5 mm.

106

South Australia: Karoonda to Peebinga (G. E. H. Wright), Murray River
(H. S. Cope). Type, I. 16254.

In general appearance like E. squamirostris on a reduced scale, but rostrum
slightly shorter and more curved, clothed only to insertion of antennae, its base
feebly fasciculate instead of with a distinct swelling, and legs and rostrum entirely
reddish. It is also somewhat like the preceding species, but the rostrum is shorter,
the abdomen is more faintly depressed, and, with the metasternum, is black. The
tessellation of the elytra and three marks on the pronotum are faint on both
specimens under examination.

Emplesis intricata, n. sp.

Dark brown, rostrum, antennae and legs somewhat paler, metasternum almost
black. Densely clothed with slaty-grey and brown scales, becoming white on
scutellum and under parts.

Rostrum scarcely the length of prothorax, slightly diminishing in width from
base to insertion of antennae (slightly nearer apex than base), basal half with
sculpture concealed by scales, apical half with numerous small punctures.
Prothorax as long as basal width, sides moderately rounded. Elytra rather
narrow, sides nowhere quite parallel, base almost truncate. Abdomen rather
strongly convex, a narrow inconspicuous impression along middle, fifth segment
no longer than second, and with two minute apical bristles. Length, 3 mm.

South Australia: Kangaroo Island. Type (unique), I, 16268.

The tessellation of the elytra is fairly strong, although the scales are of but
two colours; on the pronotum there are five longitudinal marks (of which the
outer ones are interrupted) and a transverse once, but all are more or less connected.
The colours of the scales are much as in E. grisea and E, cylindrirostris, but the
pattern is not the same and the rostrum is stouter and wider at the base. The sex
of the type is doubtful, but it is probably a male.

Emplesis apiciventris, n. sp.

é. Reddish-castaneous; scutellum, a fairly large patch on elytra, meta-
sternum and base of abdomen black. Densely clothed with rusty and stramineous
slightly variegated scales, becoming sparser and whitish on under parts.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, feebly curved, parallel-sided, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are inserted), in front with crowded naked punctures. Prothorax about
as long as the basal width, sides strongly rounded. Elytra narrow, almost parallel-
sided to beyond the middle, base almost truncate. Under surface with a depres-
sion from middle of metasternum to apex of abdomen; fifth segment of the latter
almost as long as second to fourth combined. Femora feebly grooved. Length,
2-5 mm.

South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (S. H. Curnow). Type (unique),
I. 16269.

‘The black patch is somewhat oval in shape, extends across three interstices
on each elytron from the base to about the middle, but is in part interrupted by
the suture; it is somewhat like that of E. ovalisiicta in miniature. There are two
slight pale V’s on the elytra; one partly on the apical slope, the other (a very
feeble one) on the black patch; on the pronotum the mottling is very feeble. The
median ridge of the rostrum, although very narrow, is traceable almost to the apex.

Emplesis alternata, n. sp.

é. Dull reddish-brown. Densely clothed with dull stramineous and
brownish scales, becoming whitish on under parts.

107

Rostrum slightly shorter than prothorax, parallel-sided, gently curved, with
fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where
the antennae are inserted), in front of which are numerous naked punctures.
Prothorax moderately transverse, parallel-sided to near apex, which is sub-tubular.
Elytra thin, almost parallel-sided to beyond the middle, base feebly trisinuate.
Abdomen with a fairly wide depression on two basal segments, fifth almost as long
as second and third combined. Jength, 3 mm.

South Australia: Gawler (J. Faust’s No. 499 from Blackburn’s Collection).
Type (unique), I. 16270.

The markings are somewhat as on F. lithostrota and E. cylindrirostris, but
the rostrum is differently curved and is shorter than on most species of the genus.
The third interstice has four dark spots conspicuously alternated with pale ones,
on the rest of the elytra the tessellation is less distinct ; on the pronotum there are
three longitudinal marks of which only the median one is continuous, but it is
rather ill-defined.

Emplesis sublecta, n. sp.

é. Reddish-brown, suture black except close to base. Densely clothed with
slaty-grey or stramincous scales, and with brownish spots, becoming whitish on
under parts.

Rostrum feebly curved, no longer than prothorax, parallel-sided, basal half
squamose, apical half with small naked punctures. Antennae inserted two-fifths
from apex of rostrum. Prothorax as long as the basal width, sides moderately
rounded, Elytra parallel-sided to beyond the middle, base feebly trisinuate.
Abdomen flattened along middle, fifth segment slightly longer than second.
Length, 2°25-2-°5 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrtn slightly longer than the prothorax, thinner,
cylindrical and polished castancous, antennae inserted distinctly nearer hase than
apex, prothorax slightly wider, and apical segment of abdomen shorter.

South Australia: Owieandana (H. M. Hale and N. B, Tindale), Quorn
(A. H. Elston). Type, Ll. 16273.

A small species distinct by the black suture. The tessellation of the elytra
is rather faint, but there are two or three white spots on the suture, on the pro-
notum there is a faint median line and two short basal vittae. ‘he convexity of
the abdomen scarcely differs sexually. Two specimens, sexes, from the Murray
River (Elston), differ from the types in having a black fascia extending across
four or five interstices on each elytron at the summit of the apical slope, and with
five longitudinal marks on the pronotum, of which, however, each outer one is
very feeble.

Emplesis miscella, n. sp.

6. Reddish-brown. Densely clothed with pale slaty-grey scales variegated
with brown, and becoming white on under parts.

Restrum the length of prothorax, almost straight, parallel-sided, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where
the antennae are inserted), in front of which are small naked punctures. Pro-
thorax as lone as wide, sides gently rounded. Elytra narrow, nowhere quite
parallel-sided, base faintly incurved to scutellum but not trisinuate. Two basal
segments of abdomen slightly depressed along middle, fifth slightly longer than
second. Jind femora feebly grooved. Length, 2-5 mm.

South Australia: Hughes (A. M. Lea}. Type (unique), L 16276.

About the size of the preceding species and with similarly coloured scales,
although on a different pattern. The Icgs are shorter, and the prothorax longer
than usual. There are two large dark sutural spots: one before the middle,
surrounded by short pale spots, and a smaller one at summit of apical slope; on
the rest of the elytra the tessellation is almost regular; but irom some directions

108

there appear to be three pale irregular fasciae. On the pronotum the dark
markings consist of a narrow median line, and two transverse series of four
spots: the first slightly nearer apex than base, the second basal, with the inner
spot much larger than the others. The setae of the upper surface are all
depressed, and so are not distinct from the sides.

Emplesis rectirostris, n. sp.

@. Reddish-brown, rostrum and antennae paler, suture, a spot on each
elytron, metasternum and most of abdomen black. Moderately clothed with
scales similar in colour to the derm, with stramineous tessellation; on under parts
becoming white.

Rostrum long (almost twice the length of prothorax), thin, cylindrical,
almost straight, polished, glabrous and with sparse, scarcely visible punctures.
Antennae inserted slightly nearer base than apex of rostrum. Prothorax slightly
wider than long, sides moderately rounded. LElytra elongate-subcordate, sides
nowhere quite parallel, base slightly trisinuate. Fifth segment of abdomen the
length of third. J.ength, 2:75-3 mm,

South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (N. B. Tindale), Lucindale (B. A.
Feuerheerdt). Type, I. 16277.

A prettily marked species with an unusually long and practically straight
rostrum. It is slightly padded between the eyes, not fasciculate as in E. scolopax.
The rostrum is almost as long as in the females of FE. flirostris and E. dispar.
The black spot on each elytron is sub-lateral, postmedian, and varies in size and
intensity. The darker scales on the elytra are so similar to the derm on which
they rest, that the only distinct ones are those forming narrow stramineous spots,
of which several are compacted to form irregular fasciae. On the pronotum
the stramineous scales are in irregular patches on the sides, and form two smail
spots on the disc.

Emplesis inscripta, n. sp.

6. Pale reddish-castaneous, club, metasternum and most of abdomen black.
Moderately clothed with inconspictotts brown scales, conspicuously variegated
with stramincous spots; under parts with white scales.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, parallel-sided, slightly curved; with
fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where
the antennae are inserted), beyond which the punctures are dense and naked.
Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather strongly rounded. LElytra narrow,
base slightly trisinuate. Abdomen with a large depression on two basal seg-
ments, continued on to metasternum, fifth slightly longer than second. Legs
short and stout. Length, 2-2-25 mm.

9. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more curved, shining,
and sparscly clothed only near base, antennae inserted almost in exact middle,
abdomen more convex, the depression on the basal segments smaller and shallower,
and the third and fourth slightly larger.

Tasmania: Hobart (Rev. T. Blackburn). Type, I. 16256.

About the size of EF. impotens but tessellation on a somewhat different plan,
and more of under surface black. £. cyphirhina has very different tessellation.
In general appearance it is like E. apiciventris, but the club is black. The
stramineous spots are unusually short and distinct on the elytra, and in places are
compacted to form feeble fasciae; on the pronotum the paler scales are so placed
as to form an M, or three V’s, of which the outer twa are inverted. A male
from Mole Creek (A. M. Lea) evidently belongs to this species, but it is immature ;
it is almost flavous, with only the club and sutures of metasternal episterna black.

109

Emplesis leucophaea, n. sp.

é. Reddish-brown, suture and club black. Densely clothed with whitish-
grey scales, faintly tessellated on upper surface, becoming white on under parts.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, comparatively wide, parallel-sided, moder-
ately curved, with fine ridges (the median one continuous to apex), alternated
with rows of squamiferous punctures, becoming naked on apical half. Antennae
inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides
moderately rounded, Elytra not much wider than widest part of prothorax,
parallel-sided to beyond the middle, base feebly trisinuate. Abdomen with a large
depression on two basal segments, continued on to metasternum, fiith almost as
long as second and third combined. Length, 175-2 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner (but not quite cylindrical),
ridges and squamiferous punctures on basal fourth only, antennae inserted not as
close to apex (but distinctly nearer apex than base), abdomen evenly and strongly
convex, and third and fourth segments longer.

Tasmania: Strahan (H. J. Carter and A. M. Lea), Karoola (Aug. Simson),
Burnie, Ulverstone, Nubeena, Huon River (Lea). Type, I. 16321.

A minute species, with a distinct suggestion of pale and very small Orthor-
hinus cylindrirostris. It is one of the very few in which the antennae of the
female are inserted nearer the apex than the base of rostrum. The elytral
clothing is so dense that the black of the suture is often concealed; the tessellation
is faint, and more distinct on and near the suture than elsewhere; on several
specimens the clothing appears to be almost uniformly greyish, as on E. niveiceps,
and allied species.

Emplesis pallida, n. sp.

8. Reddish-castaneous. Densely clothed with greyish-white scales, faintly
tessellated on upper surface.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, gently curved, parailel-sided, basal half
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures, in front with
naked punctures. Antennae inserted about two-fifths from apex of rostrum.
Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather strongly rounded in front. Elytra
narrow, almost parallel-sided to beyond the middle, base scarecly trisinuate.
Abdomen with a wide shallow depression on two basal segments, fifth almost as
long as second and third combined. Hind femora very feebly grooved. Length,
2:25-2°5 mm.

9. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more strongly curved,
cylindrical, glabrous to base, with minute punctures; antennae inserted nearer
base than apex; abdomen gently and evenly convex, and fifth segment shorter.

North-western Australia: Fortescue River and Roebourne (W. D, Dodd).
Type, I. 16257.

A small, pale, faintly tessellated species, approaching Thechia in appearance.
In general appearance it is strikingly close to the specimens commented upon as
probably being E. interioris, but the abdomen of the male is normal. On several
specimens the metasternum appears to be slightly infuscated. The darker spots
on the elytra are short and inconspicuous, on the pronotum a median line and two
sub-triangular basal spots are just discernible.

Two specimens, sexes, from Cue (H. W. Brown), possibly belong to this
species; the male is scarcely distinguishable from the type, but the female has
the rostrum slightly more curved, and the elytra with a pale and two dark fasciae,
composed of spots, on and about the stimmit of the apical slope.

110

Emplesis sordida, n. sp.

é. Dark reddish-brown, antennae and parts of tarsi paler. Densely
clothed with dull stramineous scales, and with numerous inconspicuous brown
spots; under parts with whitish clothing.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, gently curved, parallel-sided; with
fine ridges, alternated with rows of punctures to apical third (where the antennae
are inserted), in front with numerous small punctures, basal half squamose.
Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather strongly rounded. Elytra elongate,
almost parallel-sided to beyond the middle, base trisinuate. Abdomen with a
shallow continuous depression but scarcely traceable on third and fourth segments,
fifth slightly longer than second and third combined. Length, 4°5-5 mm.

@. Differs in being slightly wider, rostrum longer (almost twice the length
of prothorax), slightly more curved, thinner, polished castaneous, glabrous and
almost impunctate, antennae inserted nearer base than apex and abdomen almost
evenly convex.

Western Australia: Swan River (J. Clark and A. M. Lea). Type, I. 16322.

A large dingy species, slightly padded but not fasciculate between the eyes.
There are from three to five brown spots on most of the elytral interstices, but
the tessellation is usually inconspicuous. In some lights faint depressions may
be seen on the abdomen of the female. It is larger and wider than LE. filirostris,
rostrum shorter and clothing duller; &. dispar is thinner, with longer and
straighter rostrum (both sexes); £. ignobilis (fresh specimens) has clothing of
a more reddish tone and somewhat shorter rostrum (both sexes); E. femoralis
is smaller and narrower.

Emplesis tibialis, n. sp.

&é. Pale reddish-castaneous, under surface usually darker. Moderately
clothed with stramineous scales; with numerous small brown spots on elytra, and
a median line and two basal spots on pronotum; under parts with uniform whitish
clothing.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided ;
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamifcrous punctures to apical fourth
(where the antennae are inserted), beyond which the punctures are small and
naked. Prothorax about as long as the basal width, strongly narrowed in front.
Elytra elongate-subcordate, base not trisinuate, sides nowhere quite parallel;
seriate punctures Jarger than usual. Abdomen with a wide shallow depression
on two basal seginents, and another on fifth; the latter segment as long as second
and third combined. Legs longer than usual, front tibiae thin, with an acute
projection on middle of lower surface. Length, 2-5-3-5 mm.

@. Differs in being somewhat stouter; rostrum longer, thinner, more
curved, ridges and seriate punctures much finer, glabrous, prothorax more trans-
verse, abdomen evenly convex, and front tibiae unarmed.

Tasmania: Strahan, West Tamar (Aug. Simson), Hobart (C. E. Cole and
A, M. Lea). Victoria: Dividing Range (Rev. T. Blackburn), Somerville (Lea).
South Australia: Adelaide. Type, IL. 16278.

A slightly tessellated species readily distinguished from all others of the
genus (except the following one) by the armed front tibiae of the male, those of
the female, although not armed, are decidedly longer than on females of most
species.

Emplesis subtibialis, n. sp.

&. Reddish-brown, club somewhat infuscated. Densely clothed with pale
slaty-grey or stramineous scales, more or less variegated, becoming white on
under parts; the elytra with rows of erect setae on the alternate interstices.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, parallel-sided, gently curved,
sculpture concealed by clothing to apical fourth (where the antennae are inserted),

111

im front with naked punctures. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides moderately
rounded. Elytra sub-oblong, base scarcely trisinuate. Abdomen with a very
shallow depression on first and second segments, fifth as long as second and third
combined. l.egs of moderate length, front tibiae with an acute projection on
lower surface two-fifths from apex. Length, 2-2°5 mm.

9. Differs in having rostrum longer, thinner, more curved, clothed only on
basal third, elsewhere minutely punctate, antennae inserted two-fifths from apex,
abdomen evenly convex, fifth segment the length of second and front tibiae
simple.

Tasmania: Ulverstone and King Island (A. M. Lea).

The front tibiae of the male are armed, but the projection is nearer the apex
than on the preceding species, the tibiae themselves (both sexes) are shorter and
the clothing is denser and usually conceals the seriate elytral punctures. The
clothing is not exactly alike on any two of the six specimens taken; on three of
them it is opaque and slightly tessellated; on the others many of the scales,
especially on the head, have a slight golden gloss; on the type there are three
fasciae of dark spots, of which the widest is curved and crowns the apical slope,
a sub-apical one is less distinct and a postmedian one still less so; on the others
the dark spots are sparser and more scattered. On two specimens the meta-
sternum is darker than the abdomen. There are some crect setae on the rostrum
of the male.

Emplesis obliqua, n. sp.

¢. Dark brown, legs paler, suture, metasternum and abdomen black.
Densely clothed with scales of several colours, becoming white on under parts.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, parallel-sided, moderately curved; with
fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures to apical third (where the antennae
are inserted), with dense punctures in front, densely clothed only on basal fourth.
Prothorax slightly transverse, sides strongly rounded. Elytra parallel-sided to
beyond the middle, base feebly trisinuate; seriate punctures larger than usual.
Abdomen with a large, sharply defined depression on two basal segments, fifth
very little longer than second. Length, 2°25-3 mm.

¢. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more curved, seriate
punctures smaller and for a shorter distance, glabrous throughout, antennae
inserted only slightly nearer apex than base; abdomen evenly convex, and fifth
segment slightly shorter than second.

‘Tasmania: Launceston (Aug. Simson), Mount Wellington (A. M. Lea).
Victoria: Yarra River (C. French, sen.), Noble Park in October (F. E, Wilson),
Wonthaggi (T. G. Sloane), Warburton in October (C. Oke). South Australia:
Lucindale (F. Secker and B. A. Feuerhcerdt), Mount Lofty Ranges (S. H.
Curnow), Adelaide (Rev. ‘T. Blackburn). North Queensland (Blackburn’s
Collection). Type, I. 16280.

A conspicuously marked species with oblique fasciae suggestive of Ephrycus
obliquus; the elytral markings are somewhat like those of Storeus captiosus, but
that species has dentate femora and appendiculate claws. There are two rather
large blackish patches on each side of the elytra, with a conspicuous white patch
between, the white patch sometimes obliquely connected with its fellow on the
suture, just below the summit of the apical slope; much of the elytral clothing is
of a rusty-red colour, on the suture it is alternately black and white. On the
pronotum most of the clothing is whitish, with two fairly large black spots on
each side of the middle, and some smaller ones on the sides; but often the clothing
on the median half is almost entirely black; on the head there is usually a dark
median spot and snowy scales between the eyes; on the sculellum also the scales
are snowy. On slight abrasion, however, many of the markings are obscured.
There are numerous sub-erect setae on the elytra, some of the white ones being

112

very distinct. On two small specimens, from Mounts Wellington and Lofty, the
elytral markings are less sharply defined, and the clothing of the pronotum is
almost entirely stramineous and whitish; their club is pale. One from Won-
thaggi, with similar clothing, has the club black, but the metasternum and abdomen
no darker than the legs.

Emplesis albifrons, n. sp.

é. Dark reddish-brown, suture and sides of elytra and under surface black
or blackish; with slaty-white and dark-brown scales, becoming white on under
parts.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided,
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half,
punctures small and naked elsewhere. Antennae inserted two-fifths from apex
of rostrum, Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather suddenly narrowed
to apex. Elytra thin, base bilobed, sides almost parallel to beyond the middle.
‘Two basal segments of abdomen slightly depressed in middle, fifth almost as long
as second and third combined. Hind femora very feebly grooved. Length,
2-2°25 mm.

¢. Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more curved, shining and
glabrous throughout, antennae inserted nearer base than apex, and abdomen
evenly convex, with the fifth segment shorter.

South Australia: Port Lincoln (Rev. T. Blackburn and A. M. Lea), Wood-

chester (E, Ashby), Murray Bridge (Lea). Type, 1. 162853.

A minute species with somewhat tessellated markings and usually a fairly
large dark patch on the basal half of elytra. The dark sutural part is ‘clothed
with dark scales, but about the middle is traversed by a white fascia, and there
are a few other whitish scales on it; on the rest of the elytra the clothing is
whitish with sparse and small brown spots, on the pronotum there are sometimes
three dark patches, of which the two outer ones are short, or the three may be
conjoined in front, or the clothing may be pale only on the sides, or almost entirely
pale. Most of the scales on the head are dark, but the interocular ones are
snowy; on one female most of the cephalic scales are whitish, but even on this
one the interocular patch is distinctly whiter.

Emplesis picta, n. sp.

$. Black, parts of elytra, antennae (club excepted) and legs reddish.
Densely clothed with white and black scales, the elytra in addition with some
brownish ones, on under parts entirely white.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided ;
with fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third
(where the antennae are inserted), in front with fairly dense naked punctures,
Prothorax almost as long as the basal width, sides strongly rounded. Elytra sub-
oblong to near apex, base feebly bilobed. Two basal segments of abdomen with
a shallow depression on which the clothing is finer than elsewhere, fifth slightly
longer than third. Femora stout, all more or less distinctly grooved, Length,
2°5-2°75 mim.

9. Differs in having the rostrum thinner and paler but scarcely longer,
clothed only near base, but seriate punctures distinct to antennae, these inserted
about two-fifths from apex, club paler, abdomen evenly convex, fifth segment
smaller, and femora less stout.

Tasmania: Hobart (A. M. Lea).

A conspicuously marked species with sexual differences of the rostrum less
pronounced than usual, The reddish parts of the elytra are not sharply defined
and are mostly clothed with white and brownish scales. On the pebentare the
scales are black, with a fairly large white patch on each side of the base, and two

113

small median spots. n the elytra there is a large black humeral patch (on each
side dilated to cover the marginal fourth), a sub-oblong antemedian sutural patch
and a large trilobed fascia crowning the apical slope, the white scales are inter-
spersed with small dark spots scarcely distinguishable from the derm. The head
of the male has been forced back and its base is concealed, but between the eyes
and on the rostrum the scales are snowy; on the female the scales are black,
with a median line and the interocular ones snowy.

Emplesis albifasciata, n. sp.

@. Black, rostrum, funicle, scape, and parts of legs reddish. Densely
clothed with black, rusty-brown and white scales, becoming snowy on under parts.

Rostrum thin, moderately curved, about the length of prothorax, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures on basal half, elsewhere
with naked punctures. Antennae inserted two-fifths from apex of rostrum,
Prothorax slightly shorter than basal width, sides strongly rounded towards apex.
Elytra rather wide, nowhere parallel-sided, base (except for incurvature at
scutellum) truncate. Abdomen evenly convex, fifth segment scarcely longer
than second. Femora feebly grooved. Length, 2-5 mm.

Victoria: Alps (Rev. T. Blackburn). Type (unique), I. 16284.

A prettily marked species, allied to the preceding one, with similar clothing
on the pronotum, and the rostrum sculptured as its female, but elytra decidedly
wider, the black patches different, and with a conspicuous white fascia, On the
pronotum the scales are black, with a distinct white patch on each side of the
base, and a few scales scattered singly, on the elytra there is a complete white
median fascia, wide and angular about the suture, and running obliqucly to each
side slightly in advance of the middle; there is also a small white sub-apical spot
on the suture, and some whitish scales at the base; there is a large black spot on
each side behind the fascia and some inconspicuous blackish scales about the
shoulders and basal half, the rest of the clytra having rusty-brown scales. On the
head the scales are black, becoming white between and close behind the eyes.

Emplesis pictipennis, n. sp.

Reddish-brown, suture (narrowly), parts of metasternum, base of abdomen,
and club black. Clothed with stramineous or somewhat darker scales, with
whitish markings on upper surface, under parts with entirely whitish scales.

Rostrum thin, slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are insetted), in front with distinct naked punctures. Prothorax as
long as wide, apex about half the width of base. Elytra rather narrow, base
bilobed. Fifth segment of abdomen slightly longer than second and third com-
bined. Length, 2°25 mm.

Western Australia: Mullewa (W. D, Dodd). Type (unique), T. 16285,

Allowing for the notches at the junction of the prothorax and elytra the
outlines are elongate-elliptic, much as those of EL. belluius, but the markings are
not the same and the abdomen is almost entirely pale. The general appearance
is as some specimens of Storeus variabilis, but the femora are edentate. On the
pronotum most of the scales are obscurely coloured; on the elytra there is a
distinct white semi-circle about the scutellum, and a bisinuate fascia crowning
the apical slope, elsewhere the white scales form rather feeble spots. The sex
of the type is doubtful; the rostrum is thinner than 1s usual in males, but its
sculpture and clothing appear masculine; the two basal segments of abdomen
are not concave in the middle, but the apical segment is longer and the third and
fourth shorter than usual in females.

114

Emplesis lilliputana, n. sp.

é. Pale reddish-castaneous. Moderately clothed with stramineous and
brownish scales, becoming white on under parts,

Rostrum rather thin, slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved,
parallel-sided; with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures
to apical third (where the antennae are inserted) ; in front with numerous small,
naked punctures. Prothorax as long as greatest width, sides strongly rounded.
Elytra with sides rounded throughout, base slightly bilobed and much wider than
prothorax. Abdomen with a fecble depression on two basal segments, fifth
almost as long as second and third combined. Length, 1:75 mm.

Queensland: Mount Tambourine (A. M. Lea). ‘Type (unique), I. 16288.

A minute, sub-tessellated species, with base of elytra much wider than base
of prothorax. The clothing of the upper surface is not of conspicuously con-
trasted colours; on the pronotum it is mostly stramineous, but there is an ill-
dehned whitish spot on each side of the base; on the elytra there are two whitish
spots, adjacent to those on the pronotum, the clothing on the apical half is mostly
dark, with a few pale spots interspersed. Setae are apparently absent from the
upper surface, and the scales are so closcly pressed to the derm that at first it
appears to be stained rather than clothed.

Emplesis angusta, n. sp.

é. Reddish-brown, suture blackish. Densely clothed with whitish and
stramineous scales and with a few dark spots; under parts sparser and white.

Rostrum scarcely as long as prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided ;
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third
(where the antennae are inserted), in front with sharply defined naked punctures.
Prothorax almost as long as wide, sides moderately rounded. Elytra narrow,
sides feebly rounded, base almost truncate. Abdomen with a fairly large
depresssion on two basal segments, fifth slightly longer than second and third
combined. Length, 2 mm.

?. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, with ridges
and seriate punctures on basal hall, and clothed only on basal fourth, antennae
inserted two-fifths from apex, prothorax more transverse, and abdomen evenly
convex, with the fifth segment scarcely longer than the second.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt). Type, 1. 16287.

A minute, sub-tessellated species with a pale V-shaped patch on elytra out-
lining a rather narrow dark triangle about scutellum; on the male the V is
extended to an M; behind the first V there are remnants of a second, and then a
few scattered spots; on the pronotum there are two sub-triangular dark basal
spots and a feeble median line, The outlines (allowing for slight notches at the
junction of the prothorax and elytra) are narrowly elliptic. To a slight extent
it resembles E, parvula, but the markings are on a different plan.

Emplesis trisinuata, n. sp.

8. Reddish-brown, metasternum infuscated. Densely clothed with stram-
ineous, white and sooty scales, becoming sparser and uniformly whitish on under
parts.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, slightly curved, parallel-sided, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous on basal third) to inser-
tion of antennae (at apical two-fifths), in front with sharply defined naked
punctures. Prothorax about as long as wide, base and apex sub-equal. Elytra
rather narrow, sides nowhere quite parallel, base distinctly trisinuate. Abdomen
with a small depression on two basal segments, fifth almost as long as second and
third combined. Length, 2:5-2:75 mn

115

g. Differs in having the rostrum conspicuously longer, thinner, less curved,
ridges and rows of punctures less pronounced and for a shorter distance, antennae
inserted almost in exact middle of rostrum, prothorax slightly transverse, and
abdomen evenly convex, with the fifth segment no longer than third.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt}. Type, I. 16286.

There is a large dark patch on the elytra extending from the base to about
the middle, and across two or three interstices on each side of the suture, pos-
teriorly it is bounded by a curved row of white spots, then on the suture there is
a smail black spot, followed by a white one, then a black one, then to the apex
the sutural clothing is stramineous; there is a narrow angular blackish strip near
each side, on the rest of the elytra the clothing is slightly tessellated. On the
pronotum there is a sub-quadrate discal blackish patch, with the sides stramineous,
but there are a few stramineous scales on the black patch, and some dark scales
elsewhere. The dark elytral patch is about as large in proportion as on
E. ovalisticta, but the species is much smaller and differs otherwise. In some
respects it approaches £. dorsalis, but the abdomen is not black, A specimen from
Quorn (Rev. T. Blackburn) prohably belongs to the species, but the clothing on
the apical fifth of elytra is black.

Emplesis basipennis, n. sp.

4. Reddish-brown, metasternum slightly infuscated. Densely clothed with
stramineous or rusty, and sooty-brown scales.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-sided, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antenriac are inscrted), in front with dense, naked punctures. Prothorax about
as long as wide, sides gently rounded. Elytra rather thin, nowhere quite parallel-
sided, base gently and evenly arcuate. Two basal segments of abdomen flattened
(not concave) along middle, fifth as long as second and third combined. Length,
2°75 mm,

South Australia; Adelaide (N. B. Tindale), Lucindale (I*. Secker). Type,
I. 16333.

A tessellated species at first glance apparently belonging to the preceding one
or to E. dorsalis; from the former it is distinct by the rostrum slightly more
curved, base of elytra gently and uniformly arched (except for the sctitellum),
with the large dorsal patch longer and more interrupted and the prothoracic mark-
ings different; the latter species has a somewhat shorter rostrum and the abdomen
black. On the elytra the dark scales form a patch from the base to about one-
fourth from the apex, where it is interrupted by a fascia of pale spots; it extends
actoss four or five interstices on cach elytron, but is not uniform, as there are
many thin spots of pale scales, or single ones, giving the patch a mottled appear-
ance: on the rest of the elytra the clothing is slightly tessellated. On the
pronotum there is a thin median line of dark scales, then an irregular vitta, and
then some fragments of others. The head is feebly padded between the eyes.
On the scutellum and under parts the clothing is paler than elsewhere.

Emplesis setipennis, n. sp.

Pale reddish-brown, club infuscated. Densely clothed with pale, almost white
scales, with darker markings, and with numerous sub-erect setae.

Rostrum thin, moderately curved, slightly longer than prothorax, with small
naked punctures on apical half, basal half clothed. Antennae inserted two-fifths
from apex of rostrum. Prothorax as long as wide, sides gently rounded. Elytra
elongate-subcordate, base bilobed, sides nowhere quite parallel. Two basal seg-
ments of abdomen flattened along middle, fifth slightly longer than third. Length,
2 mm.

116

New South Wales: Mlawarra (G. Compere). Unique.

A conspicuously setose species; brighter than FE. crypterhyncha, and with a
large pale patch on each side of prothorax. On the elytra there are three fairly
large dark spots: one median, one postmedian, and one sub-apical, the latter semi-
double, elsewhere there are a few feeble spots. On the pronotum there is a large
dark median patch extending from base to apex, but with numerous pale scales,
the patch intensified by a dense strip of pale scales on each side. In some lights
some of the scales, especially those near eyes, have a golden lustre. The setae are
quite as numerous on the prothorax as on the elytra, but on the latter they are
more conspicuous. Except for the notches at their junction the outlines of the
prothorax and elytra are elongate-elliptic. The sex of the type is doubtful.

Emplesis cordipennis, n. sp.

é. Flavo-castaneous, club infuscated; with stramineous and brownish scales
irregularly intermingled on elytra, on pronotum the darker scales forming three
feebly defined vittae.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, parallel-sided, moderately curved, with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are inserted), in front with distinct naked punctures, Prothorax almost
as long as wide, sides moderately rounded. Elytra elongate-cordate, base bilobed.
Two basal segments of abdomen with a feeble median depression, fifth slightly
longer than second. Length, 1-75-2 mm.

9. Differs in having the rostrum considerably longer, thinner, more curved,
ridges and rows of squamiferous punctures confined to basal third, puncttires
elsewhere sparse and minute, antennae inserted just perceptibly nearer apex than
base and abdomen evenly convex, with the fifth segment shorter.

New South Wales: Wollongong (A. M. Lea).

A minute species intermediate between the tessellated and miveiceps groups.
It is about the size of F. canaliculata, and also has a dark club, but the clothing
is less ashen, and the derm is paler; the suture on some specitnens, however, is
feebly infuscated. The darker clothing on the upper surface is scarcely different
in colour from the derm on which it rests, and the spots of both colours are not
sharply limited, as on so many of the tessellated species.

Emplesis nana, n. sp.

Reddish-brown, scutellum, metasternum and four basal segments of abdomen
black. Densely clothed with greyish-white scales, variegated with brown; on
under parts entirely white.

Rostrum thin, parallel-sided, slightly longer than prothorax, moderately
curved; antennac inserted two-fiiths from base, behind which the scales partly
conceal fine ridges and rows of punctures. Prothorax slightly wider than long,
sides moderately rounded. Elytra elongate-cordate, base bilobed, sides nowhere
quite parallel. Abdomen moderately convex, fifth segment slightly longer than
second. Length, 1-5 mm,

Queensland: Bundaberg (A. M. Lea). Type (unique), I. 16291.

A minute species of the size of E. canaliculata, but scutellum and most of
under surface black and the club pale. The derm of the upper surface is almost
etitirely concealed by the clothing (which could hardly be regarded as tessellated),
but the suture appears to be infuscated. On the elytra the dark scales form a
very fecble V at the base, then remnants of a darker V, followed by remnants of
a reversed V, and then a still fainter mark near the apex. On the pronotum
three short vittae are indicated, but dark setae cause the surface to appear slightly
speckled. The type is probably a female.

117

Emplesis bifoveata, n. sp.

4. Dark brown, sometimes almost black, rostrum, antennae and tarsi paler.
Densely clothed with rusty-brown scales, varying to sooty and stramineous.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, thin, parallel-sided, slightly curved;
with fine ridges and rows of squamiferous punctures to apical fifth (where the
antennae are inserted), beyond which the punctures are dense and naked. Pro-
thorax strongly transverse, sides dilated from basc to near apex, and then
suddenly narrowed. Elytra not quite parallel-sided to beyond the middle, base
trisinuate; each with a small tubercle half-way down the apical slope. Abdomen
with a median depression, dilated on two first segments and on fifth, the latter
almost as long as second to fourth combined. Femora rather stout, tibiae longer
and thinner than usual. Length, 3°5-4 mm.

2, Differs in having the rostrum longer, thinner, more curved, glabrous
throughout, and with much smaller and sparser ptnctures, antennae inserted
two-fifths from apex, abdomen rather strongly and evenly convex, and fifth seg-
ment shorter.

New South Wales: Illawarra and Newport (H. J. Carter), Wollongong,
Mittagong and Sydney (A. M. Lea). Queensland: Bunya Mountains (H.
Hacker), Brishane (A. P. Dodd). Type, I. 16325, in South Australian Museum,
cotypes in Queensland Museum.

In appearance fairly close to Storeus majusculus, but claws simple, front
tibiae of male not ciliated, and club pale. ‘he under surface is usually obscurely
reddish, but is sometimes black. The rostrum of the male is almost straight to
the insertion of antennae, beyond which it is slightly bent. The clothing varies
considerably, on some specimens it is almost entirely sooty-brown or rusty-red,
the setae are often white, and with the blackish spots give the surface a speckled
appearance (on some examples resembling Storeus albosignatus), often the apical
two-fifths of elytra are stramineous, except that the scales on the tubercles are
black; frequently the scales on the sides af the prothorax are pale and like a
reversed A. There is a rather conspicuous “peep-hole” on each side in front of
the prosternum.

Three specimens, sexes, from the National Park of Queensland appear to
represent a variety ; they differ from the others in being somewhat narrower with
most parts black or blackish, but speckled in places, especially about the summit
of the apical slope.

Emplesis tarsalis, n. sp.

&. Dark reddish-brown, tip of rostrum, antennae and parts of legs
somewhat paler. Densely clothed with pale brown and sooty-brown, tessellated
scales, becoming uniformly pale on under surface of body and of legs; basal
joint of hind tarsi with a conspicuous fascicle at its inner apex.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, curved only at apex; with fine
ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where
the antennae are inserted) ; in front with numerous small punctures. Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides evenly rounded, suddenly becoming narrower in
front, Elytra elongate, base feebly irisinuate and distinctly, but not much, wider
than prothorax. Abdomen with a feeble depression on two basal segments, third
and fourth combined slightly longer than second or fifth. Femora stout, edentate.
Length, 3°25-3-5 mm.

@. Differs in being somewhat more robust; rostrum decidedly longer,
thinner, strongly curved, paler, with ridges and squamiferous punctures only near
base; antennae inserted in middle of sides of rostrum, abdomen more convex,
and hind tarsi non-fasciculate.

Victoria: Mooroopna in April, Melbourne in August (F. E. Wilson). Type,
T. 16420.

118

At first glance quite an ordinary-looking species, but very distinct by the
fascicle on the hind tarsi of the male, this being quite as long as the claw joint,
The tessellation of the elytra is of the usual kind, but on several specimens the
paler markings form several wide V’s; on the pronotum there are three dark
vittae, of which only the median one is continuous, but in addition there are
sometimes one or two feeble spots on each side; the head is not fasciculate
between the eyes, but the clothing is denser there than elsewhere.

Emplesis ferruginea, n. sp.

8. Dark brown, some parts almost or quite black, apex of rostrum and
antennae reddish. Densely clothed with rusty-brown, feebly tessellated scales,
and with numerous small dark spots; under surface of body and of legs with
almost uniformly pale scales.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, gently curved; with fine ridges
alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are inserted), in front with numerous small punctures. Prothorax
moderately transverse, sides evenly rounded to near apex, which is suddenly
narrowed. Elytra elongate-cordate, base gently trisinuate; with regular rows
of large, partially concealed punctures. Abdomen with a shallow depression on
first and second segments, third and fourth combined slightly longer than second,
and distinctly shorter than fifth. Femora stout, edentate. Length, 4-4-5 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrum decidedly longer, thinner, more curved,
paler, and clothed only close to base, abdomen evenly convex and legs slightly
thinner.

New South Wales: Dubbo (H. J. Carter), Bogan River (J. Armstrong).
Type, 1. 16419.

In general appearance fairly close to E. suturalis, but larger, clothing less
variegated, and different between the eyes; the head could scarcely be regarded
as fasciculate, but there is a fringe of short scales at the side of each eye. It is
almost as large as E. sordida, but the rostrum (both sexes) is shorter and the
clothing is of a brighter colour. Slightly larger than E. aenigmatica, rostrum of
male less curved, and clothing somewhat different. The tessellation of the elytra
is faint, but is rendered fairly distinct by small blackish spots, of which there are
from ten to twelve on each elytron, on the pronotum there are three short and
usually inconspicuous vittae. The setae on the upper surface are numerous, but
being pressed flat amongst the scales they are not very distinct. From some
directions the scutellum appears as a small white spot. There are two pale setae
at the apex of the abdomen of the male.

A female from Tooloom (New South Wales) in the Queensland Museum,
taken by Mr. H. Hacker in January, is rather more brightly coloured than the
Dubbo specimens, and the clothing on its under surface is less pale.

Emplesis masculina, n. sp.

8. Reddish-brown, club and glabrous portion of rostrum not much paler.
Densely clothed with greyish-white and stramineous scales, tessellated on elytra,
but posteriorly with darker spots or blotches; pronotum with three dark vittae,
of which the median one is longer than the others but less distinct ; under surface
and legs with uniformly whitish scales.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, derm concealed
behind antennae (at apical third); in front with crowded, sharply defined
punctures. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides rather strongly rounded,
especially near apex. Elytra clongate-subcordate, base slightly trisinuate; with
rows of large punctures, appearing much smaller through clothing. Abdomen

119

with a shallow depression on two basal segments, third and fourth combined the
length of second and slightly shorter than fifth. Legs stout. Length, 3-3-5 mm.

9. Differs in being slightly more robust, in having the rostrum slightly
longer, thinner, and more curved, antennae inserted two-fifths from apex of
rostrum, and abdomen evenly convex, except for a slight depression on apical
segment.

North-western Australia: Fortescue River and Roebourne (W. D. Dodd).
Type, I. 16421.

‘There are 56 specimens before me from the Fortescue River, and 15 from
Roebourne, and by the examination of the rostrum alone, they would appear to
belong to males of two species, owing to the female having the rostrum clothed
almost to the insertion of antennae, but the sexes may be distinguished with
certainty by the abdomen. ‘he female resembles the males of several other
species of the genus, and strongly resembles the male of EL. femoralis, and I can
only distinguish them with certainty by the abdomen; the female of femoralis,
however, differs from the female of the present species in having a considerably
longer and more strongly curved rostrum, with the antennae median, and the
clothing of the rostrum less pronounced, although denser than is usual on females
of the genus. The tessellation of the elytra (which is easily disarranged) is more
conspicuous about the middle than elsewhere, but it varies considerably, the
stramineous parts sometimes change to a rather dark brown, and on such specimens
the dark apical spots are almost black. On many the majority of the scales on the
apica! slope are dark brown, variegated with light brown or slaty-grey. Although
the derm of the rostrum is quite concealed behind the antennae, it is evident by
the arrangement of the scales that hidden ridges and rows of punctures are present,
these being indicated even on the females,

Emplesis parvidens, n. sp.

¢. Black, parts of elytra and of abdomen, rostrum, antennae and legs red-
dish. Densely clothed with black, whitish and stramineous scales.

Rostrum comparatively stout, slightly shorter than prothorax, parallel-sided,
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamifcrous punctures to apical third
(where the antennae are inserted), in front with dense naked punctures. Proe-
thorax moderately transverse, sides gently rounded to near apex, which is about
half the width of base. Elytra elongate-subcordate, sides almost parallel to
beyond the middle, base almost truncate. Two basal segments of abdomen
depressed in middle, fifth slightly longer than second. Femora feebly dentate;
front and middie tibiae each with a small projection on middie of lower surface.
Length, 2°5 mm.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt). Type (unique), L. 16296,

A beautiful species approaching £. amvena, but narrower, less white on elytra,
and abdomen partly reddish posteriorly. The black elytra patches are much as
on E, nigrofasciata and Storeus contortus, but the white ones are different, and
the prothorax is very differently clothed. The middle and hind femora are feebly
dentate, the front ones just perceptibly so. On the elytra the clothing is mostly
stramineous, with a large black postmedian spot on each side, small dark spots
alternated with whitish ones on the suture, and a few similarly coloured spots
elsewhere. On the pronotum the clothing is black, with a pale V and some small
spots on the sides. On the head and rostrum the clothing is black, becoming
conspicuously pale between the eyes. On the under parts it is mostly whitish.

On this and the seven following specics the femora, or at least some of them,
are dentate; the claws of all have been carefully examined and usually at least
one has been detached for examination under a high power.

120

Emplesis parilis, n. sp.

é. Black, parts of elytra, tip of abdomen, antennae, tibiae and tarsi more
or less obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with scales varying from white to
black on upper surface, white on under parts.

Rostrum almost the length of prothorax, parallel-sided, slightly curved; with
fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where
the antennae are inserted), in front with dense, sharply defined punctures. Pro-
thorax slightly longer than basal width, sides dilated to near apex and then
suddenly narrowed. Elytra elongate-subcordate, base slightly bilobed. Abdomen
with a wide depression common to two basal segments, fifth slightly longer than
second. Jemora acutely dentate; front and middle tibiae each with an obtuse
projection in middle of under surface. Length, 3-3 mm,

@. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer, glabrous throughout,
ridges and seriate punctures well defined to insertion of antennae (at apical two-
fifths), punctures in front smaller but the median ridge distinct to apex, abdomen
more convex, the sub-basal depression much smaller and fifth segment somewhat
smaller.

Tasmania: Tunny (Rev. ‘T. Blackburn), Hobart (A. M. Lea). Victoria:
Killara (C. Oke). Type, I. 16295.

Allied to but larger than the preceding species, rostrum and legs darker,
elytral and prothoracic markings somewhat different, and femora more strongly
dentate. In general appearance it is fairly close to Storeus amoenus and contortus,
but the claws are not appendiculate. The projection on the tibiae is quite as
distinct on the male as on the female, not confined to the former as on F. tibialis
and subtibialis, The majority of the scales on the elytra of the male are whitish
or stramineous (some with a slight golden lustre in certain lights), there are two
large much interrupted black spots (or an irregular fascia) just before the apical
slope, on the slope itself the scales are mostly stramineous, on the suture the
clothing is alternately black and white, and some brownish spots are scattered
elsewhere. On the pronotum the scales are black, with a white patch on each side
at the basc. There are a few ochreous sloping scales between the eyes, but not
a crest, very different from the white patch of S. amoenus. On the female the
clothing is brighter, the black and white elytral spots are more sharply limited,
and the prothoracic clothing is more variegated and uneven, and on cach side
forms the remnant of an inverted A.

Emplesis longicollis, n. sp.

Black, rostrum, tarsi and parts of elytra obscurely reddish, antennae some-
what paler, but club slightly infuseated. Densely clothed with black, dingy-white
and somewhat stramineous scales.

Rostrum the length of prothorax, thin, moderately curved; with fine ridges
alternated with rows of punctures (squamiferous only close to base) to between
antennae (these inserted at apical two-fifths), in front punctures small but still
seriate. Prothorax slightly longer than wide, sides feebly dilated to near apex,
and then strongly narrowed to apex itself. [Elytra elongate-subcordate, base
faintly trisinuate (almost evenly arcuate). Abdomen evenly convex, fifth seg-
ment no longer than second. Temora acutely dentate. Length, 3 mm.

Western Australia: Yilgarn (Blackburn’s Collection from E, Meyrick). Type
(unique), I. 16297,

The elytral markings approach those of #. amoeua, but the prothorax is very
different. There is a fairly large postmedian black patch towards the side of
each elytron, on the suture and some of the odd interstices there are some small
black spots, elsewhere the white and stramineous clothing is obscurely mixed;
on the pronotum the markings are not sharply defined (possibly through partial

121

abrasion); the head is densely clothed with white scales between the eyes, but
its base is concealed. ‘The type appears to be a female, although the ridges on
the rostrum are rather sharply defined.

Emplesis composita, n. sp.

Reddish-brown, metasternum and first and part of second segments of
abdomen black. Densely clothed with whitish scales, on the upper surface slightly
mottled with brownish and stramineous ones.

Rostrum glabrous, about the length of prothorax, moderately curved, parallel-
sided, with dense punctures becoming scriate near base. Antennae inserted one-
third from apex of rostrum. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides rather strongly
rounded. LElytra narrow, sides nowhere quite parallel, base gently and evenly
arcuate. Fifth segment not as long as second and third combined. Jemora
slightly dentate, the hind ones more strongly and acutely than the others.
Length, 3 mm.

New South Wales: Forest Reefs (A. M. Lea). Unique.

The darker spots of clothing on the upper surface are small and ill-defined,
and cause it to appear slightly mottled, rather than tessellated; somewhat as on
Storeus scutellaris, but the club is pale and the claws are not appendiculate. The
type is probably a male; the tip of the first segment of its abdomen is slightly
notched, as on the females of several species of the genus.

Emplesis grata, n. sp.

é. Dlack, rostrum, antennae, legs and parts of elytra obscurely reddish.
Densely clothed with white scales, in parts somewhat stramineous, and with con-
spicuous black markings.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, parallel-sided, moderately curved,
with fine ridges alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third
(where the antennae are inserted), in front with dense punctures. Prothorax as
long as wide, sides moderately rounded. Elytra elongate-cordate, base bilobed.
Abdomen scarcely flattened along middle, fifth segment scarcely longer than
second. lemora acutely dentate. Length, 2 mm.

9. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer and more curved, clothed
only near base, antennae inserted two-fifths from apex and abdomen more convex.

South Australia: Lucindale (A. M. Lea). Type, I. 16298.

A minute, beautifully marked species, smaller than E. amoena, and the
others with a large black patch on each elytron; the patch is irregularly tri-
angular, postmedian and sub-lateral; there arc also some small blackish markings
on other parts ot the elytra and on the pronotum.

Emplesis lata, n. sp.

é. Black, tip of rostrum, antennae and iarsi obscurely reddish. Densely
clothed with scales varying from almost white, through niuddy-brown to black;
almost uniformly white on under parts.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, moderately curved, with fine ridges
alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where antennae
are inserted), in front with crowded, sharply defined punctures, the median ridge
continuous to apex. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides strongly rounded, apex
less than half the width of base. Elytra wide, sides nowhere parallel, base
trisinuate, alternate interstices slightly clevated. Abdomen with first and second
segments feebly depressed along middle, fifth as long as second and third com-
bined, with a fairly large shallow depression. Front femora edentate, middle
pair slightly, the hind ones more strongly dentate. Length, 3-5 mm.

New South Wales: Bogan River (J. Armstrong). Type (unique), I. 16294.

122

A fairly large, unusually wide species, about the size of Storeus variegatus,
but with very different markings. ‘Ihere are no large patches of any colour on
the upper surface, most of the scales being muddy-brown or stramineous-brown,
mottled with numerous darker spots; there are a few pale spots on the elytra.
‘The setae are mostly black, and there is a small cluster of them on the front of
the pronotum, causing its middle to appear almost pointed.

Emplesis stenoderes, n. sp.

@. Blackish-brown, most of elytra, abdomen, rostrum, antennae and legs
more or less obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with variegated scales, becoming
uniformly pale on under surface and legs.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, slightly curved, with fine ridges
alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to apical third (where the
antennae are inserted) ; in front with numerous small sharply defined punctures.
Prothorax slightly longer than wide, sides gently rounded, front moderately
narrowed. Elytra rather narrow, but distinctly wider than prothorax, elongate-
stibcordate, base feebly trisinuate; with rows of large, sub-approximate, but
partially concealed punctures. Abdomen with a rather large depression on two
basal segments, second slightly shorter than fifth and slightly longer than second
and third combined. Front femora edentate, middle ones feebly, hind ones
moderately dentate. Length, 3 mm.

South Australia: Mount Remarkable in October (F. E. Wilson). Type
(unique), I. 16417.

In some respects close to E. captiosus, but the prothorax is slightly longer
than wide; on that species it is transverse. On the pronotum the scales are
inostly sooty, irregularly interspersed with whitish ones, on the elytra the scales
are mostly stramineous, with feeble dark spots, but there is a large dark one on
the basal half bounded posteriorly by a sub-fasciate patch of snowy scales, and
at the base, and on the third interstices near base with whitish ones, the base of
the rostrum and the head between the eyes are densely clothed with stramineous
ones.

Emplesis leucomela, n. sp.

¢. Black, rostrum and abdomen obscurely paler, antennae and tarsi reddish,
Densely clothed with sooty scales, becoming pale (but not white) on under surface
and base of femora, a conspicuous white triangular spot on each side of base of
prothorax, and a short white fascia just beyond the middle of elytra, a few white
or whitish scales behind it and on the shoulders.

Rostrum slightly shorter than prothorax, almost straight; with fine ridges
alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to beyond antennae (these
inserted at apical two-fifths), with rather dense punctures in front. Prothorax
almost as long as its greatest width, sides moderately rounded, becoming suddenly
narrower in front. Elytra elongate-cordate, base feebly trisinuate. distinctly
wider than prothorax; with regular rows of large sub-approximate, partially
concealed punctures. Abdomen without sub-basal depression, third and fourth
segments combined slightly longer than second and fitth. Femora rather stout,
front ones edentate, hind ones feebly dentate. Length, 3-5 mm,

Victoria: Woori Yallock (Ff. E. Wilson). Type (unique). 1. 16418.

Distinct from the other species with dentate femora, by its sooty clothing,
with white patches. The rostrum is less curved than on EF. pavilis. ‘The pro-
thorax is longer than usual, but shorter than on the preceding species. The tooth
on each hind femur is small and distinct from but few directions, the middle
pair are almost edentate. The upper surface has dense sooty setae, but they are
distinct only from the sides. From some directions the scutellum appears as a
small white spot.

123

ON A NEW GENUS OF CALCAREOUS ALGAE, FROM THE LOWER
CAMBRIAN (?), WEST OF WOOLTANA, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By Freox. Crapman, A.L.S., F.G.S.,
IIon. Fellow Royal Society South Australia.

{Read June 9, 1927.]
Pilate VI.

INTRODUCTION.

Although those thallophytes which secrete a considerable amount of cal-
careous material in their tissues are recognised as important rock-forming
organisms, they have not been so intimately studied as they deserve. There is,
indeed, a great field for research in this respect amongst the oldest Australian
rocks, and we are further reminded of this by Sir Douglas Mawson’s recent
discovery of a unique type of calcarcous alga in the Flinders Ranges. There is
little doubt that we have in this ancient thallophyte a form which, instead of
growing with a ball-like or sub-spheroidal contour, was actually frondose, the
separate segments of which can be plainly seen in sections prepared from the
rock specimens.

Tt was on account of its peculiar segmented appearance that Sir Douglas
Mawson compared this limestone-torming alga with Halimeda, one of the jointed
and frondose green algae so abundant in coral lagoons. Referring to the dis-
covery of this fossil in his paper on “Evidence and Indications of Algal Contri-
butions in the Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian Limestones of South Australia”
(Mawson, 1925, p. 188), Sir Douglas Mawson says, under the heading
“Limestones West of Wooltana” :—

“Tn another area in the Flinders Ranges, some 35 miles north of Italowie
and about 9 miles west of Wooltana Head Station, is a region of calcareous strata
superior to the Proterozoic tillite horizon. Thereabouts curious markings were
noted in the rocks in several places suggestive of organic origin. In the case of
some boulders in the creek at McLeach’s Well, the markings in the rock very
closely resemble the packed fan-shaped segments of Halimeda.”

One of these limestone specimens and some microscope slides have been
very kindly sent to me by Sir Douglas Mawson, and upon these I have based the
following notes :—

MACROSCOPIC APPEARANCE OF THE Rock.

The cut surface of the limestone shows it to consist of a mass of thick-jointed
segments of the alga. From the way the separate segments follow one another
in the matrix, and sometimes slightly diverge or radiate, there is no doubt of its
character as a jointed organism. ‘There is very little cement or matrix to the
rack, and this is well seen in a weathered surface, where the dark-coloured
infillings or mineralised interspaces consist of less pure calcareous material than
the algal, and so stand out as a rudely polygonal network in relief around the
whitened algal particles.

124

DescripTioNn OF THE ORGANISM.

Class CH LLOROPHYCEAE.

Genus Mawsonella, n. g.

(for generic characters see below, in description of genotype.)
Mawsonella wooltanensis, n. g. et sp.
Pi. vi.

Description —TVhallus calcarcous, consisting of numerous ovoid joints,
attached by short, intervening, thread-like connections which, when the joimts are
detached, resemble small prickles with blunt heads. In thin section the internal
structure of these joints is seen in a few imstances in a very well-preserved
condition,

There is no division into an external and an internal layer of cells, as in
Sphaerocodiwm, but an almost invariable coating of small dolomite or calcite
crystals around the joints may indicate a cuticular differentiation. The ccllular
structure of the thalloid substance is very minute, and although there is a rudely
reticulate arrangement throughout the mass, there are portions where the cells
branch and dichotomise after the manner of Apiphyton (Chapman, 1916, p. 82).
In one or two places there may be seen asteroidal groupings of the cells; in most
others it is a reticulate arrangement.

The elements which connect the joints of the thallus appear to be of closer
or more solid texture than the mass of the thallus, and accordingly appear darker
in section. In the basal portion of the larger joints there is often a linear system
of denser cells starting from a vesiculate series that later breaks up into cervicorn
prolongations and thence into distal radiate lines. These radiate lines occasionally
show curved transverse connections, which give to them a vesiculate character.

Dimensions—Largest joints measure 54mm. Average size of joints,
circ. 314 mm.

Observations —The substance of the thallus is, in many cases, invaded by
crystallisation. This is in the form of numerous tiny spicular and lath-shaped
forms and probably calcitic. In other cases large crystals of calcite, generally
distinctly twinned and sometimes zoned, are seen occupying a large portion of
the original thallus, often to the extent of cutting the segment in halves.

The matrix of the rock was probably once a calcareous mud, intermingled
with quartz grains. The mud has since crystallised, almost to the obliteration of
any other organisms that may have been present. There is, however, an interesting
example of a foraminifer occurring in one of the slides, which seems to have been
preserved by being included in the basal part of a joint of the alga; this is perhaps
referable to the genus Truncatulina.

Relationships——So far as I have seen, the nearest forms to the present algal
type is that of the fossils named by Dr. Chas. D. Walcott,“ ? Sphaerocodium,
and which he found in the Middle Cambrian of Burgess Pass, British Columbia.
He described two species (Walcott, 1919, p. 243, pl. lix., figs. 1, la-c, and fig. 2)
as ? Sphaerocodium praecursor and ? S. cambria. Neither of these forms appears
to be really referable to the genus Sphaerocodium, since the tubular cells of the

(1) Since these notes were written I have learned with the deepest regret of the death of
Dr. C. D. Walcott, the Secretary of the Smithsonian Institution at Washington, Dr, Walcott
has rendered me great service through his ever-ready and kindly advice on matters pertaining
to the Cambrian faunas, on which he was undoubtedly the highest authority, and I take this
apportunity of expressing my warmest feelings for his genial friendship and encouragement
in our common work .

Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soe. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate VI.

F.C Phote,

New Calcareous Alga from the Cambrian of S.A.

Gillnghain & Co. Limited, Irinters, Adelaide

125

thallus, although apparently interlacing, are very minute and crowded, and there
is no external layer of saccate cells, as in the recent genus Codium,

One of Dr. Walcott’s species, however, namely, ?S. praecursor, bears more
than a fancied resemblance to the present algal fossil from South Australia. In
point of size the thallus of ?.S. praecursor as figured by Walcott is about one-
third the dimensions of the present species, whilst the tubes are of about the same
diameter.

Some years ago I described another species of Sphaerocodium from the
Middle Devonian limestone in North-east Gippsland, Victoria, as S. gippslandicum
(Chapman, 1920, p. 182, pi. xvi, fig. 1); this I am now inclined to regard as
possibly belonging to a new genus, on account of the internal filamentous cells
being dendroid rather than interlacing, as in the living Sphaerocodium, Yhis
Devonian form does not, however, show any marked resemblance to the present
genus Mawsonella, and, moreover, the tubes of the interior of the thallus are
about ten times the diameter of that genus.

BrpuioGRAPHIC REFERENCES.
CHAPMAN, F.

1916—Report on a Probable Calcareous Alga from the Cambrian Lime-
stone Breccia found in Antarctica at 85° S., Geology (vol. i1.),
Brit. Ant. Exped., 1907-8, pp. 81-83, pl. 1.

1920—Palaeozoic Fossils of Eastern Victoria, Part IV., Records Geol.
Surv. Vict., vol. iv., pt. 2, pp. 175-194, pls. xvi.-xxxii.

Mawson, D.

1925—-Evidence and Indications of Algal Contributions in the Cambrian
and Pre-Cambrian Limestones of South Australia, Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlix., pp. 186-190, pls. xii1.-xv.

Waxcott, C. D.

1919—Middle Cambrian Algae, Cambrian Geology and Palaeontology,
Ser. IV., Smithsonian Miscellaneous Collections, vol. Ixvii.,
No. 5, pp. 217-260, pls. xliii.-lix.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE VI.
Fig. 1. Weathered surface of a fragment of limestone containing Mawsonella, X15.

Fig. 2. Section of limestone, magnified, showing general appearance of the joints and
the secondary crystallisation around them. x26,

Fig. 3. A hasally attached joint, showing coarse cystoid strands. x26.

Fig. 4. The same, more highly magnified, showing the fine strumose cell-structure of
the main body of the thalloid segment. X52.

Fig. 5. Another joint, showing fine cell-structure and an included foraminiferal test,
C?) Truacatulina, x52,

THE MANNUM GRANITE.

By B. F. Goong, B.Sc.

(Communicated by Sir Douglas Mawson.)
[Read July 14, 1927.]

This granite outcrops over a comparatively small area on the slope of the
eastern bank of the River Murray on Section 156, Hundred of Younghusband.
The location is about two and a quarter miles up stream from Mannum township.

Erosion of the overlying Tertiary beds has laid bare a narrow strip of the
granite, about three-cighths of a mile in length, with a maximum width of nearly
one hundred yards. ‘There is also a smaller patch a quarter of a mile to the
northwards. The extent of the occurrence, small though it is, is not at first
sight apparent, as the rock itself is exposed only on the slope of the river bank.
being elsewhere covered by soil and detritus. Overlying and immediately
surrounding this granite are the highly fossiliferous yellow limestones of the
Murray plains. It is obviously related to the Murray Bridge and Swanport
granite outcrops, and undoubtedly dates from Palaeozoic or pre-Palaeozoic times.

Numerous bands of fine-grained aplite traverse the granite in its north-
eastern portion. These are parallel and strike in a direction 140 degrees east
of north. The maximum thickness observed was 30 inches.

At the opposite end of the outcrop, and extending parallel to the aplite, is a
dark, basic dyke about 2 feet in breadth. Also in a quarry face are exposed basic
segtegations and a coarse-grained aplite. The granite is quarried and used in
the building of locks now under construction along the River Murray. These
quarrying operations have exposed many drusy vughs containing fine crystals
of orthoclase, biotite, pyrites, and smoky quartz.

Macroscopic FEATURES.

The granite is a medium to coarse, fairly even-grained rock containing
numerous small miarolitic cavities. The most obvious mincral is orthoclase
present in coarse crystals which show fine cleavage faces and lend to the rock
a pinkish colour. Plagioclase is less obvious but present in smaller crystals.
Quartz is plentiful with a decidedly smoky appearance; mica is comparatively
scarce, and is scattered through the rock in small dark flakes; small grains of
pyrites are numerous, and iron ore is discernible with a lens.

Round the edge of the intrusion, the granite has more of a grey colour;
porphyritic crystals of pink orthoclase are numerous, but are all partially altered
and surrounded by an outer white zone. In a few cases complete kaolinization
is indicated. ‘The groundmass is almost felsitic, relieved by coarser grains of
quartz and biotite. Biotite is more plentiful than in the normal rock.

Microscopic FEATURES.

It is a holocrystalline, medium-grained, allotriomorphic granular rock, of
medium to coarse grain size. The minerals contained are quartz, orthoclase,
microcline, plagioclase, biotite, sphene, magnetite, pyrites, chlorite, apatite, and
zircon.

127

Quartz is present in numerous irregular grains, mostly clear, put many
exhibit relics of former cracks and contain fine dust-like inclusions. Rarely,
fragments are met with graphically interwoven felspar. Abundant orthoclase
appears in perfectly fresh and clear anhedral crystals. Some few of the larger
pieces are turbid through alteration to aggregates of fine grains of sericite, kaolin,
and quartz. Much of the orthoclase is perthitically intergrown with albitic
plagioclase in large individuals. In these cases the orthoclase is turbid. Micro-
cline occurs in rare crystals exhibiting the characteristic cross-hatching under
crossed nicols.

Plagioclase occurs mainly perthitically intergrown with orthoclase, but is
present also in small subhedral pieces. These are quite clear and show no sign
of alteration; under crossed nicols they show fine lamellae due to albite twinning
and, in rare examples, pericline twinning. The fineness of the stripes suggests
a highly sodic variety, and in the perthite it has a maximum extinction angle of
12 degrees, determining it as albite.

The plagioclase crystals, apart from that of the perthite, have a maximum
extinction of 10 degrees on sections cut perpendicular to the O10 face, showing
that it is albite-oligoclase.

Biotite mica is present in small quantity. It occurs in small flakes containing
a few inclusions and is pleochroic from brown to pale brown. It is slightly
altered to chlorite.

Sphene occurs in fairly numerous highly refracting wedge-shaped crystals,
pale brown in colour. Apatite is present as extremely fine lath-like crystals.
Magnetite is not plentiful, but a few fairly large irregular grains and cubes are
to be seen. Pyrites is comparatively plentiful in grains and cubes. Zircon is
rare. Chlorite appears as occasional green flakes, due to alteration of biotite.

CHEMICAL COMPOSITION.

A chemical analysis of the granite gave the following results :—

Constituents. Percentage. Constituents. Percentage.
SiO, .. .. «40877 H,O— .. .. .. 36
ALO, .. .. .. 13°69 “PiGlp ker er 72
Pele a lee Ga. SLO? POO oe et “11
BAY ce che 8p he | TeS, .. .. -; 727
MgO .. .. .. °34 MnO .. .. .. °28
CaO Mel “Rip Pa “94 ZEOR® Sos hae, ER
SacQ) sa a6 aa S70 -
KO ee Se 5°68 Total .. 100715
HyOss we Le ee “45

Specific gravity, 2°66.

Most of these figures are quite normal for a granite, the magnesia is low but
is explained by the paucity of mica and the absence of other ferro-magnesian
minerals. Of the alkalies, potash seems to predominate to a greater extent than
is usual in South Australian granites. The molecular proportions of potash and
soda are equal, and in microscopic sections orthoclase and plagioclase are roughly
equal in amount. The apparent predominance of orthoclase is due to the abund-
ance of perthite.

128

THE Norm.

The calculation of the norm yields the following minerals and their per-

centages :—
Quartz 25°32
Orthoclase 33°36
Albite .. .. 31-44
Anorthite .. .. 3:89
Enstatite .. .. 90
Magnetite .. .. 2-09
Haematite .. .. “48
Position in C.1.P.W. Classification :—
Class I...
Order 4 ..
Rang 1

Sub-Rang 3

Ilmenite
Pyrites
Apatite
Water

Total

Persalane

Britannare
Liparase
Liparose

Tue Mobs.

Microscopic measurements carried out by the Rosiwal method gave the
following actual percentage mineral composition :—

Quartz 25°99 Sphene.. .. .. 1°86
Orthoclese 34-09 Apatite... 1... "62
Plagioclase 30°75

Biotite .. 2... © 3°13 Total 99°77
Iron Ores... .. 3°33

From these figures it will be seen that the values of quartz and orthoclase
correspond almost exactly with the norm. Plagioclase is slightly lower but is
approximately equal. Ferromagnesian minerals are much higher, but this
inaccuracy is due, perhaps, to the large and scattered nature of the flakes of
biotite. Iron ores are of the same order. Sphene, on reduction to ilmenite,
corresponds in the ratio of 1:44 in the mode, 1°37 in the norm. Apatite has
almost twice the value in the norm, but the fineness of the crystals renders it
difficult to measure them,

129

NEW TREMATODES FROM AN AUSTRALIAN SILUROID.

By Proressor T. Harvey Jonnston, University of Adelaide.
[Read July 14, 1927.]

The Australian freshwatcr jewfish, or catfish, Tandanus (or Copidoglanis)
tandanus, has a wide distribution in the eastern half of the continent, and several
parasites have been recorded as occurring in it, viz., a Gyrodactyloid trematode,
Anchylodiscus tandani, Johnston and Tiegs, from the gills; a Caryophyllaeid
cestade, Lytocestus (Balanotaenia) bancrofti, Johnston, from the intestine; a
trematode, /separorchis sp., Johnston, from its gas bladder; and a Trypanosome,
T. bancrofti, Johnston and Cleland, from its blood—all from Queensland locali-
ties. Most of the material referred to above, as well as most of that described
in this paper, was collected by Dr. T. L. Bancroft, or his daughter, Dr. M. J.
Mackerras, to both of whom thanks are due. The paper contains an account of
two species of trematodes which occur in the gas bladder of this fish.

Isoparorchis tandani, n. sp.
A. Figs, 1-4.

This is a large trematode, specimens examined measuring 30 mm. by 15 mm.
(somewhat compressed), 25 mm. by 12 mm., and 21 mm. by 11 mm., while the
smallest measured 17 mm. by 8 mm. and possessed abundant ripe eggs. The
anterior end is thickest and somewhat pointed, the posterior being rounded.
There is little variation in the width of the parasite from the region of the testes
to that of the ovary, though compressed specimens may show a considerable
widening in the middle third.

The body (when preserved in formalin) is more or less transparent, the
darkly-coloured uterus and intestine showing through very plainly, while the
rounded whitish testes are also very obvious, especially from the dorsal aspect.
The cuticle is smooth. In the case of the larger worms the diameters of the
anterior and ventral suckers were 1°7 mm. and 2:1 mm. respectively (ratio
1:1:2); 1-6 mm. and 2-1 mm. (ratio 1:1°3); 1:0 mm. and 1-2 mm. (ratio
1:1:2). The prominent ventral sucker is situated at about one-fifth the body
length from the anterior end. The genital pore lics in the midventral line and
at a distance from the oral sucker about one-third the interval between the latter
and the acetabulum. ‘There is a muscular pharynx, about 0°6 mm. in diameter,
continuous with the oral sucker which it partly overlies, and is succeeded by an
extremely short ocsophagus which overlies it dorsally. The latter soon branches
into two long simple intestinal caeca which are thrown into a fairly regular series
of curves—a slight one between the two suckers in the vicinity of the genital
pore, then the limbs of the intestine approach the ventral acetabulum sucker very
closely; then follows a wide loop partly investing the corresponding testis; this
being followed by four others, the last being slight, while the one anteriorly to
it lies in the vicinity of the ovary. The ends of the caeca approach very closely
to the excretory vesicle at the posterior extremity of the worm. The extreme
anterior portion of each caecum is specialised as a “glandular stomach” and differs
in appearance from the rest of the tube.

The main excretory canal is long and sinuous, extending from the rather
large excrctory vesicle to a point near the middle of the length of the parasite,
where it bifurcates, each limb passing forwards in a series of curves near the
intestinal loops.

E

A. Figs. 1-4.

131

The testes are rounded, entire and approximately equal, measuring 1°5 mm.
to 2 mm. in diameter, They lie on either side of the acetabulum, their anterior
border being more or less on a level with the middle of the sucker. Yhey are
closely invested by the intestinal loops. The vasa effcrentia arise from the inner
anterior margins and pass just in front of the ventral sucker as very narrow tubes
which soon join to form a swollen vesicula seminalis. The latter is thrown into
a number of close coils and then becomes a very delicate, rather long, ejaculatory
duct which travels in a sinuous or slightly coiled course above the uterine coils,
and then diverges somewhat from the latter to enter the muscular genital sac.
It terminates beside the uterine pore, at the bottom of the ductus hermaphroditicus.

The ovary is a long tubular organ, more or less bent in various directions,
measuring over 9 mm. in the longest specimen examined, and over 6 mm. in the
next longest. The width is about 0°25 mm. It may lic on either side, since in
four mature specimens it was found on the right, and in two on the left. Its
general position is more or less transverse, though the outer end may be bent
posteriorly. Its inner portion becomes markedly narrowed into a short oviduct
whose lumen is only 0°01 mm., sufficiently wide to admit the passage of an
ovarian egg, the latter measuring about 0-015 mm. in diameter, but capable of
elongating as it travels down the duct. The latter soon receives the vitelline duct
and becomes sharply bent back on itself as the ootyp, which is very narrow (about
0-012 mm. in diameter). This uterine duct passes beside and immediately above
the oviduct for a short distance, and then widens into the uterus in the vicinity
of the lower (i.e., inner) part of the ovary, becoming thrown into a series of
coils and loops, sotne of which overlie the uterine duct. The uterus is a very
long, rather narrow, duct thrown into a series of wide curves passing across the
worm between and slightly beyond the intestinal caeca and dorsally to them,
each curve being thrown into a series of smaller undulations. In the vicinity
of the acetabulum the tube becomes narrow again, passing above dorso-laterally
to the sucker, thence forwards below the vesicula seminalis and cjaculatory duct
to enter the muscular genital sac and terminate at the ductus hermaphroditicus.

The genital sac, which, apparently, is homologous with the cirrus sac of
other trematodes, is a very muscular organ, 0°8 mm. to 1 mm. wide, surrounding
the terminal part of both male and female ducts, particularly the latter. The
ductus is eversible, as some preparations show the organ partly extruded as a
wide structure projecting through the genital pore. The enclosed portion of the
uterus and ductus is surrounded by a layer of deeply-staining (? glandular) cells.

The two vitelline glands are greatly branched and lie in the posterior quarter
of the parasite, the one on the ovarian side being rather more posteriorly situated
than its fellow, and, besides, it invades the other side somewhat. The glands
are markedly dendritic, each consisting of about five main branches which sub-
divide two or three times and terminate in a great number of short processes, so
that the two glands appear somewhat like an irregular broken network occupying
the space behind the uterus and ovary and between the intestinal crura, though
they overlap parts of the latter and may extend laterally beyond them. Except
in the vicinity of the shell gland no part of the ovary or uterus is covered by the
vitellarium. The two glands are connected by a swollen duct from the narrower mid-
region of which a common vitelline duct is given off ventrally to curve forwards and
after a short course join the oviduct as it enters the shell gland. At the junction
there is given off dorsally a short Laurer’s canal terminating blindly in a rounded

DESCRIPTION OF TEXT FIG. A,
References to the lettering will be found at the end of the article.

; : Lsoparorchis tandani. ;
Fig, 1: Entire worm, ventral view. 2: Female organs. 3: Male ducts, etc. 4: Junction
of oviduct and other ducts.

132

or pyriform receptaculum seminis, ‘12 mm. in diameter, which lies ventrally to
parts of the vitellarium. The shell gland is not a very obvious structure in stained
preparations, though it occupies a considerable area, about 1 mm. by ‘65mm. Eggs
are thin-shelled and measure 45» to 52 by 25 to 27». At the end opposite
the operculum, the shell shows a small rounded apical thickening. The miracidium
while enclosed in the shell is about 40 » long.

The species obviously belongs to Jsoparorchis, Southwell (1913), whose type
species, f. tristmilitubis, occurs in the gas bladder of an Indian Siluroid, Wallego
attu. The form herein described was recorded by me (1914) under its generic
name only, from Tandanus tandanus, obtained from the Condamine River
(Murray-Darling system) in Southern Queensland, and later (1916) from the
saine host species in the Dee (Dawson-Fitzroy system) and Burnett Rivers which
belong to the Pacific slopes.

In 1920 Kobayashi (p. 396) described a new genus and species, Leptolecithum
eurytremum as infesting the gas bladder of certain Japanese Siluroids. In June,
1926, Bhalerao announced the synonymy of the two genera, tabulated the chief
characters of the two parasites, and concluded that they belonged to Southwell’s
species. He also mentioned that the ovary was sittiated on the right in the Indian
parasite, and that perhaps Kobayashi may have been in error in describing the
organ as lying on the left in the Japanese material examined. I have shown
above that both men may have been correct in their statements, as the organs
may be placed either on the left or on the right side in the Australian species.
A comparison of the figures given by Southwell and Kobayashi, together with
the distribution of the hasts in each casc, leads one to disagree with Bhalerao’s
view as to the identity of the species. There are marked differences in regard
to the general outline of the worms; the relative sizes of the two suckers and
their distance from one another in relation to body length; the size of the testes;
and the position at which the main excretory stem bifurcates. It is in all of these
points that both J, trisinilitubis, Southwell, and [. eurytremus (Kobayashi) differ
from J, tandani. All known members of the genus occur in the gas bladder
(“gall bladder” in Bhalerao’s table, p. 247, being obviously a misprint for gas
bladder) of Siluroids.

Kobayashi placed his genus in the Hemiuridae and stated that it was related
to the Distomum clavatum group. This latter assemblage has been assigned to
Hirudinella, and was regarded by Odhner (1911) as belonging to an wundesignated
subfamily, but Nicoll (1914) listed it under Accacoeliinae. Manter pointed out
many similarities to the Azygiidae except in regard to the form of the vitellaria
(which are tubular in Hirudinella) and the position of the ovary and testes, the
latter being immediately postovarian. The strongly muscular body of Hirudinella
as well as the position of the various sex organs mark the genus off sharply from
Tsoparorchis. In Accacoelium the testes are postacetubular, one behind the other,
the ovary a little distance posttesticular and the vitellaria dendritic along each
side of the body. Except for the position of the vitellaria, [soparorchis shows
certain similarity to Leuceruthrus (whichis usually placed in the Azygiidae in
spite of the relative positions of the testes and ovary, though Goldberger, 1911,
regarded it as probably representing a new family), and especially to Halipegus.

Isoparorchis does not seem to fall into any of the known subfamilies of
Hemiuridae, though it appears nearer to the Accacoeliinae. It is suggested that
a new subfamily Isoparorchinae be erected to receive the genus, a provisional
diagnosis being:—Hemiuridae; body weakly muscular; posterior region not
telescopic; testes preovarian, near acetabulum; ovary posttesticular; vitellaria
dendritic, postovarian; uterus preovarian,

Both Halipegus, Looss, and Derogenes, Luhe—especially the latter—show
affinities with the new subfamily, though the form of the vitelline glands differs
in each case, being dendritic in /separorchis, rounded in Derogenes, and composed

133

of a few short rounded lobes in Halipegus. It is of interest to note that Luhe
(1909) placed these two genera in the vicinity of the Dicrocoeliinae and
Hemiuridae, whereas Pratt (1902) included Derogenes in the latter and regarded
Halipegus and Accacoelium as related to the Syncoeliinae. Nicoll (1910, p. 348)
seems to have been in doubt regarding the systematic position of Derogenes, as
he listed it under “subfamily (Derogeninae),” though he subsequently (1914,
p. 487) placed it under the Syncoeliinae, as also did Manter (1926, p. 100). The
absence of a cirrus sac in Halipegus, and the presence in Derogenes of a muscular
organ surrounding the ends of both male and female ducts, as in Isoparorchis,
should be noted.
: Tandanicola bancrofti, n. gen., n. sp.
B. Figs. 1-5.

This semi-transparent trematode was collected from the gas bladder of
Tandanus tandanus, from the Burnett River, at Eidsvold, by Dr. Bancroft and
his daughter, Dr. J. M. Mackerras, while Mr, H. Tryon forwarded some from
the same host species from the Condamine River, near Warwick, Queensland.

Preserved specimens are very pale, strongly flexed ventrally, the oral sucker
more or less underlying the acetabulum, and the posterior end may also be bent
sotnewhat ventrally, while the lateral edges may be slightly inturned. The largest
specimen, when slightly compressed, measured about 3-8 mm. in length by 2 mm.
in breadth, the greatest width being in the vicinity of the acetabulum, which is
situated in the midbody, The anterior end narrows somewhat, but the posterior
is rounded. The mouth is subterminal. Both suckers are well developed,
especially the ventral, their respective diameters being 0°38 mm. and 0-48 mm.,
the ratio being about 4:5. The cuticle is smooth, except anteriorly, where it is
very minutely scaly (under high power).

‘The pharynx, which has a diameter of about 0-17 mm. and a length of about
0-15 mm., is succeeded by an oesophagus 0°2 mm. to 0-3 mm. long; the latter
branching into the two intestinal crura, which are fairly even in diameter and
extend only slightly beyond the acetabular level. The inner portion of each crus
may be somewhat crinkled.

The excretory canals form a U with very long, wide limbs with sacculate
walls and extending anteriorly almost to the pharynx, and lying laterally from
the intestinal crura. The pore is terminal,

The testes are slightly elongate, nearly elliptical, measuring 0°-4 mm. by
0-22 mm., lying side by side, being separated by the uterine canal. They are
situated just in front of the acetabulum, whose anterior border they may partly
overlie, There is a prominent elongate swollen vesicula seminalis on the right
of the median line, extending from the region of the shell gland forwards beside
the ovary, between the latter and the genital sac. It may underlie portion of
the ovary, while its anterior region is closely adjacent to and may partly overlie
the sac. It then enters the latter to become a rather wide elongate rounded
structure with markedly glandular walls, presumably constituting a prostatic
region. There arises a very short duct from its anterior end to terminate in
a strongly-folded pouch lying in anterior portion of the genital atrium, some
distance in front of the papilla. Vhe arrangement of the various parts is some-
what like that occurring in Levinseniella,

The genital sac is a conspicuous organ whose size varies in different speci-
mens (0°15 mm. long by 0:13 mm. broad; 0-4 mm, by 0-2 mm.). It possesses
abundant longitudinal and circular muscle fibres, while its exterior is provided
with numbers of large cells which are especially numerous around the posterior
end of the organ. They appear to be glandular. Projecting into the lumen of
the sac is a very prominent copulatory papilla which is not traversed by the male
duct. It varies in form in the different specimens examined, being broadly

134

7
Gr;

ut. t ie

~)
otf cuca! in C) pa %

B. Figs. 1-5.

135

rounded in some and more or less conical in others (0°08 mm. long by 0°09 mm.;
0-08 mm, by 0-08 mm.; 0-18 mm. by 0:07 mm., an elongate conical form),
according to the degree of retraction. Its cavity contains abundant longitudinal
muscle fibres inserted into the tip of the organ, while the surrounding copulatory
sac is richly supplied with circular muscle fibres. The lumen of the atrium
varies in dimensions according to the degree of retraction of the papilla; but
its walls, like those of the papilla, are very strongly chitinised. They are also
thrown into a series of very prominent longitudinal or spiral ridges when the
papilla is retracted. The lumen is not straight, the outer part being bent or
twisted more or less spirally, and projecting anteriorly to the genital pore which
partly underlies the sac. Into the anterior part of the atrium there enter the
uterus (metraterm) and the ejaculatory duct adjacent to a strongly folded pouch-
like part of the wall in each case. The genital pore lies in the midline about
midway between the two suckers, and is an insignificant aperture when the
papilla is fully retracted. It then has strongly infolded walls like those of the
atrium, but when the papilla is protruded through it, the lumen becomes more
circular. The pore possesses a strong sphincter.

The ovary consists of three larger and one or two smaller rounded vesicles,
some of which partly overlie others, the organ being situated on the right side
in front of the right testis and between the intestine and vesicula seminalis,
sometimes overlying part of the latter and of the genital sac. ‘The oviduct travels
inwardly and somewhat posteriorly towards the midline, to receive the common
yolk duct or reservoir, then passes upwards to enter the shell gland, which
measures 0°8 to 0°13 mm. in diameter. The latter lies ventrally to the yolk
reservoir and is sittiated between, or just in front of, the anterior borders of the
testes. Laurer’s canal arises ventrally, immediately before the oviduct enters
the shell gland, and curves around the latter dorsally as a very delicate tube
which becomes swollen into one or more receptacula seminis and then fairly long
and canal-like. The ootyp continues backwards in a slightly undulating course
as a narrow ulerine duct, at first above the shell eland and later lying between
the testes or below one of them, thence above or to one side of the acetabulum,
behind which it becomes widened into the uterus. The latter is thrown into a
series of loops and coils occupying the midregion of the postacetabular part of
the parasite, excepting the posterior end. The duct eventually travels forwards
as a fairly wide canal above the acetabulum or to one side of it, thence below the
left testis and vitelline duct, and then on the left side of the genital sac to
terminate as a narrow tube opening into a cuticular pouch in the anterior part
of the atrium. Eggs are thin-shelled, abundant, and measure 0°042 mm. by
0-025 mm, (uterine eggs, 0°032 mm. by 0°025 mm.).

The yolk glands lie laterally in the second quarter of the worm and consist
on each side of 20 to 30 follicles, lying directly above the intestine. They are on
approximately the same level as the testes, being preacetabular and postovarian.
The main duct from each side passes directly inwards into the anterior border
of the corresponding testis, the two ducts meeting just above the shell gland.
They may overlie the ventral lobe of the ovary, the uterus, and the posterior part
of the vesicula seminalis, but are ventral to the main mass of the ovary. The

DESCRIPTION OF TEXT FIG, B.
References to the lettering will be found at the end of the article.

Tandanicola bancroftt.

Fig, 1: Entire worm, ventral view. 2: Entire worm, lateral view. 3: Female organs (in
part), also copulatory sac, cte,, from a teased specimen. 4: Copulatory sac, etc. 4u: Sketch
to indicate course of genital atrium from genital pore. 5: Another form of copulatory papilla,
less retracted than those indicated in figs. 3 and 4.

Figs. t and 2 are drawn to scale indicated beside fig. 1; figs. 3, 4, and 5 to scale drawn
beside fig. 3,

136

united duct may be swollen to constitute a vitelline reservoir which narrows
immediately before joining the oviduct as it enters the shell gland.

In several specimens amphitypy was observed, the ovary, shell gland, and
terminal portion of the uterus being on the left of the median line, instead of
the right.

The general topography of the organs indicates that the worm belongs to
the Brachycoeliidae, as diagnosed under subfamily title by Luhe (1909, p. 118).
The absence of a typical cirrus sac and the position of the ovary and testes
exclude it from Brachycoeliinae (s. str.). Though the Phagicolinae are devoid
of a cirrus sac, yet the positions of the other organs prevent the inclusion of the
parasite in that subfamily, and this remark would apply to the Lecithodendriinae.
The parasite seems to be more nearly related to the Microphallinae in regard to
the structure of the cirrus sac (Ward, 1901; Luhe, 1909), but the postacetabular
position of all organs except the uterus and genital sac in the subfamily definitely
eliminates the Australian parasite from it. A new genus Tandanicola and sub-
family Tandanicolinae are therefore proposed for its reception, the following
provisional generic diagnosis being suggested. Tundanicola, n. gen., Brachy-
coeliidae: Cuticle more or less minutely spiny; suckers well developed;
prepharynx absent; pharynx and oesophagus present; intestinal crura extending
to vicinity of acetabulum; testes compact, lying at same level, preacetabular,
postovarian; ovary consisting of a few rounded lobes, pretesticular; cirrus sac
absent, replaced functionally by a muscular copulatory sac with well-developed
copulatory papilla; genital pore preacetabular; vitellaria consisting of compara-
tively few follicles, lying laterally above intestinal crura, preacetabular; uterus
mainly postacetabular, restricted to midregion; cxcretory vesicle practically
U-shaped. Type, 7. bancrofit.

References to lettering: a.s., anterior sucker ; c.p., copulatory papilla; c.s., cirrus
sac; copulatory sac; c.v.d., common vitelline duct; d.h., ductus hermaphroditicus ;
ej.d., ejaculatory duct; e#.c., excretory canal; exw., excretory vesicle; g.at.,
genital atrium; gl.c., gland cells (?); gl.int., glandular region of intestine; g.p.,
genital pore; int., intestine; L.c., Laurer’s canal; od., oviduct; oes., oesophagus ;
oot., ootyp; ov., ovary; ph., pharynx; pr., prostatic portion of male duct; ns.,
receptaculum seminis; s.g., shell gland; ¢., testis; ut., uterus; 7.d., vas deferens;
v.eff., vas efferens; vit., vitelline glands; vit.d., vitelline duct; w.r., vitelline
reservoir; v.s., ventral sucker; v.sem., vesicula seminalis,

LITERATURE REFERENCES,

1926—Buarerao, G. D.: “On the Synonymy of the Genera Isoparorchis, etc.”
Ann. Mag, Nat. Hist., 17, pp. 246-250.

1914 Jounston, T. H.: “Notes and Exhibits, Trematoda.” P.R.S. Q’land,
26, p. 69.

1916—Jounston, T. H.: “Census of Endoparasites recorded as occurring in
Queensland, etc.” P.R.S. Q’land, 28, pp. 31-79.

1920—Kozayrasui, H.: “On some Digenetic Trematodes in Japan.” Para-
sitology, 12, pp. 380-410.

1909—Luue, M.: “Trematoda,” in Susswasserfauna Deutschlands, 17.

1926—Manrter, H. W.: “Some North American Fish Trematodes.” IIL Biol.
Monogr., 10 (2).

1910—-NicoLtL, W.: “On the Entozoa of Fishes from Firth of Clyde.” Para-
sitology, 3, pp. 322-359.

1914—Nrcot., W.: “Trematode Parasites of Fishes from the English Channel.”
Jour. Mar. Biol. Assoc., 10, pp. 466-505.

1901—Warp, H. B.: “On the Structure of the Copulatory Organs in Micro-
phallus.” Tr. Amer. Micr. Soc., 22, pp. 175-187.

137

ABORIGINAL ROCK SHELTERS AND CARVINGS—THREE LOCALITIES
ON THE LOWER MURRAY.

By Ilarotn L, Srearp.
[Read July 14, 1927.]

The first of the rock carvings and shelters herein described, namely, the Won-
gulla Series, was discovered on a recent trip to the Murray in company with
Messrs. C. P. Mountford, P. Stapleton, and N. B. Tindale. At their joint request,
T undertook the recording of this discovery. A second visit was made in company
with Mr. Mountford, when the Wongulla Series was found to be more extensive
than at first supposed, and two further occurrences were discovered at Fromm’s
Landing at Scrubby Flat. A subsequent trip with Mr. Tindale allowed further
investigations at Fromm’s Landing.

In a previous paper “!) the author recorded a series of aboriginal intaglios at
Devon Downs (Section 89, Hundred of Nildottic). These markings cover prac-
tically the whole available surface on a rock shelter 70 feet in length ; those recorded
in this paper, while similar in technique, cover much smaller rock surfaces, but
extend over a much wider field and embrace several new designs.

THE WoNGULLA SERIES.

This includes three shelters and intermittent markings on the cliffs at various
points. The locality is opposite the Wongulla Landing, and extends on the eastern
side of the Murray for about a quarter of a mile in Sections B and C, Hundred of
Forster. Wongulla is about two miles south of Devon Downs, following down
stream.

The river here has a north and south direction, and a mud flat, about a mile
long and a quarter of a mile wide, extends along the eastern side. This is some-
times covered with watcr, forming a billabong, and is bounded on the eastern
extremity by the cliffs, which rise sheer, for about 200 feet, from a bank which
is fringed with tall gum trees and undergrowth, giving protection to the rock
dwellings which have weathered out at the base of the cliffs. These appear to
have been much occupied by the aborigines. In places large blocks of rock have
fallen from the cliffs and encumber the banks.

‘The cliffs are formed of a fossilifcrous limestone laid down in Miocene times.
This can be readily scratched or marked with any hard implement, and forms a
suitable background for the native art.

Starting at the northern end, the first markings noted are a number of short
straight line cuts, varying from 3 to 7 inches in length, mostly perpendicular, but
sometimes being crossed by oblique cuts forming double crosses. Characteristic
bird tracks (singly and in short connected rows) and fern frond-like designs were
also observed. This area is 5 feet in length and is situated directly on the cliff
face about 3 feet high.

A hundred yards further south is the first shelter showing definite signs of
occupation. This is 30 feet in length, with an overhang in the widest place of
12 feet. The present height at the entrance is 10 feet and curves down to meet
the floor. It is 25 feet above the level of the billabong, and the highest flood on

(1) Sheard, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927, p. 18.

138

record did not wash the floor, although other shelters near it were inundated. The
walls and roof are smoke-blackened, and a grey smoke stain ascends the cliffs
lodging thickly on every ledge. The floor is composed of a bed of ashes and
detritus 3 feet in depth.

The ashes on being examined show a tendency to banding which would suggest
intermittent periods of occupation. Fragments of hammerstones, rough quartz
chippings, and bones of the Murray cod (Oligorus macquariensis) were discovered,
and bivalve shells (Unio angasi) were numerous. Two roughly flaked quartzite
stones were also found, and these reproduced exactly the markings and holes when
scratched or bored against the cliffs.

‘The main group of markings occupies an area of 11 feet by 3 feet 6 inches on
the curving wall of the shelter, about 7 feet above the floor, A complicated intaglio
measures 23 inches by 29 inches. A portion of this has weathered at the lower
end. A semicircular design situated slightly above this measures 12 inches long by
7} inches wide. Three inverted V-shaped markings bisected by a longer line
measure 7 by 6 by 12 inches, 5 by 5 by 9 inches, 64 by 5 by 8 inches, respectively.
These are all new designs, nothing similar having been previously observed. A
characteristic row of round holes borders this series on the lower side. - This con-
tains thirty-eight holes, some of which are connected, They vary from three-
cighths to 1 inch in diameter and from a half to 1 inch in depth. Other short
series of holes, including double rows, were also observed.

For the following six chains or so along the cliff only occasional intermittent
markings and scratches of little consequence were noticed.

The second shelter is then reached. The roof in this is only about 3 feet in
the highest place, and the entrance extending for about 20 feet was merely 12 to
15 inches in height. It was interesting to observe on the northern wall the cuttings
figured by Hale and Tindale. (2)

Several rows of holes, straight-line cuts, and a few tracks were also noticed.
As is usual, in all these shelters ashes and débris formed the floor, and the rocks
were much smoke stained.

Three chains further south another shelter was located. This was from 3 to
5 fcet in height, about 12 feet deep, and approximately 25 feet long, the roof being
supported in the centre by a column of rock which had withstood the action of
the weather.

livery available space on this column was decorated chiefly with round holes
arranged in a variety of patterns and designs, but scratches, straight-line markings,
irregular crosses, and bird tracks were present. Similar markings and patterns
existed in the sheiter,

A few chains further south the main channel of the river curves in and washes
the base of the cliffs. The intervening space contains, at intervals, numerous
markings, but nothing different from what has already been described,

NOTES ON STIELTERS aT Froatm’s LANDING.

This is situated on Section 302, Hundred of Ridley, on the western bank of
the river about five miles below Wongulla. A mud flat and billabong, similar to
but more extensive than those at Wongulla, extend along the western side of the
river, This is bounded by the cliffs, which have the usual bank at thcir base.

the cliffs here are about 100 feet high, and weathering (possibly when the
river was at a higher level) has eroded several shelters, One is 90 fect in length

(2) Hale, H. M., and Tindale, N. B., Records of South Australian Museum, iii, 1925,
pl. 4, fig. 4.

1

ioe)

9

and 5 feet 6 inches in height at the entrance, extending under the cliffs for about
12 feet. This is the largest shelter that has yet been observed by the author in
any locality on the Murray, and singularly, except for a few round holes on the
northern end and a few doubtful markings, contains no carvings.

This shelter bears every indication of a very long occupancy. A continuous
bed of ashes and débris extends the whole length, and appears to be much deeper
than usual. The bank is also deeply covered with ashes. Allowing for the removal
of ashes by the occupants, also the natural action of the wind (and this is con-
siderable, as the floors are invariably very dry and dusty), a very long period must
have transpired since this shelter was first tenanted, Further, a thick pall of
smoke has blackened the rock surface, and even the holes referred to were prac-
tically filled with soot. It is possible that were some of this matter removed,
scratches may be visible. The shelter faces due east and the bank being well over-
grown, efficient protection would be obtained in all weathers.

(—_————————— Wi
SSS aaa
_————— ay x
~ bare
li : SSeS anh
inofsectionn SSS. <P
=SS_a===
SSS ‘ ie
SS x N
ee TT | x .
Ph rae. a er ee ae ~~. ‘ “S
Fs Soe nes ~.
é. Z
~ +
.
i ° b* y
~
¢
.
t ‘
~~, x
rf x
a ae

As our time was limited only part of this locality was examined, The author
remembers observing (when passing this district by boat several years ago) a few
fern-like markings on the cliffs about a mile to the south of this shelter.

On a subsequent trip to Fromm’s Landing, Mr. Tindale obtained a section
from the floor deposits of the large shelter described above. As nothing of this
type has been previously published, this is included as being typical of many
Murray shelters (see text fig.).

The deposits at the entrance total 6 fect 4 inches, resting on the Miocene rock.
The first 17 inches (marked @ in figure) consist of sterile sand weathered from
the cliff. Above this was 30 inches (6) of intermittent layers of burnt sand and
charcoal. This abruptly changed to 25 inches (c) of continuous ashes, etc., show-
ing regular banding, the whole being covered with 4 inches (d) of recent disturbed
ashes and débris.

140

At 26 inches from the base rock a fragment of burnt slate, and at 24 inches a
piece of coarse granite were obtained, both of which are foreign to this locality.

Three chains up-stream a shelter was located, at the entrance of which scratch-
ings were observed. These consisted of bird tracks singly and connected, straight-
line cuts, and round holes, but were not numerous.

THE ScrusBy FLAT SERIES.

This locality is in Section H, Hundred of Forster, and is situated on the
eastern bank of the river slightly north of Fromm’s Landing. A mud flat borders
the river, at the northern end of which the landing is situated. A few chains
further north the main channel encroaches on the cliffs.

The intervening space is filled with the ragged end of the cliff much broken
and distorted. This creates several small shelters, one of which was crowded with
carvings. ‘his shelter was approached by climbing over a rough boulder-like
formation and measured 12 feet in length, the overhang being about 6 feet and
the roof 8 feet high.

A leaf-shaped design differed from those previously observed; it is 10 inches
wide and 16 inches in length, and is bisected and crossed by oblique lines radiating
from a round hole in the centre. This hole is 4 inches deep and 14 inches in
diameter.

An unusual A-shaped design is apparent. This type has not been previously
observed, and may be due in part to vandalism. Both these designs appear to
have been partly re-cut with steel tools. A fern-like design and many other cut-
tings were observed. This shelter is situated beyond flood level; and the débris
of the floor yielded kernels of the native peach (Santalwm acuminatimm), bones
of the Murray cod, animal bones, and many Unio shells. A hammerstone was also
found at another point. Smoke stains occur throughout this and other shelters
and on many faces of the rocks. Some of the fallen rocks bear markings, and in
many places about the cliffs intermittent cuttings were scen. Just before the river
is reached, low down on the cliffs, several marks of the straight-line type were
observed, these being much weathered, probably by water, and all show smooth
rounded edges.

CONCLUSION.

Three new.localities, each containing shelters decorated with a comparatively
recently recorded type of aboriginal markings, have been described, and several
new designs noted. A typical section of the débris from the floor of one shelter is
included.

I desire to acknowledge the assistance of my three colleagues; only their
insistence has made me the sole recorder of these discoveries.

141

OBSERVATIONS ON A NEW-BORN AUSTRALIAN ABORIGINAL INFANT.
By J. B. CLerann, M.D., and Cecrt J. Hacxert.
[Read July 14, 1927.]
Pirates VIL. anp VIII.

Through an arrangement kindly made by Mr. F. Garnett, Chief Protector
of Aborigines, a pure-blooded aboriginal woman who was expecting her confine-
ment was transferred from Point McLeay to Adelaide. On arrival she was
taken direct to the Queen’s Home, and after two or three days’ retention there
to enable measurements to be taken and observations made, she was sent down
to await the onset of labour at a Home in North Adelaide. At about 10 o’clock
on Sunday night, May 22, labour commenced and she was re-admitted to the
Queen’s Hlome. The abdomen was of enormous size, the patient herself being
a rather stout woman. At 5 a.m. the next morning labour was in progress, and
one of us was notified by telephone. In spite of vigorous pains progress was
slow. The presentation was found to be a right occipito-posterior, which was
rectified. Forceps had finally to be applied by Dr. Bernard Dawson, under whose
care the patient was. Difficulty was found with the head, and still greater diff-
culty was experienced in delivering the shoulders, and even the breech stuck to
some extent. These difficulties were almost entirely due to the large size
of the baby, whose weight at birth was 124 Ibs., and the length 25 inches. The
child was still-born, due apparently to the delay and difficulties attendant on the
birth. A full obstetrical account will be published elsewhere, the present paper
dealing merely with the characteristics of the infant, which was of full-blood.
The parents belonged to the tribes inhabiting the Lower Murray. Observations
were commenced immediately after delivery, but more detailed ones, together
with the matching of colours, were made about four hours later. A water-
colour sketch could only be made on the succeeding day, the infant being mean-
while kept in the freezer. The specimen has been preserved by injections and,
together with the placenta and cord, is in the custody of the Pathology Department
of the University.

The infant was an exceptionally large male child in a good state of nutrition.
The weight, 124 Ibs. (5°556 kilos.), and the height, 25 inches (63-5 cm.), indicate
the unusual size. This is of exceptional interest, owing to the difficulty
experienced in delivery. With expert attention in an up-to-date hospital, the
child died. In the country, at a distance from early medical attention, a result
fatal to the mother might have occurred. In a savage state the death of the
mother would have been almost inevitable. In the absence of any skilled obstetrical
attention whatsoever over a period of many thousands of years, one would have
expected that natural selection in our aborigines would have eliminated almost
entirely the occurrence of infants of such a size as to render their delivery difficult
or impossible. It seems hardly likely that the civilised conditions in which this
woman was living could account for the unusual size of the baby. Possibly she
may have been a month over her time, and she was certainly a fortnight later
than had been expected, but even this would not account for the whole of the
increase in the size. Evidently from time to time amongst the Australian
aboriginals unduly large newly-born children do occur still, in spite of the efforts
of natural selection to eliminate them.

General Observations —The iace was plump with well-marked cheeks, and a
deep groove ran transversely acrass the somewhat squat nose at the level of the

142

nasion. The eyelids and lips were closed. On opening the eyelids the iris was
seen to be of an earthy-brown colour, partly obscured by a bluish haziness which
appeared to be in the tissues in front. On parting the slightly pigmented lips
the gums were seen to be pale and prominent as if teeth were immediately sub-
adjacent. The chin formed a rounded prominence with a sulcus surrounding
its upper aspect. The lobule of the ear was well-marked, rounded, and free.
The vault of the skull, compared with that of a full-term white infant, felt unduly
resistant to compression, no well-marked bridge of soft tissue being palpable along
the region of the sagittal suture. The anterior fontanelle measured, roughly,
2x15 cm. Over the left occipito-parietal region was a moderate caput
succedancum. Apart from the ustial skin creases about joints, two other sites
were readily noticed. There was one sulcus on each forearm just below the
middle of the flexor surface, which was deep on the radial side but faded out on
the ulnar margin. The other sulcus was at the junction of the middle and lower
thirds of the thigh on the inner aspect. ‘The hands were of the simian type, that
is, the second longest digit was the ring finger. The second digit of the [oot was
the longest. The nails projected beyond the nail-bed by about 1 mm. The skin
creases on the palms and soles are well shown in the accompanying photographs.
There was a well-marked inter-spinous crease on the abdomen.

Pigmentation—The general colouration of the skin was at once noticed at
birth as presenting a light cyanotic tinge (near Avellaneous, Vinaceous Buff,
Ridgway’s Colour Index, pl. xl.). Pressure had no effect on it. This was
emphasised by certain parts being markedly pigmented, At the junction of the
skin with the amniotic covering of the cord was a pigmented ring about 3 mm. in
width, the colouring being most marked at the junction line. Around each nipple
was an area of sooty pigmentation (Fuscous Black, pl. xIvi.) 7 mm. in diameter.
The skin of the scrotum, penis, and prepuce showed a dark pigmentation with a
vinous tinge (more Vinaceous than Fuscous Black, pl. xlvi.). The prepuce was
fairly long and the glans was exposed with difficulty. The mucous lining of the
prepuce aud glans showed a reddish colouration. There was slight pigmentation
in both axillae indefinite in outline. The hands and feet, and especially the palms
and soles, were very pallid (Tilleul Buff, pl, xl.). The limbs appeared more
dusky than the trunk, perhaps duc to the presence of more hair on the former.
It was thought that the pigmentation had become somewhat darker or duskier
some hours after birth, but no definite statement can be made that this was so.
The sacral region was not pigmented.

Hair.—On the scalp the hair was black and varied in length up to 5cm. Many
of the tresses showed more than a complete circle or curl towards their distal end,
the circle having a lumen that would close on a slate-pencil. The remainder showed
an open deep wavy curve. Finer and shorter hairs occurred on the forehead, their
direction being downwards in the midlinc, and laterally horizontally outwards
parallel with the eyebrows. ‘These hairs contributed to the duskiness of the fore-
head. Fine hairs covered the well-developed ears. There were a few fine hairs
in the parotid region in front of the ears and on the sides of the face.

On the trunk there was more hair on the dorsal aspect where its general
direction was from the flanks inwards towards the midline, curving down slightly
when approaching the spine. In the sacral region this direction was less definite.
On the anterior aspect of the thorax the hair ran downwards and inwards in a
curved direction tending to surround the nipple. There was but scanty hair on
the abdomen. With the arm by the side, the hair appeared to radiate forwards
from the posterior axillary fold over the shoulder and deltoid region and down the
arms. ‘There was more hair on the external aspect of the arm and forearm than
on the inner side, With the thigh at right-angles to the trunk, the direction of the
hairs on it seemed to radiate from the anterior superior iliac spine to the natal

Trans. aud Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr,, 1927, Vol, LI. Plate VII.

1 Infant.

origina

New-born Australian Abé

Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers, Adelaide

VIII.

Plate

“y

LI

I.

oO

r

V

927.

1

+3.

oc. S. Austr

Roy

Trans. and Proc

queyuy je

ULSLIOqy UPRITRASNYy Us0q-A\

oN

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

143

cleft and down the thigh antcriorly. Below the knee the direction was downwards.
The inner aspect of the thigh and leg was relatively free from hair.

The following measurements were taken :—

Vertex to heel (with tape) 63°5 cm. Nose--Breadth 2'7 cm.
Occipito-mental .. .. 13°55. ,, Height 19°C,
Occipito-frontal 12:0 _,, Ear—Height D2 Le
Suboccipito-bregmatic .. 95 ,, Breadth 29 ~(«,,
Biparietal re. 95 (C, Minimum inter-canthal 23 =,
Bitemporal 85 ,, Maximum inter-canthal 66,
Fronto-temporal 85, Vertex to rump 41:0 ,,
Cervico-bregmatic 115), Hand-—-Length 69 C—*g,
Menton-crinion 92 =, Breadth 4-0 ,,
Menton-nasion BeBe. 55 Foot—-Length 92 ~«C«,
Mouth—Breadth 2°9 ~~, Breadth 3:4 ,,
Height ll,

The Cord and Membranes—The cord measured 73 cm. in diameter and
became smaller in section as the placenta was approached from the foetus, being
2:5 cm, in diameter near the foetus, and near the placenta before it divided 1+5 cm.
Within about 7 em. of the placenta a branch came off at right angles to the cord,
and this and the main stem each divided into three rather tortuous series of vessels
which eventually ramified over the placenta from the lateral attachment, that is,
the placenta was of the battledore type. No pigmentation of the cord or membrane
was observed.

The Placenta.—This measured 20 cm. x 2°5 cm., and was roughly circular. Its
chorionic aspect showed gross lobulation and a couple of small infracted arcas the
size of marbles.

The Liquor Amnii—No actual measurement of this could be taken, although
an attempt was made. As far as could be judged only a slight excess, 1f any, was
present. Meconium was mixed with it even in the waters first passed, and the
result was a greenish-brown discolouration. Miss Long found the presence of
abundant bile pigment in the liquor.

Blood was collected from the mother and from the foetal end of the cut
umbilical cord. Unfortunately citrate solution was not at the moment available
so as to be able to use the red cells for testing purposes. The serum that separated
showed that the mother belonged to Group IV. of Moss’ Classification, as this
serum caused clumping of red cells belonging to Groups II. and IIT. The separated
serum of the infant, on the other hand, did not agglutinate the red cells of either
of these Groups even under the microscope. Jt cannot be inferred from this,
however, that the infant belonged to Group I. of Moss’ Classification—a Group
thal we have not yet met with amongst the Southern Australian aboriginals. It
would appear that it is some time after birth before the blood-grouping of the
infant can be decided.

We would like to express our indebtedness to Mr. Garnett, Chief Protector
of Aborigines; to Dr. Bernard Dawson, the Honorary Medical Officer in charge
of the case; to Dr. Wallace, R.M.O.; and to the Matron of the Queen’s Home,
for the facilities they have granted us and for their interest in this aboriginal birth.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES VIL and VIII.

Photographs in various positions of the Aboriginal Infant showing the General

Appearance, various Skin and Subcutaneous Creases, and the contrast between the

general Pallid Colour and such deeply Pigmented Areas as the Nipples, Scrotum
and Ring round the Umbilical Cord.

144

THE CLAWLESS AND APPARENTLY CLAWLESS CURCULIONIDAE
OF AUSTRALIA.

By Artuur M. Lea, F.ES.
(Contribution from the South Australian Museum.)

[Read August 11, 1927.]

A singular feature that occurs in several genera of several subfamilies of
Australian Curculionidae, is the absence, or apparent absence, of the claw joint,
so that each tarsus consists of but three joints, with the third wider than the
others, its apex completely rounded, and the fourth joint truly absent; or the tip
of the third may be slightly notched at the apex, and with or without a rudiment
of the fourth joint in it.

The apparent or real absence of the claw joint is often accompanied by the
loss of a joint in the funicle, this being six-jointed instead of seven, or even
(Anarciarthrum) five-jointed. Other genera of weevils, however, have less than
seven joints in the funicle but with normal tarsi; Cionus five-jointed, many Cos-
sonides with five or six joints, or even (Dryopthorus) four.

Of the genera, Misophrice, Anarciarthrum, and Micraonychus occur on
plants of the genus Casuarina (shedaks and bulloaks), Syarbis, Aolles, Zeopus,
Atelicus, and Thechia on species of Eucalyptus (gum trees), and Aonychus on
species of Hakea (needle-bushes) and Atriplex (salt-bushes). Geochus occurs
under fallen leaves.

The previously described species are as follows :—

GONIPTERIDES.
SYARBIS, Pasc. (Acroteriasis, Roel.).

ALBIVITTIS, Lea PLUMBEUS, Lea
ALCYONE, Lea NUBILUS, Roel.
DEYROLLEI, Roel. brevicornis, Lea
EMARGINATUS, Roel. PACHYPUS, Pasc.
EUCALYPTI, Lea PORCATUS, Lea
FASCICULATISSIMUS, Lea POSTITUMERALIS, Lea
GONIPTEROIDES, Pasce. PULCHELLUS, Lea
GOUDIEI, Lea PULCHRIPENNIS, Lea
HAAGI, Roel. PUNCTIPENNIS, Roel.

plumbeus, Lea scrurus, Pasce.

sciurus, Pasc., var. SEMILINEATUS, Pasc.
NERVosuS, Pasc. SIMULANS, Lea
NIGER, Roel. SUBNiTIDUS, Roel.

DIABATHRARIIDES.
ATELIcUS, Waterh.

ABRUPTUS, Pasc. GUTTATUS, Pasc.
ATROPItuS, Pasce. INAEQUALIS, Waterh.
CRASSIPES, Pasce. MINIATUS, Pasc.

FERRUGINEuS, Waterh. VARIABILIS, Lea

145

ERIRHINIDES.

MIsopurice, Pasc.
ALTERNATA, Lea MINIMA, Lea
AMPLICOLLIS, Lea, vars. A, B, C mMuNDA, Blackb.
AMPLIPENNIS, Lea NIGRICEPS, Lea
APIONOIDES, Lea NIGRIPES, Lea, vars. A, B, C
ARGENTATA, Blackb. NIGRIVENTRIS, Lea
ARIDA, Lea OBLONGA, Blackb.
BLACKBURNI, Lea ORTHORRHINA, Lea
BREVISETOSA, Lea PARALLELA, Lea
CARTERI, Lea QUADRATICOLLIS, Blackb.
CLATHRATA, Lea RUFIVENTRIS, Lea
CRISTATIFRONS, Lea sETOsSA, Lea
CYLINDRICA, Lea SETULOSA, Blackb.
DISPAR, Blackb. soror, Lea
DISSENTANEA, Lea SPILOTA, Blackb.
DUBIA, Lea SQUAMIBUNDA, Lea
EVANIDA, Lea SQUAMIVENTRIS, Lea, vars. A, B
FENESTRATA, Lea sguamMosa, Blackb.
cLoriosa, Lea, vars. A, B, C,D,E, F supmerazzica, Blackb.
GRIFFITHI, Lea TUBERCULATA, Lea
HisPipa, Pasc. V-ALBA, Lea
HOBLERI, Lea VARIABLLIS, Blackb.
INCONSTANS, Lea VICINA, Lea
INFLATA, Lea VIRIDISQUAMA, Lea
INSULARIS, Lea viTiata, Lea

ANARCIARTHRUM, Blackb.
VIRIDE, Blackb.
Tuecuia, Pasc.

ALTERNATA, Lea (? Cenchrena) LATIPENNIS, Lea
BIMACULATA, Lea LONGIROSTRIS, Lea
BREVIROSTRIS, Lea PYGMAEFA, Pasc.
CINERASCENS, Lea

HAPLONYCIDES.

AoLies, Pasc.

LONGrIRosTRIs, Lea PUNCTICOLLIS, Lea
MINiIMUS, Lea RUBIGINOSUS, Pasc.
MoEsTUS, Lea TIBIALIS, Lea
NuUCEUS, Pasc. TRIFASCIATUS, Lea
ORBICULATUS, Lea UNIFORMIS, Lea
ORNATIPENNIS, Blackb. vaRniEGATUS, Lea

ZEoPuS, Pasc.
STOREOIDES, Pasc.

CRYPTORHYNCHIDES.
Aonycuus, Schon.
ARGUS, Lea Luctuosus, Pasce.
HOPEI, Boh. PACH YPUS, Pasc.
var. bicruciatus, Lea STRIATUS, Lea

LINEATUS, Pasc.

146

Micraonycirus, Lea.

CASUARINAE, Lea NIGRIROSTRIS, Lea
CINERASCEUS, Lea RUFIMANUS, Lea
DECIPIENS, Lea soRDIDUS, Lea

MACULATUS, Lea
ATELICUS,

In a note on Strongylorrhinus Waterhouse “) comments as follows on two
species of Atelicus:—“In the total absence of claw joint to the tarsi. Here the
large dilated third joint to each tarsus is entire, showing neither the apical notch,
nor the groove on the upper surface.” In his diagnosis of Atelicus he notes
“tarsis triarticulatis . . . articulo terlio fere rotundato.” In the description
of A. inaequalis and A. ferrugimeus the third joint was not mentioned. The
former species being the first described is presumably the type of the genus, and
was so accepted by Lacordaire, who wrote of its tarsi) “3° article des tarses
orbiculaire, le 4° nul”; in the figure “) the tarsi are also shown as three-jointed.
Lacordaire correctly described the funicle as being composed of six joints with
the following one contiguous to the club, in fig. 2b, however, it is shown as
seven-jointed.

There are before me several specimens from Tasmania that agree so well
with the characters noted by Waterhouse, except in the tarsi, that I think they
must belong to A. inaequalis, A similar specimen from Victoria bears Black-
burn’s name label “inaequalis, Waterh.,” and there are others before me from
New South Wales. The tarsi at first glance appear to have the third joint entire
and to be without a claw joint, but on close examination the third joint on each
tarsus is seen to have a thin wedge-shaped notch extending almost half-way to the
base, the notch completely occupied by a claw joint, which is covered with similar
clothing to that of the adjacent surface; claws, if present, are obscured by the
apical fringe.

Specimens identified by Blackburn and myself as 4. ferrugineus have some-
what similar tarsi, but the clothing of their upper surface being more closely
compacted the claw joint is even less distinct, and on some specimens is scarcely
indicated on close examination. In fact, the tarsi on all species of the genus
appear to be three-jointed, but on close examination a claw joint or remnant of
same becomes visible. It is probable, however, that it could not be seen when
the tarsi are mealy or greasy.

ATELICUS INAEQUALIS, Waterh., var.
x 2

A specimen from Tasmania appears to represent a variety of this species;
its elytra, from the base almost to the subapical tubercles, are clothed with
uniformly whitish scales, having in some lights a golden gloss; just before the
subapical tubercles and on the apical declivity there are patches of chocolate-
brown scales. On each elytron the third interstice from near the base to near the
subapical tubercles, and the fifth from near the base till it joins the subapical
tubercle, are almost evenly elevated instead of with interrupted elevations; the
basal projections are slightly more produced than on the typical form, but not
quite as strongly elevated.

ATFELICUS GUTTATUS, Pasce.

Described from Tasmania and as having “Elytris maculis apicalibus.” Ten

specimens before me from Tasmania (Launceston and West Tamar), New South

() Waterhouse, Trans. Ent. Soc. Lond., 1862, p. 228.
(2) Lacordaire, Gen. des Coleop., vi., p. 408.
(3) Atlas, pl. 70, f. 2, a, B, c.

147

Wales (Galston), and South Australia (Lucindale) may belong to the species,
they vary considerably in size (3-6 mm., without the rostrum) ; each of them has
a small narrow spot of white scales on the fifth interstice on each elytron, about
the summit of the apical slope; each also has a medio-basal spot on the pronotum,
connected with a bisinuate basal strip of similar scales. Of these specimens one
has the head and rostrum black, another has the head and part of the rostrum
black, and a third has the head only black; all the others have the head and
rostrum coloured as the prothorax and elytra. Two other specimens from Tas-
mania (Georgetown and Launceston), in addition to the subapical spots, have
the sttture white at the apex; the Launceston specimen has the head and rostrum
black.
Atelicus fusiformis, n. sp.

Reddish, antennae somewhat paler than other parts. Closely covered with
scales similar to the derm on upper surface, becoming white on under parts.

Rostrum almost parallel-sided, moderately curved, slightly longer than pro-
thorax; with crowded, partially concealed punctures. Prothorax moderately
transverse, sides gently rounded and subcontinuous with those of prothorax
and elytra; with large punctures. Elytra narrow, parallel-sided to near apex,
separately strongly rounded at base, apical slope long and gradual; with regular
rows of large punctures. Length (excluding rostrum), 4 mm.

Western Australia: Perth (C. French, sen.). Unique.

A narrow fusiform species with the apical slope more gradual than usual.
A. miniatus, with similar clothing, is decidedly wider, with outlines much as those
of the species here identified as probably 4. guttatus. The scales on the upper
surface so closely resemble the derm that at first sight the latter appears to be
glabrous, on close examination they cause it to appear finely granulated or even
shagreened.

Atelicus latericollis, n. sp.

Reddish, coxae and clubs blackish. Closely covered with scales similar to
the derm on upper surface, but with small white spots; under parts mostly with
whitish scales.

Rostrum distinctly curved, slightly longer than prothorax; with coarse,
partially concealed punctures. Prothorax strongly transverse, base strongly
bisinuate and much wider than apex, sides gently incurved; with coarse and
rather dense punctures. Elytra rather thin, almost parallel-sided to near apex;
with regular rows of large, deep punctures; apical slope scarcely the length of
prothorax. Length, 5 mm.

Tasmania: Cradle Mountain (A. M. Lea). Unique.

There is a small white spot on the fifth interstice on each elytron at the
summit of the apical slope, as on the species supposed to be A. guttatus, but in
addition there are many small white specks scattered about, especially on the
sides; from that species, however, as from all others of the genus, it is distinct
by the sides of the prothorax being gently incurved, instead of rounded.

MISOPHRICE,

The genus Misophrice is one of the most abundantly represented in Aus-
tralia, and its minute, slow-moving species may confidently be looked for wherever
trees or shrubs of the genus Casuarina oceur. By its clawless tarsi and six-
jointed funicle it may be readily distinguished from all other described Erirhinides,
Anarciarthrum with the funicle five-jointed is very close to it, and quite possibly
some of the species at present standing as Misophrice may be found to belong to

(4) I did not, however, find it in Fiji on C. equisctifoka, the only species I was able to
examine there.

148

it. Thechia with the funicle seven-jointed has a somewhat different appearance,
and the species occur on Eucalypti. The species of Micraonychus also have claw-
less tarsi, are to be taken on Casuarinae, and at first glance appear to belong to
Misophrice, but as they have a well-defined pectoral canal, the genus was referred
to the Cryptorhynchides. Two tables of the genus were given by Blackburn ‘
and myself ‘) each dealing with comparatively few species; with over fifty now
known, and many of them variable, I am unable to prepare a satisfactory table,
but the following division of the species into groups should simplify the task of
identifying them :—
Group 1. Elytra tuberculate.
tuberculata, Lea.

Group 2. Elytra with numerous erect bristles.
alternata, Lea; argentata, Blackb.; hispida, Pasc.; hobleri, Lea;
setosa, Lea.

Group 3. Derm of elytra entirely concealed by clothing.
cristatifrons, Lea; orthorrhina, Lea; squamibunda, Lea; squasi-
ventris, Lea,

Group 4. Derm of elytra entirely black.
arida, Lea; gloriosa, Lea; griffithi, Lea; insularis, Lea; parallela,
Blackb.; sorer, Lea; viridisquama, Lea.

Group 5. Derm of elytra with isolated dark spots or vittae.
amplicollis, Lea; apionoides, Lea; blackburni, Lea; carteri, Lea;
inflata, Lea; rufiventris, Lea; spilota, Blackb.; vicina, Lea;
viliata, Lea.

Group 6. Derm of elytra at most with base and suture dark.
amplipennis, Lea; brevisetosa, Lea; clathrata, Lea; cylindrica, Lea;
dispar, Blackb.; dissentanea, Lea; dubia, Lea; evanida, Lea;
fenestrata, Lea; inconstans, Lea; minima, Lea; munda, Blaclch.;
nigriceps, Lea; nigripes, Lea; nigriventris, Lea; oblonga,
Blackb.; setulosa, Blackb.; submetallica, Blackb.; V-alba, Vea.

Notes on above Groups.

amplipennis, Lea. An occasional specimen has the derm of the elytra almost
black.

gloriosa, Lea. Some specimens might be regarded as belonging to Group 2.

quadraticollis, Blackb. Unknown to me, by the description it evidently
belongs to Group 6.

squamiventris, Lea. On some specimens there are a few erect setae on the
apical half of the elytra.

squamosa, Blackb. Described as piceo-nigra, so evidently belongs to Group 4.

variabilis, Blackb. Very variable in size and colour, specimens before me
could be referred to Groups 4, 5, and 6.

MiIsoprtrRicE oBLONGA, Blackb., var.

Two specimens from Queensland appear to belong to this species but are
unusually small. One, from Bribie Island, is but 1 mm. in length, its prothorax
is somewhat infuscated and its scales are without metallic gloss. The other, from
Mount ‘Tambourine, is very little longer, its pronotum is normally pale, and most
of its scales are bluish.

(5) Blackburn, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1890, p. 354.
(6) Lea, Trans. Roy. Soe. S, Austr., 1899, p. 159.

149

MIsoPHRICE soror, Lea, var.

Three specimens from Bribie Island are distinctly smaller (1 mm.) than
usual.
MisopHrice cLortosa, Lea, var. G.

Four specimens from the Upper Williams River (New South Wales) appear
to represent another variety of this species; on three of them the sutural clothing
is denser than on the rest of the elytra, but is not quite continuous to the base,
and on the rest of the elytra it is bluish. On the fourth specimen it is dense on
the suture to the extreme base, but on the rest of the elytra is more or less golden;
on all four of them the prothorax is non-vittate, but it has numerous black specks
owing to the exposure of the derm.

Misophrice ursa, n. sp.
$. Brownish-red, tarsi darker. Densely squamose and setose.

Rostrum slightly shorter than prothorax, moderately curved, with fine ridges
alternated with rows of punctures almost to apex, but concealed on basal half.
Prothorax slightly longer than the apical width and slightly shorter than the
basal, sides moderately rounded; with dense and rather coarse, concealed punc-
tures. Elytra oblong-cordate, not much wider than prothorax; with rows of
large, subquadrate punctures, appearing much smaller through clothing. Legs
stout. Length, 2°5-3-0 mm.

South Australia: Ooldea and Tarcoola (A. M. Lea). Western Australia:
Kalgoorlie (W. du Boulay).

A fairly large, densely squamose species, with stout, erect setae, and so
belonging to Group 2, The general outlines are much as on M. squamibunda,
but the clothing is different; on an occasional specimen of that species, however,
there are a few setae on the apical slope of the elytra. The clothing is so dense
that (except on the apical half of the rostrum) it is only where abrasion has taken
place that the derm becomes visible. On the upper surface the scales are mostly
of a pale rusty-red, with more or less conspicuous paler and darker spots; on
the under parts they are paler (almost white on some specimens). On the elytra
the suture is pale throughout, and there are whitish spots or short vittae forming
a postmedian series on the even interstices, immediately before and behind those
on the second and fourth there are darker spots; the clothing on the basal third
of the fifth interstice is whitish, and it is mostly whitish on the apical slope. On
most parts the scales are evenly placed, but on the elytra they are so placed that
two or more converge to form angles or minute arrow-heads; although dense
the scales are so large that the arrangement is quite evident. On several speci-
mens two ill-defined vittae are traceable on the pronotum. The setae are stiff,
erect, and numerous, but irregularly distributed, they are absent from the white
spots or vittae on the elytra, are fairly numerous at the apex oi prothorax, between
the eyes, and on the legs; on the elytra, viewed from behind, they appear lo
form six small fascicles acruss the middle on the even interstices, but from the
sides they are seen to be scattered. Three specimens have the tip of an oedeagus
protruding, but their abdomen is without a depression. ‘The only specimen from
Tarcoola is apparently a female, it differs from the others in having less of the
rostrum clothed, and the apical segment of abdomen with a shallow depression.

Misophrice vittata, n. sp.

Densely clothed with rusty-brown scales with conspicuous whitish vittae,
under surface with silvery-white scales; elytra with very short, depressed setae,
less numerous on pronotum.

150

Rostrum moderately curved, about the length of prothorax; apical half
glabrous and with minute punctures. Prothorax almost as long as its greatest
width, sides moderately rounded. Elytra with basal half parallel-sided; with
rows of large punctures, appearing much smaller through clothing. Apical seg-
ment of abdomen with a semi-circular apical depression. Length, 3 mm.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt, No. 723). Unique.

A conspicuously-marked species allied to M. squamabunda. It belongs to
Group 3, as the setae on the upper surface are so short and slope at such a slight
degree from the horizontal that they are inconspicuous, even from the sides.
The derm is almost everywhere concealed, but where a slight amount of abrasion
has taken place, it is seen to be of a dingy red, as is the apical half of the rostrum.
The pale scales on the upper surface form a conspicuous median vitta on the
pronotum, and an interrupted one on each side; on the elytra they clothe the
median third of the suture, the basal third of the second and third interstices,
the median fifth of the fifth, the median three-fifths of the seventh, the post-
median portion of the eighth, and most of the ninth and tenth; the postmedian
portion of the third is also paler than the adjacent parts; the scales surrounding
the eyes are also conspicuously pale. There are two feeble crests between the
eyes. The type is probably a female,

Misophrice albolineata, n. sp.

Densely clothed with variegated scales, becoming uniformly pale, but scarcely
white, on under parts. With numerous short, subdepressed, inconspicuous setae.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, moderately curved; apical half
shining and punctate, basal half with rows of concealed punctures. Prothorax
almost as long as the greatest width, sides strongly rounded, punctures normally
concealed. Elytra oblong-cordate, distinctly wider than prothorax; seriate
punctures probably large, but appearing small through clothing. Length,
2°5-2-75 mm.

Queensland: Mount Tambourine, in January (A. M. Lea).

A beautiful species of Group 3, with sharply contrasted markings on the
elytra; it is allied to M. orthorrhina, but the rostrum is decidedly longer and
moderately curved; on M. squamiveniris the rostrum is distinctly longer and
thinner. On the upper surface most of the scales are of a pale-fawn colour;
on the pronotum there is a conspicuous dark median vitta; on cach elytron there
are silvery-white vittae occupying the median half of the third, fifth, and seventh
interstices (on the type interrupted on the fifth and seventh), the adjacent scales
being mostly black, but with small whitish spots. The elytral setae are distinct
only from the sides. The legs, rostrum, antennae, and the normally concealed
base of head are more or less reddish, but elsewhere the derm is completely
concealed. The two specimens obtained are probably females, as the only
depression on the abdomen is a slight apical one.

Misophrice lata, n. sp.

Dark reddish-brown, rostrum and legs somewhat paler, antennae still paler.
Densely clothed with pale ochreous-grey scales, somewhat variegated on upper
surface, becoming uniformly pale on under parts. With numerous short, stub-
depressed, dark setae, distinct only from the sides.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, moderately curved; with fine ridges
alternated with rows of punctures almost to apex, but concealed on basal fourth.
Prothorax distinctly transverse, base about one-fourth wider than apex, sides
moderately rounded; punctures crowded but normally concealed. Elytra rather
wide, oblong-cordate; seriate punctures appearing small through clothing, but
probably of large size. Length, 3-25 mm.

151

Queensland: Dalby (Mrs. F. H. Hobler). Unique.

Belongs to Group 3, and is one of the largest of the species without erect
setae; the elytral markings are somewhat as on M. V-alba, but the elytra them-
selves are decidedly wider in proportion, and the rostrum and legs are shorter.
On the middle of each elytron, narrowed to the suture, there is a large sub-
triangular space, on which the scales are mostly whitish, but they are not very
sharply contrasted with the adjacent ones, and appear more as mottlings than as
distinct vittac. The middle of the pronotum has been partly abraded, but from
the scales left at the basc was apparently clothed with darker scales than on the
adjacent parts. As the only depression on the abdomen is a slight apical one
the type is probably a female.

Misophrice grisea, n. sp.

Black, rostrum and legs obscurely reddish, scape paler. Densely clothed with
pale-greyish scales mixed with a few darker ones, and becoming paler on under
parts.
Rostrum about one-fourth longer than the prothorax, rather thin and
moderately curved; with rows of punctures almost to apex, but concealed on
basal fifth. Prothorax distinctly transverse, sides moderately rounded, apex
about one-fourth narrower than base. Elytra oblong-cordate; with rows of
large, partially concealed punctures.

South Australia: Mount Lofty Range (N. B. Tindale). Unique.

A rather wide species of Group 4, larger and with different clothing from
all other members of that group. The clothing of the elytra consists of true
scales, without an admixture of setae, even as viewed from the sides; they are
mostly in double (in places treble) rows on the interstices, but are sparser on
the first, second, fourth, and sixth than on the others; on the sides of both the
upper and under surfaces they have a faint bluish or greenish gloss. On the
elytra most of the odd interstices are wider than the even ones. As the only
depression on the abdomen is a small one at the apex the type is probably a female.

Misophrice subvariabilis, n. sp.

é. Black; part of abdomen, of legs, and of antennae obscurely reddish.
Moderately clothed with thin whitish scales or depressed setae, becoming green
on under parts, but absent from rostrum (except close to base), and from parts
of the two basal segments of abdomen.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, thin, evenly curved and shining;
with a row of distinct punctures on each side of base, becoming feeble in front.
Prothorax small, moderately transverse, sides strongly rounded in front; with
crowded punctures only partially concealed. LElytra large, slightly dilated to
beyond the middle; with regular rows of large punctures. Two basal segments
of abdomen with a wide shallow median depression, with distinct punctures, and
traversed by many fine striae. Length, 2-2°75 mm,

9. Differs in having the rostrum distinctly longer than the prothorax,
thinner and with less distinct punctures; abdomen rather strongly convex, with
the depression on ihe two basal segments greatly reduced in size and with a small
apical one, more evenly (although not densely) clothed, and with the punctures
and striae less evident.

South Australia: Ooldea, Barton, Tarcoola (A. M. Lea).

Var. A. Elytra reddish except for the base suture and a spot on each side
which are blackish, or at least infuscated, legs more reddish than on typical form
and portion of rostrum more or less distinctly reddish.

Specimens of this variety are mostly but hot entirely females.

152

Var. B. As varicty A, except that the elytral spots are changed to vittae,
and are continuous almost to base and apex.

Specimens of this variety vary considerably in intensity of colour, and there
are many connecting ones between the typical dark form and variety A. About
half of them are males.

Var. C. As varicty A, except that the elytra are without isolated dark spots.

One male and two females are before me; but some specimens of variety A
have the spots so faint that they might almost be referred to this variety.

Of the 187 specimens of this species before me about half have the elytra
entirely dark, or so dark that the spots or vittae are scarcely indicated. Com-
paring them with long series of M. variabilis the following differences are
apparent: Average size smaller, average colour darker, prothorax always black,
rostrum slightly shorter and thinner (sex for sex}, spotted specimens more
numerous than vittate ones. The clothing of the upper surface appears to be
always white, but on the under parts is sometimes bluish or grecnish. Most of
the specimens with black elytra are males, most of those with partly red elytra
are females, but the sexes cannot be distinguished by the colour alone; although
each sex has a depression on the two basal segments of abdomen, that of the
male is considerably larger (but not deeper) and conspicuously glabrous. Typical
specimens may be distinguished from M. arida, parallela, and soror, by their
larger size and partly red legs, and from the others of Group 4 by the clothing
more like depressed setae than true scales. Those of varieties A and B from
M. carteri and rufiventris by the positions of the spots or vittae, and from the
others of Group 5 by the entirely black prothorax.

MisopHrice pispar, Blackb.

Numerous specimens beaten from a species of Casuarina growing beside a
river at Paipa (near Noumea) agree perfectly with specimens of this species
from Queensland, New South Wales, Victoria, and South Australia.

Misophrice obliquialba, n. sp.

é. Black; elytra (except base, sides, and suture), abdomen, legs (except
tarsi), and antennae (except club), reddish. Rather sparsely clothed with whitish
scales, but with a conspicuous white oblique vitta on each side of mesosternum,
and another on each side of apex of prosternum.

Rostrum evenly curved, about the length of prothorax; with rows of punc-
tures and glabrous except at extreme base. Prothorax slightly shorter than the
greatest width, sides strongly rounded in front; with numerous sharply defined
punctures. Elytra distinctly wider than prothorax, slightly dilated to beyond
the middle; with regular rows of large punctures. Length, 1°75 mm.

New Caledonia: Paipa, near Noumea (A. M. Lea).

A small species of Group 6. The oblique white lines are very conspicuous 5
somewhat similar lines are faintly indicated on the Australian M. nigripes, but
on that species the legs are entirely dark. ‘The species is about the size of
M. dispar, but more parts are black.

Two specimens that are probably females of the species differ in being
slightly larger, in having most of the scales green (variation in colour of scales
is a common feature in Australian species of the genus), the tarsi infuscated
instead of black, and the rostrum longer and more curved, Another specimen
probably also belongs to the species, but its prothorax is somewhat reddish, less
of the elytra dark, and rostrum no darker than the femora and tibiae. Each of
the three specimens has the oblique white lines of the typical form, but they are
less sharply contrasted, owing to the density and colour of the adjacent scales.

153

Misophrice sordida, n. sp.

Black; elytra, except base and suture, rostrum and abdomen, obscurely
reddish, legs and antennae, except club, somewhat paler. Sparsely clothed with
whitish scales.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax, evenly curved; with a distinct row
of punctures on each side, and glabrous except near basc. Prothorax moderately
transverse, sides strongly rounded in front ; with dense, sharply defined punctures.
Elytra oblong-cordate, parallel-sided to beyond the middle; with regular rows of
large punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly. Two basal segments of abdomen
with a shallow median depression. Length, 1-75-2 mm.

New Caledonia: Paipa (A. M. Lea).

A dingy species of Group 6, about the size of the preceding one, but elytra
wider at base and less dilated posteriorly, tarsi no darker than tibiac, and meso-
sternum without white lines. The type is probably a male, a second specimen
is probably a female, it has the rostrum slightly longer, more curved and black,
and the abdomen more convex.

Misophrice wardi, n. sp.

Pale castaneo-flavous; head, rostrum (the ends darker than the middle),
scutellum, metasternum, club and tarsi more or less deeply infuscated. Densely
clothed with whitish scales, in parts with a greenish or coppery gloss,

Rostrum thin, moderately curved, and about one-fourth longer than pro-
thorax. Prothorax slightly transverse, sides rounded and dilated from apex to
base, which is conspicuously trilobed; punctures normally concealed. Elytra
parallel-sided to beyond the middle, the width of base of prothorax, base deeply
trisinuate, with regular rows of fairly large punctures. Two basal segments of
abdomen with a shallow median depression. Length, 2 mm.

Central Australia, on “desert oak” Casuarina decaisneana (C. Barrett).
Unique.

A pale fusiform species with the base of the prothorax conspicuously trilobed
and consequently the base of the elytra as deeply trisinuate, characters at once
distinctive from all other species of the genus. The green scales are most notice-
able on the metasternum, but they probably vary in extent; the pronotum has a
somewhat speckled appearance; on the elytra the scales are usually in two rows
on each interstice. The type appears to be a male.

At Mr. Barrett’s request I have pleasure in dedicating this species to Dr. L.
Keith Ward, Government Geologist of South Australia, and who, with him,
accompanied the recent “Reso” expedition to Central Australia, and helped to
collect some of the insects.

Misophrice barretti, n. sp.

Blackish, some parts obscurely diluted with red, antennae (club excepted)
and tarsi paler. Densely clothed with bright-green scales, but a wide median
space on the under surface glabrous.

Rostrum thin, rather strongly curved, and much longer than prothorax, Pro-
thorax distinctly transverse, sides moderately rounded; punctures normally
concealed, Elytra slightly wider than prothorax at base, sides feebly dilated to
beyond the middle; with rows of large partially concealed punctures. Length,
1°50-1-°75 mm.

Central Australia, on “desert oak” Acacia decaisneana (C. Barrett).

A beautiful species in general appearance strikingly close to Anarciarthrum
wiride, but with the funicle six-jointed. MM. viridisquama has somewhat similar out-
lines, but the elytral scales are thinner and not placed in two even rows on each
interstice, as on this species. On M, insularis the elytra are parallcl-sided and the

154

scales are in single rows. Two specimens were obtained, apparently scxes, as
the abdomen of the smaller specimen is less convex than that of the larger one,
and its apical segment has a small depression, the elytra are less dilated posteriorly
and the rostrum is slightly shorter; it is also obscurely reddish near the tip.

"SHECHIA CINERASCENS, Lea.

Several specimens of this species are now before me from New South Wales
(Newport and Forest Reefs) and Victoria (Warburton, from moss). On the
specimen from Forest Reefs the markings are more conspicuous than on the
type. On its pronotum there is a narrow pale median line, followed on each side
by a broad slaty-brown one, a narrow pale one, then a narrower dark one
(invisible from above); on each elytron the suture, sides, and a median vitta
are pale, but the pale and dark parts are less sharply limited than on the pro-
notum. ‘The specimen from Warburton is smaller than the type, and the scales
on its upper surface are even less contrasted, ‘Ihe type is a male; the female
differs in having the rostrum longer and thinner, clothed only near base, and the
two basal segments of abdomen evenly convex, instead of with a shallow median
depression.

In the species the scrobes are turned underneath the rostrum and meet at its
base, as a result of which, when the antennae are set out, the base of the under
surface appears conspicuously notched from the sides; a character that may
eventually be considered as of generic importance.

Thechia mollis, n. sp.

é. Black. Densely clothed with muddy-brown and whitish scales, becom-
ing uniformly white on under parts.

Rostrum moderately thin, gently curved, the length of prothorax; punctures
concealed by clothing. Prothorax slightly wider than long, sides gently rounded,
but more strongly at apex; punctures crowded but normally concealed. Elytra
parallel-sided to beyond the middle and then oblique to apex, which is notched;
with rows of large punctures, appearing as feeble striac through clothing. Two
basal segments of abdomen large, the first slightly longer than second and as long
as three apical ones combined, Length, 2°75-3-0 mm.

Western Australia: Swan River (A. M. Lea).

Structurally close to T. cinerascens, but slightly narrower, the rostrum some-
what shorter and stouter, clothed to the apex, and not notched at the base of its
lower surface. On the type the clothing on the head and rostrum is almost
uniformly dingy-brown, on the pronotum there is a pale median line and the sides
are widely pale; on the elytra there are some pale irregular spots on the shoulders,
at the basal third, and on and about the suture at the apical third. On a second
specimen the clothing of the hcad and rostrum is much as on the type, but on each
elytron the white spots are so numerous that they form a mass from the shoulder
to the apical third, where it is deflected to the suture, with a few scattered singly;
on its under surface the scales have a faint bluish gloss. As on both specimens
the rostrum is clothed throughout, and there is a shallow depression common to the
metasternum and two basal segments of abdomen, they are evidently males.

Cratoscelocis, n. g.

Head small. Eyes rather small, elliptic-ovate, lateral, finely faceted. Rostrum
rather long and thin but somewhat flattened, almost straight ; scrobes deep and
oblique, beginning in middle of sides and terminating at lower edge of eyes.
Antennae rather short, scape as long as funicle, which is composed of six joints,
club briefly ovate. Prothorax transverse, without ocular lobes. Scutellum
small. Elytra parallel-sided to near apex, base trisinuate. Basal segment

155

of abdomen large, second and filth subequal, third and fourth small.
Legs short and stout, front coxae almost touching, middle ones moderately
separated, the hind ones widely so; femora edentate; tibiae unusually short and
stout, tarsi apparently three- jointed. Irregularly sqtiamose.

Apparently belonging to the Erirhinides, and near Thechie, but the funicle is
six-jointed; Misophrice also with it six-jointed has much thinner legs. The
tibiae are stout, and from some directions their widest part appears to be close to
the base, the front ones are feebly bisinuate on the lower surface, and each is
terminated by an obtuse hook, but their sculpture is obscured by the dense
clothing; the tarsi appear to be three-jointed, but the third joint is very feebly
notched, and under the microscope the remnant of a claw joint becomes visible,
it differs slightly in colour from the adjacent part, and does not extend to the
apical fringe, claws apparently are not present; from directly behind the front
coxac are secn to he slightly separated, but [rom most points of view they appear
to be in contact.

Cratoscelocis foveicollis, n. sp.

Reddish-castaneous. Irregularly clothed.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, punctures concealed on basal half
and very fine elsewhere. First joint of funicle stouter than the others, and about
as long as the second and third combined, second slightly longer than third, fourth
to sixth moderately transverse. Prothorax with extreme base almost twice as
wide as the median length, obliquely narrowed to apex, near apex with a con-
tinuous narrow impression, traversed by large deep punctures or small foveae
(partly obscured by clothing), elsewhere with minute punctures. Elytra not
much wider than base of prothorax; with regular rows of large deep punctures,
usually slightly wider than the interstices. Length, 1:5-1-75 mm.

New South Wales: Sydney (11. J. Carter), National Park (A. M. Lea).

The head and part of rostrum, all margins and a median line on pronotum,
suture, shoulders, and tips of elytra are clothed with greyish-white scales, the
rest of the upper surface being glabrous; on the under surface and legs the
clothing is denser, with a muddy or paste-like appearance.

A specimen from the Blue Mountains (Dr. E. W. Ferguson) is larger
(2°5 mm.), somewhat darker, and with a slightly wider rostrum, but apparently
belongs to the same species.

AOLLES,

The tarsi of most species of this genus at first appear to be three-jointed,
with the third joint large but slightly notched, on wetting them, however, the notch
becomes more distinct and usually a small claw joint, but its claw or claws are
usually not very distinct amongst the roarginal fringe. On examining the tarsi
from below the third joint appears to have a fine median suture, at the extremity
of which a claw appears as a somewhat finer seta than the adjoiming ones. On
several species the claw joints with a single claw are distinct. I think it probable
that several of the species referred by Chevrolat to his sixth division of
Haplonys, really belong to Aolles. On A. tibialis two claws to each tarsus may
be seen, and it is probable that on other species two claws are so close together
that they appear single. It is probable, therefore, that the only valid distinction
between Aolles and Haplonyx is in the antennae. The Australian genera of the
subfamily may be thus distinguished :-—

Funicle seven-jointed, claw joint distinct.

Each claw joint with a single claw .. wi .. Haplonyx

Each with two claws apparently conjoined at base o i Sigastus
Funicle six-jointed, claw joint inconspicuous or wanting.

Rostrum long, thin, and conspicuously curved .. zs 7 Zeopus

Rostrum wider and straight or almost so .- it Ye .. dolles

156

AOLLES ORNATIPENNIS, Blackb., formerly Haptonyx.

The claw joint of this species is thin and inconspicuous and the funicle is six-
jointed; it is therefore an Aolles. It is also, I think, the species named by
Chevrolat as Haplonyx nigrirostris (an earlier name). A specimen from Arno
Bay (South Australia) probably belongs to the species, but has the median fascia
interrupted at the suture, and the submedian tooth of the front tibiae more acute
and slightly nearer the base than on some cotypes.

AOLLES TIBIALTS, Lea, formerly HaPLtonyx.

On examining the tarsi of this species from below each claw joint is seen to
be thin and terminated by two small unequal claws; from above the joint and its
claws are indistinct, the claws appearing like some of the setae fringing the third
joint. The funicle is certainly six-jointed, so the species should stand in Alles,
unless a new genus should be considered necessary for it.

AOLLES PUNCTICOLLIS, Lea.

Additional specimens from Bowen, Cairns, and Thursday and Horn Islands
are smaller (3-3°25 mm.) than the type, and some of them have the dark humeral
patch extended narrowly to the scutellum; on the base of the third interstice on
each elytron, of all of them, there is a short vitta of white scales.

AOLLES MINIMUS, Lea, var.

A specimen from Mount Victoria (New South Wales) apparently belongs to
this species, but differs from the type and five other specimens in having the head,
rostrum, and parts of the legs blackish.

AOLLES UNIFORMIS, Lea.

The type of this species has pale and almost uniformly coloured scales
densely plating the derm; but there are now before me numerous specimens
from South Australia (Mount Lofty Ranges, Callington, Moonta, and Kangaroo
Island), that appear to belong to the species, but differ in having two transverse
series of irregular brownish spots or mottlings on the elytra, the sub-basal series
sometimes appearing as a rather wide fascia; on other parts of the elytra, and
on the pronotum, there are also more or less distinct mottlings. The seriate
punctures on the elytra are in very weak striae (as on A. longirostris), but the
rostrum is decidedly shorter in both sexes than on that species. The white vittae
on each side of the scutellum of that species are sometimes faintly indicated, but
are usually absent. Two specimens, from Melrose and Lucindale, have almost
uniformly pale rusty-brown scales on the upper surface, with feeble pale spots
on the elytra, and a few dark scales scattered singly. One from Quorn has the
whole of the upper surface mottled. Another, from Murray Bridge, has the
head, rostrum, scutellum, abdomen, and parts of the legs black; there are
numerous spots of dark scales on its elytra, and the compaction of some of these
into the fasciae is rather slight.

AOLLES LONGIROSTRIS, Lea.

The types of this species are females. The male differs in having the rostrum
slightly wider, about one-third shorter, and with coarser punctures on the basal
half. The clothing about the basal half of the elytra is usually variegated with
blackish spots, with a short white vitta on each side of the scutellum. The species
occurs in Victoria and South Australia, as well as in Western Australia.

157

AOLLES ORBICULATUS, Lea.

On typical specimens of this species the elytra are clothed with sooty scales,
sharply outlined by a white marginal fringe; but on many specimens there are
numerous irregularly distributed whitish scales about the apex, and these become
more numerous, till occasionally the scales on the apical half are more than two-
thirds white, and there are numerous other white scales towards the base; the
white ones, however, never seem to form a median fascia. The rostrum and legs
vary from reddish to deep black.

Aolles marmoratus, n. sp.

@. Reddish-brown; head, scutellum, suture, and most of under surface
black or blackish. Moderately clothed with slightly variegated scales, becoming
paler on under parts, and very dense on sides of mesosternum and metasternum.

Rostrum broad, straight, and about the length of prothorax; with thin ridges,
and coarse, confluent, partially concealed punctures on basal two-thirds, then with
smaller but still crowded naked punctures. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides
almost evenly oblique to apex, which is about half the width of base. Elytra
cordate, outlines subcontinuous with those of prothorax; with rows of large
punctures, mostly partly obscured by clothing. Length, 3-4 mm.

@. Ditfers in being somewhat larger, rostrum thinner, slightly longer, with
shorter ridges and finer punctures (although coarse), which are naked to the base.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt and F. Secker), Mount
Lofty Ranges (S. H. Curnow). Victoria: Portland (H. W. Davey),

The scales on the upper surface are mostly stramineous or pale ochreous,
mixed with paler ones where they are densest, as on the sides of the prothorax
(which are feebly vittate) and middle of elytra (where there is a feeble fascia) ;
there are also some rounded snowy scales in the striae. Owing to the varying
density of the clothing the surface to the naked eye appears somewhat mottled.
On several specimens the second and fourth interstices on each elytron, beyond
the median fascia, have a vittate appearance, owing to their scales being denser
and paler than on the adjacent ones. On one of the many Lucindale specimens
the rostrum is entirely dark. The granules on the prothorax and elytra are dense
and small, and normally obscured or concealed by the clothing. It is allied to or
perhaps a variety of A. rubiginosus, but the average size is consistently a little
larger, the median fascia is composed of white or whitish scales, and the white
scales in the striae are sparser and less conspicuous.

On this and all the following species the femora are stout and strongly dentate
and, unlike most species of Haplonyx, are without a supplementary tooth in the
notch, the front tibiae are short and distinctly bisinuate on the lower surface, or
really trisinuate, as there is a short notch between the subapical tooth and the
terminal hook, so that the tibiae appear tridentate; the middle and hind tibiac
have an apical fringe of black setae, as on most species of Haplonya. Unless
otherwise noted the claw joint is inconspicuous, except that at right angles its
single claw appears as a median seta not projecting beyond the apical fringe of
the claw joint. In all of them the funicle is certainly six-jointed.

Aolles fasciatus, n. sp.

Reddish-brown, some parts black. Densely clothed with variegated scales,
the darker ones forming four large spots or two interrupted fasciae on elytra.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, almost straight; with five thin ridges
alternated with coarse punctures on basal half, in front with crowded, partially
confluent punctures. Prothorax strongly transverse, sides strongly rounded, base
more than twice the width of apex. Elytra short, outlines continuous with those

158

of prothorax; with rows of large punctures, mostly obscured by clothing. Length,
3-3°5 mm.

South Australia: Leigh Creek (Rev. T. Blackburn), Lucindale (I’. Secker),
Tintinara (J. G. O. Tepper), Murray Bridge (A. M. J.ea). Victoria: Sea Lake
(J. C. Goudie). New South Wales (Blackburn’s collection): Lake Victoria
(Capt. S. A. White).

An ovate or briefly elliptic species, somewhat shorter than the preceding one,
elytral outlines evenly continuous with those of prothorax, the base more con-
spicuously trisinuate and the darker fasciae due to clothing. From A. rubiginosus
it is also distinct by the elytral clothing, including the absence of snowy scales
from the striae. The clothing is denser than on A. ornatipennis. The head and
under surface are black on most specimens, but occasionally the abdomen is
obscurely reddish; about half of them have the rostrum black, on the others it is
more or less reddish. The clothing on the upper surface is mostly rusty-yellow
or pale ochreous, often with sooty scales sprinkled on the disc of the pronotum,
and white or stramineous ones (sometimes condensed into feeble vittae) on its
sides. On the elytra there are large patches of sooty scales, which, near the base,
form a rather wide fascia, interrupted near the suture, then there is a pale median
fascia beyond which the sooty scales form a very irregular fascia or two large
irregular spots. On the under surface and legs the clothing is whitish, becoming
slightly ochreous on the sides, and very dense on the mesosternum and meta-
sternum. Some specimens have the rostrum slightly longer and thinner than on
others, with the punctures slightly less coarse and the ridges slightly shorter, they
are probably females, but the sexual differences are not very pronounced. The
prothoracic punctures are normally almost concealed, and also the clytral granules,
but the latter are fairly distinct on the dark parts. The specimen from Lake
Victoria has only the head black; the scales on its under surface and pronotum
are pale stramineous, except that a few sooty ones are on the front of the latter;
on the elytra there is a rather broad dark sub-basal band, but beyond it the median
fascia and postmedian spots are feeble and irregular.

Aolles pictus, n. sp.

Black; legs, antennae, and parts of upper surface reddish. Densely clothed
with rusty-red scales, with conspicuots blackish patches on upper surface, on
under surface and legs mostly whitish.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, feebly curved; basal half with fine
ridges and series of large punctures, apical half with dense, partially confluent
punctures. Prothorax at base more than twice as wide as long; densely granulate
punctate. Elytra closely applied to prothorax; with rows of large punctures,
interstices with numcrous granules, in parts concealed. Length, 3°75 mm.

South Australia: Ooldea (A. M, Lea). Unique.

A beautiful species; the elytra with red basal median and apical fasciae
clothed with reddish or ochreous scales, the adjacent parts and the suture black
and clothed with blackish scales, the apical fascia, however, is joined to a vitta
on each side of the suture, which extends almost to the median fascia, on the right
elytron appearing like the letter L. On the pronotum much of the discal clothing
is dark, but there is a narrow median line of reddish scales, and the sides are
densely clothed with them. It is entirely without the snowy scales in the striae
characteristic of A. rubiginosus. The general outlines are as in many species of
the genus.

Aolles rufirostris, n. sp.

8. Reddish, under surface usually darker, head black. Moderately clothed
with whitish or stramineous scales, with sooty ones on the elytra, forming a wide
fascia from near base to near middle, and a large spot on each side of apical half.

159

Rostrum rather wide, about the length of prothorax; basal two-thirds with
five thin ridges, alternated with rows of punctures, apical third with crowded
punctures. Prothorax and elytra with outlines, punctures, and granules much
as on two preceding species. Length, 3-3-5 mm.

@, Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer, thinner, and with shorter
ridges.

Queensland: Dalby (Mrs. F. H. Hobler).

The elytral clothing is slightly variable, the paler scales are fairly dense on
the base, margin the sides, and form a median fascia, connected rather widely
along the suture with the apex, the darker scales cover more than half of the
surface. To a certain extent the elytral markings are somewhat as on the pre-
ceding species, but on that species the sutural scales are dark, without interruption
by the fasciae. The rostrum has conspicuous ridges and is red to the base, in
sharp contrast with the black head. ‘There are some denticules between the
median projection and the subapical tooth of the front tibiac.

Aolles maculipennis, n. sp.

$. Reddish, head black. Moderately clothed with stramineous scales,
on the elytra irregularly mixed with dark ones, middle of pronotum with many
dark scales; under surface with whitish scales, becoming stramineous, denser
and larger on sides of mesosternum and metasternum.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax; with five thin ridges, alternated
with rows of coarse punctures on basal two-thirds; on apical third with crowded,
partially confluent punctures. Prothorax and elytra with outlines, punctures,
and granules as on most species of the genus. Length, 3°5-4-0 mm.

g. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer, thinner, and with shorter
ridges.

South Australia: Parachiilna (E. L. Savage), Leigh Creek, Quorn (Black-
burn’s collection).

Possibly a variety of A. orbiculatus, but consistently larger, and much of the
elytra clothed with pale scales, although, except that they are uniformly dense at
the base, they are very irregularly distributed, and do not form fasciae; on the
apical slope they are quite uniform on several of the interstices on most of ihe
specimens; on several the darker scales are in the majority. On an occasional
specimen, usually a male, the rostrum and parts of the under surface are blackish.

Aolles basalis, n. sp.

é. Black or blackish, some parts reddish. Densely clothed with variegated
scales.

Rostrum about the length of prothorax; with fine ridges alternated with
partially concealed punctures on basal two-thirds, apical third with smaller but
more sharply defined ones. Prothorax and elytra with outlines, punctures, and
granules as on most species of the genus. Length, 3-3-5 mm.

¢. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer and thinner, with less
defined ridges and smaller punctures.

South Australia: Ooldea (A. M. Lea).

A beautiful species, in appearance approaching some specimens of A. orbicu-
latus, but with snowy-white scales individually larger and more rounded (much
as those in the striae of A. rubiginosus), they are dense at the base of pronotum
and rusty-red on the rest of its surface, the two colours of varying extent and
irregularly conjoined, with a few sooty scales scattered about; on the base of
elytra (but not on the scutellum, which appears as a black spot), on the apical
third, and irregularly on the sides the scales are white, elsewhere, except for a

160

few scattered white ones, they are sooty; on the under surface and legs they are
white, becoming stramineous on the sides of sterna. Of the five specimens taken,
two have the rostrum black, two have it red, and the other has it dark reddish-
brown; the antennac in all are red, except that the apical half of the club is
infuscated.

Aolles basipennis, n. sp.

Dark reddish-brown, antennae somewhat paler. Densely clothed with
stramineous, sooty, and white scales.

Rostrum rather wide and straight, slightly longer than prothorax; with
dense punctures, sharply defined in front, larger and more confluent posteriorly ;
with feeble, irregular basal ridges. Prothorax and elytra with outlines, punctures,
and granules as on most species of the genus. Length, 4 mm.

Queensland: Bowen (Aug. Simson). Unique.

‘he rostral ridges are shorter and less distinct than usual. On 4. sobrius
(about the same size and with somewhat similar elytral clothing, except at the
base), the rostral ridges are longer and more conspicuous than usual. In general
the species is close to 4. orbiculatus, except that the marginal fringe of pale scales
is absent from the sides and apex of elytra. Onthe head and pronotum the scales
are stramineous, with a few dark ones scattered about; the elytra are clothed with
sooty scales, except for a narrow basal strip of stramineous ones, present also on
the scutellum, and a few white ones in the striae; on the under surface and legs
the scales are white, becoming denser, longer, and stramineous on the sides of the
mesosternum and metasternum. ‘The type is probably a female.

Aolles vertebralis, n. sp.

Reddish. Densely clothed with rusty-yellow and sooty scales, becoming
whitish and stramineous on under parts.

Rostrum wide, quite straight, and very little longer than prothorax; basal
half with feeble ridges, alternated with coarse punctures, apical half with smaller
and more sharply defined punctures. Length, 2-5 mm.

South Australia: Gawler (J. Faust). Unique.

On the pronotum the scales are mostly rusty on the sides, with a large median
patch on which they are mostly sooty; on the elytra they are sooty except for a
narrow sutural vitta of rusty ones. The general outlines are much as on most
species of the genus, but the series of punctures on the elytra are, if present,
entirely concealed on the type, except near the base; the elytra also appear to have
no grantles.

Aolles quinquecarinatus, n. sp.

4. Reddish. Moderately clothed with white and stramineous scales on
upper surface, becoming denser and uniformly white on under parts.

Rostrum wide, straight, and the length of prothorax; with five strong ridges,
alternated with rows of punctures to apical third, on which the punctures are
smaller but more sharply defined. Prothorax at base twice as wide as the median
length; densely granulate-punctate. Elytra with outlines continuous with those
of prothorax; with rows of large, deep punctures, becoming smaller posteriorly,
the interstices multigranulate. Length, 3-5 mm.

Queensland: Bluff (A. M. Lea). Unique.

In general appearance, largely owing to the coarse elytral punctures, like some
of the smaller non-fasciculate species of Haplonyx, but the funicle is distinctly
six-jointed; each claw appears as a thin seta in the marginal fringe of the third
tarsal joint, but the claw joints themselves are very inconspicuous. The rostral
carinae are unusually well defined. On the upper surface most of the scales are
thin and stramineous, or slightly rusty; on the sides of the prothorax they are

161

mostly white, and form irregular vittae, there is also a thin white line down its
middle, continued on to the scutellum.

Aolles albus, n. sp.

Pale reddish-castaneous, head somewhat darker. Densely clothed with white
scales.

Rostrum almost straight, the length of prothorax; basal three-fifths with fine
ridges, alternated with rows of coarse punctures, apical two-fifths with crowded,
sharply defined punctures. Prothorax and elytra with normal outlines, punctures,
and granules. Length, 3 mm.

South Australia: Murray Bridge (A. M. Lea). Unique.

The scales are dense on most parts and uniformly white, except that there
are a few inconspicuous dark ones on parts of the elytra.

Aolles ferrugineus, n. sp.

Black, most of antetmnae reddish. Densely clothed with rusty-red scales, on
upper surface variegated with whitish and darker ones, on parts of under surface
whitish,

Rostrum wide, short and straight, no longer than prothorax; with fine ridges,
alternated with rows of coarse, partially concealed punctures on basal two-thirds,
elsewhere with smaller crowded punctures. Prothorax and elytra with outlines,
punctures, and granules as on most species of the genus. Length, 3-5 mm.

King Island (A. M. Lea). Unique.

In some respects close to A. variegatus, but larger, clothing denser, more
rusty, and on the sides of the prothorax vittate. From A. ornatipennis, which is
probably a synonym of A. nigrirostris, it differs in the entirely black derm, in its
clothing, and its shorter and wider rostrum. Each thin claw joint with its claw
does not project beyond the lobes of the third tarsal joint, but is sufficiently distinet
when the tarsi are viewed at right angles. Most of the clothing on the upper
surface is of a rusty-red colour, variegated with whitish subvittate spots on the
sides of the prothorax, and scattered white scales, mostly in the striae, on the
elytra, there are but few sooty scales, although they appear to be more numerous
than they really are owing to exposures of the derm. On the abdomen, except at
the sides of the basal segments, and on the middle of the metasternum, the scales
are whitish; on the rest of the under surface, and on the legs, they are not much
paler than the rusty ones on the upper surface.

Aolles rostralis, n. sp.

Dark reddish-brown, antennae somewhat paler. Densely clothed with large,
soft, stramineous, or pale rusty-yellow scales, becoming paler on under parts;
elytra with a broad, dark, sub-basal fascia, and a large spot on each side near apex.

Rostrum slightly curved, comparatively thin, slightly longer than prothorax
and scutellum on male, still longer on female; with crowded punctures throughout,
and with feeble ridges on basal half. Length, 3°5-3-75 mm.

South Australia: Leigh Creek (Rev. T. Blackburn).

A densely squamose species, with a dark sub-basal fascia on the elytra, and a
dark postmedian spot on each side, the latter sharply defined on two specimens,
broken up into spots with a faint tendency to become fasciate on two others; the
markings, therefore, are somewhat suggestive of those of A. fasciatus, but the
clothing is much denser, and the rostrum is decidedly longer and thinner. The
rostrum is unusually long and thin for the genus, and is also somewhat curved,
although not as in Zeopus. The general outlines and the punctures and the
granules are apparently as on most species of the genus, but the derm is almost
everywhere conccaled by the clothing.

F

162

Aolles multimaculatus, n. sp.

Reddish-brown; antennae, except part of club, paler. Rather densely clothed
with whitish or stramineous and sooty scales, irregularly mingled on upper surface,
becoming almost uniformly white on under parts.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, gently curved; with crowded punc-
tures, and on basal half feeble ridges. General outlines as on most species of the
genus. Length, 2°5-2°75 mm.

Victoria: Sea Lake (J. C. Goudie).

In general appearance like some of the varieties of A. orbiculatus, but the
rostrum is noticeably curved. On the prothorax the paler scales are in the
majority on the sides, but not in the middle; on the elytra the dark scales are
most numerous, the white ones forming small irregularly distributed spots, with
the tendency to form a feeble postmedian fascia, and a short vitta on each side
of the scutellum. The elytral punctures are apparently of moderate size, but
they are considerably obscured by the clothing, although the rows are more distinct
than on A. vertebralis. ‘The notch of the third tarsal joint is sufficiently distinct,
but the claw joint and its claw are not evident, at least the claw does not appear
as a median seta in the apical fringe.

Aolles intermedius, n. sp.

é. Black, antennae reddish. Clothed with white, stramincous, and sooty
scales on upper surface, snowy-white on under parts.

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, slightly wider than each eye,
moderately curved; with fine ridges alternated with rows of punctures behind
antennae, with comparatively small but sharply defined punctures in front. Pro-
thorax more than twice as wide as long, base not quite twice the width of apex;
with crowded and mostly concealed punctures. Elytra with outlines continuous
with those of prothorax, base trisinuate; with rows of fairly large partially
concealed punctures; interstices finely granulate. Length, 2°75-3 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrum about one-third longer, thinner, more
shining, with smaller punctures and shorter ridges, and antennae inserted in
middle of sides of rostrum, instead of two-fifths from apex.

South Australia: Port Lincoln (Rev. T. Blackburn and A. M. Lea).

In general appearance like many specimens of A. orbiculatus and A. basi-
pennis, but rostrum longer, thinner, and moderately curved. At first glance
resembling some varieties of Zeopus storeoides, but the rostrum of the female is
not much more than half the length of that of the male of that species, and con-
siderably less than half of that of its female; it is, however, decidedly more curved
than on any previously described species of Aolles, On the pronotum the
stramineous scales cover most of the sides, the sooty ones most of the middle;
on the elytra the stramineous ones cover a narrow part of the base (including
the scutellum) and the sides, elsewhere, except for some scattered white scales,
the clothing is sooty. The third tarsal joint appears to be rather widely notched,
but this is due to the absence of fringing sctae from its middie; the claw joint
is concealed, but its claw appears as a finer seta than any of those in the apical
fringe. The female from Port Lincoln has parts of the derm obscurely reddish,
but probably the derm varies as in most species of the subfamily. A second
female from Monarto is slightly larger, with pale scales of upper surface almost
white, and in sharper contrast with the black ones, its rostrum is slightly longer,
although much shorter than on the male of 7. storeoides.

Aolles intermixtus, n. sp.
Reddish-brown. Densely clothed with variegated scales, becoming almost
uniformly white on under parts.

163

Rostrum wide, straight, and slightly longer than prothorax ; with fine ridges,
alternated with rows of punctures on basal two-thirds, elsewhere with crowded
punctures. Prothorax more than twice as wide as long, sides oblique to apex,
which is about half the width of base; with crowded, but normally concealed
punctures. Elytra with outlines continuous with those of prothorax; with rows
of large, partially concealed punctures, interstices with fine, normally concealed
granules. Claw joints thin and distinct. [.ength, 4 mim.

North-Western Australia: Fortescue River (W. D. Dodd). Unique.

A fairly large species, with white, rusty-yellow, and sooty scales on the elyira,
irregularly distributed, but to the naked cye appearing in feeble zones or fasciae;
there is a fairly wide sooty zone near the base, and a smaller one beyond the
middle, and the scutellum appears as a round dark spot; on the pronotum there
are only whitish and rusty-yellow scales, also irregularly mingled. The base of
the elytra, except for the incurvature at the scutcllum, is almost straight, instead
of distinctly trisinuate.

On this and on the three following species, the thin claw joint with a single claw
projects well beyond the lobes of the third joint of each tarsus, and the general
appearance is as of non-fasciculate species of Haplonya, but as the funicle is
certainly six-jointed (all have been examined under the microscope) they have
been referred to Alles.

Aolles latirostris, n. sp.

Reddish. Densely clothed with variegated scales on upper surface, becoming
uniformly white on under parts.

Rostrum wide, straight, and the length of prothorax, sides gently incurved
to middle; with fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures to
insertion of antennae, in front with dense, naked punctures. Prothorax and
elytra with outlines, punctures, and granules as on most species of the genus.
Claw joints distinct. Length, 2°75 mm.

Oucensland: Longreach (A. M. Lea), Unique.

In general appearance like the preceding species on a reduced scale, and with
the claw joint equally prominent; the clothing is of much the same colours, but
is opaque, and less intermingled, with the scales on the scutellum white. On the
pronotum the scales are mostly dark stramineous, with a few white spots on the
sides, and white ones scattered singly elsewhere; on the elytra most of them are
of a rusty-yellow, with an irregular dark fascia at the basal third, and short,
white vittac forming feeble fasciae at the base, beyond the imiddle, and near the
apex.

Aolles parvus, n. sp.

Reddish. Densely clothed with variegated scales, becoming white on under
parts.

Rostrum wide, straight, and about the length of prothorax; with fine ridges,
alternated with rows of sqtamiferous punctures on basal three-fifths, elsewhere
with crowded, naked punctures. Prothorax and elytra with outlines, punctures,
and granules as on most species of the genus. Claw joints distinct. Length,
2°25 mm.

Northern Territory: Roper River (N. B. Tindale), Unique.

Smaller than the preceding species, and with about half of the elytral scales
black. On the upper surface the scales are rusty-yellow, white and sooty, on the
pronotum they are mostly rusty, with white vittae on the sides, and two small
white submedian spots, on the base there are three small feeble dark spots. On
the elytra there is a wide, irregular, black fascia, extending from near the base to
near the middle; beyond the middle the black, white, and rusty scales are
irregularly mingled, about the base they are rusty, with a few white ones. Directly
from behind rows of snowy scales may be seen in the striae.

164

Aolles inconspicuus, n. sp.

Black, some parts obscurely diluted with red, antennae reddish. Densely
clothed with somewhat rusty and sooty scales, becoming white on under parts.

Rostrum wide, straight, and the length of prothorax; basal three-fifths with
fine ridges, alternated with rows of squamiferous punctures, elsewhere with
crowded naked punctures. Prothorax and elytra with outlines, punctures, and
granules as on most species of the genus. Claw joints distinct. Length, 2°25 mm.

Queensland: Brisbane (H. J. Carter). Unique.

The size of the preceding species, hut head and rostrum black, the elytral
clothing of two colours only, and most of the discal scales of the pronotum sooty.
The clothing is as on many specimens of A. orbiculatus, but each claw joint pro-
jects well beyond the lobes of the third. On the pronotum the paler scales form
two oblique vittac on each side, with a few scattered singly on the disc; on the
elytra they rather narrowly clothe the base (including the scutellum), the margins
on the basal half, and form small irregularly distributed spots elsewhere,

Aonychus picatus, n. sp.

4. Black. Densely clothed with black and white scales on upper surface,
white on lower surface and legs.

Rostrum rather thin, moderately curved, the length of prothorax; with some
strong punctures about base. Prothorax moderately transverse, sides strongly
rounded, base strongly bisinuate and about twice the width of apex; punctures
normally concealed. Elytra cordate, distinctly wider than prothorax; with scrics
of fairly large, concealed punctures. Two basal segments of abdomen with a
shallow median depression, clothed with setae instead of scales. Tength,
4°5-5°5 mm.

@. Differs in having the rostrum slightly longer, with sparser punctures
about base, and two basal segments of abdomen strongly and evenly convex.

Western Australia: Cunderdin, in September and October.

A multimaculate species with deep black and snowy-white scales. On the
head they are mostly white, with a round black patch in front; on the pronotum
the white scales form a median line on the basal half, and two large spots on
each side, but the spots are connected with the white mass below; the scutellum
appears as a white spot; on the elytra the white spots are numerous, and so placed
as lo appear irregularly fasciate, and to enclose round or subquadrate black spots.
On A. luctiosus the black scales of the elytra are more conspicuous about the
suture than elsewhere, and the white ones are somewhat longitudinally arranged ;
on the present species they could be regarded as forming very irregular transverse
or zigzag tasciae. ‘here are other specimens in the Western Australian Museum,
No. 8278.

Aonychus barbatus, n. sp.

é. Blackish-brown, parts of antennac paler. Densely clothed with sooty-
brown and white scales on upper surface, entirely white on under surface and
legs. Rostrum with an apical fringe on each side of about eight, rather long,
yellowish bristles,

Rostrum thin, strongly curved, sides slightly incurved between antennae and
apex. Prothorax and elytra with outlines and sculpture as on the preceding
species, except that the series of punctures on the elytra are less concealed by the
clothing. Length, 6 mm.

Northern ‘Territory: Bathurst Island, in October (G. F. Hill). Unique.

Readily distinguished from all other species of the genus by the bearded
rostrum, which, however, is probably confined to the male. The dark scales
clothe the front of the head, median part of pronotum, except for remnants of a

165

white cross, and most of the elytra, on the latter the white ones form short vittac,
and interrupted fasciae, so placed that there appear to be two large, quadrangular
sutural spots on the basal half, and a small square spot at the basal third on the
fifth interstice; on the apical slope the white spots are small and numerous. There
is a slight flattening in the middle of the two basal segments of abdomen, but they
are without the usual setose depression of the males of the genus.

Aonychus lituratus, n. sp.

8. Black, parts of antennae obscurely reddish. Densely clothed with black
and white scales on upper surface, white on under surface and legs.

Rostrum rather long and thin, rather strongly curved: with a short ridge
near base, on each side of which the punctures are dense and rather coarse, else-
where with fine punctures. Prothorax slightly transverse, base strongly bisinuate
and about twice the width of apex; with crowded, concealed punctures. Elytra
cordate: with regular rows of large, partially concealed punctures. Two basal
segments of abdomen with a shallow median depression, clothed with scales instead
of setac. Length, 6 mm.

Queensland: Claudie River (J. A. Kershaw), Type (unique), in National
Muscum.

In general appearance fairly close to the preceding species, but the dark
scales blacker, the white ones differently disposed, and the rostrum not bearded.
The black scales form a round spot on the front of the head, clothe the median
part of pronotum, and most of the elytra; on the pronotum the white ones on
the sides are advanced in a zigzag manner on the disc, there are also two minute
median white spots and a medio-basal one; on the elyira the white spots are
small and irregularly distributed, except that some are united to form an irregular
T or short broad Y, on and near the suture about the summit of the apical slope.

MiIcRAONYCHUS.

In the original diagnosis of this genus it was noted that the funicle should
probably be considered as seven-jointed rather than six-jointed. I have recently
re-examined some of the types and many fresh specimens (including M. maculatus,
sordidus, decipiens, and nigrirostris), as well as several new species, and now con-
sider that the funicle should be regarded as really six-jointed, as it certainly
appears to be under a fairly high power; the cighth joint of the antennae is
usually closely applied to the club, and apparently forms part of it, as on
Misophrice, although it is usually without the fine sensitised pubescence of the
club, its derm generally has the appearance of the funicle, rather than of the club.
In M. maculatus, however, it is slightly narrower than the sixth joint of the
funicle, and distinctly narrower than the following joint, and, although it appears
to belong to the club, its clothing is different.

Mricraonycnus Nicrirostris, Lea.

Three specimens evidently belonging to this species, from Queensland ( National
Park and Mount Tambourine), are smaller than usual, on one of them many of
the scales are of a brilliant green, on another many are of a coppery-red, on the
third many are coppery, and others green. ‘Ihe species is distinct by its black
rostrum.

Micraonychus illotus, n. sp.

Dull brownish-red; head and metasternum darker; club, most of funicle,
and tarsi black. Moderately clothed with muddy-grey scales, becoming paler on
under surface.

166

Rostrum slightly longer than prothorax, thin, curved, shining, and with rows
of distinct punctures on basal half, smaller scattered ones elsewhere. Funicle
distinctly six-jointed. Prothorax almost as long as wide, base strongly bisinuate
and almost twice the width of apex; with crowded, partially concealed punctures.
Elytra oblong-cordate, sides gently dilated to near middle; with rows of large,
partially obscured punctures, alternate interstices feebly elevated. Pectoral canal
deep, ending abruptly in middle of metasternum. J.ength, 3°5 min.

South Australia: Lucindale (B. A. Feuerheerdt).

A large, dingy species; at first glance the type looks like a large, dirty speci-
men of MW. cinerasceus, but its pectoral canal is shorter; on that species it extends
to the abdomen.

Micraonychus interruptus, n. sp.

Dull reddish-brown, rostrum and scape paler, rest of antennae and tarsi black.
Denscly clothed with silvery-white scales, in parts obscured by muddy-grey ones.

Rostrum thin, the length of prothorax, moderately curved; with rows of
punctures on basal half, sparse and small clsewhere. Funicle six-jointed. Pro-
thorax almost as long as wide; punctures crowded but normally concealed. Elytra
not much wider than prothorax, parallel-sided to beyond middle; with regular
rows of large punctures, appearing much smaller through clothing. Pectoral canal
deep, ending abruptly before middle of metasternum, J.ength, 2°5-2°:75 mim.

Tasmania: Launceston (T°. M. Littler and Aug. Simson),

Most of the derm is normally concealed. On specimens in good condition
the white scales form a median linc on the pronotum and are dense on the sides;
on the elytra they are dense, leaving parts of the suture, fifth and seventh inter-
stices bare (and consequently appearing vitlate), a bare antemedian part of the
seventh is directed obliquely backwards, to join in with a bare postmedian patch
on the fifth. Rubbed or dirty specimens are dithcult to distinguish from rubbed
or dirty ones of AV. decipiens.

Micraonychus coelosternus, n. sp.

Black; elytra, parts of under surface, femora, tibiae, apical half of rostrum
(the base obscure), and scape more or less obscurely reddish. Moderately clothed
with whitish scales, with a slight bluish tinge.

Rostrum thin, curved, shining, the length of prothorax, and with rows of fine
punctures. Funicle six-jointed. Prothorax about as long as wide, sides rounded
and somewhat narrowed to apex; with crowded punctures. Elytra oblong-
cordate, but rather narrow; with rows of large, partially obscured punctures.
Pectoral canal deep and fairly wide to middle of metasternum, thence connected
with abdomen by a narrow groove. ‘lwo basal segments of abdomen with a
large, shallow depression. J.ength, 2 mm.

New South Wales: Upper Williams River (A. M. Lea). Unique.

Evidently allied to M. rufomanus, but without the large soft scales char-
acteristic of that species, and with a longer pectoral canal, which is narrowly con-
nected with the abdomen. The partly red rostrum distinguishes from AL. nigri-
rosiris. The clothing is not very dense, and the individual scales are seldom
distinct, except on the under surface, where some of them have a slight metallic
gloss. The abdominal depression is probably a masculine feature.

Grocuus, Broun, Man. N. Z’land Col., iv., p. 931.

Two species of this genus were first referred to Geophilus, but finding that
name had already been used, Broun proposed the name Geochus,” The species

() Broun, N. Z’land Jour. Sci., 1., 1882, p. 128.

167

are remarkable for their flattened, broad forms, widely separated front coxae,
and three-jointed tarsi. The genus was originally placed in the Diabathrariides,
but in the systematic index to the Manual at the end of the Cylindrorhinides. It
really appears to be an aberrant one of the Cryptorhynchides. “lwenty-six species
are known trom New Zealand, and one can now be added from Lord Howe
Island, taken from fallen leaves, as were most of the others.

Geochus howensis, n. sp.

Black; antennac, except club, reddish. In parts sparsely and obscurely
clothed.

Jlead small, with dense punctures. Eyes small, lateral, with coarse facets.
Rostrum short, dilated to near apex, with three longitudinal ridges. Antennac
inserted near apex of rostrum, scape dilated at apex; funicle seven-jointed, first
joint subglobular. Prothorax transverse, flat, base evenly curved and twice the
width of apex; with crowded, deep punctures of modcrate size, and with a feeble
median ridge. Elytra closely applied to prothorax, sides dilated to basal third
aud then oblique to apex; with rows of large, rough punctures, wider than inter-
stices, these somewhat irregular. Femora rather stout, edentate; tibiae with a
small terminal hook, tarsi short, apparently three-jointed. T.ength, 1+5-2-0 mm.

Lord Howe Island, eleven specimens from fallen leaves (A. M. Lea and wife).

Ditters from G. inaequalis and G. marginalus, New Zealand species, in the
elytra. ‘The legs, tip of abdomen, and sometimes parts of the elytra, are obscurely
diluted with red. Seen directly from above more than half of the elytra appears
as a large triangle, owing to the sides being obliquely cut off from the basal third,
the interstices are in parts uneven, although hardly tuberculate, the irregularity
being most noticeable at the basal third. The distance hetween the front coxae
is more than the width of a coxa. One of, the specimens has the elytra more
strongly sculptured than the others, the second interstice on each elytron is
flattened except for a sudden elevation at the basal third, the third is elevated to
the basal third, then suddenly interrupted, and then with two elevations, the filth
is conspicuously elevated from the base to beyond the middle, and the’ sixth is
also elevated in part.

Achelocis, n. g.

Head small, round. Eyes small, lateral, with coarse facets. Rostrum rather
long, thin, and moderately curved; scrobes deep and oblique in front, then shal-
lower on under surface almost to eyes. Antennae rather thin; scape almost as
long as funicle and club combined; funicle seven-jointed; club moderately long.
Prothorax transverse, base strongly and evenly rounded, sides strongly rounded.
Scutellum minute. Elytra slightly wider than long, sides strongly rounded,
surface uneven. Mesosternum semicircularly emarginate at apex, without a
median groove. Metasternum very short, episterna not apparent. Abdomen
rather small, first segment as long as second and third combined, third and fourth
combined the length of second and slightly longer than fifth. Legs moderately
long; front coxae almost touching, middle anes moderately, the hind ones widely
separated; femora rather stout, neither grooved nor dentate; tibiae slightly
bisinuate on lower surface, apical hook small; tarsi three-jointed. Coarsely
sculptured and sparsely clothed.

The type is a singular insect, for which at present J am unable to suggest a
subfamily, although it is probably near the Cryptorhynchides. In its general
appearance it has somewhat the look of the rough, granulate species of Tentegia,
of that subfamily, and its general outlines, rostrum, and abdomen are much as
those of Cycloporopterus, but the total absence of a pectoral canal should forbid
its being referred to the Cryptorhynchides. The upper surface of the third tarsal

168

joint appears to be almost evenly rounded, and under the microscope I cannot
see even the rudiment of a claw joint; the under surface is densely padded and
feebly notched in the middle.

Achelocis rudis, n. sp.

Black; antennae, tibial hooks, tarsi, and parts of elytra reddish. Sparscly
clothed with pale setae.

Head with coarse punctures and a small median fovea. Rostrum slightly
longer than prothorax, somewhat thickened, and with coarse, crowded punctures
about base, elsewhere smaller and more or less lineate in arrangement. Funicle
with two basal joints moderately long and subequal, their combined length
slightly less than that of the five following ones. Prothorax with numerous fine,
transverse, irregular ridges, in front of which are coarse punctures, but with
coarse punctures only on sides. LElytra strongly and almost evenly rounded;
with shallow striae, containing large, irregularly spaced punctures, the interstices
with irregular series of small, round, shining granules. Sterna and two basal
segments of abdomen with coarse, irregular punctures. Length, 3°5 mm.

Queensland: Cairns (Dr. E. W. Ferguson). Unique.

A briefly ovate, strongly convex, rough-looking species. In certain lights
there appear to be three obscurely reddish irregular fasciae on the elytra, one at the
base, one near and one slightly beyond the middle, and irregular patches elsewhere;
the elytral granules are in single series, but all more or less irregularly interrupted.

169

ABORIGINAL STONE STRUCTURES IN SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By C. P. Mountrorn,
[Read August 11, 1927.]
Piates IX, anp X.

Aboriginal monuments of stone are practically unknown in South Australia,
and the examples about to be described have not been previously recorded. Wood
Jones “) shows photographs of stone cairns on the Gungra claypan which are
apparently about 2 feet high and in the centre of a complex arrangement of stones
laid in place by the aborigines.

The examples now described are, however, quite distinct and represent a new
type of stone structure. They werc first noticed by the author, when, in company
with his father, Mr. C. Mountford, and Mr. H. L. Sheard, he was searching for
native rock carvings near the Weroonee Range, about 173 miles, 11° east of north
of Adelaide, and, approximately, 13 miles due north of Paratoo, on the Broken
Ilill railway line. While examining an example of aboriginal intaglios on the
property of Mr. G. Fuller, at Wabricoola, Mr. Fuller mentioned that his father
had shown him, many years previously, some stone‘structures, and told him that
they had been used by the aborigines during rain-making ceremonies. He kindly
accompanied us to the foot-hills of the Weroonee Range, and although unsuc-
cessful himself in locating them, roughly indicated their position to us. After
some trouble we found six stone structures, situated on a low foot-hill to the north
of the Weroonee Ranges, at a point about 54 miles south-west of Wabricoola
Station. Three of the examples had been erected on the top of the hill; the
remaining three were grouped close together on the western slope. The accom-
panying diagram shows the relative position of each structure in the group :—

Plan of Aboriginal Stone Structures at Weroonee Range.

Nos. 1, 2, and 3 were in a straight line, oriented approximately north-east.
‘The first was 54 yards, and the third 50 yards, from No. 2. No. 4 was 80 yards
south-east from No. 3, and No. 5 was 5 vards further on in the same direction.
No. 6 lay 14 yards south-westward from No. 5.

a Wood Jones, Prof. F., Journ. Anthrop. Inst. Gt. Brit., vol. lv., 1925, p. 123.

170

The bases of all the structures were square, with the corners directed towards
the four points of the compass. Four of the stone piles were partly dismantled,
No, 3 almost totally so, while Nos. 2 and 4 were complete. The example
No. 4 was the most perfect example of the group, and, at the instance of Prof. F.
Wood Jones, and with the help of Messrs. C. Mountford and P. Stapleton, was
dismantled and presented to the South Australian Museum (pl. ix.).

ihe stone pile was constructed in a remarkable manner, and while dis-
mantling it we had an excellent opportunity of noticing several peculiarities. In
the first place, a floor had been laid down with flat slate stones and two narrow
stone slabs, about 3 feet 6 inches long, 6 inches wide, and 2 inches to 3 inches thick,
were placed upon thei parallel to cach other and, approximately, 3 feet apart.
Two similar stones were arranged on the top of, and at right angles to these, about
the same distance apart, allowing the ends to overlap a little. The construction
was continued in this manner, each pair of stones being at right angles to the
previous ones and of decreasing length for 28 layers, forming a pile 3 feet 8 inches
high, which was 3 feet square at the base and 1 foot 6 inches square at the top,
with a hollow down the middle. ‘The rule shown in pl. ix. is 6 inches long.

More care was taken in building this structure than appeared at first glance,
the stones having been chosen of decreasing length to make a building of the
shape shown in pl. ix. It was also noticed that where the slates did not bed pro-
perly, small packing pieces had been inserted to prevent rocking. No mortar or
any form of fastening was used, the weight of the stones keeping the construction
together. A large flat stone 15 inches by 24 inches was noticed on the ground
adjacent to this example. We dug the ground upon which the pile had been
erected, but found nothing; in fact the earth appeared to have been previously
undisturbed. he rocks in this locality weather out into long narrow slates, which
are particularly suitable for building the special form of structure; in fact, they
probably determined ns form, ‘The collecting of the stones over an extensive
area to provide sufficient material for this and the other examples must
have entailed considerable time and labour.

No. 1 structure was partly demolished, only ten layers of stone standing, the
remainder lying around in confusion. The base was 12 inches square, and the
height was 16 inches. The method of construction was somewhat different from
that of the previous example, and although the stones were disarranged, there
were strong indications that a smaller structure had been built on the north-
eastern side and joined to the main one by stones laid parallel ta each other. A
large flat stone 40 inches long was noticed lying adjacent to this example.

After having photographed this arrangement, the stones lying about were
utilised to reconstruct the pile, and it was found that the remaining loose ones
made it 3 feet high and comprised 30 layers,

Structure No. 2 was built in a different manner from the other examples,
being solid, similar to the base of a European tower or cairn of a similar shape.
It was rectangular in form, 3 feet 6 inches by 4 fect and 18 inches high, and was
composed of stones more or less rectangular in shape. The long slates utilised
in the other examples were not used in this case, and no loose stones were noticed
lying around it,

The structure called No. 3 was almost totally dismantled, only a few stones
remaining to indicate the former existence of a stone erection similar to, but
somewhat smaller than No. 4.

No. 5 was similar to No. 1, except that there were no indications of an addi-
tional arrangement on the side. It was partly broken down, only twelve rows

171

being in place, the remaining stones lying beside it in disorder. It was about
12 inches square at the base and the undisturbed portion was 20 inches high (pl.
x.. fig, 4). Asin Nos. 1 and 4, a large flat stone was lying adjacent to the
structure. This measured 24 inches by 30 inches.

The last example, No. 6, was very similar to No. 5, being 12 inches square
at the base and about 20 inches high, with fourteen rows left standing, the
remaimder lying about as in the other examples. A flat stone similar to those
near the other three was noticed (pl. x., fig. 3).

Mr. P. Stapleton has since described to the author a similar structure, one and
a half miles north-west of Beltana and 70 yards from the railway line. Another
was within sight to the west on the side of a hill. He also kindly supplied
a photograph (pl. x., fig. 1) which shows that although the long narrow slates
were not available, a similar manner of building was used; that is, two stones
were placed parallel and the next two laid on top at right angles to them. Mr.
Stapleton also mentioned that he saw quite a number of similar examples in the
Flinders Ranges between Wilpena and Copley, and on enquiring from local resi-
dents he Jearned that they extended from Wilpena in the south to Wooltana in
the north.

Mr. H. M. Hale, of the South Australian Museum, presented the author with a
photograph of a similar structure (pl. x., fig. 2) taken when visiting the country
at the Owienagin Pound. The construction of this was very similar to that of
the Weroonee examples, and was also situated on a hillside,

Motives For BUILDING Tire STRUCTURES,

That these arrangements are the work of aborigines cannot easily be denied
i view of Mr. G. Fuller’s information, received from his father, that the natives
rad used them during rain-making ceremonies, and in connection with these
ceremonies had sprinkled animal blood on the stones. It may be of interest to
note that Spencer and Gillen @ record customs of sprinkling human blood over
stones during the Intichiuma ceremony of the Kangaroo and Hakea flower totems.

Mr. E. Buttfield (whose father was a former Protector of Aborigines), and
who had himself spent his boyhood among the natives of the Flinders Ranges,
told the author that, when a young man, he had seen stone structures similar to
those shown in the photographs, He had asked the natives regarding them, and
had been told that they had been made by “old man blackfellow long time ago.”
When questioned regarding their use, the natives professed ignorance. They
denied the idea that white men had made them.

The Surveyor-General was personally interviewed and shown photographs of
the Weroonee structures, and he gave his assurance that his surveyors did not
build cairns of this type. ‘he occurrence of similar structures over such a wide
area in the Flinders Ranges seems to indicate the existence of a former aboriginal
custom of building stone piles possibly for ceremonial purposes. Enquiries
among the few remaining aborigines may give information regarding their use
and nanie, for in view of the information received it seems likely that they may
have been used during rain-making ceremonies.

The following points are noteworthy :—As previously mentioned, structures
Nos. 1, 4, 5, and 6 each had a large flat stone nearby, and it seems as if these had
been placed in position for some definite purpose. Examination showed that
although structures Nos. 1, 5, and 6 were partly dismantled, the stones had not

(2) Spencer; Sir Baldwin, and Gillen, F.. “Native Tribes of Central Australia,” 1899,
pp 184-201.

172

been removed, and there were sufficient numbers lying around to enable us to
reconstruct the buildings to the height of the others. No, 3, however, was almost
totally demolished, very few of the stones remaining, and it would appear that
the material taken from it had been utilised to construct some other example.

Another striking feature noticed was that all the structures were built with
the corners pointing to the four points of the compass. The fact that every
building was similarly placed would indicate that the builders had some definite
object in view, which had influenced them in their orientation of the piles.

The author wishes to acknowledge the great help received from Mr. C.

Mounttord, sen., Mr. H. L. Sheard, Mr. G. Fuller, and Mr. P. Stapleton, in finding
these remarkable remains of aboriginal craft.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES IX. anxp X.

Piate IX.
Aboriginal Stone Structure, No. 4, Weroonee Ranges.

PLATE X.
Fig. 1. Aboriginal Stone Structure, Beltana.
Fig. 2. Aboriginal Stone Structure, Owienagin
Fig. 3. Aboriginal Stone Structure, No. 6.
Fig. 4. Aboriginal Stone Structure, No. 5,

[Note.-Since the reading of the above paper certain statements have been made
which raises some doubt as to the rock-structures described in the paper having been con-
structed by aborigines, or at least by aborigines uninfluenced from association with the
white races. It is possible, as suggested by some, that the structures were erected as
sub-“trigs” by the early surveyors, but being auxiliaries only, were not marked on the
official charts. Other origins have also been suggested. The object of the present note
is to prevent a possible misinterpretation of these objects and to suspend judgment until
more definite evidences can be obtained as to their origin and intention —C. P, M.]

‘Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S$. Austr., 1927. Vol LL, Plate IX.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S, Austr, 1927. Vol. LI., Plate X.

Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers, Adelaids

173

AN UNUSUAL DISPOSAL OF AN ABORIGINAL CHILD’S REMAINS
FROM THE LOWER MURRAY, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By Harotp L. Sueaxp, C. P. MountrForp, and Ceci J. Hacker,
[Read August 11, 1927.]
Piates XI. anp XII.

This paper records the discovery of an aboriginal child’s remains hidden in
a cleft in the cliffs of the River Murray, near Fromm’s Landing. As far as we
are aware, a similar occurrence has not been recorded. Fromm’s Landing is
situated on the western side of the Murray, about half-way between Swan Reach
and Mannum, on Section 302, Hundred of Ridley.

Travelling up the river, precipitous cliffs, about 100 feet high, abut on the
stream on the western side. The main channel of the stream leaves the western
cliffs, just after the landing is reached, and continues in a north-easterly direction.
The cliffs recede and a large billabong, or backwater, is thus formed. This slowly
rises, forming extensive mud flats, which terminate in a bank of débris at the
cliffs.

Erosion has hollowed out several extensive shelters at the base of the cliffs,
and these have been the habitations of aborigines for very long periods. The
shelters of this locality have been previously described.“? It was when these
shelters and the cliffs were being examined for traces of aboriginal rock carvings
that the remains were discovered.

In one place, about 2 chains above the large shelter, (i1.) a huge mass of the
cliff had become detached. This had moved sufficiently to form a fissure, about
3 feet wide, extending the whole height of the cliffs. This cleft was filled with
boulders (evidently disconnected from the mass when the fissure was formed),
creating a series of irregular ledges (see pl. xi., fig. 1). When this place was
examined a smafl white object was observed resting on one of the boulders.
Closer examination revealed that a child’s remains had been hidden or interred on
this ledge of rock, which was about 12 feet above the present bank. This bank
has been considerably augmented in recent times by drift sands pouring over the
cliffs (the result of agriculture in this semi-arid district). Possibly when the
remains were first deposited the position was more inaccessible than when found
by us.

Many places in this cleft and about the cliffs had afforded shelter to opossums
(Trichosurus vulpeculus), the peculiar excreta from which mixed with sandy
débris weathered from the rocks had formed a pavement 2 to 3 inches in thick-
mess on the corpse of the child, firmly cementing it to the rock on which it had
been placed. By chipping away the edges of the excreta it was possible to lift
away the whole mass. This, on being reversed, revealed the manner of disposal
of the remains.

A net bag constructed from vegetable fibre (see Appendix), woven into a two-
ply twist with an 8 cm. mesh (see text fig. 1 and pl. xit., fig. 1), had been partially
filled with long grasses; on these the body had been placed in a crouched position,
resting on the left side, and the whole covered with a further layer of loose
grasses and the hide of a wallaby. The bag was drawn up and tied at the feet,

“wD Sheard, Harold a Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927, pp. 137-140.

174

further covered with grass, and deposited in the cliff completely beyond casual
observation.

The wallaby skin wrapping the body had been prepared in the well-known
manner, with hammered lines forming a regular diamond pattern over its surfacc.
At one time it had evidently formed a shallow oval container (30 x 45 cm.), since
it still has attached to it a thick, coarsely twisted rush-fibre handle which is lashed
on at each end by passing it through transverse slits in the skin (3 cm. in length).
When the body was packed up the handle was swung under the container away
from the child, and now lies partly concealed in the grass packing.

The excreta of the opossums had practically hermetically sealed the remains
and overhanging rocks had sheltered them from the weather. The fibre bag and
grasses, while fragile, are almost complete, and it may be observed that nothing
that would indicate contact with civilization was present. In another fissure.
some 10 yards away, the desiccated remains of an opossum were found preserved
in a similar manner beneath a layer of dung.

The exhibit has been presented by H. L. Sheard and C, P. Mountford to the
South Australian Museum, and at their request Mr. C. J. Hackett kindly con-
sented to add the following anatomical notes.

We are indebted to Mr, N. B. Tindale for assistance in the preparation of
this paper.

Fe. 1.

Notes by C. J. Hackerr.

The specimen as at present exhibited in the Adelaide Museum is not in the
position in which it was originally found, but lies with its lower surface upper-
most. In this position 1 will bricfiv describe it (pl. xii., fig. 2).

The body is lying on its right side in a state of advanced desiccation, with
ithe spine slightly flexed in the dorsi lumbar regions and extended in the cervical
region so that the occiput is looking somewhat downwards. The Icft side of the
thorax, part of the left side of the pelvis, and the left foot are missing, and the
left lower limb is not in situ. The left upper limb is extended and is lying along
the anterior part of the spinal column. The Jower limbs are apparently flexed at
the hips and knees. Most of the soft parts are missing, except some skin over
parts of the extremities, right flank, and part of the skull. The hands are prac-
tically intact, and are flexed and ulnar-deviated on the forearms; the right foot
is less complete. There is a dried, reticulated, structureless mass, lying anterior
to the spine; being, perhaps, the remnants of the contents of the thorax and

175

abdomen. ‘The whole is lying on the dried, leathery material, mentioned above,
and is surrounded by grass, with occasional gum leaves, except along the dorsal
aspect. A net covers the grass and is drawn together at the feet, but is missing
along the dorsal aspect of the body.

The Skull-—With the exception of the symphysis menti not any of the visible
sutures are closed. X-ray photographs indicate that perhaps the metopic suture
is closed. The sutures between the premaxillae and maxillae are open. The
sagittal suture is discrete, no membrane being present, except at the anterior
fontanelle, which is roughly -73 cm. in diameter. The posterior fontanelle is
closed. On following the sagittal suture postcriorly it is found to deviate
to the right some 3 cm. above the lambda, and here the left parietal bone
is thinned out and slightly overlaps the right. At this, the postero-median
border of the left parietal is an oval depression 3 x 4 cm., its longest dimension
being lateral. Its boundary is more defined on the left, where it is 2 mm. below
the surface of the surrounding bone; to the right, it shelves away deflecting and
squamosing the sagittal suture and also involving the right parietal for about
lem, The right border of the depression, on the right parictal, in ils upper part,
is marked by an oval crater 75 x ‘5 x ‘2 cm. The surface of the bone, at the
left edge, is finely pitted, but elsewhere the surface of the depression is smooth
and shiny with a suspicion of striae radiating to the right. By transillumination,
the bone in the depression is seen to be thinner than elsewhere. The bone around
is apparently normal and not thickened.

Teelh—Iin the upper jaw the full first dentition has erupted, but some are
missing. The first permanent molars are seen in the alveolus, as are the per-
manent incisors. A similar condition is present in the lower jaw.

All the epiphyses of the long bones, vertebrae, and pelvis are separate. X-rays
show no bony abnormality at the epiphyseal lincs.

Conclusion—It would be justifiable to conclude from the above that the
remains are those of a child approximately two years of age. The bones are too
immature to give them a sex. The period which has clapsed since its death
would be difficult to assess on account of the unusual condition of its interment.
Taking into consideration the good condition of the net work and grass, it may
not have been so very long; but one must not neglect the possibility that the
trappings in which it was found do not date from the death of the child.

There is no clue as to the cause of death. One more point remains; that is,
the curious depressed area in the parietal bones, From its appearance onc would
exclude any inflammatory lesion; one then thinks of a fracture, and, if a fracture,
it must have occurred before the membranous part of the bone had ossified ; that
is, within the first twelve months of life.

Skiagraphs, kindly taken at the Adelaide Hospital, support the view that the
condition is a fracture (sec pl. xi., figs. 2 and 3). Whether it was soine accident
or a deliberately inflicted injury is impossible to say, but one thing ts clear, that
is, it was not the direct cause of death,

In closing, I wish to thank Messrs. H. L. Sheard and C. P. Mountford for
the opportunity to make these notes.

Mr. N. B. Tindale supplies the following note concerning remains of another
child from the Murray cliffs -—

“We recently found the remains of an aboriginal child, of some 10 to 12
years of age, in a small cave or rockhole at Wongulla (Section B, Hundred of
Forster). This cavity is situated at a height of 10 feet from the base of the
cliff, 100 yards downstream from the main native shelter on the eastern bank
of the river. All the bones, except those’of the fect, were burnt and broken.
The lower jaw with some of its teeth was present, but no other parts of the skull

176

were recovered. Bat-dung from a ledge above the remains had covered and
preserved in part some soft grass and an open-meshed fibre bag; evidently the
wrappings and container in which the bones had been stowed away. The meshes
of the net were approximately 3 inches across, and the same type of knot had
been used in its construction as in the bag containing the desiccated child recorded
above. ‘lwo broken pieces of trimmed stick were found with the bones.

“The evidence points to the fact that in this case the bady had been burned.
and the remains (including the feet, which had partly escaped the flames) had
been packed in grass, placed in a net-bag, and deposited in the rock-cleft.”

APPENDIX.

The following extracts from literature are here added as bearing on the
subject :-—

Meyer, discussing the manufacture of nets, writes:—‘‘The string of which
they are made is composed of the fibres of a kind of flag. It is prepared by roast-
ing the leaves and afterwards chewing them; the leaf is then divided longitudinally
into four, two of these are twisted by being rolled upon the thigh,
and are then twisted together by being rolled the contrary way; other lengths
are added until as much line is made as is required. In the opcration of netting
the twine is wound round a short stick which answers the purpose of a needle,
and the meshes are formed and the knot tied by passing the string over and
between the fingers.”

Angas, in his account of his early-day experiences along the Murray, near

Wellington, writes:—‘We met . . . a mother, wandering in search of roots,
with her digging stick in her hand. . . . She carried a heavy load at her back.
Night and day she bore her burden, . . . though it was a loathsome and
decaying corpse. ... . It was the dead body of her son, a child of 10 years ;

she had carried it for three weeks in her bundle as a tribute of her affection.”

Meyer % further records:—‘Children stillborn, or that have been put to
death immediately after birth, are burned. Tf a child dies a natural death, it is
carefully packed up, and the mother or grandmother carries it about with her
for several months or a year, after which it is exposed upon a tree until the bones
are completely cleaned, after which they are buried.”

Wyatt states:—‘The women more especially are so strongly attached to
relatives that they hesitate for a long time to part with a dead body; and mothers
are often known to carry about their persons dead infants, carefully wrapped up,
for many months, while offensive decomposition must undoubtedly be going on.”

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XAT. anp XIT.

PLATE XI.
Fig. 1. Fissure in cliffs where remains were found (X).
Figs. 2 and 3. Radiographs of skull.

Pirate XIT.
Fig. 1. Under surface of specimen (as found) showing grass and net work.

Fig. 2. Specimen with covering thrown back showing remains (as exhibited
in S.A. Museum).

(2) Meyer, H. E. A., “Ihe Native Tribes of South Australia,” 1879, pp. 193, 198.
(3) Angas, G. F., “Savage Life . . . in Australia,” vi, 1847, p. 75.
(4) Wyatt, William, “The Native Tribes of South Australia,” 1879, p. 165.

Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate XI.

Fig. 2. Fig. 3.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate XII.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

177

NOTES ON THE LANGUAGE OF THE ELCHO ISLAND ABORIGINES.
By Rev. J. C. JENNISON.
[Read August 11, 1927.]

The language of the Kokalango Mala, the name by which the Elcho Island
people call themselves, conforms to the general characteristics which have been
noted in other Australian aboriginal dialects :—

(1) There is an entire absence of sibilants, so that in writing the language
the letter “‘s” is not needed.

(2) Apparently “f,” also, is not required. I have no record of any word
having “f” in it.

(3) Only one occurrence of the “th” sound, and that soft, came under my
notice. The word was always given to me with the same pronunciation,
and I have had to record it so. It is the word for soak, thiripi. To soak
through is thiripi uroka warnderi. I am inclined to think this word
is of Malay origin. To percolate, as water through a filter, is in
Malayan tiris. In Fijian tiri is to drip.

(4) The glottal stop, as in Tongan and some other South Sea languages, is
common. It most frequently, occurs in verbs ending in yun; 1eé.,
jeai’yun, to split open; nger’yun, to breathe; rur’ruryun, to sprinkle.
In the latter instance the pause is carried forward from its usual
penultimate position to separate the duplicated syllables rur’rur. In
my opinion it most often indicates the position of an elided “t.” In
other cases where there is no penultimate stop the “t” is heard in that
position ; baraityun, to throw a spear with the hand; tuptun, to throw
a spear with a woomera; and so on.

In the vocabulary here presented I have included phrases and sentences
giving various forms of the words as I heard them in common speech. The
vocabulary is far from complete. ‘The records were made during intervals of
brief leisure amidst the many pressing duties incidental to the establishment of a
mission station in wild country 400 miles from the nearest source of supplies.

A point of general interest, namely, the intrusional influence of the Malay
language in Arnhem Land, may be dealt with here, Writing in 1866, or there-
about, the Rev. John Mathew declared the existence of traces of Malay influence
in the native languages of New South Wales and other parts of Australia. Dr. A,
W. Howitt, in “The Native Tribes of South-East Australia,” writes :—““He
(Mathew) says that they (the Malay words) are not numerous, are not met with
in the extreme North-West, where they might be expected, but turn up in unex-
pected parts of Australia far removed from casual intercourse with Malays. In
order to account for this Malay element he introduces parties of Malays who,
either from choice or necessity, landed and became naturalised at various spots on
the East, North, and West coasts of Australia. These Malays are thus supposed
to have modified the speech of the people, first, immediately around them, and
then landwards.” After stating Mr. Mathew’s views in these terms, Dr. Howitt
cites the statement of the Rev. R. H. Codrington in his “Melanesian Languages,”
who shows that “of the twelve words selected by Mr. Mathew in support of his
contention three of them, the words for sun, moon, and rain, are found also in
Melanesian. Of the others, the only one that is unquestionably Malayan is bapa

178

(father), but this, or a similar term for father, is found in languages the world
over.”

Of those quoted by Mr. Mathew only one, bapa, is found in Kokalango, the
language of the Elcho Islanders.

Dr. Howitt proceeds to quote the Rev. Mr. Threlkeld, “than whom,” he says,
“no one has obtained so great a knowledge of an Australian language,” as denying
that Australian languages have any affinity with the Malay either in word or con-
struction. “This opinion,” says Dr. Howitt, carries weight not only by reason
of his special qualifications, but because it relates to the languages of South-
Eastern New South Wales, where Mr. Mathew finds a strong Malay clement.”
Continuing the subject Dr. Howitt quotes Crawfurd, author of a “Grammar and
Dictionary of the Malay Language” (1852), who, he says, “speaks on the question
with authority and no uncertain voice.” He states that Crawiurd examined
thirty languages from all the then discovered parts of Australia in quest of
Malayan words without finding one or the trace of one. “They might,” he con-
tinucs, “Shave been expected in the language of Raffles Bay, not distant from the
trepang fisheries of the natives of Celebes, but were absent from this as all other
of the languages.”

My opportunities of collecting the vocabularics of the Western Arnhem
languages were limited to a few months spent on Coburg Peninsula and Goulburn
Islands, but my records show unmistakable Malay influence. In Kokalango
(Elcho Island) and Mau (Goulburn Islands) languages I noted the following :—

English. Malay. Mau. Kokalango.
Boat Kapal Kabala Kapala
Steamer or launch Kapal api Kabala bibi Kapala wipi
Master (“boss”) (Balinese) Pun-
gawa — Bunggawa

Bow and arrows Anak panah — Buna pana
Gun Senapang — Tchinapung
Money Rupia (rupee) — Rupia
Bread Roti — Roti
East Timor Jimuru Timoro
South Galatal Selatan —
West Barat Bara Bara
Loose coat, as py-

jama coat, etc. Baju Bujubuju Baitubaitu
Father Bapa — Papa
Book Surat Diura Diura
Earring Anting-anting — Jingjing
Tobacco pipe Pamadutan — Pamatuka
Flag Bandera = Bandira

T have no doubt further investigation would extend this list considerably.

I had no opportunity to collect the vocabulary of the Wurrugo, the tribe
inhabiting the Coburg Peninsula, in whose language, as recorded at Raffles Bay
and Port Essington, Crawfurd states he did not find a Malay word or the trace
of one, but judging by the above results obtained at Goulburn Islands, 140 miles
to the eastward, I feel sure careful search would reveal the existence of quite
as many correspondences in the language of the Wurrugo.

I have noted a few comparisons with other native languages. The most
striking instance of similarity is in the word for water, kapu. This word comes
to light again in several of the languages of Central Australia, and with slight
modifications is found in the languages of tribes well down in South Australia.

179

Dr. Basedow gives the word for water in Wongapitcha, the language of the
Ullparidja tribe of the Tompkinson and Mann Ranges, on the Western Australia
and South Australia border,“ as “kapi.” Among the Everard Range (South
Australia) ‘natives the word for water, as given by Captain S. A. White,“ is
“ic +

ENCLISH——KOKAT-ANGO.

A Vocabulary of the Language of the Elcho Island Aborigines who call
themselves Kokalango Mala (the Kokalango Tribe).

THE LANGUAGE,

All the sounds of the Kokalango language have their equivalents in English.
‘They can be accurately written without recourse to the use of other letters than
are used in writing the Western European languages.

1. The glottal stop occurs in many words. It is indicated by the sign ’, as in
gei’yun (embrace), tir’t’yun (dip-up), where it occurs both before and after
the “t” sound, ngal’yun (climb). etc. The elision appears to take place mostly
in verbs, and I suggest the clided sound is of either “t,” “k,” or “d.”

2. Ng, soft, as in singer, is written ng; when hard, as in linger, it is written
ngg. All words of the latter type are also written, as in Fijian, in which “q” is
used for ngg. These appear in brackets following the ordinary spelling.

3. Where double consonants are used the second is always the first Ictter of
the next syllable; i.e., watta (wind), wat-ta, except in the case of double “r,”
where the second “r” is used to express the lengthened roll of the “ras in
tortorr (heart).

4, The language is without sibilants, therefore the letter “3” is not required
in writing it. The absence of the sibilant is strange, seeing the natives find no
difficulty in pronouncing such words as sit, stand, Sam, sing, and so on.

5. In the language, as far as I was able to record it, I once only heard the
sound of “th” (soft, as in through). It occurs in the first word of the phrase
“To soak through,” Thiripi-uroka warnderi.

6. All the vowels have the “Continental” values. “U’ has always the “oo”
sound. ‘The soft “u” sound. as in unicorn, is written “iu,” as in niuerda (stinging
bee), honey.

7. “Aw” has the sound of “ow” in cow in all words where the two vowels are
not separated by a hyphen. Where the latter is the case each vowel has its own
distinct value.

#

Encuish—Koxatanco (LANGUAGE or Exctto IsLaxnp Trine).

A. Alligator (crocodile), baru.
Absurd, (?) manganga. And, a: wa (?) after vowels.
After, durdekuro. Angry, marivuna.
You come after: Ni durdekuro. Ankle, dulkun.

Alger Island, Balangara: Macassar name, Another, werepungu.

Dambalia. Ant, koiikoii (koi-i-koi-i).
Alive, walngatiri. Ant, green, ngarli; (Oecophila smarag-
Allot, bauwana: to allot work, bauwana dina).

waga. Anxious, anxiously, ngotyakari.
All, daruwa. Arm (human), wurna.
All done, bili. Arm, tpper, near shoulder, murlo.
All finished, bili bangwina. Armbands, plaited grass. bako:
All here (are)? tuana bili. Is that all? string, narrow. jal.

tuana bili. Armpit, worde.

(1) “The North-West Expedition,” Dr. Basedow.
(2) “Tn the Far North-West,” Capt. S. A. White.

180

Around, liu. Paint around it: burdekuro
hu ngone. As water around an island,
liuyun marama: water all around, kapu
liuyun marama. (See race.)

Arnhem Bay trepanging camp, Long-
go-ja.

Artery, kurkur.

As (like), nakuna.

All the same as, balanyei (balan-ye-i).
Ask, tabirikaityuro (“t” very faint).
Ashamed, kéra (“o” very broad).
Asleep, ngurauakur.

Aunt, father’s sister, mokul:
sister, ngama.

Away, go away, maritji katchu.

Axe, takul.

mother’s

B.
Baby, little, karngoto.
Baby, yuerto.
Bad, yaikuro,
Bandicoot, warntgura. .
Banyan Island, Kawilingura.
Bark (of trees), darau; kulnga.
Stringy bark, gulikaiu (gu-li-kai-u),
Bay, (?) likairayun (lika-ira-yun).

Basket, cabbage palm, guntgun or
guntkgun.
Like dilly bag but thick and strong,
timbouka,

Bat, dikarr.

Bathe, luptun.

Beard, (?) dau-ur (see hair of armpit).

Beautiful, mintijinmeri; a beautiful sky,
mungan mintijinmeri.

Birrtyuruna (birrt-yu-runa).

Be quick, bunda.
Bee, stinging, tauwarr.
bee, niuerda.

Stingless, yarapan; “sugar
from this one, koko.

Belch, kapoanga.

Believe, mariwalti: I believe Jesu’s word,
Ngara mariwalteri Jesu taro.

Belly, human, kurlun.

Belong, tiako.

Nangoui: these boxes belong to Mr.
Jennison. Batimala nangoui: Mis-
ter Jennison—go,

Betroth, to a man, wawainguma (wa-
wainguma q-ng-¢).
Big, dumuru ; iyindi.

Very big, mardumuru; miritiri.

Big mob (people), yurlngo gurlko: 2.e.,
yurlngo, plenty, big; gurlko, people.
“Big Plain” tribe name, Indingur.

Product of this

bag”

Bird, warakan.

A small bird, orange-green back,
white under, black head with
white band around back of head,
tchikai. These are sometimes
caught in spider webs. (?) Lun-
ated honeyeater.

Black, moal.

Blind, bambai (bam-bai).

Blood, manggo, mango (nq==ng-g). (See
menses. )

Blow nose, ngoritji.

Blue, milkomin,

Boast (to boast), lurugoityun.

Boat, kapala. Launch, kapala wipi, cf.
Malay; steamer, kapal api. Malay
origin.

Body, human, yuwal.

Boil, to, bungbungdun.

Boil (abscess), kuyal.

Bone, ngaraka.

Book, diura.
origin.

Boomerang, hooked, niunarn.

Boomerang, ordinary type, karligarli.
Known to, but not used by Elcho
natives.

Born, buko-walma;
walma.

Has been born, bili yuptun.

Borrow, ngankdun.

I borrow, ngara ngankdun.

Boss, bungawa. Malay origin.

Bow down, yurktun.

Bow, of bow and arrows, used as a play-
thing, bunapana (of Malay origin).

Boy, diangi. That boy, nako diangi.

Little boy, kardako.

Boys (N.T. usage, youths or men),
yurlngo,

Bosom, between the breasts, gumur.

Brag, lurugoityun.

Bread, roti (Malay), dampa (damper).

Break (as by bending a stick when man
is the agent), tau’yun; (of itself),

(See letter.) Balinese

ef. sunrise, walu-

dauyuro.
Breast, woman’s, ngamini.
Middle of, above breast bone,

gumur (bosom).

Breathe, to, nger’yun.

Bright, ririgul (as a bright light).
Lanyin (shining as when metal is
cleaned and polished).

Bring, ngango; imperative, kango. Bring

me, kango rako or kango rakala.

Bring back, rongan mura.

Broad, mardtmuru (or o final).

Brother, if older, wawa; if younger,
yukoyuko.,

Mother’s brother, kawal (uncle).

Father’s brother, papa (regarded as
father).

Bucket, bajikalt.

Buffalo, katapanga.

Build, pochama.

3ullroarer, burralla (bur-rala).

Used in initiation ceremonies, kuna-
bibbi. Women are not allowed to
see it, The burralla is sometimes
used as a paddle.

Bundle or sheaf of grass or green twigs,
ete., rulu.

Bury, kurlkuma.

Bush (i.c., forest or scrub country),
yirpili.

To go bush, maritji yirpil.

Butterfly, burnba.

Buttocks, durde.

Buy (lit. give something), kuropan.
By and by, yallala.

Cabbage palm (on Elcho Island few and
small), darrang-ngi (dar-raqi).
Cadell’s Strait—1l. between [Elcho and
mainland, Maiyung; 2, between How-
ard Island and mainland, Gurrar.
Calf of leg, yangara.
Call, watun (wa-tun).
I call, watun mukatara.
You (sing.) call, ni waturo.
You (plu.) call, waturana.
Calm, George, “Water like glass, no
wind,” wapurara.
Camp, warnga.
Canoe, lipalipa.
To cut out a canoe, jaralktun dulmo.
Capture game, ngajatama.
Caterpillar, a very large kind, dapelin;
a small green kind, dalaikman.
Carry (you), carry load, kurokongo.
T carry, ngara kurokama.
You carry, ni kurokongo.
To carry on head, kurokama liye.
Cartridge (gun), ngak-ngana.
Cave, gurnda maer (gurnda, stone or
rock)..
A refuge cave, mertlili; running to
refuge cave, warnderi kari mertlili.
Centipede. laitjin.
Cheek, takal,

181

Cheeky (insolent), marakari.

Chew, nyank’dun.

Child, little, karnggoto (karnqoto) ; little
boy, kardako; little girl, yuertua;
bigger child of about four to nine
years, tumurana.

Chin, taumanupman.

Choke, karaktan.

Chuck away, jalkturu.

Circumcision corrobboree,
(junguwan).

Circumcise, kurka daktunaui.

Clap hands, lur’yun.

Chiton (Squamosus), jirika; (Acantho-
pleura), karlkiya. (See Woodward,
pl. xi., No. 29.)

Clean, daritjal.

Clean it (imp.), daritjal nggo (nqo).

Cliff, tarndar.,

Climb, to, ngal’yun,

Clock, walu (sun).

Close up (near in time), barait.

Close up dead (N.T. phrase, nearly
dead), barait tinggama (tinqama).

Close up (near in distance, nearby),
kalk.

Cloud, mungan (mung-an).

Big, mungan dumuro; little, mungan
ituala.

Cockatoo, black (Calyptorhynchus funer-
eus), arteli; white (Kakatoe galerita),
tang-gi (tanqi).

Cockles, ngakainu.

Cockroach, bordok (both o0’s short).

Cold, ngolwit.

Cold wind, watta ngolwit.

Come over, burapturana. When did you
come over? (across the strait) Natan
numa burapturana?

Come, maritji go.

jungguwan

Come to the house, maraitjini
balalili.
Come quickly (imperative), maritji
burndi.

Come back (imperative), rongi.
Coming again, Jesus is coming again,

Jesus mukato marit]i.

Constellations, names of—

Milky way, Baduro (river). The Arn-
hem native says the Milky way is a
river.

Orion’s belt, Julpan. Elcho people say
it is a canoe.

Orion’s sword, Yaratar. A fish caught

by the man in the canoe.

182

Pleiades, Jungarliwar. A baling shell,
Fusus antiquus (Woodward, pl.
v., 8).

Southern Cross, Wurdegugu. Natives
say fire is burning there all the time.

Commit adultery, nukulu.

Command against (forbid), yaka ni.

Conus marmoreus, bermulla.

Coral, karrar (kar-rar, a’s
See dew).

Cover up, belturo.

Cousins: Man speaking—

My father’s younger brother’s son (1

call him), yukoyuko.

My father’s younger brother’s

(I call her), yapa.

My father’s younger brother’s daughter

‘(she calls me), wawa.

My father’s elder brothcr’s son (I call

him) wawa.

My father’s elder sister’s son (1 call

him), duwai.

My father’s elder sister’s daughter (I

call her), duwai.

My father’s younger sister’s son (1
ie: him), duwai.

; father’s younger sister’s daughter

‘en call her), duwai.

The duwai would call me kalai.

The duwai child is called kurung.

Crawl on hands and knees, ngar-nung;
karl’yun.

Creek, maiyung.

Creeper, edible root, heart-shaped lcaf,
barwung.

Crescent, crescent-shaped, ngarlindi.

Crocodile Island Group, called by Elcho
people Warnhba.

Crooked, jari-pi.

Cross, ¥, maitkar or matkar.

Crossed sticks, nggarndro matkar komar
(Sticks, nggarndro, ngqarndro). Jesus
died on the cross, Jesus tinggama
maitkangura.

Crow (Corus),
wark.

Cry (weep), ngarti. (See ant.)

Cut, as with axc when felling a tree,
tanggiritun (tagiritun); with knife
as in sharpening a pencil, raiuntjun;
with knife or axe as in shaping timber,
jaruktun.

Cuttlehone, ngun-ar-ati-ar.

Cut open, raktun.

very broad.

daughter

wark, sometimes wark-

Cunningham Islands—

South Cunningham, Karlu.
Middle Cunningham, Pumoka.
North Cunningham, Tauwuru,

Cycad (Cycas media), ngato; fronds,
barng; fruit, warakar; pineapple-
shaped top, burlgo.

Cyclone, jarwan.

Cypress pine (Callistris), lanapo.

D.

Dance, as in corrobborec, kerecheri or
kerejeri.

Dark, muna, muna-u; of sky when heavy
rain is coming, moal.

Day, bun-gu-gu or bungonyu;
walupi.

Daughter, kato.

Dead, ting-gama (tinqama).

Deaf, buturomiru.

Decide, ngurkama.

Delirium (of sickness),
Watun, call.

Desire, sexual, form of expressing, batan
durana.

Devildevil, morkoi.

Dew, mendok.

Die, tinggama.

Dig (as digging yams, grubbing trees,
até), belama.

Dig a well, me-el belama.

Idiga hole, } Negara belama mer.

You dig a hole, ni belango mer.

Charlie dug a hole. Charlie ka
belama mer.

Dilly-bag (of pandanus leaf),
(made of string),
almost silent).

Dingo (tame), wartu; (wild), wakin-gu.

Dip up in hand, tirt’un.

Dirty, moimeri (or moitniri), kanot.

(1) have dirty water, kapu kanot
mir-ra.

Disrobe, yupmarango.

Dive (to), luptun.

Do, bi.

Dog, wartu.

Door, durwarra.

Dove, ku-luk.

Down, yirpturt.

Drag, lundo maritji ngora,

Drank, ngulkturo.

Dream, bokawai (bo-ka-wai,
second syllable).

mid-day,

bau-watun.

yarlka;
“ce ”

kaikua (final ‘a

accent on

183

Dress (woman’s), kopaia.
To dress. neroluna.
Put on (this) dress, neroluna kopaia.

Drink, ngulktun (imperative).

Drinking (noun), ngulkturuna.

Is (your) drinking finished? Hilina
ngulkturuna ?

Drop (of water, ete.), jurl’yun (some-
times a “k” is heard, jurlktun).

Drop, to, yuptun.

Drop and break, buluwang-duruna (some-
times sounds like buluwank).

Dry, jurro,

Dry season, ngaraner.

Drysdale Island, Yeringa.

Duck, mutali,

Dumb, torngult.

E,

Ear, botaro.,

Iar-ring, jingjing. (Think this used of
gold ear-rings only.) Having gold ear-
tings, boton jingjing meri.

Harthquake, warnga waraka kurkuriun.
(See Camp.)

Eat, Iuka (‘'u” short).

Edged teol (as chisel), viki.

Elbow, likan, nurnggur (nurnqur).

Elcho Island, Kaliwinko. ~Macassar
name, Takarina.

Elcho tribe, call themselves Kokalango
Mala. Includes the Drysdale islanders.

Embrace, to (with arms), gel’yun.

Emu, urpan.

Encourage (make strong), darlkongo.

End, boke. (See hill.)

Enemy, tu wali yait marikari.

English Company’s Islands, Wartuta,

Enough, bilna dunung, nabili; that is

A

enough, tu wali nabili; bilina.

Eucalyptus, kuderi (has very broad
leaves).

Ivacuate (stool), berltun.

Everlasting, dunggara raradara (dun-
qara).

Everybody, limarurgo, or rungo by itself,

Every night, munamuna.

Every day, biako bili.

Extinguish, bunwaiakongo.

Extract, to (as letter out of envelope),

jauwarikuro.

Exchange (swop), bokoyurlk.

Exchange of lubras (a native custom),
boko-yurlk meal.

Excreta, kurla.

Eye, mel (pr. male).

Eyebrow, milkiningin.
Eyelid, milparamba.

Lr,
Fall, down (as off a cliff), kalkeri.
Falsify (gaimmon), nyartyun.
It is false, vaka tu wali nyarl. (Yaka,
no, not.)
Tan-palm ( Livistona inermis), wuriara.
Tar away, barako.
Fat (noun), gutarr; marlngo.
used with both, gutarr yindi.
Fat (stout), marlngo.
Fat white man,
balanda.
Father, papa (first “a” very broad).
Feared (high) ground; ¢.g., hill on north
side of Waitya (N. Goulburn [sland),
warnga boko marakari.
Feel, to, ngatyatama.
Feel about, kongalgal yuro.
Feeling, gar.
Feeling sick, erikton gar.
Female organ, dala.
Fig (wild), kaitji.
Fight, to, bonameri (accent on second
syllable).
Finish (the), belina.
“Close up finish,” tattwartyuna.
Finished, bili.
Fingers, turnggal (turngal).
To close fingers, nggundau yura.
Finger nail, darerr,
First (as in front), ngatili.
Negara ngatili.
Fire, kurlta,
Firefly, jangapun.
Tish (any kind), kuya (some times pro-
nounced guya).
A brown spotted fish, ngurtali.
water.
A small freshwater fish, burrija.
Another freshwater fish, rimu.
A small saltwater fish, lopa.
A short white saltwater fish, dur-apa,
Fishing, “Tom (wants) to go fishing,”
Tom kuya lili maritji; “Tom has gone
fishing,” Tom kuya lili maritjina.
Fish-hook, bikang.
Fishing line (Furopean make), balandi.
(See White man.)
Fish spear, makur (‘a” short). This
spear is made with three or four points.
Flag, bandira. (Of Malay origin.)
Flames, burdaivala.

Yinda is

marlngo yind1

oe

“T first,”

Salt-

184

Flash, flashing; of lightning only, melk-
melkdun.

Float, to, burktun.

Flower, wurki.

Fly, to, burtun.

Flying ant, jangapun.

Flying fox (Pteropus), dikarr.
Jat.)

Fog, karran.

Follow, malturo.

Follow me, malturo rakala.

Folds of flesh or hollows of the groin,
gurnbai.

Food, ngata. “(Where is) George’s
food?” Nganaka George-go?

Fool, malton.

“You are a fool!” Ni
malton.

“You fool!’ Tu-wali bili nungu
malton. (Lit. That fool belong
you.)

Foot, punggina (pungina), jalkari.
Footmark, luk-or.

Forehead, boko. (See hill.)
Foreskin, ba-ru-warn.

Forget, moma, norma or mongo.

“You must not forget,” Yaka ni
mongo.

Forbid, yaka-jama.
Former (N.T. phrase,
ngoli jurliktun.
Fornicate, nukanaui (nuka-nau-i). Used
with maritji, come; maritji nukanaui.
Forsake, woteri.
Four, murnda-bulal-murnda-bulal,
Frightened, burarei or bararei.
Froth of waves, white, karrara.
Fruit, any kind of bush fruit, burlgor.
Fruit tree with large soft ivy-shaped
leaves, tanqi.
Fruit tree, leaves, compound (triple)
oval; fruit, good; urndarn.
Fruit tree, oval leaves, rough bark,
barmarang.
Sandpaper tree, good fruit, mut-te.
Full up, tangang.
Fur, kangaroo’s, bulkar.

(See Firefly.)
(See

yait-bili

“first’”’) time,

G.
Gammon, to, nyartyun.
Gate, tokai.
Generous, tapinva
syllable).

(accent on second

Get ready, bundinini (second and last “i”
short).

“You get ready quickly,” Amonga
meriuar bundi,

Get up, rur’uro.

Girl, little white, yurto itchuala-nong.

Girl, little black, nimukurnin.

Give, kuropan, ngaiyatulu, kuropulu.

“T give you (this) kangaroo,” Ngara
nongo kuropan wirti.

“(CYou) give me that,” Ngaiyatulu
tu-wali.

“Give me a fish,
ngatyatulu.

Kuropulu is a Howard Island langu-
age word. It is quite often used
by the Elcho islanders; ¢.g., “You
give me a knife,” Ni kuropulu lati
nungu.

Glad (“heart glad’), ngoi ngamati.

“Tam glad”; lit., “I am glad along
heart” in the Kokalango idiom,
Ngara ngoi ngamatina.

Goanna, Janda.

Go away! (imperative) Katchoi!

Go away, bili maritji. (The) spirit goes
away, Berimber beli maritji.

Go bush, maritji yirpili.

Go wrong (ie¢., take wrong track), yait
jangu maritji.

Good, men-mak (pr., mainmack). Second
“a” very short; used for nice, pleasant,
and so on.

Good, namakuli (Jambarapi section of
tribe); namakuro (Kopapiungo sec-
tion), excellent in quality, as good
timber. A word of loftier meaning
than menmak,

Good, makolili, in the sense of perfect,
finished completely.

Goose (Anseranus semipalmatus), kuro-
murt]i.

Goulburn Islands, Manggauuta.

Grass, waimi.

Great, dumuro.

Green, karnamintji.

Green ant (O¢ecophila
ngarti.

Green ant’s nest, yal-lu.

Ground, tjurlka.

Growl, to (in N.T. to scold or rate a
person), marivuna.

Gun, tehinapung. (Malay, senapang.)

”

Nga-rako guya

smaragdina),

185

If.

Hair of head, mura or mara (both right).
If short, jamari marawat.

Hair of puberty: male, balmar; female,
ngulomurung.

Ilair of armpit, dau-wurr.

Hairbelt, martart.

Hammer, to, wuttun,

Hand, kong.

“Tlold out (your) hand,” Kong
ayiro.

IJandle (as of lantern, bucket, etc.),
jimurndi,

Happy (to make), burltyun.

Hard, ngundungar.

Hat, jorngo.

Has, appears to be indicated by the suffix
meri in the case of possession by some
thing, not a person. The bucket has a
hole, baket turdi dalkameri.

Have, I have, ngara kala,

You have, no kala.

kala, not ni kala.
He has, nanu kala.
We have, limaru kala.

Hawk, white-breasted sea-hawk, tamala.

He, ngama; tu, reflexive, follows the
name, subject.

Head, liya.

On head, as (carry load) on (your)
head, liye.

Head man, ngura darwarlango.

Heap, boko ngalp-mera.

Hear, I hear, ngara ngama.

You hear, ni ngama.

Tle hears, ngaii ngama.

I did hear (I heard), ngara ngoli
ngama,

They hear, nguna wallala ka ngama.

I shail hear, ngara galkun yallala

ngamMa,
Heart, tor-torr; “r’s” rolled.
Heaven, karu-warr; “r’s” rolled. “Camp
along Heaven,” warnga karuwarr.
Heavy, ngornung.
Help, to, gun-gat-yuro.
Here, duala.
Hermit crab, gormo,
Hers, neuroko. This flour is hers, tuwala
roti nguroko.
His, nguno. His dog, nguno wurtu.
tiaki. This flour is his, tuwala roti
tiaki.
Ilit, to, (1) hit, wuttun,
(You) hit, wurtero.
(He or they) hit, wu-tu-rana.

N.B.—It is no

Hold out (in hand), layiro.

Hole (in garment, bucket, etc.), dalakar.

Ifole (in ground), mer (pr. mare).

Hole (in septum to put ornament
through), nguro dalakar.

Stick for insertion in same, nguro
kandrupmeri. The ‘‘p” is scarcely
heard.

Honey, koko, niuerda. (See Bee.)

Honour (respect), namakuli,

Honour, to, waga tarlti dari tunupa.

Horn, horns, tandurung.

Hornet, niuwa-niuwa.

Hot, nara; gormur,

House, bala.

How? naltjan? Usually followed by ni.

How far? dika warnganja?

Howl (as dingo), n’yoityun.

Hungry, jungara. That boy is hungry,
tuala yurlngo jungartina. | am hungry,
ngara jungarter1.

I, ngara.

“T say!” (a call to draw attention), wal-
lala!

Idle, yakurtumuru.

In, ngain (nga-in).
ngain yako.

Tn, taramulo.

Initiation ceremonies, gormul.

Initiation ceremonies, corrobboree, kuna-
bibbi.

Inside, deripi.

Instead of, maltun. “Instead of him,”
ngara maltun nango.

Island, takal.

Island between Elcho and Drysdale
Islands; two names are in use appar-
ently, Karuwuru, Niukar-meringora.
Jp to 1921 this island had been no
more than very indefinitely indicated
on the Admiralty charts.

Island north of Drysdale
Bukunkna.

Island north of Bukunkna, Wuntberi.

It, ngone,

“Tn the name of,”

Island,

Jabiru, the black and white crane of the
Territory, kanji.

Jaw, darno.

Jawbone, darno ngaraka.

Jealous, man-otchi-di’yun (manotchidi-
‘yun).

Jelly fish, murlul.

Jelly fish, a stinging variety (“cheeky
fellow’), gaiwarr.

186

Jerk, wariuk-wariyun (the “k” is barely
heard).

Job, jama. (See Work.)

Jolly, biarima.

Jowl, takal. Same word as for island.

Joy, ngoi-ngamateri.

K.

Kangaroo, narrko.

Kall, wut-turra.

Kill with spear, tarpungo,

Kind, meluiyuna tumuru.

Kindle (a fire, ete.), malpulo (kurlta
malpulo).

King (head man), Kare. The tribes do
not have kings and there is no heredit-
ary leadership. The man of strongest
personality for the time being is the
leader. The whites have introduced
the term, and the natives now use it in
an indefinite way.

Kiss, to, junkjungdun.

Knife, lati.

Knob, bur-lon-gun.

Know, murngi; | know, ngara murngi.

Kookaburra, N.T. species, karokal.

L.

Lame, karnung.

Lamp, landira.

Late, too, ? toritna; “You come too late,”
Yallala toritna maritji.

Laugh, to, kitkityun.

Lead, to, unagama.

Leg, muk-ar,

Lend, korng kuropan wariko.

Letter, diura. Malay, surat.

Letter stick, karndru nga-munga-me-en,

Lie down, nguri.

Life, walngar.

Lift, to, lau’murra.

Lift! (imperative) Lau!

Light (glow or flames), burdatyala.

Light, to (Light a fire!), tongur (im-
perative).

Lightning, melkdun.

Lily roots, derepu (der-c-pu).

Lip, tu-wt-ar-ra.

Listen, ngama.

Listen, “Everybody listen,” butiro bidjiro.

Little, itjuala.

Little, very little, mar-itjuala.

Lizard, kurnjulu.

Load, to carry, kurokama.

Load, to carry on head, kurokama liye.

Load (noun), meltun. Big load, miritiri
meltun.

Loineloth, jarijari.

Long, lamberi, wiyin, gurere.

Long, very, maroiin (mar-o-i-in, possibly
the correct form of the word is
marowiyin).

Look, I look, ngara nama.

You look, ni nango.
He looks, ngurunga nangala.

Look! or look here! inguna!

Lose, morma.

Loudly, ?meritiri. Surf roars loudly,
kapu rirakai meritiri.
Love, to (transitive), ngoingamatiri.

This term agrees very imperfectly with
our word “love.” It appears to mean
more exactly “rejoice in or over” or

“find pleasure in.” (See Joy.)
Lubra, meal. “That Inbra is sick,”
tuali meal erikton,

M.

Macassar (country), Kambomaliko.

Make (you make), kabuma.

Make water, wariyun,

Make a sail out of bark, ngamungamat-

yun.

Man, yurlngo. Old man, arlapal.

Mason hee, e-ring-a (accent on second

syllable).

Maternal grandfather, ngati.

Maternal grandmother, mari.

Me, rako. You give me a fish, Near,
(?) you; rako, me; guya, fish;
ngaiyatulu, give.

Mean (adj.), laidal.
yurlngo.

Melo diadema (shell), (Woodward, pl.
vii., fig. 11), kurn-ngari.

Menses, first occurrence of, miliwirin.
After first child, manggo (manqo).
(See Blood.)

Message, dawo.

Messenger, dawo gango.

Middle, bara.

Midwife, ngaiatama.

Milk, ngamuntgur.

Mine, narako. “This flour
tuwali roti narako.

Mistake (to) one thing for another,

burdait.

Mob (people), yurlngo gurlko; lit., big

mob.

Money, rupia (of Malay origin).

Moon, full or nearly full, walmura. Said

to be a man, the san’s husband.

Moon-rise, walmura walmar.

Mean man, laidal

is mine,”

187

Moon, new, ngalindi.

More, bulo. “I want more,” ngara ngai
bulo.

Morning star, banober.

Mosquito, generic term, melkmelk.

Mosquito, anopheline; (stands upright
to pierce), tanbul.

Mosquito screens, cone-shaped, ngun-
murra or gunmurra. First discovered
by the compiler of this vocabulary on
Murungga Island, 14th September,
1921.

(To) Mother fi.¢., as lubras sometimes
mother orphaned children), nggong
{ngong).

Moth, gunba.

Mouse, manbul (‘‘u” short).

Moustache, bulotchomi.

Must, mar. “You must go,” mi mar
maritji. (See Very.)

Mould (on boots and fungoid growth),
borloko.

My, rako. “Bring my
rako ngango.

My, arakora.
yertua.

water,” Kapu

“My little girl,” arakora
N.

Name, yako. New name, yieurta yako.

Narrow, goarlbar.

Native companion (bird), gurdurko.

Nautilus radiatus (Woodward, pl. in,
fig. 10), ngarlindi. The opening 1s
crescent-shaped, hence also the new
moon is called ngarlindi.

Navel, giniger.

Near by, kalki (actually near). Rela-
tively near, kalkina. Sometimes the
word is pronounced galki, galkina, cte.

Near house, bala kalkiwait.

Near, dikana (galki). When used of
person coming apparently means now
arrived or present.

Nearly finished, galkina or kalkina.

Near, “Joni is near,” Joni kalkina.

Neck, maiyang.

Nest, yelo; sometimes pronounced like

yaelo.

New, yiurta.

New moon, ngalindi (crescent).

News, dao.

Night, munau (mun-a-u).

Nipple (of breast), ngaro ngamini.

No, yaka.

No good, yaikuro.

No matter! baid:!

Nothing, va-miren.

Nose, ngttro; kamuro.

Nose stick (worn through septum),
nguro kandru (p) meri; hole in sep-
tum for same, nguro delakai.

Nostrils, nguro dalakar.

Now, tuanavela.

O.

Old, ngartilingo.
Old man, arlarpal.
Old woman, karkarung.
One, wanggain (wangain), nguna.
Oneself as agent; the sufhx yuro signifies
done by onesclf.
Only one, wanggain
wang-gain.

One belong everybody, riako runggo,
bil: (rungo).

Open, to open, as door, laupmurra.

Orchid, grows on Cycad_ boles,
flower, jalkur.

Others’, other man’s, werepungua.

Out, go out, warlma; take out, dauwari-
murra.

Outside, warngul.

Over, ngapalili.

(wangain) ; bini

fine

Paddle, marowala; to paddle, guruma.

Paint, yellow, butalak (last “a” short).
White, kapirn.
To paint a design on a_ person,

burdei’yun, pronounced almost as if
“t” preceded the “y.”

Ked ironstone paint, miku (mik-u).

Palm of hand, tungal tulmur.

Pandanus (Fandanus adoralissimus),
kung-gar (kunqar).

Paperbark tree (Melaleuca), parokala;
bark of, rakala.

Parrot, bilit.

Parrot-fish, lal.

Past (time), jurlktun.

Path, tokar; in jungle, partuar.

Paternal grandfather (father’s father),
marikmo; grandmother (father’s
mother), mormo.

Pay, batyara,

Peace time, diangubela daurdauyun.

Peace, daurdauyun.

Peace come, bonameri limuru ka belina ;
lit., Our fight is finished.

Pearl, gulawu. Accent on second syllable.

Pearlshell, rimurralngo.

Penis, kurka.

Picture, mali.

188

Pigeons, brown, laparr; black and white,
rombura.

Pine, cypress, dwarf variety, pundit.

Place, feared, warnga marakari.

The hill on Waira (North Goulburn
Island), held in superstitious fear
by the local natives, was spoken
of by the Elcho people as““Warnga
boko (hill) marakari.

Plane, to, wirityun.

Plate, manggo (manqo); same as blood.

Play, bultyun.

Please (give me), ngalewa rako.

Plenty, gurlko.

Plug (or bung), tungouna.

Point, as of land, karmuru.

Policeman, upata. Crocodile Is., upaja.

Pony, yaraman.

Pour, to, rartyuro.

Pray, wanga; lit., talk.
warnga. }

We pray, wanganaui.

They have become accustomed to
the use of the English word, but
use it with the vernacular suf-
fixes: Ali pre-ena, we two pray;
limur pre-ar, we (small number)
pray; pre-a-lili, we (many) pray.

Presently, tura.

Present (time), diangubela.

Pretty, mintijimeri or mitjimarmaipa.

Protector, as shepherd of sheep, jaga;
lit., watcher.

Promise in marriage to a man, wawaing-
guma (wawaing-guma, wawaingquma ).

Prow of canoe, ngoru. (See Nose.)

Pumice, mundomundo.

Putrid, burpar.

(N.B. camp,

Q.
Quarrel, to, worlworliyun ; yaityaiyun.
Quarrelsome, meriteri yaityaiyun; mure,
bitjan bitjan bili.
Question, to (ask), tabirikaityuro.
Quick, bundi (come).

R.
Race, wurndiri.
Race winner, wurndiri julkmarama or
wurndiri jurikton.
Rain, barlman.
Rainbow, papijari; lit.,
Papi, a snake.
Rat, marawurti.
Raw, tarngodiko (

dik-o.

Papi’s stripes.

(See Dog.)
“9” short); tarn-go-

Red, mikopmeri (the “p” is hardly
heard).

Red paint, nipirn.

Reef, gurndalili. Gurnda, stone. Lili

appears to signify a quantity of.

Remember, kuiyanga.

Reside (“sit down’), kanina or kan-
nina. (See Rest.)

Rest, “I rest,” ngara kannina.

Revolver, tchilitchilika. Apparently on-
omatopoetic. An endeavour to repro-
duce the sound of the lock action.

Reward (pay), baiyara.

Rib, maderi.

Ridge of house, dentji.

Meeting in a ridge, A tunauti.

“Right-o,” pana.

Road, tokar.

Roar of surf, rirakai (ri-rakai).

Roof, double-sided, !A?, malakmalak
tunati.

Root, big roots, tap root, etc., mukar.

Root, small, fibrous, raki or rake.

Rope, rake (ra-ke). Native rope is two-
ply.

Rough, as timber before planing, ngat-
yakngaiyak.

Round (circular), belkbel.

Rub, yarragaityun.

Run, warndi or warnderi.

5.

Sail of boat, canoe, etc., karoro.

To sail, kakarkaji (accent on last
syllable).

Saliva, larakura.

Salt, jl’la (almost jiala).

Sand, munata.

Sandbank in sea or channel, barala.

Sandfly, kaitcheri mindikmindik.

Sandhill, boko munata.

Saviour, Walna; your (one) Saviour,
Walna kuma; our Saviour, Walna
kunaemeri.

Saw, to (verb), teregeyun.

Say, bitjan.

“Ty say’
tion), Murnda.

Serape (verb), yiripan.

Serub plant, lanceolate leaves, yanyeri.

Scrub tree, very hard wood, tomomo.

Scoop up, with hand as when drinking,

tir’t’?un.

Scorpion, jartam.

(calling a person’s attcn-
“Hello!”

189

Screen for baby, tiltji. This is a pic-dish-
shaped screen of plaited pandanus
leaves used to screen children from
mosquitoes, flies, etc. It is made in
the same way as the gunmurra (cone-
shaped screen), but differs in shape.
It is also used as a carrier for very
young babies, and for that purpose is
simply inverted, the child lying in the
concavity; when so used, it is called
a tolmi.

Scrotum, burrungur.

Sea, tirlavan. Malay, colloquial; lautan.

Seaweed found on boat bottoms, niuarl,

Seaweed or growth like miniature trees
of a substance resembling horn,
bongavato.

Seasick, wanuruma.

Seed, seeds, ngaraka.

Seed cups of eucalypts, gorngaro (gor-
ngaro).

Sell, mali.

Semen, dien.

Send, I send you, ngara nuna datun.

You send, ni daturo.

Sexual intercourse, nukan.

Sexual intercourse, to solicit female,
nukanaui.
Shadow, mali. Also used of photo-

graphs and pictures.
Sheaf, rulu.
to tie in a sheaf, rulu garepin.

Shell (Fissurella listeri, Orb., Wood-
ward, pl. v., 1), tungo.

Shin, baka,

Shining, or flashing, of lightning only,
melkmelkdun,

Shining, of things gencrally, mirra.

Shirt, baitjubaityu. Malay origin.

Short, kureri. Short stick, karnduro
kureri.

Shovel, to (stir up with shovel as when
mixing concrete), kaliwu.

Shovel (noun), jiru.

Shoulder, milipi (mi-lip-i); accent on
the second syllable.

Shout, to, wartun.

Show, kuro.

Shut, kungama.

Shrub, a yellow-flowering, titi (tit-i).

Sick, eriktun. “Are you sick?” Anakar
ni ka eriktun?

Silly, manganga.

Silverfish (insect), burdok.

Silver-leaf tree, yau-un.

.

Sin, ngardi; Jiri.

Sink (in water), kourokouliun (some-
times gourogouliun).

Sink or dive, luptun.

Sinker for fish line, lato.

Sing, miyaman.

Sister, yapa.

Sister of father (aunt), bapa.

Sister of mother, mokul.

Sit, nini. Sit in row, wanggai nini.

Skate (fish), barndro.

Skin, barowan.

To skin, lulukmurra.

Sky, kunduru.

Slack (verb), to slack off rope, yali-
yalktun.

Slack (adjective), yalk.

Sleep, ngura.

Sleeping two together in camp fashion
(i.e., fire, man, man, fire, man, man,
fire, and so on), ngalingura galki.

Sleeping (or stumpy-tailed) lizard, year-
galt. Another kind with pointed tail,
lergar,

Slow, bulnar. Come slowly, bulnar
maritji. Note, adverb precedes verb.

Smash (as smash a plate), buluwank
durana.

Smoke, ngurmar.

Smooth (adjective) of surfaces such as
a planed board. boiyowoiyo.

Sneeze, aitjiri. When a person sneezes
they say, “Someone is calling.” The
sneeze is sttpposed to be the involun-
tary response, eqtivalent to “Yes,
halto !”

Snipe (bird), turing-ga (turinga).

Soak through, thiripi uroka warnderi;
soft “th.”

Soldier (fighting man}, nopanmert.

Sole of foot, tulmo jalkeri.

Soft, yalngi.

Son, if own son, kato; if another’s, kato
meringo.

Something, na-kakari; na-kangura.

Sorrow, warugogo.

Sour, lerakaiyuna.

Spatula, jiru. They are generally made
of wood and used as spoons in eating
food.

Spear, karra.

To spear fish, turtle, etc., bile.

Spider, large black and white, catches
small birds. karr (‘‘r’s’ rolled).

Spiderweb, maraluma.

190

Spill, ngurkungu.
Spit, narakura.
Spirit, berimber.
Split, to split open, jeai’yun (je-ai-’ytm).
Springs at Mission Bay, Elcho Island,
Wunge-gung-gul (Wunqunqul).
Sprinkle, yur’tyun; rur’rurtyan,
Squeeze in hands, meritjan.
Stand, Stand up! tara.
Star, ng-gainyu (ngainyu).
Steady! go steady! bulna.
Restrain! not so hard!
(kuna).
Steal, munangi,
Steps (as the front steps of the Mission
House), toka.
To be distinguished from tokarr,
track.
Stern, of canoe, ete., hinderpart (tail),
durde.
Stick (wood), karndro or kandru.
Long stick, nullanulla.
Sticks crossed (i.e., two sticks laid
across each other), matkar komar.
‘The cross (Christian sign) is called
matkar.
Stingaree, kaukalung.
Stomach (belly), kulun.
Stone, gurnda.
Stone spear, ngambi.
Stone head of spear, ngambi.
Shaft of spear, warrawurra.
Wax used for fastening head to
shaft, kalanyon.
String for same, raki.
Socket depression in shaft end for
taking woomera hook, milak.
Storm, bauuto (bau-uto).
Story, dawo; dao.
To tell a story, dao lakrama; raka
lakrama.
Straight lines, ===, tunopa wariuro.
‘To saw straight, tunopa dakturo.
String, kurkir.
Another kind, used in dilly bags,
waitja.
Stringy-bark tree (Eucalyptus macrorr-
hyncha), garaika.
Bark of, gulikaiu.
Strand, to, run ashore or on reef, etc.,
ngalyun gurndalili.
Strong, miritiri dahl (or darl).
Make strong, darlkongo.
“Come strong again,” gain strength
after illness, etc., dahlterina
maritji.

kung-ga

Striped in colours like rainbow, jari; jari
daruwur.

Suck, bointhointyun.

Sugar-bag corrobboree token, barangol.
Used to summon tribes to the cor-
robboree.

Sugar-bag (honey), from the non-
stinging bee, koko; from the stinging
bee, niuerda.

Sulu (loincloth), jarijari.

Sun, walu.

Sunrise, walu walmar.

Sunset, walu karina.

Sundew, naman.

Suppose, goll.

Swallow, to, dalokaroroandi.

Swallow (bird), mulunda. In Howard
Island dialect, jiirrpari (ji-irr-pari).

Sweet, takai menmak.

Swim, to, waii’tun (wai-i’-tun).

Swelling in groin, durkulo.

Table, pati. Ts
Tail, paka. Bird’s tail, durde wien.
Take, marangala. “Who took the axe?”
Yurlto marangala takul?
I take, ngara marama.
You take, ni manngo (man-ngo),
manangi.
He takes, ngurungo marangala.
Take wrongfully (to), to steal, kango
munang1.
Take off dress (undress), yapmarango.
“Take this letter to Yoram,” Dura tuwala
kango Yoram-wala,
Tale (story), dao, tao.
Talk, to, wanga.
‘Tame (adj.), ngamakuru.
Task, jamauwa (ja-mau-wa}.
Taste, to, karamun {kar-a-mun).
Tea-leaf, kokoa.
Tears, milkart,
Tell, lakrama; wanga or wang.
Tell (talk), wangi.
Tempt, ngaiyan.
Testicles, kumanga.
Thank you, tapi (‘a” short).
That, yali; tuwalh.
‘The, nuna.
Theirs, wallalango (wal-la-lango).
That bread is theirs, tauwali
wallalango.
There, nguna.
They, wallalango.
Think about, reckon, kuyangi.
Thing, na.

roti

191

This, tuwala.
Throw away, jalkturu.
Throw spear, baraityun (with the hand,
not woomera).
With woomera, tuptun.

Throw stone or missile, ngorkongo;
ngorkama.

Thumb, yindikngo,

Thunder, nira (both syllables strongly
accented ).

Thwart of canoe or boat, wurda.
‘Vide, riyalla (ri-yal-la).
Flowing, riyalla ngruteri,
Ebbing, riyalla tokaiaieri
ai-eri).

Tie in sheaves, (rulu) garepin.

Tight, tanaitmurra.

Tight enough, bilina tanait-tura (lit.,
finish tightening).

Tired, kalnga gurkurir.

Toadstool, barngani (bar-nga-n1).

‘Tobacco pipe, pamatuka (Malay, pama-
dutan). It is the Malay type.

To (a place), suffix ona to place name:
Tom went to Kaliwinko, Tom tarara
unuma Kaliwinkona.

To-day, gatura. I saw
ngara nangala gatura.

‘To-morrow, yorng-gongo.

To me, rakala, rako.

Toe, toes, pirning.

Tongue, mata.

Too late, toritna.
ni toritna.

Too much, meriteri.

Tooth, lerra, or learra (le-arra).
times pronounced lira.

Top, ngapunguru.

Tortoise shell, karopo.

Track (pad, path), tokar, tokara. I
know the track, ngara nguni marangi
tokaro.

Track, jungle track or road, patuar.

Track of animal, warmalinggar
ma-ling-gar ).

Tree, generic term, gaiyu.

Small tree, oval leaves, white under-
side, mottled bark, kuramutla.

Tree, thick foliage, caulking gum
extracted from roots, maipin.

Trees from which rope is made—

1, balgoro, the “sandpaper tree”; 2,
baro; 3, barata. The bark of the
barata is used for sails.

Trepang, boleri.

(to-kai-

them to-day,

You (are) too late,

Somie-

(war-

True (of self), bili; (of others), yual.

It is true (of something the speaker

has said), nar ko bili.

Jesu’s word is true, Jesu taro yual.
Trumpet, native wooden dronc pipe, irak1.
Turn away, ngapabilyun.

Turn over, ngurkungu,

Twitching of muscles, tovi. Said to
have sinister meaning or otherwise
according to what muscle is affected.

Twist, as in making string, berereyun.

One’s own arm, wurnar bilyuro.
Two, bulal.

Uz

Ugly, yaitkuro.

Uncle, mother’s brother (“brother along

mother”), kawal (ka-wal).

Under, an.

Undo, yeupmurra.

Undress, yupmarango or yeupmarango,

Up, ngalturo.

Upper, ngapunguru.

Use (verb), kaluki.

rinate, wariyun.

Us (many), limurung-go (li-mu-rang-go)

Uttermost, da-ultun.

Vv.
kurkur,

—

Vein, veins,
Very, mar.
Very good, mar anamakuru.

Vine, wild, kanima. IF ruit of, borum.
Vomit, danguruyuptun.

W.

Wait, kalkun.

Wake up! tari (lit, stand up).

Walk, tyjitjarion or tjitjariyun.

Want, desire, maramba.

Want, ngai; as “I want a drink,” Negara
ngai kapura ngultun (lt., I want water
to drink).

Wash, ruruwatryun,

Wash all over, to, bili ruruwaiyun.

Washing (the), ruruwaiyurina (as in the
sentence, “I have finished the washing.”

Watch, to, meltun.

Watch, to (as a shepherd over his flock
ot a sailor on a boat), jagga (jag-ga).

Water, fresh, kapu; sometimes pro-
nounced kapo.

1 want to drink water,
kapura ngultun.

Water, salt, kaptu murnok (

Wattle tree, balara.

Wave (noun), buambang.

ngara ngai

ee

o” very short)

192

Wave, big breakers ;
torgo.
Wax, korng-gi (Iorqi).
Way (track), tokar.
Long way, barkwalla.
We two, ngali.
We three (or more), limuru.
Wet, mulkar.
Wet, jurro.
To get wet with drops from grass
or trees, karra. (See Fog.)
Wet season, bara (Malay origin).

waves; waves,

Wetnurse, to, ng-gongdo maranauwi
(ngongdo).

Weep, ngarti.

Well again (after sickness), marana
makurina.

Went to, tarara unuma.
Wessel Islands—
South Wessel Island, Rarakula.
North Wessel Island, Murtjenba.
Small island north of North Wessel
Island, Walwal.
Whale, wimeri.
What, nar.
What is that? Nar du (or tu) wali?
What is this? Nar tu wala?
What is there? Nar nguna?
What is your name? Yuer ni yako?
What is his name? Yuer muka ni yako?
When, nata, natan.
When did Tom go away? Nata Tom
maritjina?
When did you come across? Natan
numa burapturana lurkon.
Where, anaka, nganaka, nganakana.
Where is Charlie? Nganakana
Charlie?
White, wattarr (“r’s” rolled).
White ant, minyukolungo.
White man, balanda.
White woman, nuna. |
White froth all over sea as in a big storm,
karrarameri (lit., all white).
Why, nganala, naltjara.
Who, yurlto.
Wicked, maremba.
Wide (as, wide table), belkbelk; goar-

lyindi.
Wild, wakingu.
Wild fellow walk about bush,
yindipwi, wirdikno (or wurdik-
yun).

Will, bulu.
Willywagtail, jirabijirabi.

Wind, watta (wat-ta).

South or south-east wind, timoro.

West or north-west wind, bara.

North wind, long-guruma (lonqu-

ruma).

South wind, tong-gara (tonqara).
Windpipe, nerinnerin.

Wing, wings, bidenbur.

With child, kolun.

Big with child, kolun yuertomert.
Woman (lubra), meal (me-al).

Old woman, karkarung.

White woman, nuna.

Wood, karndro.

Woomera, mangal (mang-al), bunbun.

To throw spear with, toptun.

Word, taro.

Work (verb), near at hand, jamauwa
(ja-mau-wa); at a distance, jamaka
(ja-mak-a).

Working, is, jamaka, Tommy is work-
ing for Bob Moy, Tonimy jamaka Bob
Moya.

Working, jama. Where are you working?
Negana ni jama?

World, wonga ngaraka (or wanga
ngaraka). Wanga or warnga, camp.

Wound (hurt), kartpur,

Writing (noun), wokerti.

Y.

Yam, kang-guri (kanquri). At Karnapi
this kind was found amongst the rocks
on the slope of Point Bristow.

Another kind, muliangara. Has five-

lobed leaf with serrated edge.

Year, tung-gara (tunqara).

One year, wang-gan (wangan), iung-

gara.

Two years, tung-gara bulul (bul-ul).
Yellow, kang-gul (kanqul).

Yes, yo, io. The latter, io, is the same
as yes in Fijian. Sometimes owing to
nasal pronunciation, ea.

Yesterday, bapuro.

Young men, yauwerin.

In Mau (Goulburn Islands), warion.
You, ni; nongo; niki; no kala; namalina.
Your, yours (singular), nungo. ‘This

flour is yours, Tuwala roti nungo;
(plural) numalang-go (numalango).

You come with me, Ni rako malturo.

You sit down (singular), Ni nini;
(plural, “big mob”), Nini numa.

You sit down in (one) line, (plural)
Wangain nguru numa nini.

193

ADELAIDE, SOUTH AUSTRALIA: A STUDY IN HUMAN GEOGRAPHY.
By Cuartes Fenner, D.Sc.

[Read September 8, 1927.]

CoNTENTS, Page

I. Iyrropuction a a i th, oe a i a oe 194
Il. Scopze or THE PAPER .. iH oe ae et ea ne oi 194
TI]. SpecraL CHARACTERS OF THE “Rirt Vater” (figs. 1 and 2) .. oe 195
TV. Tue “Gurr Recion” (figs. 3 and iS 2 sa int ie = 199
(a) Eyre Peninsula : an 4 rs a4 ze 199

(b) Yorke Peninsula an of Ber TA a ec it 199

(c) Fleurieu Peninsula... ie “ty hs ue ee a 200

(d) Spencer Gulf .. od 8 a a, hi 5 be 201

(e) St. Vincent Gulf she Ae ‘ Pn a My are 201

(e) Gulf St. Vincent : . ‘a we ia ee o 201

(g) Tectonic Unity of Structure. : -_ As nes cd, ee 202

V. Tue AveLame Piains (figs. 4, 5, ey £3 5, wt at a 203
(a) The Coastline .. ast a a wed a 203

(b) The Outer Sand Dunes i = ca it oe vet 205

(c) The Lower Deltaic Plan .. a oa he te 206

(d) The Older Sand Dunes 2. Na é, bes - ds 207

(e) The Higher Deltaic Plain .. 7 i on as . 207

(f) The Para Fault Block f, mA tt ih 7 ae 208

(g) Factors determining the City Site .. bs - .. St 209

(h) Factors influencing the Plan of the City .. Se be a 210

(k) The Rocks of the Adclaide Plains .. i ab 3 a 211

(i.) Cambrian, etc. : a a a is as 211

(u.) Tertiary nts yk d ue i - ef 211

(it.) Recent = a 2 2. te 211

VI. Tue Mount Lorry RANGEs nas 6, 7, 8) 4 se 2. ts 212
(a) Introduction oe ‘ af ss a 3 212

(b) General Plan .. Bs a3 es 3 ae 2 a 213

(c) Rock Characteristics .. sh 3 wt is ke or. 215

(i) Overmass: Tertiary .. a a 216

(ti.) Undermass: Cambrian and Pre- Cambrian am a 216

(d) Main Structural Characters .. bie “i a. ua 3 216

(e) The Burnside Fault and Block ed ” te - a 217

(f) The Main Scarp Faults a ne a 2 he ot 217

(g) The Belair Fault and Block . ce be gs - T, 218

(h) The Sturt Fault and Block . #3 a ag a 218

(k) The Mount Lofty Fault and Block is cat “3 219

(1) The Willunga Fault and Block 220

(m) The Bull’s Creek Fault and Block . 220

(n) Sections across the Area. 220

(0) Economic Influences of the Mount ‘Lofty Ranges 222

(p) Selection of the Murray Bridge Site 225

(q) Selection of the Hills Railway Route ne 226

VIL Tue Torrens anp its Estuary (figs, 8, 9, 10, 11) 227
(a) General Survey of the Drainage System of the Adelaide Area. 227

(b) Physiographic Evolution of the Area a , 227

(c) The Torrens River Valley .. 4 y Ps i 8 231

(i.) The Upper Torrens .. a it Aid a3 uh 231

(i.) The Torrens Gorge .. ats or By ve a3 232

(ii.) The Klemzig Valley .. & se a “f ee 232

(iv.) The Lower Torrens wh a i i a 233

(v.) The Patawalonga Creek oe ts hd 234

(d) The Development and Drainage of “the Plains - ¥ T 234

(i.) The Rivers of the Plains .. ne “3 Ae Se 235

(4i.) The Port River Estuary .. a aie - Ms 236

194

Page

VII. Tse Torrens TripuTaries aND AssocraTep STREAMS (figs. 9 and 10) 240
(a) Torrens Tributaries .. 3 ot bs He be xe 240

(t.) Sturt River... Fore as ud ;3 * a 240

(i.) Brownhill Creek a in Pe ats ne sa 241

(iti.) First to Fifth Creeks Me Sty _ teh as 241

(tv.) Sixth Creek .. jet +4 . ae 23 7 242

(v.) Upper Tributaries .. ¥; ee m2 4s = 242

(b) Associated Streams .. ia 7 ih Me ah 24 242

(7.) Little Para River... a be + 3 be 242

(11.) Dry Creek 8 . aA ed rr at ne 242

(ii.) Onkaparinga River .. iy a 243

IX. Errecrs or Greocrapaic Contrors (figs. 12, 13, 14, 15, 16) ae +t 243
(a) Adelaide in its Relation to the State ‘ es re 243

(b) Climatic Conditions .. wh ran a) + ie 244

(1) Rainfall and Evaporation te co “9 ze ote 244

(4i.) Sunshine and Temperature .. i me bg ay 246

(ii.) Winds and Tides san ie ma a a <s 246

(c) Transport and Communications .. v. - — st 247

(d) The Growth of the City Population nd oe 7. ai 249

(e) The Occupations of the People .. te ah ha int 250

(f) The Distribution of the Population 7 a - iS 251

X. List or REFERENCES .. ues i. = zs i ‘3 mr 255
Cuter Maps anp Plans CONSULTED .. a sa - es 2 ee 256

I—INTRODUCTION.

During the past twelve years the writer has been collecting materia]
regarding the physiographical development of the Adelaide area, In 1924
he prepared a brief account of these features for publication in the Handbook
of the Adelaide meeting of the Australasian Association for the Advance-
ment of Science. As far as the physiography is concerned, the present paper
is in part an elaboration of the general outlines there set down, with con-
siderable extension and development of detail.

Throughout the paper attention is given to the influence of the geographic
factors on the settlement, growth, and development of the city and surround-
ings. The economic aspect is emphasised, and the whole subject is dealt with
from the points of view of cause, development, growth, and influence on
human activity.

The science of human geography deals specifically with the present; in
discussing causes and origins, there must, however, be continued considera-
tion of both the geological and the historical past; while the ultimate value of
the study lies in the richness of its suggestions regarding the possibilities of
the future.

IIT—SCOPE OF THE PAPER.

It will be necessary first to refer to the great structural unit of which the
Adelaide region forms a part, and in this connection some peculiar characters
of the so-called “Rift Valley” will be pointed out (figs. 1 and 2). The Adelaide
Plains will then be considered in relation to the “Gulf Region” of the State
(fig. 3).

The main body of the paper will be concerned with a discussion of the
Adelaide area under the various divisions named below, which will be dealt
with broadly, keeping in view the human influences of the various physio-
graphic and climatic factors. These divisions have been set down as follows :—

(a) The Adelaide Plains;

(b) The Mount Loity Ranges;

(c) The Torrens and its estuary ;

(d) The tributaries and associated streams.

The general climatic conditions will be summarized, and note made of the
modes of transport, communications, and occupations. Finally, the growth

195

and distribution of the present population of the Adelaide areca will be con-
sidered in conjunction with a “spot map” of the city and suburbs.

Tribute must be paid to the geological and physiographic work bearing
on this area published by Howchin, Mawson, Benson, ‘Teale, and others; to
the numerous Mines Department maps, and publications by Brown, Ward,
and Jack; and to historical accounts by Blacket, Gill, Grenfell Price, and the
numerous writers of the first decade of South Australian history. The work
of Professor Howchin on the geology and physiography of this area has
extended over almost fifty years, his first geological paper having been pub-
lished in 1886.0 For most of the fundamental geological knowledge that
underlies this paper, much of which is implied rather than expressed, acknow-
ledgment must be made of indebtedness to the work done in this area by
Professor Howchin and Mr. H, ¥Y. L. Brown. The writer is also greatly
indebted for advice and information, readily given, by Sir Douglas Mawson
and Dr. Keith Ward. This paper is an effort to correlate many facts already
known, to add the writer’s own observations and conclusions, collected during
the past ten years, and to present a concise account of the human geography
of this important area.

IIL—SPECIAL CHARACTERS OF THE “RIFT VALLEY.”

In order to deal more fully with the structural features of the Adelaide
area, it is necessary first to describe the great central structural unit of the
State, of which the Adelaide area forms a small part. ‘The unit in question
is the one which has come to be known as the “Great Rift Valley of South
Australia,” with its associated highlands (vide “The Dead Heart of Aus-
tralia,” J. W. Gregory, 1906, pp. 236-243).

The conception of this axial area as a rift valley, which we owe to Pro-
fessor J. W. Gregory, has greatly simplified geological and geographical
descriptions of the State, and has added enormously to our understanding of
many of its problems. It may be pointed out, however, that this so-called rift
valley has many peculiar characters—characters which are not usually asso-
ciated with a rift valley proper.

For instance, a “rift” as generally described implies a let-down block of
country, longer than it is wide, with relatively uplifted highland areas on
either side, and with bounding faults that are more or less parallel. In the
area under discussion we have to deal with something quite different, as will
be realised from a description of figs. 1 and 2.

Fig, 1 shows the Lake Torrens—Spencer Gulf—Gulf St. Vincent area,
with geological and topographical data taken from the S.A. Mines Depart-
ment’s geological and contour maps. Geologically, the horizontally shaded
areas consist of Palaeozoic and older rocks, while the unshaded land areas
represent Tertiary and Recent deposits. Some Cretaceous rocks occur in the
north, and also a small let-down pocket of Triassic coal-bearing rocks at
Copley (Leigh’s Creck), but these do not affect the discussion. The broken
line is the approximate 500-foot contour line.

It will be noted that most of the Tertiary area consists of low plain,
almost level, and that the greater part of the higher land is Cambrian and
Pre-Cambrian. Actually the 500-foot contour line so nearly coincides with
the boundary line between the Tertiary exposures and the Palaeozoic out-
crops that for our purposes they may be considered the same. We may,

(1) Professor Walter Howchin arrived in South Australia in 1881. During his first
six months’ residence he contributed to the daily Press several leading articles on “The
Geological Survey of South Australia”; shortly afterwards a Mines Department was
established and a Government Geologist appointed. The paper above referred to was
entitled, “Remarks on a Geological Section at the New Graving Dock, Glanville,” Trans.
Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. x., Dec., 1886, p. 31.

Palaeozoic fe.
Er Cret, Tert,Recent

— omy 500'Contour.

i

Yas
i }

ry

u
tb
Y
1,

a
s-

“SD a,

a

son
‘i

ag

Fig. 1.
The area of the South Australian “Rift Valley,” showing the essential features
of the geology and topography, as described in the context.

197

therefore, speak of (i.) The Highlands of Palaeozoic rocks, (ii.) The Plains of
Tertiary rocks.

In the western half of the area shown in fig, 1 we have a broad platform
of Palaeozoic and older rocks, really a portion of the great relatively stable
Pre-Cambrian Foreland—the Continental Shield that extends for many
hundreds of miles to the north-west and west. In the central zone we have
the sunken areas of Lake Torrens, Spencer Gulf, and Gulf St. Vincent, with
associated alluvial plains.

Tn the east we have a huge double arc of highlands of Palaeozoic rocks,
shaped like an open “3”, the bottom portion being much the larger and con-
taining within its curve the secondary and lower highland of Yorke Peninsula.
Within this highland area there are many elongated alluvial tracts, par-
ticularly in the “Lower and Middle North,” parallel to the course of the
motntains, of high economic value, constituting some of the best agricultural
areas of the State. In the south, towards Investigator Strait, there are several
patches of Tertiary deposits, roughly triangular, occupying let-down areas on
the tilted fault blocks; the Copley Triassic is a similar triangular let-down
block in the north (see Brown's 1899 map). This great highland belt of
Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian rocks has long been recognised as a very definite
horst, of about Pleistocene age (the Kosciusko uplift).

The “Rift Valley” is seen, therefore, to be of a quite unusual and irregular
shape. This is resolved into its simplest aspect in fig. 2. ‘The relatively
raised and sunken blocks and the chief boundary fault lines are clearly defined.
Concerning these, the physiographic evidence alone is sufficient demonstration
of their existence, and this is supported in every way by the geological
evidence, as already shown in fig. 1. Names are given to these features as
follows (see fig. 2) —

The western boundary faults—The Torrens Fault, the Lincoln Fault.

The eastern marginal highlands—The Flinders Horst, the Mount Lofty
Horst,

The central lower tongue—The Yorke Peninsula Horst.

It will be seen that within these highlands the “Rift Valley” really con-
sists of two semi-circular sunken areas such as are termed sunklands. In the
southern sunkland, the Yorke Peninsula block is simply one of the sunken
segments, relatively less depressed than its neighbours; its existence does not
destroy the essential unity of the southern semi-circular sunkland. The two
sunklands are connected by the narrow “Port Augusta Corridor.”

For purposes of definiteness in discussion these two great half-moon
depressions have been called “The Torrens Sunkland” and “The Spencer-
Vincent Sunkland.” In the east of the area described there are two highland
“spurs” (distinct in their structural characters from the main horsts) which
curve away to the north-east from the Flinders and Mount Lofty Horsts.
They may be called the Yudnamutana Spur and the Olary Spur, respec-
tively ; the latter is much the lower and carries the Peterborough-Broken Hill
railway line.

The Torrens Sunkland does not come any further into the present dis-
cussion, and the Spencer-Vincent Sunkland is dealt with in greater detail in
the section dealing with the Gulf Region. With reference to these peculiar
structural features—bounded on the west by a straight-cut fault along a rela-
tively stable foreland, and having a down-warped or step-faulted sunkland
of semi-circular shape, margined to the east by an arcuate horst—it is
suggested that they constitute structural units of somewhat common
occurrence, and possibly worthy of a distinctive name.

*<
eer

oa

ome

a

Ae | FA

|

lw
—
re)
<
bE
i

ies

FORELAND

ae cE i iD :

Weary UT eal

Fig. 2.
The same area as fig. 1, showing the chief structural features in broad outline.

‘dl

199

Taylor has described such a feature in Lake George and the Cullarin
Fault in New South Wales (ref. 18). The writer’s own observations of the
Victorian Grampians lead him to believe that similar structures control the
physiography of these interesting ranges. It may further be suggested that
the great highland arc of the East-Australian Cordilleras, with its included
tectonic basins, and the stable foreland of the western half of the continent,
constitute a somewhat similar feature on an enormous scale,

This in turn gives rise to the idea—since there is a general agreement that
all these features are closely associated in time—that there is a genetic con-
nection between them. Possibly they are related to outward (tensile) crustal
movements from the stable Westralian “Shield” towards the founderings of
the continental margin in the Coral and Tasman Seas to the east, in Upper
Tertiary time.

IV.—THE GULF REGION.

The Gulf Region of South Australia is not a “natural region” in the
geographic sense, but comprises portions of several geologically and climati-
cally distinct types of country. Although the physiographic features are also
of very varied characters, it has been suggested in the previous section that
the greater portion constitutes a physiographic unit—the “Spencer-Vincent
Sunkland.” This suggestion will be further elaborated here.

The Gulf Region is, moreover, the heart of the State of South Australia
—its most varied and most fertile area. Although comprising little more than
5% of the total land area of the State, it is at present the home of nearly 90%
of the population (see fig. 15).

As will be seen from fig. 3, the area may be broadly simplified into three
southward-pointing peninsulas and three northward-pointing gulfs. We shall
first briefly describe these, geologically and physiographically, and then
emphasise the tectonic unity of structure of the whole of the Gulf Region.

(a) Eyre Peninsula—This is included in part only. The peninsula is
broad-based to the north, and triangular in shape, with an irregular coastline
and many off-shore islands; it is of low relief, mostly less than 500 feet, but
rising in places to just over 1,000 feet; streams are rare; gcologically it is very
ancient (a Pre-cambrian complex), usually regarded as part of the great
Continental Shield—the Foreland—that dominates the western half of Aus-
tralia. ‘Though relatively stable, the eastern portion of Eyre Peninsula has
undergone considerable fracturing in past ages. The overlying Tertiary and
recent deposits are thin and of varied character. he vegetation is mostly
“Mallee’—scrub eucalypt and acacias, with casuarinas, banksias, and asso-
ciated undergrowth; it is developing as a wheat-growing area. The great
mineral masses of Iron Knob and Iron Monarch occur here. The rainfall
varies from 25 inches in the south to 10 inches in the north. The geological
and physiographic facts provide evidence of the existence of a great N.IZ.-S.W.
fault roughly parallel with the Port Lincoln-Whyalla coast, and a little way
inland (F.)—the “Lincoln Fault” (fig. 3).

(b) Yorke Peninsula—An almost parallel-sided peninsula, roughly leg-
and-foot shaped. For the most part it has a very regular coastline, with but
few indentations or islets. It is of low and even relief, the highest point being
a gentle rise little more than 400 feet above sea-level. ‘The area is practically
streamless, and of uniform character. The foundation is of Pre-Cambrian,
Cambrian, later Palaeozoic, and Plutonic rocks—highly resistant to weather-
ing. The peneplahed surface of these ancient rocks is now covered by a rela-
tively thin sheet of Tertiary limestones and gravels, with recent travertines ;
the surface is thus a young and almost undissected plain of deposition. There
is no notable physiographic evidence of later Tertiary faulting within the
peninsula itself, but the whole block consists of an irregular-shaped horst, its

200

probable relations to the Mount Lofty arc of uplift having already been dis-

cussed. The vegetation was of uniform mallee type; this has almost wholly

disappeared, to be replaced by wheat fields and grazing lands. In the north,

rich copper deposits were mined for sixty years; the poorer lands of the south

are valuable for the output from their salt and gypsum lakes. The rainfall
is very even—I15 to 20 inches over the whole peninsula.

Fig. 3.

Plan showing the main geographical and structural features of the “Gulf Region.”
The site of Adelaide is indicated by the letter A. The dotted portions are alluvial
plains within the sunkland.

(c) Fleurieu Peninsula.—This is best considered in connection with its
northern continuation, the Mount Lofty Ranges, and its southern extension,
Kangaroo Island. Thus we have a curved westward-pointing peninsula—the
southern-most limit of the great arcuate horst shown in fig. 3. This peninsula
is economically the most important portion of South Australia. It is of highly

201

varied relief—level plains, high scarp faces, broad valleys, and deep gorges—
the highest point reaching 2,334 feet. Geologically it consists of the same
materials as Yorke Peninsula, but in the highlands the very resistant Pre-
Cambrian and Palacozoic rocks are generally exposed, the less resistant over-
mass of Tertiary limestones having been almost completely stripped off (as
later described in detail).

The physiographic structure is varied, and is dominated by a series of
curving faults. Backstairs Passage is probably due to a sunkland between
radial faults, though Benson has suggested marine erosion in softer Permo-
carboniferous rocks (ref. 1). The site of Adelaide is on the alluvial plains
that lie within the curve of the Mount Lofty Horst (see A, fig. 3). The
physiographic, geological, and climatic variety of this area is reflected in the
vegetation, minerals, and general products, The native vegetation is of the
mallee and callitris suites on the plains, with salt-bush in the more arid
north-eastern parts, and eucalyptus forest on the highlands, where Eucalyptus
elaegophora, obliqua, and rostrata are dominant. Gold, silver-lead, and copper
have been mined in various areas; building stones, slates, clays, and cements
are produced. Orchards and gardens flourish in the highland valleys; vines,
olives, stone-fruits, oranges, etc., in the lower valleys and on the plains. The
rainfall varies from 15 to 47 inches, as later described in detail.

(d) Spencer Gulf—A long, acutely terminated gulf, penetrating the con-
tinent for 200 miles. It is shallow and shoaled, with a maximum depth of less
than 40 fathoms at its wide island-studded mouth, and averaging less than
20 fathoms throughout. The boundaries, except where modified by delta
accumulations, are controlled by faults. Port Lincoln, an inlet near the mouth
of this gulf, was a keen competitor for the site of the capital of the State,
but was rejected by Colonel Light for reasons given in detail on pages 31-33
of his “Journal,” and elsewhere. Several important ports are situated in this
gulf, including Port Pirie, Wallaroo, and Port Lincoln.

(e) Gulf St. Vincent—This gulf is considered in conjunction with its
natural approach, Investigator Strait. The two bodies of water together form
a broad, shallow, boomerang-shaped inlet. Although 40 fathoms deep at the
entrance, it is rarely more than 20 fathoms elsewhere, and averages 16 fathoms
or less. It is shallower towards the west than towards the east. The coasts
are precipitous where they meet the resistant highland mass, on the south
and south-east, from Marino to Cape Jervis and on Kangaroo Island. ‘here
are low cliffs also on the up-tilted eastern face of Yorke Peninsula; elsewhere
the coast is very low, with mangrove swamps and mud flats or sand dunes.
The outlines are tectonic, modified by deltaic accumulations on the east, and
by some amount of marine erosion.

In the northern extremity there is excellent evidence of a recent marine
recession of several miles (an area that was made the subject of an interesting
botanical survey by Osborn and Wood, Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. XLVIL,
p. 244). For reasons given in his “Journal,” Colonel Light early decided that
the most advantageous place for a settlement in South Australia was upon
this gulf, on its eastern shores—a decision confirmed by his belief (un-
fortunately erroneous) that it afforded easy communication with the Murray
Valley. Doubtless Light was influenced in his decision by Sturt’s accounts.
This gulf is not so well provided with ports as is its western neighbour; the
single suitable site for an important port is on the Port River Estuary. On
the western side, where the gulf is more shallow throughout, there are several
small ports, chief of which are Edithburgh and Ardrossan,

(f) Encounter Bay-—A blunt, widely-open bay, to be considered in
conjunction with its one-time northward extension—now the lacustrine,
and deltaic area of the Murray Mouth. This bay was uppermost in the

202

thoughts of many of the founders and pioneers of South Australia as
the most suitable locality for the future capital. Since the stimulus of Sturt’s
Murray River journey of 1831 had so much to do with the founding of South
Australia, and as the minds of the founders turned so strongly to the Murray
Basin this can be readily understood. With that remarkable “topographical
instinct” with which Light has been credited, he was able to sum up in a few
phrases his reasons against an Encounter Bay site, these reasons being
supported by his belief that the southern Adelaide Plains were provided with
casy access to the Murray Basin,

It is urged to-day, with much logic, that the capital city of South Aus-
tralia should have been placed at the mouth of the Murray Valley. That is to
say, it should be in the region of Encounter Bay. We must remember, how-
ever, that Light had to find a harbour where safe and immediate anchorage
could be found for the many immigrant ships that were following so closely
on his heels. In his “Journal” he wrote under date December 17, 1836 (pp. 36-
37): “As much as Encounter Bay and Lake Alexandrina had been talked of
in England, I never could fancy for one moment that any navigable entrance
from the sea into the lake could possibly exist. On looking at Flinders’
chart, and considering the exposed situation of the coast, open to the whole
Southern Ocean, great danger must always attend the approaching it with
fresh breezes; moreover, the very circumstance of so large a lake being there
was a convincing proof to me that the Murray could not have a passage suffi-
ciently deep or wide to discharge its waters into the sea. These ideas I
mentioned in England, and often during our passage, but when I saw the
sandy shore to the eastward of Encounter Bay from the “Rapid” as we stood
over, beating against strong northerly winds, and seeing that this shore of
sand was open to several thousand miles of the Southern Ocean, where south-
west winds prevailed during eight or nine months of the year, I was more
than before convinced that no good and accessible harbour could exist, con-
trary to the general laws of nature. “Deep and fine harbours, with good
entrances on the sea coast, are only found where the shore is high, hard, or
rocky; in other cases such harbours must be in large rivers or gulfs: sand
alone can never preserve a clear channel against the scud of the sea, and
particularly such as must inevitably be thrown on the coast about Encounter
Bay.” This point is dealt with at some length, for geographically the one
flaw that has been revealed by ninety years’ experience of the site of Adelaide
is the barrier that exists between that city and the Murray Basin, and the
geographical necessity for a deep-water Murray port.

(g) Tectonic Unity of Structure of the Gulf Region.—In a paper previously
referred to (ref. 8) the writer described “the great arcuate horst of the Mount
Lofty Ranges, with its shadow or echo in the less elevated and less regular
arc of the Yorke Peninsula Horst nestling within it.’ This description
emphasised the need for an explanation of these relations from the genetic
point of view, Such an explanation has been attempted in the previous section.

The connection between the northern end of the Yorke Peninsula Horst
and the main Mount Lofty Horst is somewhat obscure, and will probably
remain so until more detailed geological and contour maps are available.
West of Port Wakefield the eastern margin of the Yorke Peninsula Horst
appears as a low but very definite fault scarp; this rises suddenly into the
Hummocks Range, and continues northward as the Barunga Ranges. The
available evidence, plus personal observations in the field, suggest that the
broad block of the peninsula tapers towards the north, possibly due to plung-
ing, and the faults of the eastern and the western margin appear to unite and
to mect tangentially with the western faults of the main horst in the Red Hill-
Crystal Brook area.

203

It may happen in block-faulted areas, as pointed out in Section ITI, that
a depressed block is sharply faulted down along one straight marginal face,
but step-faulted or warped down on all the other sides, within a semi-circular
area, the main displacement fading out laterally and the whole feature form-
ing as it were an inverted semi-dome. Thus we get a “D-shaped sunkland,”
as already described and figured.

In the “Gulf Region” we have as the north-western straight-edge
boundary the Lincoln Fault; the semi-circular eastern boundary is the horst
of the Mount Lofty Ranges and Kangaroo Island, broken to the south-west
by the tectonic movements associated with the foundering of the Jeffrey Deep.
Within the semi-circle we have a series of depressed blocks, more or less con-
centric, with one segment uplifted relatively to its neighbours, giving the
Yorke Peninsula Horst. Thus we have a close genetic relationship between
the varied features of the whole of the “Gulf Region,” constituting the
Spencer-Vincent Sunkland, with its associated highlands.

V—THE ADELAIDE PLAINS.

The site of the city of Adelaide is in the apex of the triangular area of
alluvial plains that lie within the curve of the Mount Lofty Ranges, bounded
on the west by the eastern shores of Gulf St. Vincent (see fig. 3). The four
natural divisions involved are The Gulf, The Plains, the Highlands, and The
Streams. Fig. 4 has been drawn to show the Adelaide Plains. This area will
be discussed under the following headings: (a) The coastline; (b) The outer
sand dunes: (c) The lower deltaic plain; (d) The older sand dunes; (e) The
higher deltaic plain; (f) The Para fault block; (g) Factors determining the
city site: (h) Factors influencing the plan of the city; (i) The rocks of the
Adelaide Plains.

(a) The Coastline —Gulf St. Vincent has already been described in some
detail. The chief features that concern us here are the eastern shores, from
the mouth of the Gawler River south towards Cape Jervis. This coast com-
prises two types :—

(i.) Low coasts with sand dunes to the north.
(i%.) Precipitous rocky coasts to the south.

The division between the two types comes at the appropriately-named
suburb, Seacliff, where the Mount Lofty Ranges are obliquely truncated by
the coastline. Northward of this point the coast of Gulf St. Vincent is low,
with ridges of sand dunes, occasional sand-barred stream mouths, muddy
mangrove flats, and the notable and important major break of the Port River
Estuary.

The shape of the coastline is at first sight somewhat puzzling, inasmuch
as the alluvial deposits west of Adclaide do not extend as far west as one
would at first expect. The whole area of Gulf St. Vincent has already been
described as a down-faulted, boomerang-shaped segment, doubtless a series of
blocks (a compound sunkland). This assumes the eastern shore, like the
western, to have been to some extent determined by fault boundaries, and
such evidence from the floor of the gulf as is provided by the data given in the
Admiralty Charts is in support of this. The difficulty is that, if the present
trend of this eastern coast to Cape Jervis has been determined by a fault, this
fault does not rtin concentrically with its better known neighbour faults in
the highlands, but cuts obliquely across them, 4

Important evidence is provided by_the fine series of truncated spurs, of
great scenic beauty, that occur from Carrickalinga Head southward, Sup-
porting evidence of a minor but suggestive character is provided by a small
fault (parallel to the present coast) that forms the eastern boundary of the

204

let-down Permo-carboniferous and Tertiary rocks of Hallett’s Cove. The
close resemblance of the general coastline features to those of faulted coasts
in New Zealand, as described by Cotton (“Fault Coasts in New Zealand,”
Geographical Review, vol. I., No. 1), suggest :—

(i.) That this cliff-bound coast has been determined by a fault-line;

(#.) That the fault was somewhat subsequent in time to the main
Mount Lofty Faults;

(i.) That it may be in part the southerly continuation of what is
called in this paper the Para Fault.

aMTLOFTY

SCALE: (Mites)
2 3 4

Fig. 4.
Plan of the Adelaide Plains showing the physiographic zones, as described in
Section V. The site of the city proper is indicated on the plan. The boundaries
between the various zones are determined by differences of both elevation and
geological structure.

This southern precipitous, wave-cut, upward-faulted coast of highly-
resistant, silicified sediments, etc., from Seacliff to Cape Jervis, provides a
few small gently-curving bays, such as Rapid Bay, Yankalilla Bay, and others,

205

and these were carefully explored in 1836. As would be expected from such
a physiographic history, there is reasonably deep water close inshore in many
places; but there are no real inlets. The coast is exposed to the full force of
the western seas, and the fault-truncated spurs have suffered considerable
marine erosion. There are some fine wave-cut platforms, as at Hallett’s Cove.
A site on this coast (Marino) was, in the early 1900's, the chief competitor
with the present Outer Harbour site.

Almost equally unpromising from the point of view of harbour facilities
is the rising coastline of low alluvial that lies to the north of Seacliff. The
only chance for a harbour, therefore, is a protected estuary. Fortunately, the
discovery of the Port River Estuary by Collet Barker (ref. 15), and its re-
discovery and description by Captain Jones in 1833 (see Proc. Roy. Geog.
Soc. S. Austr., vol. XXII., 1923, p. 73), plus the subsequent persistent and
successful quest of Light for this harbour in 1836, gave to us the two chief
harbours of the State which, together, constitute the fourth port of the
Commonwealth.

After a preliminary use of Holdfast Bay (which is practically open sea),
the Port River (at the so-called ‘‘Port Misery,” and elsewhere) functioned
as the main port of the Province. The present inner harbour, in the Port
River, was declared “open to the world’s shipping” by Governor Gawler in
1840. The Outer Harbour, built on the southward curving continuation of the
Port River, discovered in 1836 and known as Light’s Passage, was similarly
declared open to the world’s shipping in January, 1908. Vhe same under-
water features, namely, Light’s Passage and the curiously-shaped shoal
bordering its mouth on the east (see fig. 11), that have been utilised for the
building of the Outer Harbour, were the locus of an ambitious scheme for an
Ocean Dock presented to Parliament by George Chamier, C.E., as far back
as 1882.

It is interesting to note that in the report of Sir George Buchanan,
K.C.LE., to the Commonwealth Government, dated October 9, 1926, he
suggests that the whole of the northern end of LeFevre’s Peninsula, from
the present Outer Harbour round to the sites of the Electric Supply Co.’s
Works, should be made a line of wharves, with the implied ultimate linking
up of the outer and inner harbours as one continuous system,

Such a broadly conceived scheme would mean the utilisation to a high
degree of the natural facilities that are provided by “Jones’ Harbour” and
“Light’s Passage.” Sir George Buchanan remarks on the “immense stretches
of water available for deep water wharves,” and adds: “Very few ports are
so admirably situated as Port Adelaide for development at moderate capital
cost. The river apparently can be dredged to any depth, and so far as I can
judge from the information available, there will be practically no maintenance
dredging.” The detailed physiography of the estuary is further described in
Section VII.

(b) The Outer Sand Dunes—From Seacliff and Brighton, through
Glenelg, Henley, Grange, Semaphore, and Largs to Outer Harbour, and again
to the north of the estuary, there is an almost continuous ridge of sand dunes
(see fig. 4). Apart from the break where the Patawalonga enters at Glenelg,
these dunes are remarkably regular and even—about 10 chains in width, nearly
20 miles in total length, and averaging 30 to 40 feet in height.

The highest dunes (50 feet) are at Brighton and at a point north of
Estcourt House. Where the dunes have not been interfered with by settle-
ment, they usually show three more-or-less well-defined parallel ridges. They
flatten out to the north of Semaphore and Largs, and help in forming the flat,
square-nosed area known as LeFevre’s Peninsula. At Semaphore, the coast-
line bulges out to the west, forming Point Malcolm and giving rise to the

206

Wonga Shoal. Under the influence of the prevailing south and south-west
winds and associated currents, this long sand spit has been slowly built up
from Seacliff northward. The building of this dune barrier was one of the
most important factors in the growth and development of the lower Adelaide
Plains.:

The northern portion of LeFevre’s Peninsula, from Largs onward, was
for many years a despised and neglected locality, and is still largely waste
land. It needs no special gift of prophecy to foresee that the natural geo-
graphical advantages of this area will be more fully utilised in the future, and
that this peninsula must play an important part in the development of the
city and the State, The western (sand dune) portion is the higher: on the
east there are extensive samphire swamps.

Vhe outer sand dune belt has greatly influenced settlement, as may be
noted from the long line of seaside suburbs listed above; the linear extension
of many of these suburbs is most marked (see fig. 4), particularly where land-
ward extension from the dune area is prevented by the swampy, low-lying
areas of the lower deltaic plain. The dune belt, as befits our Mediterranean
climate, bids fair to present, in due course, one continuous line of seaside
residential suburbs and pleasure resorts from Seacliff to Outer Harbour.
There are excellent beaches, that are greatly appreciated despite the draw-
backs of western aspect and lack of shade. With the population and climatic
conditions of Adelaide, it is natural that this outer sand dune belt should be
made the subject of a comprehensive foreshore-improvement scheme.

(c) The Lower Deltaic Plain—This area may be defined as that lying
between sea level and the 40-foot contour line—the latter line being arbitrarily
chosen as a convenient boundary. The whole of the Adelaide Plains is deltaic
in origin, There is abundant evidence of the eastward extension of the sea
in recent times (vide “Notes on a Recurrent Transgression of the sea at Dry
Creek,” W. Howchin, Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. 36, 1912, p. 34), and of
oscillations in the relation of sea and land. Meanwhile the Torrens and
associated streams have gone on depositing their abundant sands, silts, and
muds, so that there is now an enormous accumulated thickness of these delta-
building deposits.

Some portions of the lower deltaic plain are now high and dry, as in the
growing suburban areas of Woodville and West Torrens. In other places
building has gone on in the face of much difficulty and inconvenience, as at
Port Adelaide and suburbs, and in the more easterly suburbs of Glenelg.
While flat mud banks, close to sea level, are not promising sites, it must be
remembered that great sea ports, such as Amsterdam and Venice, have been
built in such areas.

There is a belt of country, one to two miles wide, running northward
from between Glenelg and Morphettville through the Reedbeds to Port
Adelaide. This is liable to winter floods, is mainly an area of considerable
fertility, and must remain sparsely settled, mostly used for grazing, for many
years. These are the “Cowandilla Plains” of the early settlers; they con-
stitute a feature of what is called the “Floodwaters Problem,” and their special
geographic characters are further dealt with in Section VII.

Finally, there is the portion of the deltaic plain that is below the 10-foot
contour line, mainly muddy mangrove flats surrounded by embankments
—~an area that is at present neither sea nor land; this is also dealt with in some
detail in Section VIJ. The lower deltaic plains contain our chief port and
most of the important manufacturing suburbs, as well as large areas of
orchard cultivation and grazing lands. Here, also, is the site of an important
aerodrome, and of many sports grounds.

207

One of the more valuable positions for city growth within the sand-dune
and lower delta areas appears to be the northern portion of LeFevre’s
Peninsula, where zoned extensions are now slowly proceeding northwards
towards Outer Harbour—factory sites along the river front, residential
suburbs along the seaward front on the west, and potential wharfage and
railway areas around the northern end.

(d) The Older Sand Dunes.—Naturally, there was more than one belt of
coastal dunes formed during the westward and north-westward extension of
the Adelaide Plains. Such features are mostly transitory, and few traces of
them remain. There is, however, one belt of old sand dunes that should be
mentioned, since it evidently marks a physiographic feature that existed for
a considerable period of time. This belt of old dunes is of some economic
significance, in that they provide garden sand, building sand, etc., and also
because they provide dry and varied areas on the otherwise swampy plain.
Because of their reddish colour, they are very noticeable features of the delta
plains as viewed from the hills. Where they occur in the lower parts of the
deltaic plain, the raised, dry areas are suitable for settlement and are so used
in places.

These dunes are up to 50 feet in height, but have been for the most
part levelled down. In no less than three localities—Seaton, Glenelg, and
Kooyonga—they have provided sites for golf-links. The dune belt is irregular
and discontinuous. It extends from the east of Glenelg, roughly parallel to
the coast, northward to Port Adelaide, and possibly forms the higher western
portion of Torrens Island; it is about 13 to 2 miles back from the present
coastline, and may mark the last lengthy period of still-stand of the shoreline.

(e) The Higher Deltaic Plain-—This is defined as the area between the
40-foot contour line and the 100-fuot contour line (vide contour plans, vertical
interval two feet, of the Hydraulic Survey, and the Conimonwealth Military
Contour Sheet of Adelaide). It is really the older, and therefore the higher-
level portion of the plain eastward of the “lower deltaic plains” above
described, and running up to the Para Fault Scarp (sce fig. 4),

Since the Para Scarp disappears to the south of Adelaide, the 100-foot
contour line may there be taken to provide a suitable boundary. The building
up of the deltaic plains has been the work of at least three agencies -——

(i.) The rising coastline ;
(ii.) ‘The accumulation of river-borne deposits; and
(iii.) The building up of sand-dune deposits under the influence of the
prevailing southerly and south-westerly winds and tidal sweep,

The higher deltaic plain really consists of widespread fan-deltas extend-
ing outwards from the mouths of the streams, where they cmerge from the
higher fault-block adjoining to the east (see fig. 4). The chief of these fan-
deltas, clearly to be seen on the contour maps referred to, are of (a) Little
Para River (to the north of the area here described, but shown in fig. 4);
(b) Dry Creek; (c) Torrens River, economically the most important; and
(d) the less well-defined fan-deltas of Brownhill Creek and Sturt River.

Fach of these [an-delta areas is economically important. The Little Para
Fan provides the site for the village of Salisbury, and its fertile surroundings ;
the Dry Creek Fan is mainly occupied by the Municipal Abattoirs and asso-
ciated settlements. On the Torrens Fan are the important and thickly-
settled suburbs of Hilton, Mile End, Thebarton, Hindmarsh, Bowden, Croy-
don, and Kilkenny. On the area farther to the south we have the residential
and manufacturing areas of Richmond, Plympton, and Edwardstown, and the
beautiful vine and orchard districts of Marion.

208

(f) The Para Fault Block.—This is the third and the most important zone
of the Adelaide Plains proper. It comprises a broad belt of country sloping
southward from the Para Hills (north-east of Adelaide), gradually becoming
lower until, to the south of the Torrens River, this block of ground merges
into the general levels of the plain (see geological sections, fig. 7).

For purposes of definition it may be regarded as that area within the
100-foot and the 500-foot contours (see fig. 4). It must be remembered, how-
ever, that the 500-foot contour line, which bounds the foot of the main Mount
Lofty Scarp from the opening of the Torrens Gorge to that of the Brownhill
Creek (10 miles), bends outward from the foot of the range where it passes
to the north of the Torrens Gorge, and extends into the range to the south of
Brownhill Creek. North of the Torrens Gorge, to the Little Para River,
the 1,000-foot contour marks the eastward boundary of the Para Block. East
of this line rises the steep western face of the Mount Lofty Horst.

The Para Block is composed of highly resistant Cambrian and older
sediments, heavily folded and very perfectly peneplaned. The visible portion
of the block extends from beyond Gawler southward for 25 miles to Adelaide.
It borders the western scarp front of the Mount Lofty Ranges and is fairly
uniform in width—about five miles. The profile of this block may be seen
to advantage from the Port River and thereabouts. The general surface level
is some hundreds of feet above the plain at Gawler, 400 feet above the plain
at the Little Para, gradually plunging downwards until it disappears below
the plain at Adelaide.

In addition to its southward plunge, this block is, particularly from
Golden Grove southwards, tilted easterly towards the range, a matter that
has had important consequences.

The western scarp face of the Para Block is a marked feature of the
landscape for its whole length, and has been one of the chief controls of all
road and railway communication in its neighbourhood. This southward-
plunging, eastward-tilted block is the most important of all the purely
structural factors in the settlement and development of the city and suburbs
of Adelaide. In a previous paper the writer referred to this as the Yatala
Block (ref. 8, p. 12); Howchin has referred to its buried portion as the
“Adelaide Shelf” (ref. 12, p. 148). From the point of view of the exposed
portion of the fault block, the name “Para,” however, seems the most fitting,
being a native name (meaning water, vide Cockburn’s “Nomenclature of South
Australia”) and having been associated with the geographical nomenclature
of the block since the earliest days of settlement (sometimes spelt Parra, vide
1841 map). The block has undergone youthful dissection along the scarp
face, with deeper valleys where it is crossed by the Little Para River, Dry
Creek, and the Torrens River.

South of the Dry Creek Gorge the Para Fault Block shows little or no
exposures of the bedrock of which it is for the most part composed, It
becomes covered with soils and travertines, and the uplifted western edge
forms the long northern ridge along which the residential arca of Prospect,
Natlsworth, Enfield, and other suburbs is spreading so rapidly. To the east
and south-east the covering of younger rocks and of river gravels and alluvial
materials becomes deeper and deeper owing to the southerly plunge and
easterly tilt of the block, until its character is entirely lost in the general
alluvial plain.

The effect of this tilted block on the Torrens River has been to divert it
to the south-west; in its passage across this block we have the most beautiful,
the most fertile, and the most historic portion of the whole Torrens Valley.
The physiographic conditions at the western edge of the Para Block provide
that this super-imposed river should there form a “gorge.” This has been

209

done, but the block is so low, and the rocks here forming it—Tertiary lime-
stones, alluvial, and travertine—are relatively so soft that the “gorge” is wide
and mature-looking, bounded on the north of its mouth by Montefiore Hill
and the adjoining elevated area of North Adelaide, and on the south by what
we may call, for purposes of reference, the Newmarket Hill. This portion
of the Torrens Valley has become the gateway through which passes the
whole of the railway communication of the capital city. It was reserved by
the founder for Park Lands and Public Buildings, and is largely so used.

(g) Factors determining the City Site—We shall endeavour to show how
the foregoing factors influenced or controlled the selection of the site of
Adelaide. The earlier historical aspects will not be dwelt on at any length,
since they have already been set down so fully in such papers as Grenfell
Price’s “Geographical Problems of Early South Australia’ (Royal Geo-
graphical Society of Australasia, S. Austr. Branch, vol. XXV.), and else-
where (refs. 15, 16, 17).

The successive factors in the selection of the site of Adelaide were :—

(i.) Gulf St. Vincent (shelter and central position).
(4%) The Adelaide Plains (wide fertile spaces).
(iti.) The Port River Estuary (secure harbour).
(iv.) The Torrens River (supply of fresh water).
(v.) The Para Block (high level ground).

Colonel Light has set out the reasons that led him to favour the eastern
shore of Gulf St. Vincent in preference to all other available sites, having in
view the main factors of harbour facilities, fertile soil, water supply, and
access to the Murray Valley. Price (ref. 16, 17) has shown that Sturt, before
this, had expressed favour towards the eastern shores of Gulf St. Vincent.
In this, Sturt and Light showed that topographic knowledge and instinct for
which both men have already been noted.

The next factor was to discover a harbour for the sheltering of the
immigrant ships that were following so closely. Here Light’s observations
and information led him to favour Barker’s Inlet (“Sixteen Mile Creek”),
discovered in 1831, mostly referred to by Light as “Jones’ Harbour’ (because
of Jones’ account of 1833). The fertile and beautiful plains of Adelaide all
the more strongly inclined Light to find a harbour in their vicinity—fertile
spaces being first among all the factors of human geography.

The search proved an elusive undertaking, on account of the peculiar
physiographic features of the lower delta of the Torrens, and the fact that
the chief arm runs parallel, and not normal, to the coast. The harbour was
ultimately discovered, and, setting aside the vicissitudes of the search for the
best site within the inner port, this decision formed the second step in the
selection of the site of the “first city.”

The next requirements were fresh water and good ground for a settle-
ment. The lower deltaic plains were rejected for obvious and excellent
reasons. The higher deltaic areas (above the 40-foot contour) were con-
sidered, were favoured by Governor Hindmarsh, but were ultimately rejected
by Light because of the signs of occasional flooding. The Torrens promised
to provide a water supply adequate for all requirements for some time, there-
fore it was decided that the scttlement should lie along the river. A good
city site should have some eminence and freedom from floods; thus the Para
Fault Block came into the discussion. The site must also be as near as
possible to the harbour.

For all these reasons it came about that the point nearest the harbour,
where the uplifted western edge of the Para Fault Block is intersected by
the Torrens Valley, was the determining point in the selection of the site of

210

Adelaide proper, and here, on February 11, 1837, somewhere about the corner
now occupied by the Newmarket Hotel, the survey of Adelaide was begun.

This place, called “Newmarket Hill” in a previous paragraph, is a very
slight rise (30-40 feet), but it is a most significant rise; it is the southward
continuation of the scarp that appears across the valley in Montefiore Hull.
It covers the position of a great north-south fault, the Para Fault, in which
the adjoining western block (the Croydon Shelf) is thrown down some two
thousand feet (ref. 12). On the Adelaide Plains, Nature provided almost ideal
geographical conditions for the site of a city; Colonel Light wisely interpreted
those conditions.

(h) Factors influencing the Plan of the City—A variety of theories has
been propounded and many strange stories told about the reasons for
Adelaide being laid out as it is. Some of these accounts appear to be based
on the quite unnecessary assumption that Light must have “copied” his plan
from some other city. Others, possibly emphasising the fact that Light was
a soldier, and forgetting that he was also a surveyor (and, as we know, an
intelligent town-planner), have striven to see in the plan hidden ideas regard-
ing fortifications, defences, range of guns, and many other matters for which
we have no evidence. In this connection, the “stepped” arrangement of East
Terrace has provided material for a number of theories.

It is desired to show, and to establish from Light’s own words, that he
designed the city to suit the physiographic conditions of the site, and that no
military or other external considerations entered into the matter. This is
exactly the attitude of mind with which we should have expected a trained
and capable man to enter on his job.

The first important decision was to build the city in two parts, using the
high level land (average height 140 fect above sea level) on both banks of the
river, with the larger portion on the southern side (see fig. 4). This was
determined by the lay of the land (consult military or hydraulic engineer's
contour maps). The Para Fault Scarp being the western boundary, the angle
at which the river came down from the north-east left a smaller elevated area
north of the river than was available on the south. Light’s first scheme, as
shown in his map of February 7, 1837 (reproduced in Gill’s “Biographical
Sketch of Light”), was to make the smaller rectangular North Adelaide area
parallel with the southern larger rectangular area of South Adelaide.

When the survey got down to details the finer points of the relief of the
area naturally asserted themselves. North Adelaide was brought closer to the
river, and tilted to one side to suit the contours of the country. Considerable
additions (towards Pennington Terrace and Lower North Adelaide) were
also made on the sunny east-facing slopes of the Torrens Valley. This
brought the north-western corner of North Adelaide along the sloping face
of the fault scarp; consequently Mills Terrace was “stepped off,” as we know
it now, by leaving out some of the blocks so that it would fit the contours.

The north-eastern corner of the proposed South Adelaide rectangle was
also found to lie along a valley (the small valley that runs through the East
Park Lands into the Botanic Gardens), and here also some blocks had to be
left out, and East Terrace is thus “stepped off” to suit the contour of the site.
The important part played by the contours in this lay-out may further he
gauged by the emphasis placed on the shading of the more important slopes
in Light's first detailed map of Adelaide, the one that shows the numbered
acres (ordered by the House of Commons to be printed, January 26, 1838).

In the interior arrangement of streets and squares, and the setting aside
of Park Lands, it is, of course reasonable to assume that memories of such
cities as Catania and others played a part (wide “City of Adelaide Year Book,
1927,” p. 232). But there can be no doubt that the general plan of the present

211

city of Adelaide was determined by a wise and thoughtful man seeking to
make the best use of the geographical advantages of the site sclected.

He has told us that he moved his camp to the site of Adelaide on January
3, 1837, so as to be near his work, and he then wrote in his “Journal”
(p. 43) :—"From this time to January 11 I was employed in looking repeatedly
over the ground, and devising in my own mind the best method of laying out
the town according to the course of the river and the nature of the ground.”

There is possibly no other city in the world, of similar importance, where
the various geographical factors determining the site can be so easily recog-
nised and so readily confirmed from the words of the founders themselves.
Having completed our account of the origin of the city on the Adelaide
Plains, we shall briefly consider the rocks of the plains and then pass on to a
survey of the adjacent mountain ranges and the rivers, returning in a later
section to the question of the growth and development of the city and suburbs.

(k) The Rocks of the Adelaide Plains —F¥or the purpose of a survey of
the rocks of the Adelaide Plains, we may consider the latter as comprising
that triangular portion south of Dry Creek, and enclosed between the main
Mount Lofty Scarp face and the sea (see fig. 4). These paragraphs should
be read in conjunction with fig. 7, which shows five geographical sections
across the plains. Dealing with the rocks, their resistance to erosion, their
economic value, and the nature of their soils, we have :—

(.) Cambrian and Older Rocks.
(.) Tertiary Rocks.
(iti.) Recent Rocks.

(4.) Cambrian and Older Rocks.—-In this area the Cambrians and Pre-
Cambrians consist largely of hard and massive quartzites, as seen in the Dry
Creek quarries. They are intensely resistant to erosion, apart from the fact
that they are usually very much jointed and fractured. They prove to be of
little use as building stone, on account of the difficulties of quarrying and
dressing. They are much used as ballast and as a road metal, but are of
inferior quality for the latter purpose. They break down to form a porous
sandy soil, characteristic of the plains.

(it.) Tertiary: Rocks.—These, as will be explained later, overlaid the
whole of the Mount Lofty region in middle Tertiary times, and possibly up
to the beginning of the Pleistocene. On the northern portion of the Para
Fault Block they have been quite stripped off by Pleistocene and Recent
erosion. South of the Torrens, on the buried portion of the Para Fault Block,
these even-bedded fossiliferous limestones and clays still occur, overlying the
peneplaned Cambrians and Pre-Cambrians; they are recorded in the well and
bore sections in the area (vide Mines Department publications),

The beds outcrop with an easterly strike and a gentle southerly dip on
the south bank of the Torrens, behind what is now Government House, but
these outcrops are not now visible, the quarries having been covered over by
later constructional work. These rocks were relatively easily eroded. They
have been used with success as building stones; and they added to the value
of the deltaic soils of which they formed part.

(tit.) Recent Rocks—Recent deposits consist almost wholly of the water-
borne accumulations consequent upon the uplift in early Pleistocene times of
the various fault blocks of this area. Thus we have thick fault-apron con-
glomerates and fan-delta accumulations along the base of the main scarp
front; gentler fan deltas, with gravels, sands, and silts, extending over the
Para Block, and outward from the base of the latter to the sea, modified in
their distribution by wind and tide and stream as already detailed in the
preceding sections.

212

The later alluvial deposits of the Adelaide Plains are of wide variety,
varying from the fine muds of the mangrove flats, upwards through silts,
sands, gravels, and conglomerates, to huge blocks weighing 5 to 6 tons. The
latter have been described by Howchin (Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol 45,
1921, pp. 29-32). Over certain areas beds of clay predominate near the surface,
and give rise to the so-called “Bay of Biscay” land, where buildings are liable
to cracks owing to variations in the seasonal conditions of the soils. There
is a wide belt of country in the eastern suburbs, from Prescott Terrace to the
foothills, remarkable for the number of water-worn boulders, up to 6 inches in
diameter. An excavation for deep drainage, open at the time of writing, shows
an extraordinary accumulation of large boulders, at depths of from 2 feet to
10 feet, along Greenhill Road, from the Mental Hospital eastward.

The only other recent rock types worthy of mention are the travertines.
These appear to be the modern relics of the tertiary overmass of limestone
that once covered the whole of the Para Block; in other parts they overlie
these limestones. They are quite close to the surface and shallow in depth,
and are a result of the wet winter and dry summer of this area. They are
specially marked in a belt extending through North and South Adelaide
proper, and although friable and without any controlling joint planes, they
were at one time used extensively for building purposes. The silts of the
delta plains and the Torrens Valley provide beautiful orchard and garden
soils, though clay belts of less value occur; the clays were, in the early days,
. used for pisé and brick dwellings, and later for making roofing tiles; the
manufacture of bricks and tiles is still carried on.

The story of the progressive development of building materials is a most
interesting one, The present city of Adelaide is built almost wholly of brick.
stone, and cement. It is by far the most solidly built city of the Common-
wealth (vide “Commonwealth Year Book”), possibly because of the combined
facts of timber scarcity and abundance of brick and stone. According to the
1911 census, the following were the relative percentages of stone (including
brick and concrete) houses in the various States:—South Australia, 85;
Western Australia, 43; New South Wales, 42; Victoria, 36; Tasmania, 23;
Queensland, 3. The early settlers used canvas tents and imported wooden
houses. The use of brick and rammed earth (pisé) came in very early.
Travertine, the handiest stone of the plains, followed. Then came the Ter-
tiary limestone, and later the fine building stones of the quarries of the Mount
Lofty Ranges—Glen Osmond, Mitcham, and Tapley’s Hill slates and mud-
stones. Brick dominated the next period, and is still the chief building
material, though stone is considerably used, with cement concrete for more
important edifices.

VI—THE MOUNT LOFTY RANGES.

(a) Introduction—These ranges have been described in a general way in the
opening section dealing with the Gulf Region and the Fleurieu Peninsula.
We are here concerned only with the section reaching from the Torrens River
area south to Cape Jervis. The Mount Lofty Ranges constitute one of the
chief assets and one of the most keenly appreciated beauties of the Gulf
Region of South Australia, and indeed of the whole State. The values of the
“Hills” were eloquently, though briefly described by Sir Samuel Way (Unveil-
ing of Light Memorial, June, 1905):—. . . “One of the finest plains in the
world, under the shelter of the beautiful hills which have moderated the
climate. They have secured us from drought, have furnished us with a
beautiful water supply, and with a glorious picture.” There is a popular belief
that these ranges are of great geological age; actually they are young geologi-

213

cally (Pleistocene), although the rocks of which they are built are very
ancient.

(b) General Plan—The general plan of the Mount Lofty Horst is shown
in figs. 1, 2, and 3. The chief facts of the geology and the structure are
excellently set out in H. Y, L. Brown’s 1899 Geological Map of the State, and
in subsequent maps published by Dr. L. K. Ward (Director of Mines). The
structural features have been dealt with by Benson, Howchin, Mawson, Teale,
and others. The economic aspects have been described in various Bulletins
by Mr. R. Lockhart Jack. Even before the structural fault-block features of
the range had been observed, the relationships between the Tertiary and the
more ancient deposits, as shown in Brown's map, had been set out in a most
illuminating manner.

The step-faulted character of the Mount Lofty Ranges can be readily
seen from any vantage point in Adelaide, as shown in the sketch (fig. 6). In
fig. 7 five sections, with diagrammatic geological details, have been drawn
from the available topographic information; these illustrate the step-[aulted
characer of the front of the range. That the early settlers recognised this
structural peculiarity is shown by the name of “The Tiers,” that used to be
applied to the ranges. This name has quite gone out of use, except in the
case of the more remote “Hindmarsh Tiers,” still so called.

Benson, in his “Notes descriptive of a Stereogram of the Mount Lofty
Ranges (Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol 35, 1911, p. 108, ref. 1), recognised
many of the outstanding fault lines. He recognised also that Mount Lofty
and Kangaroo Island were one great tectonic unit, and not two (a north-
south and an east-west) as sometimes supposed. Much additional assistance
to the physiographer has since been given by the Commonwealth one-inch
military contour map of Adelaide, and Edmunds’ valuable form-line maps,
that cover a greater area. The Lands Department's general form-line map
of the hills district of 1897 is an invaluable aid. The large-scale contour
plans (V.I. 2’) of the Hydraulic Engineer were kindly allowed to be trans-
ferred to a one-inch scale (V.I. 10’), which was carried out by Mr. J. A.
Tillett, and this has been of great value in working out the physiographic
history of the plains. Further survey work must be done in the hill areas
before the whole story, even in general outline, can be told.

The main “blocks” of the ranges have been set out by Nature on broad
and sustained lines. The differential movements of the various blocks are
abrupt, as seen in sections across the range (fig. 5), but consists of gentle
warping and plunging in direction parallel with the main fault line. Dr.
Walter Geisler, of the University of Halle, who is familiar with block moun-
tains on the Continent of Europe, told the writer that he knew of no place
where the tectonic structures were to be seen so plainly and diagrammatically
as are those of the Mount Lofty Ranges from a vantage point such as
Chandler’s Hill, The two frontal blocks (Burnside and Belair Blocks) are
narrow and roughly flat-topped. Having ascended the latter at, say
O’Halloran’s Hill, the eastern blocks may be seen rising with long even sky-
lines (the old peneplain levels) one behind the other. The steep scarp faces
slope to the west, and the long peneplain faces lie towards the east.

The ultimate working out of the physiography of these ranges will
involve long and detailed work for three reasons :—

(i.) The valleys are in many cases partly tectonic, 7.e., dominated by
crustal movements, as in the major part of the Onkaparinga
Valley;

(t.) In the southern portions they are influenced (vide Howchin,
Teale, and Mawson) by the re-exposed fossil landscapes of
Permo-carboniferous times; and

214

(iii.) Over all these the influence of Pleistocene and recent erosive
work and river capture have been exerted to bring about a
harmonious drainage system; the conditions are particularly
favourable to extensive captures.

The present writer does not follow Benson and Howchin in the belief
that the old pre-uplift river system in the Mount Lofty Ranges was
dominantly meridional, that is, that such rivers ran more or less parallel with

ADELAIDE PLAINS MT. LOFTY HORST

ST. VINCENT GULF PARA BLOCK ' .

Fig. 5.

Block diagram of the area showing the Adelaide Plains, some of the tilted blocks

of the Mount Lofty Horst, and the Torrens and Onkaparinga Valleys. This

figure is purely diagrammatic, and is intended to suggest the leading structural
features of the area,

the fault scarps. and he here puts forward an alternative explanation. It is
quite possible that on the pre-Pleistocene limestone plain there was no river
system whatever, just as we find on similar limestone plains to-day.

215

Wherever the writer has investigated block faulting in this and other
States, an outstanding feature has been found to be the fault-apron of alluvial
that lies along the base of cach fault scarp (particularly along the Greendale
and Bacchus Marsh series of faults, ref. 9) quite irrespective of the later
development of the drainage networks. These alluvial accumulations might
easily be mistaken as marking the courses of old linear streams running
parallel to the fault scarps, whereas they have actually been deposited by
short steep streams that developed on the scarp face, flowing at right angles
to the lines of the alluvial deposits in question.

(c) The Rock Characteristics——The various rock types, described as far as
their resistance to erosion is concerned, are as follow. They are divided into
two main groups :-—

fi.) The Overmass.
(it.) The Undermass.

A consideration of the facts as at present known regarding southern
Australian physiography brings one to the inevitable conclusion that the
whole of the great Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian complex, with later rocks
protected in down-faulted or down-warped “pockets,” had been planed down
to a most perfect peneplain by the end of Oligocene time.

Over large areas in South Australia and Victoria this peneplain was
depressed below sea-level in Mid-Tertiary times, when the shallow seas,
known as the Murravian Gulf, extended eastward over southern Victoria and
westward over probably the whole area that is set out as the “Gulf Region”
in fig. 3. Thus the Mid-Tertiary coastline of South Australia was consider-
ably to the north of the present coastline. This shallow sca slowly became
dry land during the upper Tertiary period, and from then onwards up to the
culminating period of the Kosciusko Uplift in the early Pleistocene, the over-
mass of level-bedded Tertiary limestones, perhaps three hundred or more feet
in thickness, was uplifted. Where it covered the main horsts and was exposed
by elevation it has subsequently been stripped off by erosion from almost the
whole area, particularly in the case of the Mount Lofty Ranges.

The subsequent discussion of physiographic features necessitates a
determination regarding this “overmass.” Its existence appears to have been
recognised (vide Howchin, in “An Outlier of Older Cainozoic Rocks near
Mallala,” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol 36, 1912, p. 14), but its profound
influence on the subsequent physiographic history of the area does not appear
to have been stressed.

The evidence for this “overmass” may be summarised as follows :—

(a) The Tertiary limestones come close up to the fault scarps that
bound the eastern and western sides of the Mount Lofty Ranges.
(In this connection sce Bryan and Whitehouse, “Later Palaeo-
graphy of Queensland,” P.R.S.Q., vol. AXXVIIL, No, 10, map
on page 113.)

(b) The uplift (Pleistocene) is known to be younger than the lime-
stones (Miocene).

(c) The limestones have been involyed in the fault movements as
shown by folded and tilted beds at various places along the
Willunga-Noarlunga coast, as described by Howchin (Trans. Roy.
Soc. S. Austr., vol. XXXV., 1911, p. 47; also vol. XL., 1916, p. 258).

(d) The overmass of limestone still remains in those places where the
beds have been protected from erosion as on the plunging and
dipping Mount Lofty Block at Port Willunga, on the Para Block
where the limestones exist intact beneath the site of Adelaide, and
on the depressed Croydon Shelf to the west.

216

(e) An outlying remnant of the uplifted limestones exists at the head
of the Hindmarsh River, recorded by Howchin, Benson, and
others, at an altitude of 900 to 1,000 feet, Elsewhere travertine
deposits possibly bear witness to relics of the old Tertiary over-
mass, as suggested to the writer by Mr. P. 5. Hossfeld.

(f) The great difference in the powers of erosion-resistance between
this limestone overmass and the Cambrian undermass should
satisfactorily account for the completeness with which the
stripping has been carried out. (For accounts of the complete
disappearance of overmass on uplifted blocks in other areas see
refs. 5 and 9.)

The rocks are :—
(7.) Overmass—Tertiary rocks.
(ti.) Undermass—Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian rocks.

Tertiaries—These have already been described or referred to in different
places; they are relatively weakly resistant to erosion, level-bedded, and con-
sist of limestones with interbedded clays and gravels, etc. They may be seen
characteristically as low marine and river cliffs at Port Willunga, and at the
mouth of the Onkaparinga.

Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian.—The younger of these two ancient series, as
shown on current geological maps, lies mainly along the inner curve of the
Mount Lofty arc, with the more complex older rocks to the east. The linear
arrangement of the granitic masses of the Pre-Cambrian suggests that the
same curving structure that is so characteristic of the latest tectonic block
movement was originally impressed during the crustal movements of the
early palaeozoic mountain-building epochs.

The rocks themselves are abundantly described elsewhere; they consist
of grits, conglomerates, quartzites, slates, limestones, tillites, schists, gneisses,
and plutonic rocks, all highly indurated, with silicification and recrystalliza-
tion; they are extremely resistant to erosion.

All the beds are not, of course, of the same order of resistance; thus, in
the scarp front that faces Adelaide, the less resistant argillaceous limestones,
calcareous slates, and mudstones give us rounded hills and smooth-sided
valleys, such as Green Hill—the vantage point from which Light surveyed the
Adelaide Plains in February, 1837. The quartzites give us bold, high, serub-
covered hills such as Black Hill, and precipitous valleys and waterfalls as at
Slape’s Gully and Morialta. In addition, though it does not closely concern
the Adelaide area, mention must be made of the Permo-carboniferous glacial
deposits, readily eroded, and thus presenting once more to the air large areas
of later palaeozoic landscape features (fossil landscapes), as first recognised
by Howchin in 1910, and later described by him in the “Journal of Geology,”
Chicago, 1912, p. 200.

(d) Main Structural Characters-—An effort has been made to indicate the
outstanding structures in a block diagram (fig. 5). From west to east we
have :-—

The Adelaide Plains and Estuary.

Para Scarp and Para Block.

The Burnside Fault Block.

The Main Scarp Fault, from the Little Para Gorge to Seacliff.
The Belair Fault and Block.

The Sturt Fault and Block.

The Mount Lofty Fault and Block.

The Willunga Fault and Block.

The Bulls Creek Fault and Block.

217

This summary does not attempt to cover the more obscure areas where
minor or more eroded fault scarps are suggested. An effort is made to con-
solidate the present position by detailed descriptions of the blocks and
reference to their economic significance.

The Adelaide Plains and the Para Block—These features and their economic
influences have already been dealt with in detail in Section V,

(e) The Burnside Fault and Block,—The Burnside block is really no more
than a narrow “fault splinter”; it is described by Howchin (ref. 12). It has
been so obscured by fault aprons and gravels that it is not easy to define the
limits of either the block or its western boundary fault; but the bedrock is
here and there exposed by quarrying operations, On account of the clays in
the covering deposits, there is a row of brick kilns following along the line
of this block (see figs. 6 and 7),

(£) The Main Scarp Faults—This set of faults constitutes a tectonic feature
of high importance; it dominates the geography of the whole Gulf Region.
Within the area of fig. 3, it has a linear extent of over 100 miles, and the
maximum movement along its face (in which, of course, more than one fault
plane is involved) is of the order of 2,000 feet. In order of importance the
Para Fault might be considered next, since this appears to be the dominating
feature of portion of the eastern contour of the Gulf, and involves an additional
downthrow of some two thousand feet. The Willunga Fault possibly comes
third; a continuation of this line probably forms the northern face of Kan-
garoo Island (see fig. 3, and Admiralty Chart No. 2389).

STURT BLOCK
BELAIR BLOCK

BURNSIDE BLOCK ’

GREEN HILL
jSLAPES GULLY

LITTLE MOUNT eiest creeK,

ADELAIDE — PLAINS —

Fig. 6,
Sketch of portion of the Mount Lofty Scarp Face as seen from Adelaide, showing

Mount Lofty and the step-faults; drawn from a photograph. This view covers
only two or three miles of the searp front, in its most deeply dissected part.

Viewed from Adelaide, the main scarp front is gracefully capped by the
twin domes of Mount Lofty (2,334 feet) and Little Mount (see fig. 6). The
old peneplain levels can be readily seen on the Sturt and Belair Shelves, The
distinction between the treeless and the timbered areas that is so noticeable
a feature (not indicated in fig. 6) is largely a matter of rock types. The lime-
stones, mudstones, and slates have produced gentler slopes and better soils,
with grass and trees, and perhaps also with a greater temptation to clear off
the timber so that the grazing value of the land might be increased. The
timbered areas, that appear dark in the distance, are covered by thick native
scrub and undergrowth; the timber in such places is scrubby and not worth
moving for its own value nor for grazing purposes; such dark-coloured hills
are almost wholly of massive quartzites.

A very superficial examination of the spurs and gullies of the main scarp
indicates to the geologist that any one fault-block, as here described, consists

218

in reality of a maze of blocks, a marquetry or mosaic of varying rock types
and structures (see Howchin, Trans. Roy. Soc. of S. Austr., vol. XXVIIL,
1904, p. 253, and Plate XLIV.). Positive details on these points can be
determined only by an adequate geological survey. It is this variety of rock
type and structure that gives to the western aspect of the range much of its
beauty, with its graceful skyline and bold front forming a magnificent back-
ground for the city of the plains.

(g) The Belair Fault and Block—Vhe nomenclature which has been applied
to these tectonic blocks is varied and confusing. While the name of the
Belair Block has remained fixed, others have not been so treated. This is
partly due to the varying aspects from which the features have been regarded.
For instance, one author gives two different names to the same portion of one
scarp within the limits of one paper. The present writer has adopted what
seemed the most distinctive name, and has given to the western fault of each
block the same name as the block.

The Belair Block rises to about 1,000 feet. It also is a narrow block, a
mile or so in width, but broadening towards the south. The peneplain surface
is remarkably well preserved in many places, so much so that on this much
dissected area it has been found possible to establish golf links, These links
are really set out on a remnant of the pre-Miocene Plain, an area carved down
by slow processes of wave and running water millions of years ago, ‘The
Belair Block becomes one with the Sturt Block as it slopes downwards
towards the south, where it forms the flat top of O’Halloran’s Hill, a site that
has been used for aeroplane landings. The block tapers and plunges, more
gently, to the north, dying out towards Black Hill.

There are two features of special economic interest in the Belair Block.
On an alluvial plain such as that on which Adelaide is built, the provision of
material for roads and paths is most important. Thus it comes about that,
because the nearest supplies of rock for such purposes may be obtained on
the Belair Block, every other spur and gully has its quarry and rock-crushing
plant. Along this block also are several of the chief pleasure grounds, rela-
tively easy of access and providing a scenic change for the people of the plain;
the chief are those of National Park (Belair), Waterfall Gully, and Morialta
(see fig. 16). Towards the sea, limestones enter largely into the composition
of the block, and give us gently-sloping grassy hills; here, also, are the
Brighton Cement Works and the important limestone quarries established by
the Local Government Department near Hallett’s Cove.

(h) The Sturt Fault and Block—This also is a long narrow block, but some-
what wider than the Belair Block, rising behind the latter towards Mount
Lofty (see fig. 7). It is continuous towards the north, beyond the Torrens
Gorge, where its western face probably becomes the main bold scarp that
abuts on the Para Block. Towards the south the Sturt Fault dies out and the
Sturt Block merges into the Belair Block. Where the two blocks become one,
there occurs the extensive erosion of Coromandel Valley and the Sturt tribu-
taries that come down from the National Park.

Some of the rocks here are more easily eroded, and the most southerly
point at which the Sturt Fault is traceable is along the 1,000-foot line within
the National Park, Belair; Picnic Point is on the Sturt Block, and the Pines
Oval is on the Belair Block. In its highest portion (fig. 6) the Sturt Block
is a deeply gullied one—a multitude of steep-sided valleys all running normal
to the scarp faces; but from certain distant views, particularly from the north,
the remnants of the level surfaces of these blocks can be clearly differentiated.

The southern extension of the Sturt Block is occupied by a small longi-
tudinal stream that is important as the site of one of the chief reservoirs of
the metropolitan water supply. The nomenclature of this valley or stream

219

is worthy of mention. It is well known to geologists as Field River; in a map
of the State dated 1841 it is called Hurtle Vale; recent maps, such as the
Military Contour Map, call it Hallett’s Creek; while to the water supply
atithorities it is known as Happy Valley. In its lower reaches it is noted for
its exposures of contorted Cambrian, or older, sediments, made famous by
Mr. J. Greenlees’ excellent photographs. There is some evidence that this
valley was at one time the southern extension of the Sturt Valley,

(k) The Mount Lofty Fault and Block—This is a broad block, very heavily
dissected. It is the most elevated portion of the horst. It has been suggested
that Mount Lofty and the Little Mount were monadnocks, residuals on the
ancient peneplain, or alternatively that they were smaller single blocks that
projected high above the general level and had been shaped by subsequent
erosion. From the evidence presented by the summit levels throughout the
ranges regarding the regularity of the pre-Miocene peneplain, and because the
rocks of Mount Lofty, ete., are not of specially higher resistance than those of
neighbouring eroded areas, the writer is inclined to regard them simply as the
remains of the most highly elevated portion of the Mount Lofty Scarp (see
fig. 5).

The Mount Lofty Block as a whole is highly resistant. Its outline
dominates the appearance of the mountain skyline from the west, just as the
block itself is chief of the difficulties of communication across the range (sce
fig. 6), and makes of the whole horst the barrier that it is between Adelaide
and the Murray Basin—a barrier which still presses heavily on the economic
welfare of the State. The block extends northward through Breakneck Hill
and Mount Gawler towards Barossa, and on its northern extension the well-
known Humbug Scrub occupies its western portion.

It is dominantly a quartzite block, but other varieties of rock (including
limestones, phyllites, schists, and “diorites’’) occur, as seen in the fine section
that is presented in the Torrens Gorge. To the southward it extends in a
well-dissected ridge to Noarlunga, near which place it is cut through by the
gorge of the Onkaparinga, In this locality, where some geological mapping
has been done in detail by Professor Howchin, the mosaic character of the
numerous interlocking blocks is prominently shown.

In its southern portion this broad block is tilted strongly to the east,
abutting against the high Willunga Scarp. This eastward tilt provides the
tectonic valley that is occupied by the Onkaparinga River for a considerable
part of its course. The recognition of this character in the Onkaparinga
explains much that would otherwise appear anomalous. As far as the avail-
able evidence goes, it would appear that the Onkaparinga may be regarded
in part as a superimposed river, but its course has been profoundly affected by
the faulting; its present valley is largely tectonic. Its superimposed character
is stiggested by the fact that it has been necessary, and passible, for it to carve
a course through the rising western edge of the Mount Lofty Block, giving
us the gorge near Noarlunga. The alternative possibility of this being due
to capture by headward erosion must not be lost sight of.

Another interesting feature of this Mount Lofty Block, well shown in
the block diagram in Teale’s paper (Bull. No. 6, Dept. of Forestry, Univ. of
Adelaide, 1918), is the formation, at the base of the Willunga Scarp, towards
the sea, of a triangular area now filled by alluvial material overlying the
Tertiary limestone overmass, here largely preserved (see fig. 5).

From its shape and its alluvial content the McLaren Vale triangle of
plain has been referred to as the old estuary of the Onkaparinga, There is
excellent evidence in favour of its tectonic origin, with the filling partly due
to residual overmass and partly to rock waste from the surrounding ridges.
The shape of the area presents none of the irregularities of an estuary, but

220

on the contrary is exactly defined by the faces of the adjoining tectonic blocks.
Though the chief feature of this triangular area is its tectonic origin, the writer
is not prepared to maintain that the Onkaparinga did not at one time flow
into it, with subsequent diversion, or capture by headward erosion.

In its extension northward towards the Torrens Gorge, the Mount Lofty
Block is occupied in part by the valley of Sixth Creek. From Upper Sturt,
through Crafers, Stirling, Piccadilly, Summertown, Uraidla, to Cherryville,
the sloping and dissected surface of the Mount Lofty Block is occupied by
many fertile valleys with orchards and gardens that provide most of the fruit
and vegetable requirements of Adelaide.

Before closing the account of the Mount Lofty Block, the writer would
like to record his belief that there are certain definite minor blocks and fault
scarps within this main larger block, as in the Mount Bold Ranges, the Forest
Ranges, and Mount Gould. He has been unable up to the present to collect
sufficient evidence to establish these suggested relationships. The decipher-
ing of the detailed block structures of the Mount Lofty Horst will take many
generations for its accomplishment. The present effort aims to be no more
than one step forward on the work done by Benson (ref. 1).

(1) The Willunga Fault and Block.—This is a remarkable physiographic
feature as we see it developed behind Willunga and at Sellick’s Hill. The
scarp loses its boldness and definiteness as we proceed northward. It has
been greatly reduced by erosion in the upper reaches of the Onkaparinga and
the Torrens, but possibly reappears more strongly in the ranges about Mount
Crawford.

(m) The Bull’s Creek Fault and Block.—Beyond the Willunga block to the
east rises the level-topped scarp of the Bull’s Creek Range. The continuation
of this range along the general direction of the fault system, the physiographic
evidence of the western front of the range, and its almost unbroken stretch
along the Mount Torrens Range to the maturely dissected country about
Mount Pleasant, suggest this to be another great tectonic unit. This portion
of the area has not been examined in detail by the writer, and the fault is
assumed purely on physiographic evidence. To the eastward there are indica-
tions of other blocks, sinking gradually to the Tertiary plain, but the country
is more broken up, and not sufficient geological nor physiographic data have
been collected to attempt any detailed definition.

(n) Sections across the Area—-One of the most productive aids to physio-
graphic study is the construction of sections in areas where a detailed contour
survey has been made. In fig. 7 five such sections are presented. These run
from west to east across the Adelaide area, and are parallel to one another.
They are drawn from the data given in the Commonwealth Military Map of
Adelaide. The geology shown in the sections is purely symbolic, and does
not suggest the rich variety of Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian rock types that
actually occurs. A section through the ranges, showing the rock types and
dips, has been made by Mr. R. Lockhart Jack, Deputy Government Geologist,
but has not been published. The sections shown in fig. 7 pass respectively
through the following localities:—(1) Golden Grove, (2) Port Adelaide,
(3) Adelaide, (4) Mount Lofty, and (5) Belair. ;

These sections convey definite and valuable physiographic information,
and little additional explanation or description is necessary. Evidence pro-
vided by them has been repeatedly used in the discussion of the physiographic
features already dealt with :—

Section 1 passes through the low swampy areas of the Port River Estuary
across the fan delta of the Little Para, reaching bed-rock in the uplifted Para
Block, about 11 miles from the sea, On this block are the piedmont sands
and gravels that extend down to Golden Grove, and which, from their

221

peculiar character (a general mixture of all sizes), have been found specially
suitable for the making of certain types of modern roads. Beyond Golden
Grove rises the bold timbered scarp face of the main range.

Section 2 passes through the sand dunes of Semaphore and the site of
Port Adelaide. Six miles to the east, the Para Scarp is met at a lower
elevation than in Section 1. The Para Block here appears to be much wider
than it is in the first section, but this is partly due to minor variation in the
directions of the fault lines. The exact relations between the frontal faults
north of the Torrens Gorge (Sections 1 and 2) with those to the south (Sec-
tions 4 and 5) have not yet been worked out.

Section 3 commences on the outer dune belt at South Henley, and passes
through the swampy area known as the Reedbeds (the Lower Deltaic Plain).

| GOLDEN GRovE
LITTLE PARA PARA oi

WATERFALL J
BELAIR aS J iy
le

PATA} CAMBRIAN, (RBM TERTIARY, C=)RECENT

Fig. 7.
Parallel sections drawn from east to west across the Adelaide area. From
topographic details given in the Adelaide Shect of the Commonwealth Military
Survey. Each section represents 16 miles from west to east and lies exactly
south of the one preceding it; the geological details are symbolic of rock ages
but not of rock types and structures.

Five miles from the coast is noted the slight rise that is due to the buried
Para Block. This is the rise that determined the position of the capital. The
section then passes across the alluvial that overlies the Para Block, with the
higher piedmont accumulations covering the Burnside Block (500 feet) and
rises rapidly to the Belair level (1,000 feet), then to the Sturt Block (1,500
feet) and finally in a less well-defined rise to the Mount Lofty Block (see
fig. 6).

Section 4 crosses a narrower portion of the plain; the Para and Burnside
Blocks are here hidden below the surface, and the main scarp of the range
is met with seven miles from the coast. A much greater width of the ranges

222

comes into this section, owing to the south-west curve of the horst, The
Belair Block is well defined; the Sturt Block is deeply dissected, and the
massive Mount Lofty Block is here seen at its greatest elevation.

Section 5.—The alluvial plains in this section are narrower and the sand
dunes are higher. The main scarp face is more gentle (here used for the
trunk railway line), and is only five miles from the coast. The Belair Block,
still at 1,000 feet, is wider; the Sturt Block here consists largely of glacial
accumulations, and is more dissected. On the Mount Lofty Block are scen
some of the tributary valleys of the south-flowing Onkaparinga.

(0) Economic Influences of the Mount Lofty Ranges—The influence of the
ranges on the rainfall and general climatic conditions of the main settled
portions of South Australia is profound. An examination of a series of
weather maps, and of the correlation between the isohyets and the contour
lines as shown, say, on Ward’s 1917 map of South Australia (see also rainfall
gtaph in fig. 12), provides convincing evidence in support of the contention
of the writer (A.A.A.S. Handbook, 1924) that “the very existence of the State
of South Australia, as we know it, is dependent on the uplift of this are-
shaped highland belt,” and the associated tectonic movements that formed
the sunklands.

To come to details, we may consider the economic influences of the
Mount Lofty Ranges under two heads :—(i.) those influences that are favour-
able to the State, and (ii.) those that are unfavourable. The favourable ones
may be dealt with under five sub-headings; the unfavourable needs but one.

(1.)—Favourable: (a) Climatic influences.
(b) Water supply.
(c) Farm and garden areas.
(d) Health resorts.
(e} Scenic beauty.

(ii.)—Unfavourable: (a) A barrier to communication with the cast.

The climatic influences have already been referred to. In brief, the
climate of the eastern Gulf Region is cooler and the rainfall higher because
of these ranges. Possibly the aspect of the country for ages prior to the
Kosciusko Uplift was little different from the present-day aspect of the
Nullarbor Plains or perhaps the Murray Mallee.

The account of the water supply needs little elaboration; the catchment
areas are set out clearly in the map on fig. 8, made from plans published by
the Hydraulic Engineer’s Department. From the figure it will be seen that
the greater part of the valleys of the two chief streams—the Torrens and the
Onkaparinga—have been already utilized as catchment areas. The heavy
broken line (B) represents the division between the highlands and the plains,
whereon the site of the city of Adelaide is indicated at A.

It is along the line B (fig. 8) that the all-important geographical control
of “height” becomes manifest. Water flows from a higher to a lower level ;
rain falls more abundantly in higher regions. Thus the higher region cast
of the fault line B gives us at the same time the double advantage of con-
veniently situated catchment areas with a rainfall up to 47 inches per annum
(the highest in the State), and sites for high-level reservoirs. Thus the
hundreds of thousands of people who live crowded together on the small
triangle of plains west of the line B are able to obtain the abundant supplies
of good water without which their existence would be impossible.

In fig. 8, G represents the Upper Torrens catchment that is diverted into
the Millbrook Reservoir, the latter being shown with its own small catch-
ment area at F. A second weir near the mouth of the Torrens Gorge draws
upon the catchment area of the Torrens and Sixth Creek (E), the water being

223

diverted into Hope Valley Reservoir (C), and Thorndon Park Reservoir (D).
These three reservoirs are also shown in the section accompanying fig. 9.
The Onkaparinga Valley (J) is dammed at the Clarendon Weir, and diverted
into the Happy Valley Reservoir, shown with its own small catchment area
at (H). Fig. 8 indicates very clearly the extent to which the N.E.-S.W.
tectonic lines have affected the shapes of the catchment areas concerned.

Fig. 8.
Map showing river catchments and reservoirs of the metropolitan water supply,
as described in the context.

The main frontal scarp streams, including the Sturt and Little Para, run
but little except in the heavy winter rains, and are then heavily laden with
suspended material; these streams have at present no value from the water
conservation point of view. Future extensions for the water supply will
possibly be to,the southward. The catchment areas to the north are already
utilised, the Warren and Barossa Reservoirs being just beyond the area
shown in fg. 8. The streams shown in the figure as falling eastward to the
Murray basin are, with the exception of the Finniss, lower both in rainfall
and in elevation.

224

The following are the details of the water supply of the metropolitan
area, as published by the Hydraulic Engineer’s Department ; it will be realised
that in the Torrens Valley the catchment areas overlap; the heights given
are from sea-level (L.W.S.) -—

(i.) Millbrook Reservoir—Torrens Valley; catchment area, 88 square
miles; low water, 916 feet; high water, 999 feet; capacity,
3,647,000,000 gallons.

(ii.) Hope Valley Reservoir—Torrens Valley; catchment area, 135
square miles; low water, 295 feet; high water, 346 feet; capacity,
765,000,000 gallons.

(iii.) Thorndon Park Reservoir—Torrens Valley; catchment area same
as Hope Valley ; low water, 282 feet ; high water, 323 feet; capacity,
142,000,000 gallons.

(iv.) Happy Valley—Onkaparinga River; catchment area, 170 square
miles: low water, 448 feet; high water, 485 feet; capacity,
2,803,000,000 gallons—plus 390,000,000 gallons below low water
level.

(v.) Proposed Myponga Reservoir—Catchment area, 43 square miles ;
low water, 650 feet; high water, 715 feet; capacity, 3,621,000,000
gallons.

(vi.) In dry years the underground supplies of the Adelaide sub-
artesian basin, in the Sturt district, have been tapped and pumped
into the mains.

The numberless valleys of the upland areas, enjoying an abundant rain-
fall, abound with orchards, farms, and gardens, which provide the city of
Adelaide with a fresh supply of varied foods. The less fertile highlands are
the sites of week-end cottages and holiday resorts, furnishing welcome relief
during the long hot summer months. Many country residences have also
been built in these hills, where good motor roads make rapid communication
possible for light traffic, despite the heavy grades. The scenic beauty pro-
vided by the foregoing features are an outcome of the varied structure and
materials of the hills. There is a peculiar charm and variety in the har-
monious way in which the hill villages blend with their physiographic and
botanical environment, but the chief claim of the range to beauty hes in its
position as a background to the plains of the city of Adelaide.

The unfavourable aspect of the range is unfortunately one that is of
extraordinary importance. It constitutes a mighty barrier against com-
munication with the Murray Valley and with the larger communities of the
Eastern States. his is a serious aspect from the economic point of view.
The difficulty has been emphasised and exaggerated by the series of happen-
ings, spread over the last fifty years, that led to the main railway line being
carried over what we know to be almost the highest and most difficult portion
of the whole range. From the geographical point of view it is debatable
whether the genius of the mechanical engineer, as expressed in mountain
engines and heavy lines, etc., can overcome, in the most effective and
economic way, the barrier presented by grades of 1 in 37, when a route with
grades of 1 in 80 is known to exist.

It is of interest to dip back into the past in the attempt to discover :—
First, why the main river crossing came to be at “Edwards’ Crossing,” or
Murray Bridge as we now know it: and, second, why the route was chosen
over the highest portion of the range. It is difficult to learn from the maze
of parliamentary papers and contemporary documents, and from the columns
of parliamentary debates, how far human motives, open and hidden, affected
the position, and how far geographical factors and engineering advice was

225

allowed to come into the question. One thing is certain: A reasonably good
contour map of the hills district, from Kapunda to Cape Jervis, would have
greatly influenced the decisions made, and must have resulted in far-reaching
economies as far as the choice of route was concerned. Unfortunately, no
such map was, or is, available.

(p) Phe Selection of the Site of Murray Bridge —The question of a harbour
near the Murray Mouth is one that received the earnest consideration of the
founders of South Australia, and it is one that becomes inereasingly
important with the expansion of settlement in the great Murray Valley. It
is a remarkable fact that the Murray Basin—the greatest and most important
geographical unit in Australia—has never received the political and economic
consideration due to it. This arises largely from the political fact that the
basin is divided arbitrarily into four areas, controlled by four States—these
areas being separated, for the greater part, by the most unreal of boundaries,
namely, meridians and parallels. Further, the State that holds the territory
of the Murray Mouth is weak in numbers compared with the competing
Eastern States (see S.A. Parliamentary Papers, 38/17 and 32/21).

The four capital cities controlling these four portions of the Murray
Basin are all separated from it by high mountain barriers, over which the
produce of the basin is hauled, at great cost, to the seaside. Two new factors
have arisen to support the efforts that have been made to secure the natural
geographical requirements of an exit for the Murray Basin via a port at, or
near, the Murray Mouth. One of these new factors is the: existence of a
powerful and well-constituted body, the Murray River Waters Commission,
and the second is the existence, for the first time, of a capital city (Canberra)
within the Murray Basin.

From the Adelaide point of view, it may be argued that it is possible for
Adelaide to be the Murray River port, as it does indeed to some extent
function at the present time. Militating strongly against this possibility are
two things: The existence of the main trunk line, the “Hills Railway,” over
a high and difficult range, with grades of 1 in 45 (without allowing for
resistance on curves; actually 1 in 37). The second difficulty is the existence
of the river port at Murray Bridge. The reasons for the present positions of
the town and port of Murray Bridge are of interest; they tell the same story
as the Hills Railway Line—a happy-go-lucky method of progress under the
urge of local requirements and political expediency. Contemporary docu-
ments show that there was little, if any, regard for the more important con-
siderations of the establishment of a Murray River port and the provision of
Interstate communications.

A study of old Parliamentary Papers shows that the chief incidents in
this story took place about sixty years ago. In September, 1864, it was con-
sidered that the traffic over the ferry at Wellington justified the building of
a bridge over the Murray to enable communications to be made “with the
South-East and with the land across the river.” The traffic crossing the
river at Wellington that year is set down as:—/,119 people, 852 carriages,
14,375 great cattle, and 83,638 small cattle. It is notahle that no opinion was
expressed regarding the possibility of the bridge site developing as a river
port, The river was not considered as a mode of communication, to be so
utilised, but purely as an obstacle or barrier, to be overcome,

From Parliamentary Paper 148/64 we learn that a select committee was
appointed by Parliament to enquire into the Murray River Crossings: “as
to the best site for establishing crossing places at the Murray and Lakes,
en route to the South-East district, whether by bridge or ferry.” It was then
considered that the passage of stock and the horse-and-dray traffic justified a
bridge. There were five competing sites: Wellington (where there was a

A

226

ferry), Thompson’s Crossing (sites 1 and 2), Mason’s Crossing, and Edwards’
Crossing. These crossings were examined and reported on by Mr. C. F. G.
Ashwin, Superintending Surveyor of the South-Eastern district. The reports
were accompanied by river sections, that gave no information except the
depths and widths of the river.

The whole matter seems to have been decided at last in terms of cost.
The Wellington bridge would cost £22,436, the most expensive, while the
cheapest (by £700 only) was that at Edwards’ Crossing. And so the road
bridge came to be at that place, and this same bridge was later used for the
railway, until 1925; and there the town of Murray Bridge grew up, and
naturally became the chief river port. Later the old road bridge was found
unsuitable, and a new and separate railway bridge was built at the same site.
The whole story is an example of the manner in which important geographical
factors remain unconsidered, owing to the pressure of immediate necessities
and political expediency.

(q) The Selection of the Route for the “Hills Railway.’—As early as 1836
Sturt, Light, and others considered the question of the best means of com-
munication between the Adelaide Plains and the Murray Valley. It was
thought that an easy passage lay to the north (beyond Gawler). By 1880
railway transport had become all-important, and the need for more railway
communication and the selection of a rotite for the “hills railway” had become
a burning question. In Parliamentary Papers of that period the plans of the
range areas are crossed by a maze of competing routes, from Burra-Morgan
in the north, to Adelaide-Milang in the south. As Sir Douglas Mawson has
pointed out (Proc. Roy. Soc. $. Austr,, vol, XLVIL., 1923, p. 372), the easiest
route appears to be still further south—a route that was not then considered.

We may narrow down our consideration of the possible routes to four :—

(i.) Where the ranges fall away to the north—the “Kapunda Gate,”
(ii.) The Torrens River Valley route.
(iti.) The Brownhill Creek, Sturt, Onkaparinga route.

(iv.) Where the ranges fall away to the south.

(i.) The Northern Pass.—This is used as a road and railway route, and
is of great value; it is, however, too long (Brunhes gives “distance” as second
in importance of all geographical controls, ref. 3), penetrates too much into
the drier areas, and taps the river too far to the north (Morgan, 9 inches per
annum) to be a satisfactory pass between Adelaide and the East.

Gi.) and (iii.)—In Parliamentary Paper 175 (1874) Mr. H. C. Mais,
Engineer-in-Chief, reported that ‘Nature has very broadly indicated two
practicable routes, one through the hills via the Torrens Gorge, and the other
via Brownhill Creek.” He appears to have personally favoured the route that
is for all practical purposes the one followed to-day, but which was first
planned to go out easterly through Norwood and Glen Osmond, and up
through the Brownhill Creek Valley, then onwards much as we have it now to
“Edwards’ Crossing” over the Murray, where the road bridge then was.

The trouble seems to have been that the railway route had to be con-
sidered largely from local points of view; “the railways follow the trade.”
Two great geographers, Ratzel and Brunhes, have emphasised the fact that
railways are first built in short disconnected sections. Man’s primal tendency
is to think in terms of local needs; trunk lines are later developments, The
Murray Valley and the Eastern States did not come very largely, if at all,
into the picture. When the hills railway was under consideration, the
important factors were the communities then established in the hills and
beyond, and the existence of the road bridge over the Murray. Thus the
present route was favoured (P.P. 226A) because it “would serve a better
district, a larger population, and secure a greater amount of traffic than any

227

other line south of Gawler.” Later, when rail communication with Melbourne
was decided upon, the road bridge at Edwards’ Crossing, and the established
“Hills Railway Line” were naturally utilised on the score of expediency.

(iv.) The Southern Passes——Of these Sir Douglas Mawson wrote in the
paper already referred to (ref. 14): “At Peter’s Creek the Meadows Valley
may be entered at an elevation a little over 1,100 feet above sea level. By
continuing down the Meadows Creek to the Finniss River, the Mount Lofty
Range can be crossed without rising to any greater height. This is the lowest
passage available across the range, and is the natural route for trunk line
communication from one side to the other.” The route referred to by Sir
Douglas Mawson has been surveyed by the Engineer-in-Chief’s Department,
and references to same may be found in Parliamentary Papers 32/23 and
34/22. In the absence of a complete topographic survey of the hills, it cannot
be decided that even this route is the best, but according to the data available
from the records above quoted it has many advantages over the present
route. It provides, for instance, a 1 in 80 compensated grade, compared with
the 1 in 37 compensated grades of the present route; but the new route would
possibly be a few miles longer.

Regarding the matter purely from the geographical point of view (that
is, the reaction of man to his environment), it would appear that if railway
commtnication is to continue to be the chief means of transport of goods,
it may yet be found necessary to take advantage of this southern route. Any-
thing that will minimise the barrier effect of these ranges, by allowing for
increase of load and speed without increasing costs, must be of the utmost
benefit to the whole State, but more particularly to the city of Adelaide. The
establishment of a Murray port, or the division of the Commonwealth into
a greater number of administrative units, would, of course, completely alter
the aspects of the problem here considered.

VIIL—THE TORRENS AND ITS ESTUARY.

(a) General Survey of the Drainage System of the Adelaide Area—lIn this
and the following sections we are concerned only with the streams that drain
into the Port River Estuary, as set out in fig. 9, plus the valley of the Onka-
paringa. No discussion is entered into regarding the drainage area of the
Gawler (North and South Para) River to the north, the many streams that
drain eastward into the Murray River, nor the lesser streams that flow to the
south, The streams concerned in the estuary are the Little Para River, Dry
Creek, and the Torrens and its tributaries (including Brownhill Creek and
the Sturt River, vide fig. 9). It is the rock waste carried down by these
streams that has built up the portion of the Adelaide Plains that most con-
cerns us. It is these streams, also, that have incidentally provided our
harbours—the essential gateways to and from the outer world. These
streams, though small, are of varied history, and are of the utmost importance
to the city of Adelaide.

(b) Physiographic Evolution of the Area —tin dealing with the physiographic
history of the area we shall go back to the early Tertiary times, and shall
consider as a whole the area shown in what is here called the Gulf Region
(fig. 3). We know, from the foldings, intrusions, etc., that long prior to
Tertiary times this area had been the site of great mountain ranges, possibly
more than once, but with those very ancient features we are not here
concerned.

In the less far-away period of the Lower Tertiary we may picture the
Gulf Region as a great land area of fairly low relief, gradually being worn
down to an almost perfect plain. This great low-level land area was
composed almost wholly of Cambrian and Pre-Cambrian rocks. There is

228

every treason for believing that it was even then a marquetry of fault blocks.
The present blocks of the main horsts must be to a very large extent a heri-
tage from previous periods of diastrophism, but in the Pre-Miocene period
they were all planed down to the same dead level—to be emphasised as
separate blocks by the later uplift, aided by the etching of sub-aerial erosion
along fault boundaries.

There is no recorded evidence of any river, lake or sea deposits of those
days, but there doubtless were slow-flowing streams, and possibly lakes and

RIVER TORRENS

Fig, 9.

Plan showing the chief streams of the Port River Estuary, with section showing
the grades of the Torrens and its tributaries, as described in Section VIL

swamps. The southern portion of the State was not the deeply indented and
varicd gulf region we know now, but a great lowland mass consisting of
Palaeozoic and Pre-Cambrian rocks. Its southern boundary was not where
our sea-coast now is, but it extended much farther to the south, beyond
Kangaroo Island—just how far we do not know.

About Middle Tertiary times (some 20 million years ago, according to
Barrell) this area was slowly submerged by shallow seas, whether by the rise
of the sea or depression of the land we cannot say, though the latter is usually
assumed. Chapman (“Victorian Naturalist,’ March, 1922, p. 127) records

229

~~
basal Miocene fossils from Moorlands, just beyond Murray Bridge, testilying
to the existence in early Miocene times of a sea or gulf there. This sea,
through the following geological ages, advanced and receded, in evidence of
which we have fossils that testify to swamps and estuaries wherein were laid
down heds of lignite, etc. Chapman (Joc. cit,) states that there were on the
adjoining land areas luxuriant growths of timber and scrub, and that the
climate was warm temperate.

This great shallow sea, which extended also over large areas in Victoria,
has been known to South Australians as the Murravian and Eucla Gulfs.
The present writer is of the opinion that this sea was of much greater extent
than those geographical terms suggest. The existence of the Tertiary “over-
mass” of the Mount Lofty Ranges, which has been suggested in a previous
portion of this paper (Section VI.), implies much vaster seas. It is reasonable
to believe that the whole of the southern area of what we now know as
the Gulf Region was covered by sea for considerable portions of Miocene
time, when beds of limestones, clays, gravels, lignites, etc., were laid down,
At Portland, Victoria, these beds are over 2,000 fect thick; in other areas they
are so thin at the present time that the bedrock of the ancient peneplain shows
through here and there.

Our second definite picture, then, is of a great shallow sea, extending
from Victoria, over the Murray River area, over the site of the present Mount
Lofty Ranges, over the St. Vincent and Spencer Gulfs, Yorke Peninsula,
skirting Eyre Peninsula, and continuing to the Nullarbor and Eucla areas to
the west. The southern shore-line of South Australia, that was once so much
farther to the south, had now receded to the north, perhaps along an irregular
line running from Overland Corner north-westerly to Streaky Bay, maybe
even to Ooldea. Thus for perhaps the whole of the Miocene period the
Adelaide region was at the bottom of a broad. shallow, southern sea, slowly
accumulating a covering of marine rocks, with occasional emergences and
temporary estuarine or swamp conditions. Nothing has so far been revealed
to support the possibility that the Mount Lofty Horst was in existence as dry
jand during the Miocene marine transgression; as already detailed, there is
considerable evidence to the contrary.

Regarding the following Pliocene period we are less sure. It is possible
that there were no marked tectonic disturbances. Some portions of the land
may have been warped gently upwards to become low land areas. Other
‘portions remained covered hy the sea, and limestones and clays, ete., con-
tinued to be deposited. Some of the Pliocene marine deposits are still pre-
served, both in sea cliffs and in deposits that are now 700 feet below sea level
(ref. 11).

At the end of Pliocene time, and the beginning of the Pleistocene (about
‘one million years ago according to Barrell’s time scale), great and momentous
changes occurred. Prodigious crustal forces were exerted. and the great
period of relative uplift and depression that affected all southern and eastern
Australia was initiated, This great orogenic movement culminated in what
is called the “Kosciusko Period.” During this period great founderings took
place to the south (Jeffrey Deep) and to the east (Tasman Sea). (In a
detailed discussion of the formation and age of the peneplain, see ref. 9, pp.
202-212.)

The area of the Gulf Region was gradually uplifted as a whole, but in
‘certain less stable areas great faults occurred, and some blocks of land were
‘uplifted while others were depressed. The Torrens Sunkland and the
Spencer-Vincent Sunkland came into being (see figs. 1 and 2). ‘The Flinders
and Mount Lofty Horsts were uplifted, and the Gulf Region of South Aus-
‘tralia began to take on the indented shape by which we know it now. The

230

uplift was gradual and differential, and, as Professor Howchin has shown on
seismological evidence (ref. 11), it is still going on.

The raised blocks of the Mount Lofty and Yorke Peninsula Horsts, and
the depressed blocks of Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs were marked out during
this catastrophic period, but all were not raised or depressed evenly, There
is evidence, for instance, that the western blocks of the Mount Lotty Horst
were raised to their present eminence somewhat later than the eastern ones.
The physiographic features of the Mount Lofty Block, and those to the west,
are much less mature than those to the eastward, even where the same river
valley is concerned; this is a point of considerable importance.

Turning back to consider the great plains of Miocene limestones as they
emerged from the sea, we may endeavour to form a mental picture of the
first signs of uplift along the Mount Lofty Horst. On this slowly rising
limestone block consequent streams would form, according to the lay of the
land. It is perhaps to this time we must look for the origin of the directions
of the more dominant streams such as those we are particularly considering:
The Torrens and the Onkaparinga; but this portion of the story is admittedly
obscure, particularly in view of the possibility that the pre-Miocene landscape
contained river valleys that were later “exhumed.”

As the Mount Lofty Horst more and more came to assume its present
height and character, the consequent streams that first came into existence
would tend to keep to their first channels, but they must have been in many
cases greatly influenced by the tectonic lines, and possibly by pre-existing
sediment-filled stream valleys. Deep valleys were cut into the overmass of
limestones, and ultimately these continued into the ancient undermass.

With the assistance of the tributaries and associated streams the soft
limestone overmass was completely cleared away, with the exception of the
isolated remnants referred to in Section VI. (c). At the present time sunken
blocks of these one-time continuous level sheets of ancient Miocene limestones
are to be found at depths up to 2,000 feet and more below sea-level, and
Pliocene occurs at depths of 700 feet, while remnants of uplifted Tertiary
blocks still exist at heights of 900-1,000 feet above sea-level (ref. 11).

If we picture the blocks east of Mount Lofty itself to have been the
dominant ones in the early stages of uplift—an uplift followed by a long
period of comparative still-stand, we can understand why the upper portions
of the Torrens and Onkaparinga, along with other valleys and ranges to the
east and south, are of more mature character. The physiographic features of
these valleys appear to be more mature than could have been accomplished
since early Pleistocene time.

We may further picture a culminating period of uplift, when the western
blocks (Mount Lofty, Sturt, and Belair) were somewhat more rapidly raised.
The Torrens and Onkaparinga needs must devote themselves to vigorous
downward erosion in order to preserve their valleys, and so we should get
the steep gorges and deeply incised meanders of these two rivers where they
cross the resistant western blocks.

Subsequently a period of comparative still-stand took place, and with the
increased rainfall of the Mount Lofty area, the development of the drainage
network proceeded apace along the lines characteristic of river action, Steep
fault-front valleys, such as Brownhill Creek, Slapes Gully, Waterfall Gully,
Morialta, etc., developed along the western scarp, and sent down their tribute
to form the Adelaide Plains. Streams such as Sixth Creek, Sturt River, and
Cox’s Creek—given height and direction by the greater elevation of the Mount
Lofty portion of the western blocks—carved out deep and steep-sided valleys.
Meanwhile a totally different type of river evolution was in progress on the
growing Adelaide Plains, as described later, and so there slowly developed the
drainage network as we know it to-day (fig. 9).

231

(c) The Torrens River Valley —The general outlines of the Torrens and
its valley are shown in figs. 8 and 9, The physiographic history has already
been told in broad outline, and only a brief description will be necessary, with
some attention to the influence of the various geographic factors on man’s
occupation of the area. As already detailed, this valley was one of the
favoured sites for a railway route across the ranges, but was not so used.
The incised meander of the Torrens Gorge presented such difficulties to com-
munications that it is only within the past few years that a road has been
constructed there. Now, however, it forms the main road route to Mannum.
Previously the mature and well-settled upper portions of the Torrens Valley
were served by a road that climbed over two high scarp faces to the north,
via Tea Tree Gully. Influenced by the settlements of Tea Tree Gully, Ingle-
wood, etc., the motor-bus route still goes via those villages, despite the steep
grades.

The Torrens Valley will be described under the following headings :-—

(i.) The Upper Torrens, from the source to the Gorge.
(iw.) The Torrens Gorge.
(iti.) The Klemzig Valley, from the mouth of the Gorge to the edge of
the Para Block, below Montefiore Hill,
(iv.) The Lower Torrens, the canal-like stream that crosses the deltaic
plain to the Reedbeds.
(v.) The Patawalonga Creek.

A separate subsection will be devoted to a consideration of the Port River
Estuary.

These five sections of the Torrens Valley can be clearly differentiated
in the section showing the grades of the streams, which is reproduced on a
small scale in fig, 9. The gentle grades of the upper valley, the steeper grades
within the Torrens Gorge, with subsequent flattening on crossing the fault
line, are readily seen, Similarly, the up-stream tributaries can be noted as
gentler in grade. Between the tributaries numbered 4 and 5 may be seen the
two small fan-delta streams on which the Hope Valley and Thorndon Park
Reservoirs are situated. The Millbrook Reservoir may also be noted in fig. 9,
on the 1,000-foot line. In the figures presented by Mr. J. T. Furner to the
Flood Waters Commission (P.P, 35/25) the fall of the Upper Torrens is
shown to be 28 feet per mile, within the Torrens Gorge it is 75 feet per mile,
while on the lower deltaic plains it is 54 feet per mile.

(t.) The Upper Torrens—This valley is roughly parallel-sided, trending
south-west across the structure of the country, but not uninfluenced by the
block-faulting (see fig. 8). There are a number of small tributary streams,
such as Cudlee Creek, Chain of Ponds, Kenton Valley, and Angas Creek.
The grades and the valley shapes indicate a stage of crosion approaching
maturity. The river is usually regarded there as a superimposed consequent,
as already described, The country is well-grassed, well-watered savannah
country, passing into bushlands (30-inch average rainfall), and it supports
several picturesque and thriving townships, such as Mount Pleasant, Bird-
wood, Gumeracha, and Chain of Ponds—farming, dairying, and pastoral
localities,

A distinct change in the character of the valley occurs below Birdwood;
it becomes narrower and the grades become steeper. Towards Gumeracha
the influence of pegmatite dykes and other rock structures is marked. The
valleys open out again at the junction with Cudlee Creek, but neither here
nor towards Millbrook can the physiography be regarded as older than early
adolescence. Indeed, the whole course of the Torrens, as of the neighbouring
Onkaparinga, is anomalous. In a normal river, the work is most advanced at
the mouth and least in the headwaters; in the Onkaparinga, and more notably

232

in the Torrens, we get the mature valleys at the source of the stream, and an
increasingly youthful physiography as we proceed downstream; an explana-
tion of these features has already been suggested. Another suggestive feature
is that the northern tributaries, such as Chain of Ponds and Forreston Creek,
have gentler grades than the southern tributaries, Kenton Valley and Angas
Creek (see fig. 9).

The rocks are largely Pre-Cambrian, and provide good soils. The
ancient rocks provided some gold and other minerals, and there was con-
siderable mining activity here in earlier days. In addition to its natural
beauty, this valley gives to Adelaide a considerable amount of produce, is the
chief catchment area for the metropolitan water supply, and provides a fairly
easy pass to the Murray River Valley at Mannum. The possibility that the
stream, above Gumeracha, was once the headwaters of the Onkaparinga, is.
worthy of investigation. There is a low wind-gap just to the west of Mount
Torrens (1,500 feet), where the Torrens, above Birdwood, may once have
flowed through to the Onkaparinga. ,

(w.) The Torrens Gorge-—This portion of the valley is generally accepted as
ante-consequent (ref. 8), but the possibility of headward erosion and capture
cannot be dismissed without further investigation, Its origin appears, in
either case, to be due to the later and perhaps more rapidly rising western
blocks of the horst, into which it has cut a deep gorge practically without
tributaries, the important exception being Sixth Creek. Through this gorge,
by the ingenuity of engineers, there has now been made an excellent motor
road, along which is laid the important arterial pipe-track from the Millbrook
Reservoir. This gorge was for many years almost as complete a barrier to
traffic as the ranges themselves. '

The grade of the river is high, and all the features of extreme youth or
rejuvenation are obvious. On physiographic grounds alone, the gorge would
appear to be Pleistocene, at least in part. The rocks are most complex, as.
described by Benson (ref. 1; also Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. XX XIIL,
1909, p. 101), and consist of massive quartzites, phyllites, schists, limestones,
and igneous intrusives, The value of the gorge to man is, like rugged areas.
elsewhere, mainly as a pass and for its scenic beauty. It is a catchment area
for the city water supply, there being a weir near the mouth. The igneous
rocks (“diorites”) provide good road metal. The only settlement in the gorge
is an occasional small refreshment house.

(iu.) The Klemszig Valley-——-The portion of the Torrens Valley from the
mouth of the Gorge, across the Para Fault Block, to the western boundary
of the latter, is fertile, beautiful, and of historic interest. It is well settled,
partly with orchards, vineyards, orangeries, and gardens, and in part (closer
to the city) with residential suburbs. In the early years of the settlement it
was, as now, noted for its beauty and fertility. The valley is wide, and being
in soft alluvials and limestones, had reached an almost mature form——a later
general uplift has led to the formation of vertical banks cut into its own
alluvial deposits. Owing to the tilt of the Para Block the Torrens is here
diverted to a direction considerably south of west, and the right (northern)
side of the valley has steeper slopes than the left side. In the higher (fan
delta) portions are situated the storage reservoirs of Hope Valley and Thorn-
don Park.

The river at present flows between steep banks of alluvial, in places up
to 50 feet high. These consist chiefly of rich deposits of unbedded silts, with
current-bedded sands and gravels below. Near Walkerville there occurs,.
from 10 to 20 feet above river level, a layer in which there are abundant trunks.
of what appear to have been river red-gums; this deposit may be due to some:
unusual combination of bush-fire and subsequent flood.

233

In its passage through the city the valley of the Torrens was happily
reserved for Park Lands and public buildings, and is so used. There are
found many beautiful public parks and gardens, memorial drives, botanic
gardens, zoological gardens, the University oval, the Adelaide sports oval,
and the municipal golf links; Government House stands on its southern slope,
and the Anglican Cathedral towards its northern slope; the later additions
to the University buildings tend to turn their faces towards the more beautiful
aspects of this valley. In its passage through this part of its course the river
has been dammed by a weir to form an ornamental lake.

Perhaps the most important economic value of the lower portion of this
section of the Torrens Valley is its use as the main railway gate of the city
(vide J. R. Richardson’s map of Adelaide, 1923); the whole of the railway
communication between Adelaide and the rest of the State and Common-
wealth passes through this gap. A minor exception is the South Terrace line
to Glenelg, but this is moribund and will possibly be abandoned as a railway
line.

In its passage across the Para Block, the Torrens receives no tributaries
on the north, though the present headwaters of the Dry Creek at one time
entered from the higher parts of the Para Block to the north.

On the south, the Torrens is reinforced by the small scarp-face tribu-
taries known as First, Second, Third, Fourth, and Fifth Creeks. As already
explained, the easterly tilt of the Para Block has deflected the Torrens to the
south-west, a fact of great importance in its bearing on the original plan of
North and South Adelaide [see Section V. (b) ].

(iv.) The Lower Torrens —For the last six miles of its course, after leaving
the Para Block, the Torrens flows a little south of west, in a meandrine
course, through its own deltaic accumulations. There is no valley; natural
levees are marked in several places. The stream is in a canal-like channel, of
diminishing dimensions as it proceeds down-stream—a geographical factor
of high importance in the problem of the disposal of flood waters. The plain
over which it flows has already been described [Section V., (c) and (e) ];
brick-pits are numerous along portion of the course. Past Torrensville, a
branch breaks away to the south-east (Breakaway Creek). Thence onwards
is the well-known Reedbeds area—a growing portion of the lower deltaic
plain—mostly swampy in winter and providing excellent grazing areas in
summer.

A road and tram-line cross this swampy area, despite the physiographic
unsttitability, and consequently each winter brings forward difficulties of
communication in these routes. Here the waters of the Torrens, that have
not percolated into the deep alluvials of the deltaic plain, divide and form
wide swamps. Portion ultimately flows south along the coast some distance
‘back from the sand dunes, and becomes the Patawalonga Creek; the
remainder of the Torrens water, largely divested of its suspended material,
flows north behind the dunes, into the Port River Estuary. The chief
economic influence of the Lower Torrens, apart from the provision of
excellent summer grazing areas, is the recurrent floods that it brings to those
who dwell along its lower reaches, coupled with the fact that, like all deltaic
streams, the river tends to overflow its banks at places up-stream cach flood-
time, and thus to change its course.

In the problem of the metropolitan floodwaters, as in the problem of the
Hills Railway, the Murray Bridge, and the Murray port, the geographer may
find most illuminating and valuable evidence in the various reports preserved
in Parliamentary Papers. The outlook of the geographer, being impersonal
and unaffected by questions of expediency, is naturally somewhat different
from that of persons required to make decisions involving questions of public

234

policy and the expenditure of money. In the case of the floodwaters for
instance, with due admiration for the scheme that has been drawn up and
presented to the Committee, the geographical attitude would be somewhat
like this: The area subject to inundation comprises some 4,000 acres that
Nature is slowly building up by the same methods whereby the remainder of
the plains was built. This area has certain values to man, but it is not at
present suitable as a residential locality, The cheapest and most effective
method of raising and improving this land is by means of the River Torrens
itself.

If the whole 4,000 acres were resumed and placed under capable engineer-
ing control, as far as the roads, bridges, and drains, etc., are concerned, there
would some day be available a magnificent addition to the residential areas
of Adelaide. An inspection of the map (fig. 15) showing the present distribu-
tion of the metropolitan population will assist in illustrating this point. It is
admittedly unwise to interfere with the natural courses of rivers and currents,
etc., but where we are compelled to interfere every effort should be made to
discover the methods along which Nature is working, and then to carry out
our new designs along those lines, with the help of the natural forces that
we seck to control.

In the present case, for instance, the diversion of the Torrens River to
a direct route into the sea south of Henley Beach, by meanis of artificial levees,
with a concrete channel through the sand dunes, would possibly have at least
three after-effects, as far as interference with Nature is concerned. These
are —

(1.) The lower portions of the deltaic plain would be robbed for ever of

their increment of silt, and must, therefore, remain low land.

(#.) The Port River would no longer have the addition to its ebb tide of

the Torrens water, a fact that may in the course of years have a
profound influence on the port.

(7i1.) The silt deposited at the mouth of the concrete channel during

floods would form a shoal, just as Point Malcolm has formed the
Wonga Shoal, and the influence of wind and tide would be to
cause a shallowing of the sea at Henley Beach and Grange, such
as is now taking place north of the Wonga Shoal.

(v.) The Patawalonga Creek.—This is here regarded as portion of the
Torrens River; it may be considered as the south arm of the present Torrens
Delta. From the point of view of origin, it is much more likely that it is a
quite modern and accidental physiographic feature, not in any way a part of
the original drainage network. When one compares its present appearance
with the pictures drawn and descriptions written in the early years of settle-
ment, it appears that considerable degeneration must have taken place in this
feature during the past 90 years.

For reasons set out in dealing with the evolution of the streams on the
plains, the writer considers that the Patawalonga Creek was formed by the
temporary damming up of the waters of the Sturt and Torrens during a period
of heavy flood, possibly combined with spring tides and westerly winds, with
a consequent breach through a low portion of the sand dunes at Glenelg and
the formation of the Patawalonga Creek.

(d) The Development and Drainage of the Plains—The so-called “Port
River Estuary” is really the estuary of the Torrens and associated streams,
as shown in fig. 9. Economically it is of high importance, being the chief gate-
way for communication between South Australia and the rest of the world
The so-called “Port River” is really the tidal portion of the River Torrens.

A physiographic discussion of the estuary involves consideration of the
evolution of the streams that at present flow over the southern Adelaide

235

Plains, from the Little Para to the Sturt. This in turn involves consideration
of the origin and growth of the plains themselves. A plan of the present
estuarine area is shown in fig. 11, and the writer’s conclusions regarding the
development of the plains and drainage are set out diagrammatically in fig. 10.

(i.) The Rivers of the Plains—One authority has divided streams into two
classes according as their thalwegs are: (i.) “concave to the sky,” or (u.)
“convex to the sky.” ‘The streams in the area shown in fig. 10 partake of both
characters. In the ranges, east of the main fault line, they are concave to the
sky, busily engaged in deepening their valleys. But when they cross the fault

—a—
=| q &
awe — ee
—j ps
—— aa,
=~ ff @€@
ej =f 10

y \
= a
—\ NS
+—— fe
—— ‘Sv,
=I
= Ve
———al
———— Fh tS.
—=—=by

c

———— i

Fig. 10.

Plan to indicate one of the later and more important stages in the development
of the Adelaide Plains, the streams, and the estuary. The smaller diagrams show
progressive stages, reading from top to bottom.

their “valleys” become convex to the sky; they are accumulating, aggrada-
tional streams—engaged in building up and extending the land areas over
which to prolong their existence.

Given the silts and muds that were carried down so abundantly from the
uplifted blocks, the factors that controlled the building of the Adelaide Plains

236

are of two kinds: (7.) wind and wave; (i.) running water. Wind and wave
contrived to build up the long sand-spit from the rocky point of Seacliff north-
ward, until it now reaches to Pelican Point at the end of LeFevre’s Peninsula.
The prevailing 5.-S.W. winds and the tidal sweep were the chief factors in
this work (see Section [X.), and the physiographic evidence needs no
elaboration.

Thus the southern plain-building streams—the Sturt, Brownhill, and
Torrens—would tend to be diverted northward, as suggested in the small
progressive sketches in fig. 10, and the deltaic plain, bounded on the west by
the sand dunes, would be forced to concentrate more and more towards the
north-west. This theory might be elaborated in detail, if space permitted.
Long continued examination of the area, and careful consideration of the
physical features, do not suggest any alternative scheme that provides so
well for the present shapes and characteristics of the shore-line and the
estuary.

The evidence for the one-time direct northward flow of the Sturt River
(see fig. 10) lies in part in the present anomalous relations between the Sturt
and Patawalonga. The Sturt at present flows directly north, and then enters.
as a tributary into a south-flowing stream. This peculiar anomaly of the
Sturt presents no difficulty when considered in conjunction with the sugges-
tion above put forward regarding the recent origin of the Patawalonga. There
is reasonable ground for the belief that the Sturt originally flowed northward,
marching with the growth of the sandhills, and ended in the present Port
River.

An examination of the Torrens River and the contours of the higher
deltaic plain, supported by the evidence in the field, shows that the Torrens
once flowed north-west, almost parallel with the present Port Road, entering
the arm of the estuary that lies to the east of the present Port River, It may
be urged that the Torrens also occupied, during the building up of the deltaic
plain, a thousand other positions. This is true; but the evidence of the course,
as shown in fig. 10, is so definitely demonstrated in the 2-foot contour maps
of the Hydraulic Engineer’s Department that one can only conclude that this
particular course was the last one prior to the adoption of the present channel,
and that it was one that was followed for a long period of time.

The fan delta which was (see fig. 4) built up towards Woodville and
Cheltenham by the old Torrens has been of great economic importance. It
has facilitated the building of the Port Road and the Port Railway, and has
rendered the establishment of the adjoining suburbs a much more reasonable
proposal than would otherwise have been the case.

With all these streams (shown in fig. 10), each a heavy silt-bearer in
times of flood, carrying their burdens of water and suspended materials
towards the estuary, that feature gradually became silted up, low plain
replacing shallow water, until we arrive at the present stage (fg. 11) of an
estuary with numerous arms and mud islands.

The later diversion of the Torrens to the present westerly course, which
took its origin at a point near the head of the fan delta, illustrates one of the
commonest characters of aggrading streams. The formation of the Patawa-
longa, on account of the breaking through of a flooded lagoon’ and the con-
sequent diversion of the Sturt River, brings us to the condition of the
drainage network of the plains as we find it to-day (fig. 9).

(ii.) The Port River Estuary—The present estuary of the Port River is a
place of considerable beauty, of high economic importance, and of scientific
interest. Considered from the physiographic point of view it presents three
peculiarities: First, it is the only extensive break in the eastern coast of
Gulf St. Vincent, though other rivers enter to the north; second, it is clearly

237

an “outsize” as far as the present contributing rivers are concerned; thirdly,
as Sir George Buchanan (loc. cit.) has remarked, it receives practically no silt

in the main channel—a factor of great economic importance. We shall con-
sider these three peculiarities in turn.

-
G

etre,

% y
nie!
7

WO Ft. contour:

30

‘ a SCALE. Cinigs) 4

i AS es Cr

Fig. 11.

Plan of the Port River Estuary, showing the sites of the Inner Harbour (P.A,),

the Outer Harbour (O.H.), and Light’s Passage (L.P.). Five contour lines are

also shown: (1) The 3-fathom line, (2) the low water line, (3) the general coast-
line (high water), (4) the 10-foot contour fine, (5) the 20-foot contour line.

From fig. 11, which has been drawn to show the significant features of
the estuarine area, we see that the whole site is one of characteristically low
land and shallow water. The coast has been demonstrated to be a rising one
(ref. 11), and presents the characters common to such areas, The land below
the 10-foot contour is the least valuable land portion of the whole area, but it
is the one that presents the greatest physiographic interest. Unfortunately.
the study of such areas—those that are as yet neither sea nor land—is carried

out with difficulty, and the writer has not had the facilities for proper
exaimination.

238

The most recent method of studying such localities, where they are of
potentially high value, is by means of aeroplane photographie surveys—a
method not yet introduced into Australia. Tortuous tributaries, that run over
the mud flats in a vagrant way and unite to form peculiarly wide and shallow
tidal arms, are most characteristic of such areas (see fig. 11), and are of types
quite distinct from ordinary land features. So important are the under-water
features in the area of the Port River Estuary that the preparation of an aerial
photographic survey is urged. Such a survey would reveal the details of
shoals and channels which, if duly studied and interpreted, must profoundly
influence future improvements and harbour developments.

The deepest portion of the estuary is that known as the Port River, or
the Port Adelaide River, with its hook-shaped continuation discovered by
Colonel Light in 1836, and named Light’s Passage. The Port River is usually
described in four reaches: (1) The “Old Port Reach,” the shallowest portion,
reaching up to the first bend past Jervois Bridge; this is still bordered in
places by muddy mangrove flats ; it was here that the first river port, the much
maligned “Port Misery,” was founded, and of which some of the old timbers
still remain. (2) The “Gawler Reach,” is the eastward flowing portion, the
shortest and busiest portion of the river: (3) ‘Hindmarsh Reach” runs thence
up to the place where the North Arm enters from the east.

Beyond that there was originally a “Lipson Reach.” but the name is not
found on later maps. There is a minimum depth of 26 feet at the low water
springs (313 feet h.w.s.) in the inner harbour, and of 33 feet, lav.s., in the
outer harbour. Since this river forms the chief gateway of South Australia
—the avenue of communication with “Home” and with the markets of other
lands—we may enquire why so good a harbour occurs in such an unfavour-
able area (namely: shallow gulf, silt-bearing streams, and a rising coast).

The lower reaches of the Port River, with the mangrove-fringed North
Arm and Angas Inlet, are places of much beauty. In the Port River itself,
sand dominates in some places, mud flats in others, according as the building
agent has been wind and current or river and tide, respectively. Charac-
teristic of this part of the river are “hooked creeks,” such as Mutton Cove,
entering the river in an upstream direction at a sharp angle with the bank
—typical tidal features. In Light’s Passage the river banks are still in the
process of “becoming,” as also at Outer Harbour, where the engineer has
assisted the river in its reclamation work; this portion of the river is
unbeautiful, and awaits “improvements.”

The wide plains to the northward have been built up of alluvial waste
brought down by the Gawler and Light Rivers into a gulf already shallower
than that off the Port River Estuary. On account of the southward plunge
of the underlying fault blocks, the building of the alluvial plains was slower
in the area mapped in fig. 10. The formation of these plains was aided, as
already shown, by the building up of a long north-running sand-spit from the
cliffy area of bedrock at Seacliff. Where the sand-spit approached the bulge
of the northern alluvial plains, a wide estuary mouth was left unfilled, and
it is still in the process of being silted up. These facts, dealt with more fully
in a previous section, help to explain the existence and character of the
estuary.

It is of interest to note that an almost similar feature forms the harbour
of Port Pirie—the second port of South Australia, Port Pirie is situated on
a northward-pointing creek, an ancient and deserted estuary, on the flat
eastern shore of Spencer Gulf, There is a deltaic plain, backed by the
Flinders Horst, making the parallel with the conditions of Adelaide more
notable. The Pirie Creek was the old estuary of the Broughton River, which

239

now enters the sea at a more southern point on its deltaic plain, but which
occasionally, at flood times, overflows into the Port Pirie Creek,

The second feature of the Port River Estuary to which attention has
been directed is that it is an “outsize,” that is, it appears too large tor the
present contributing streams. This may be explained by the fact that three
of the main streams that went to form the estuary, namely, the Torrens, The
Sturt, and Brownhill Creek, have been diverted therefrom in whole or in
part, as described in Section VII (b).

The Sturt and Brownhill Creeks have been wholly diverted, and their
floodwaters now flow into the Patawalonga, or percolate into the lower plains,
or evaporate from the wide areas of swamps that they now form in winter,
The partial diversion of the Torrens has led to the discharge into the Port
River of only a portion of its waters. A comparison of figs. 9 and 10 should
assist in illustrating this point.

The third feature of the estuary is the comparative absence of silt from
the Port River—a most desirable feature. The small amount of silt deposited
is shown by the fact that the total cost of dredging the river is only £1,900
per annum (Parliamentary Paper 35/25), which is remarkably low compared
with the thousands of pounds spent annually in dredging, say, the Yarra
River, Victoria.

When Colonel Light first entered the long-sought harbour of the Port
River he noted the clearness of the water, and also that the “habit of growth”
of the weeds on the bottom was to point down stream. Thence he concluded
that the ebb was habitually stronger than the flow, and consequently that
there was a complement of river water entering the harbour. This proved
correct. The added water is that of the Torrens.

Fortunately for the harbour of Port Adelaide, and unfortunately for the
dwellers at Henley Beach, the Grange, and the lower deltaic plain, the last
diversion of the Torrens has led to the deposition of its considerable burden
of silt on the plains and swamps east of those sand dune townships. Thus
they have the misfortune to suffer from an annual floodwaters problem, while
Port Adelaide has the advantage of an increment of river water without silt.
Indeed, it is this latter factor, acting through some thousands of years, that
has provided the harbour facilities which this State enjoys.

It may be pointed out that the Little Para and Dry Creek also bring
down their burdens of silt. Fortunately this is either deposited on the lower
deltaic plain, or carried into the eastern arm of the estuary, the so-called
“Shallow Reach.” A somewhat puzzling feature is the hook-shaped turn of
the Port River that forms Light’s Passage. It is puzzling because there 1s
clear evidence that the Torrens and associated streams have discharged north-
wards for uncounted thousands of years, and now, with no evidence whatever
of any change of wind or tide or current, the river has taken a southward
trend.

The only explanation that appears to fit the circumstances is that the
deposition of silt in “Shallow Reach” has led to the building up of Torrens
Island, and to its somewhat western-pointing continuation northwards
(Point Grey). The water of the Port River, in its daily ebbs and flows, has
been diverted to the west by this bank of sand, and as is the custom of rivers
under such conditions, the curvature has tended to continue, first from
Snapper Point to Pelican Point, and then almost southward, forming Light’s
Passage. This development has been availed of and assisted by the building
of Outer Harbour, and is still slowly continuing, as may be seen from a com-
parison of Light’s chart of this locality with later more complete maps of
varying dates.

240

The Wonga Shoal, a few miles to the southward, off Semaphore (see fig.
11), is an underwater feature that must greatly affect the future of the beaches
at Semaphore and Largs, and also the channel of the Outer Harbour. It is
clearly, from the evidence of its conformation, due to the diverting influence
of the western bulge of the coastline at Point Malcolm. The continued build-
ing up of the Wonga Shoal may ultimately direct the channel of the Port
River once more to the west, and lead to a continuation of the shallowing
of the sea between the Shoal and Outer Harbour.

The pear-shaped Torrens Island, with its curving northern “stem,” is a
study in itself, physiographically and botanically. The western portion, con-
sisting of old sand dunes, is the most desirable portion. The site of the
Quarantine Station, with its casuarinas, native pines, and wealth of golden
wattle, presents a glorious picture in the early Spring. The eastern portion
of the island is an area of low samphire swamps, “hooked creeks,” and winding
“thoroughfares” of water. A combination of spring tides, westerly winds,
and river floods leads to the almost complete inundation of this portion of
the island.

This completes the physiographic survey of the Port River Estuary.
The economic aspects of the various facts have been pointed out, and we
have seen how wind and tide and river have conspired to build up a harbour
that is, to say the least, a satisfactory one, and one that so high an authority
as Sir Geo. Buchanan has stated may be converted with remarkable cheapness
into a continuous series of seven miles of wharves from the present Outer
Harbour, round the head of LeFevre’s Peninsula, and down the western side
of the Port River, to Port Adelaide. The land itself is of little value at
present, and is utilised for rifle ranges or left untouched; if reserved, it must
ultimately become a valuable asset. The vegetation is of mangroves along
the river frontages, Acacia ligulata and spinifex on the sandy areas, with
samphire flats behind.

VIIIL—THE TORRENS TRIBUTARIES AND ASSOCIATED
STREAMS.

(a) Torrens Tributaries—It is not necessary to describe these features at
length, except where they provide special evidence regarding the general
physiography of the area or are themselves of geographic interest. Apart
from the courses of these tributaries on the deltaic plains, which have already
been described [Section VII. (d.)], there are two main types: Those that
belong to the upper valleys east of the Mount Lofty Block, and which are
more mature in their valley slopes and in their grades (see figs. 5 and 9),
and those that originated along scarp faces.

The Upper Sturt River and Sixth Creek belong to a third type, formed
by headward erosion along somewhat less resistant beds, behind the western
fault blocks and parallel thereto. In the tributaries, as in the main streams,
the controlling factor has been the tectonic fault-and-tilt movements, with
capture, differential rock resistance, and possible inheritance of earlier routes
as secondary factors. The Torrens tributaries are as follow, and the account
is illustrated by the profile of the stream grades that is included in fig. 9:—

(2.) Sturt River —The Sturt rises in the main Mount Lofty knot and has
carved a deep valley in the ancient tillites and other rocks; the tillites give
rise to rugged and characteristic valley slopes. The upper portion of the
river, which includes the charming Coromandel Valley and the picturesque
and more mature tributaries of National Park, assists in providing a route
for both road and railway. The vigorous headward erosion, due to maximum

241

elevation and rainfall, has given this stream power to cut back into the
Mount Lofty Scarp face, to the north of Cherry Gardens.

There is evidence in favour of the theory that the Sturt originally flowed
down the tectonic valley formed by the Sturt and Belair Blocks, and flowed
into Hallett’s Creek (Happy Valley). The evidence consists of the charac-
teristic elbow bend and gorge north of Flagstaff Ilill, with a low gap and
sands at the head of Happy Valley. Thus the Sturt is led through the scarp
face to the west, in an area that will always be noted for its geographical and
historical interest as the site of the first definite discovery of Cambrian
glaciation [Professor Howchin, 1900 (1901)]. The course of the Sturt across
the alluvial plain to the Patawalonga, and its probable one-time continuation
northward to the Port River, have been described in Section VII. (c).

(ui.) Brownhill Creek. —This is a small tributary, heading back into the Mount
Lofty Fault Block, and heavily dissecting the Sturt and Belair Blocks. It was
at one time a favoured site as a railway route, but is no longer considered.
As in all the scarp-face streams, the rainfall is high, the grade is steep, and
the percentage and rapidity of run-off combined with the diminishing size
of the channel in the plains, lead to floods along the lower reaches of this
stream on the occasion of heavy rains. The lower portion of the scarp-face
valley has been reserved as a park.

it should be mentioned that Nature has here placed ready to hand, for
young students of physiography, a most remarkable laboratory. Each one
of the scores of valleys in the scarp face near Adelaide presents a special and
independent study of the influence of grade, rock types, rock structures, etc.,
on the work of streams. The writer does not know one of these numerous
valleys that does not present special features quite distinct from those of the
neighbouring streams.

(iii.) First to Fifth Creeks——These five streams are characteristic scarp-
face streams, with high grades, waterfalls, steep-sided and sometimes pre-
cipitous valleys above the fault scarp, and gently graded channels in fan deltas
and alluvial plains below the scarp. The distinction in character between
these two portions of the streams is so great that it has received popular
recognition in the fact that most streams have names in the hills distinct
from those they have on the plain.

Another interesting fact of nomenclature, illustrating a physiographic
influence, is that the streams on the plains had originally the distinctive
names sct out below, but the channels were apparently so confusing because
of their similarity that they came to be called by the more prosaic titles of
mere numbers. The names referred to are :—

Present name on the Name used in the hill ;
plain tract. tract. Name used in 1841.
First Creek Waterfall Gully Greenhill Rivulet
Second Creek Slapes Gully Hallett Rivulet
Third Creek Horsnells Gully Todd Rivulet
Fourth Creek Morialta (Sinclairs Gully) Anstey Rivulet
Fifth Creek Montacute Creek Ormsby Rivulet

The remarks made re Brownhill Creek apply here. The streams are
accidental and not genetic tributaries of the Torrens. Each one of them is
a distinct unit and has special characters and beauties of its own. There is,
for instance, the remarkable contrast between the green open slopes of Water-
fall Gully and the precipitous timbered gorge of Slapes Gully. Again, at
Morialta, we have the influence of three bands of almost level-bedded
quartzites, giving rise to three separate waterfalls, and there is evidence of a
mosaic of blocks here—in one place an abrupt quartzite anticline faces a
series of almost level-bedded calcareous and siliceous rocks.

242

Reference has been made to the variety in the native vegetation on the
slopes of these scarp-face valleys; where quartzite predominates there is
rough, low native scrub of xerophilous type, on the limestones there are park-
like areas of grass-land with sparse red-gums. The introduced vegetation,
that gives still further variety and beauty to the lower slopes, consists mainly
of the Mediterranean suite of olives, vines, etc. These valleys constitute, as
already stated, a ready-made and conveniently-situated laboratory for the
study of river action.

(iv.) Sixth Creek.—This is the largest and most important tributary of the
Torrens. It rises in the Mount Lofty Fault Block, near its highest portion,
and flows northward, entering the Torrens in the Gorge Tract. It is separated
from the more mature south-flowing Onkaparinga by Forest Range—a fact
that supports the idea that Forest Range is the western scarp of a separate
ininor fault block within the main Mount Lofty Block.

The Sixth Creek is a good catchment area, and is also the site of fertile
valley bottoms and of farming and gardening villages that harmonize with
their surroundings in the charming way that is characteristic of the older
townships in the hills. In its lower parts the valley is rugged and precipitous,
but it tends to be more mature in the headwaters, which accords with the
theory of rejuvenation by the more recent uplift of the Mount Lofty Block.

(v.) Upper Tributaries ——The tributaries of the Torrens from Chain of Ponds
and Cudlee Creek upwards are harmonious in type with the more mature
character of this portion of the valley. It may be noted, however, that the
streams on the northern side are, on the whole, more gently graded than those
on the south. The Chain of Ponds has less fall than Cudlee Creek; Forreston
Creek beats similar relations to Kenton Valley. This is a difficult matter to
explain, but it is possibly associated with the greater uplift of the whole
horst to the southward. There are other peculiar features that await explana-
tion, such as the relatively more mature character of the eastern slopes of
certain streams, such as Howard Creek.

(b) Associated Streams.—The remaining streams that directly influence the
Adelaide area have already been frequently referred to in the course of this
paper. Considering them from north to south, we have the (i.) Little Para
River; (i.) Dry Creek; (aii.) Onkaparinga River.

(i) Little Para River.—This has little bearing on the Adelaide area except
that it is one of the streams that contribute to the Port River Estuary. The
river appears in parts to be an ante-consequent, though the writer has much
difficulty in deciding to what extent the effects of capture may be mistaken
for evidences of antecedence. Certainly the dominant influence in this valley
has been the faulting and tilting. The stream flows west from the Mount
Gawler Range, which is the northern continuation of the Mount Lofty Scearp,
across the remaining western fault blocks.

Where the valley cuts the fault scarps, sudden and precipitous gorges
occur. The upper portions of the valley show a somewhat remarkable
drainage network that appears to be due to the influence of differential
resistance of varying rock types striking north and south, ‘To the west of the
Para Fault this stream has spread out a large fan delta, the site of the village
of Salisbury—the northern continuation of the “higher deltaic plain” of the
Adelaide area (fig. 4).

(ii.) Dry Creek —This is a small consequent stream flowing down the
southern tilting face of the Para Block, receiving its main tributaries from the
high scarp face to the east, and originally emptying into the Torrens River.
It has been captured by the headward erosion of a small stream on the Para
Scarp face, and thus led away by a shorter route to the estuary, The evidences

243

of capture in the wind-gap, elbow-bend, and gorge are well shown. The
channel across the plains diminishes and disappears.

The stream, in time of flood, spreads out into a wide sheet of flowing
water, and at other seasons is either as dry as its name indicates, or flows in
a diminishing stream as the waters soak into the deep alluvial beds. In the
1841 map, elsewhere referred to, this creek is marked as “Dry in Summer,”
and this appears to have led to the present name. Cockburn records that it
was previously called Montague Creek. In the Adelaide area it cannot be
said that the term “dry in summer” denotes any peculiarity, for the climatic
and soil conditions are such that this is the common characteristic of all small
streams during the long, hot. dry months of the year.

(iii.) Onkaparinga River —This valley has already been described in dealing
with the various fault blocks. Howchin, Teale, Benson, and others (refs. 1,
13, 21) have discussed the physiographic problems presented by this stream,
but the matter has not yet been fully solved. It is difficult to decide with any
degree of certainty whether the Gorge at Noarlunga is due to capture by
headward crosion, or to stperimposition, though the latter theory has been
favoured in previous sections of this paper. The support for the theory of
superimposition comes mainly from the evidence presented by similar features
on the Torrens and other rivers to the north.

In considering the physiographic history of these streams, and par-
ticularly of the Onkaparinga, much suggestive information may be obtained
from the work of Professor C. A. Cotton on similar block-faulted areas in
New Zealand. For instance, in his work on Block Mountains (ref. 5), he
writes: “If, as in Otago, the deformation has produced longitudinal tectonic
features—both true consequent and ante-consequent drainage will follow
generally longitudinal courses, though perhaps breaking across here and there
from one linear series of depressed areas to another. Antecedent drainage,
on the other hand, may cross the longitudinal features diagonally or trans-
versely.”

One cannot escape the conviction in travelling along and across most
parts of the Onkaparinga Valley that its main outlines are partly tectonic in
origin—formed by the tilting of fault blocks, with modification by stream
erosion to such an extent that the valley and hills in the upper portions, above
Ambleside, have much of the appearance of physiographic maturity. As in
the case of the Torrens, the possibilities of “exhumation” and later tilting
must not be overlooked. At Oakbank, where the valley has mature outlines.
is situated one of the State’s most famous racecourses.

The importance of the Onkaparinga Valley to Adclaide is chiefly in its
fertile, food-producing areas, and in its great value as one of the chief catch-
ment areas for water supply. The valley has much scenic beauty, of which
the peaceful farming localities and bush scenes of Ambleside present many
aspects that have inspired and have in turn been preserved by the art of
Hans Heysen, whose home is in this valley.

IX —EFFECTS OF GEOGRAPHIC CONTROLS.

(a) Adelaide in its Relation to the State-——A study of the distribution of the
population, either of the whole world or of any special area, brings into
prominence the fact that such distribution is never uniform, but tends to
concentrate in what are called “islands” of population (ref. 2, p. 415). This is
as true in plains as in mountain areas, in forests as in open lands, and in fertile
as in desert places. It is particularly true of new lands, and South Australia
1s no exception.

244

A study of the population of the State, or of the Commonwealth, will
show that in this respect the Spencer-Vincent Sunkland represents such an
“island” of population (see fig. 15). Within this larger “island” of people
we see, also, a number of other island communities of varying sizes, from the
isolated village of Iron Knob, through “railway towns,” “wheat centres,” and
coastal ports, up to the larger towns such as the industrial and shipping
centre of Port Pirie. The city of Adelaide is itself an island community of
some 320,000 souls—a community of outstanding interest from the geo-
graphical point of view (see fig. 16).

The study of Adelaide as a capital, and of its inter-relations with the
country areas on which it depends for its existence, is a separate problem,
and can only be touched on here in a general way. Vaughan Cornish, in his
study of great capitals, tells us that such cities represent Crossways, or
Strongholds, or Storehouses. A different mode of assessment must be applied
to the capitals of new countries. In such places capital cities do not neces-
sarily occur as natural growths—as did Paris, Berlin, or London—hbut may be
planned beforehand on sites carefully selected for the purpose (Washington,
Canberra, Adelaide).

From a study of the character of the site and city of Adelaide, its people
and their occupations, and its relation to the rest of the State, we see that it
is really a Radiating Centre, the place from which settlement has spread in
all directions, and from which the whole of the State is governed, It has
become in turn a Market-place, where imports are received and distributed,
and where the exports are accumulated and sent away. Further, since the
climatic conditions and the general amenities of the city are particularly
attractive, another important factor in city growth comes into play, which
we may recognise by calling the city a Garden.

A study of the human geography of Adelaide thus leads to the con-
clusion that the city is all three: a Centre, a Market-place, and a Garden.
Although we have found the word “centre” to be applicable, it will be noted
that Adelaide has that “forward” position required of the capital of a State.
In this case the city stands forward towards the chief seaport of the State
~-the Gateway to the Homelands, and the route towards the oversea markets.

In the preceding sections chief place has been given to consideration of
the geological and physiographic conditions of the Adelaide area. We will
proceed to discuss the climatic conditions, and then the population, the
occupations, and finally the distribution of the metropolitan population in
time and in area.

(b) Climatic Conditions —The climatic conditions have been the subject of
systematic record almost from the birth of the Province, and have been well
described by various writers. A summary of the general conditions is all
that is here required, and this is set out in the following tables and shown in
graphic form in fig, 12,

Ratzel has said that “Every state is a bit of soil and humanity.” Brunhes
improves on this with the statement: “Every state is a bit of soil, a bit of
humanity, and a bit of water.” The enormous importance of water is par-
ticularly indicated by a geographic study of South Australia.

(1.) Rainfall and Evaporation—The following table gives (a) the average
monthly rainfall in inches at Adelaide from records covering the past 88 years,
and (b) the average monthly evaporation from a free water surface at the
same place, also expressed in inches :—

FL M. A. M. J J A S oO N

J. ; P : S. . ; D.
(a)... .72 72 1.03 175 2,78 3.12 264 2.51 2.06 1.74 1.15 1.00 — Total, 21.22
(b) .... 8.99 7.33 5.79 3.41 2.02 1.24 1.30 187 284 476 6.50 8.44 — Total, 54.49

245

These tables are shown graphically in fig. 12. The rainfall records
indicate that the Adelaide area enjoys a relatively dry summer and a rainy
winter, with a comparatively low total rainfall. This emphasises the
importance, from the point of view of water supply, of the adjoining high
ranges, with their higher rainfall.

J AM. AS
AVERAGE MONTHLY EVAPORATION. (IN INCHES

2
G

S ARPGO MLSE A N Cc MB
VARIATION IN RAINFALL DUE TO MT LOFTY RANGES.

Fig. 12.

Graphs showing the average monthly rainfall, evaporation, temperature, and hours
of sunshine per day; also the influence of the Mount Lofty Horst on the rainfall.

246

In the final analysis the limiting factor in the growth of Adelaide will
probably be found to be the Water Supply. The evaporation figures further
indicate the dryness of the climate, which possibly gives it a more exhilarating
and enjoyable character.

The effect of the Mount Lofty Ranges on the rainfall has already been
dealt with. The graph shown in fig. 12 emphasises the point, and shows, also,
the very definite “rain shadow” that lies to the east of the ranges. The
figures are as follow, in inches: Seaton, 17.29; Adelaide, 21.22; Rose Park,
25.97: Glen Osmond, 26.34; Mount Loity Summit, 47.31; Stirling East, 47.20;
Ambleside, 35.13; Nairne, 28.37; Callington, 15.48; Murray Bridge, 13.94,

(a.) Sunshine and Temperature.—Adelaide has a remarkable share of sunny
hours. The average monthly temperature, taken over a period of 77 years,
in degrees, is shown at (a) and in fig. 12, while the average number of hours
of sunshine per day is given at (b). From this will be seen the remarkably
mild winter that the city area enjoys, and which is one of the chief charms.
Even in June, July, and August there is a daily average of between four and
five hours of sunshine. The summer, though hot, is dry, and is enjoyable to
most people. When a continued “hot spell” occurs, relief is available at the
seashore and in the adjoining cooler uplands.

J. FM. A. M. J. J. A. Ss. oO. N. D.
(a) .... 73.9 74.1 69.8 64.0 57.9 53.5 51.8 53.9 57.1 61.9 67.0 71.1—Tot. Av., 63.0
{b)...100 94 7.7 59 48 41 45 53 61 74 87 98—-Tot.Av., 7.0

(iii.) Winds and Tides—Adelaide lies within those invigorating and energy-
rich areas of the world (vide Huntington, “Climate and Civilization”) where
the weather is varied and is governed by a series of successive cyclones and
anti-cyclones; at times monsoonal influences temporarily reach down from
the northward.

The actual figures regarding the winds, to which reference has been made
in the sections dealing with the growth of the sand-dune barrier and the
estuary, are set out in the following table, which gives the average number
of days in each month during which the wind has prevailed from various
directions at Adelaide :—

N. .N.E. E. 5.E, Ss. SW. W. N.W. Calm Gales
January 1 2 3 4 7 7 3 1 3 2
February 1 2 3 5 6 5 2 1 3 1
March a ak 2 3 5 6 6 3 J 4 1
April 3 4 3 3 4 5 3 2 3 1
May 5 6 2 2 3 4 3 3 3 1
June . 6 6 2 1 2 4 3 3 3 1
July 6 6 2 2 3 4 3 3 2 2
August 5 6 2 1 2 4 5 4 2 2
September .... 3 5 2 2 3 6 4 3 2 3
October 2 4 3 2 4 7 5 2 2 2
November .... 1 3 3 3 5 8 4 1 2 1
December .... 1 2 3 4 5 8 4 1 3 2

TotalforYear 35 48 31 34 50 68 42 25 32 19

It will be seen that the prevailing winds are S.-S.W. In dealing with the
winds mention should be made of two sets of local winds that have important
influences. One of these is the ordinary sequence of land and sea breezes that
is particularly felt along the outer sand dune belt, and renders these areas so
important to the city (see fig. 16).

The other is the so-called “Gully Winds,” due to the downward drainage
through the scarp-face valleys on to the plains in the late afternoon and
evening (often far into the night) of the colder air of the highlands; they are
cooling breezes, but in many cases they constitute a nuisance on account of

247

the damage done to gardens, etc.; these winds have a distinct influence against
the progress of settlement towards certain localities of the piedmont area
(see fig. 16).

The tides have little bearing on the geography, except in the important
matter of the formation of the coastal features and the harbours. To the
tides we owe the beautiful stretches of sea-beach, and the scouring of the
Port River and Light’s Passage. To them, also, we must attribute the Wonga
Shoal, and its gradual and undesired extension to the north and west. The
tides are briefly described by Professor Chapman (A.A.A.S. Handbook, 1924,

. 18).

_ the following data are from the “Australia Pilot,” Vol. I., 1918: “It is
high water, full and change, at the Semaphore Jetty at IX h, 40 m.; springs
rise 7} feet, neaps 5 feet. During the summer months, at springs it is high
water in the morning, and low in the afternoon; at neaps it is low in the
morning and high in the afternoon, and the a.m. tides rise higher than the
pin. During the winter months the reverse of this is the case. Westerly
winds raise the general level of the water 2 to 3 feet, easterly winds depress
it about 14 feet. The neap tides are very irregular. Five days before full and
change, the tides cease to flow regularly; there is then a very small rise and
fall; the first making tide of high water generally occurs from one to two
o’clock on the following morning; the tides then run in their usual course to
springs. This peculiarity of the tides is experienced in both St. Vincent and
Spencer Gults.”

(c) Transport and Communications——The State of South Australia is a land
of big distances. Adelaide being the administrative centre to a very thorough
degree, and the chief market of the State, it is further necessary that abundant
and rapid transport should be available. This takes the form of a widespread
railway system and active coastal shipping. There is a remarkable develop-
ment of ports in the Gulf Region, no less than 40 being listed in the Annual
Report of the Harbours Board. There is, also, a radial system of roads, and in
response to the rapid modern development of motor traffic the chief of these
are being laid with bituminous concrete. ‘The chief trunk roads from Adelaide,
as laid down by the Commissioner of Highways, are set out in fig. 13.

The railways may be considered, from the geographical point of view,
under three heads: (1) Those that leave Adelaide for the ports; (2) Those
that leave the city towards the north; (3) Those that leave the city towards
the south.

The railroads towards the ports, as already stated, lie mainly along the
old course of the Torrens. They present no difficulties except when approach-
ing and crossing the more recent deltaic mud areas of the Port River. The
railway to the Inner Harbour is the oldest in the State, and was built in the
face of much opposition; it lies parallel and close to the route set apart for
a canal by the founders of Adelaide.

The northern railroads have before them the wide alluvial plains that are
the northern continuation of the Adelaide Plains, or they enter the area of the
ranges across low divides, and run up the long north-south alluvial plains that
are characteristic of that portion of the State. One route crosses the ranges
wid Kapunda and Eudunda to Morgan, but is of more value as a “local” line
than as one tapping the Murray Basin, for reasons already given.

The railroads leaving the city towards the south must face at once the
high barrier of the Mount Lofty Horst, and the problems thus presented have
been dealt with in some detail in Section VI. (0). There are no less than two
railway routes to the seaside suburb of Glenelg, but these are of little
economic importance,

248

The trunk roads form a geographic study in themselves, but can only be
referred to in a general way. The physiographic influences that operate are
quite similar to those of the railways, except that steep grades present to
modern motor traffic much less of a barrier than they do to steam trains.

MELBOURNE ~

Na bie tine

Fig. 13.
Plan showing the chief roads and railways radiating from the City of Adelaide.

The chief trunk roads, as shown in fig. 13, are: (1) The Port Road,
lately duplicated; this is the most important single road in the State, and a.
review of its daily traffic provides an epitome of the commercial geography of

249

South Australia. (2) The North Road traverses the plains parallel to the
Para Scarp, and bifurcates at Gepps Cross, one going to Port Wakefield and
Yorke Peninsula, and the other to the main northern regions. (3) The Torrens
Valley Road proceeds along the Torrens Gorge and opens up much of the hills
country and the so-called “Murray Flats.” (4) The “Prince’s Highway,” the
main eastern route, climbs the scarp via the Glen Osmond Creek; it divides
at Littlehampton, one branch going to Murray Bridge, and the other to
Wellington, where there is a ferry, across which passes the bulk of the motor
traffic to the South-East and to the Eastern States, via the Coorong. There
is as yet no properly constructed trunk road connection between Adelaide
and any other State capital. (5) The South Road caters for the Fleurieu
Peninsula and Victor Harbour; it is largely a pleasure route. (6) The “Bay
Road” leads to Glenelg (Holdfast Bay), and is at present the most important
pleasure route in the State.

Numbers of other roads lead out from the city into the hills, and several
are shown in fig. 16. It will be noted how straight are these radial routes from
the city until they meet the fault scarp, up which they writhe more or less
tortuously according to the height of the scarp at the place of ascent. Many
of these are used purely as scenic and pleasure roads. In the hills themselves
it is notable to what extent the scarp ridges are used for communications.

The electric tramway system, at present showing a tendency to merge into
a more mobile motor-bus system, is set out in fig. 16. Owing to the open level
character of the city site, coupled with wise engineering direction, a compre-
hensive radial system has been devised for the city, with a smaller separate
system at Port Adelaide. The influence on these lines of the various physio-
graphic features described in the preceding sections needs no elaboration.

In an account of the system of transport in operation, tendencies are per-
haps more important than established facts. In this connection mention must
be made of the growing importance of motor-borne traffic, and also of the
initiation of aerial services, The air service is at present in its infancy; the
site of the aerodrome is on the lower deltaic plain at Albert Park, whence
passengers and mails leave for Mildura, Broken Hill, Melbourne, and Sydney.

(d) The Growth of the City Population—A matter that is frequenty dis-
cussed, and on which no final decision has been reached, is the merit, or other-
wise, of the growth of the metropolitan population relative to that of the
country, While regarded by some as a retrograde movement, others see
therein the signs of progress. Whichever may be the correct view, the
tendency is a very decided one and an accelerating one, as may be noted from
an inspection of the graph shown in fig. 14, particularly in the portion repre-
senting the post-war years.

In fig. 14 is shown the relative growth of the city and country population
from the earliest years of the State, the figures being kindly supplied by the
Government Statist, Mr. W. L. Johnston. The firm line (marked “City’”)
represents the total population of the metropolitan area (within a 10-mile
radius of the G.P.O., Adelaide), and the broken line (marked “Country”)
represents the total population of the State outside of the metropolitan area.

It will be seen that for the first 15 years the population of city and
country ran closely parallel, The country population then increased rapidly,
while the city expanded but slowly. By 1864 the country population was twice
that of the metropolitan district. The country continued to progress more
rapidly than the city, as far as population increase was concerned, up to 1876,
when city growth began to be more marked.

About 1890 the population of the country received a set-back; during that
year there took place the first recorded decrease in country population,

250

accompanied by an increase in the city. Since that date the variations
in the country population have been marked, the effects of droughts and war
being most pronounced. During the same time, apart from the decrease of
the war years, the city has progressed in numbers at a rapid rate—much more
so since 1910.

By the year 1913 the city and the country populations were equal. Since
then the relative rates of increase, shown on the graph (fig. 14), have been so
distinct that by 1926 the city population was 316,865, and the country only
249,529—that is to say, the extra-metropolitan or country population was
little more than three-quarters as great as that of the metropolitan area.

This does not appear to be due to geographic controls, except insofar as
the city area is a most desirable one in which to live. The chief factors that
are operating in the matter might be: (1) An increased desire for the com-

cy ’ 4 ry wt
1836 50 60 ‘70 80 90 1900 i910 [920 26
Fig. 14.
Graph showing the relative population of Adelaide and the country districts,

from the birth of the Province up to the year 1926.

forts and conveniences associated with city and suburban life; (2) higher
rates of pay for city industries; and (3) increased mechanical aids, whereby
fewer people than heretofore are required to work the land. Possibly the most
interesting feature of fig. 14 is the prophecy of the future that is shown by
the trend of the graph lines of the city and country respectively for the past
six years. If the present rates of increase continue unchanged until 1940, the
city population will be about 450,000, compared with 275,000 in the country.

(e) The Occupations of the People—In the opening paragraphs of this
section Adelaide was described as a Centre, a Market, and a Garden. The first

251

characteristic is shown by the number of people employed in administrative
work, the second by the high proportion of those engaged in buying and
selling (commercial callings), while the third is indicated in part by the
number of independent people who have preferred to live in the area, and in
part by a very well-known tendency for families to move to Adelaide from
the country areas—a movement for which no definite figures are available.

In the fourth place, the metropolitan area is becoming, to some extent,
a manufacturing city, but the absence of local supplies of coal, water-power,
iron, and timber must always militate against any considerable development
of manufacturing. Following along the lines of argument of the eminent
geographer, Ellsworth Huntington, it might be argued that Adelaide owes
much of the part that it plays in the industrial life of Australia to its pleasant
climate and good conditions of housing and living—geographical factors
which Iluntington asserts to be associated with comparative freedom from
what are called “labour troubles.”

In 1921 census figures show that—of a total population of 255,000—
149,000 were “dependents” (non-wage earners). Of these, 80,000 were under
20 years of age. Of a total of 80,000 male bread-winners, the following were
the chief occupations :—

Industrial aa = a ath .. 35,000
Commercial —.... bead a sas ... 19,000
Transport and Communication... we 10,000
Primary Producers... ssh ees we. 7,000
Professional ... yaad aa ie we 6,000
Domestic _ fr wae 2,000

There were also 26,000 female bread-winners, the majority engaged in
domestic, commercial and factory work. The number of people in actual
manufacture is slowly increasing, having risen from 88 per thousand in 1914
to 95 per 1,000 in 1926.

From a further analysis of industrial occupations, taken from the 1926
report of the Chief Inspector of Factories, we learn that the chief industries
are local, and have to do with the all-important matters of clothing, shelter,
nourishment, and movement. That is to say, they are mainly associated
with building houses, making furniture, making clothes and boots, and pre-
paring food.

The only other important industry is that associated with the building
and repairing of carriages and motors. The making of agricultural machinery
—the only really “productive” branch of manufacture—is somewhat low on
the list. A high proportion of workers is engaged in land and sea transport,
and in the handling of goods. A great body of less skilled labour is also
engaged building and maintaining roads, railways, pavements, drains, etc.
The details of these figures tend to confirm the conclusion that Adelaide is an
Administrative Centre, a Market-place, and a Gateway.

(f) The Distribution of Population in the Adelaide Area—kReference was
made in the opening sections to the importance of the Gulf Region to South
Australia, The Spencer-Vincent Sunkland may be said to constitute the
“fertile island” that is the chief part of the State. There are also four
important sub-provinces: (1) The Eyre Peninsula area; (2) The Murray
River Valley; (3) The Murray Mallee; (4) The South-East. In addition, con-
tinual progress is being made towards the settlement and utilisation of the
drier northern portions of the State.

The distribution of the population of the Gulf Region is shown by a spot
map in fig. 15. Each small dot represents approximately 100 people. The
large black area represents the Adelaide Region on its triangular alluvial

252

plain, further detailed in fig. 16. In the general distribution of the population
rainfall is the dominant factor.

The influence of existing supplies of water on the sites of early townships
is shown by the place names: in some cases by the English name as in ‘Two
Wells, Crystal Brook, Bu‘cher’s Soak, Nangula Springs, Claypans Bore,
Bagots Well, etc.; in other cases by the large number of aboriginal place
names ending in words that mean “water,” chief of which are (from informa-
tion courteously supplied by Mr. Rodney Cockburn) those ending in -owie,
-cowie, -appa, -apa, -kapi, -ana (Terowie, Yarcowie, Nalyappa, Puttapa,
Poontana, Yabmana, etc.)

Fig. 15.

Spot map of the Gulf Region, the same area as is shown in fig. 3. Each small
dot represents approximately 100 people; the larger dots represent denser
“islands” of population,

The chief islets of population in the extra-metropolitan districts are due
to smelting works (Port Pirie); gulf ports (Port Lincoln, Port Augusta,
Wallaroo, Whyalla, Edithburgh); river ports (Murray Bridge); pleasure
resorts (Victor Harbour, Kingscote); railway towns (Peterborough, etc.) ;
agricultural centres (Gawler, Quorn, Melrose, Mount Barker, Minlaton,
Kapunda, Strathalbyn, etc.); irrigation settlements (Renmark, Berri,
Waikerie, etc.).

253

* 100 PERSONS.
RESERVES, PARKS, ETS,

! — —-—RAILWAYS. — —— TRAMWAYS.
: ——MAIN ROADS. 9. SCALES Miles. 5
SS a ae Canna ine ae

Qf

DUT AYIIBBEooore aac
a ee

rd /

: ies ee Q @

1927

Fig. 16.

Spot map of the Adelaide Region. Each small dot represents approximately 100

people. Parks and sports reserves are shaded; they occur mostly along the high-

land front and on the lower deltaic plain; the City “Park Lands” stand ont

prominently. The tramlines, roads, and railways are indicated. This map should
be read in conjunction with fig. 4.

254

The most thickly populated country areas are the orchard, vine, and
garden districts of the western portion of the central Mount Lofty Ranges.
The dairying areas of the Murray “swamps” are growing in importance, while
the iron-mining and salt-producing localities also have their islets of humanity.

The distribution of the population within the Adelaide area is shown in
fig. 16. This has been compiled from the latest available figures. The choice
of a dot unit of 100 persons is quite suitable for the chief city and suburban
areas, Since each dot represents 20-30 families, however, it does not properly
represent the facts in the more sparsely settled farming and gardening
localities.

Notwithstanding this fact, the whole map gives a reliable general picture
of the distribution of the population of Adelaide at the present time. While
taking advantage of all the available information from statistical and muni-
cipal sources, the draftsman (Mr. J. A. Tillett) and myself have made
personal inspections in localities less well known to us, have studied aeroplane
photographs of various portions, and have viewed and noted the city growth
from various vantage points on the scarp face.

The only other plan of the Adelaide area known to me that in any way
approximates to a “spot map” is that drawn by G. S. Kingston in 1842, to
show the distribution of the houses in Adelaide. At that time the population
of the State was almost 15,000. This shows in the city area concentration
towards water supplies in both North and South Adelaide, with a secondary
factor of nearness to the Port Road in South Adelaide. It is noticeable, as
a minor feature, how settlement in those days avoided the “lonely” spaces of
the six public squares of the city,

The population map (fig. 16) throws into high relief the Park Lands of
the City of Adelaide, which were set aside as reserves in the very first plans
of the city. On this figure there has also been included all the more important
parks, reserves, and sports grounds of the area. It will be noted that parks
and reserves, here as elsewhere, abound on the less valuable spaces—in this
case on the hills and valleys of the scarp front, and along the swampy lower
deltaic plains. Along the latter may be seen a row of racecourses, golf links,
coursing reserves, and rifle ranges. The golf links have excellent positions,
for the most part on the relics of the old sand dune belt.

It will be noted that there are as yet no outer sand dune reserves nor any
such space set aside on Le Fevres Peninsula, apart from the tiny area of old
lagoon (now being reclaimed) adjoining Hart Street, and a small semi-official
reserve at Outer Harbour. The chief National Parks are as follow: National
Park, Belair, 2,000 acres (the old “Government Farm”) ; Morialta, 525 acres;
Waterfall Gully, 103 acres; Hazelwood Park, 30 acres; Brownhill Creek, 142
acres: Mount Lofty Summit Reserve, 60 acres ; Kingston Park, 20 acres.

The detailed distribution of population as shown in the figure must be
studied in conjunction with the whole of the foregoing sections, and more
particularly with the physiographic zones (fig. 4) and the climatic factors.
Thus we see how the Para Fault Block carries by far the greatest portion of
the population. Apart from the shoreline itself, no physical factor exerts
greater influence than the Para Scarp and the main Mount Lofty Scarp. The
great bulk of the population lives to the east of the Para Scarp and west of
the Mount Lofty Scarp; there is no need to elaborate this in view of the facts
revealed by the map.

The influence of the outer sand dune belt has been frequently referred
to; even the municipalities along this zone have elongated north-south out-
lines. Note the four “islands” of sand dune population: (1) Brighton, (2)
Glenelg, (3) Henley-Grange, (4) Semaphore-Largs.

255

The repelling effect of the lowlands of the estuary is distinctly seen,
though the clustered population of Port Adelaide on this area shows that
even so powerful a geographic factor may be overcome by the influence of
nearness to the port. Between the outer sand dune belt and the higher deltaic
plain is the almost unpeopled belt of lower deltaic plain (compare figs. 4 and
16), which is subject to floods.

The geographic influence of the Port Line and Road, which, it must be
remembered, largely lie along the old fan delta of the Torrens, breaks the
continuity of the unpeopled lower delta. The higher deltaic plain, par-
ticularly where the old fan delta of the Torrens is highest, 1s thickly
populated: Hulton, Mile End, Thebarton, Bowden, Hindmarsh, and the
associated suburbs.

The city of Adelaide itself remains the most densely-populated portion
of the area as shown by fig. 16. There is a distinct tendency nowadays for
the city population to move out to the suburbs, partly due to the desire for
larger allotments and more modern cottages, aided by the need for additional
space within the city for motor garages, factories, and shops, as well as by
modern means for rapid transport. Everywhere old tenement houses are
being replaced by industrial buildings. The foundation of the garden suburb
of Colonel Light Gardens, the population of which forms a notable “islet” to
the south of the city (see fig. 16), may be correlated with this tendency to
move outwards from the more congested parts of the city.

On the higher land of the Para Block Adelaide stands within its belt of
parks, with its northern continuation (Prospect and Nailsworth), its eastern
continuation (Norwood, Kensington, and Burnside), and its southern exten-
sion (Goodwood, Unley, and Parkside). Along the Torrens Valley we have
the denser areas of Walkerville, St. Peters, and Payneham. The density of
population falls off as the foothills are approached to the east, and stops at
the main scarp front almost as completely as it does at the shoreline on the
west.

This completes the survey of the human geography of Adclaide. We
have endeavoured to show that the city resembles a great single organism,
growing and expanding, or decaying and retreating, according to the geo-
graphical factors of land and water, height and distance, warmth and water
supply, food and recreation. We have seen in fig. 16, how the city reaches out
towards the desirable or necessary areas, and how it shrinks from those geo-
graphically undesirable, Finally, we have seen the city as an “island” of
population, mutually co-operating with the great productive country areas on
pinch a is dependent, and for which it constitutes a Market, a Gateway, and
a Garden.

X—LIST OF REFERENCES.
1. W. N. Benson—‘Notes Descriptive of a Stereogram of the Mount Lofty
Ranges.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxv., 1911, p. 108.
Vipat pe LA BLACHE—‘“Principles of Human Geography.” London, 1926.
Jean Brunnes—‘Human Geography.” London, 1912.
VauGHAN CorNnIisH—‘The Great Capitals.” London, 1923.

C. A. Corron—“Block Mountains in New Zealand.” American Journal of
Science, vol. xliv., Oct., 1917, p. 249.

6. C. A. Cotrox—‘“Fault Coasts in New Zealand.” Geographical Review,
vol. i., 1916, No. 1, p. 20.

7. W. M. Davis—“Geographical Essays.” Boston, 1909.

wk we N

256

8. CHarLes FENNER—‘The Physiography of the Adelaide Region.” A.A.A.5.
Handbook, Adelaide, 1924, p. 12.

9, CHartes Fenner—“The Physiography of the Werribee River Area.”
Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., vol. xxxi., Dec., 1918, p. 176.

10. Cuartes FENNER—“The Physiography of Victoria.” Proc, Pan-Pacific
Science Cong., 1923, vol. i., p. 719.

11, Water Howcuin—“Geology of South Australia.” Adelaide, 1918.

12. Water Howcurn—“The Evolution of the Physiographical Features of
South Australila.” A.A.A.S., vol. xiv., Melbourne, 1913, p. 148.

13. Watter Howcainx and J. W. Grecory—‘Geography of South Australia.”
Adelaide, 1909.

14. Dovcras Mawson—‘“‘Notes on the Geological Features of the Meadows.
Valley.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlvii., 1923, p. 371.

15. A. Grenrecy Price—‘The Foundation and Settlement of South Australia.”
Adelaide, 1924.

16. A. Grexrety Price—‘The Settlement of South Australia.” A.A.A.S., vol.
xvii., Adelaide, 1924, p. 439.

17. A. GrenFeLtL Prick—‘Geographical Problems of Early South Australia.”
Proc. Roy. Geog, Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxv., 1925, p. 57.

18. GerrritH TAytor—‘Physiography of Eastern Australia.” Com. Bur. of
Meteorology, Bull. No. 8, Melbourne, 1911.

19. GrirritH Vayror—‘The Australian Environment.” Advisory Council of
Science and Industry, Memoir No. 1, Melbourne, 1918, p, 96.

20. E. O, TeaLte—“Forest Physiography of Kuitpo.” Bull. No. 6, Dept. of
Forestry, Univ. of Adelaide, 1918,

21. E. O. Teare—l'he Physiography of the Meadows Valley.” Trans. Roy.
Soc. S, Austr., vol. xlvi., 1922, p. 160.

CHIEF MAPS AND PLANS CONSULTED.

H. Y. L. Brown—Geological Map of South Australia, 1899.

L. K. Warp—Geological, Topographical, and Water Supply Maps of South Aus-
tralia, 1913, 1917.

SuRVEYOR-GENERAL STRAWBRIDGE—Topographical Map of the Hills District,
circa 1897.

W. H. Epmunps—Topographical Maps of Adelaide Hills, 1926.

Com. Minrrary Survey—Adelaide Sheet, with Contours, etc., 1914.

J. A. Trrretr—M.S. Map of Adelaide Plains, 10’ V.I., prepared from data on
the Hydraulic Engineer’s large scale plans, 2’ V.I., 1926.

ApMiRALTY CHart-—Spencer and St. Vincent Gulfs, No, 2,389.

PARLIAMENTARY Papers—River, Railway, Bridge, and Harbour Plans, etc.,
1870-80, 1917, 1921-22.

Maps, PLaAns, ETc., kindly made available by Dr. L. K. Ward (Director of Mines),
Mr. T. E. Day (Surveyor-General), Mr. H. E. Bellamy (Hydraulic
Engineer), Mr. J. T. Furner (Engineer for Surveys), Mr. D. V. Fleming
(Commissioner of Highways), Mr. R. G. Peake (Secretary, Harbours
Board), Mr, F. L. Parker (Clerk, House of Assembly), Mr. W. L.
Johnston (Government Statist), Mr. Shinkfield (Commonwealth
Meteorological Bureau), Mr. G. H. Pitt (South Australian Archives),
Mr. W. Scott Griffiths (Town Planner).

257

A REVISION OF THE “DISTYLA COMPLEX” OF THE
GENUS CASUARINA.

By Exren D. Macxtirn, B.Sc., Demonstrator in Botany,
University of Adelaide.

[Read September 8, 1927.]

Puate XIII.

CONTENTS, Page
I. Inrrovucrion aa ie es is a ow ea at 3 257
II. Hisrortca. is re tie a ste re whe 412 ae 257
II. Present Work AP by ba 24 et ath wa od 260
TV. Spreciric CHARACTERISTICS .. st i ie es “i eh 261
V. Tue Mate Flowers .. & a a es "4 262
VI. Key To THE SPECIES OF THE “Dasty LA COMPLEX” .. Js ns i 267
VII. Descrretion or Species eb a . =A ow se 267
1. C. striata, E. D. Macklin |. is mh Pr 29 et 267
2. C. rigida, Miq. .. hi = 2 co - 4s ts 269
3. C. paludosa, Sieb. ne rn ach 270
3a. C. paludosa, Sieb., var. “robusta, E. D. Macklin .. ad i 271
4. C. pusilla, E. D. ‘Macklin... ty ra Ms 272
5. C. distyla, Vent. ag ie i ae tA 2 w 274
6. C. Muellerina, Miq. .. yt ‘ss es 4 en ses 275
VIII THe Anatomy or THE ASSIMILATORY BRANCHLETS .. a ~ 277
1. General... Js Po a teh io ie mS vn 277
2. C. stricta, Ait. .. 278

3. Comparative Anatomy of the ‘ ‘Distyla. complex” and of the other
South Australian Species .. ~ 7 be a oe 280
IX. SumMary asd we ran vi ih ice < ile <i 284

I. InrropucrTion.

Field observations and the examination of herbarium material have shown
that there are seven species of Casuarina in Australia at the present time grouped
under the name of C. distyla, Vent. With such confusion existing, it seemed as
though a review of the species concerned would be useful. Since I had available
six species of the “Distyla complex,” all of which had been examined in the field,
it was decided to attempt the necessary revision,

II. Historica Work.

Although the Casuarinaceae is a small family, composed of a single genus,
Casuarina, containing relatively few species, there has always existed a great deal
of confusion among those species, This, perhaps, is due, in the first place, to
the fact that various botanists have described one or two species from time to
time as opportunities have offered, while for nearly a century after the publica-
tion of the first description by Rumphius, no worker attempted a revision of the
family. The natural consequence of this lack of co-ordinated work was that the
same species was frequently described twice, or even three times, under different
names. This accounts in some measure for the number of synonyms within the
genus.

Progress in the knowledge of the flora of Australia during the last century
demanded the specific determination of many Casuarinas, some of which were

I

258

very closely related. Now the family is unique in structure, and the character-
istics which give it distinction are so constant that they have no value in
determining individual species. Many of the earlier workers, with the smaller
range of form available to them, could not realise this, and, consequently, one
finds that points which appeared to be specific had little value at a later date when
further exploration brought in more species. Thus some of the earlier descrip-
tions were inadequate for the scparation of the new forms, and so, as time went
on, the nomenclature became more and more confused. There is much variation
within the limits of any one species, while in some cases it is difficult to distinguish
between mere variation and points of specific importance, Many of the species
are so sitnilar in general appearance that unless the systematist resorts to a
detailed examination of the flower or the anatomy of the stem, it is difficult to see
the boundaries of any one species, and consequently it will be seen that confusion
is inevitable.

It is of interest to trace the history of the discovery of the species occurring
in South Australia, and also some of those which have hitherto been recorded for
the State.

For much of the following detail I am indebted to Miquel (1848), as many
of the publications referred to are not available in Australia. Owing to the
rarity of Miquel’s work here, it has seemed useful to summarize the history of
the genus.

Rumphius (1755) and the Forsters (1775) made the first contributions to our
knowledge of the genus. About the same time as the work of the two Forsters
was published, several species of Casuarina were introduced into European
gardens. Among them was one which Aiton named C. stricta and described very
briefly in the first edition of the Hortus Kewensis, 1789.

Ventenat, in 1803, described C. distyla, which had previously been brought
from Tasmania, and was, at that time, growing in the celebrated jardin du Cels.
Ventenat was uncertain whether the plant he described differed sufficiently from
C. stricta, Ait., to receive specific rank. He remarks: “Il est impossible de
déterminer d’aprés la seule phrase spécifique? qui se trouve dans |’ Hortus
Kewensis, sile Casuarina distyla est la méme plante que le Casuarina stricta, ou si
c’est une espéce différcnte.”

Labillardiére, in 1806, described C. quadrivalvis from material he had col-
lected in Tasmania. Probably this species is the same as that described so
inadequately in 1789 under the name of C. stricta. The complete description and
excellent illustrations given by Labillardiére leave no possibility of doubt that his
species is identical with that known by the name of C. stricta, Ait., in this State
to-day.

Following these publications came a period of activity in extra-Australian
regions resulting in the collection and description of several new species.

In Sprengel’s work (1826) descriptions of the species collected by Sieber, in
Australia, occur; among others are C. glauce, Sieb., and C. paludosa, Sieb. It is
unfortunate that Sprengel divided the thirteen species dealt with into two groups,
according to whether they were dioecious or monoecious. ‘These points are far
from constant in the majority of species and are of no specific importance, so that
the separation tended to obscure natural affinities.

In 1841 all the species growing in the Berlin Gardens were determined and
described very accurately by Otto and Dietrich (1841). Among these were
C. suberosa, C. pumila, and C. humilis.

The first worker to attempt a revision of all the known species was Miquel
(1848), and it is to him that we owe the existence of careful iliustrations and of
complete and comprehensive descriptions. he first collection dealt with was

(1) Vaginis multifidis.

259

that made by Preiss in the vicinity of the Swan River (W.A.) and handed over
to him by Lehmann for determination. The results of this examination are pub-
lished in Lehmann’s work (1844). Later other collections passed through Miquel’s
hands, and before he pttblished his valuable revision, he examined Sir William
Hooker’s vast collection (which included plants found by Sieber, Baxter, Fraser,
Sinclair, Cunningham, J. D. Hooker, and others), and all those plants growing
at the time in the Berlin Gardens. The examination of these plants culminated
in his Review (1848). The work contains complete descriptions and illustrations
of about thirty species, and also a history of work on the family.

In 1859, Miquel described C. Muelleriana collected by Mueller in the Mount
Lofty Ranges. In a later publication (1865) and in De Candolle’s Prodromus he
considered this species to be a variety of C. suberosa, with which it is more closely
connected than it is with C. distyla, in which Mueller and Bentham merged it.

During the years 1864-1868, vol. 16 of De Candolle’s great work was in pre-
paration. To this Miquel contributed minute descriptions of the then known
species of Casuarina, among which were C. distyla, Vent., C. rigida, Miq., and
C. Baxteriana, Mig.

Botanical work was making great progress at this time in Australia, and in
order to bring his Revision of 1848 up to date, Miquel published a short paper,
in 1865, adding points and later records to existing descriptions. There Miquel
stated that he was convinced that the C. distyla of Ventenat was identical with the
C. stricta of Aiton. The description and figures given for the latter in his Review
were of a sterile plant which he now decided was not C. stricta, but what species
he was unable to determine. It ts difficult to see why Miquel regarded C. distyla
and C’ stricta as synonyms, because the inadequate descriptions of Aiton’s species
more correctly describes C. quadrivalvis, Labill., than it does C. distyla, Vent.
In this work Miquel also discussed the great variation in C. distyla, and as a result
of his extended observations grouped many forms that he had previously regarded
as separate species under the former. Among these were C. rigida, separated
from C, distyla, in 1848, and C. Fraseriana. These forms were distinct in the
herbarium, but he was not certain whether they might be merely growth forms
consequent on habitat differences.

By this act of Miquel we can see the origin of the confusion existing in the

“Distyla complex” to-day.

Mueller (1868) then published a description, under the name of C. stricta,
Ait., of C, distyla, Vent., widened to embrace all the variation noted in herbarium
specimens by Miquel, thus explaining why such species as C. rigida, C. Muelleriana,
and C. Baxteriana have been lost.

Bentham, in the Flora Australiensis (1873), corrected the error, originated
by Miquel and retained by Mueller, that C. distyla and C. stricta were identical.
He pointed out that Labillardiére’s C. quadrivalvis was the same species as the
C. stricta of Aiton. Bentham, however, adopted Mueller’s wider definition of
C. distyla, regarding C. rigida and C. Muelleriana as synonyms, It is to these
all-embracing descriptions that one can trace the confusion existing throughout
Australia to-day in the “Distyla complex,” for each State claims to have C. distyla,
and in most of them it is a different species.

In 1875-6 Tietkins and Young, the collectors of the Giles Expedition through
Ooldea and Ouldabinna across the Western Australian border, added C. lepi-
dophloia (then recorded as C. glauca) to the South Australian flora. C.
Decaisneana also was collected from the Ashburton River during the journey;
they were described shortly after by Mueller (1877).

The Elder Expedition (R. Helms, collector) added a further locality (Ferd-
inand River) for C. lepidophloia and also a doubtful record for C. humilis
(Mueller and Tate, 1896).

260

Tate (1889) listed eight species of Casuarina for South Australia; of these
C. glauca does not occur in this State, the records referring to C. lepidophloia,
while C. suberosa, C. bicuspidata, and C. humilis have not been re-collected. C.
distyla, in the sense used by Tate, refers to any of the four shrubby species
separated below.

In 1899 R. T. Baker described both C. Luehmanni, which occurs near the
Victorian border in the south-east of the State, and C. Cambagei, which is gener-
ally regarded as a synonym of C. lepidophloia, F. v. M.

More recently, ecological work in South Australia has directed attention to
the great variation in the species regarded as C. distyla, Adamson and Osborn
(1924) say of this species:—‘‘The plant is exceedingly variable both in its size
and general form. It occurs in all sizes from a small undershrub of 1 to 2 feet
up to trees of 10 to 15 feet, and varies almost as much in its general shape. Most
commonly it forms a spreading bush with no distinct main axis; at other times it
is erect with rather fastigiate branching. The tree forms have ascending branches.
How far some of these forms are distinct races or varieties is a matter that cer-
tainly calls for study and attention.”

In 1925, Cleland and Black published a list of the flora of Encounter Bay,
and there state that in the district C. distyla occurs in two forms, not separable
morphologically, one a rounded shrub (forma rotunda) and one more spiky in
appearance.

Til. Present Worx.

An anatomical investigation of a number of species of Casuarina shows that
many of the species can be identified on the structure of the branchlets alone. It
was somewhat surprising then, on sectioning the branchlets of the so-called
C. distyla from various localities in the State, to find that the material provided,
not mere variations in the one type, but two very distinct types of anatomical
structure. It did not seem possible that habitat differences could greatly affect
the internal structure of the branchlets, since a study of the variation of the
branchlets of C. stricta, Ait., from many localities showed that, beyond minor
differences, there was no serious departure from the structure normal for that
species.

Field work in the Mount Lofty Ranges soon made it apparent that one was
dealing with two species—one, a spreading, dioecious shrub with angular branchlets
and red anthers; and the second, a more robust, fastigiate shrub with branchlets
almost terete, golden-brown anthers, and shorter male spikes. Later, a dioecious
shrub similar to the latter was found, but as a closer examination revealed no
other differences between them than the dioecism, the two forms have been referred
to the one species.

At this stage in the investigation the writer was able to examine the specimens
in the National Herbaria of Sydney and Melbourne, where it was evident that a
confusion existed among the specimens labelled C. distyla. Unfortunately the type
specimen of this species is not housed in Australia.

On returning to South Australia, another small form was collected at Mount
Compass, and then Professor Cleland kindly placed at my disposal all his
Casuarinas from Encounter Bay. This collection contained a fourth form which
abounds in that district. With two species collected in the Eastern States, the
shrubby forms on hand numbered six, all of which were commonly known under
the name of C. distyla,

In the determination of these species, and also C. Baxteriana, Miq., from
Western Australia, full reliance has been placed on Miquel’s descriptions, where,
as in the case of C. distyla, type specimens were unavailable. Miquel’s work is
so comprehensive that it leaves very little possibility of error. The type speci-

261

mens of C. rigida, Miq. (both Fraser’s and Hooker’s specimens) ; C. Baxteriana,
Miq.; C. paludosa, Sieb.; and C, lepidophloia, F, v. M., have been examined, and
also the original descriptions of C. distyla, Vent.; C. rigida, Miq.; C. Muelleriana,
Miq.; and C. Baxteriana, Miq.

IV. Spreciric CHARACTERISTICS.

The present work has been rendered difficult by the extraordinary degree of
variation within the majority of the species. Forms so closely related as those
of the “Distyla complex” are not easy to identify at any time, but when they
exhibit a wide range of variation in many characters which have, in the past, been
regarded as being of taxonomic importance, they are increasingly difficult. It is
not unlikely that hybridization is a cause of the variable nature of these plants
and has obscured the original limits of the species. A noticeable feature of all
the shrubby species of the “Distyla complex” is that a great percentage of the
cones are partly sterile, and thus irregular in shape. This sterility favours the
view that hybridization has occurred.

Perhaps the most striking variations, in any one species, are those in size and
habit. It is not uncommon in South Australia to see C. Muelleriana growing to
a height of 12 feet on the more favourable slopes of the hills, for instance at
Belair, in the Mount Lofty Ranges, whilst on the top of those same hills it may
reach only a height of 4 feet. In the Encounter Bay and Mount Compass dis-
tricts, where edaphic conditions are more adverse, this species is frequently only
1 foot in height, seldom reaching above 4 feet. Nor is this the only shrubby
species that shows this response to habitat differences. It is clearly noticeable in
C. rigida around Sydney and on C. striata (n. sp.) in South Australia, The thick-
ness and length of the assimilatory branchlets vary in different specimens, as does
also the length of the internodes. In regard to the cones, which have always been
regarded as being more or less constant within a species, there is extreme varia-
tion, in size and shape of the cones, the degree of acuteness of the bracteoles, the
type of the apex (truncate, conical, or beaked, all of which may occur in different
individuals of any one species growing in the same locality), the length of the
peduncle, and the degree of sterility (pl. xili.). Extensive field observations
over the flowering season have shown that no reliance is to be placed on the
dioecistn or monoecism of any species. Some species, such as C. Muelleriana, are
usually dioecious, but monoecious individuals have been collected, whilst in C.
striata and in C. paludosa, var. robusta (n. var.) it is apparent that both conditions
are equally common.

There are, however, several features which are constant throughout. One
of the most important of these is the anatomical structure of the assimilatory
branchlets and also that of the older branches. Ecological variations which are
capable of producing marked responses in the more superficial characters do not
appear to have any influence on the anatomical type of the plant, i.e, whilst
seasonal variation may increase or lessen the tannin content of a branchlet, or
arid conditions increase the degree of lignification, the fundamental plan of con-
struction remains unchanged. This being so, the anatomical study of the family
as a whole will be a very valuable guide as to affinity, as well as giving, in certain
species at least, a check on classification. Such points as the presence or absence
of a large T-shaped band of fibres in the ridges, the type of development of the
periderm, which influences the degree of striation in the branches, and also the
particular type of medullary ray present, whether it be aggregate, compound, or
diffuse, would be really valuable assets to taxonomic work.

The angularity of the branchlets seems to be a reliable point. Whether a
branchlet is angular or terete rests, ultimately, on the shape of the ridges; some-
times they are gently rounded or flattened, giving the stem a terete appearance as

262

in C. pusilla (n. sp.) and C. paludosa, var. robusta (n. var.), sometimes as in
C. Muelleriana, C. Baxteriana, C. rigida, and to a lesser extent in C. distyla, there
is a prominent obtuse angle in the median plane of each ridge so that the stem
appears angular. The shape and size of the leaf teeth and the number of teeth
in a whorl are also good specific points, As regards the cone, it would seem that
only the presence or absence of the drosal protuberance of the valves (bractecles),
and the degree of protrusion in them, are really worth consideration, all other points
seeming variable,

The greatest assistance in taxonomic work in the genus is to be gleaned from
the male flowers. The mean length of the male spike is of importance, but in
working on any one individual it is not unusual to find the male inflorescence
varying from 1-6 cm. in length. However, with several specimens at hand, it is
not difficult to determine the average length of the spike. The arrangement of
the sheaths on the axis, whether they are overlapping, merely touching, or arranged
so as to leave a small portion of the axis bare, is a constant feature, In three of
the South Australian species the bracteoles are shed on the opening of the flower,
whilst in the remaining species they are retained. In C. stricta the two bracteoles
are woody and cohere along the upper abaxial margin by means of branching
hairs. These points have been found to be very useful in the present considera-
tion. The size relation between the persistent bracteoles and the sheathing teeth
also appears to be constant, and can, therefore, rank among the more specific
characteristics of the genus. The classification given is based upon the points
enumerated above, and, whilst anatomical data do not figure in the key, a con-
sideration of the anatomy underlies the grouping throughout.

V. THe Marx Frowers.

The buds of Casuarina are small, and consequently difficult to dissect; how-
ever, their small size is of advantage because the whole flower can be examined
microscopically. The buds were rendered transparent with chloral hydrate, and
after the removal of the bracteoles and the perianth segments, each part was
treated with phloroglucinol to see the distribution of lignified tissue within them.
Drawings have been made with the aid of the camera lucida, and, with the excep-
tion of those of the sheathing teeth, from uncovered preparations, so that all
distortion through squashing would be eliminated,

There is much uniformity in the male flowers of the genus. The spikes con-
sist of a varying number of sheaths arranged closely on the axis. ach sheath is
composed of floral bracts, free at the tips but joined laterally in the greater part
of their length to form the sheath (fig. 33). These floral bracts exactly reproduce
the type of leaf teeth found in the vegetative portion of the plant. A single flower
occurs in the axil of each bract (fig. 11); this consists, in the bud, of one stamen,
two perianth segments, and two bracteoles (figs. 1-3). The anther in the open
flower is mounted on a long filament (fig. 11) and is basifixed ; it shows two lobes
slightly separating at the top and dehiscing longitudinally. The terminal portion
of the lobe is frequently woody, while the basal part is more or less lobed (fig.
17). In the unopen bud the stamen is protected by the two perianth segments
(fig. 2), which lie on the adaxial and the abaxial face of the anther. These
perianth segments are usually hooded and ciliate (fig. 3), the smaller inner one
which, however, is inserted below the larger outer segment, covers the abaxial
side of the anther while in the bud and forms a hood over the top or wraps around
the inner face; the outer segment covers the adaxial face and is hooded over both
the stamen and the inner segment; the hood facing the floral bracts. ‘he perianth
segments do not cohere into a cap as the earlier workers thought, but each one
individually folds over the anther. With the extension of the filament, on the
opening of the flower, these perianth segments break off at the base and are

263

carried up by the stamen. There is no record of a species in which the perianth
segments are persistent. It sometimes occurs that the abaxial segment is not

developed (e.g., C. stricta).

Figs. 1-3. Bud of C. paludosa, var. robusta.
Fig. 1—Abaxial view; b, bracteole. Fig, 2—Adaxial view
with bracteoles pulled back; pd, adaxial perianth segment.
Fig. 3—Bud with outer perianth segment removed; pb,
abaxial perianth segment. x33.

The bracteoles belong to a different series, being decussate with the perianth
segments and inserted together on the axis at a point lower than that of the inser-
tion of the lowest perianth segment. At the base they show a thickened midrib
laterally placed and two equal wing-like extensions. Further up they appear to
turn slightly, so that the midrib finally lies exactly on the angle between the back

Figs. 4-6. Bud of C. Luehmanni.
Fig, 4—Adaxial view of bud; a, anther; h, hairs. Fig. 5—
Adaxial view of bracteole. Fig. 6—Bud with bracteoles
removed, leaving the perianth segments and the anther. x33.

and lateral portion of the anther. The bracteoles then become definitely and
unevenly keeled (fig. 2), the smaller sides covering the abaxial face (fig. 1) of
the anther and the perianth segments; the larger ones curving around the

264

side, but scarcely covering the axial portion. The bracteoles have invariably a
well-marked mass of fibres along the midrib, and frequently the cells of the wings
are lignified, but only in one case has any trace of tracheides been noticed, (The
perianth segments are generally devoid of all lignified tissue.) In some species
these bracteoles are retained (fig. 11), but in several they are shed with the
perianth segments on the opening of the flower (fig. 15).

From the consideration of the foregoing facts it will be seen that two types
of opened flower are possible—those which consist solely of a stamen subtended
by its floral bract, as in C. Luehmanni, C. stricta, and C. striata; and those which
retain the bracteoles. In the latter case these persistent bracteoles may be either
enclosed in the sheath, as in C. lepidophloia (fig. 13) and C. paludosa (fig. 20), or
exsert (figs. 19, 23, and 30). This, of course, depends mainly on the length of
the sheathing teeth (bracts), which is constant within any one species; it follows
that the degree of protrusion of the bracteoles has specific value.

Roughly speaking, the buds of the species investigated are of two types. Of
the first, C, Luehmanni is the simplest form, whilst C. distyla or C. paludosa, var.
robusta, may exemplify the second. Some species, such as C. lepidophloia and
C. striata, are transitional between the two.

Of the first group, there are only two examples among the South Australian
species; these are C. Luehmanni (figs. 4-6) and C. stricta (figs. 7-10), the latter
having a more complicated type of bud. Both are characterised by a degree of
hairiness not found on the buds of other species investigated. In both, bracteoles
are well developed, very woody, but deciduous in the mature flower. Long
branching hairs are present on the upper margins of the bracteoles and along the
midrib of the outer side (figs. 5 and 9). The perianth segments are also char-
acterised by the possession of long hairs on the outer faces (figs. 6 and 10) ; these
hairs are arranged along, and confined to, the middle portion of the segments,
beginning below the centre and being directed upwards as they are on the midrib
of the bracteoles. In neither case are the perianth segments wide, folded, or
hooded about the anther, but simply providing a cover. C,. Luehmanni differs
from C, stricta in having two separate bracteoles and in the presence of long
branching hairs arising from the base of the bud (fig. 4). In the former, the
perianth segments are spoon-shaped and ciliate, with many short, much-branched
hairs at the top. The perianth segments are much longer than the anther which
they enclose, and are interlocked at the top by means of the hairs (fig. 6). In
C, stricta the two bracteoles are coherent in the upper portion by means of their
branched hairs (figs. 8 and 9), and are joined about two-thirds of the way down
the back (fig. 7) by shorter branched cilia, while the axial portion is almost free
(fig. 8). Inside these bracteoles are the perianth segments. It frequently happens
that the abaxial perianth segment in C. stricta is missing, that is, it is not
differentiated, as sectioning the buds clearly shows; but in many of the specimens
examined the two were present. Certainly, if it is inconstantly present, then,
when absent, it is aborted, and there is no possibility of the union of the two seg-
ments, as the slightly bilobed nature of the adaxial one [fig. 10(a)] might suggest
(Black, 1919). This appearance is due to the perianth segment being moulded
to the shape of the anther. The two bracteoles being coherent along the greater
part of their abaxial face would suggest that the inner perianth is unnecessary.
{ft is obvious that Labillardiére (1806) noted the presence, in some cases at any
rate, of the second perianth segment, since he named the species “quadrivalvis.”
Bornet (1873) states that whilst it is usual to find in C. stricta a 3-valved perianth,
“in very rare instances a fourth valve has been found pressed against the anterior
face of the stamen.” The two perianth segments are very much of the same size
[figs. 10(a) and 10(b)], but the inner one is narrower and has fewer hairs more

265

strictly confined to the median portion. When the flower opens the four parts
are carried up as a cap and are shed simultaneously (fig. 9).

Both the above species have the same type of leaf teeth, being long, lanceolate
and ciliate, the same type of anther, rather flattened and not at all oblong, and
agree in having deciduous bracteoles. Moreover, anatomical examination
emphasises the close relationship between them,

C. lepidophloia (figs. 11-13), whilst exhibiting the same type of leaf teeth
(fig. 13) and anther, has a much simpler bud. The persistent bracteoles (fig. 11)
of this species are more ovate than keeled, especially in the young state; they are
ciliate with long branched hairs along the margin (fig. 12), but only show a few
scattered hairs along the midrib. They are unique among those species investigated
in that they possess, in addition to the fibres which are present in the midrib of
all the other species, a distinct row of tracheides running almost to the top of the

10(b)

é)

Figs. 7-10. Bud of C. stricta,

Fig. 7—Abaxial view of bud. Fig, 8—-Adaxial view of same. Fig. 9—

The floral parts, two coherent bracteoles and two perianth segments, pushed

off from an opening bud. Fig 16—The two pcrianth scgments: (a) the
adaxial and (b) the abaxial segment. x33.

bracteoles. The perianth segments, which are also strongly lignified, possess
neither tracheides nor fibres. Thcy are also slightly hairy along the back. The
anther is more rounded at the base (fig. 11) and has not the prominent lobed
extension in the basal region noted in the two preceding spccies.

In the open flower of C. striata (figs. 14-16) the bracteoles are shed, as they
are in C. Luehmanni and C. stricta. Vhere is a departure here from the
type of sheathing teeth fotrnd in the species previously described. The teeth are
ovate-lanceolate and overlapping (fig. 15); the bracteoles are ciliate with long
branched hairs on the margin, but glabrous on the midrib (fig. 16). The perianth
segments are quite unlike those of C. stricta and C, Luehmanni in that they are
wrapped around the anther, each segment completely covering one, and nearly
covering the second face [figs. 14(a), (b), (c)]. The perianth segments are ciliate
on the margins and show a few scattered hairs on the back [fig. 14(b)]. Long
hairs, branching or simple, arise from the base of the bud (fig. 16), as in
C. Luehmanni. The anther is similar in shape to that of C. stricta.

266

The remaining five species investigated (C. rigida, C. distyla, C. paludosa, var.
robusta, C. pusilla, and C. Muelleriana) have buds and flowers which show a great
similarity. The bracteoles are in every case persistent and glabrous along the
midrib; the anther is different in shape from those of the species described above,
being more ovate, and narrower towards the basal end, which is usually more
strongly lobed. The perianth segments are hooded or folded, and are glabrous
on the back. In no case is the bud extremely ciliate, nor has it long hairs arising
from the base.

There are minor differences among the buds of the five species. C. rigida
(figs. 17-19) has a very large bud and flower, the sheathing teeth (fig. 19) being
essentially of the same type as those of C. striata, but of much greater length.
Owing to this fact the bracteoles do not protrude to any great extent beyond the
teeth (figs. 17 and 19). Both floral whorls and the sheathing teeth are almost
glabrous at the margins (fig. 18). C. distyla (figs. 27-29) and C. pusilla (figs.

; A |

Figs. 11-13. C. lepidophloia.
Fig. 11—Adaxial view of male flower; 5s, sheathing
tooth (floral bract). Fig. 12—QOvate-lanceolate bracteole
from open flower. Fig. 13—Abaxial view of flower with
anther and portion of filament removed. x25.

22-26) both show a very small bud and they are much alike. Since the sheathing
teeth of C. distyla are somewhat longer than those of C. pusilla, the bracteoles of
the former species scarcely protrude above the teeth (fig. 28), whilst in C. pusilla
about one-third of the bracteoles is visible above the leaf teeth (fig. 23). The
anther of C. pusilla (fig. 22) is much narrower and more pointed towards the basal
end than is that of C. distyla (fig. 28)‘ C. paludosa, var. robusta (figs. 20 and
21), has exactly the same type of flower as has the species itself. The flower and
bud are much longer than those of C. distyla and C. pusilla, the sheathing teeth
are different, being long, more lanceolate, and do not overlap (fig. 20). The
bracteoles are scarcely visible above the long teeth (fig. 20), a fact which is useful
in distinguishing this species from C. pusilla. The margin of the floral parts, and

267

also of the sheathing floral teeth, are more ciliate than in the two species previously
described.

C. Muelleriana (figs. 30-33) differs in having dark-red or purplish anthers,
more widely ovate than in other species; the bracteoles are more massive, and
the sheathing teeth are unique among South Australian species in that they are
triangular and short (fig. 33); in this respect they agree with the closely related
species C. Baxteriana and C. nana. The perianth segments (figs. 31 and 32) are
folded and wrapped around the anther, as in C. striata.

VI. Key To THE Species or Tie “DiIsTYLA COMPLEX.”

Branchlets simple, ascending ; sheathing teeth, 5-9; cone valves scarcely
prominent; valves with a conspicuous dorsal protuberance.

A. Bracteoles of male flowers deciduous; internodes 1-2 cm. long;
male spikes 2-3 cm. long, cylindrical; anthers golden-brown. Tall
spiky shrub os ae ak an val

A, Bracteoles of male fiowers persistent,

B. Internodes 1-1-8 cm, long; branchlets robust; male spikes long
(up to 8 cm.), robust; moniliform; anthers yellow. Tall shrub
with angular branchlets 3 m8 be ed a+ .. C. rigida, 2

B, Internodes 1 cm. or under; branchlets less robust; male spikes
under 6 cm.

C. Branchlets terete; small shrubs; cones under 2 cms, long.
D. Sheathing teeth 6-8, narrow-lanceolate, long; bracteoles of
male flowers not exsert.
Slender shrub; male spikes about 2 cm. long, almost imbricate,
branchlets heptagonal-terete; grooves frequently hairy;
teeth not ciliolate b. A, ee 5 tL, .. C. paludosa, 3
More robust, spiky shrub; male spikes up to 6 cm, long,
robust; branchlets cylindrical; grooves not hairy: tecth
ciliolate % ae he a in ne ct «+ C. paludosa, var.
D, Sheathing teeth 5-7, ovate-lanceolate, short; bracteoles of [robusta, 3a
male flowers exsert; male spikes 2-3 cm. long, slender ; anthers
rust coloured. Low cushion-like shrub a ar .. C. pusilla, 4
C. Branchlets angular; cones over 2 cm. long; sheathing teeth
short; male spikes moniliform. Taller shrubs.
Sheathing tecth 6-8, ovate-lanccolate; male spikes 2-3 cm. long;
bracteoles scarcely exsert; anthers reddish-brown .. .. L, distyla, 5
Sheathing tecth 5-7, triangular; male spikes up to 5-5 em, long;
bracteoles exsert; sheaths remote; anthers red. Rounded
shrub .. “ ce as ws ihe x i -. C. Muelleriana, 6

C. striata, 1

VII. Descrrprion or SPECIES.
1. Casuarina striata, n. sp.

Frutex 1°5-5 m. altus, ramis striatis ob folia adnata; ramulis strictis,
simplicibus, robustis, erectis vel unilateralibus, 14 cm, longis, vulgo brevioribus,
fere teretibus, foliorum adnatorum angulis obtusis; internodiis 1-2 cm., saepius
1-5 cm. longis, 1°5 mm. crassis; vaginarum dentibus 6-8, vulgo 7, ovato-lanceolatis,
acutis, junioribus ciliolatis, adultis fere glabris, appressis, demum truncatis,
vaginis e flavo pallide viridibus, dentibus brunneis, ramorum dentibus longis
recurvisque; amentis masculinis fere cylindricis, 1-3 cm. longis, vaginis paene
imbricatis, bracteolis deciduis; antheris aureo-brunneis; strobilis breviter
pedunculatis, cylindricis vel oblongis, plerumque 2°5 cm. longis; bracteolarum
protuberantiis dorsalibus conspicttis, bracteolis ellipticis.

A very variable shrub, dioecious or monoecious, somewhat fastigiate and
spiky, 2-15 feet high, frequently assuming the form of a small tree. Trunk
smooth, light grey; branches whorled, bare in the lower portions, marked with
circular scars, between which the parallel adherent leaves are clearly visible,
making both young and old branches distinctly striate. Branchlets robust, erect
and unilateral, up to 14 cm. long, but frequently shorter and more or less curved,

268

especially in pollen-bearing plants, almost tercte, but with a slight raised portion
in the median plane of the ridges, in dried specimens more angular; furrows
scantily marked with hairs. Internodes 1-2 cm. long, usually about 1-5 em.,
1-5 mm. in diameter, or sometimes more slender in plants bearing male spikes.
Sheathing teeth short, 6-8, usually 7, ovate-lanceolate, appressed, acuminate, over-
lapping laterally; sheaths clearly visible to the naked eye; yellow; teeth brownish
towards the tips, at first appressed, later slightly recurved, finally dying off and
becoming truncate; no thickening of the branchlets under the nodes. Young
branches with long, lanceolate, recurved teeth. Male spikes almost cylindrical,
slender, terminal on branchlets of 7-8 cm. long or sessile on the permanent
branches, spikes 1-3 cm. in length; sheaths almost overlapping, short, greenish-
yellow, later yellowish-brown, with prominent hairy lines on the lower half.
Bracteoles deciduous (fig. 15), keeled, glabrous on the midrib (fig. 16), shorter
than the sheathing teeth; perianth segments hooded, ciliate on margins [figs.
14(a) and 14(c)]; anthers golden-brown; filaments exsert. Cones shortly

=
Figs. 14-16. C. striata.

Fig. 14—(a) Adaxial view of inner perianth segment; (b)

abaxial view of same; (c) abaxial view of outer perianth

segment. Fig. 15—Adaxial view of male flower. Fig. 16—
Adaxial view of bud. x33.

pedunculate, narrow-cylindrical or ovoid, 2°5 cm. or longer, conical, truncate or
beaked atop, reddish-brown when young, grey when ripe and sometimes irregu-
larly shaped. Valves obtuse or slightly acute, rusty tomentum in the upper
internal portion; dorsal protuberance well marked, bluntly pyramidal, about as
long as the valves; bracts very distinct, large and green when young, tomentose
along the margin and in the basal region, base shaped like an inverted triangle,
upper portion long and acuminate.

Records-—-Common throughout Mount Lofty Ranges: from Belair southward
to Happy Valley, Aldgate to Echunga, Sturt Creek (Blandowski, 1849), Kuitpo,
Mount Compass, Square Waterhole, Myponga, Hindmarsh Valley, Encounter Bay,
Ashbourne, Currency Creek; Dudley Peninsula (1883, Tate Herb.), K.I.

Flowering Season.—June to December.

269

Probably no species in the genus shows a greater variation in both size and
habit than does C. striata. Frequently, especially in the cone-bearing plants, the
shrub is robust, fastigiate, and spiky (the spiky appearance being due to the
leaders growing out very strongly before any branchlets arise), A more divaricate
and straggling habit is especially noticeable in the pollen-bearing plants ; this form
is more slender. The long branches of the coning plants are frequently weighed
down by the cones so that the bushes are very straggling, making any community
in which this species is dominant difficult to penetrate.

C. striata and C. paludosa, var. robusia, show how unsafe it is to place
reliance on dioccism or monoecism in this genus. Both conditions are present,
and it is difficult to state which is the more frequent. Other variable features
are the colour of the anthers, which may range from yellow to golden-brown,
and the cones, the variation of which is shown in pl. xiii. A great proportion
of the cones are sterile; this may be due, in some cases, to the scarcity of plants
bearing pollen in certain communities. However, observation has shown the
prevalence of sterile cones even where pollen is abundant, and also in monoecious
individuals; in these cases, probably, the explanation will lie in hybridization.

The name “striata” was suggested by the very obvious striae, caused by the
persistence of the adnate leaves on the branches and even the young trunk.

2. CASUARINA RIcIDA, Miquel, Rev. Cas., p. 61, tab. vii, D.

A dioecious or monoecious shrub varying in height from a small rounded
bushy shrub of 2-3 feet in exposed situations to a small tree. Branches erect,
striate with adnate leaves, teeth on younger branches long and recurved. Branchlets
simple, rigid, robust, erect, angular, dark green, 5-30 cm. long, usually about a
span. Internodes 1 to 1-8 cm. or longer, 1 to 1-5 mm. in diameter, distinctly
angular owing to a prominently raised obtuse angle in the median plane of the
ridge; furrows faintly marked by white hairy lines; internodes somewhat swollen
under the sheaths. Sheathing teeth 6-9, usually 7, ovate-lanceolate or lanceolate,
long, convex on the back, ciliate, triangular and appressed when young, later
longer, narrower, erect and glabrous, finally truncate. Sheaths pale yellowish-
green, easily visible to the naked eye; teeth golden-brown. Male spikes
terminating branchlets or sessile on the permanent branches; spikes up to 8 cm.
long; sheaths remote, leaving small portions of the axis bare, greenish, with base
abruptly constricted. Bracteoles persistent (figs. 17 and 19), keeled, glabrous on
back, ciliate on the upper edges (fig. 18), golden-brown, longer than the sheathing
teeth (fig. 19); perianth segments hooded, ciliate (fig. 18) ; anthers yellow. Cones
subsessile or on peduncles up to 1 cm. long, oblong, conical or truncate at apex
or frequently beaked and partially sterile. Cones about 3 cm. long, but may be
longer ; valves elliptical or acute, scarcely prominent, rusty tomentum on the upper
internal surface; bracts large and distinct; dorsal protuberance as long as the
valves, pyramidal, obtuse or acute—D.C. Prod., xvl., il, p. 337,

Records—Tasmania: George Town, Gunn No. 735/; and Queensland:
Moreton Bay, Fraser! (both in Herb, Kew). New South Wales: around Sydney,
Blue Mountains, Newport, Kincumber, J. H. Maiden/; Botany Bay, L. Boor-
man/, 1906; and Jervis Bay’ (Sydney Herb.). Flinders Island (Bass Str., Adel.
Herb.!)

Whilst examining the folders of material of C. distyla in the Sydney
Herbarium, Mr. Cheel pointed out to me this species as one which occurred in
the neighbourhood of Sydney, and he also kindly assisted me to collect material
for investigation. ‘The species is regarded there as being C. distyla. Through
the courtesy of the Director of the Royal Herbarium at Kew, I have been
privileged to examine the type specimens of C. rigida (both Gunn’s and Fraser’s

270

specimens), and find that they are identical with the Sydney specimens. It is
difficult to understand why Bentham regarded these specimens as belonging to
two different species, the more slender ones collected by Fraser as C. suberosa and
those of Hooker as C. distyla, According to Herbarium records C, rigida is con-
fined to the coastal regions of New South Wales. It extends into Queensland and
southward into Flinders Island (Bass Strait) and to Tasmania. Of this species
in Tasmania Hooker writes (1860): “It is a very common small bush, especially
abundant near the sea, where it forms low thickets 2-5 feet high.” The shrub is
very variable in size, being a low bush in the exposed rocky outcrops of the Blue
Mountains, but under more favourable conditions it is a small tree. Both dioecious
and monoecious individuals have been seen; Fraser’s specimen is monoecious, a
fact that may have led Bentham to relate it more closely to C. suberosa, The
extraordinary variation in the cone is well shown in pl. xiii.

C. rigida is closely related to C. distyla, but is sufficiently removed from it to
receive specific rank. Some authorities regard it as lying nearer to C. stricta, but
it shows the cone type generally exhibited by the “Distyla complex,” the male
flowers are more nearly allied to C. distyla, and, whilst the anatomy of the
branchlets is similar, C. rigida shows greater lignification.

Figs. 17-19. C. rigida.

Fig, 17—Adaxial view of male flower. Fig. 18—Abaxial view of bud with
bracteoles pulled back. Fig. 19-—-Abaxial view of flower. x25.

3. C, PALUDOSA, Sieb., in Spreng. Syst., 1ii., 803.

A low monoecious, erect shrub, branches striate with adnate leaves. Assimila-
tory branchlets whorled, short, strict, simple, terete, neither swollen nor constricted
at nodes; internodes 5-6 mm. long, } mm. in diameter, terete, or somewhat poly-
gonal, owing to ridges being flattened, or sunken in the centre with a slightly raised
portion on the margins; grooves frequently hairy. Sheathing teeth 7, rarely 6,
subappressed, narrow-triangular or lanceolate, glabrous, rigid, thick, pale or
yellowish. Male spikes usually whorled and sessile on the permanent branches,
1-2 cm. long, teeth narrow-lanceolate, long, glabrous when mature, bracteoles per-
sistent, equal in length to the sheathing teeth; perianth segments hooded. Cones
shortly pedunculate, oblong, small—Mig., Rev. Cas., 64, t. 8 B, and in D.C., Prod.,
xvi., i., 338; C. pumila, Otto. and Dietr., Allg. Gartenz., 1841, p. 163; Miq., Rev.
Cas., 66, t. 8 C; C. dumosa, A, Cunn., Herb.; C. distyla, var. paludosa, Benth.,
Fl. Aus., vol. vi., p, 199,

271

An Eastern species; Port Jackson to the Blue Mountains, Sieber, n., 329/;
Argyle county, A. Cunningham, Twofold Bay’.

3a. Casuarina paludosa, Sieb., var. robusta, n. var.

Variat ramulis robustioribus, internodiis longioribus amentis masculinis
multo longioribus (usque ad 6°5 cm.), robustioribusque, vaginis non imbricatis.

A small dioecious or monoecious spiky shrub 1 to 4 feet in height, bright
green when fresh, drying yellowish-green, erect, rigid, and with reddish-brown or
grey branches, striate with adnate leaves. Assimilatory branchlets up to 13 cm.
long, simple, rigid, robust, whorled, but frequently unilateral in position owing to
a tendency to grow erect. Internodes 1 cm. long or under, 1 mm. in diameter ;
ridges rounded or with a slight raised portion in the median plane so that they
are terete or almost so; furrows distinctly marked with hairs in young branchlets,
but glabrous or faintly marked in older ones. Sheathing teeth 6-8, but usually

Figs. 20 and 21. C. paludosa, var. robusta.

Fig. 20—Abaxial view of male flower showing bract and
bracteoles of a second flower. Fig, 21—Adaxial view of same
with anther and portion of filament removed. x25.

7, long, narrow-lanceolate, acuminate, frequently recurved, ciliate, when old trun-
cate and papery at the margin; sheaths yellow, teeth brown; nodes clearly marked.
On the longer branches the teeth are very long, narrow-lanceolate, dry and
recurved. There is no swelling at the nodes, the branchlets being of the same
thickness everywhere. Male spikes deciduous, robust, terminal on assimilatory
branchlets of 2 to 10 cm. in length, or borne sessile in whorls along the permanent
branches, 2 to 6°5 cm. in length; sheaths not overlapping, sometimes exposing
short portions of the bare axis, distinctly marked with white hairy lines in the
lower part, straw colour, teeth golden, ciliate, narrow-lanceolate, acuminate and
long. Bracteoles persistent (figs. 20 and 21), keeled, glabrous on back, ciliate on
edges (figs. 1 and 2), not exceeding the sheathing teeth (fig. 20) except perhaps in
the two basal sheaths, golden-brown; perianth segments hooded, glabrous on back,
ciliate on margins (fig. 3); filaments exsert; anthers reddish-brown or rusty.

272

Cones borne in whorls on the older branches, sessile, cylindrical or globular,
small, 1°5 to 2°5 cm. in length, usually truncate atop but sometimes conical or
slightly beaked. In some specimens the valves are elliptical and scarcely pro-
truding, with the dorsal protuberance as long as the valve, so that the cone is
more regular. In others the valves are more prominent and longer than the
dorsal protuberance. Bracts distinct in young cone, acuminate and long with a
broad base, the long points being broken off later; valves with a rusty tomentum
on the upper internal portion. Dorsal protuberance entire or divided into 1 to 3
lobes, sometimes acute. Cones sometimes irregular owing to partial sterility,
reddish and hairy when young, ash-grey when ripe.

Records—Mount Compass, Square Waterhole, Upper Hindmarsh Valley,
Inman Hills (J. B. Cleland and E. D. M.), Myponga, Keith (J, M. Black),
Wirrega (T. G. B. Osborn), Furner (T. B. Paltridge).

Usually occurring on stiff clay soils with little or no depth of sand.

Flowering Season—January to August, much earlier than the other shrubby
species.

There have been many difficulties in regard to this variety arising out of its
close relationship with the Eastern species, C. paludosa, Sieb., which I have not
been able to examine in the field. Although the plant is, in appearance, very
different from the latter species, a detailed examination reveals the fact that this
dissimilarity is apparent rather than real, since the differences are those of degree.
The points in which the two differ are as follows: C. paludosa has male spikes
usually borne sessile on the permanent branches, slender, short (up to 2 cm. long),
and somewhat imbricate. The South Australian plant has spikes which are
generally terminal on the assimilatory branchlets, robust, long (up to 6°5 cm.),
and with sheaths not overlapping. Again C. paludosa is a slender plant with
branchlets almost heptagonal-terete; the ridges are slightly sunken in the middle,
with a raised portion on either side near the groove, giving the stem a slightly
angular appearance. C. paludosa, var. robusta, has ridges rounded or with a
slightly raised portion in the median plane. The grooves on C. paludosa are hairy
with retrorse whitish hairs, whereas in C. paludosa, var. robusta, the grooves are
seldom, if ever, hairy in the adult. In C. paludosa the teeth of the older branchlets
are glabrous, but in the variety they are always ciliate. The close relationship
of the two is clearly shown in the type of cone, the terete branches, the lanceolate
leaf teeth (fig. 20), and the male flowers, which, in both species, show persistent
bracteoles, shorter than the sheathing teeth.

The splitting of the dorsal protuberance which has been noticed in this
species has no systematic value since it is inconstant, a feature also noticed by
Bentham in C. Fraseriana, Miq.

4. C. pusilla, n. sp.

Frutex humilis, -25-1 m. altus, ramis erectis, junioribus vix striatis ob folia
adnata, ramulis tenuibus, brevibus teretibus, strictis, erectis vel unilateralibus ;
internodiis 4-8 mm. longis, ‘5 mm. crassis; vaginarum dentibus 5-7, brevibus,
ovato-lanceolatis, ciliolatis appressis; amentis masculinis usque ad 2°5 cm., vulgo
2 cm. longis; vaginis subimbricatis; bracteolis persistentibus, exsertis ; antheris
ferrugineis strobilis sessilibus, globosis, parvis verticillatis, bracteolis ellipticis vel
magis acutis, bracteolarum dorsalibus conspicuis.

A low, rounded, cushion-like dioecious shrub, 9 inches to 3 feet in height,
with erect branches which are less striate than in the previous species, the stria-
tions being entirely lost in the older branches. Branchlets dark green when fresh,
very slender, strict, erect or unilateral, wiry and sometimes curved, usually up to
8-9 cm. in length, smooth, glaucescent when dry. Internodes short, 4-8 mm. long,
-5 mm. in diameter, absolutely terete, with furrows faintly marked and not at all

273

hairy. The branchlets are cylindrical, being neither swollen nor contracted at the
nodes. Sheathing teeth 5-7, short, ovate-lanceolate or nearly triangular, over-
lapping one another laterally, ycllowish towards the sheath, but brown at
tips, ciliate, appressed, never recurved except on the green branches which are
sending out assimilatory shoots, where the teeth are longer and narrower. Nodes
easily visible to the naked eye on account of the light-coloured sheaths. Male
spikes terminal on whorled assimilatory branchlets up to 7 cm., spikes short, up
to 2'5 cm. long, but usually about 2 cm,; sheaths more or less imbricate, funnel-
shaped, shallow, yellowish; teeth brown, short, ovate-lanceolate, overlapping,
ciliate only towards the grooves (fig. 23); bracteoles persistent, slightly keeled,
much longer than the sheathing teeth (fig. 22) ; perianth segments hooded, slightly
ciliate (fig. 26); anthers rust-coloured; filaments exsert; cones sessile, usually
globular, small (pl. xiii.), up to 2 cm. in length, whorled on branches; valves
elliptical or more acute, tomentose in the upper internal portion; dorsal protuber-
ance well marked, not as long as the bracteoles, broad, bracts well developed ;
young cones reddish and tomentose, grey when mature, truncate or beaked atop,
frequently irregular.

Figs. 22-26. C. pusilla.

Fig. 22—Adaxial view of male flower. Fig. 23—Abaxial view of same

with anther and portion of filament removed. Fig. 24—-Abaxial view of

bud. Fig. 25—Adaxial view of same with bracteoles and outer perianth
segment removed, Fig, 26—Adaxial perianth segment. x33,

Records.—Macclesfield to Strathalbyn (J. M. Black), Encounter Bay, Port
Elliot (J. B. Cleland), Nuriootpa (Tepper), Wirrega (T. G. B, Osborn), Keith,
South of Lameroo and Paringa (J. M. Black).

Flowering Season —Not definitely known, but flowers have been collected in
January and from May to August.

C. pusilla may be a strict, erect shrub with crowded branchlets, as is usually
the case in coning plants, or it may be more divaricate in form. It has been
recorded from the North-west Desert of Victoria (under the name of C. paludosa,
in Natl. Herb., Victoria) and from South Australia; in the Tepper Herbarium
it occurs under the name of C. humilis. Although the latter species has becn

274

recorded from the Everard Range and the Eucla Basin, the records are doubtful.
As regards the Everard Range locality, the loss of some of the specimens during
the expedition gives complications (Mueller and Tate, 1896). In the Tate
Herbarium one specimen bearing the characteristic cones of C. humilis has within
the folder two labels, one bearing “Camp 9 (Everard Range), 23/6/91”; and the
second, “Gnarlbine, W.A., 12/11/91.” Another specimen collected at Camp 7
(Everard Range) has male flowers only, and shows a resemblance to C. pusilla.
In reference to the Eucla Basin record of Tepper, one must bear in mind that he
did not distinguish between C. pusilla and C. humilis; his specimen is not available.

5. CASUARINA DisTYLA, Ventenat, Plantes nouvelles, p. 62 (1803).

A diffuse, monoecious or dioecious shrub varying in size and habit in accord-
ance with habitat differences. Branches erect, grey, striate with adnate leaves,
those of the bushes bearing male flowers frequently long and straggling; assimila-
tory branchlets dark green, erect or unilateral, slender, short, 5-12 cm. long,

Figs, 27-29. C. distyla.
Fig, 27—-Adaxial view of male flower with anther and portion
of filament removed. Fig. 28—Abaxial view of same.
Fig. 20—-Adaxial view of bud with bracteoles pulled down.
x33,

whorled or semi-whorled; internodes short, 5-8 or perhaps 1 cm. long, scarcely
1 mm. in diameter, angular in consequence of a distinct raised obtuse angle in the
median plane of each ridge; furrows seldom marked with hairy lines. Sheathing
teeth very short, 6-8, usually 7; sheaths yellow at base, thus nodes easily visible
to the naked eye; teeth golden-brown, ovate-lanceolate, acute, overlapping,
recurved, ciliate when young but later lacerate, finally truncate. ‘Teeth of branches
long, linear, brown, and recurved. Male spikes terminal on short assimilatory
branchlets or lateral on the branches, 2-3 cm. in length, moniliform, sheaths leaving
small portions of the axis bare. Bracteoles persistent (figs. 27 and 28), keeled,

275

glabrous on back, ciliate on upper margins (fig. 29), about the same length as the
teeth in the open flower (fig. 28), or slightly longer, brownish in colour; perianth
segments not united, hooded, ciliate, glabrous on back (fig. 29). Anthers red-
brown, filaments exsert. Cones usually whorled, subsessile, narrow-cylindrical
or globular, up to 3-5 cm. in length, conical atop, beaked or flattened with a short
pointed apex. Valves (bracteoles) fairly prominent, elliptical or acute, with a
rusty tomentum in the upper internal surface, dorsal protuberance bluntly
pytamidal, well developed, nearly as long as the valves. Cones frequently
irregular owing to partial sterility--Miq., Rev. Cas., p. 57, tab. vii., A-C;
C. stricta, Ait., in D.C. Prod., xvi, p. 336.

Records—According to Miquel: “Tasmania, Ventenat and Hooker [Gunn,
735]; Gippsland, Mueller”; Victoria: Cheltenham.

Flowering Season—Opening in June.

The material from which the above description and figures were taken was
collected at Cheltenham, Victoria, and made available to me through the kindness
of Messrs, Audas and Morris, of the National Herbarium of Melbourne.

Miquel, in his Review, separated Gunn’s No. 735 into two species, C. rigida
and C. distyla. In 1865, working on Herbarium material, he observed forms which
seemed to him to be transitional between the two species. Consequently he merged
C. rigida with C. distyla, Miquel’s earlier work is to be commended in that some
of these variations have proved to be constant, and provide the foundation for the
present splitting of the “Distyla complex” into several species. In consequence
of this it is necessary to redescribe C. distyla with the narrower limits set by
Miguel in 1848,

Probably this species is limited in distribution to ‘Tasmania and Victoria; the
species regarded in New South Wales and Queensland as being C. distyla is
C. rigida, in Western Australia C. Baxteriana, in South Australia C. M uelleriana,
and the three other species not previously separated from that species. Apparently
in Victoria C. distyla is confused with C. Muelleriana and C. pusilla, both of which
also occur in that State.

6. CasuarINA MuELLERIANA, Miq. in Ned. Kruidk. Arch,, iv., 99.

A rounded shrub usually dioecious, varying in height from 1-12 feet, and
forming a small tree in favourable situations. Trunk usually grey, with rough
bark showing numerous clefts and without distinct striations, but occasionally of
a lighter colour, smooth and striate to a slight degree, with adherent leaves.
Branchlets erect, slender, rigid, simple, dark green, frequently with a red or
yellow tinge, so that the whole bush appears reddish at a distance. Branchlets
distinctly angular and whorled, up to 12 cm. long; internodes 5-8 mm. long,
1-1-5 mm. in diameter; furrows clearly marked with white hairy lines, ridges
also slightly hairy. Sheathing teeth 5-7, usually 6, short, delioid or narrower,
convex on back and always appressed, edges rough, scarccly ciliate, greenish-
yellow at base, bright red towards the tips and with hyaline margins. Male spikes
terminal on branchlets 1-8 cm. long; spikes from 1°5-5-5 cm. long, reddish or
yellow, slender. Sheaths remote, showing bare portions of the axis between each
sheath, reddish-green or yellow at base, marked in the lower part with hairy
lines; teeth red. Bracteoles persistent (fig. 30), keeled, glabrous on the back
(fig. 31), much longer than the sheathing teeth (fig. 30), ciliate on margins,
golden-brown; perianth segments hooded, folded about the anther, ciliate (fg.
32); anthers red; filaments short. Cones borne singly on the bare branches and
surmounted by whorls of assimilatory branchlets, sessile or on peduncle of 5-8 mm.
in length, ovoid or cylindrical, usually about 2°5 cm., but may be longer, about
1°5 cm. in diameter or even wider, truncate at top or beaked owing to the sterility
of the upper whorls of flowers; beaks usually short, but specimens from National

276

Park, Belair, show a beak of 2 cm. in length (pl. xiii.). Valves slightly prominent,
obtuse or elliptical, rusty tomentum on the upper internal surface, dorsal pro-
tuberance well marked, almost as long as valves, and bluntly pyramidal; bracts
not large.—C. suberosa, O. et D., var. Muelleriana, Miq., in D. C. Prod., xvi., ii,
p. 338.

Records.—South Australia: Mount Lofty Ranges (Mueller, 1850, in Vict.
Herb./), Black Hill, Morialta, Scott’s Creek, Mount Torrens, Mount Crawford
(T. G. B. Osborn), between Hallett’s Cove and Noarlunga, Kuitpo, Mount Com-
pass to Encounter Bay, Ashbourne; Coonalpyn (J. B. Cleland), Tintinara (under
the name of C. humilis); Ardrossan (Tepper) ; West Coast, Port Lincoln (J. B.
Cleland), Streaky Bay (Tepper), 40 miles north of Port Bell (Tepper, Tate
Herbarium) ; Wilpena Pound; Kangaroo Island. Victoria: Mount Abrupt (H.
B. Williamson, Vict. Herb./).

Flowering Season—May to October.

Figs. 30-33. C. Muelleriana.

Fig, 30—Adaxial view of male flower. Fig. 31—Abaxial view of bud with

bracteoles pulled down and anther removed. Fig, 32—Adaxial view of

anther and inner perianth segment showing the folding of the latter.
Fig. 33—Three floral bracts. x33.

In many respects C, Muelleriana seems to be more stable than the other
shrubby species. However, the cone is variable. Although this species is recog-
nisable by certain constant features of the cone, namely, its greenish-brown colour,
the large elliptical valves and the large blunt dorsal protuberance, there are many
differences among individuals in size, degree of irregularity, and in the formation
of a beak, which may even reach a length of 2 cm,

The type specimen was collected by Mueller at Mount Torrens in 1850 and
described by Miquel (1859). Later, in the Prodomus, he refers to it as being, with
C. Baxteriana, a variety of C. suberosa, O. et D. Mueller has never distinguished
it from C. distyla, although he must have handled both species; Bentham, too,
regarded it as synonymous with C. distyla. C. Muelleriana shows very obvious
affinities with C. suberosa, but certainly merits specific rank. It has the same

277

type of angular branchlet, cone, and male flower as has C. suberosa, but what is
of more significance is that the anatomy of C. suberosa (fig. 40), C. Muelleriana
(fig. 39), and C. Baxteriana are of the same type, and differ greatly from the type
of anatomy shown by C. distyla (fig. 38) as well as all the other species in South
Australia (see Section VIII. of this paper).

C. Muelleriana occurs in Victoria and in South Australia, but probably is
replaced by the closely related species, C. Baxtertana, in Western Australia. I
have examined the type specimen (female only) of C. Baxteriana (in Herb.,
Kew). Pritzel’s No, 238, called C. distyla (male only, King George’s Sound),
is the samc species. C. Baxteriana differs slightly from C. Muelleriana. It has
seven sheathing teeth of the same type as C, Muelleriana, which has usually
only 5 or 6 teeth. The anatomical structure is intermediate between C. suberosa
and C, Muelleriana. It is apparent that the species described by Diels and Pritzel
as C. distyla, Vent., is Miquel’s C. Baxleriana. With only two incomplete speci-
mens available it is useless to attempt a description of the latter species, nor can
one state in what respects, beyond those mentioned, it differs from C. Muelleriana.
It may, perhaps, be a variety of that species.

VIII Tue ANaToMy or THE ASSIMILATORY BRANCHLETS.
1. General.

The history of the anatomical work done on this genus has been summarised
by Boodle and Worsdell (1894) and by de Cordemoy (1923), thus it is unneces-
sary to make further comment on it here.

It is well known that all the species of Casuarina are characterised by the
switch habit. The vegetative structure consists of a number of primary
assimilatory branchlets, inserted in whorls on the small branches, which are, in
turn, verticillate, or potentially so, upon the larger branches. The assimilatory
branchlets are divided into nodes and internodes, the latter being green, and show-
ing ridges and furrows running longitudinally. At the nodes whorls of leaves
are inserted; these are unique in that, for the length of the entire internode
above their insertion, they are concrescent with the stem and constitute the
ridges. At the node above the leaves become free from the stem, and, uniting
by their lateral margins, form a sheath which covers the base of the next inter-
node. This sheath ends in a number of teeth, which represent the only portion
of the leaves entirely free. It was the foregoing features in the leaves that led
Loew to designate them “phyllichnia.” Their number and shape vary greatly in
the different species. The verticillate phyllichnia of any one internode alternate
with those of the internode above, and, consequently, the furrows, which
represent the spaces between them, will also be arranged alternately. These
furrows contain numerous branched hairs which arise from the base; frequently
they project through the opening of the furrow, making white lines running
lengthwise along the internode. In some species the ridges persist upon the
branches giving them a somewhat striate appearance.

On the morphological peculiarities, the seedling throws no light since there
is no essential difference between the juvenile and adult foliage. The secdling
shows two normal fleshy cotyledons, slightly connate at the base, showing a
reticulate type of venation, a point which it is interesting to note, since such
veining is generally considered absent from the adult phyllichnia. Vhe first
shoot is exactly of the same type of construction as the mature branchlet.

The anatomical structure of the assimilatory branchlets shows general
uniformity, but there are many minor differences, some of which are constant
and are of value in the recognition of species, The simplest structure in the
species examined was shown by C. stricta, Ait., thus its anatomy will be fully
described as a basis for comparison with the other species.

278

2. C\ stricta, Ait.

A transverse section of the assimilatory branchlet of C. stricta (figs. 34 and
35) shows 9 to 12 pentagonal ridges, separated by deep furrows. The external
face of the ridge shows a more or less distinct obtuse angle in its median plane.
The corners marking the entry to the groove are rounded and not showing the
projecting masses of cuticle so evident in C. lepidophloia, C. Cunninghamiana,
and C. Fraseriana. A thick cuticle with small refractive globules, probably of
silica,*? is present on the epidermis of the ridges and extends into the furrow.
The epidermal cells of the ridges have very thick walls, and in surface view they
are shown to be pitted. Scattered branching hairs, which are directed upwards,
occur on the external face of the ridges; the bases of these appear in trans-
verse section as cuticular rings. Branched hairs also spring from two or three
rows of narrow and elongated epidermal cells running lengthwise along the
base of the furrow. Frequently the hairs project through the opening of the
furrow, giving white hairy lines between the ridges. The basal portion of the
hairs is suberised, but the upper part is sclerised. Undoubtedly these protect
the stomata, which are arranged in three or four rows on either side of the
basal hairs, but occupying only the lower part of the groove. In the seedling the
stomata are not confined to so sheltered a position, but occur on both sides of
the cotyledon and on the adaxial side of the young free leaf teeth, where they
are arranged in longitudinal rows. The stomates of the genus are peculiar in
that they show the same type of transverse pore that is present in Gymnosperms.

Under the epidermis of the ridges a T-shaped mass of fibres occurs, portion
of which forms a median band of cells running thickly from the epidermis, but
tapering as it approaches the inner limits of the ridge. The arms of the T are
formed by two or three rows of fibres extending underneath the epidermis of
the ridge and to the stomatal region of the furrow. Scattered among these
fibres are large clear cells with thin but lignified and pitted walls; these are
elongated longitudinally and are frequently fibre-like in shape, being probably
derived from fibres. Possibly they act in the capacity of water-storage cells.
These cells frequently contain tannin. The ridges are mainly concerned with
photosynthesis, since they alone contain the chlorenchyma, In C. stricta this is
divided into two symmetrical masses by the T-shaped band of fibres, and lies on
either side of them, arranged in two or three defintte rows. Longitudinal sec-
tions show that the row nearest the fibres is densely packed, while the others
are loosely packed and show many air spaces. In the neighbourhood of the
stomata intercellular spaces occur.

At the base of the ridges, lying immediately under the central band of the
fibres, and separated from the tissue of the ridge by a single row of cells, are
the leaf-trace bundles. These are inserted at the node below, run up through
the internode, and pass out through the sheath into the free portion of the
phyllichnium. In association with these bundles, on either side lie the trans-
fusion tracheides, which stretch, under the chlorenchyma, almost to the groove.

All the tissue hitherto described belongs to the leaf system of the branchlet;
the remaining portion constitutes the stem system. The cortex stretches from
the epidermis of the groove to the central cylinder, dipping under each leaf trace.
The stem bundles alternate with the foliar bundles; they le beneath the furrows.
They are collateral and are separated from one another by medullary rays of
varying width. A small group of pericyclic fibres occurs outside the phloem
region, and a second group of fibres may be found on the internal side of the
bundles, bordering the pith. Both pith and cortex are wide and unlignified.

(2) Refractory, but soluble in hydrofluoric acid.

279

Having described the general plan one can deal briefly with the leaf trace
and the transfusion tissue. The foliar bundle is separated from the ridges by
a single row of large round cells; it shows the usual orientation of leaf bundles.
The phloem is extensively developed and is extended tangentially, making a
crescent-shaped mass. In the depression at the top of the crescent lies a small
group of fibres, probably developed, as M. de Cordemoy suggests, from the
peridesm of the bundle. On the inner side of the phloem there is a small tri-
angular group of vessels; also, at intervals, along the lateral margins of the

34 GSEISLESS
LOS ELSES —— -
DOGS HY ¢ er XP ETOSs
vAdehel ay

(Tf
oy
pats
ascesonce Se
eet DOS.
grr onttnnratae!
th ~-- 4H) neces iP
rate | UAC Ton
eit nltacsenie
“Baas er es
LBA st py

Fig, 34,
Fig. 34—Transverse section of the assimilatory branchlet of C. stricta;
f, hypodermal fibres; p, palisade; it, leaf-trace bundle; tt, transfusion
tissue; v, lateral tracheides of the leaf-trace bundle; c, cortex; cb, cauline
bundle; pf, pericyclic fibres; s, stomatal region; h, branched hair. x173.
Camera lucida outlines.

phloem, isolated tracheides or small groups occur. Thus the whole bundle is
triangular and loosely surrounded by lignified elements, vessels, tracheides or
fibres, The transfusion tracheides, which are large cells with thick lignified
walls, showing simple pits, are either directly or indirectly in contact with the
lateral elements forming the arms of the V. The peculiarities of the V-shaped
leaf-trace bundles and the transfusion tracheides will be dealt with more fully
later; they will not be further discussed at present.

280

3, The Comparative Anatomy of the “Distyla complex’ and of the
other South Australian species.

The anatomical differences which have been noted in the species investigated
are, for the most part, due to variation in the degree of lignification. Some
such differences are inconstant, such as the occasional presence of a lignified
pith and cortex in a species usually unlignified in these portions, These small
variations may be connected with different ecological conditions. However,
there are some features which have proved to be constant and may be used
in taxonomic work, thus many of the species are readily identified by their
anatomical structure. However, it is impossible to distinguish between some of
the closely allied species where specific differences do not extend to the more
stable anatomical characters.

The structure of the branchlets of those species investigated falls into two dis-
tinct types; these may be termed the “Stricta type” (fig. 34) and the “Muelleriana
type” (fig. 41). This division rests on the presence or absence of the median
band which gives the T-shaped disposition to the hypodermal mass of fibres in
the ridges. In the “Stricta type” the median band is invariably present, and
usually runs down as far as the level of the groove. However, in the
“Muelleriana type” it is absent or only slightly developed, and does not, in any
case, extend to the level of the groove. Between the two extremes there are
transitional forms.

(1) “Strtcta Type.”

With the exception of C. Muelleriana, all the South Australian forms belong
to this type, as do also C. rigida, C. distyla, and C. paludosa, of the Eastern
States. C. stricta, which has already been described, shows the simplest structure
and thus provides a good basis for comparison.

C. lepidophloia (fig. 37) and C. Luehmanni (fig. 36) are more strongly
lignifed than is C. séricta, with which they show the greatest affinity. In both
species the ridges are rectangular, the external face being flat or only slightly
raised in the median portion. ' The corners which mark the entry to the groove in
C. Luehmanni are rounded, but in C. lepidophloia they show angular projections
of epidermal cells and cuticular masses, almost closing the furrow (ci. also
C. Fraseriana and C. Cunninghamiana). With the exception of C. Decaisneana, the
cuticle of C. lepidophloia is of greater thickness than that of any other examined.
It shows a greater number of refringent nodules. There are many branching
hairs on the ridges, the bases of which can be seen in transverse section; to these
hairs the hoary appearance of the branchlets is due.

In both species the T-shaped median band of fibres is well developed, the arms
showing horizontally and vertically running fibres (cf. also C. glauca, C. rigida,
and C. striata). C. Luehmanni shows a median band of unusual length, and the
chlorenchyma dips down in the central region. At the basal layer of the assimila-
tory tissue in the latter species the fibres of the hypodermal mass abut on large
stone cells. These have thinner walls on the side which lies in contact with the
chlorenchyma, but thicker lignified and pitted cells on the side which is in contact
with the other stone cells, or with the phloem and fibres of the leaf trace. The
entire leaf trace is surrounded by stone cells which possibly act as an accessory
water-storage tissue.

The hypodermal mass of fibres reaches greater development in C. lepidophloia.
Here the lateral portions of the T-shaped mass project as far as possible along
the sides of the furrow without actually overlapping the stomatal region. A
most distinctive feature is the breaking up of the chlorenchyma by horizontal and
vertical fibres thrown out from the sides of the T-shaped mass bordering on the

assimilatory tissue (vide Wood, 1923). Consequently there is a reduction in the
amount of chlorenchyma. The transversely running fibres and these curious

281

Figs. 35-40. Diagrams of transverse sections of the branchlets.
Camera lucida outlines.
Fig. 35—C. stricta, x47. Fig. 36—C. Luehmanni, x18. Fig. 37—C. lepidophloia, x47.
Fig. 38—C. disiyla, x50. Fig. 39-—-C. Muelleriana, x50. Fig. 40—C. suberosa, x50.

282

extensions into the assimilatory tisstie give the stem a peculiar appearance in longi-
tudinal section. Tannin is present,in the epiderma! cells, in the large sclerised
cells, in the hypodermal fibres, in the pith and the cortex. Stone cells may occur
between the leaf-trace bundle and the fibres of the ridges, otherwise the cells of
this region are sclerised. The cortical and pith cells oi both C. Luehmanni and
C. lepidophioia are lignified and pitted. However, these pitted cells are readily
distinguished from the transfusion tracheides by their different shape, and also by
their less regular pitting. In these, as in many other species, cluster crystals of
calcium oxalate are very prevalent in the pith, cortex, and in the lower row of the
chlorenchyma. Large single crystals also occur in the pith.

The cortex presents unusual variation in C. lepidophloia. In the majority
of specimens the cells are heavily lignified and pitted; some cells also contain
tannin. The pericyclic fibres are not strongly developed, perhaps one row being
present, and at the most only four. Other specimens, on the other hand, may
show an extraordinary development of fibres, tapering from a wide base at the
phicem region of the cauline bundles up to the groove, so that the stem is very
woody indeed. The specimens that showed this structure were collected at Cur-
namona, Dilkera, and between Parachilna and Blinman, all in arid districts.

C. Luehmanni has a group of pericyclic fibres somewhat larger than that of
C. stricta in connection with each cauline bundle, but not reaching the development
that many of the species of the “Distyla complex” have. Consequently this species
is easily identified anatomically,

The central cylinder of C. lepidophlota is characterised by the presence of
very small medullary rays, so that the phloem and xylem masses appear con-
tinuous. In the adult stem the rays are diffuse and consequently very insignificant,
a point which has diagnostic value in separating the wood from that of C. glauca.

The remaining species of the “Stricta type” that have been investigated are
C, striata, C. rigida, C. distyla (fig. 38), C. paludosa, and C. pusilla, ‘All these
species are closely related, and thus have a similar anatomical plan, the individual
differences being slight. It is somewhat difficult to distinguish between the
anatomy of C. striata and C. rigida except by the greater angularity of the ridges
of the latter, whilst C. distyla is only identified by its small size. C. paludosa, its
variety robusta, and C. pusilla have the same anatomical type, but stand apart from
the other species by reason of their flatter ridges which produce the terete
branchlets.

In all of these six forms the usual T-shaped median band is present, but
reaches varying levels of development in different individuals. Frequently it
extends down to the base of the ridge, tapering as it runs inward, to a single row
in thickness; sometimes it runs down as a wide band. It may not extend to the
base of the ridge, thus not completely dividing the chlorenchyma. In C. rigida,
occasionally, the fibres are extensively developed, the arms of the T, with their
horizontally running fibres, occupying almost half the thickness of the ridge;
usually in such specimens the pith and cortex are heavily lignified and stone cells
occur in the vicinity of the leaf trace. In C. paludosa, its var. robusta, and
C. pusilla the median band may extend without interruption to the leaf trace where
it unites with the group of fibres above the leaf trace.

As a general rule, the cortex and pith are parenchymatous in C. striata,
C. rigida, and C. distyla, but may show lignification, whilst in C. paludosa, var.
robusta, and C, pusilla, both tissues are invariably lignified. Stone cells may
occur at the base of the chlorenchyma in these forms as in C. rigida.

All these six species are characterised by the presence of large rounded groups
of pericyclic fibres above the cauline bundles, thus making them readily dis-
tinguishable from C, stricta and C. Luehmanni. On the inner side of each cauline
bundle in C. striata, as in C. stricta, is a small group of fibres.

283

(2) “Muelleriana Type.”

The second type of anatomy is characterised by the absence of the ‘T-shaped
median band of fibres in the ridges. Five species of this type have been
investigated: C. Muelleriana, C. nana, C. thuyoides, C. suberosa, and C. Bax-
teriana. Of these the last two show the greatest resemblance to the “Stricta type,”
and link on to that group through C. Fraseriana and C. distyla.

C. Muelleriana (figs. 39 and 41) shows 5 to 7 pentagonal ridges, the external
face of the ridge having a very distinct obtuse angle. The median angle of the
ridge is marked, lengthwise, by projecting epidermal cells and their thick cuticular
covering. Underneath the epidermal cells of the ridges are one of two layers of
hypodermal fibres, but no median band is present, and the chlorenchyma fills the
whole of the ridge. The cortex is frequently lignified and the pith is invariably

Fig. 41.

Transverse section of the assimilatory branchlet of C, Muelleriana, Miq.,
showing the ridges without any median band of fibre. x210,
Camera lucida outlines.

so. The vascular bundles show a small group of pericyclic fibres, and appear to
be more concentrated towards the centre, reducing the size of the pith.

C. suberosa is essentially of the same type (fig. 40), but shows the rudiments
of a median band of fibres, frequently small, but sometimes reaching almost half-
way down the ridges. No individuals have been seen in which it extends further.
This species differs from C. Muelleriana in having a large mass of pericyclic fibres
above the stem bundles; these masses sometimes reach to the groove.

Since I have been unable to study more than two specimens of C. Baxteriana
it is unwise to discuss its anatomy ; however, the forms examined differ in no way
from C. suberosa, but can be easily distinguished from C. Muelleriana, the species
with which it would most likely be confused, by the presence of the large group
of pericyclic fibres as in C. suberosa.

284

Thus there are, as in the “Stricta type,” species which have a well-defined
T-shaped mass of fibres extending to the base of the ridges, such as C. Luehmanni
and C. lepidophloia. There are also those in which, occasionally, the median band
may not extend to the level of the groove as in C. stricta, C. striata, C. rigida,
C. distyla, and C. Fraseriana, The last two seem to link on to the “Muelleriana
type” through C. suberosa and C. Baxteriana (which show merely a slight pro-
jection of the fibres from the hypodermal mass into the ridges) to C. nana and
C. Muelleriana.

The lack of fibres dividing the ridges cannot be due to ecological conditions,
since in many areas in South Australia species of both types of structure grow
side by side. The presence or absence of this band is a point that has value in
tracing the affinities of this group. It has been helpful in placing C. Muelleriana
and C. Baxteriana, species which have been related to C. distyla. It can now be
said definitely that both these species lie much nearer to C. suberosa.

In conclusion, my grateful thanks are due to Professor T. G. B. Osborn for
his constant help and encouragement during the progress of this work. I wish
also to extend my thanks to Mr. J. M. Black for his valuable advice ; to Professor
J. B. Cleland, Mr. F. J. Paltridge, and others who have assisted me in the collection
of material; to the Director of the Royal Herbarium at Kew for his great kindness
in permitting me to examine type specimens; and also to the authorities of the
Herbaria of Sydney and Melbourne, at whose hands I have received many
courtesies. The photo., pl. xiii, was kindly taken by Mr. G. Samuel, M.5c., of
this department.

IX. SumMMary.

1. The “Distyla complex” of the Casuerinaceae has been studied; it has been
found that there are 7 species and 1 variety confused as C. distyla.

2. The history of these species is reviewed in order to trace the origin of
this confusion.

3. C. distyla, Vent., is absent from South Australia, but occurs in Victoria
and Tasmania. The species regarded as C. distyla in Sydney is C. rigida, Migq.,
which was for many years merged with the former. C. rigida is recorded from
Tasmania, New South Wales, and Queensland. In South Australia four shrubby
species occur: one, C. Muelleriana, has been restored ; two, C. pusilla and C. striata,
are new species; and the fourth has been made a variety of C. paludosa.
C. Baxteriana occurs in Western Australia.

4, The structure of the male flower, and also the anatomy of the branchlets,
has been of great assistance in the work. Two types of anatomy are described
for the species investigated, and the structure of the species of the “Distyla
complex” and of the other South Australian species is described.

LITERATURE CITED.

Apamson, R. S., and Osporn, T. G. B.—
On the Ecology of the Mount Lofty Ranges, South Australia. Trans.
Roy. S. Austr., xlviii., p. 102, 1924.
AIron—
*Hortus Kewensis, iv., 310, 1789.
Baker, R. T.—
Proc. Linn. Soc., 1899.
BENTHAM, G., and MUELLER, F. von—
Flora Australiensis, vol. vi., London, 1873.

*Denotes publications not available to the author.

285

Buiack, J. M—
Flora of South Australia, Parts 1 and 2, Adelaide, 1922.
Additions to the Flora of South Australia. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. xliii., p. 350, 1919,
BorNET-—
In Decaisne and le Maout: A System of General Botany, 1873.

Boopre, L. A., and Worspret., W. C.—

On the Comparative Anatomy of the Casuarinaceae, with Special Reference
to the Gnetaceae and the Cupuliferae. Ann. Bot., viii., 1894.

CampBace, R. H.—
Notes on the Native Flora of New South Wales. Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S.
Wales, xxxvi., 1901.

DE CannoLie, A, P.—

Prodromus Florae Novae Hollandiae, xvi., 2, pp. 332-344, 1864-1868.
CLELAND, J. B., and Brack, J. M.—

South Australian Naturalist, vol. vi., No. 2, Feb., 1925.
DE Corpemoy, H. J.—

Contribution a l’étude de la Morphologie, de l’Anatomie comparée, de la

Phylogénie et de la Biogéographie des Casuarinées.
Revue Général de Botanique, tom. 35, 1923.

Diets, L., and Pritze,, E.—
Fragmenta Phytographiae Australiae occidentalis, 1905.

Forster, J. R. and J. G. A—
*Char. Gen., 103, t. 52, 1775.

Hooker, J. D.—
Flor. Tasm., i., 348, 1860.
LABILLARDIERE, J, J.—
Novae Hollandiae Plantarum Specimen, Paris, 1806.

LEHMANN—
Plant Priess., vol. 1, pp. 639-643, 1844.

Migue., F. A. G—
Reviso critica Casuarinarum in Verh. K. Nederl. Instit. I., xiii, 1848.
+Neder. Kruidk. Arch., iv., 1859.
Flora, Nos. 2 and 3, 1865.

MuELter, F. yon—
Frag. Phytog. Austr., Melb., vol. vi, 1867-68, p. 19.
I'rag. Phytog. Austr., Melb., vol. x., 1877-78.
Journ. of Bot., vol. xv., 1877, Melb. (Giles’ Exped.).
MueEtter, F. von, and Tare, R.—
Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Austr., pt. 3, vol. xvi. 1896 (Elder Exped.).
Mokrrn1, F.—
Anatomia del frutto delle Casuarinee. Ricerche anatomiche sull’embrione.
(Memorie della R. Accad. delle Scienze dell’ Instituto di Bologna,
serie 5, t. 1, 1890.)

Contributo all’anatomia del caule e della foglia delle Casuarinee (Ibid.,
serie 5, t. iv., fasc. 4, 1894.)

*Denotes publications not available to the author.

{Publications not available to the author, but from which descriptions of species have
been obtained.

286

Contributo all’anatomia del caule e della foglia delle Casuarinee Gimno-
stome (Jbid., serie 5, t. v., 1895).

Contributo all’anatomia della radice delle Casuarinee (/bid., serie 5, t. vi.,
fase. 2, p. 369.)

Otto and DrerricH——
*Garten-Zeitung, 1841, 20 and 21.

RuMPHIUS—

*Herb. Amboin., tom. iii., p. 87, t. 58, 1755.
SPRENGEL—

*Syst. Veget., tom. iii., 1826.
Tate, R.—

A Handbook of the Extra-tropical South Australia, Adelaide, 1889.
Tepper, J. G. O.—
Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. Several papers.
VENTENAT, E. P.—
7Plantes nouvelles et peu connues, pag. et tab. 62, 1803.
Witson, H. W.—

Studies on the Transpiration of some Australian Plants, with Notes on
their Leaves. Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xxxvi., 1924.
Woon, J. G—
On the Transpiration in the Field of some Plants from the Arid Portion

of South Australia, with Notes on their Physiological Anatomy.
Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxiii., 1923.

EXPLANATION OF PLATE XIII.

Variation in size and shape of the cones in six species collected from the
localities given below.

Row 1.—C. striata, n. sp.: a, Echunga; b and c, Encounter Bay; d, Belair; e and f,
Aldgate. (Coll. E. D. M.)

Row 2.—C. rigida, Mig.: a, Sydney (J. B. Cleland, 1909); Echo Pt. (E. D. M.,
1925) ; c, Narrabeen (E. D. M., 1925); d and e, Echo Pt. (E. D. M., 1925); £, Cen-
tennial Park (E. D. M., 1925).

Row 3.—C. distyla, Vent. All cones collected from Cheltenham, Victoria.
(E. D. M,, 1925.)

Row 4.—C. paludosa, var. robusia, n. var. All cones collected at Mt. Compass.
(E. D. M., 1925.)

Row 5.--C. pusilla, n. sp.: a, b, c, d, e, Encounter Bay (J. B. C. and E. D. M.);
f, Monarto South (J. B. C., 1926).

Row 6—C. Muelleriana, Miq.: a, Happy Valley (J. B. C. 1927); b, c, d, e,
Belair (E. D. M., 1925) ; £, Humbug Scrub (P. Hossfeld, 1927) ; g, Belair (E. D. M
1925); h, Coonalpyn (J. B. C., 1926).

Photo by G. Samuel.

oa

*Denotes publications not available to the author.

+Publications not available to the author, but from which descriptions of species have
been obtained.

Soc. S. Austr., 1927.

Trans. and Proc. Roy.

>

Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Co.

&

Gillingham

287

THE REACTION OF SOUTH AUSTRALIAN SOILS.

By James ArTHUR Prescott, M.Sc., Professor of Agricultural Chemistry,
University of Adelaide.

[Read September 8, 1927.]

Since the foundation of the Waite Institute, early in 1925, a number of soil
samples shave been collected representative of some of the more important soil
types occurring in South Australia. All the samples received and indexed have
been examined for reaction, using the hydrogen ion concentration as determined
by Bijlmann’s quinhydrone electrode. In the earlier determinations a suspension

opus

saypur

pH 5.0 6.0 Ao 8.0 9.0
Reaction of Seils

Illustrating the general relationship between the reaction of typical South
Australian surface soils and the average rainfall.

of three-parts water to one of air-dried soil was used, but more recently a one to
one suspension has been adopted following the technique recently recommended
by E. Bijlmann and S. Torborg-Jensen (Trans. of the 2nd Commission of the
Intern. Soc. Soil Science, B. 236, 1926). The records include a series of deter-
minations of forest soils by Mr. M. R. Jacobs, and a further series of miscellaneous

288

soils by Mr. H. N. England. The series of samples is by no means complete,
but it is fairly representative of a wide range of rainfall conditions throughout
the agricultural zone of the State, and no useful purpose would be served in
delaying further publication until a larger number of soils have been examined.

The records are presented statistically in the form of a distribution table
which brings out all the essential facts as to locality, rainfall, and soil reaction
—Tables 1 and 2. The term surface soil, generally speaking, refers to the
A horizon of the soil profile, usually within the top 9 inches. It will be seen that
there is a limit on the acid side which is governed by rainfall conditions, and that,

Taste 1.

Reaction of South Australian Soils. Distribution Table showing Number of Soils
falling into each Reaction Group. Reaction expressed as mean pH in

each Group.
S¢ |
Locality. aa |

os a NN a myo wm INTO wt oS w Dm} OAT) a] oa] ut Nm wl oy iin n ~ -

ectamd| Paail Maal ccd esd fics leek lec | faced icad iced iced iced ca td nnd ead on acd ocd cds
Koonamore on. ae ee |B 1] 1; 2 |
County Hamley on. wwe 9 1 3}f 2 1} 1) 5)} i
Nullarbor Sea ip yee cate | AO 1} 11
Berri wick apna, waive ate, lose! TZ 2
Arno Bay sheer atte, cen | ange!) BS 1
Hundreds of Bookpurnong | |

and Mindarie ... .. ... | 12 1 . 2] 1 1|| 37 3) 1
Hundred of Bandon... ... | 13 1 1 3|| 2
Mypolonga dice pee owe aetnd|| 14: 1} 1} 1
Kamba iss gl Se eine cendec f T4 2
Nunjikompita .. se eee ae | 14 1}| 1
Hundred of Marmon Jabuk | 15 i 2) 2) 2) 2i| 3) 2
Pinnaroo oe onite a aed D6 1 1i| 4) 4) 2] 5] 2
Hds. of Koongawa, Cootra, !

Barwell, Ulyerra .... ... | 16 1 2) 1) 1) 2] 3] 3]| 6! 4) 4] 2
Lameroo wn. se see tne eee | 17 1 i 1
Maltlala oo. sus cece nee wee | 17 1] 2
Caltawie wc. ss cee ree eee | 17 i 1
Roseworthy 0. oe eee ee | 18 1| 2
Booborowie 9... cee see nae | 18 1
Rochester vite date aeze tare | 18 yy 1
Georgetown wn. eee | 19 1
Kangaroo Island ... 0 we ve | 19 2 1 2 Ty 1} 3) 3
Spalding 22.0 ss see cee eee | 20 || 1
Riverton 20.0 ssc aces tere wee | ZT 1
Reynella and Morphett Vale; 23 Yl ie 1f 1f 1) 2] 1 4] 2) 4
McLaren Vale ides Af ee |, 2B 1) 2) 1 2i1 4) 1) 1
Auburn oo. ete eee | 24 1 1
Glen Osmond .. 0 eee | 26 1} 1 1
Penola ath wna cae ads “apap 2? 1 V1 1
Mount Pleasant 2... 0 a ae | 28 1] 2) iff 1] 1
Angaston aides tue exe tee 2B 1
Blackwood wee weak anes tye 2D) 2
Millicent 2... 0 1. sue seee anes | 29 i 1
Macclesfield ..0 en. eee ee | OI 1} 1} 1 1 |
Mount Gambier... ... 0... | 31 2| 2] 1) 4 5) 5] 5) 2) 3}] 2
Mount Crawford ... 0 a. a | 32 2| 3) 3 1
Mount Barker ante Aaa steed! Se. 1
Hundred of Myponga ... ... | 33 1 2| 3
Kuitpo ok see ate ee wee | 3G 1 6} 2) 6] 3) 1 1
Mount Lofty ...0 ue oe ee | 46 1/1 1

289

TABLE 2.
Reaction of South Australian Soils. Distribution Table showing number of
Subsoils falling into each Reaction Group. Reaction expressed as
mean pH in each Group.

T H sy Toes: "

= 4 | | | ji
i seg i ; | : \ i
Locality. | 8 : |
Beisfalclerels aieayebafsjaliae ep spall ctiebals jalan =
itr] Fw] as | we fadi in deuisialelsatsieleleteisielss
1 } i 1
Koonamore aa eee ee eee 8 | yl 1
County Hamley ww wee 9 ' [ 1) 6) 5} 6} 3) 2
Nullarbor eet deen thlew any || C10 1 2|| 2) 1) 2) 3
Berd diy SE eee se, STENT ay a
Hundreds of Bookpurnong |
and Mindariec wu. «. | 12 | 1} |i 1| 1 4) 6) 4] 3] 4
Hundred of Bandon... a. 7 13 1] 2 1] 4} 1 1
Mypolonga wee ee | 14 | 1] 3] 1! 1
Hundred of Marmon Jabuk | 15 | | 1) 1) 3) 7
Pinnaroo melts dite cee deg | LO ? on, fo) 4b rita)
Hds. of Koongawa, Cootra, tot ; fg | |
Barwell, Ulyerra ... «| 16 1) | 1) 2 5] 8] 4) 2} apa
Lameroo we ete cee eee | 17 1} 1
Roseworthy n,n eee | 18 | 1 1
Georgetown wn. wee ee | 19 i i 1|/ 1
Kangaroo Tsland 2. uu. ae | 19 : I 1}: 1 1 6} 1) 1
Riverton o.. 0 ee eee ee | 2D I j 1:1 \ |
Reynella and Morphett Vale | 23 1 1) 21 al al | 44 4; 1) 1 |
McLaren Vale wer at ae eas | 2) 1 1 2 2\) 1) 2
Glen Osmond .. 0 we ee | 26 2 1 an |
Mount Pleasant ... ae vn | 27 li, {
Angaston Raty cakes . stan age IL 2B a i }
Blackwood ssund Piath bGaede Gas 29 1 I] i
Millicent ... 0. see te ee | 29 I
Macclesfield 0.0 ee ae ne | 3 1 y)ot apa fj |
Mount Gambier... we | 31 |) 4) 2) tf aj af 2) a) aye
Mount Crawford ... 0 we ae | 32 tj 1} 2 | |
Mount Barker seat Bapt ast 32 1
Hundred of Myponga .. u« | 33 || 2 2} 2} al 4 1
Bawitpo- deh anf ale he wel | 6 a] 1} 7{tol gi] 2] 2 j1
Mount Lofty... we ee eee | 46 | 1] 1} 1 |
|

generally speaking, truly acid soils do not occur with a rainfall of much less than
20 inches. ‘The most acid soils in the State are in swamp areas under high rainfall
conditions, such as the Myponga soil with a reaction of pH 4-7.

‘The alkaline side of the range shows some very interesting features. The
reaction of calcite in equilibrium with the carbon dioxide of the atmosphcre is in
the neighbourhood of pH 8-4, which, with a few exceptions, is approximately the
limit of alkalinity of the surface soils. Many of the subsoils derived from the mallee
formations, both on Eyre’s Peninsula and in the Murray areas, as well as from
the far west coast, south of the Nullarbor Plain, have a high alkalinity with an
extreme limit of pH 9°3. These high values have been checked against the
hydrogen electrode, and there is reason to suppose that they are substantially
correct, although further comparison would be desirable. Recent analyses in this
laboratory, by Mr. C. S. Piper, using the method of base exchange, show that
these highly alkaline soils have their reactive fractions partially saturated with
sodium. Examination of the aqueous extracts for salt content further indicates
the presence of free carbonate ions.

In many cases the soils are derived from formations rich in calcium carbonate,
and even under conditions of fairly high rainfall such soils and subsoils are more
alkaline than those derived from formalions less rich in lime. Typical cases occur

J

290

at Mount Gambier and in the vineyard soils of Reynella and McLaren Vale, south
of Adelaide.

The general relationship between rainfall and soil reaction is summarised
diagrammatically in fig. 1.

An important series of soils not included in the tables is that from the swatnps
of the Lower Murray. These peaty soils are in general relatively acid, although
the rainfall is only about 14 inches.

The following table gives the range of reaction of such of these swamps
as have been examined :—

TABLE 3,
Reaction of surface soils and subsoils of Lower Murray peaty swamps, at
Mobilong, Mypolonga, and Monteith. Number of samples with given pH values.

i | |
i i
Reaction pH. | |
Parlin) solmicola Sl tal skp POL capa Qin seo] +
lsleleislale M8) aa fad) dha ws |p ad) us hid Slr} e[ so]
Surface Soils o.oo ae ee ee | 1 1 1 2) 1 2 2 2 1 1
I
Subsoils Be teep anne’ ade See Wale alas 1 1 1 " | | 1] 2] 3 |
i

All the black peaty soils of South Australia are not necessarily acid—a group
of heavy black soils frequently known as “Bay of Biscay” soils in the neighbour-
hood of Adelaide, on account of the difficulty in securing suitable foundations for
building purposes—are usually more alkaline than the corresponding red soils.
Such soils at the Waite Institute, Reynella, Morphett Vale, and McLaren Vale
have reaction values of pH 8-0-8-2. The swamp soils of the South-Eastern Dis-
tricts are also probably mainly alkaline, one at Penola having a reaction value
of pH 8-1.

The general relationship between rainfall and soil reaction, indicated above,
finds a parallel in recent observations made in Java by O. Arrhenius (“Een
Orienteerend Onderzoek over den Zuurgraad van de Suikerrietgronden op Java”
—Sugar industry research station, Java, 1927, No. 6). The soils of eastern Java,
which has a semi-arid climate, are mutch more alkaline than those of western Java,
which is much more humid. An even better parallel is afforded by Italian
observations by U. Pratolongo, Italian soils are usually acid in the regions of
high rainfall and alkaline in the regions of low rainfall. (Milan, 1923, quoted by
OQ. Arrhenius: Kalkfrage, Bodenreaktion und Pflanzenwachstum, Leipzig, 1926.)

As a supplement to the hydrogen ion concentration, the modified Comber
test (Journ. Agric. Sci., 12, 370, 1922) has been applied in all cases using aqueous
5 per cent. potassium salicylate. There is an overlap between the positive and
negative reactions, but, generally speaking, the neutral point, pH 7-0 divides the
two classes; a few positive cases appearing with soils as alkaline as pH 7-5, and
very few negative cases with soils slightly on the acid side down to pH 6°5.

The results are summarised in Table 4. All soils outside the range of reaction
indicated are entirely negative or positive.

TABLE 4.
Relationship between the reaction of soils and the Comber test, giving the
number of soil samples.

Soil Reaction

i
pH. OLN} mp AUS |p Nm pspape| nota aN a eet (ed cs 2
wifasfes[es||s 6 S/S] S]S] S| 2] S13 mpS esespo potas o8
: | tit |
Positive Comber Test wa. sus | ofas| alts 5 ; 7 ola 6 ‘| 7| 2) 4\| 7) 4] 3) 3] 2) 2] 2
1

Negative Comber Test =... ae 1j 1) 1) 4) 1/f 3) 6

4) 9112/10/17 eer

291

CONTRIBUTIONS TO THE ORCHIDOLOGY OF AUSTRALIA.
By R. S. Rocers, M.A., M.D., F.L.S.
[Read September 8, 1927.]

Sarcochilus dilatatus, F. v. M., in Fragm. i., 191. This species which
belongs to § Eu-sarcochilus, was included by Bentham under S. olivaceus, Lindl,
but appears to me sufficiently distinctive to be worthy of retention in the Census
of Queensland plants. A small quantity of moist material supplied by Rev. H.
M. Rupp, of Paterson, New South Wales, has been compared with the type in the
National Herbarium, Melbourne, and the iollowing descriptive notes of the flower
will supplement the original description by the Baron,

Dorsal sepal markedly spathulate; the lamina or dilated part somewhat
acute, 3-nerved, rhomboidal, brownish-green; stipes linear, pale in colour, splashed
with red spots; entire segment about 8 mm. long, Lateral sepals adnate to the
long basal projection of column, porrect below the labellum, very distant from
other segments, dilated at the base, about equal in length and similar in other
respects to the dorsal sepal. Petals rather shorter, about 7 mm, long, narrower
throughout than the sepals, bluntly spathulate, similar in coloration to the other
segments, together with the dorsal sepal erect behind the column. Labecllum
white, 3-lobed; lateral lobes erect, exceeding the column and clasping the latter
with their posterior borders, very broadly oblong, hardly falcate, apex pure
white, very blunt and rounded, basal part with red striae on the inside and orange-
brown markings anteriorly on the outside; middle lobe very small, short, and
blunt, forming the narrow arc of a circle with entire margins; spur rather short
and blunt, but alternating towards the apex, its entrance with a conical callus on
each side arising from the base of the lateral lobes, and behind on the posterior
wall a somewhat bluntly triangular recurved process; posterior wall with orange
and brownish markings.

The plant was cultivated by Mr. Rupp in Paterson, New South Wales.

Queensland. Moreton Bay, W. Hill; about 50 miles west of Brisbane,
F, A. Weinthal.

Tt differs from S. olivaceus, Lindl., in its smaller flowers, in the shape of its
sepals terminally dilated into a rhomb, and with relatively long linear stipes,
whereas these segments are linear obovate in S. olivaceus; likewise in the lateral
lobes of the labellum, which are broadly oblong with wide rounded oblique apices,
but in S, olivaceus are much wider at the base, narrowing gradually into a dis-
tinctly falcate apex.

Prasophyllum acuminatum, Rogers, n. sp. Caulis gracillimus, ad 17 cm.
altus, supra medium bractea foliosa linearis subulata. Inflorescentia spicata,
laxiuscula, circiter 1-25-3-0 cm. longa. Flores 6-13, badii cum lineis purpureis
striati. Sepalum dorsale ovatum, ecrectum, cucullatum, acuminatissimum, 3-
nervium, marginibus ciliatis, cirea 4-5 mm. longum, 1°75 mm. latum. Sepala
lateralia elongata, patentia, sub-gracilia, divaricata, lanceolata, cum glandulis
apicibus, liberum, concava, circa 5 mm, longa. Petala triangularia, erecta,
acuminata, marginibus ciliatis, sepalo dorsali breviora, 3-nervia, 3°5 mm. longa,
1:0 mm. lata. Labellum unguiculatum, ovatum, apice acuminata recurva, mar-
ginibus ciliatis, circa 2°5 mm. longum, 1:25 mm. latum, 3-nervium, in dimidio
inferiore lamina interiore crassa atropurpurea auctum. Mucrona antherae
elongata, teres, circa 0°5 mm. longa. Laciniae columnae erectae, ciliatae, circa

292

1-5 mm. longae, bifidae; segmentum anterius clongatum subulatum, segmento
posteriore brevissimo latissimo.

Stem very slender, up to 17 cm. high, with a leafy linear subulate bract well
above the middle. Flowers in a moderately lax spike of about 6-13, dark reddish-
brown, striated, with purple nerves. Dorsal sepal ovate, erect, cucullate, very
acuminate, with 3 distinct longitudinal nerves and sometimes also 2 indistinct mar-
ginal ones, margins ciliated, about 4°5 mm. long, 1:75 mm. in widest part. Lateral
sepals free, clongated, spreading, rather slender, not gibbous, divaricate, lanceolate,
with a gland at each apex, concave above, about 5 mm. long. Petals triangular,
erect, markedly acuminate, striated, with 3 distinct longitudinal nerves, shorter
than the dorsal sepal, about 3:5 mm. long, 1:0 mm. wide, margins ciliated.
Labellum on a movable claw, ovate, apex acuminate much recurved, margins
ciliate, about 2°5 mm. long, 1°25 mm. wide, 3-nerved, upper surface of lamina
glabrous, a dark purple thickened inner plate extending beyond the middle. Anther
with an clongated terete point about 0°5 mm. long. Lateral appendages of
column erect, ciliated, about 1-5 mm. long, notched; anterior segment elongated,
subulate, posterior segment very short, wide, and rounded.

New South Wales. Alum Mountain, Bulladelah, H. M. Rupp, May, 1923;
Paterson, H. M. Rupp.

As the name implies, all floral segments of this species are acuminate, and
with exception of the lateral scpals all have ciliated margins. A thickened ovate
inner plate occupies the posterior half of the lamina, the apex of the lip is
uncinate, and the anther has a conspicuously long terete point. The relationships
of the species will be dealt with later on.

Prasophyllum Ruppii, Rogers, n. sp. Planta gracillima, cirea 8-25 cm.
alta, supra medium caulis bractea subulata. Inflorescentia spicata, laxiuscula,
circa 1°25-3-5 cm. longa. Flores minuti, 4-18, atro-purpurei, sepalis lateralibus
saepe galbanis, sessiles. Sepalum dorsale erectum, cucullatum, late ovatum,
circiter 3 mm. longum, apice acutum, marginibus breviter ciliatis. Sepala lateralia
leviter gibbosa, patentia, divaricata, oblongo-lanceolata, circa 3°5 mm. longa,
1-0 mm. lata, basibus oblique connata. Petala erecta, acuminata, circa 2-0 mm.
longa, 0°75 mm. lata, marginibus breviter ciliatis. Labellum unguiculatum,
oblongo-ovatum, apiculatum, patens, planiusculum, apice non recurva, in medio
leviter canaliculatum utrimquesecus callo papilloso longitudinale, cirea 2°5 mm.
longum, 1-1 mm, latum. Columna brevis, anthera apice subulata, rostellum
excedens; laciniae latcrales latae, bifidae, antheram excedentes, marginibus
anterioribus minute ciliatis, chelis fere acquantibus. Stigma anguste ovatum.

A slender species, about 8-25 cm. high, with a sheathing subulate bract well
above the middle of the stem. Inflorescence a spike with about 4-18 minute sessile
flowers, the lateral sepals being often a yellowish-green. Dorsal sepal erect,
cucullate, widely ovate, 3-nerved, about 3 mm. long, acute at the apex, with shortly
ciliated margins. [ateral sepals slightly gibbous, obliquely united at their bases,
sprcading, divaricate, oblong-lanceolate, about 3-5 mm. long, 1-0 mm. wide, no
gland at the apex. Petals erect, triangular, acuminate, about 2-0 mm. long,
0°75 mm. wide, margins shortly ciliate. Labellum on a movable claw, oblong-
ovate, apiculate, rather flat, spreading, not recurved at the apex, slightly channelled
along the middle with a slight longitudinal papillose thickening on each side of
this depression, about 2°5 mm. long, 1-1 mm. wide, margins shortly ciliate.
Column short; anther with a fine subulate point, higher than the rostellum; lateral
appendages dark reddish-brown, wide, bifid, higher than the anther; the 2 chelae
nearly equal in length, the posterior one wider than the anterior; anterior margin
minutely ciliate. Stigma narrowly ovate.

New South Wales. Paterson, H. M. Rupp, Feb., 1927.

293

Like the preceding species, all floral segments are ciliated with the exception
of the lateral sepals. The segments, however, are much less acuminate and the
flowers are much smaller. It has, too, a very different labellum which is rather
flat, somewhat blunt, not recurved at the apex, and without the inner thickened
plate. which is present on the lamina of P. acuminatum. The lateral appendages
are likewise quite differently shaped to those of the latter species, and the anther-
point is shorter and of a different type.

Prasophyllum Nublingii, Rogers, n. sp. Planta graciflima, circa 11-27 cm.
alta, supra medium caulis bractea foliosa subulata. Inflorescentia spicata,
laxiuscula, circa ad 5°5 cm. longa. Flores circa 5-20, parvi, badii vel subvirides.
Sepalum dorsale ovatum, acuminatum, cucullatum, apice recurvum, 3-nervium,
circa 4 mm, longum, 2 mm, latum, marginibus breviter ciliatis. Sepala lateralia
patentia, divaricata, leviter gibbosa, concava, basibus breviter connata, 3-nervia,
circa 5 mm. longa. Petala ovato-lanceolata, longe acuminata, erecta, 3-nervia,
circa 3°5 mm. longa, 0-8 mm. lata, marginibus breviter ciliatis, Labellum unguicu-
latum, subrectangulare, ad basim angustius, breviter apiculatum, planum, apice
non recurvum, circiter 4 mm. longum, marginibus breviter ciliatis; lamina callis
duobus carnosis parallelis papillosis elevatis ultra medium labelli conjunctis
instructa, ad apicem lincis radialibus atropurpureis ornata. Columma brevis, circa
1°5 mm. longa; anthera incumbens, acute mucronata; laciniae laterales antheram
leviter superantes, bifidae, chelis fere aequantibus, marginibus anterioribus minute
ciliatis. Stigma late ovatum.

A slender plant about 11-27 cm. high, with a subulate leafy bract above the
middle of the stem. Inflorescence a somewhat lax spike, with about 5-20 small
reddish-brown or greenish flowers. Dorsal sepal ovate, acuminate, cucullate,
recurved at the apex, 3-nerved, about 4 mm. long, 2 mm, wide, the margins shortly
ciliate. Lateral sepals spreading, lanceolate, divaricate at an angle of about 60°,
slightly gibbous, concave, shortly connate at ‘the base, 3-ncrved, nearly 5 mm,
long. Petals ovate-lanceolate, longly acuminate, erect, about 3-5 mm. long,
0-8 mm. in widest part, 3-nerved, margins shortly ciliate. Labellum on a mobile
claw, sornewhat rectangular, narrower at the base and widening towards the apex,
shortly apiculate, flat, not recurved at the tip, margins shortly ciliate, about 4 mm.
long, 2 mm. wide; lamina with 2 raised fleshy parallel papillose dark longitudinal
bands coalescing and widening in front and terminating slightly beyond the middle
of the lip, decorated towards the apex with dark purple radial veins. Column
rather short; anther incumbent with a very acute mucrone, shorter than the
lateral appendages, but a little higher than the rostellum; lateral appendages bifid,
the chelae almost equal in length, anterior margins minutely ciliate.

New South Wales. National Park, E. Nubling, March 22, 1927.

The shape of the flat labellum, rectangular at the base, widening towards
the front, with its peculiar double callosity and radial veins on the lamina, is quite
distinctive, and easily separates this from other ciliated species.

In addition to the three species of Prasophyllum described here, 8 others
showing evidence of ciliation in one or more floral segments have been published.
The distribution of the ciliation forms a basis for the division of this difficult
little group. It is more frequently met with on the inner whorls than on the
outer one. For example, it has never been observed on the lateral sepals and is
never confined solely to the dorsal sepal, whereas in only two instances has the lip
been found unaffected, and in one of these the margins are finely and sharply
toothed. It is freqtient on the paired petals and paired lateral appendages of the
column. In the case of the lip it is almost exclusively marginal, and only im one
instance has the surface of that organ been involved in the process. In the other
segments it is entirely marginal. These marginal hairs are relatively short in all
species except P. fanbriatum and P. Archeri, in which cases they are long and

294

shaggy, forming a fringe. In the following table the segments stated to be ciliate
are the only ones involved in the process :—

Labellum and lateral sepals quite glabrous,
Appendages of column minutely ciliated, lateral sepals gibbous,

anther point short RS lo = 4 hh a .. FP, viride
Petals minutely ciliate, lateral sepals not gibbous, anther point very
long he 28 a La ra i . as ». PP. filiforme
Labellum with ciliated margins, lateral sepals glabrous.
Lateral appendages of column ciliate ‘ P. intricatum
Petals ciliate .. ‘2 .« rt. P. Woollsit
Petals and latcral appendages ciliate P. reflexum
Dorsal sepal and petals ciliate.
Margins of lip shortly ciliate, its surface covered with long hair P. eriochilum
Margins of lip fringed with long hairs, surface glabrous.
Lamina linear-oblong, often dilated at end .. “er ». 2. fimbriatum
Lamina broadly-oblong, contracted rather abruptly into a
. short sharp recurved point _ +4 A .. PB. ArcheriG)
All segments, except lateral sepals, shortly or rather shortly ciliate.
Lip ovate, very acuminate, much recurved at apex, with dark
purple ovate inner plate .. i “3 he AR -. P. acuminatum
Lip oblong-ovate, rather flat and blunt, papillose thickening each
side middle line, not recurved at apex os an .. P. Ruppii
Lip subrectangular, widening from base forwards, abruptly
contracted to an apiculum, flat, not recurved, with 2
clongated rough calli united in front in middle of lamina .. P. Nublingii

Goadbyella, Rogers, nov. gen. Flores parvi, spicati, inversi. Sepalum
dorsale (inferum) erectum, integrum, ecucullatum; lateralia latiora, libera,
oblonga, truncata, patentia. Petala erecta, angusta, integra, sepalo dorsali sub-
similia. Labellum (superum) sessile, patens, obcuneatum, apice emarginatum vel
2-lobatum, basi et apicem versus callosum, Columna longiuscula ; inferne gracilis,
exalata; apice dilatata, biauriculata. Anthera erecta, conspicue mucronata,
Stigma prominens, ovatum vel cordatum.

Herbae terrestres, glabrae, tuberibus parvis. Folium unicum; lamina teres,
basi breviter aperta et cum vagina clausa continuua. Species 1 adhuc nota, incola
Australiae occidentalis.

This genus differs from Micratis, R. Br., with which it is most closely related,
in its reversed flowers, slender and somewhat elongated column, its narrow non-
cucullate dorsal sepal and its wide truncate lateral sepals.

G. gracilis, Rogers, nov. sp. Species terrestris, gracillima, glabra, usque
ad 37 cm. alta. Folium basim inflorescentiae bene excedens, Flores numerosi,
parvi, 5 mm. longi, inversi, galbani, in spica densiuscula, infra pedicellati, supra
sessiles; bracteae ovatae, acuminatae, circiter 3 mm. longi, sepalum dorsale
aequantes. Ovarium brevissimum. Sepalum dorsale erectum, anguste oblongum
vel oblongo-cuneatum, apice obtusissimum, 1-nervium, incurvum, circa 3 mm.
longum; lateralia patentia, libera, oblonga, truncata, in dimidio inferiore mar-
ginibus integris deinde crenulatis cum callis ornatis, 3-nervia, circiter 4 mm. longa,
1-75 mm. lata. Petala erecta, linearia, paulum falcata, obtusissima, columnam
subaequantia, I-nervia, circa 2 mm. longa. Labellum sessile, patens vel sub-
patens, circa 4:25 mm. longum, basi oblongum marginibus integris, deinde in
lobos rotundatos duos dilatatum marginibus crenulatis cum callis glandulosis
ornatis; lamina in dimidio inferiore lineis parallelis elevatis duabus instructa,
apicem versus calloso-tuberculato. Columna circiter 2 mm. longa, subgracilis,
apice dilatata; auriculis oblique oblongis, apicibus rotundatis, insolenter longis.
Anthera erecta, longe mucronata. Stigma conspicue ovatum vel cordatum.

Plant about 37 cm. high, very slender. Leaf-lamina about 15 cm. long reach-
ing well above the base of the spike; fistula a little below the middle of the scape.

(1) The lateral appendages of column are sometimes minutely ciliate in this species.

295

Inflorescences not fully expanded in my specimens. Flowers reversed, numerous,
greenish-yellow, small, about 5 mm. long, rather distant and pedicellate below,
much closer and sessile above. Flower bract usually sheathing the dorsal sepal
and about the same length, ovate, acuminate, about 3 mm. long. Ovary very
short. Dorsal sepal narrowly oblong or oblong-cuneate, very blunt at the apex,
l-nerved, incurved over the column, about 3 mm. long. Lateral sepals spreading
below the labellum, free, oblong, truncate; margins of the lower half entire,
thereafter very crenulate and fringed with calli; the distal part of the upper
surface more or less ornamented with groups of calli; 3-nerved, about 4 mm.
long, 1-75 mm. wide. Petals erect, linear, slightly falcate, about 2 mm. long, very
blunt, l-nerved, nearly equal to the column. Labellum sessile, spreading or sub-
patent, about 4°25 mm. long; oblong at the base with entire margins, then expand-
ing into two somewhat rounded lobes with margins crenulate and fringed with
glandular calli; lamina 3-nerved, with 2 raised parallel lines in the lower half and
a group of glandular calli near the middle of the expanded portion, Column
about 2 mm. long, somewhat slender, narrow, and not winged below, expanded
abruptly at the apex: the auricles long and oblique, oblong with rounded apices.
Anther erect, with a conspicuous mucrone. Stigma prominent, ovate or cordate.

Western Australia. Pindalup, in jarrah forest; Mr. P. Barwise, Nov.
1926.

For this species which constitutes the type of a new genus, I am indebted to
Colonel B. T. Goadby. Pindalup is situated in the south-western corner of the
State, on the Hotham Valley branch line, about 30 miles east of Pinjarra.

The plant forms an interesting link between Prasophyllum, R. Br., and
Microtis, R. Br., both of which it more or less resembles in habit. Its differences
from species of the latter genus have already been stated, and from the former it
is readily distinguished by the shape of the labellum, and especially by the very
different column. The lateral sepals are broad truncate and very ornate, in strong
contrast to the simplicity of the same segments in members of the above genera,

Caladenia Audasii, Rogers, n. sp. Planta terrestris, gracilis, ad 20 cm.
alta. Caulis subhirsutus, in medio bractea laxa oblonga acuta circiter 2°0 cm.
longa. Folium in meo specimine absens. Flos solitarius, magnus, flavus, fere
glaber, circiter 9-0 cm. in diametro; ovarium densissime hirsutum, cylindrico-
cuneatum, circa 1-0 cm. longum; pedicellum gracillimum, circa 3-5 cm. longum;
bractea floralis pedicellum amplexans, acuta, 2-4 cm. longa. Sepalum dorsale in
meo specimine imperfectum, anguste lineare, basi retractum, incurvatum (?).
Sepala lateralia patentia, inferne dilatata, deinde in catidis elongatis filiformibus
pubescentibus gradatim contracta, 5-nervia, circa 6:0 cm. longa, 4:0 mm. lata;
caudae circa 2°6 cm. longae. Petala anguste lanceolata, reflexa (?), 3-nervia,
4-0 cm, longa, 2‘5 mm. lata. Labellum unguiculatum, indivisum, ovatum, cirea
1°6 cm. longum, 1:0 cm. latum, marginibus integris; parte apicali cuneata, sparsim
punctata, leviter crenulata, recurva; calli lineares, 6-seriati, leviter ultra medium
laminae terminantes. Columna incurva, circa 1°7 cm. longa, basi bicallosa,
superne latiuscule alata. Anthera obtusa.

Species terrestrial, slender, up to 20 cm. high. Stem rather hairy, a loose
oblong acute bract about 2 cm. long in the middle. Leaf wanting in my specimen.
Flower solitary, large, yellow, about 9-0 cm. in diameter; ovary very densely
hairy, cylindrical-cuneate, about 1:0 cm. long; pedicel very slender, about 3:5 cm.
long; floral bract embracing the pedicel, acute, about 2:4 cm. long. Dorsal sepal
incomplete in my specimen, narrow-linear, retracted at the base, incurved (?).
Lateral sepals spreading, dilated below, thereafter gradually contracted into very
long pubescent filiform caudae, 5-nerved, about 6:0 cm. long, 4-0 mm. wide;
caudae about 2°6 cm. long. Petals narrowly lanceolate, apparently reflexed,
3-nerved, 4:0 cm. long, 2°5 mm. wide. Labellum on a very narrow movable claw,

296

undivided, ovate, about 1-6 cm. long, 1:0 cm. wide, margins entire; the apical
part cuneate, sparsely dotted, slightly crenulate, recurved; calli linear in 6 rows,
ending a little beyond the middle of the lamina. Column incurved, about 1°7 cm.
long, 2 yellow calli at the base, rather widely winged above. Anther quite blunt.

Victoria. Mt. MclIvor, near Bendigo. Collector unrecorded, also month
of callection in 1896. Forwarded from the National Herbarium, Melbourne, for
determination by J. W. Audas, whose name it bears. Type in National Herbarium,
Melbourne.

This species occupies a taxonomic position midway between C. Patersonii,
R. Br., and C. clavigera, Cunng. Krom the former it differs in its entire Jabellum,
in its relatively longer column, and in the colour of its flowers. From the latter
it is easily distinguished by the size and colour of the flowers, which greatly exceed
those of C. clavigera, and by the presence of 6 rows of calli on the labellum.

Caladenia radialis, Rogers, n. sp. Species gracilis, circa 15-25 cm. alta,
Folium anguste lineare, acutum, basi amplexicaule, villosum, circa 5-15 cm.
longum, 4-6 mm. latum. Flores 1-2, majusculi, lutei et badii, lineis atris in
segmentis et labello, 6-7 cm. diametro; ovarium densissime hirsutum; pedicellum
gracilimum, hirsutum, circa 1°8 cm. Jongum. Segmenta basi lanceolata vel
dilatata, deinde in caudis filiformibus glanduloso-pubescentibus attenuata, sub-
similia, lineis badiis striata. Sepalum dorsale erectum, incurvum, 3-nervium, circa
3°0-3°5 cm. longum. Sepala lateralia petalaque paulo longiora, 3-5 nervia,
patentia. Labellum gracillime unguiculatum, subovatum, circa 1°3 cm. longum,
9-10 mm, latum, apice multo recurvum, marginibus vulgo integris rarius leviter
serratis; lamina nervis atris radialibus ornata; calli lineares, curvi, 6-seriati,
conferti, prope medium? laminae terminantes. Columna erecta, incurva, circa
1-1 cm. longa, prorsus alata, ala supera latinscula cum lobo inferiore obtuso, basi
non bicallosa. Anthera obtusissima,

Leaf narrow-linear, acute, clasping the stem at the base, villous, about 5-15 cm.
long, 4-6 mm. wide. Flowers 1 or 2, rather large, yellow and reddish-brown,
with dark lines on the segments and labellum, 6-7 cm. in diameter; ovary very
densely and shortly hairy; pedicel slender, about 1°8 cm. long. Segments some-
what similar, lanceolate or dilated at the base, then narrowing to glandulose-
pubescent filiform caudae, striated with reddish-brown lines. Dorsal sepal erect,
incurved, 3-nerved, about 3-0-3°5 cm. long. Lateral sepals and petals a little
longer, 3-5-nerved, spreading. Labellum on a slender movable claw, somewhat
ovate, about 1-3 cm. long, 9-10 mm. wide, much recurved at the apex, the margins
usually entire, more rarely slightly serrate; lamina decorated with dark radia!
nerves ; calli yellow, linear, golf-stick type, densely crowded in 6 rows on the lower
half of the lamina, ending about the middle. Column erect, incurved, about
1-1 cm. long; winged throughout, but widely so just below the anther, these
upper wings being furnished with a blunt inferior lobe; no yellow calli at the
base. Anther without a mucrone, extremely blunt.

Western Australia. Dowerin, E. H. Ising, Sept. 1, 1926; Beverley, Dr.
F. Stoward, Sept. 13, 1913.

This species replaces the plant in Western Australia hitherto regarded as
conspecific with C. clavigera, Cunng. Its lip differs considerably from that of
the Eastern species, not only in shape, but also in the presence of 6 rows of
densely crowded calli and a number of dark radial lines. Its column is also quite
differently winged, has a very blunt anther without a mucrone, and is without the
usual double yellow calli at the base. The segments of the perianth are not
clavate.

Pterostylis robusta, Rogers, n. sp. Herba terrestris, gracilis, glabra,
circa 5-20 cm. alta. Folia radicalia stellata, vulgo 6 vel 7, obtusa, late ovata

297

vel elliptico-ovata, longiuscule petiolata; in planta florida folia caulina, alterna,
basi amplexicaulia, latiuscule lanceolata, acuminata, vulgo 4 vel 5 (bractea floralt
inclusa), in magnitudine summum versus crescentia, aliquando ad 5 cm. longa.
Flos viridis, striatus, aliquanto magnus, solitarius. Galea circa 3°2 cm. longa, apice
gradatim areuato-incurva; sepalum dorsale acumine brevi subtili instructum.
Labium inferius erectum; laciniis longe filiformibus, galeam multo superantibus.
Labellum irritabile, mobile unguiculatum, fere strictum, lanceolatum, acumine
acuta gradatim contractum, columnam leviter excedens; lamina circa 15 mm.
longa, in medio linea elevata longitudinali, basi appendice lineari multo curva
penicillata. Columna erecta, circa 16 mm. longa, lobo superiore alae acuta, lobo
inferiore oblongo obtuso marginibus introrsis ciltatis.

Slender, glabrous, about 5-20 cm. high. Radical leaves (not present in the
flowering plant) stellate, usually 6 or 7, obtuse, widely ovate or elliptic-ovate,
with somewhat long and slender petioles; in the flowering plant leaves cauline,
alternate, clasping at the base, rather widely lanceolate, acuminate, usually 4 or 5
including the floral bract, increasing in size from below upwards, sometimes
attaining 5 cm, in length. Flower green with deeper green longitudinal stripes,
rather large, single. Galea about 3:2 cm. long, gradually curved forward at the
apex; dorsal sepal furnished with a short slender point rarely exceeding 4 mm.
long. Inferior lip erect, its segments longly filiform, embracing and much exceed-
ing the galea. Labellum irritable, on a movable claw, practically straight.
ianceolate, tapering into an acute but not acuminate point, in the erect position
very slightly exceeding the column; the lamina about 15 mm. long, traversed in
the middle by a raised longitudinal line, with a much curved linear penicillate
appendage at the base. Column erect, about 16 mm. long, the upper angle of the
wing acute, the lower lobe oblong-obtuse with inturned ciliated margins.—-
P. praecox, Lindl. var. robusta, Ewart and Sharm., Proc, Roy. Soc. Vict., xxviit.,
1915, p. 231, t. 27, fig. 7; Bentham in Fl. Austr., vi., p. 359, P. reflexa (partly) ;
Rogers, P. reflexa, in Black’s I'l. S. Austr., Part I., 1922, p. 151; Pescott and
Nicholls, Vict. Nat., xlii., 1925, p. 62, pl. ii., P. reflexa.

Victoria. Widely distributed.
South Australia. Widely distributed.

Western Australia. Apparently coastal. Between Perth and Fremantle,
Col. B. T. Goadby, July, 1927; Swanborne, near Perth, Col, Goadby, July 7, 1927.

Apparently with some hesitation, this plant was included by Bentham in
Brown’s species P. reflexa, It differs from the latter, however, in its shorter
stem, wider leaves, and relatively short straight labellum which does not protrude
through the sinus of the lower lip, as in the case of Brown's plant. This latter
species appears to have been correctly interpreted by R. D. Iitzgerald in his
“Australian Orchids,” vol. i. (P. reflexa, fig. A), where the lamina of the lip is
gradually contracted into a long narrow curved acute point, greatly exceeding the
column in length and conspicuously protruding from the sinus. His figures B and
C in the same plate represent, in my opinion, P. revolula, R. Br., a plant with a
much larger flower, but a very similar labellum. Brown, in fact, describes the
labella of these two species in identical words. In both of these plants from New
South Wales, the galea is much longer at the apex and more acuminate than 1s
the case in P. robusta, ‘The new species is evidently a near relative of P. alata,
(Labill.) Reichb. £., but the latter is a more slender plant, with much smaller
pract-like leaves, exceedingly translucent flowers considerably smaller in size,
greyish in colour, and striated with reddish-brown. The labellum, which is
reddish-brown, is very similar in shape, perhaps a trifle longer and a little less
acute, The mucrone of the galea is even shorter than that of P. robusta, and the
radical leaves are less obtuse.

298

AUSTRALIAN FUNGI: NOTES AND DESCRIPTIONS.—No. 6.
By ‘J. Burton Cretanp, M.D.
[Read October 13, 1927,]

This paper is a continuation of previous ones, of which the last, No. 5,
appeared in these Transactions and Proceedings, vol. xlviii., 1924, pp. 236-252.
The species dealt with are given numbers consecutive with those in the previous
papers. Colour tints when specifically noted in capital letters are based on Ridg-
way’s “Colour Standards and Colour Nomenclature,” references to the plates
therein being given. Following the example set by a number of other mycologists,
Latin descriptions of the new species described have not been prepared.

SUMMARY OF CONTENTS.
WHITE-SPORED AGARICACEAE.
AMANITA: 455.4, aigustispora, n. sp. 456—A. straminca, 1. sp.
ArMiciaria: 457—A. colossa, Fr., var. australis, var. nov. 458—4. muscicola, n. sp.
Mycrna: 459—M. subvulgaris, n. sp.
Cuitocyze: 460—C. brunneo-ceracea, n. sp. 461—C. peraggregaia, n. sp. 462—C. semi-
occulta, n. sp.
PLevurotus: 463—P, subapplicatus, n. sp. 464—P., cinerascens, . sp.
Russuta: 465—R. purpurco-flava, n. Sp.
Lacrarrus: 466—L, Clarkci, n, Sp.
Marasmivus: 467—M. alveolaris, n. sp.
CANTHARELLUS: 468—C, rugosus, n. sp. 469—C. granulosus, n. sp. 470—C. brunneus,
n. sp.
PINK-SPORED AGARICACEAE.
Lerronta: 471—I.. virido-marginata, 11. sp.
BROWN-SPORED AGARICACEAE,
Puoriota: 472—P. rufo-fulva, n. sp. 473—P. subpumila,
Cortinarius (Myxamicium): 474—C, (M.) ruber, n. sp. 475—C. (M.) subarvinaceus,
n. sp. 476—C. (M.) ochraceus, n. sp.
Paxtius: 477—P. infundibuliformis, n. Sp.
PURPLE-SPORED AGARICACEAE.
Pstocyse: 478—Ps. subaeruginosa, n. sp. 479—Ps. stercicala, n. sp. 480—Ps. coprophila,
(Bull.) Fr. 481—Ps. subaimmophila, n. sp.
BLACK-SPORED AGARICACEAE.
PSATHYRELLA : 482——Ps. subprona, n. sp.

WHITE-SPORED AGARICACEAE.

455. Amanita angustispora, n. sp. Pileus 1 to 2 in. (3-2 to 5 cm.) in
diameter, irregularly convex, then nearly plane or with centre depressed, viscid
when moist, subfibrillose round the edge, whitish with a slightly biscuity-brown
tint in the centre or with a pale-chocolate or greyish-brown tint. Gills just reach-
ing the stem to adnexed or nearly adnate, moderately close, not ventricose, edges
serrate in one collection, 4 in. (7 mm.) or more deep, white with a slight cream
tint. Stem 2 to 24 ins. (5 to 6-2 cm.) high, equal, moderately stout to moderately
slender (% to $in., 10 to 12-5 mm. thick), mealy and gill-marked above the definite
dependent white superior or nearly median ring, slightly fibrillose below, solid,
base bulbous, 1 in. (2°5 em.) long. 3 in. (1:9 cm.) thick, rounded below or with
a conical root. Volva sheathing, ample, whitish. Smell slightly strong. Spores
elliptical, narrow for the length, 10 to 135-5 to 6 ». Deeply rooting in sandy
soil. Encounter Bay, May, 1926, August and September, 1927, Kinchina plants

299

(August, 1925) are probably the same, but the pileus is noted as white only, the
ring is median, and the bulbous base showed no definite volva, spores 136°5 yp.

456. Amanita straminea, n. sp. Pileus up to 24 ins. (5°6 cm.) in diameter,
convex, then nearly plane with the centre slightly irregularly depressed, surface
dull, mealy when young, becoming smooth, white. Gills adnexed, moderately
close, alternate ones at the periphery short, up to # in. deep, near Straw Yellow
(pl. xvi.). Stem up to 24 ins. (5°8 cm.) high, rather slender (4 in., 1 em., thick
above), nearly equal, base somewhat bulbous, somewhat mealy, solid, white, Ring
evident, dependent, membranous, subdistant, white. Volva not obvious, evidently
friable. Tlesh rather thin, white. Spores elliptical, with an oblique apiculus,
definitely slightly coloured yellow, 11 to 13%7°5 ». On the ground under shrubs.
S.A.—Kinchina, June 8, 1926; Encounter Bay.

457, Armillaria colossa, Fr., var. australis, var. nov. Pileus 3 ins. (7-5 cm.)
or more in diameter, at first irregularly convex, then expanding to irregularly
plane or upturned, surface fibrillose-matt with some more superficial
fibrils, Clay Colour (pl. xxix.), to Sayal Brown (pl. xxix.), towards
the centre sometimes much darker. Gills sinuate, nearly free, moder-
ately close, $ in. (6 mm.) deep, ventricose, short ones interposed at
the periphery, Light Pinkish Cinnamon (pl. xxix.), when old spotted with
reddish-brown. Stem 2 ins. (5 cm.) high, $ in. (1:2 cm.) or more thick, usually
attenuated downwards, fibrillose striate, marked with gill lines above, solid, at
first pallid with rusty stains, then tinted with Ochraceous Tawny (pl. xv.). Ring-
marked when young, median, pallid, then brownish. Fliesh-white, a little reddish
under the cuticle, when old becoming brownish, especially in the stem. Flesh of
stem continuous with that of the pileus. Spores subspherical, smooth, 7 to
7°5 p, 9X7-5 w. Subcaespitose in an imperfect ring at the base of an old
Eucalyptus trunk. S.A—Mount Lofty, July 1925.

These plants agree fairly closely with Tab. 60 (Tricholoma colossa, Fr.) in
Bresadola’s Iconographia Mycologica now being published, but differ in the spores
(Bresadola, 8 to 105 to 6) and in the tendency to spotting of the gills. Rea
(Brit. Basidiomycetae) places the species under Armillaria and gives the spores
as 6 to 7X5 to 7 w. It seems advisable to give the Australian plants a varietal
name and to place them under Armillaria.

458. Armillaria muscicola, n. sp. Pileus up to 1 in. (2°5 cm.) in diameter,
broadly conico-convex to convex, umbonate, frosted with granules or fine warts
and slightly rugose, Yellow Ochre to Ochraceous Tawny (pl. xv.). Gills adnate
to adnexed or sinuately adnexed, moderately close, creamy-white to pure white.
Stem up to 14 in. (3-7 cm.) high, covered with yellowish-buff granules up to a
little below the gills, forming here a more or less definite ring, browner than
Tawny to Buckthorn Brown (pl. xv.). Spores elliptical, oblique, not thick-walled,
5°5 to 653-2 to 3-5 ». Amongst moss on shady banks, etc. S.A.—Greenhill
Road, July, 1921 (Miss Buxton, Watercolour No. 10, Formalin Sp, No. 324) ;
Mount Lofty, June, 1921; National Park, July, 1923.

An albino plant was found near a normal one on the Greenhill Road in August,
1922. The pileus was white with a faint tinge only of buff, the stem white,
smooth, and slightly striate above the superior ring, mealy-white below, and the
spores 6°54 p.

459. Mycena subvulgaris,n.sp. Pileus to Zin. (10 to 21 mm.) in diameter,
convex, umbilicate, striate, margin at first straight, near Fuscous (pl. xlvi.), young
plants between Buffy Brown and Olive Brown (pl. xl.). Gills adnate to adnato-
decurrent, in four tiers, the second tier reaching nearly half-way to the stem, the
third tier very short, whitish, then with a slight greyish tint. Stem 14 to 2 ins.
(3°7 to 5 cm.) high, slender, very glutinous, slightly strigose at the base, hollow,
the lower portion paler than the pileus (near Drab, pl. xlvi.}, whitish above. Flesh

300

of pileus very thin, dark coloured like the surface, with a triangular cavity below
the umbilicus. Spores narrow, 8X3-7 ». Gregarious to subcaespitose. Amongst
leaves and small sticks on the ground. S.A.—National Park, May 28, 1927.
(Formalin Sp. No. 389.)

Apparently the Australian representative of Mycena vulgaris, (Pers.) Fr.,
but tending to be larger and darker in colour, without a definite papilla, and with
the pileus not definitely viscid. Cooke’s Illustrations (pl. 191) are not very like
our plants.

460. Clitocybe brunneo-ceracea, n. sp. Pileus up to 14 in. (3-7 em.) in
diameter, thin, the edge turned in when young, irregularly convex with an
umbilicus, then moderately depressed, sometimes gibbous in the depressed centre,
the edge faintly striate, innately silky-fibrillose, when moist near Buffy Brown
(pl. x1.) and moist looking, waxy-semitranslucent, markedly hygrophanous, drying
to pallid or dingy whitish with a buffy tint, the drying commencing from near the
centre, the centre sometimes remaining for a while buffy brown shading to dark
brown. Gills moderately decurrent, close, narrow, many short, edges rather
thick, sometimes with venose buttresses between the gills, pallid greyish-brown,
much paler than Drab (pl. xlvii.). Stem up to 14 in. (3-7 cm.) high, usually
slender, sometimes flattened, fibrillose, extensively hollow, coloured like the pileus
but paler. Flesh under the pileus moist-looking brown, in the centre of the pileus
white, in the stem pale brown. Spores narrow, 5'5 to 62-2 ». Cystidia not
seen. Slight phosphorus-like smell. Amongst dead leaves and sticks. S,A—
National Park, July.

Resembles C. paraditopa, Clel. et Cheel, but lacks the strong wattle scent
and is less robust. The specific name refers to the semi-translucent waxy (or
soapy) appearance of the brownish pileus when moist.

461. Clilocvbe peraggregata, n. sp. Sometimes merismatic, the upper surfaces
irregularly infundibuliform with wavy and irregular edges showing lobes, villous,
excentrically or almost laterally attached to a stout common branching stem from
which the rather fan-shaped pilei spread out. Pileus 1 to 2 ins. (2°5 to 5 cm.)
in diameter, irregularly convex, often distorted, edge a little turned in, punctate
pruinose and breaking up on the surface into minute furfuraceous granules or
wart-like prominences, the granules darker coloured, the surface appearing as if
partly dusted with soot, colour Drab (pl. xlvi.) or lighter, paler round the peri-
phery. Gills decurrent to nearly adnate, moderately close, edges a little thick,
sometimes forked, whitish with a buffy tint or livid greyish. Stem short, 4 to
lin. (1-9 to 2°5 cm.) high, moderately stout, up to 1 in. (2:5 cm.) thick at the base,
often distorted, whitish flecked with minute greyish furfuraceous scales. Spores
obliquely elliptical, probably faintly tinted microscopically, 6°5 to 7°8X4°8 to
5°5 wu. Cystidia not seen. Flesh slightly greyish, that of the stem confluent and
homogenous with that of the pileus. Smell slightly mealy. Densely caespitose,
growing on the clay floor of a motor shed, probably from rotten wood or buried
chips. $.A.—Fullarton, Adelaide, June (1922), September (1923).

Apparently related to C. aggregata, (Schaeff.) Fr., but differing more par-
ticularly in the pruinose-furfuraceous pileus and the short stem,

462. Clitocybe semiocculta, n. sp. Pileus $ to 1 in., sometimes up to 24 ins.
(1-2 to 6-2 cm.) in diameter, at first slightly convex with inturned edge, then
sometimes expanded and upturned, often depressed over the attachment of the
stem, wavy, irregular and more or less lobed at the margin, when found growing
usually whitish to dingy whitish or pale buffy white (Cartridge Buff, pl. xxx.) or
creamy white and opaque, smooth, a little translucent when very moist, when
gathered becoming Ochraceous Buff (pl. xv.) round the edge and even browner
in the centre, herbarium specimens drying a dingy biscuit colour. Gills adnate
to sometimes slightly decurrent, close, narrow, whitish, then creamy-white. Stem

301

short, 4 to 1 in. (1°2 to 2°5 cm.) high, central to excentric or occasionally almost
lateral from the position in which it may have grown, similarly often bent, slender
or rather stout, equal or slightly attenuated downwards, pruinose, tough, hollow
above, the colour of the pileus. Flesh thin, equally attenuated outwards. Spores
nearly subspherical, 3-5 to 42-5 to 2°8 p, 4p. Sometimes caespitose. Attached
by fluffy-white mycelium to the undersides of thick sheets of fallen or stripped
bark and fallen wood on the ground beneath Eucalypts, or round the base of
stumps, the pilei often emerging with difficulty or only found after removing
superjacent litter. N.S.W—The Rock, July, 1917. S.A—Mount Lofty, June,
1927; National Park, August, 1927; Baker’s Gully, near Clarendon, Junc, 1927.
The specific name has reference to the frequency with which the pilets is often
more or less hidden under bark and dééris,

463. Pleurotus subapplicatus, n. sp. Pileus + to 2 in, (6 to 16 mm.) in
diameter, convex, becoming depressed towards the attachment, at first inverted
saucer-shaped, finally rather fan-shaped, a little repand, sometimes almost lobed,
tomentose, strigose near the attachment when large, pallid grey. Gills moderately
close, radiating from a lateral to excentric point of attachment, many short ones,
grey with a fawny tint. No definite stem. Flexible, the flesh of the pileus with
an upper dark gelatinous layer. Shed spores spherical, 6 to 7 ». On an upright
piece of rotting wood in a glass house. S.A—Blackwood, April, 1927. (Formalin
Sp. No, 388.)

This species differs from Rea’s description (British Basidiomycetes) of
P. applicatus, (Batsch.) Berk., more particularly in the gills being moderately
close and the spores being spherical (not 7 to 9X4 to 54). Kauffmann (Agari-
caceae of Michigan) says the gills of P. applicatus are subdistant, and whitish at
first, then grey, and that the spores are spherical, 4 to 5 w. ‘These descriptions
appear to refer to different species, the description of neither of which fully
agrees with that of the Australian plants. The specific name subapplicatus has
reference, however, to the obvious close relationship between our species and the
American and European ones.

464. Plewrotus cinerascens, n. sp. Laterally attached at the apex. Pileus
up to 4 in. (1'2 cm.) in diameter, convex to cupulate, dark greyish-black, hoary
round the edge, whitish and densely hoary when young. Gills radiating from an
excentric point, moderately close and numerous, many short ones at the periphery,
sometimes showing slight venose buttresses, grey. IIesh dark coloured, sub-
gelatinous. Spores 63-5 w; pileus clothed with cells and processes covered with
lateral wart-like projections, S.A— National Park, August, 1927, on trunk of
living Eucalyptus viminalis, Lab. ;

A species evidently closely related to P. applicatus and P. subapplicatus, but
characterised more particularly by the cells on the pileus, a feature not apparently
recorded in P. applicatus, from which it also differs in the gills being moderately
close and grey and in the slightly smaller spores. The shape of the spores
separates it from P. subapplicatus.

465. Russula purpureo-flava, n. sp. Pileus up to 24 ins. (5-8 cm.) in
diameter, somewhat irregular and slightly depressed, slightly sticky, cuticle peeling,
Jasper Red (pl. xiii.) to purplish-red and very dark purplish-brown (Pompeian
Red, pl. xiii,, near Mars Violet, pl. xxxvii., in parts sometimes near Dark
Vinaceous Purple, pl. xxxviii., occasionally with yellowish-brown paler areas).
Gills adnate, moderately close, rather narrow, attenuated both ways, near Naples
Yellow to Mustard Yellow (pl. xvi.). Stem 14 ins. (3°7 cm.) high, ~ in. (10
mm.) thick above, equal or attentiated downwards, surface a little rough, pithy,
pale yellowish with rosy tints to rosy, ycllowish towards the base. [lesh white
with yellow tinges, thin, attenuated outwards. Taste mild. Spores microscopic-
ally slightly tinted to yellowish, subsphercial pear-shaped, 7°5 to 10 p, 8 to

302

8:-5X6'5 to7 w. No cystidia detected on the pileus. S.A.—Mount Lofty, March
and April, 1924 (Miss Buxton, Watercolour No, 14), June and July, 1921;
Stirling West, July, 1927; Kuitpo (Sir Douglas Mawson).

466. Lactarius Clarkei, n. sp. Pileus 3 ins. (7-5 cm.) in diameter, infundi-
buliform, matt, reddish-fawn. Gills adnate, moderately close, pallid becoming
spotted and discoloured brown. Stem short, } in. (18 mm.) high, stout (9/16 in.,
16 mm.), expanded towards the pileus, attenuated downwards, solid, colour of
the pileus, milk white, Taste mild. Spores slightly angular, 8». S.A—Mount
Lofty, June, 1927. In general appearance rather resembling Russula Floctonae,
Cid, et Cheel. From its resemblance to this Russula we have named it after Miss
Flockton’s niece, Miss Phyllis Clarke, to whom we have been so much indebted
for many admirable watercolour drawings of New South Wales agarics.

467. Marasmius alveolaris, n. sp. Pileus $ in. (3 mm.) or less in diameter,
rarely more, the surface alveolar from raised ribs rimosely arranged, leaving a
polygonal cell in the centre, dark honey-coloured (near Snuff Brown, pl. xxix.),
the ribs darker. Gills adnate, distant, about 6 in number, with some venose
elevations at the periphery forming abortive gills and buttressing folds, edges
thick, pallid honey-coloured. Stem short, up to 4 in. (6 mm.), rarely more
(g in., 15 mm.), slightly pruinose, whitish above, very dark brown below, abruptly
entering the matrix. Spores white, narrow, oblique, with the ends drawn out and
acute, 10 to 13(5°5 p, 9 to 10 X3°7 wu. Hairs on the pileus and stem colourless,
straight with knobby or irregular swollen apices, 38 to 76X7°5 4, forming a villous
coat, a few present also on the edges of the gills. On bark. S.A—National
Park, May, 1925 (Formalin Sp. No. 355) and 1927, July, 1927.

468. Cantharellus rugosus, n. sp. Pileus up to 13 ins. (4°8 cm.) in diameter,
submembranaceous, irregularly convex with the centre depressed, finally often
upturned, coarsely and irregularly radiately rugose, dark brown near Natal Brown
(pl. xl.), drying paler near Wood Brown (pl. xl.). Gills adnate, rather narrow,
often very irregular with buttresses and sometimes anastomosing folds between,
when dry more vinaceous than Army Brown (pl. xl.) with a more purplish cast
when moist. Stem up to 2 ins. (5 cm.) high, slender, attenuated downwards,
villous, hollow, when dry near Buff Brown (pl. xl.), when moist dark brown,
nearly black. Flesh very thin, Spores 7 to 9X3 4m, cystidia not seen. Sug-
gestive of Marasmius, but not reviving when moistened. At the base of a stump.
S.A.—Mylor, June, 1926.

469, Cantharellus granulosus, n. sp. Pileus 2 ins. (5 cm.) in diameter,
irregularly convex to plane, sometimes upturned irregularly, repand, edge
irregular, thin, smoky-brown from minute dark-coloured granules or warts. Gills
subdecurrent, moderately close, narrow, edges rather thin, often forking towards
the periphery, sometimes crinkled and with irregular veins between, creamy in
colour with rusty stains where injured. Stem short, 4 in. (1-2 em.) high, sub-
excentric, slender, stuffed, tough, dark smoky-brown from minute granules. Flesh
of stem continuous with that of the pileus. Spores subspherical to elliptical,
95X75 pw, 7°75 wp. S.A—On ground in a swamp, Back Valley, Encounter
Bay, May, 1926.

470. Cantharellus brunneus, n. sp. Pileus about $ to $ in. (10 to 12:5 mm.)
in diameter, submembranaceous, convex, the centre wmbilicate to infundibuliform,
striate to rugose-striate, edge slightly incurved when young, semitranslucent some-
times when moist, and near Sayal Brown, Snuff Brown, or Pinkish Buff (all
pl. xxix.), becoming pale wood-brown and drying pallid with a brownish tint
(near Light Buff, pl. xv., paler than Pinkish Buff), opaque and dull. Gills deeply
decurrent, rather distant, edges thick, alternate gills short, often forked, especially
in larger specimens, with narrow irregular gills at the periphery, sometimes
venose on the sides, sometimes the branching leading to irregular cells at the

303

periphery, slightly paler than the pileus (paler than Pinkish Buff or Cinnamon
Buff), Stem 4 to 1 in. (1-2 to 2:5 cm.) high, slender, equal or slightly attenuated
upwards, smooth above, sometimes slightly pruinose below, usually solid, some-
times hollow, colour of the pileus. Flesh of the stem continuous with that of the
pileus, pallid brown when moist, whiter when dry, cortex of the stem more
cartilaginous. Spores subspherical to pear-shaped elliptical, 5:5 4p, usually
7*5X4°5 to 5°5 pw, rarely 6 to 9X3°7 to 5-5 ». Amongst moss or short grass of
on bare soil. S.A.—Greenhill Road, Mount Lofty, August, 1925; Black Hill,
July, 1923; Mount Lofty, August, 1925; Morialta, May, 1925; Mylor, June,
1926; Kinchina, August, 1925; MacDonnell Bay, S.E., May, 1925,

PINK-SPORED AGARICACEAE.

471. Leptonia virido-marginata, n. sp. Pileus 3 in. (18 mim.) in diameter,
slightly convex with the centre dimpled, clad with small fibrillose scales, edge
slightly sulcate, dark green (near Dusky Olive Green, pl. xli.). Gills slightly
sinuate with a decurrent tooth, moderately distant, alternate ones short, of a Light
Pinkish Cinnamon (pl. xli.) tint passing into dark green which edges the gills.
Stem 23 ins. (6°2 cm.) high, slender, flexuous, twisted, shining, finely punctate
above, rather tough, flesh heterogenous from that of the pileus, hollow, dark
green. Shed spores of salmony tint, microscopically angular pear-shaped, 11 to
11°57°5 y, cystidia not seen. On the ground. S.A.—Mount Lofty, June.

BROWN-SPORED AGARICACEAE,

472. Phohota rufo-fulva, n. sp, Pileus up to 14 ins. (3-7 cm.) in diameter,
at first conico-convex, then convex or irregularly convexo-plane, minutely fibrillose,
becoming subfloccose to velvety, no striae, edge a little turned in when young,
darker than Pecan Brown (pl. xxviii.) to Russet (pl. xv.), when old becoming
Tawny (pl. xv.), when moist very dark maroon-brown. Gills adnate, close or a
little distant, deep (up to 4 in., 8 mm.), somewhat ventricose, with short ones at
the periphery, of the colour of the pileus becoming more cinnamon and Argus
Brown (pl. ii.), Stem up to 14 in, (3'4 cm, high), moderately slender, fibrillose,
solid, when moist Kaiser Brown to Carob (pl. xiv.), drying pallid with tints of
the pileus. Veil white, marked when young, rupturing to leave a marked whitish
or pallid superior ring. Flesh brownish. Single or subcaepitose, the type at the
base of Lucalypts. Spores yellow-brown, obliquely elliptical, 7°5 to 9°3%5:5 Bs
hyphae of subhymeneal layer large. S.A—Burnside, July, 1925 (type); Happy
Valley, September, 1926 (spores 94°5 «); on sandy soil, Encounter Bay, May,
1926 (edges of gills a little serrate, stem hollow, spores 9 to 105-6 »).

This is possibly P. recedens, Cke. and Mass., recorded for Victoria, which is
described as golden-tawny, at length faintly striale (which our plants are not)
and with a longer stem (3 to 4 ins.).

473. Pholiota subpumila, n. sp. Pileus & io 1-4 in. (15 to 28 mm.) in
diameter, convex then becoming flattened or a little depressed, umbonate when
young, sometimes a little wavy, shining waxy-looking, dark tan. Gills adnate or
slightly decurrent, rather triangular, rather close, watery-brown. Stem 14 in.
(3°7 cm.) high, equal or slightly attenuated upwards, fibrillose, white or with a
slight tinge of the colour of the pileus. Ring subdistant, whitish, not marked.
Spore mass fuscous-brown, spores microscopically yellow-brown, oblique, 8 to
9°5X5'5 4. Growing amongst moss. S.A—Greenhill Road, June, 1926. Closely
telated to C. pumila, Fr., but larger, stem paler, gills browner, and spores a little
larger.

474. Cortinarius (Myxamicium) ruber, n. sp. Pileus and stem viscid. Pilcus
up to 2 ins. (5 cm.) in diameter, convex, then irregularly wavy and convex, sub-
gibbous, near Dragon’s Blood Red (pl. xiii.) passing into Rufous (pl. xiv.), Gills

304

slightly sinuately adnexed, moderately close, a little ventricose, Tawny Olive (pl.
xxix.). Stem up to 14 ins. (3:7 cm.) high, viscid, rather short and stout, bulbous,
up to 2 in. (17 mm.) thick below and 4 in. (1:25 cm.) above, solid or somewhat
hollow, the colour of the pileus below the remains of the veil, above whitish and
slightly striate, with some yellowish mycelium at the base and whitish rooting
mycelial strands below. Cobwebby veil yellowish-red or red, glutinous, Flesh
of the pileus white, moderately thick over the stem, thinning outwards, flesh of
the stem discoloured. Spores 9°56°5 p. S.A—Kinchina, July; Belair, July
(Miss Buxton, Watercolour No. 12).

475. Cortinarius (Myxamicium) subareinaceus, n. sp. Pileus and stem
viscid. Pileus 14 to 34 ins. (4°6 to 8°7 cm.) in diameter, convex, sometimes
repand, finally irregularly upturned, edge a little turned in, sometimes substriate
round the edge, very viscid, Ochraceous Tawny (pl. xv.) becoming much darker
and shining in the centre. Gills adnate or subsinuate, moderately close, slightly
ventricose, pallid greyish-cinnamon then Tawny Olive (pl. xxix.) and darker.
Stem 14 to 3 ins. (3°7 to 7°5 cm.) high, stout, up to # in. (17 mm.) thick, equal,
mealy fibrillose, base viscid, pallid whitish becoming brownish. [Flesh slightly
brownish, when old becoming semitranslucent, thick over the disc, thin externally,
cuticle thick and dark brown. Spores oblique with pointed ends, spore mass near
Tawny Olive (pl. xxix.), 13 to 157-5 ». Under trees. S.A.—Stirling West,
July, 1927.

I:vidently a species closely related to C. (M.) arvinaceus, Fr., but differing in
being smaller, with the gills not adnate-decurrent or “straw colour, then bright
ochraceous,” and the spores smaller than 15 to 178 to 9 » (Rea).

476. Cortinarius (Myxamicium) ochraceus, n. sp. Pileus and stem very
viscid. Pileus up to 2 ins. (5 cm.) in diameter, convex, repand, finally irregu-
larly upturned, Yellow Ochre (pl. xv.), centre darker. Gills adnate, close, 4 in.
(8 mm.) deep, near Sudan Brown (pl, iii). Stem 2 ins. (5 cm.) high, $ in.
(10 mm.) thick, somewhat bulbous below, then equal, striate above, pallid
becoming yellowish-brown. Flesh soapy looking, thick over the disc, rapidly
attenuated outwards. Spores yellow-brown, 8°54 yw. On the ground amongst
leaves under trees. S.A—Mount Lofty, July, 1927.

477. Paxillus infundibuliformis, n. sp. Sometimes slender, usually large and
stout. Pileus up to 34 ins. (8:7 cm.) in diameter, irregularly infundibuliform
(shallow or deep), sometimes irregularly convex or rather flabelliform when the
stem is excentric, finely villous, tending to crack into rows of villi near the
periphery, sometimes covered with brown to very dark brown (near Russet,
pl. xv., to Mars Brown, pl. xv.) warty scales, the edge involute when young,
Ochraceous Tawny (pl. xv.), becoming Cinnamon Brown (pl. xv.), or Raw
Sienna (pl. iti.) or Light Cadmium (pl. iv.) or under the scales when present
near Honey Yellow (pl. xxx.). Gills decurrent, often deeply so, often forking
several times from near the stem, moderately close, edges a little thick, when
young near Aniline Yellow (pl. iv.), becoming Sudan Brown (pl. iii.), Ochraceous
Tawny (pl. xv.) or Clay Colour (pl. xxix.) and later still darker (e.g., Antique
Brown, pl. iii.), sometimes becoming spotted with. brown. Stem up to 14 ins,
(3-7 cm.) high, up to 4 in (1:2 cm.) thick, relatively slender, attenuated down-
wards, swollen under the pileus, villous ot somewhat mealy or even fibrillosely
scaly, stuffed or hollow, central or sometimes excentric, pallid to the colour of
the gills (base Mars Brown, pl. xv.}, sometimes with a few slightly raised brown
lines. Flesh pallid or turning reddish-brown when cut, then darker. Spores
mummy-shaped, elongated, yellow-brown to greenish-yellow, usually 12°8 to 16,
occasionally 214 to 7 yw. Cystidia not seen. S.A.—Kuitpo, May; Mount
Lofty, April to July. Vict—-Sedgwick, near Ararat, July (E. J. Semmens, No.
126), and near Bendigo.

305

PURPLE-SPORED AGARICACEAE.,

478. Psilocybe subaeruginosa, n. sp. Pileus 3 to 2 ins. (1°8 to 5 cm.) in
diameter, when young conical to conico-convex, then convex, and usually a little
upturned, subgibbous or sometimes with a small acute umbo, smooth, periphery
a little striate, edge inturned when young, hygrophanous, pale brownish to dark
brown when older, often with bluish-green blotches, drying pallid biscuity-
brownish (Tawny Olive, pl. xxix., or yellower than Warm Buff, pl. xv., when
dry; Dresden Brown, pl. xv.; Dusky Green Blue, pl. xx., when dry near Cinnamon
Buff, pl. xxix., or paler; Saccardo’s Umber to Bister, pl, xxix., when dry near
Cream Colour, pl. xvi). Gills adnate to broadly adnexed sometimes with lines
running down the stem, moderately close, slightly ventricose, in three scrics, the
middle one reaching half-way to the stem, pallid smoky-brown becoming brownish-
fuscous (ncar Natal Brown, pl. xl., when old; Snuff Brown, pl. xxix.; Fuscous,
pl. xlvi). Stem tall, 2 to 5 ins. (5 to 12°5 cm.) high, equal or slightly attenuated
upwards, rather slender, finely striate, mealy above, fine fibrils sometimes adherent
below, base a little swollen passing sometimes into a broad mass of white mycelium,
stuffed with white, sometimes hollow, cartilaginous, flesh heterogenous from that
of the pileus, pallid whitish streaked with dark greyish-brown and often blotched
with greenish-blue (Prussian Green, pl. xix., or a little paler; Dusky Green Blue,
pl. xx.). Closed with a cobwebby whitish veil when young, occasionally leaving
indefinite traces of a somewhat superior ring. Flesh of pileus whitish, of stem
becoming brownish, No smell. Spores in the mass purplish-fuscous, rather
elliptical, microscopically dark brown to dull purplish-brown, 11 to 146'4 to 9 p.
Single or gregarious, amongst grass, once on horse-dung. S.A.—National Park,
April, May, June, August; Mount Lofty, June, July; Waterfall Gully, June.
Vict-—Among growth of red-gum coppice near decaying leaves and twigs near a
creek, Craigie, near Ararat, June (E. J. Semmens, No. 31). N.S.W.—Fitzroy
Falls, June. Apparently this same species, with an acute umbo, has been found
at the base of a stump on wood or roots at Mount Wilson (June, 1915), and on
a fallen trunk at National Park, N.S.W. (May, 1919; spores dark brown,
10°5x6°8 p»).

479. Psilocybe stercicola, n. sp. This tall, slender-stemmed, dung-inhabiting
Psilocybe has puzzled us for long. From its habitat—cow and horse dung—it
was evidently an introduced species, and yet it was not one of the British species
(Ps. coprophila, (Bull) Fr., and Ps. bullacea, (Bull.) Fr.) so growing. It
resembled more closely Ps. foenisecii, (Pers.) Fr. At last we found that Kauff-
mann (The Agaric. of Michigan, 1., p. 277) had referred an American dung-
inhabiting Psilocybe to Ps. uda, (Fr.) Bat., a species described as living amongst
sphagnum. Our plants agree well with his description but do not resemble
Cooke’s Illustration of Ps. uda, Though we think it very probable that our plants
are the same as Kauffmann’s, we do not think that they are referable to Ps. uda,
and so we have been compelled to give them a new name.

Pileus 3/16 to (rarely) 14 in. (*5 to 3 cm.) in diameter, convex, subgibbous
or with a small or acute umbo, then expanding, somewhat sticky when moist, edge
often striate when moist, hygrophanous, when moist dark brown (near Prout’s
Brown, pl. xv.; Bistre, pl. xxix.; or Sepia, pl. xxix.), when dry pale brownish
(Clay Colour, pl, xxix.; Antimony Yellow, pl. xv.; Pinkish Buff, pl. xxix.; or
Cinnamon Buff, pl. xxix.). Gills ascending, adnate, moderately close, slightly
ventricose, Fuscous (pl. xlvi.), edges sometimes paler. Stem up to 2 ins. (5 cm.)
high, slender, slightly flexuose, slightly striate, slightly mealy, sometimes with
woolly mycelium at the base, usually hollow, sometimes stuffed, pallid with a slight
brownish tint to brownish. Spores elliptical, dark purplish brown to porphyry,
12to 14:57 to 8p. Always on dung (cow or horse}. N.S.W.—National Park,
May, July; The Spit, July; Lane Cove, May; The Oaks, June; The Rock, July;

306

Terrigal, June. Vict—Ararat, May (E. J. Semmens, No. 23). S.A.—National
Park, May (Miss Fiveash, Watercolour No. 7), July, August; Mount Lofty,
March, July; Kuitpo, May.

480 (see i, 69, as Ps. bullacea). Psilocybe coprophila, (Bull.) Fr. We
have recorded Ps. bullacea, (Bull.) Fr. (Journ. Roy. Soc. N.S. Wales, 1914,
p. 438), and in thesc Transactions, for New South Wales and South Australia.
The spores of the plants so recorded are, however, too large for this species,
according to the measurements given by Rea (Brit. Basidiomyc., p. 365), and our
plants would seem to agree closely with his description of Ps, coprophila. In our
plants we note that the edge of the pileus is often whitish from remains of the veil,
that the pilcus is often slightly striate when moist, and that we have got spore
measurements up to 16». Our plants always grow on dung. We have the
following localities additional to those given by us previously under Ps. bullacea:
N.S.W.—Narrabri, May; Kendall, August; Junee, October. S.A—Kinchina,
July; Beaumont, August.

481. Psilocybe subammophila, n. sp. Pileus 1 in. (2°5 cm.) in diameter,
convex, subgibbous, sometimes slightly striate when moist and a little rugulose
and shining when dry, edge a little turned in when young, hygrophanous, dark
brown when moist, becoming near Cinnamon Buff (pl. xxix.) Gills adnate,
slightly ventricose, moderately close, becoming near Warm Sepia (pl. XXIx.).
Stem long, up to 3 ins. (7-5 cm.) high, slightly attenuated upwards, slender,
fibrillose, solid, the lower half buried, thickened and sand-encrusted, pallid with a
brownish tint. Spores fuscous, elliptical, oblique, 11 to 135-5 to 6 #, no cystidia
seen. $.A.—In sandy soil, near Kinchina, May, 1926. (Formalin Sp. No. 357.)
Closely related to Ps. ammophila, (Dur. and Mont.) Fr., differing in the longer
stem, the gills adnate not subdecurrent with a tooth, the spores slightly narrower
and the location sandy agricultural land, not sands on the sea-shore,

BLACK-SPORED AGARICACEAE.

482. Psathyrella subprona, n. sp. Pileus % in, (1-2 cm.) broad, 3 in. (10 mm. )
high, conico-campanulate with-an acute apex, drying an opaque pallid whitish with
fine anastomosing striae, greyer when moist. Gills ascending a little, adnate,
moderately close, clouded fuscous-grey. Stem 1 to 1} in. (2°53 to 3-7 cm.) high,
slender, slightly mealy, then polished, slightly hollow, somewhat brittle, white.
Flesh thin, that of the stem different in texture from the flesh of the pileus. Spores
nearly black, elliptical, 158 yp. Usually single, in grass by the roadside.
Encounter Bay, August 28, 1927. These plants differ from Rea’s description of
Ps. prona, Fr., in British Basidiomycetae in being conico-campanulate with an
acute apex rather than campanulate then hemispherical, in the pileus not being
pellucidly striate and obsoletely silky-atomate, and in the gills being moderately
close, not distant, and in the stem not being flexuose. Recognised by its small size,
regular pileus, thin flesh, pallid colour, fuscous-grey gills, nearly black large spores,
and habitat amongst grass. Our plants resemble closely Cooke’s Illustration,
pl. 656, of Ps. prona.

307

THE FAUNA OF KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
(Under the aegis of the Fauna and Flora Board.)

No. 1—THE CRUSTACEA.

By Hersert M. Hate, Zoologist, South Australian Museum.
(Contribution from the South Australian Museum.)

fRead October 13, 1927.]

The species listed herein were taken on the shores of Kangaroo Island, or
in the vicinity. Sir Joseph Verco, when dredging in Investigator Strait, operated
off Cape Borda, off the north-western coast of the island, etc. A few species
were dredged near the island by the F.1.S, “Endeavour,” and were dealt with by
Rathbun, Chilton, and Schmitt,“ while Tattersall recently recorded two opossum-
shrimps.‘2) Many of the Crustacea enumerated were obtained during visits of
officers of the Fauna and Flora Board and of the Museum. In 1926, Mr. N. B.
Tindale and the author spent a month on the island, and some days were devoted
to marine collecting on the north and south coasts. The Bay of Shoals, on the
north coast, proved a fertile collecting ground; this bay is well protected and
extremely shallow, so that at low tide a huge area of mud flat is exposed.’ The
original site of the township of Kingscote is at Reeves’ Point, on the shore of the
Bay; the township at Beare’s Point, a mile to the south, was established in 1883
and named Queenscliffe, but for about twenty-three years this newer settlement
has been known as Kingscote.

Order STOMATOPODA.
Family SQUILLIDAE.
LYSIOSQUILLA PERPASTA, Hale.
Beare’s Point (type locality).

Order DECAPODA,
Family PENEIDAE.
PENEUS LATISULCATUS, Kishinouye.
Bay of Shoals (C. E. Ewens) ; off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour”).
The colouration of a living specimen was as follows :—Semi-translucent,
the whole body lightly dotted with violet; rostrum and antennal scales streaked
and spotted with violet. Median ridge of fourth to sixth pleon segments, and
median ridges of telson, almost black, narrowly margined with yellow. Posterior
parts of branches of uropods blue, anterior portions delicate green; marginal
hairs orange. Legs and pleopods tinged with pink; greater part of merus and
carpus blue in the last three pairs of legs.

Family SYNALPHEIDAE.

CRANGON vILLosus (Olivier).
Beare’s Point, in crevices on limestone reef (W. H. Anderson).

(1) Biol. Res. Endeavour, v., pt. 1, 1918; v., pt. 2, 1921; v., ot. 3, 1923; and v., pt. 6, 1926.
(2) Tatt., Rec. S. Austr. Mus,, iii., 1927, pp. 242 and 249.
(3) Hale, S. Austr. Nat., vii., 1926, p. 70, fig. 1.

308

CRANGON PRAEDATOR (de Man),
Beare’s Point (Capt. Brown and A. Zietz).

CRANGON EDWaARDsI (Audouin).

Bay of Shoals, in burrows in soft mud (Hale and Tindale).

Even this small species can snap its large chela with surprising loudness.
When a couple of specimens were placed in a bottle of sea-water the sharp clicks
which they produced conveyed the impression that the glass had suddenly cracked.
A very similar sound was made by sharply rapping the vessel with a metal tool.

CRANGON NOVAE-ZELANDIAE (Miers).
Beare’s Point, under stones (A. Zietz, Ilale and Tindale).

DYNALPHEUS MACCULLOCHI (Coutiére).
Beare’s Point, under stones (Hale and Tindale).
+

Brragzus AUSTRALIS, Stimpson.
Beare’s Point, under stones (Hale and Tindale).
These examples were purplish-brown dorsally, with the sides of the body and
tips of the uropoda white.
Fanuly HIPPOLYTIDAE.
ALOPE AUSTRALIS, Baker.

Smith’s Bay (type loc., R. Baker); north coast (W. H. Baker).

HIProLyTE TENUIROSTRIS (Spence Bate).
Caradina tenuirostris, S. Bate, Proc. Zool. Soc., 1863, p. 501, pl. xt, fig. 4.
Caridina tenwirostris, Hasw., Cat. Austr. Crust., 1882, p. 183.
Hippolyte tenwirostris, Hale, Crust. S. Austr., 1927, p. 51, fig. 43.
Bay of Shoals, 4 fath., amongst Posidonia (Hale and Tindale).
The rostrum of this small species is slender, with two or three tecth (almost
always three) on the upper margin, and usually one or two on the lower edge near

Fig. 1.
a, Third maxilliped; b, first leg, and c, second leg of Hippolyte tenuirostris (x 60).

309

the apex; sometimes ventral teeth are entirely absent. The abdomen is humped
at the third segment, this geniculation being accentuated in preserved examples.
The arm of the first peraeopods is about as long as the hand, which is longer than
the wrist (36:26); the dactylus is slightly shorter than the palm. The wrist of
the second legs is longer than the arm, with the proportions of the first, second,
and third joints, 27:12:22; the hand is somewhat longer than the second and
third joints of the wrist together, with the dactylus almost as long as the palm.
The largest specimen examined is 12 mm. in length.

Family PALAKMONIDAE.
LEANDER INTERMEDIUS, Stimpson.
Bay of Shoals and Beare’s Point, amongst weed near shore (Ilale and
Tindale).
LEANDER SERENUS, Heller.

Bay of Shoals, amongst weed near shore (Hale and Tindale) ; Vivonne Bay,
in rock pools (F. Wood Jones and E. R. Waite).

PALAEMON AUSTRALIS, Ortmann.
Fresh-water on Kangaroo Island, no definite locality (A. Zietz).

Family PALINURIDAE,
Jasus LaLanpit (M. Edwards).
Vivonne Bay (Hale and Tindale),

Family PORCELLANIDAE.
PoRCELLANA DISPAR, Stimpson.

Porcellana dispar, Stitmps., Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Philad., x., 1858, p. 242 (80), and Smith-
son, Misc. Coll, xlix., 1907, p. 190, pl. xxiii, fig. 3; Hasw., Cat. Austr. Crust., 1882, p. 149;
Miers, Zool, “Alert,” 1884, p. 275, pl. xxx., fig. C; McCull, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xxxi.,
1906, p 40; Rath., Arkiv. f. Zool., K. Svenska Vet.-Akad., xvi., No. 23, 1924, p. 31; Hale, Crust.
S. Austr., 1927, p. 82, fig. 79.

Porcellana rostrata, Baker, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xxix., 1905, p. 260, pl. xxv., figs.
1, la and 10.

Investigator Strait, 17 fath. (Sir J. Verco); Kangaroo Island (W. H.
Baker).
Mr. Baker now considers that his P. rostrata cannot be specifically separated

from P. dispar.
Family AXTIDAE.

Axius (NEAXIUS) PLECTORHYNCHUs, Strahl.

Beare’s Point, under stones on reef (iIale and Tindale).
As previously noted,“ two varieties occur; both were taken on the reef.

Family CALLIANASSIDAE.,
Upocesia simsonrt (Thomson).
Emu Ray (R. Baker); Beare’s Point (Tlale and Tindale); Vivonne Bay
(F. Wood Jones and E. R. Waite).
At Beare’s Point this species was found burrowing deeply in the sand where
pools were left by the receding tide.

UPpocEBIA (GERIOPSIS) BOWFERBANKIT, Miers.
Investigator Strait and Backstairs Passage (Sir J. Werco).

4) Hale, Crust. S. Austr., 1927, p. 84.

310

Family PAGURIDAE.
PaGuRISTES FRONTALIS (M. Edwards).
Bay of Shoals and Beare’s Point (Hale and Tindale); north coast (W. H.
Baker and A. Zietz).
PAGURISTES SULCATUS, Baker.

Beare’s Point (Fox and Wiese).

Family DROMIIDAE,
CRYPTODROMIA OCTODENTATA (Haswell).

Bay of Shoals (Hale and Tindale); American Beach (M. Le Ray); off
Marsden Point, 17 fath., and off Sanders Bank, 28 fath. (“Endeavour”).

In the Bay of Shoals small examples, without sponge or other cloak, were
found in between large masses of Ascidians. One specimen taken elsewhere in
the Bay, and of approximately the same size (about three-fourths oi an inch in
breadth), carried a piece of Ulva over its back.

Dromipiopsis EXCAVATA (Stimpson).
Off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour”).

DROMIA BICAVERNOSA, Zietz.
Hog Bay (type loc., H. Bates and A. Rumbail).

PETALOMERA LATERALIS (Gray).
Beare’s Point, under stones on reef (Hale and Tindale).

Family HY MENOSOMATIDAE.
HALICARCINUS OVATUS, Stimpson.

Bay of Shoals and Beare’s Point, on Algae in shallow water (Ilale and
Tindale); Vivonne Bay (F. Wood Jones and E. R. Waite).

Haricarcinus rostratus (Haswell).
North coast of Kangaroo Island (A. Zietz).

ELAMENA (JRIGONOPLAX) UNGUIFORMIS LONGTROSTRIS, McCulloch.

North coast (coll. ?).
Family MAJIDAE. .

NAXIA AURITA (Latreille).
Beare’s Point (Hale and Tindale) ; Vivonne Bay (F. Wood Jones and E. R.
Waite); Backstairs Passage (Sir J. Verco).

Naxia TuMipaA (Dana).
Vivonne Bay (Hale and Tindale).

: EPuHIPPIAS ENDEAVOURI, Rathbun.
South of Kangaroo Island, Investigator Strait (‘Endeavour’).

EruMA HISPIDUM (Baker).
Investigator Strait (Sir J. Verco).
The five syntypes of this species are from Port Willunga, Port Lincoln, and
the above locality; as the specimens are associated in the collection it is not
possible to assign a definite locality to any one of them.

311

HueEnta proteus, de Haan.
Backstairs Passage (Sir J. Verco).
The weed Halimeda, with which this crab is commonly associated in the
tropics, has been found near the shores of Kangaroo Island.

LEPTOMITURAX AUSTRALIENSIS, Miers.
Beare’s Point, under stones at low tide (Hale and Tindale) ; Cape Marsden
and off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour”).

LrPTOMITHRAX STERNOCOSTULATUS (M. Edwards),
Investigator Strait, 20-30 fath. (Sir J. Verco) ; Cape Marsden, 17 fath., and
north of Cape Borda, 40 fath. (‘Endeavour’).

SCHIZOPHRYS ASPERA (M. Edwards).
Investigator Strait, 20-30 fath. (Sir J. Verco).

PARAMICIPPA TUBERCULOSA, M. Edwards.
Vivonne Bay (Hale and Tindale).

Family PARTHENOPIDAE.
THYROLAMBRUS EXCAVATUS, Baker,
Investigator Strait (Sir J. Verco).

Family PORTUNIDAE.
OVvALIPEs BIPUSTULATUS (M. Edwards).
Vivonne Ray, 2-3 fath. (Hale and Tindale).

LrocaRcCINUS CORRUGATUS (Pennant).
Investigator Strait, 20 fath. (Sir J. Verco).

NECTOCARCINUS INTEGRIFRONS (Latreille),
Beare’s Point (Hale and Tindale).

NECTOCARCINUS TURERCULOSUS, M. Edwards.
Vivonne Bay (Hale and Tindale).

Family XANTHIDAE.,
MEGAMETOPE ROTUNDIFRONS (M. Edwards).
Investigator Strait, 20-30 fath. (Sir J. Verco).

ACTAEA PERONIL (M. Edwards).
Investigator Strait, 20 fath. (Sir J. Verco); Sanders Bank, 28 fath., off
Marsden Point, 17 fath., and north of Cape Borda, 40 fath. (“Endeavour”),

ACTAFA CALCULOSA (M. Edwards).

Investigator Strait (Sir J. Vereo); north coast of Kangaroo Island (W. H.
Baker); off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour’’).

Ozius TRUNcATUs, M. Edwards.

Beare’s Point, under stones at low tide (Hale and Tindale) ; Vivonne Bay
(F. Wood Jones and E. R. Waite).

312

PILUMNUS TOMENTOSUS, Latreille.

Beare’s Point (Hale and Tindale); north coast of Kangaroo Island (A.
Zietz); off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour”).

PILUMNUS FISSIFRONS, Stimpson.

Bay of Shoals, 4 fath., on weed, and Beare’s Point (Hale and Tindale) ;
Vivonne Bay (F. Wood Jones and E. R. Waite).

ACTUMNUS sETIFER (de Haan).

Investigator Strait and Backstairs Passage (Sir J. Verco); off Marsden
Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour”).

LITOCHEIRA BISPINOSA, Kinahan.

Bay of Shoals, on weed near shore (Hale and Tindale); Vivonne Bay
(F. Wood Jones and E. R. Waite).

Family PINNOTHERIDAE.
PINNOTHERES SUBGLOBOSA, Baker.
Off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour”). .

Family GRAPSIDAE.

CycCLOGRAPSUS AUDOUINII, M. Edwards.

Bay of Shoals. under stones; Beare’s Point, on reef; Busby Island, in holes
in moist mud; Vivonne Bay, under stones on banks of Harriet River, 4 mile
from mouth, and in a cave (Hale and Tindale); American River (J. Waddy);
north coast of Kangaroo Island (A. Zietz).

PARAGRAPSUS GAIMARDH, M. Edwards.
Bay of Shoals, under stones (Hale and Tindale).

BraAcHYNOTUS ocropENTATUS (M. Edwards).

Vivonne Bay, under stones on banks of Harrict River, } mile from mouth,

and in burrows near mouth of Harriet River (Hale and Tindale).
Juvenile examples were taken under stones, old males in the burrows; the
habits of these adults are described elsewhere.‘

ERiOCHEIR spinosus (M. Edwards).

Heterograpsus spinosus, M. Edw., Ann. Sci. Nat., xx., 1853, p. 194, and Journ. Mus.
Godeff., iv., 1874, p. 6; de Man, Notes Leyden Mus., xiii, 1891, p. 56, pl. iv., fig. 15; Ortmann,
Zool. Jahrb., vii, 1894, p. 715.

Brachynotus spinosus, Fulton and Grant, Proc. Roy. Soc. Vict., xix., 1906, p. 19.

Eriocheir spinosus, Hale, Crust. S. Austr., 1927, p. 184, fig. 185.

Bay of Shoals, under stones on beach, and Busby Island, in holes in moist
mud (Hale and Tindale).

This specics is referred to Eriocheir in the abovementioned handbook, and a
female is there illustrated. The chelipeds are short and weak in this sex, longer
and much more robust in the male. The palms of adult males are not furnished
with cuffs of hair as in the genotype of Eriocheir, but, as mentioned by de Man

(S) Hale, Crust. S. Austr. 1927, p. 182, figs. 183 and 184.

313

(ut supra), both fingers are provided with hairs on each side; these hairs are
densely plumose. In some males they are arranged in tufts, in others they are
very dense and resemble fur; in a few cases the clothing of the immovable finger
extends backwards on to the palm for a short distance. The chelipeds are
unarmed, but the merus of each ambulatory limb has a small! spine near the distal
end of the upper margin. The exopod of the external maxillipeds is only one-
third the width of the ischium; the merus is subcordate, slightly wider than, but

Fig. 2

a, Outside, and b, inside of hand of adult male of Hriocheir spinosus with
carapace 17 mm. in breadth (x 4).

only three-fourths the length of, the ischium. The largest male examined has a
carapace 17 mm. in length and 20 mm. in breadth.

This little crab is common in Victoria, Tasmania, and South Australia; it is
found along the banks of estuarine rivers (as well as on beaches and tidal flats),
but apparently never enters [resh water above tidal influence. Mr. F, A. McNeill
informs me that some specimens from “North Coast of Tasmania” labelled by
Haswell “Heterograpsus octodentatus” are referable to E. spinosus; he suggests
that very probably Haswell’s SH sleragrapsus octodentatus,”’ from Port Phillip,
was also E. spinosus.\©

PLAGUSIA CHABRUS (linnaeus).

Vivonne Bay, common in shallow water (Hale and Tindale).

Family LEUCOSHDAE.

PriLyra LAEvis, Bell.

Bay of Shoals, on mud in shallow water (Hale and Tindale); American
River (A. Zietz), Queenscliffe (Fox and Wiese).

The habits of this species, as observed in the Bay of Shoals, are described
in another paper.
PHLYXIA INTERMEDIA, Miers.
Off Marsden Point, 17 fath. (“Endeavour’).

Order AMPHIPODA.

Many species other than the few listed below remain to be recorded from
Kangaroo Island.

(6) Hasw., Cat. Austr. Crust., 1882, p. 101.
(7) Hale, S. Austr. Nat., vii, 1926, p. 67.

314
Family LYSIANASSIDAE,

WALDECKTA KROYERT (White),
Ephippiphora kroyeri, Chilt., Boil. Res. “Endeavour,” v., 1921, p. 35, figs. la-1i (syn.).
North coast of Kangaroo [sland (Capt. Brown).

This large species is not uncommon in South Australian waters; Chilton
examined specimens from Bass Strait and west of Eucla.

WALDECKIA CHEVREUXI, Stebbing.
Sanders Bank, 28 fath. (“Endeavour’’).

Family STENOTITOIDAE.

STENOTHOE VALIDA, Dana.

Vivonne Bay, 2 fath. (Hale and Tindale).
A specimen from the above locality is illustrated. The life colouration of
examples collected was as follows :—Yellow, closely dotted with dark brown over

Fig. 3.
Stenothoe valida (x 16).

greater part of body; first of the visible side plates yellowish and almost trans-
parent anteriorly, and dark brown posteriorly, the two colour areas separated
by a vertical sooty marking.

Family GAMMARIDAE.
MELITA FRESNELIT (Audouin).

Sanders Bank, 28 fath. (‘‘Endeavour’).

CERADOCUS RUBROMACULATUS (Stimpson).
Vivonne Bay (Tale and Tindale).

Family DEXAMINIDAE.

PoLYCHERIA ANTARCTICA (Stebbing).
Sanders Bank, 28 fath. (“Endeavour”).

315

Family TALITRIDAE.
TALORCHESTIA NOVAE-HOLLANDIAE, Stebbing.

Common on beaches (Hale and Tindale).

Family PHOTIDAE.,
EURYSTHEUS ATLANTICUS (Stebbing).
Sanders Bank, 28 fath. (“Endeavour”).

Family JASSIDAE.
Icitrus ausTratis, Haswell.
Sanders Bank, 28 fath. (“Endeavour’’).

Family CAPRELLIDAE.
CAPRELLA scAuRA, Templeton.
Vivonne Bay, 2-3 fath. (Hale and Tindale).

Order ISOPODA.
Family EURYDICIDAE.,
CIROLANA CRANCHII AUSTRALIENSE, Hale.

Vivonne Bay, 1 fath., on meat trap (Hale and Tindale).

Family CYMOTHOIDAE.
CopoNoPHiLus IMBRICATUS (Fabricius).
Bay of Shoals (Hale and Tindale).

A free-swimming juvenile was captured. Other Cymothoid species must
occur.

Family TDOTEIDAE.
EvuIpoTEA PERoNu (M, Edwards).
Bay of Shoals, on weed in shallow water; Beare’s Point, under stones at low
tide, and Vivonne Bay, 2-3 fath. (Hale and Tindale).
Eumorea stricta (Dana).

Shores of Kangaroo Island (old collection).

EUIDOTEA BAKERY (Collinge).
Beare’s Point, on limestone reef (Hale and Tindale).

Examples taken there were dark or pale grcen, with the body broadly
margined with white, and a series of white markings on the mid-line of the thorax.

316

EurpoTea, Collinge.
Euidotea caeruleotincta, n. sp.

%. Non-ovigerous. Body slender, nearly eight times as long as greatest
width, and very depressed. Surface slightly rugose, dull and not at all polished.
Cephalon about as wide as long, almost flat and with antero-lateral angles
prominent. Eyes rather large, distinctly elevated. First antennae reaching to end
of second peduncular article of second antennae; second and third articles, and
flagellum, subequal in length. Second antennae less than half as long as body,
with the peduncle slender and much longer than flagellum; first article short,
visible in dorsal view; second about three-fourths as long as third, which is sub-
equal in length to fourth; flagellum composed of nine articles and a minute
terminal style. Outer lobe of first maxillae capped with cleven strong spines,
most of which are more or less denticulate, some being conspicuously comb-like

Fig. 4.

Enidotea cacrulcotincta, type female (x 3): a, first antenna (x 15); b, second antenna

(x 8); ¢, terminal part of outer lobe of first maxillae (x 86); d, one of the spines from

outer lobe of first maxilla (x 260): e, maxilliped (x 21); f and g, first and seventh
peracopods (x 15).

(fig. 4, d) ; inner lobe narrow, with three setose spines. Maxillipeds broad, with
four-jointed palp; basis almost as long as last article (fourth and fifth fused
joints of the palp), with inner lobe moderately wide, with spines at distal end;
epipod about as long as basis, exclusive of inner lobe. Peracon with a low but
distinct longitudinal median ridge; each segment rather angular. First segment
narrow and short, second much larger; third segment larger than any of the
others; fourth to seventh segments successively decreasing in size; postero-lateral
angles of all segments slightly produced backwards, those of the last four somites
subacute. Coxae of first legs completely fused with first free peracon segment ;
those of second to seventh legs small, scarcely at all expanded, but visible in
dorsal view. Peraeopods slender, prehensile, successively increasing in length

317

backwards, the first pair two-thirds as long as the last. Pleon narrow, tapering
to an acute apex, very flat, and with a low median ridge; unisegmentate, with a
rather obscure indication of a suture across the surface near the base, and two
pairs of exceedingly ill-defined short lateral furrows. Uropoda narrow, with
hinder margins obliquely truncate; endopod rounded postero-laterally. Length,
23-5 mm.

Loc—South Australia: Bay of Shoals, Kangaroo Island (H. M. Hale and
N. B. Tindale). Type in South Australian Muscum, Reg, No. C 869.

This species lives on the broad strap-shaped leaves of a large variety of
Posidonia australis, which grows thickly in shallow water on the north coast of
Kangaroo Island. ‘The very flat body of the crustacean enables it to cling closely
adpressed to the leaves of this plant; Crabyzos longicaudatus was taken in the
same situation. The animal is variable in general colouration, being graminaceous,
yellow or rich purplish-brown during life; some examples were beautifully
mottled with the last colour, the dorsum of the pleon was crossed by four irregular
pale bars, and the second antennae were broadly banded with purple. In one
respect, however, all specimens agree; there is always an iridescent blue spot at
the middle of the hinder part of each peraeon segment and one at the first third
of the pleon.,

The species of Eusyimmerus, Erichsonella, Colidotea, Synisoma, and Euidotea
have the palp of the maxilliped four-jointed and all segments of the pleon
coalesced. In the first two genera the flagellum of the second antennae is com-
posed of but a single joint, and in Colidotea the coxal plates of the second to
fourth somites are completely fused with the segments. The above species is
referred to Euidotea rather than to Synisoma because the pleura of the first
thoracic segment are scarcely produced laterally or forwards and the head has not
well-developed lateral lobes. £. bakeri and E. caerileotincta differ from the geno-
type of Euidotea in having the body longitudinally ridged.

In a key to the South Australian genera of the Idoteidae,“® I stated that in
Synischia and Crabysos the coxal plates are coalesced with the peraeon segments.
The fusion of the coxae with the body, however, is not more marked in Crabyzos
than in many other species, but these joints are not expanded into conspicuous
coxal plates. Each farms a socket into which the basis articulates and those of
the second to seventh legs are slightly overridden by the feebly developed pleura
of the thoracic segments, leaving a distinct suture. Suture lines between the
coxae and the pleura have disappeared in Synischia, etc., owing to fusion; but
this is not the condition in Crabygos, excepting, as usual, on the first segment.
The coxae of Euidotea caeruleotincta are much as in Crabygos longicaudatus;
in the last-named, however, the pleura are bent down so that the coxae are not

visible in dorsal view.

CRABYZOS LONGICAUDATUS, Spence Bate,

Bay of Shoals (Hale and Tindale).

The species was taken on the same weed as the preceding form; all specimens
seen here were, as usual, uniformly graminaceous, but recently some examples
with pale cross bands were dredged in Gulf St. Vincent.

PARIDOTEA UNGULATA (Pallas).

Beare’s Point (Hale and Tindale).
These specimens, which were taken on Ulva, were graminaceous in colour.

(8) Hale, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xlvyiti., 1924, p. 214.

318

PENTIDOTEA AUSTRALIS, Hale.

Pentidotea australis, Hale, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xlviti.. 1924, p. 220, fig. 8.

The holotype, a male, was taken on the shores of Kangaroo Island. As this
example lacks the greater part of the second antennae, I take the opportunity of
describing a female collected this year in Portland, Victoria, by Mr. H. W. Davey.
This female has well-developed young in the brood-pouch. The body is wider
than in the male, four and one-half times as long as greatest width, and is widest
at the third and fourth peraeon segments. The whole upper surface of the body
is covered with almost confluent brown dots; the legs and the underside are
marked with distinctly separated brown spots. The second antennae of the right
side is abnormal; the flagellum of the left antenna is short and consists of four-
teen articles and a terminal style. Other characters are as in the example
previously recorded. The juveniles in the marsupium are approximately 5 mm.
in length. They have the head wider than the thorax, and the eyes relatively

Fig. 5.

Pentidotea australis, adult female (x 12).

larger and more protuberant than in the adult. The flagellum of the second
antennae consists of two articles and a minute terminal style. Length of female,
50 mm.

Family SPHAEROMIDAE.

ExoSPHAEROMA BIcoLor, Baker.

Exosphaeroma bicolor, Baker, Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1, 1926, p. 249, pl. li, figs. 8-10,
and pl. hii, figs. 1-5,

Bay of Shoals (type loc., Hale and Tindale). :

The holotype and a number of paratypes were collected off Reeves’ Point in
shallow water, most of the specimens being taken in places where the bottom
consists of broken shell. When crawling over, or resting on, débris of this sort,
the animals were difficult to detect owing to their protective colouration. The
legs and underside were white, but the upper surface was variable in colour;
seven colour varieties were noted in the series secured. During life the dorsum
of these was (a) uniformly greyish-black; (b) brown, with a white stripe on

319

each lateral margin of thorax; (c) greyish-blue, broadly margined with white
and with a ycllow stripe on whole length of mid-line of body, interrupted for a
short space at first third of pleon; (d) uniformly pale grey; (e) white, with
large brown mottlings on mid-line of thorax and at base of pleon; (f) white,
more or less densely covered with fine brown mottlings excepting on margins;
(g) uniformly white.

Fig. 6.

Exosphaeroma bicolor, attitude when alarmed (x 9).

The animal rolls into a sphere when disturbed, with the exopods of the
uropods directed outwards (fig. 6).

ZUZARA VENOSA (Stebbing).

Bay of Shoals, very common under stones, etc. (Hale and Tindale).

Cymopoce Loncicaupata, Baker.
Bay of Shoals, in shallow water (Hale and Tindalc).

This species was so plentiful in parts of the Bay that we were able to fill a
quart bottle with specimens after half an hour of hand dredging amongst Zostera,

PARACILICAEA ITAMATA (Baker).
Vivonne Bay, 3 fath. (Hale and Tindale).

AMPHOROIDELLA ELLIPTICA, Baker.
Beare’s Point, shallow water, on surface of living sponges (Hale and
Tindale).
The creatures moved over the surface of the sponges with a rather slow,
gliding motion, and greatly resembled small chitons. They were translucent
during life, with faint fleckings and mottlings, or were uniformly whitish.

CERCEIS ACUTICAUDATA, Haswell.
Bay of Shoals, 0-1 fath. (Hale and Tindale).

Common amongst Posidonia in the Bay. he species is dark olivaceous or
dark green during life, with head, sides of thorax, two ill-defined bars on thorax
and one on pleon, mottled and spotted with white. When taken out of water and
placed on a firm surface the animal is able to spring actively; this is accomplished
by suddenly snapping the pleopods away from the pleon, the action producing a

320

faint “click.” It swims extremely rapidly, but crawls slowly on shore; when
placed on the beach it sometimes progresses in a series of short leaps (with the aid
of the pleopods as described) or springs smartly back into the water.

ONISCOIDEA.

A new Scyphacid, which occurs commonly on sandy beaches of southern
Australia, was taken by Mr. Tindale and myself on the shores of the island; Dr.
Chillon examined specimens of this species some years ago, and intends to
describe it.

On the island are numerous inland and coastal lakes, some of which contain
permanent brackish or salt water; in some cases the water is derived directly
from the sea, in others it is not. From all accounts these lakes are very similar
to those of the mainland—weed and the mollusc Co-viella are present and so on—
but, unfortunately, we had no opportunity of visiting any of them. A scarch of
these waters may result in the capture of the interesting aquatic Oniscid Haloniscus
searlei. This species, which was first taken in a salt lake in Victoria, 1s common
in the very salt water of the Pool of Siloam at Beachport, and residents of the
south-eastern districts state that they have seen similar creatures in other salt
lakes. The Beachport specimens were recently described under the name
Philoscia salina, by Mr. Baker,“ the Victorian record being overlooked.

Family ONISCIDAE.

PoRCELLIO LAEVis, Latreille.
Kangaroo Island, no definite locality (W. H. Baker).

PoRCELLIONIDES PRUNIOSUS (Brandt).
Kangaroo Island, no definite locality (W. H. Baker).

Family ARMADILLIDIDAE,

Curnaris aMBitiosus, Budde-Lund.

Kangaroo Island, no definite locality (W. {I. Baker); Kelly Hill, at mouth
of caves (Hale and Tindale).

Family SCYPHACIDAE.
Deto marina (Chilton).
Shores of Kangaroo Island (W. H. Baker).

Family LIGIIDAE.

LIGIA AUSTRALIENSIS, Dana.
Vivonne Bay, in cave and on beach (Hale and Tindale).

A male from the above locality is figured. In this the second antennae are
distinctly longer than the whole body, exclusive of the uropods; the proportions
of the last three joints of the peduncle are 16:41:56, and the slender flagellum
consists of twenty-six elongate articles. The first two pairs of legs are impertectly
subchelate, and there is no process on the propodus of any of the anterior limbs.
The posterior margin of the telson is triangulate ; the postero-lateral processes are

(9) Chilton, Proc. Linn. Soc. N.S. Wales, xliv., 1919, p. 724, figs. 1-20.
(10) Baker, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., iii, 1926, p. 145, fig. 77.

321

short and acute, and the accessory processes are well marked, subtriangular in
shape. Length, 12 mm.

The Ligia here referred to Dana’s species is common at Vivonne Bay. A
great many individuals were uncovered when boulders were overturned in a cave
in the cliff; when disturbed the Isopods scattered in all directions and quickly

Tig. 7.
Ligia australiensis, adult male (x 5).

disappeared under the neighbouring stones and débris. Towards sunset and
during the evening hundreds of examples were noticed on rocks near the sea and
on the sandy beach, but few specimens were seen in these places during the day.

Order MYSIDACEA.
Family MYSIDAE.
AUSTRALOMYSIS INCISA, Sars.
Vivonne Bay, 3-34 fath. (Hale and Tindale).
SIRIELLA (?) AUSTRALIS, Tattersall,
Bay of Shoals, 4 fath. (Hale and Tindale).

Order CIRRIPEDIA.
LEPAS ANSERIFERA, Linnaeus.
Vivonne Bay, on beach (Hale and Tindale).

LEpAS HILLIt (Leach).
Vivonne Bay, on beach (Hale and ‘lindale).

IsLa QuADRIVALVIS (Cuvier).
Bay of Shoals, moderately common in shallow water (Ilale and Tindale).

322

THE FAUNA OF KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
(Under the aegis of the Fauna and Flora Board.)

No. 2.-THE MAMMALS.“

By Epvcar R. Warts, F.L.S., and Frepertc Woop Jonzs, D.Sc., F.R.S.
(Contribution from the South Australian Musewm.)

[Read October 13, 1927.]

[The following notes are, in part, compiled from memoranda by Prof. Wood
Jones, left with the Board on his transference to Honolulu. As, however, the notes
were not in form for publication, and have been added to, joint authorship is
indicated; the responsibility for errors to be assigned to E.R.W.]

ORNITHODELPHIA.
ECHIDNIDAE.

EcHIpNA ACULEATA, Shaw, 1792. Native Porcupine.

The island form is characterised by its small size, fine spines and pale coloura-
tion, and is referable to the subspecies E. a. multiaculeata, Rothschild. It is
common in certain parts of the island and plentiful on the reserve. It pairs early
in August, and Mr. Burgess says that it is not uncommon to see several males
following a female. On several occasions porcupines have been seen by members
of the Board moving around in broad daylight.

DIDELPHIA,
DASYURIDAE.
DASYURUS VIVERRINUS, Shaw, 1800. Native Cat.

This is apparently the only carnivorous mammal that existed on the island,
from which it now seems to have disappeared. Some of the older inhabitants
remember having scen a few individuals many years ago, and a single mandible
was found in a bone hole at Cape de Couédic, during the visit of the Board in
November, 1923.

PERAMELIDAE.

Isoopon OBESULUS, Shaw, 1797. Short-nosed Bandicoot.

Though disappearing from the mainland, this animal still maintains a footing
in the sanctuary of Flinders Chase, the only indigenous cnemy being the large
goana (Varanus) which is common on the island. he bandicoot is no mean
adversary and may not, in consequence, be molested by feral cats.

PHALANGERIDAE.
PsEUDOCHIRUS LANIGINOSUS, Gould, 1858. Ring-tailed Opossum.

The South Australian animal, distinguished under the name P. J. nots,
Thomas, 1923, though fairly common in suitable districts on the mainland, does
not appear to have reached the island in the ordinary course. On October 1,
1926, fifteen specimens, of which four were males, were liberated near the

() See also Handbook to the Mammals of South Australia, Wood Jones, 1923-1925.

323

homestead, but it is too early yet to ascertain how they may have fared. They
were obtained from Mount Pleasant, in this State.

PHASCOLARCTUS CINEREUS, Goldfuss, 1819. Native Bear,

At no recent period does the native bear or koala appear to have got into
South Australia beyond a small area fringing the Victorian border, and it is
doubtful if it could be found within our province to-day. On the remote chance
of acclimatising the species on Kangaroo Island a number of animals of both
sexes, together with mothers and young, were taken from Victoria and liberated
on Flinders Chase in November, 1923. One or two specimens have been since
reported as seen by the ranger, at a considerable distance from the point of libera-
tion, and the best is therefore hoped for.

DroMicia concinNA, Gould, 1841. Dormouse Opossum.

This little animal appears to be distributed all over the island, including
Flinders Chase, where it enjoys such protection as it is possible to afford. The
main danger with which it is threatened arises from the devastating effects of
bush fires, for it does not burrow, but lives in holes of trees and frequents the
tops of “black boys” (Xanthorrhoea),

TRICHOSURUS VULPECULA, Kerr, 1792. Opossum.

The island form differs from typical examples in its larger size, long fur,
and tawny colouration. It exactly resembles the grey Tasmanian opossum and is
very abundant, the judicious trapping on the reserve in no wise lessening its
numbers. Jt makes regular runways from tree to tree in which the snares are set,
but it also often springs the larger traps set for wallabies.

MACROPODIDAE.
BETONGIA LESUEURI, Quoy et Gaimard, 1824. Rat Kangaroo.

Specimens bred and reared in captivity in Adelaide were liberated within the
observation enclosure on the reserve and seem to be doing well. Ii, when they
are turned out into the larger world, they can avoid the goana (Varanus) they
should prosper.

Macropus (THYLOGALE) EUGENII, Desmarest, 1817. Wallaby.

The animal identified under this name is abundant on the island and, enjoy-
ing the protection afforded by the reserve, its survival seems to be assured.

Macropus FuLIGINosus, Desmarest, 1817. Kangaroo.

This fine animal is widely, if thinly, spread over the island; but on the Chase,
where it is rigorously protected, it is quite common, and, in the early mornings,
numbers may be seen feeding on the flats in front of the homestead.

PHASCOLOMYIDAE.
Pnascotomys (LASIORHINUS) LATIFRONS, Owen, 1845. Hairy-nosed
Wombat.

Being in grave danger of extermination, and having a distribution restricted
to South Australia, it is the intention of the Board to attempt to acclimatise the
wombat on Kangaroo Island; the sending of a single specimen to the Chase on

324

October 1, 1926, may therefore be recorded; others will be forwarded as soon as
obtained.
MONODELPHIA.
CETACEA.

So few reliable identifications of the whales and dolphins that have occurred
in the waters immediately surrounding the island have been made, that the follow-
ing list is naturally incomplete. At one period whaling was extensively prosecuted,
mainly by Americans, who have left behind certain relics of their temporary
occupation.

BALAENA AUSTRALIS, Desmoulins, 1822, Right Whale.

Represented by portions of skulls, vertebrae, and ribs still sticking in the
coastal beaches or adorning the gardens of the inhabitants.

NEOBALAENA MARGINATA, Gray, 1866. Pigmy Right Whale.

Two individuals were obtained at Kangaroo Island, apparently in 1889. A
third specimen was represented by an ear bone.

BALAENOPTERA MUScCULUs, Linnaeus, 1758. Blue Whale.

The occasional reports of large whales seen off the island doubtless refer to
this animal, of which a number, young and old, visit our waters.

PHYSETER MACROCEPHALUS, Linnaeus, 1758. Sperm Whale.

Teeth and vertebrac are preserved in the homes of settlers on the island,
but no recent occurrences of the whale appear to have been reported.

DELPHINUS DELPHIS, Linnaeus, 1758. Dolphin.
Very common all around the island and in our waters generally.

RODENTIA.
MURIDAL.

Ratrus GREYI, Gray, 1841. Native Rat.

This is probably the only native rat now living on Kangaroo Island, where,
however, it is rare, having the goana (Varanus) and feral cats as enemies of itself
and young. Specimens have been obtained recently at Rocky River and D’Estree
Bay.

PINNIPEDIA.
OTARIIDAE.

ARCTOCEPIIALUS CINEREUS, Peron, 1816. lair Seal,

This is the larger seal of the island, the dark coloured pups being frequently
mistaken for adults of the smaller fur seal.

ARCTOCEPHALUS DORIFERUS, Wood Jones, 1925. Fur Seal.

It is believed that a few examples still visit the inner Casuarina Island, which
is now a proclaimed sanctuary. and is in view from the lighthouse at Cape de
Couédic.

325

PHOCIDAE.

TlyprurGA LEPTONYX, de Blainville, 1820. Leopard Seal.
This southern seal has been twice reported from the island, and several
occurrences from the shores of the mainland are known.

CHIROPTERA.
Nycropuitus Gckorrroyi1, Leach, 1822. Long-eared Bal.

The bats of the island have not yet received much attention. This species
is very common,

INTRODUCED ALIENS.

Horses, cattle, sheep, goats, and dogs, introduced in the ordinary course of
human settlement are all under control, but it is different with pigs and cats.
Though not troublesome in settled areas, the wild and wide expanses of the
western end of the island afford cover and immunity to numbers of feral swine,
which root up acres of ground, including the flats around the homestead. Though
descended from domestic stock, the pigs have reacquired their racial characteristics
and are as wary of man as any truly wild swine. All those seen are black, and
several have fallen victims to rifle fire. Feral cats are numerous and a menace
to the native birds. Rabbits were placed on the island many years ago, but for-
tunatcly failed to maintain a permanent footing, and it is unlikely that there 1s a
single example on Kangaroo Island to-day. ‘he brown rat, the ship rat, and the
house mouse are as common on the island as elsewhere in Australia,

326

THE FAUNA OF KANGAROO ISLAND, SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
(Under the aegis of the Fauna and Flora Board.)

No. 3—THE REPTILES AND AMPHIBIANS.

By Epncar R. Waite, F.L.S., C.M.Z.S.,
Member of the Board and Director, South Australian Museum.
(Contribution from the South Australian Museum.)

[Read October 13, 1927.]

This list, with a few notes on some of the species, is mainly extracted from
the manuscript of the “Handbook on the Reptiles and Amphibians of South Aus-
tralia,” now in course of preparation as one of the series issued by the British
Science Guild (S.A. Branch).

CHELONIA.

DERMOCHELYS CoRIACEA, Linnaeus, 1766. Luth.

The leathery turtle has been seen several times in Investigator Strait, the
waters of which wash the northern shores of the island, and examples are pre-
served in the Museum.

CARETTA CARETTA, Linnaeus, 1758. Loggerhead.

Turtles are sometimes reported as having been seen in the Strait, and Sir
Joseph Verco, who at one time did much dredging in the two Gulfs, tells me that
he occasionally saw what he presumed to be green turtles. The only turtle from
our waters that I have had the opportunity of examining proved to be a
Loggerhead.

LACERTILIA.
GEKKONIDAE.
GymNobacryLus mitsusit, Bory St. Vincent, ?1825. Thick-tailed Gecko.

Fairly common under stones and beneath the bark of trees, whence it issues
at night in search of food.

PHYLLOMACTYLUS MARMORATUS, Gray, 1845. Marbled Gecko.

Though found on the ground bencath boulders and logs, it is more frequently
seen beneath the loose bark of trees. If gently thrown against the trunk of a tree,
it just sticks there, the claws immediately taking hold of the rough bark.

PEROPUS VARIEGATUS, Dumeril et Bibron, 1836. Dtella.

Normally found under logs and beneath the bark of trees, this little gecko
invades houses and, in common with other members of the family, generally sheds
its tail when handled or when receiving a shock, though not necessarily touched.

PYGOPODIDAE,

PSEUDODELMA IMPAR, Fischer, 1882. Snake Lizard.

This, the only member of the family identified from the island, is not at all
uncommon around the homestead at Rocky River. On lifting a log or stone it

327

may sometimes be found coiled up and apparently asleep; it may thus remain
for a second or two, when, evidently realising the advent of daylight into its
retreat, it rapidly seeks new cover. With the exception of a new genus and
species added since the date of its publication, all our members of the family were
illustrated in the Prodromus issued by Sir Frederick McCoy,‘ but owing to a
series of unfortunate errors, the text references to some of the plates is very
misleading and would seriously bewilder a novice. The following references and
corrections may therefore be noted :—

Pygopus lepidopodus (lepidopus), pl. 152 and 153, fig. 2.
Delma fraseri (frazeri), pl. 153, fig. 1.

Pseudodelma impar, pl. 161, fig. 2.

Aprasia pulchella, pl. 161, fig. 1.

Lialis burtonit, pl. 162, figs. 1 and 2.

In writing his Catalogue of Australian Lizards, F. R. Zietz @ unfortunately
failed to detect the errors and altogether missed McCoy’s reference to Pygopus
lepidopodus, which genus and species were omitted as occurring in South
Australia.

AGAMIDAE.
AMPHIBOLURUS DECRESI!, Dumeril ct Bibron, 1837. Tawny Dragon.

This lizard, with which the French name of the island, “L’ile de Decres,” is
associated, has been taken on granite boulders at the mouth of the Rocky River,
but does not appear to be common on the island; it is not known outside the limits
of South Australia.

TYMPANOCRYPTIS LINEATA, Peters, 1863. Earless Dragon.

The reference published in the Catalogue of the British Museum ‘) appears
to be the only record of the species on the island.

VARANIDAE.

Varanus varius, Shaw, 1790, Goana.

Of the five species of the genus recorded as occurring in South Australia,
this is the only one found on Kangaroo Island. It may be said to be the only
indigenous carnivorous animal on the island, and full-grown opossums have been
taken from the stomachs of the reptiles.

SCINCIDAE.,
EGERNIA WHiTII, Lacepede, 1804, White’s Skink.

The commonest and most widely distributed species of the genus, being
found all over Australia and Tasmania. It occurs on Franklin and Greenly
Islands, in the Australian Bight, and is common on Kangaroo Island; the insular
forms generally lack the striking markings of some of the mainland individuals.

TrRAcHYSAURUS RUGOSUS, Gray, 1827. Shingle-back.

Though so common on the mainland, this peculiar lizard is not indigenous
to Kangaroo Island. About 100 examples were placed on Flinders Chase, on the
western end of the island, in 1926, by the Fauna and Flora Board of South
Australia.

(2) Zietz, Rec. S.A. Mus., i. 1920, pp. 181-228.
(3) Boulenger, Cat. Lizards, Brit. Mus., i., 1885, p. 392.

328

Tiinutra guoyi, Dumeril et Bibron, 1839. Water Lizard.

Though the vernacular name is more properly applied to members of the
agamoid genus Physignathus, it is locally used for the skink on account of its
predilection for water, into which it plunges when alarmed. Dr. Chisholm has
fed this lizard on flies, which it took from the end of a pointed stick to the number
of fifty within about half an hour.

LEIOLOPISMA METALLICUM, O’Shaughnessy, 1874, Metallic Skink.

This little lizard is common on the island, where it inhabits open rock-strewn
country. The spelling of the subgencric name is according to the original form.

HEMIERGIS PERONTI, Fitzinger, 1826. Four-toed Skink.

Two species bear the name Lygosoma peronii in the Britsh Museum Cata-
logue; the one from Queensland described by Dumeril et Bibron becomes
L. blackmanni, De Vis. The southern lizard is common on the mainland and
occurs on many of our islands, including the South Neptunes, St. Francis, Pearson,
Price, and Flinders Islands in the Australian Bight. On Kangaroo Island it is
scarcely possible to move more than a couple of logs without disturbing one of
these lizards. On the accession of daylight an individual may wriggle snake-like
down a hole or into the surrounding herhage.

I{EMTERGIS DECRESIENSIS, Fitzinger, 1826. Three-toed Skink.

This species occurs throughout southern Australia and is found sparingly on
Kangaroo Island and on Flinders Island, in Nuyts Archipelago,

RHOPONA BOUGAINVILLIT, Gray, 1839. Bougainville’s Skink.

In Victoria it is said to be found under logs and stones in moist places. On
Kangaroo Island it occurs among the herbage of the sandhills.

ABLEPHARUS LINEO-OCELLATUS, Dumeril et Bibron, 1839. Garden Skink.

Common on the mainland, this snake-eyed lizard has also been taken on St.
Francis Island. Specimens from Kangaroo Island have been identified with the
variety 4. anomalus, Gray.

OPHIDIA.,

NOTECHIS scuTAtTus, Peters, 1861, Tiger Snake.

This is the only snake known from the island, where, however, it is common.
The species is very prone to melanism, and the majority of the individuals taken
on Kangaroo Island exhibit this phase, which has been accorded varietal rank by
Mr. Kinghorn, under the name N. s. niger. The tiger snake is an extremely
variable species as far as colouration is concerned, and every shade of colour and
marking may be met with, from pale yellow to ycllowish-red with conspicuous
bands, to grey, and finally to black, in which the bands are lost in the general
depth of colour.

AMPHIBIA,

CERATOPHRIIDAE.

The generally accepted name of the family is Cystignathidac, but as there
appears to be no valid name to support it, the oldest, namely, Ceratophrys, Boie,
1824, is here adopted.

329

LIMNODYNASTES TASMANIENSIS, Giinther, 1858. Marbled Frog.

This widely-distributed species is not uncommon on the island and is found
under stones in damp places, resorting to the water for breeding purposes.

LIMNODYNASTES DORSALIS, Gray, 1841. Swamp [rog.
; ys 8

Excepting during the prolonged breeding season the Swamp Frog is seldom
seen, for it burrows and remains underground during the day. A short note on
some habits of the frog on Kangaroo Island has been previously published. The
yomerine teeth arc generally disposed in two groups, one on each side of the
choanae. They may coalesce into a single series, but there is usually indication of
the two components. The teeth are very numerous and have double curved tips.

CRINIA SIGNIFERA, Girard, 1853. Brown Froglet.

This, the smallest of our amphibians, is as common on Kangaroo Island as
elsewhere, and, during dry weather, hides under stones and logs, attempting to
escape by leaping. After the first heavy rains it makes for the pools and sets
about breeding, even in winter. Vomerine teeth are not developed in this species.

BUFONIDAE.
PSEUDOPHRYNE BiBRONT!, Gitnther, 1858. Toadlet.

As with Crinia, Pseudophryne has no vomcrine teeth and no visible tympanum,
but may be distinguished by its larger size and its apparent indisposition, or
inability, to jump. It is common on the island and is found under cover of logs
and stones squatting in a little “form” to which it apparently returns after its
nocturnal peregrinations in search of food. It docs not resort to water even for
breeding purposes.

HYLIDAE.
IlyLta EWING, Dumeril et Bibron, 1841. Tree Frog.

The only member of the family found on Kangaroo Island, where it is
common in the rank vegetation. The vomerine teeth are few in number and
simple in form. The eggs of this frog do not float but are attached to submerged
weeds in small bunches which encircle the stems of the plants, and may be found
at almost any time of the year.

(4) Waite, Rec. S. Austr. Mus., ili, 1925, p. 31.

330

THE STURTIAN TILLITE IN THE NEIGHBOURHOOD OF EDEN, AND
IN THE HUNDREDS OF KAPUNDA, NEALES, AND ENGLISH,
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By Proressor Watter Howcurin, F.G.S.
[Read October 13, 1927.]
PLates XTV. ann XV,

The tillite, which is typically developed in the valley of the River Sturt, is one
of the most distinctive horizons in the Adelaide Series. From its persistent and
uniform characteristics throughout the range of its occurrence it supplies a most
useful criterion in the determination of the order of succession in many geological
sections.

The geographical range of the beds is essentially that of the Adelaide Series,
maintaining, throughout, the same relative position in the series in relation to the
associated beds. It follows the general strike of the series, as a whole, in a north
and south direction, with transverse foldings in successive anticlinal and syn-
clinal folds. The anticlinal curves have been mostly removed by denudation,
with the result that the tillite becomes exposed through the truncation of the
synclinal margins. There is usually a strong quartzite underlying the tillitc,
which, from ils superior resistance to weathcring, makes prominent ridges in
parallel ranges, and is often suggestive of the presence of the tillite on its less
exposed face. In accordance with the “grain” of the country the tillite is repeated,
on an east and west line, in distances a few miles apart according to the acuteness,
or otherwise, of the tectonic curves.

As to the geological age of the Sturtian Tillite, in the first instance it was
regarded (together with the group of beds classed together as the Adelaide Series)
as of Lower Cambrian age. One or two American geologists (partly on the
grounds that the Lower Cambrian fauna of North America appeared to indicate
somewhat warm conditions; as well as from the fact, that a few years subse-
quently to the South Australian discovery a glacial deposit was announced from
the Pre-Cambrian of Canada) were disposed to correlate, as to age, the South
Australian tillite with the Pre-Cambrian tillite of Canada. In the present volume
of the Society’s ‘Transactions there are two contributions [by T. W. E. David and
J. W. Gregory] which appear to favour the Lower Cambrian age of the South Aus-
tralian beds, as was at first suggested.

In the following notes opportunity is taken to include brief descriptions of
local geological features more or less connected with the glacial beds. The paper
consists of the transcription of Field Notes, which, in most cases, were limited
to single short visits to the localities; they are therefore of the nature of recon-
naissances only, It will be convenient to refer to the Sturtian Tillite as the older
tillite to distinguish it from the Permo-Carboniferous glacial beds which are of
much later date.

Locarittes, Page
Eden, near Adelaide a ie ws a in -. 331
Springbank 2, eS - 7, i - by 935
Ross’ Creek, Hd. of Kapunda .. as ai 2h we pa
Hawker’s Creek, Hd. of Kapunda es sve a .. 339
Fords, River Light i Be Ly tie 5g 343
Fudunda, Hd. of Neales .. i 7 .. te .. 345
Robertstown, Hd, of English .. a mn is .. 346

Point Pass, Hd. of English ee os as #4 .. 347

331

THE TILLITE AT EDEN.

Eden is situated on the Adelaide to Melbourne railway, a little less than nine
miles to the southward of Adelaide. The tillite in this locality is continuous
with that in the Sturt valley, forming, roughly, a square-shaped area, the
approximate boundaries of which are defined by the Viaduct Gully, on the north
side; the River Sturt, on the South; Bedford Park, on the west; and along a
line drawn from Eden, via the Blackwood Metropolitan Brickworks, on the rail-
way, southwards, to the River Sturt, on the east. The area thus occupied by the
glacial beds measures two miles in a north and south direction, and a mile and
three-quarters in an east and west direction. Eden takes in the north-eastern
angle of this area, including the Viaduct Gully (fig. 1).

Taken as a whole, the beds occupy an isolated position and may be regarded
as block-fatlted. The glacial beds are seen with their topmost beds exposed on
their western boundary, and their basal beds, on their eastern boundary; showing
a tilt of the block, by an upeast on the castern side, where they are over-ridden by
the subglacial beds in a thrust from the east.

EDEN RAILWAY STATION AND NEIGHBOURHOOD.

The railway station at Eden is situated in a cutting in the tillite. The rock
as seen in the cutting is a fine-grained, light-coloured ochreous slate, partially
decomposed and, mostly, free from grit, but carries an occasional erratic. On
the up-platform of the station, northward of the shelter shed, and near the first
electric ight rod, a quartzite erratic occurs in the tillite, 9 inches in length; and
just past the second light is a subangular erratic of gneiss, 4 feet in length, by
1 foot § inches, in cross section. Near the end of the cutting in which the station
is situated, going north, a marked change in the form of the tillite is seen in out-
crop over the fence, on the eastern side of the line. Here the glacial bed is very
coarse and stony.

About 100 yards of low ground separate the first cutting from a second one,
which is also in tillite of similar type to that in the first. It is also seen on a
road (formerly a “runaway” siding) which goes up from the main track on the
eastern side. The end of this road, as also the associated cutting, marks the end
of the glacial beds at their north-eastern limits. There follows a short stretch
of low ground in which slate rocks are much crushed and disturbed, marking
the zone of contact between the tillite and the subglacial compact slates and thin
quartzites which occur in the adjoining (No. 3) cutting. These underlying beds
exhibit wavy contortions, as well as “herring-bone” structure, in some places,
similar to what occtirs at the base of the tillite in the railway cutting near the
Blackwood Brickworks (see Howchin, Geol. of S. Austr., 1918, p. 347, fig. 270).

The tillite, from its north-eastern angle, near Eden, bas its eastern limits
almost parallel with the railway on its eastern side, varying from a chain to two
chains in width (probably more in places), At the Metropolitan Brickworks it
crosses the railway and continues through scrub country in a southerly direction
to the River Sturt, where it is overthrusted and thrown out at the south-eastern
angle of the faulted block. From this point it follows the left bank of the Sturt
to its second crossing of the river in Section 81, as described below.

Throughout the central portion of the tillite block, there are numerous out-
crops. At the Eden Station, in a small gully situated almost immediately behind
the shelter shed on the up-platform, the beds make a small waterfall by a vertical
face of rock. A still better section of this kind can be seen, a little south of the
station, by following the railway line, under an overway bridge, and passing
through a fence, on the right-hand side, and following the road for about 200
yards, a waterfall is seen on the right hand with a shcer face of about 20 feet,
containing many erratics (pl. xiv.). The tillite can also be seen in most of the smal]

B itr oe ( - ee
nea

1 $29279 Pure —s

$397 X240N
ae eee os asta

por 09g

a EDEN ee

2
a

d ar srUTILIIY >
cee: ; Q Rca

332
leyeld.

[tgh-

OT Q

Fig. 1.

Locality Plan of Tillite at Eden and River Sturt,

333

creeks that drain towards the Sturt, especially in the Blackwood Creek, where at its
junction with the Sturt many fine faccs of the tillite are exposed both in the creel
itself and in the banks of the river.

VIADUCT GULLY.
(Observations made April 2, 1904.)

The Viaduct Creek takes its name from the railway viaduct which formerly
spanned the valley. The creek takes its rise on the Relair-Blackwood “shelf,”
and, after passing under the railway, flows north-westerly, intersecting the South
Road a little to the northward of the Lady MacDonnell Hotel.

Beps BENEATH THE TILLIT#.

Interesting sections of the beds inferior to the tillite can be seen in the upper
portions of the creek. Starting from Blackwood Railway Station the creek was
entered about a half-mile above the viaduct. ‘The stone here, is an arenaceous
slate (or shale), ‘The bedding is somewhat obscure from the fact that the stone
has a grain in two directions. One, which probably indicates the true bedding
plane, has a dip E. 20° S. at 30°. The bed is finely laminated and shows fine lines
with irregular wavy texture. The other direction of the grain has also a wavy
texture and weathers into bands, with a dip W. at 70°. In places it assumes the
features of cone-in-cone structure. The divergence mentioned probably arises
from tectonic distortions. A little lower down the creek the dip is W. 20° S. at
20°,

Shortly before reaching the present railway line @ there is a remarkable con-
tortion of the subglacial beds seen in a precipitous cliff, about 100 feet in height,
on the southern side of the valley. The section (fig. 2) includes two pitching

Culling on Railway

Distortion and overthrusts of subglacial heds on the eastern side of the railway.
C marks the position of cave caused by a tectonic fold.

anticlines caused by a thrust from the cast. The more easterly of the two is a
broken anticline having slipped along the main axis of the overfold, while the
westerly example rises at an angle of about 60° and has its return limb (also an
overfold) exposed in the first important cutting on the railway to the southward

OD This and the followmg paragraphs have been slightly modified from the original notes
to bring the descriptions into accordance with the later deviation of the railway from the
original {umnel and viaduct that were situated a little lowcr down the valley.

334

of the tunnel. In the synclinal trough between the two anticlines the beds,
through lateral pressure, have been puckered up into minor folds. One of these
shows an anticlinal curve rising from a synclinal base, with its central portion
fallen away so as to forma shallow cave, about 6 feet in height, in the line of axis,
as shown in fig. 2 (marked C). This feature also occurs with other folds in the
neighbourhood.

On the opposite bank of the creek, close to the railway, is another interesting
anticline, well seen in section, When the line was in course of construction the
western limb of this anticline formed the side of a cutting and, being a weak
structure, came away onc night, and, according to the foreman of works, deposited
12,000 tons of stone on the rails at the entrance to the tunnel. [Illustrates the
importance of geological knowledge in railway construction. ]

In the cuttings on the railway following that shown in fig. 2 the subglacial
Beds can be further studied. The beds, as is usual to this horizon, are greatly
disturbed by being thrown into a vertical position, or with a slight westerly dip,
with numerous small contortions, and before reaching the point where the former
viaduct ended, the dip becomes E 20° S,

Again, on the same side of the valley, but on the western side of the railway,
near the embankment where the railway makes a sharp turn to the southward,
another double overfold occurs in the thin quartzites of the subglacial beds (fig. 3).

E

i. \e Nid

Fig. 3.
Overfolds in the subglacial beds on the western side of the railway.

In some of the sharp folds in this locality the core of the bend has dropped out,
leaving a cavity or cave. The scarp face showing this section could formerly be
well seen from the southern end of the now obsolete railway tunnel, across the
valley, but is now hid from view by the tips thrown over during the alterations to
the permanent way. The downthrow of the tillite block formed a strong foreland
against which the thrust wave from the east became broken.

THe TILnite.

The position shown in figs. 2 and 3 brings us close to the north-eastern angle
of the tillite faulted block. From this point, following the left bank of the
creek, the tillite is seen in a series of lumpy and serrated exposures along the
rise and determined by a north-westerly fault that cuts off the beds on their
northern side.

Irom the railway, where the tillite comes to an end, as described above, the
boundaries of the glacial beds can be casily followed in a westerly direction. On
the inner side of the iron fence, bordering the railway on its western side, is a
granite boulder measuring 2 feet 9 inches, by 1 foot 9 inches, with smaller boulders
scattered around. The line of outcrop slopes down to near the bottom of the
valley in a line with a small lateral creek that comes down from the railway, and
in which an excellent face of tillite can be seen.

335

The unconformity of the tillite to the older beds is here a conspicuous feature.
The Mitcham quartzites and slates, which coming from Sleep’s Hill quarries,
strike south-westerly through Ayliffe’s old quarries and, either by a curve in the
strike, or by subsidiary faulting, meet the tillite in the Viaduct valley at right
angles. These Mitcham beds, although at a lower horizon than the subglacial thin
quartzites, have been under the influence of the same thrust from the east, and in
the old quarries. just referred to, are very strongly folded in rolling curves and
anticlines which are at times very acute and sometimes broken by faults.

The fault plane separating the two sets of beds has a north-westerly trend
and follows the left bank of the creek. The exact juncture of the two series
cannot well be exactly defined, probably on account of the thrust wave from the
east having overridden the tillite boundary. The tillite of the locality is coarsely
but intimately laminated, as the result of cleavage plancs, that have a strike
S. 20° W., with an easterly dip at 65°. The strike of the cleavage is thus practic-
ally at right angles to the thrust, which is as it ought to be.

In the lower portion of the Viaduct valley creek the tillite comes down to
the creek level at a point where two small horseshoe ctirves occur in the stream,
within about 200 yards of the district road that strikes easterly from the main
South Road at the Lady MacDonnell Hotel. From there it curves south-westerly,
crossing at the angle of two district roads, as shown on the Locality Map (fig. 1),
and heads for the River Sturt.

TILLITE AT SPRINGBANK.
(Observations made November, 1906.)

A narrow strip of the tillite can be seen in two places sittiated to the north-
ward of the Viaduct valley, in a line from the north-western angle of the faulted-
block and following a north-eastern strike towards the Goodwood road.

The first of these outcrops can be located by following the Goodwood road,
southerly, for nearly a mile from the Springbank road to where a culvert crosses
the road in the rise of the hill up to the northern banks of the Viaduct valley, In
the creek, going westerly, are laminated and wavy quartzites with a dip I. 20° 3.
at 65°, Within 100 yards from the road the tillite is exposed, having a cleavage
strike N. 20° E. at 70°. The tillite has a breadth of about 100 yards and is then
obscured by the alluvium of the plains.@? In a north and south tributary, a little
to the south-westward of the position just referred to, laminated and wavy
quartzites with slates are exposed, covered, in places, by a hard floor of Pleistocene
alluvium. The quartzite can be followed up the creek to a scrics of quarries.
The strike in the small tributary creek is N. to 15° E.

The second exposure of the tillite in this neighbourhood occurs at a distance
of about half a mile from the dne just described, in a south-westerly direction,
and is close to the Waterworks reducing tank, in Section 13, at the head of the
road that goes easterly from the Lady MacDonnell Hotel. The bed is seen ina
small gutter that carries away the overflow from the tanks just mentioned. The
tillite can also be seen in a small washout that runs at right angles to the overflow
gutter and can be traced up the hill for 50 yards. Quartzites can be observed on
both sides of the tillite. It is evident that the latter has been brought to the sur-
face hy an, approximately, north and south downthrow fault that intercepts the
east and west fault of the Viaduct valley at its western end, to which position the
tillite can be almost traced. The latter seems to form the edge of the Burnside
platform, with the fault scarp dipping to the westward beneath the alluvium.

® A recent visit to this locality has shown that the surface features are now entircly
different from what they were in 1906. The land that was then open and unoccupied is now
built upon and cultivated, The rocks seen in the creek, at that time, are now covered by
the falling in of the alluvial banks; so that the gcological section is not now available.

336

TARLEE AND ROSS’ CREEK.
(Observations made on May 17, 1905, and later.)

Bens BENEATH THE TILLITE.

On the western side of the railway at Tarlee, in creek, near the township, is
a dark-grey sandstone. The beds are nearly horizontal and roll in low anticlinal
curves. About a mile to the westward of the township are the Tarlee quarries.
The stone, here, is similar to that seen in the creek just referred to. The bedding
planes are strongly marked—some thin, others thick—which enables large blocks
to be quarried in the bedding. The grain of the stone shows fine lamination,
with a large proportion of a dark-coloured granular material, evenly distributed
through the mass. ‘The beds roll gently in periclinal curves in which both strike
and dip are involved. The dip has a prevailing direction to E, or N.E. There
occur, in places, some peroxide of iron, accompanied by a wavy structure. A
number of small faults occur, but with only slight displacements. The beds are
suggestive of the upper members of the thick (Black Hill) quartzite, as seen in
the Morialta gorge above the first waterfall, On the eastern side of the quarries
is an iron reef that has been worked—probably marks the presence of a fault.

On the eastward side of Tarlee the ground is only slightly elevated and is
cultivated, with a subsoil resting on slates. On the east-west district road (Hd.
of Gilbert), between Sections 326 and 275, there is an excavation on the road-
side, exposing rotten slate having a dip E. 20° N. at 65°. At a distance of about
two miles from Tarlee the ground begins to rise to the main ridge. At the foot
of the range there are small exposures of a laminated shale, even with the ground ;
following which, in superior position, is a very siliceous quartzite.

In travelling from Adelaide by train, on the main north line, a definite feature
on the eastern side is a range of hills which often shows picturesque outlines.
This range is known by various local names at different points. Thus, opposite
Riverton, it is known at Peters’ Hill Range, and where crossed by the main road
between ‘Tarlee and Kapunda, it is called the Allandale Range. “The range con-
tinues in a south-easterly direction, following the western side of Hawkcr’s
Creek, and then curves round to the River Light, which it crosses about two miles
to the northward of Fords railway station, to be referred to later. The range
consists mainly of quartzite and is of interest as it follows the outcrop of the older
tillite, which it underlies,

The main road from Tarlee to Kapunda passes over this range at “The Gap,”
which reaches its culminating point at about four miles from Tarlee, and forms
the boundary between the Hundred of Gilbert and Kapunda. The western por-
tion of the range consists of a very siliceous quartzite, having the general char-
acteristics of the Glen Osmond and Mitcham quartzite, with a thickness of about
20 yards. (Dip in quarry, N.E. at 50°.) ‘The outcrop is strong, in places
laminated, and will split into layers. It is a light-coloured stone, much riddled
with quartz veins, which is a feature of the locality, some veins reaching 2 feet
in thickness, with evidences of much dislocation of strata. The general strike of
the country is N.N.W. and S.S.E., with an easterly dip, generally high,

Following on the quartzite, is a secondary ridge of very thick and massive
phyllites, or slates, separated from the quartzite, described in the last paragraph,
by a narrow valley of crosion. The slates contain bands that are calcareous,
and others that are arenaceous. At the six-mile post from Kapunda (on the
western side of the boundary of the Hundreds) there is a road-cutting in these
slates that shows a strike N.N.W., and a dip of 65° easterly. Quartzites occur
again on the eastern side of these slates. A remarkable isolated and pyramidal
hill of quartzite, almost bare, but on which a few poor sheaoaks are growing,
occurs on the southern side of the road in Sec. 123 (Hd. of Kapunda). A farm-

337

house is situated on its lower slopes to the eastward. It seems probable that the
main quartzite represents the Mitcham quartzite, the succeeding slates, the
Mitcham upper slates; and the following quartzite, the quartzite that underlies
the tillite, which immediately follows in ascending order.

Tue TI.Lite.

After passing through “The Gap,” the Kapunda enclosed forest and rescrvoir
are on the northern side of the road; and, within a mile, a great exposure of
the older tillite occurs by the side of the road, in the banks of Ross’ Creek, and
also in the adjoining paddocks. Ross’ Creek is a tributary of the River Light.
After supplying water to the Kapunda reservoir, it flows southwards, making a
junction with the Light near where the Kapunda railway crosses the latter river.

On the north-eastern side of Ross’ Creek there is a very extensive outcrop of
the tillite, about a mile in length. It occurs in paddocks running parallel with
the public road, passing through Sections 106, 89, and 90 (Hd. Kapunda). In
the last-named Section the exposures are particularly massive and prominent (see
pl. xv.). The bed seldom shows cleavage but outcrops in rounded, whale-back
contours, often assuming irregular shapes but always very compact. The erratics

JSeate and

Crush ROCk 2. ~
'
~~ ar? te
i 7 f ian > fe] oO.
vr f zz an
ate } + 34 o
‘ Al
yf ge eg 2! A ea oo Boer 4 o +?
+ e . ‘ f ! - f ’ . 9g
» *“o #6 é o 7 gr i" * Tildiée ° a, :
. a ae, “fi » Or @ * * . "
a ee) ao, a yas oF abt
Fig. 3a.

Sketch Plan of Faulted Rock penetrating the Tillite.

usually occur in patches, leaving large areas destitute of conspicuous stones, but
the matrix is very characteristic, having the features of a mudstone mixed with
grit. The erratics noticed consisted of quartzite, granite, gneiss, etc., varying in
size up to 2 feet in length, some of which were rounded, others angular. The
eastern limits of this outcrop of the tillite is marked by the rising ground on the
western side of the district road forming the boundary of Section 106. It crosses
Ross’ Creek at Res. No. 4 (near the butchers’ killing yard). About half a mile
from where the tillite is seen in the creek, there is a good exposure of slate in the
creek; the slate is rotten with a dip of 70°, easterly. A reef of quartz 2 feet
wide crosses the ercek in this slate. The inference is that this slate which over-
lics the tillite is the representative of the Tapley’s Ilill Series, as occurs in the
River Sturt. ‘The tillite on the north-castern side of Ross’ Creek appears to be
out of line with the more extended strike of these beds as they occur on the
westerly side, and are, possibly, thrown out of line by a dip fault.

On the district road that passes up the eastern side of Section 90—about one-
third of a mile up from the main road—there is a steep rise where the road
passes over a hard quartzite rock. The stone is speckled with white from the
presence of kaolinised felspar, after the manner of the Mitcham quartzite. The
dip is high, approximately vertical, and the bed has about 30 yards of outcrop.

338

Blue slate and tillite are seen on its northern side and the quartzite seems to run
out to the eastward. The blue slate just mentioned is ferruginous and develops

ROBERTSTOWN

hv
SADDLE WORTH

Fig. 4.
Locality Map of the Northern Areas described.

“crush rock” in places, and is bordered again by quartzite on its northern side,
followed by a repetition of the tillite as shown in the sketch plan fig. 3a.

339

We have now to follow the line of strike of these beds on the westward side
of Ross’ Creek. In Section 119, an extensive exposure of the tillite is seen on
the south-western side of the creek, close to the eastern side of Mr. Wilson’s
house. The tillite is mostly sandy and gritty, the grit in some places being very
coarse—erratics scarce. On the eastern side of the same Section there is a small
washout in which the tillite is exposed, and, resting on it, were a number of large
granite erratics, four of which exceeded 2 feet in length, and one 3 feet, besides
smaller examples. The stones had apparently been gathered from the adjoining
land and placed in the washout to check the eroding action of the water. One
of the largest had apparently been broken, and originally formed, with three
others, a single large boulder. On the north-western side of Mr. Wilson’s house
a small creek exposes a section of rotten slate in vertical position, apparently
“Tapley’s Hill” Series.

Outcrops of tillite extend from the south-westward banks of Ross’ Creek
to the top of the hill on that side. From this vantage point, looking across low
ground, the glacial beds can be seen to occur along the line of strike, for at least
a mile, forming a scarp, facing eastwards. This is in a direct line with the same
beds that occur in Hawker’s Creek, two miles to the southward.

The beds can be followed along the same line of strike in an opposite direction
(namely, to the N.N.W.). They are seen on the district road that passes between
Sections 123 and 124, opposite to the reservoir enclosure, and about a quarter of
a mile from the main road, They have a S.S.E. and N.N.W. direction, and,
after crossing a wideish valley of alluvium, reappear on the other side, passing
into Section 122, where they make a bold outcrop with four other smaller
exposures within the Section. Several granite boulders were noticed here, some
included in the tillite and others loose on the ground. One of these was a foot
in length, and another, an aplite, measured 1 foot 5 inches.

Along the same line of outcrop, in a northerly direction, exposures occur in
Section 124, but are not seen again till on the high ground in Section 85, situated
within the reservoir enclosure. |‘o reach this spot, pass up the district road on
the western side of the reservoir grounds, enter paddock just before reaching the
Government nursery.] A strong quartzite, apparently vertical in position, is
present, on the face of the hill, with the tillite on its western side. The latter is
very slaty and only in places shows the characteristic gritty matrix and small
erratics. The tillite appears to be cut off on its southern side by a quartzite, just
below the crest of the hill.

From this point the strike of the beds cain be followed for a mile, or more,
in a N.N.W. direction, when strong outcrops of the tillite are again met with in
Sections 96 and 97, near the boundary of the Hundred. Erratics are small and
rather scarce.

HAWKER’S CREEK, HUNDRED OF KAPUNDA.
(Observations made in July, 1905.)

Hawker’s Creek takes its rise a little to the southward of the Kapunda
reservoir and follows the eastern base of the range that divides the Hundreds of
Light and Kapunda. Its course is, approximately, parallel with that of Ross’
Creek (at an average distance apart of about one mile), to which latter it becomes
an affluent shortly before the joint stream reaches the River Light.

Tue TILLire.

The main strike of the glacial beds, which we have already described as pass-
ing through the Kapunda reservoir enclosure, in a S.5.E. direction, follows the
Hawker’s Creck for about two miles. The beds are well seen on Mr. W. J

340

Hazel’s grounds, who has his homestead on Section 134, close to the creek. Here
the glacial grits have largely become disintegrated and gone down to soil. An
exception to this is seen in a strong line of outcrop consisting of immense rounded
masses which stand considerably above the level in cultivated ground. The bed
does not show many erratics in situ, although a few were noticed, one of which
was a triangular lump of granite, a foot in length. Numerous erratics were
visible in a loose condition in the cultivated ground,

One large boulder of granite, nearly level with the ploughed ground, showed
an exposed face 2 feet in width. A miner had sunk a shaft adjacent to the
boulder with the hope of finding minerals. The stone proved to be 4 feet 6 inches, by
5 feet 6 inches, by 3 fect. It is angular in outline and fixed in a peculiar light-
coloured matrix. On being tested, the latter was found to consist largely of the
carbonates of lime and magnesia. The texture of the bed is flaky, closely packed,
and mylonitic. Fixed in this matrix were numerous, mostly small, erratics of
dolomitic limestone. Other erratics, consisting of granite and gneiss, measuring,
respectively, 3 feet and 3 feet 6 inches, had been removed from the ploughed land
to the fence, while others have been used in the construction of buildings.

The lithological characteristics of the tillite in this locality are quite unique for
South Australia, so far as the author’s experience is concerned. ‘lhe association
of the dolomitic erratics with a similar matrix at once suggested that we have
here the parent rock transported by glacial action together with the ground-up
material of the same limestone as forming the rock base of the tillite. To test
this point to a certainty, Mr. W. S. Chapman, Analyst and Assayer at the School
of Mines, kindly undertook to amalyse the tillite and its associated calcareous
erratics, with the following results:

Description. Dolomitic Tillite. Dolomitic Erratic.
Water at 100°C. 0:10 per cent. Nil
Water above 100° C. 1:66, i. 0-64 per cent.
Silica 36°64 4 46-00 __,, iz
Ferric oxide 2°90 ,, 7 114, 3
Alumina 4:80, Fe 0-68, in
Lime 16°75, 7 15°72 ,, i
Magnesia 10-79, “4 11-02, A
Carbon dioxide 24°84, re 24°36, “
Alkalies Not determined Not determined
98°48 per cent. 99°56 per cent.

The above analyses leave no doubt that the local tillite, as a whole, had been
gathered from one bed of impure dolomitic limestone. The differences in the
two columns can be explained from the likelihood that the tillite gathered a small
amount of earthy material (probably from the percolating water at the bottom of
the glacier), the wonder is that the differences are so slight. The high proportion
of silica present is explained from a clastic element in the parent rock. A portion
of the limestone was treated with acid until all the carbonate elements were dis-
charged, when a skeleton of clear, granular silica was left as a residuum, sug-
gesting an arenaceous origin for the silica in the parent rock. A portion of the
matrix was similarly treated, when it was seen that the residual silica was in a
finely triturated condition as might be expected from the mylonitic action to
which it had been subjected.

There is also a wide outcrop of rounded tillite, close to the road in Section
137, which it crosses, and is said to occur in the bottom of Hawker’s Creek, in a
line with the general strike to the N.N.W. Lower down the creek, the tillite is
situated to the eastward of the creek, and slates occur in the latter.

NMOLSLUTAON
SUL
soiag IH s.A0lduyz)

sarelg pepurg

STIIW b NOLLOAS-NMOLSLYIGOU UVAN ‘SHONVY ALJOT LNQOW FHL
4JO dYVOS NYaLSVa IHL JO NOLLOIS TVOIDOTOIO DILVWAVYOVIG 9 ‘Old

341

7

Oe

saysug soddy aa TYVa

salzig papurg

soteNnd

9(qie Ww
SeuZzwend [e1oeID-qng

a” P
HaQID 8 LOHMBA
;

<

SHIN 6 NOLLOFS—LOMISIG VONNdVA
GONV J3a1uVL FHL HONOYHL NOLLOIS TVYOIDOTOSD SILVWAVYOVIC S$ “Old

342

Beps Unpertyvine THE TiLnite at Haze’s.

The strong quartzite range that makes the boundary between the Ilundreds
of Kapunda and Gilbert, continues in a south-easterly direction, dividing the
Hundreds of Kapunda and Light, and passes a little to the westward of Mr.
Hazel’s farm. The stone is similar to that exposed in “The Gap,” further to the
north, is very siliceous and of the Mitcham type. The range shows a dip slope
to the eastward, but is steep to the westward, and overlooks the Stockport plain.
In its upper menibers it passes into a bluish quartzite (fig. 5).

Towards the base of the range, on its castern side, there is an important fault
rock, in the form of a fault breccia, composed of angular fragments of the
quartzite, sometimes cemented by oxide of iron into a ferruginous breccia, with a
width of about 200 yards. This probably indicates an important downthrow of
the glacial beds by which they mav have been partly obscured. Down on the flat
in the neighbourhood of the creek, slates are exposed, followed by the tillite.

Beps OVERLYING TIlE TILLITE.

On the eastern side of the tillite the ground rises to a rocky ridge in which
the stone is of a varied arenaceous type. It is sometimes a soft sandstone, and
changes from that to a grit, or a quartzite. It overlies the tillite and may possibly
be a glacial grit. It has been quarried for building purposes. The dip of the
beds in the quarry appears to be E. 40° N. at 70°.

Beyond the grit-sandstone ridge, going eastward, is low country with few
rock exposures, but these indicate that the bed rock is mostly slate. In Section
1488, mear the bridge that crosses Ross’ Creek, three-quarters of a mile to the
westward of Kapunda, is a fine-grained bluish quartzite, or argillaceous quartzite,
strongly contorted along the strike. In a cutting on the road above the bridge,
shale is exposed that has the characteristics of the Tapley’s Hill shale, having
a general dip E, 10° N. at 55°, but the beds roll considerably and are cut by a
strongly-defined quartz reef that is 2 feet 6 inches wide. In Section 1490, situated
a little nearer to Kapunda, there is a fine-grained, laminated, sandy shale having
a dip E, at 50°. The bed swings round in the same quarry with an increase of
dip to between 70° and 80°. An old mine-quarry, near Kapunda, shows rotten,
laminated shales with a dip S.W. at 35°. In the open cut, near the township, the
strata dip W.N.W. at 30° and swing around to the E. Probably a dome structure,
crossed by a fracture in which the copper ore has been deposited.

The “Tapley’s Hill” slates continue, in an easterly direction, from the town-
ship of Kapunda as far as the River Light. Following the Truro road from
Kapunda the bridge over the river is reached in a little more than five miles. Just
before reaching the bridge a marble quarry is situated on the left-hand side of
the road, nearly opposite the bridge. The marble is seen, in outcrop, from the
road, over a width of 50 yards to the face of the quarry. Dip E. at 65°. At
three-quarters of a mile along the road from the above-named bridge, another
quarry in the marble occurs showing a dip N.E. at 43°. The two exposures men-
tioned form part of the “marble range” which extends in a 5.S.E. strike through
the greater part of the Hundred of Belvidere, and includes the quarry from which
the stone was obtained for the building of the new Parliament House in Adelaide.
It is clear from the associated rocks in the section (sce fig. 5) from ‘Varlee’
through Hawker’s Creek and Kapunda, that the marble range, usually called the
“Kapunda marble,” represents the Brighton Limestone horizon. It is interesting
to note that the limestone which at Brighton is dark coloured and only slightly
altered, in the Belvidere region, in a more easterly direction, the same limestone
has undergone a crystalline metamorphism and converted to a marble.

343

NEAR FORDS ON THE RIVER LIGHT.
(Observations made July 24, 1908.)

The older tillite is not seen to the northward of Adelaide until exposed in a
railway cutting near Fords, a small railway station on the Kapunda-Morgan
branch line, which diverges from the main north line at Roseworthy. Fords is
situated 44 miles from Adelaide and is 706 feet above sea level.

The beds, after being cut off by an east-west fault in the Viaduct Gully (see
ante, p. 335), are thrown down to the great rift valley of the gulf and obscured
by a great thickness of newer sediments. The ranges on the eastern side of the
rift-valley, taking in the Gawler escarpment, are composed of slatcs, quartzites,
and impure limestones, which belong to a lower horizon than the tillite, and the
latter, with the exception of the small exposures at Springbank, only reappears
near Fords, as stated above.

Beps UNDERLYING THE TILLITE aT Forps.

First Cutting-—Following the railway from Fords station, in a north-easterly
direction, the first railway cutting is met with at a distance of 20 chains. The
rock in the cutting is a fine-grained mica schist; or, in part, a clay slate. Most
of the rock is penetrated by decayed acicular crystals which show on the surface
of the stone and are indicated by slight cavities stained yellowish-red in the body
of the stone. Some of the crystals (which are occasionally preserved) are dark
coloured and longitudinally fibrous, suggesting actinolite. In part, the shales are
spotted, and, in one place, a much decomposed knotted schist, in a bed 7 feet wide,
shows a remarkable surface of “knots” in relief, which are also weathered out
in great numbers as free bodies. The dip varies, The beds roll, in places, as
isoclinal folds. The average dip is W. 20° N, at 55°.

Limestone is seen in two outcrops (apparently repeated). One of these
crosses the railway a little to the eastward of the first cutting, It occurs as
low exposures in fallowed ground en the northern side of the railway, where it
appeared to be about 26 yards in surface diameter. It crosses the railway to the
southern side, and on account of its stony nature has been left as unploughed
patches in the cultivated field. Very large stones from the outcrop have been
brought from the land to the fence. General strike, about cast and west.

The other limestone outcrop is seen on the rise, to the southward of the one
just described, and also to the southward of the railway, from which it is distant
about a quarter of a mile, in ploughed ground (Section 397, Hd. of Light). It
occupies two large circular spaces that have been left unploughed, The western
space, about 60 yards in diameter, is occupied by an impure dolomitic limestone,
that shows characteristic weathering; while the eastern one, which is the larger
of the two, is a somewhat rotten ferruginous rock, General strike E. 20° N.
(dip N. 20° W. at 55°), The beds seem to be cut off in an easterly direction as
the ploughed ground, for a considerable distance, shows no signs of rock at the
surface. The limestone varies in colour from blue to yellow, brown, and, at times,
marble-like. It is an interesting bed, having undergone considerable meta-
morphism. Mica is generally distributed throughout, while a special feature of
the various kinds of limestone, and also the ferruginous rock, is the large number
of conspicuous crystals that they carry, which are in strong relief on weathered
surfaces. The crystals are in the form of prisms, approximately square in trans-
verse section, varying in size, with an average length of 30 mm. and a diameter of
5mm. The surfaces of the prisms are rough through the deposit of quartz grains.
The interiors appear to include both mica and free quartz in varying proportions.
Mr. W. S. Chapman, of the Assay Department of the School of Mines, has kindly

344

supplied the following analysis:—SiO., 62°5; Al,O,, 27°6; Fe,O,, a little; CaO,
1-6; MgO, a little; Na,O and K,O, present=91°7, The form of the crystals is
suggestive of Andalusite, but the analysis shows too high a percentage of silica
for this mineral. It is probable that Andalusite was formed, in the first instance,
and was subjected, later, to metasomatic reconstruction; in some cases, forming
pseudomorphs after Andalusite. The limestone can be correlated with the “Blue-
mictal” limestone, of the Adelaide Scrics, a bed that occurs in the Upper Phyliites,
and is inferior in position to the Glen Osmond quartzite.

Second Railway Cuttig—Half a mile further on than the first cutting from
Fords railway station a second cutting cccurs in laminated, decomposed slates.
At the first (or western) end of the cutting there is a bed of very fine-grained,
light-coloured sandstone in which there are numerous perfectly parallel dark lines,
probably of slate, that show in strong contrast to the lighter portions. The dip is
N, 20° E. at 50°. The main part of the cutting consists of dark blue, to black,
rotten shales. ‘The dip is similar to that at the western end, but is almost
obliterated by crush and intense jointing. ‘hin lines of iron oxide and calcite
run in all directions. A few quartz veins, up to a foot ar more in thickness, inter-
sect the beds.

Third Railway Cutting—This shows a continuation of the slates. The
excavation is at the 45-mile post from Adelaide.

Fourth Railway Cutting—This cutting is in Glen Osmond-Mitcham quartzite,
The stone is a continuation of the boundary range that follows a south-casterly
direction, from “The Gap,” east of Tarlee, passes Mr. Hazel’s, at Hawker’s Creek,
and curves round to the River Light, which it crosscs at the point where the
boundaries of the Hundreds of Light, Kapunda, and Belvidere meet. The rock
makes a strong precipitous face on the northern side of the Light, where it has
a dip N.E. at 80°, and is about 150 feet in thickness. In the railway cutting the
quartzite is faulted and reduced in thickness. Overlying the quartzite are
laminated shales which, with some stronger beds, continue for about one-third of
a mile. The quartzite range loses much of its prominence after crossing the
Light, and is known as the Gap Hills. In passing into the Ilundred of Belvidere,
Section 536, the ridge is more marked and has several small quarries. Dip N.E.
at 45°.

THe TIeite.

Fifth Ratlway Cutiing—Following the laminated shales (or slates) are the
glacial beds, in superior order. The latter make a strong feature in the northern
bank of the river and they occupy a similar stratigraphical position to the main
quartzite ridge as occurs further to the northward at Hazel’s, and on the Tarlee-
Kapunda road. The beds cross the railway at the fifth cutting, in which is the
454-mile post. The glacial features are mostly either fine-grained tillite or
quartzites. Lrratics are relatively scarce and occur mostly in groups, and are
most plentiful near the lower part of the tillite. One granite erratic, in No. 5 eut-
ting, measures 3 feet. The tillite, which is about half a mile in extent, continues
through the next cutting.

Sixth Railway Cutting occurs at the 453-mile post. In this section the beds
consist mostly of a coarse, friable grit, varying to a dark-coloured clay with
stones. ‘Towards the far, or eastern, end of the cutting, the beds show remark-
able contortions in a series of sharp folds and minor puckerings rendered con-
spicuous by their dark outlines. On the top of this section is a coarse gravel bed
containing large stones in sand in a position 100 feet above the present level of
the River Light. The tillite passes up into laminated shales of the Tapley’s Hill
Series which are continuous to Kapunda,

345

EUDUNDA, HUNDRED OF NEALES.
(Observations made on March 30 and April 1, 1907.)

We have already described a series of outcrops of the tillite which maintain
a practically continuous strike in a $.S.E. direction from Scctions 96 and 97 on
the boundaries of the Hundreds of Gilbert and Kapunda, to Fords, on the River
Light, over a distance of seven miles in a direct line. We have now to refer to
another, and practically parallel, line of exposures in the Hundreds of Neales and
English, situated about 16 miles to the eastward of those described above and
following a similar S.S.E. strike.

The watershed that defines the boundary between the Hundreds of Julia
Creek and Neales consists of banded slates and grits which can be correlated with
the Tapley’s Hill beds. The tillite rises from beneath these slates and forms a
broad zone of outcrop on the western side of the Hundred of Neales and includes
within its area the travelling-stock road.

The tillite is exposed in a quarry on the hill side, in Section 131, on the north-
castern side of the township of Eudunda. The stone is a rotten, pinkish, sandy
grit, showing a strike S. 30° E. The ground mass is marked by numerous pinkish-
coloured lincs, which are often very irregular and contorted. The erratics are
mostly small, but two noted in the quarry were a foot in length; the boulders con-
sist of rotten granite, quartzite, felspathic grit, slate, etc. A strong, thick
quartzite underlies the tillite at the quarry (dip W. 30° S. at 73°), which may be
either a bed within the tillite; or, what is more likely, the subglacial quartzites
which commonly underlie the tillite.

The town of Eudunda is built on the flattish ground which has resulted from
the decomposition and waste of the soft tillite. The railway near the township
is on the junction between the tillite and the banded slates. In the first railway
cutting, on the westward side of the town, are slates with gritty bands and a few
erratics. The latter are mostly small and rather scarce, but some were seen up to
6 inches in length. It has the appearance as though the tillite passes up gradually
into the Tapley’s Hill slates. Dip S.W. at 50°.

Following in a westerly direction through the paddocks, the slates make
prominent outcrops and are sometimes calcareous, with an increasing angle of dip
up to 82°, and, in places, reaches 90°. At two and a half miles from the town,
in a south-wesierly direction, the beds change to gritty sandstones and the strike
alters ta N. 20° W. with a westerly dip.

The south-easterly road from Eudunda runs, for a short distance, by the
side of a small creek or ditch, in which the tillite, interbedded with quartzites
and slates, is seen, and has a width across the strike that can be traced for several
hundred yards. Vollowing the stock-travelling road, which runs parallel with
the range in a south-easterly direction, the tillite was found to skirt the hill, form-
ing the foot-hills of the range, and extending across the wide road as far as Foote’s
Creek, and the Stock Reserve on this creek. Here the hills change their direction,
somewhat, with a westerly twist, and the tillite takes on a due south strike cutting
the road which runs to the top of the range in a north-north-west direction, past
Narcoota, on the southern boundary of the Ilundred and the homestead of Mr.
FE. S. Smith, of Tablelands.

At Mr. Smith’s the tillite gives place to the quartzite, which makes bold ridges
and pinnacles, showing a dip, easterly, at 55°. A little further up the road the
tillite puts on again, on the rise of the hill. Numerous granite and quartzite
erratics are included in the bed on the road up to about the summit of the hill on
the line of division between the Hundreds of Neales and Julia Creek. This

346

repetition of the tillite arises either from a strike fault, or otherwise from an anti-
clinal curve which brings up the underlying quartzite into the axis of the fold and
has been uncovered by denudation. On the western side, the Tapley’s Hill slates
occur in regular order.

The range, in which the tillite and associated underlying quartzite form a
ridge, runs parallel with the Murray flats, but there is another broken range,
nearer the flats, about six miles to the eastward of the former, but this was not
visited by the author.

ROBERTSTOWN AND POINT PASS IN THE HUNDRED
OF ENGLISH.

(Observations made in May, 1913.)

The physiographical and geological features that occur in the Hundred of
Neales ate continued through the adjoining Hundred of English on its northern
side. The boundary range, with its tillite, on the western side of Neales, is con-
tinued as the dividing range between the Hundreds of English and Julia Creek,
with similar geological features.

ROBERTSTOWN.

The village is situated on a plain with ranges of hills on either side that have
an approximately north and south direction. The valley consists of cultivated
land with a little surface limestone. The hills on the western side rise about
300 feet above the level of the plain and have the characteristics of a broken and
incised petieplain. It is a distance of four miles from Robertstown to the top of
the scarp which has a sharply-defined edge (see fig. 6).

The upper part of the scarp consists of a banded slate that is more indurated
than that at ‘T'aplcy’s Hill and the bands are narrower. The beds make a strong
outcrop at the upper and steepest part of the scarp and have a strike N. 20° W.
At a point opposite the road the strike is due N., but soon returns to normal. The
dip is high, probably between 60° and 70°.

Underlying the banded slates is a thick development of the tillite. The ground
mass is a variable, granular, to bluish slaty rock, and, in places, takes the form
of a coarse grit. Thin bands of dolomitic limestone occur in it, as also three thin
quartzite beds which make prominent ridges in the tillite (fig. 6). It carries less
detrital constituents than most localities and relatively fewer erratics. The best
examples are found scattered over the slopes on cultivated land, or where they have
been gathered off the ground by the farmer and carted to the fence. The erratics
vary in size, so far as seen, up to 14 feet in length. Of these, the hard siliceous
quartzites are the most common and reach the size named. Several varieties of
granitoid rocks were noted, including granulite, aplite, and gneiss. A coarse
grained augen gneiss measured 15 inches in all directions. Several erratics of a
white or cream-coloured marble were seen in the face of the rock that had been
much reduced in size by weathering and rested in sockets. No scratched stones
were noticed, but this can be explained for the reasons that the granites were
more or less in a state of decomposition, while the hard quartzites were covered
by a sericitic or chloritic skin, induced by crush and metamorphic action,

At a few hundred yards from where the tillite becomes obscured by soil, a
low hill of quartzite rises in the cultivated paddock, which probably represents the
subglacial quartzites as seen in other localities.

347

Eastern Sipe or ROBERTSTOWN.

At a distance of one and a half miles to the eastward of Robertstown, and
five miles from the western range, is another parallel range of hills of about the
same height. Unlike the former the hills make no scarp, but have rounded out-
lines in subdued relief; and their geological structure shows that they are a
repetition of the eastern range, in the form of a faulted block, with a downthrow
to the east. The exact position of the fault cannot be determined on account
of the alluvial cover of the plain.

Following the eastward road from Robertstown, for about half a mile,
banded shales show in small cuttings and on the road with much surface traver-
tine which obscures most of the underlying rocks. At the first rise in the road
the tillite begins to show itself in the cultivated fields, on the road, and in heaps
brought to the fence by the farmers. In nearing the top of the rise the paddocks
are literally covered with the fragments, which are mostly flat from the breaking
down of the tillite along its cleavage planes. On the eastern side of the range
the tillite outcrops in numerous small ridges, with scores of large heaps
of stones which the farmers have gathered from the land, and there are still so
many left on the ground as to make cultivation almost impossible. The included
erratics are similar to those seen on the western range, nutnerous quartzites occur,
up to 18 inches in diameter, together with a few granites and limestones. One
or two feebly-scratched boulders were obtained; many of the quartzites showed
pressure striae.

The tilltte on this side of the valley is very typical, much more so than on
the western side. It has apparently an east and west strike, which must be local,
and may account for its apparent great width, which is fully three-quarters of a
mile, occupying the whole of Section 216, and more. The strike of the cleavage
is 35° IE. of S. at 90°-80° westerly. It occupies the eastern slope of the range
down to the Murray Plains.

POINT PASS.

The township of Point Pass, unlike that of Robertstown, is situated immedi-
ately at the base of the scarped range that runs from Eudunda to beyond
Robertstown, in a northerly direction, the distance between the two townships,
in a straight line, being six miles. ‘l‘here is also an eastern range of hills opposite
Point Pass, as at Robertstown, but while the latter is on the eastern side of the
intervening plain, Point Pass is on the western side. At Point Pass the width
of the plain, on the flat, is three miles, or four miles between the respective heights.

At Point Pass the scarp face is more broken by denudation with longer slopes
which permit wheeled traffic to reach the edge of the plateau in a rise of, say,
500 feet in about a mile. No such road is possible at Robertstown.

The drainage has not yet cut back through the scarp sufficiently far to capture
the streams of the plateau, and, in consequence, the drainage is in a very juvenile
stage. Numerous mountain torrents come down the face in heavy rains. These
are consequent streams following the uplift—or perhaps, taking into consideration
the downthrow of the eastern range, the sinking down of the plain on the eastward
side. The absence of any transverse (subsequent) streams to carry the waters
off by a north and south drainage is remarkable—there is not even a gutter in
that direction. The streams from the hills, which are very numerous, debouch
on the plain, which is almost wholly under cultivation, and have a tendency to go
southwards before absorption. ‘he drainage of the plain (what there is of it)
comes in from the north of Robertstown, passes over a broad flat on the western
side of the township, and forms a series of temporary “lagoons” on its way to

348

Point Pass, which it passes on its eastern side, and is. lost in the neighbourhood
of Mount Eba. Small ridges divide the stream and by extcnsive spreading pro-
duce only slight damage to the ploughed land.

The geology of the neighbourhood is much like that of Robertstown. At the
foot of the hills, in the creek that comes down from the hills close to the township,
a slight exposure of the tillite occurs. The beds are, approximately, vertical, and
exhibit, in places, typical sections of a gritty matrix, including small erratics, with
bands of coarse grit—even the finer portions of the ground mass show a fine
grittiness when viewed on a weathered surface.

The tillite passes up into bluish-black slate with bluish calcarco-siliccous bands
which appear to be representative of the Tapley’s Hill Series.’ At about half-way
up the hill a yellowish-white, marble-like limestone occurs, having a thickness of
about 9 feet. This can scarcely be correlated with the Brighton limestone, as it
occurs not at the top of the series, as at Brighton, but interbedded with the bluish-
coloured slates, but it may represent some of the impure limestones which underlie
the Brighton limestone. There are also a few quartzites in the series, but of no
great thickness.

The bed of the creek is choked for a considerable distance with a limestone
of secondary origin. The older impure limestones which outcrop at higher
levels in the creek have no doubt been the source from which this travertine
deposit has been derived. A travertine of the normal type covers the slopes above
the water line, but in the bed of the creek is a harder, more compact, sometimes
bluish and sometimes brownish limestone which has, in many places, cemented the
stones of the creek into a hard calcareous conglomerate. The limestone often
carries cavities much like the limestones built up around the mound springs of the
Lake Fyre region.

Tire RANGE ON THE Eastern sine or Pornt Pass,

The hills on the eastern side of the plain, opposite Point Pass, are similar to
those to the eastward of Robertstown, except from the special feature that they
include a bold quartzite ridge which rises to a height of about 150 feet above the
plain. Most of the plain, going eastward, is essentially a flood plain, having been
built up by the flood waters referred to above, with much travertine in layers and
nodular concretions.

The first rise on the eastern side takes the form of a low rounded ridge, no
rocks are seen in situ, but the fields are covered with loose stones of quartzite.

In a second rise, which forms the slope to the main ridge, and within half a
mile of the steep ascent, tillite becomes abundant as scattered flat pieces on ihe
cultivated land and, with the associated travertine limestone, has been carted to
the edge of the fields, or placed in heaps near the farmhouse situated at the base
of the ridge.

Following the path that goes up by the farmstead to the top of the ridge, the
tillite is seen in outcrop at the base and for two-thirds of the distance up, where
it is displaced by a quartzite. Over the crest of the hill is a steep gully with
another quartzite ridge parallel with the first. In between the ridges the tillite
is again seen, its inferior hardness having led to the excavation of the gorge, The
uillite does not make any prominent features on this side, but is distinguishable
in exposures seen level with the ground as well as in the bed of a small creek
where the cleavage has a strike of about north-west with a dip of about 5° westerly.

The quartzites which are answerable for the special prominence of the hill
(or, rather, hills, as the ridge consists of several heights more or less isolated) are
very irregular in their thickness and strike. On the first ridge ascended the strike

Trans. and Proc, Roy, Sue, S. Nustr., 1927 Vol Lib, Vlate ATTY.

" ate
ae eet eo
te the ..
oP 3
at ‘
ee Os
Bee
a
Fa *

Rock Face of Sturtian Tillite near Eden Railway Station

Photo. Wo T.

Gillmyghbam & Cos Tamited, Printers, Adelarde

Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927.

Vol. LL, Plate XY.

Photo.

W-

Fig. 1.

Outcrop

Fig. 2.

H.

different part of the field.

As above, but taken from a

Gillingham & Co, Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

349

was a few degrees west of north. These hard beds are cut off very suddenly
on their southern side, the ridge being abruptly truncated where the road passes
their southern ends and they do not appear again in the direction of the strike.
The older rocks of the district are at a very high angle, practically vertical, as the
dip varies slightly either to the east or west of the vertical.

No time was available to examine the ground on the eastern side of the range.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XIV. anp XV.

Piate XIV.

Portion of rock-face of Sturtian Tillite at small waterfall near
Eden Railway Station.

PLaTe XV.
Fig. 1. Prominent exposures of Sturtian Tillite, near Ross’ Creek,
between Tarlee and Kapunda.

Fig. 2. Prominent exposures of Sturtian Tillitc, near Ross’ Creek, in a position
slightly removed from those shown in fig. 1.

350

REVISION OF THE AUSTRALIAN ELATERIDAE.

COLEOPTERA.—Part II.

By Avert H. Exston, F.E.S.
[Read October 13, 1927.]

Lacon fergusoni, n. sp.

Elongate; slightly convex; moderately nitid; brown with reddish or
ferruginous patches; antennae, posterior angles of pronotum, gula, parts of
episternum, epipleurae and legs ferruginous; not densely clothed with small
testaceous squamose hairs, more densely arranged on abdomen than else-
where. Under surface of a more uniform brown, except parts mentioned
above, and not having the mottled appearance of the upper surface. Head
almost circular with the base more or less straight, with two median foveae,
one interocular and the other just above the insertion of the antennae; with
dense, round, somewhat deep punctures, which are more or less concealed by
the clothing. Pronotum slightly wider than long, base triemarginate, sides
from near base to the anterior fourth almost straight and parallel and then
abruptly, roundly contracted to the anterior margin, barely perceptibly
sinuate in front of the posterior angles, which are almost rectangular with the
apices slightly obliquely truncated, and with a small protuberance inside each
angle, anterior angles acute with a fecble longitudinal depression inside of
each near the apex, the longitudinal furrow only just discernible on the basal
half; with dense, round, moderately deep punctures, in parts concealed by the
clothing. Scutellum pentangular, the basal angle obtuse. Elytra as wide as
pronotum at the base and about twice as long, sides almost straight and
parallel from the base to near the middle then gradually roundly contracted
to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae moderately large, deep and
almost rectangular, the interstices flat and with dense punctures only slightly
smaller than those in striae. Prosternum with moderately-deep, well-defined,
metasternum with shallow tarsal depressions. Length, 8-10 mm.; width,
3-4 mm.

Queensland: Bowen (A. Simson) ; Townsville (E. W. Ferguson). Type,
in author’s collection.

At first glance somewhat resembling L. marmoratus, Cand., but is less
convex, the punctures of pronotum smaller and more crowded, the striae on
the elytra less distinct and the punctures of the interstices larger; it differs
from L. variegatus, Schwarz, by having the posterior angles of the pronotum
more rectangular and the punctures on the elytral striae larger; and from
L, plagiatus, Cand., by being proportionately broader and flatter and with the
punctures of the elytral interstices larger.

Lacon badius, n. sp.

Moderately thick; convex; subnitid; pale to dark castaneous, the head,
anterior and posterior margins of pronotum and sides of scutellum dark
brown; moderately densely clothed with short, depressed, golden hairs.
Under surface same colour as upper and clothed similarly. Head with the
surface almost flat except for a barely visible depression near the top, rather
densely covered with moderately large deep punctures. Pronotum about as
long as wide, moderately strongly convex, with a shallow, median, longi-
tudinal furrow extending upwards from the base to quite two-thirds of the

351

length of prouotum; sides crenulate, roundly contracted on the anterior third
and then almost straight to near base, which is only very slightly sinuate,
posterior angles strong and somewhat divergent, apex rounded, with a small
tubercle in the middle which gives the angles a pointed appearance, inside of
the apex of each is a small elongate protuberance which makes the angles
look as if they are bluntly carinate; closely covered with rather large, deep,
round punctures. Scutellum vaguely pentagonal, the base being almost round
rather than obtusely angled. Elytra as wide as pronotum and about twice as
long, sides almost straight and parallel to just beyond the middle then
gradually roundly contracted to apex, narrowly flattened on basal half near
the suture; punctate-striatc, the punctures in striae moderately large and
deep, not crowded, the interstices flat and minutely punctured, Prosternum
with deep, sharply-defined tarsal depressions, metasternum very vaguely
impressed. Length, 8°5-10°5 mm.; width, 3-4 mm.

South Australia: Ooldea, Tarcoola (A. M. Lea). Type, in South Aus-
tralian Museum.

A rather distinct species and readily distinguished by its colour and
peculiarly constructed posterior angles of pronotum. At first glance it some-
what resembles L. arbitrarius, Elston, from which it can be easily separated
by the shape of the posterior angles of pronotum; in the present species they
are rounded at the apex, whilst in arbitrarius they are distinctly elongated and
acutely pointed; also, in the latter species, the tarsal furrows on the pros-
ternum are very shallow, not sharply defined.

Lacon cruentatus, n. sp.

Not thick; almost flat; nitid; black, with scattered small red blotches,
antennae, mouth parts and legs testaceous; moderately densely clothed with
short, depressed, griseous-yellow, squamose hairs, Under surface brown,
more densely clothed than the upper, and with similar clothing. Head with
surface even except for a very shallow depression midway between the inser-
tion of antennae, densely covered with small punctures which are concealed
by the clothing, Pronotum slightly longer than wide, lightly convex, without
longitudinal median furrow, sides roundly contracted on the anterior third
and then straight and parallel to near posterior angles, which are almost
right angular and with a small shining tubercle on the inside of each angle,
sides in front of the posterior angles very lightly sinuate, basal margin very
nearly straight, only almost imperceptibly emarginate; densely punctured,
the punctures moderately small and rather deep. Scutellum pentagonal, basal
angle obtuse. Flytra as wide as prothorax and about twice its length, sides
nearly straight and parallel to just beyond the middle and then roundly con-
tracted to apex, lightly convex and slightly flattened in middle near suture;
punctate-striate, the punctures in striae large, round and deep, interstices
flat and with dense punctures only slightly smaller than those in striue.
Prosternum with well-defined tarsal impressions, those on the metasternum
almost obsolete. Length, 5-6°5 mm.; width, 2-2°5 mm.

South Australia: Lake Callabonna (A. Zietz), Oodnadatta. Type, in
South Australian Museum.

A distinct species owing to the dark body with pale legs, the scattered
blood-red blotches are mostly confined to the elytra. [ts nearest ally is
L. pictipennis, Cand., from which it can be distinguished by its darker ground
colour, more nitid, the individual squamose hairs much finer, without a longi-
tudinal median furrow on the prothorax, and head without interocular depres-
sions. A more nitid species than L. guttatus, Cand., with a darker ground
colour and punctures of elytral interstices larger.

352

Lacon stigmosus, n. sp.

Moderately thick; opaque; dark brown, antennae (except basal joint
which is more or less reddish) and palpi testaceous, legs and gula reddish;
rather densely clothed with brown and griseous squamose hairs, the latter
appearing in patches and giving the upper surface a mottled appearance.
Under surface dark brown in parts diluted with red; densely (on the abdomen
more densely) and uniformly clothed with griseous squamose hairs. Head
with triangular impression in the middle, base of which lies between the inser-
tion of antennae, also a faint longitudinal one extending from the apex of the
latter to the vertex of head; with dense, rather deep punctures which are more
or less concealed by the clothing. Pronotum about as wide as long,
moderately and evenly convex, with a short, barely visible, longitudinal
furrow in the middle, sides roundly contracted on the anterior third and then
almost straight and parallel to the base, lateral margins almost imperceptibly
sinuate in front of the posterior angles which are almost rectangular and not
truncated at apex, with two large, round, somewhat shallow foveae at the
base, situated one on each side of the longitudinal furrow; with dense,
moderately large, round, deep punctures which are in parts concealed by the
clothing. Scutellum pentagonal, slightly concave and acuminate behind.
Elytra as wide as prothorax and about twice its length, except for a very
slight dilation in front of the middle, the sides are almost straight and parallel
to beyond the middle then roundly and evenly contracted to apex, lightly and
evenly convex, at base abruptly and obliquely sloping; punctate-striate, the
punctures in striae moderately large, round and deep, the interstices flat with
much smaller punctures. Prosternum with curved, deep, sharply cefined
tarsal furrows, those on metasternum very shallow and barely visible.
Length, 10-11°5 mm.; width, 3:5-4-25 mm.

North-west Australia: Derby. North Queensland: Normanton (R.
Kemp). Type, in South Australian Museum.

This is one of the mottled species, on some of the specimens the posterior
angles of the prothorax are diluted with red and the parts of the elytra covered
with the pale hairs are in some cases more or less reddish; the colour of the
under surface varies, on some examples the dark brown colour pre-
dominates here and there diluted with red, whereas on others the whole of
the under surface is a reddish-brown. This species comes nearest to
L. plagiatus, Cand., from which it is easily distinguished by its denser cloth-
ing, more robust form, pronotum more evenly arched and not transversely
ridged posteriorly and punctures in the striae of elytra much larger in pro-
portion to those on the interstices.

LACON LATERALIS, Schwarz.

The author in his description of this species gave the habitat as Aus-
tralia; I have before me four examples from North Queensland which may
be regarded as the above species. The male is much smaller than the female;
with the antennae reaching to the base of the prothorax, the latter appears to
be more elongate and it also has the sinuation in front of its posterior angles
more pronounced than that oi the female.

Lacon semivestitus, n. sp.

Elongate; not thick; subopaque; dark brown with antennae, mouth parts
and legs more or less ferruginous; upper surface not densely clothed, with
minute tawny, squamose hairs. Under surface a reddish-brown and clothed
similarly to the upper surface. Head with the surface widely depressed, the
lateral margins appearing to be bent upwards; closely, deeply and somewhat

353

rugosely punctured. Pronotum slightly longer than wide, lightly convex, the
longitudinal median furrow extending from near the base to the apex, along
the lateral margins rather widely flattened, from just in front of the posterior
angles the sides gradually curve outwards to the anterior third and then rather
abruptly contracted to the apex of anterior angles which are subacute and
rounded at apex, the posterior angles are slightly divergent and produced
backwards with their apices minutely obliquely truncated, and with a more
or less distinct lateral carina extending a short distance upwards; with large,
moderately deep, closely placed, subreticulate punctures. Scutellum pent-
agonal, almost flat, dilated posteriorly and obtusely angled. Elytra slightly
wider than across posterior angles of pronotum and a little more than twice
its length, widely flattened on top, sides from base gradually, almost imper-
ceptibly, dilated to beyond the middle and then gradually, evenly and roundly
contracted to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae large and deep,
the interstices narrow and minutely punctured, the alternate ones distinctly
elevated. Pro- and metasternum without tarsal furrows. Length, 12-5-
15-5 mim.; width, 3:5-4°5 mm.

North-west Australia: Wyndham (W. Crawshaw). North Queensland :
Townsville (G. F. Hill). Groote Eylandt (N. Tindale). Type, in author’s
collection,

A rather distinct species, the narrowest part of the pronotum is just in
front of its posterior angles; the bottoms of the elytral punctures when viewed
in a bright light are a vivid red; the prosternum on some specimens is very
widely and very faintly impressed, but these barely visible impressions could
not be regarded as tarsal furrows, This species cannot be easily associated
with any other member of its group.

Lacon conspiciendus, n. Sp.

Moderately thick; subopaque; dark brown with here and there reddish
patches, antennae (except basal joint which is infuscated) and legs reddish;
rather densely clothed with short, dark and pale squamose hairs, the latter
mostly confined to the reddish patches which gives the insect a mottled
appearance, Under surface brown with the gula and epipleurae more or less
reddish; moderately densely clothed with small, depressed, golden squamose
hairs. Head lightly impressed and densely covered with moderately large.
deep, rugose punctures. Pronotum wider than long, transversely gibbose
behind the middle, with a short longitudinal furrow more or less distinctly
dividing the gibbosity, sides from in front of the posterior angles almost
straight and parallel to the anterior third and then abruptly, very nearly
rectilinearly, contracted to apices of anterior angles which are acute and
faintly impressed on the inside, lateral margins crenate and when viewed from
the side with a feeble carina extending almost the whole length, lightly
sinuate in front of the posterior angles which are very slightly divergent and
very widely and obliquely truncated; with dense, round, rather deep punctures
more or less concealed by the clothing. Scutellum pentagonal, slightly con-
cave; with shallow, rugose punctures. Elytra a very little wider than base of
prothorax and only slightly more than twice the length of the latter, evenly
convex and sloping obliquely at the base, sides feebly dilated near the middle
and on the posterior third gradually and evenly contracted to apex; punctate-
striate, the punctures in striae moderately large and deep and closely placed,
the interstices flat, closely and minutely punctured, Prosternum and
metasternum with shallow tarsal depressions, those on the former more
distinct than those on the latter, Length, 7-8:5 min.; width, 2°5-3 mm,

L

354

Queensland: Brisbane. North-west Australia: Kimberley district (Dr.
E. Mjoberg). Type, in South Australian Museum.

This insect is chiefly conspicuous by the wide and oblique truncation of
the posterior angles of the prothorax, which at first glance seem to be rect-
angular, this truncation makes them appear biangular, the top angle being
obtuse and the bottom one acute, and on some specimens can be seen more
distinctly than on others a faint lateral carina. The reddish patches are mostly
confined to the elytra and the posterior angles of the prothorax are con-
sistently of this colour; these reddish patches are much more conspicuous
when the insect is abraded; the clothing on the basal fourth of the elytra has
a granulated appearance. At first glance this species might be confused with
L. marmoratus, Cand., but can be easily distinguished, inter alia, by its much
shorter clothing, comparatively narrower form, punctures in striae less con-
spicuous under the clothing, sides of pronotum more distinctly flattened and
the scutellum more elongate.

Lacon bellator, n. sp.

Elongate; moderately thick; subopaque; dark reddish-brown with the
antennae and legs ferruginous; not densely clothed with short, depressed,
testaceous, squamose hairs. Under surface a little more diluted with red and
with clothing similar to the upper surface but slightly denser. Head with
very prominent mandibles, widely impressed and with large, deep, reticulate
punctures. Pronotum longer than wide, moderately and evenly convex with
a faintly impressed longitudinal median furrow, inside the lateral margins
narrowly flattened, sides from in front of the posterior angles gradually
dilated to in front of the middle and then roundly contracted to apices of
anterior angles which are widely and rather deeply impressed on the inside,
posterior angles small, very slightly divergent and produced backwards, acute
and with a faint lateral carina extending upwards for a short distance along
the sides of pronotum; with large, deep, not closely placed punctures. Scutel-
lum pentagonal, slightly concave, posterior angle obtuse and rounded; with
a few scattered, deep ptinctures. Elytra narrower than pronotum between
apices of posterior angles and about twice the length of the latter, lightly
convex, a narrow margin on either side of suture depressed, sides almost
straight and parallel to beyond the middle and then gradually and evenly
contracted to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae large, deep and
rectangularly elongate, interstices flat and minutely ptinctured. Prosternum
without tarsal furrows. Length, 12°5-13 mm. ; width, 4-4-25 mm.

Northern Territory (collection South Australian Museum). Type, in
South Australian Museum.

A distinct species; the pronotum has a very characteristic shape, its width
between the apices of the posterior angles is about the same as that between
the apices of its anterior angles, the clothing on the interstices of the elytra
is arranged in two more or less distinct longitudinal rows. There are very
faint depressions on the prosternum which are really rudimentary forms of
tarsal furrows, these, however, 1 am not regarding as such, for this form
undoubtedly belongs to, or at least is so closely associated with the group that
has no tarsal furrows that, for the purpose of tabulation, I think it desirable
to group them altogether. In general appearance the present species some-
what resembles L. palpalis, Cand., but can be easily distinguished by its
scantier clothing, sides of pronotum not so widely depressed and its punctures
smaller and not so closely placed, the posterior angles of pronotum smaller
and not so divergent and the punctures on the interstices of the elytra much
smaller.

355

Lacon praelongus, n. sp.

Elongate; not thick; subopaque; brown with the antennae, posterior
angles of pronotum and legs ferruginous; moderately densely clothed with
very short, griseous-yellow squamose hairs which are arranged in double rows
on the elytra. Under surface of a more reddish brown than upper surface
and similarly clothed. Head with a very large, not deep, triangular depres-
sion and densely covered with small, almost reticulate, punctures. Pronotum
as wide as long, very lightly convex; the shallow, longitudinal median furrow
only distinct behind the middle, the lateral margins slightly crenulate and
straight and parallel from near the hase to the anterior fourth and then
abruptly, almost rectilinearly contracted to apices of anterior angles which
are acute and strongly depressed on the inside, the sides are barely sinuate in
front of the posterior angles which are small, very slightly produced back-
wards, acute and lightly depressed on the inside: with dense, reticulate
punctures, larger than those on the head. Scutellum elongate, pentagonal,
truncate in front and obtusely angled behind. with moderately dense, rugose
punctures. Elytra very slightly wider than across posterior angles of pro-
notum and nearly thrice the length of the latter, flattened in the middle, sides
almost straight and parallel from near the base to the posterior third and then
gradually roundly contracted to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae
rather deep and larger than those on pronotum, the interstices narrow, denscly
and minutely punctured, the alternate ones not at all elevated. Prosternum
and metasternum without tarsal furrows. Length, 10°5-11-5 mm.: width,
3-3°5 mm.

Queensland: Cunnamulla (H. Hardcastle), Type, in South Australian
Museum.

A very elongate and distinct species; owing to the large depression the
head appears concave; the pronotum seems to be longer than wide, although
by measurement it is only as long as wide, on one specimen, presumably a
female, the pronotum is slightly more convex which gives it a more quadratic
appearance.

This species comes nearest to L. variabilis, Cand., from which it is dis-
tinguished by being much more elongate and narrower in proportion, sides
of pronotum not so widely depressed and only barely perceptibly sinuate in
front of the posterior angles which are much smaller, slightly produced back-
wards and acute; the punctures on the elytra are smaller, the interstices flat
and the alternate ones not at all elevated. It differs from the description of
L. monachus, Cand., by being more elongate, more or less depressed, the pro-
notum not wider than long and not tri-impressed and the alternate elytral
interstices not elevated. It is distinguished from L. parallelus, Cand., with
which it might be confused owing to the similar elongate appearance, chiefly
by the shape of the pronotum and the sides of the prosternum not at all
impressed for tarsal furrows, less convex and the punctures in the elytral
striae much larger.

Lacon farinosus, n. sp.

Moderately convex; slightly nitid; dark brown, in parts diluted with red,
antennae testaceous, posterior angles of pronotum, base of elytra, scutellum
and legs more or less reddish; not densely clothed with small, depressed,
cineraceous, squamose hairs. Under surface same colour as upper, except
epipleurae of elytra which are reddish, and similarly clothed. Head with a
rather large, triangular, shallow depression near the middle; with densely
arranged, deep, almost reticulate punctures. Pronotum barely longer than
wide, evenly and lightly convex, abruptly sloping backwards on the posterior
fourth; with a shallow, median, longitudinal furrow extending nearly the

356

whole length, more distinct posteriorly; lateral margins from in front of the
posterior angles almost imperceptibly rounded to the anterior third, then
curvilinearly contracted (not strongly) to the apices of anterior angles which
are acutte and rounded; posterior angles acute, very slightly divergent and
produced backwards beyond the humeral angles of elytra, depressed on the
inside, with a strong carina inside the lateral margins and extending upwards
nearly to the middle of the pronotum; with densely arranged, large, deep,
reticulate punctures. Scutellum pentagonal, lateral margins lightly con-
stricted near the middle, posterior angles very obtusely pointed, almost
rounded, with a few large, round punctures. Elytra at base narrower than
across posterior angles of pronotum and about twice the length of the latter,
lightly convex and slightly flattened near the suture, sides barely perceptibly
dilated near the middle then roundly contracted to apex; punctate-striate, the
punctures in striae moderately large and deep, interstices flat with incon-
spicuous, minute, shallow punctures except on the basal third where they are
larger and deeper and give this part of the elytra a granulated appearance.
Prosternum and metasternum without tarsal furrows. Length, 10-11 mm.;
width, 3-5-4 mm.

Northern Territory: Port Darwin (W. K. Hunt). Type, in South Aus-
tralian Museum.

This species should be easily distinguished by the shape of the pronotum,
the posterior angles of which extend backwards beyond the humeral angles
of the clytra; near the suture and base of elytra the dark brown ground colour
is strongly diluted with red and the posterior angles of pronotum and
scutellum are a more or less bright red with the margins of each infuscated.
One specimen is a much lighter brown than the type but this may be due to
immaturity. The present species comes nearest to L. gibbosus, Schwarz, but
can be readily distinguished by its more clongate form, considerably thinner,
not so convex and the posterior angles of pronotum more elongated.

Lacon subcompactus, n. sp.

Short; moderately thick; convex; dark brown in parts more or less
strongly diluted with red, antennae, lateral margins of pronotum and of
elytra, the posterior angles of the former and legs ferruginous; moderately
densely clothed with extremely small, golden, squamose hairs. Under
surface same colour as upper and similarly clothed. Head with two oblique
depressions and a basal one; with rather dense, round and deep punctures,
Pronotum distinctly wider than long, strongly convex but not transversely
gibbose behind the middle, with an indistinct longitudinal furrow only visible
on the posterior half, sides almost straight and parallel from the base to near
the middle then gradually, feebly, roundly contracted to apices of anterior
angles which are rounded at their extremities, sides not sinuate in front of the
posterior angles, the latter almost rectangular, rather strongly depressed on
the inside and with a more or less distinct lateral carina only extending a
short way upwards beyond the angles; closely covered with moderately large,
round, deep almost reticulate punctures. Scutellum vaguely pentagonal and
almost rounded posteriorly; with small, scattered punctures. Elytra as wide
as pronotum and less than twice the length of the latter, the top near the
suture and a narrow margin at the sides flattened, sides almost straight and
parallel from the hase to beyond the middle then abruptly, roundly contracted
to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae not larger than those on
prothorax, the interstices flat, the alternate ones elevated and with small,
closely placed punctures having a granular appearance, particularly on the

357

basal half. Prosternum only with shallow tarsal furrows extending to the
sides. Length, 9°5 mm.; width, 3-75 mm.

New South Wales: Glen Innes (C. Deane). Type, in author’s collection.

A relatively wide species and conspicuous by the almost quadratic shape
of its pronotum ; the two oblique and the basal depressions on the head form a
more or less distinct triangle, the apex of which does not quite reach the
vertex of the head, and giving the appearance of having an almost round pro-
tuberance near the middle of the head. This species closely resembles the
brief description given of L. compactus, Cand., but can be distinguished from
that species by having the sides of the pronotum carinate and not at all
crenulate. Up to the present I have not seen a specimen of the above species
named by Candeze who, in his description wrote (referring to the pronotum)
“Tateribus crenulato” and again emphasizing this characteristic by writing in
his comparative notes, “son prothorax fortement crénelé.”

Lacon hackeri, n. sp.

Elongate; moderately thick; subopaque; dark brown diluted with red,
antennae and legs a reddish-brown; rather densely clothed with short,
griseous-yellow, squamose hairs. Under surface same colour as upper (except
epipleurae of elytra which are reddish) and similarly clothed. Head with a
large, shallow, triangular depression in the middle and two smaller ones near
the top; densely covered with round, deep punctures. Pronotum about as long
as wide, moderately strongly convex, posterior third gently sloping back-
wards, with a shallow, longitudinal, median furrow and two small round
depres sions on the posterior fourth, situated one on each side of the median
line and midway between the latter and the lateral margin, sides rounded near
the middle and on the anterior third roundly contracted to the apices of
anterior angles (which are rounded at their extremities) and rather strongly
sinuate in front of the posterior angles, the latter are lightly divergent, very
widely and obliqttely truncated and with a faintly marked carina inside the
lateral margin; densely covered with rather large, round, deep punctures.
Scutellum pentagonal, the posterior half much wider than the anterior, the
posterior angle very obtuse and almost rounded; densely covered with
moderately large, deep, subrugose punctures. Elytra at base as wide as
pronotum across posterior angles and fully twice the length of the latter, sides
almost straight and parallel to beyond the middle then rather abruptly,
roundly contracted to apex, narrowly depressed in the middle near the suture;
punctate-striate, the punctures in striae moderately large, deep and almost
longitudinally rectangular, the interstices flat, densely and minutely punc-
tured. Prosternum only with shallow, but nevertheless distinct, tarsal fur-
rows. Length, 14°5-18°5 mm,; width, 4: 5-6 mm,

Queensland: Stradbroke Island (H. Hacker). New South Wales:
Sydney (A. M. Lea). Type, in Queensland Museum.

The surface of the head is very uneven, due to the large triangular
depression and the two smaller ones, which are situated one on each side of
the apex of the former; the pronotum appears to be longer than wide, but by
measurement the width is equal to the length, the former having its widest
part near the middle; the clothing on the elytra is conspicuous by being more
densely arranged on each alternate interstice of the striae. A more elongate
species than L. pleureticns, Cand., and of a duller brown, it also differs from
the latter by having the posterior angles of pronotum more divergent and
more widely, obliquely truncated, the surface of the pronotum evenly convex
and not at all gibbose, the punctures of the latter slightly smaller and denser
and the clothing, particularly on the elytra, denser and of a more squamose

358

appearance. It can be easily distinguished from L. geminatus, Cand., inter
alia, by being more elongate, a duller brown, less nitid, the posterior angles of
pronotum larger and more divergent, the pronotum more densely punctured,
the interstices of the elytral striae wider and not convex, the prosternum with
tarsal furrows.

Lacon castaneus, n. sp.

Elongate; convex; moderately thick; subnilid; dark castaneous with a
narrow margin at the base of elytra bright red and the margins of scutellum
infuscated; moderately densely clothed with very short, cineraceous,
squamose hairs. Under surface same colour as upper except epipleurae of
elytra which are a brighter red and moderately densely clothed with very fine
and short, cineraceous, squatnose hairs. Head with a large triangular depres-
sion and with densely arranged, deep, round punctures. Pronotum slightly
longer than wide, evenly convex, narrowly flattened at the lateral margins,
with a short, well-defined, longitudinal median furrow, sides sinuate in front
of the posterior angles and then almost straight and parallel to the anterior
third thence gradually, roundly contracted to apices of anterior angles which
are acute and rather deeply impressed on their inside; posterior angles diver-
gent and slightly produced backwards, acute, briefly truncated at the
extremities and depressed on the inside; with moderately deep, round, not
closely placed punctures. Scutellum elongate, pentagonal, concave, posterior
angle obtuse, almost rounded; with a few vague punctures. Elytra as wide
as pronotum across the posterior angles and slightly more than twice the
length of the latter, evenly convex and very slightly flattened in the middle,
sides almost straight and parallel to beyond the middle and then gradually,
roundly, contracted to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae much
crowded, moderately large, deep and almost quadratic in shape, the interstices
slightly and uniformly convex, with dense, minute punctures. Prosternum
only with very shallow, almost obsolete, tarsal depressions. Length, 13:5-
14 mm.; width, 4°5 mm.

North-west Australia: Roebuck Bay. Type, in South Australian Museum,

This species can be easily distinguished by its colour; its nearest congener
is L. rubiginosus, Cand., from which it differs in being more elongate; the
pronotum less convex, more deeply punctured and its lateral margins
straighter; the punctures in the elytral striae are more closely placed, the
interstices of same convex and more densely and deeply punctured.

Lacon multipunctatus, n. sp.

Not thick; very lightly convex, subopaque; dark brown in parts slightly
diluted with red, antennae (in parts infuscated), mouth parts and legs testa-
ceous, posterior angles of pronotum more or less reddish; moderately densely
clothed with extremely short, yellowish, squamose hairs. Under surface same
colour as upper, except epipleurae of elytra which are reddish, and similarly
clothed. Head almost flat with a large, shallow depression in the middle and
with densely arranged, very small, subrugose punctures. Pronotum barely
longer than wide, very lightly convex, with an almost obsolete, median, longi-
tudinal furrow extending the whole length, sides finely crenulate and from in
front of the posterior angles almost imperceptibly curvilinearly dilated up to
the anterior third and then roundly contracted to apices of anterior angles,
which are acute and scarcely visibly depressed on their insides, widely and
shallowly sinuate in front of the posterior angles which are slightly produced
backwards, acute, very briefly obliquely truncated at apices and lightly
depressed on their insides; with densely placed, small, round and deep
punctures. Scutellum small, quadrangular, its lateral margins concave and

359

the basal one convex; closely and rugosely punctured. Elytra at base as
wide as pronotum across its posterior angles and twice its length, widely
flattened on top, sides almost straight and parallel to beyond the middle and
then roundly contracted to apex; indistinctly punctate-striate, the punctures
in striae small, round, deep and densely placed, the interstices flat and densely
punctured. Prosternum only with shallow, indistinct tarsal depressions.
Length, 5-5-6 mm.; width, barely 2 mm.

Northern Territory: Port Darwin (W. K. Hunt). Type, in South Aus-
tralian Museum.

This species can be at once distinguished by its densely punctured upper
surface, particularly on the elytra, the striae of the latter are very indistinct
owing to the interstices having punctures quite as large and dense as those
in the former. The shape of the scutellum also makes this species conspicuous.
instead of being pentagonal, as is usual with members of this genus, it is
quadrangular.

Lacon cineraceus, n. sp.

Moderately thick; convex; opaque; dull black or dark brown with parts
of elytra slightly diluted with red, antennae and mouth parts testaccous, legs
ferruginous ; moderately densely clothed with short, griseous, squamose hairs,
more densely arranged in parts and forming patches. Under surface a dark
brown but slightly more diluted with red than the upper surface, uniformly
densely clothed with short, griseous, squamose hairs. Head almost flat with
a large, shallow, triangular depression in the middle; with densely arranged,
rather deep, subrugose punctures. Pronotum barely wider than long, lightly
convex, on the posterior third gently sloping towards base but not gibbose,
the longitudinal median furrow only just visible on the posterior half, sides
not at all sinuate in front of the posterior angles and from the latter to the
anterior third straight and parallel and then abruptly, almost rectilinearly,
contracted to apices of anterior angles which are acute and slightly rounded
at their extremitics, somewhat widely and flatly depressed inside the lateral
margins, the base very lightly sinuate, the posterior angles barely perceptibly
directed backwards, widely and obliquely truncated; with moderately large,
rather deep, densely arranged, almost reticulate punctures. Scutellum
moderately large, pentagonal, concave, obtusely angled posteriorly ; the punc-
tures more or less concealed by the clothing, Elytra as wide as the pronotum
across posterior angles and about twice its length, lightly and evenly convex,
sides almost straight and parallel from the base to beyond the middle and then
gradually, roundly contracted to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae
a little larger than those on pronotttm, round and deep, the interstices wide
and flat with densely arranged punctures, smaller than those in the striae and
more or less concealed by the clothing. Prosternum only with deep, well
defined tarsal furrows. Length, 8°5-10 mm.; width, 3-4 mm.

Queensland: Bowen (A. Simson); Normanton (R. Kemp). Type, in
South Australian Museum.

Very close to L, marmoratus, Cand., from which it can be distinguished
by its darker ground colour, the prothorax less convex and not at all gibbose
on the posterior half, the sides of same not crenulate and the punctures
slightly larger and more densely arranged; the clothing is also different, on
the present species it is much shorter and of a more squamose appearance.
It differs from L. stigmosus, Elston, chiefly by its much finer and denser
punctuation and its posterior angles of pronotum being very widely and
obliquely truncated.

360

Lacon aquilus, n. sp.

Moderately thick; convex; subopaque, dark brown with the posterior
angles of pronotum and margins of elytra diluted with red, antennae and legs
reddish; moderately densely clothed with short, griseotls, squamose hairs,
those on the pronotum shorter than on the elytra. Under surface dark brown.
in parts diluted with red and clothed with very short, griseous, squamose
hairs. Head almost flat with a shallow depression in the middle; densely
covered with small and deep punctures more or less concealed by the clothing.
Pronotum about as wide as long, convex and slightly gibbose on the posterior
half, the longitudinal median furrow barely discernible, lateral margins crenu-
late and from the base to the anterior third almost straight and parallel and
then gradually, roundly contracted to apices of anterior angles which are
acute and very slightly depressed on the inside, posterior angles rectangular,
with a distinct lateral carina, the basal margin almost straight; with densely
arranged, moderately large, round, deep punctures. Scutellum pentagonal,
lateral margins concave, posterior angle obtuse; closely, almost rugosely,
punctured. Elytra at base as wide as pronotum across posterior angles and
about twice its length, convex, sides from the base gradually, almost imper-
ceptibly, roundly dilated to beyond the middle and then roundly contracted
to apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae moderately large, deep and
elongate, the interstices flat and with closely placed punctures which are much
smaller than those in the striae. Prosternum with long, decp, sharply defined
tarsal furrows, metasternum with barely discernible tarsal depressions.
Length, 8 mm.; width, 2-75 mm.

Northern Territory: Groote Eylandt (N. B, Tindale). Type, in South
Australian Museum.

Very close to L. ferruginous, Cand., from which it can be distinguished
by its darker colour, the punctures on pronotum not quite so crowded, the
posterior angles of pronotum distinctly carinate and the punctures in the
elytral striae larger. Easily distinguished from ZL. labiosus, Cand., by its
larger size, the punctures in the elytral striae being proportionately much
larger than those on the interstices, and the absence of tarsal furrows on the
metasternum.

Lacon brevipennis, n. sp.

Subovate; not thick; subdepressed; subopaque; black with the scutellum
and parts of elytra reddish, antennae and legs ferruginous; moderately densely
clothed with very short, yellowish, squamose hairs. Under surface of a
uniform dark brown (except epipleurae of elytra which are reddish) and
clothed similarly to the upper surface. Head almost flat with the anterior
margin almost straight and lightly emarginate in the middle, the mandibles.
are prominent and bifid at the apex; with densely arranged, rather deep,
reticulate punctures. Pronotum slightly longer than wide, lightly and evenly
convex, the longitudinal median furrow distinctly visible along the entire
length, with two round impressions on the posterior fourth situated one on
each side of the median furrow and about midway between the latter and the
lateral margins, the base only lightly bisinuate, the sides from in front of the
posterior angles almost imperceptibly convex up to the anterior fourth then
roundly contracted to apices of anterior angles which are acute and only a
little depressed on the inside, the posterior angles are almost rectangular
with a well defined lateral carina, the lateral margins widely and shallowly
sinuate in front of the posterior angles; with densely arranged, moderately
deep, reticulate punctures. Scutellum small, almost round, convex; closely
and somewhat deeply punctured. Elytra fully as wide as the pronotum across
posterior angles and about one and a half times its length, lightly convex and

361

depressed on either side of the suture, sides almost straight and parallel to
beyond the middle then gradually, roundly contracted to apex; punctate-
striate, the punctures in striae closely placed, moderately large, round and
deep, the interstices narrow, the alternate ones slightly elevated, the punc-
tures closely arranged and about half the size of those in the striae. Pro-
sternum and metasternum without tarsal furrows. Length, 8 mm.: width,
3 mm.

South Australia: Leigh’s Creek (A. H. Elston). Type, in author’s
collection,

A very distinct insect and unlike any previously described species known
to me. The red markings on the elytra are mostly in the sutural region with
a few blotches near the lateral margins; the head is only very lightly
impressed, the anterior and posterior angles of the pronotum are entire and
not at all rounded or truncated at their apices.

Lacon rufulus, n. sp.

Moderately thick; convex; subnitid, reddish-castaneous with a narrow
band at the base of elytra and a round spot on the scutellum a lighter red,
antennae more or less testaceous, legs of the same colour as body; lightly
clothed with short, testaceous, squamose hairs. Under surface a little darker
in colour than the upper surface with the epipleurae of elytra paler; rather
densely covered with very short, testaceous, squamose hairs. Head almost
flat with a shallow depression in the middle; with densely arranged, deep,
round punctures which are more or less concealed by the clothing. Pro-
notum about as long as wide, rather strongly convex and gibbose behind the
middle, the longitudinal median furrow only faintly defined, the lateral
margins from the base up to the anterior third almost straight and parallel
(not or only barely visibly sinuate in front of the posterior angles) and then
curvilinearly contracted to apices of anterior angles which are acute, rounded
at their extremities and slightly impressed on the inside, posterior angles
almost rectangular and slightly produced backwards, not truncated and with
a barely visible prominence on the inside, the basal margin very lightly
sinuate; densely covered with moderately large, deep, almost reticulate punc-
tures. Scutellum vaguely pentagonal, narrowly depressed behind, the
posterior angle obtuse and the basal margins almost rounded; with a few
small punctures. Elytra as wide as pronotum across its posterior angles and
less than twice the length of the former, rather widely depressed along the
sutural region, the lateral margins from the base to beyond the middle almost
straight and parallel and then gradually, roundly contracted to apex;
punctate-striate, the punctures in striae moderately large, deep and elongately
rectangular, the interstices wide and flat, with closely arranged punctures
which are much smaller than those in striae. Prosternum with deep, sharply
defined, curved tarsal furrows, metasternum without any tarsal impressions.
Length, 11 mm.; width, 4 mm.

North-west Australia: Fortescue River, Hammersley Range (W. D.
Dodd). Type, in South Australian Museum.

In shape this species somewhat resembles L. /aticollis, Cand., but at once
distinguished by its colour; the mandibles are very prominent, curved and
strongly dentate on the apical third; the scutellum is a bright red with the
margins somewhat widely infuscated. A much larger species than L. ferru-
ginous, Cand., of a brighter colour and with the punctures on the interstices
of the elytral striae proportionately smaller. It is easily distinguished from
L. badius, Elston, by its more nitid appearance and the pronotum of an
entirely different shape, on the former species the pronotum is evenly convex

362

with its posterior angles strongly divergent and widely rounded at their
extremities, whereas on the present species the pronotum is abruptly sloping
backwards on the posterior fourth and its posterior angles are almost
rectangular.

Lacon punctatissimus, n. sp.

Moderately thick; convex; opaque; fuscous with the posterior angles of
pronotum and parts of elytra more or less reddish, antennae testaceous, legs
ferruginous with parts infuscated; rather densely clothed with short, cinera-
ceous, squamose hairs, on parts of pronotum and elytra more densely arranged
and forming patches. Under surface dark brown in parts diluted with red,
the epipleurae of elytra are reddish; densely and evenly clothed with
extremely short, cineraceous, squamose hairs. Head with a large, triangular,
shallow depression in the middle, with densely arranged, moderately large,
deep punctures. Pronotum wider than long, rather strongly convex, narrowly
depressed along the lateral margins, the longitudinal median furrow almost
obsolete, sides almost straight and parallel from near base to the anterior
third and then abruptly, almost rectilinearly, contracted to apices of anterior
angles which are acute and somewhat deeply impressed on the inside, the
lateral margins barely perceptibly sinuate in front of the posterior angles
which are slightly produced backwards and very widely and obliquely trun-
cated, with a small protuberance on the inside and a more or less distinct
lateral carina; with densely arranged, moderately large, deep, round punc-
tures. Scutellum pentagonal, concave, anterior angles right-angled, the
posterior one acute, with a few punctures which are concealed by the cloth-
ing. Elytra at base barely wider than across posterior angles of pronotum
and a little more than twice the length of the latter, evenly convex, sides
slightly dilated near the middle then gradually and roundly contracted to
apex; punctate-striate, the punctures in striae large, deep and crowded, the
interstices are narrow with densely placed, deep, round punctures, smaller
than those in striae. The prosternum has well defined tarsal furrows, those
on the metasternum barely discernible. Length, 8-9 mm.; width, 3-3°5 mm.

Northern Territory: Groote Eylandt (N. B. Tindale). Type, in South
Australian Museum.

The reddish parts on the elytra form spots, which are more densely
covered with the greyish squamose hairs, giving the insect a mottled appear-
ance; the pronotum, although somewhat strongly convex, is not conspicu-
ously gibbose behind the middle and the surface when viewed from the side
appears very uneven, this is due to shallow, round depressions near the
middle, these, however, are scarcely visible when viewing the insect from
above; the basal half of the elytra is more strongly punctured than the pos-
terior half which gives the former a granulated appearance. Near L.
marmoratus, Cand., but with the pronotum less convex and with the gibbosity
behind the middle not so pronounced, the chief distinction is the different
sculpture of the elytra, in the present species the punctures in the elytral
striae are much larger, the interstices are narrower and with larger punctures,
particularly on the basal part which has a strong granulated appearance. It
can be easily distinguished from L. cineraceus, Elston, by the much stronger
punctuation of the elytra and with the interstices of the elytral striae
narrower.

363

OBSERVATIONS ON THE SOUTH AUSTRALIAN MEMBERS OF THE
SUBGENUS, “WALLABIA.”

By Hepirey Herserr FINLayson,
Tlon. Associate in Mammalia, South Australian Museum.

[Read October 13, 1927. ]
Pirates XVI. tro XVIII.

INTRODUCTION,

The genus Macropus (Shaw), in spite of its immense geographic range,
exhibits very little structural variation. The subdivision of its twenty-three
species, which has been generally accepted, is that introduced by Oldfield, Thomas
(1) in 1888, who made bodily size the chief criterion of eligibility in three groups
known respectively as Kangaroos, Large Wallabies, and Small Wallabies. Bodily
size was defined chiefly by reference to the length of the pes and the basal length
of the skull, and a member of the genus was said to be a kangaroo when the
length of its foot exceeded 260 mm. and the basal length of its skull 135 mm.;
a large wallaby when these measurements fell between 160-250 mm. and 108-130
man. respectively; and a small wallaby when the foot was less than 160 mm. and
the skull 108 mm. long.

This classification is rendered less arbitrary and given some systematic sanc-
tion by the fact that bodily size is correlated, to some extent, not only with certain
cranial and dental characters, although these are of a minor kind, but also with
habits and distribution, and the three groups of Thomas have been replaced in
recent usage by three co-extensive subgenera, Macropus s.s., Wallabia, and
Thylogale.

The cleavage between Macropus s.s. and the smaller species is, on the whole,
more definite than between Wallabia and Thylogale, and the status of one or two
specics of these last may need revision when the examination of large series and.
particularly, the extension of field observations, permit of more precision in the
statement of average specific characters.

The great variation in adult size of many of the Macropods is well known to
those who have made many measurements of specimens in the flesh, and aged
males of both sections of wallabies frequently transgress the limits of the sub-
genera as stated above.

In addition to the characters mentioned the species of H/’allabia are further
distinguished both from Macropus and Thylegale by the relatively greater length
of the tail, the distal portion of which is commonly clothed by hairs which are
longer and more loosely applied, and by the greater richness and variety of their
ornamentation. Eight well-defined species, separated both by external and cranial
characters, constitute the group, and many varieties have been described. Of
these, eleven subspecific forms are allowed by Cabrera (2), but it is probable that
the examination of larger series, with due consideration of seasonal changes in
pelage, will result in a further reduction in their number.

Six of the species are confined to the Australian mainland, one occurs also
in several islands of the north coast and in New Guinea, and, the last to be
described, the remarkable M. wellsbyi of Iongman (3) appears to be an exclu-
sively insular form.

The geographical range of the group is a wide one, and embraces areas of
widely different character as regards topography, vegetation, and climate; but it

364

is noteworthy that none of the species have succeeded in adapting themselves to
arid conditions, and most of them show marked preference for well-timbered dis-
tricts of high rainfall, Their occurrence may therefore be said, in a general
sense, to be coastal rather than inland, and the chief gap in its continuity exists
on the south coast, between the meridians 120° and 135° E., where the Nullarbor
Plain and the adjacent drylands, east and west, extend right to the seaboard.

In South Australia two members of the subgenus, M. ruficollis typicus and
M. greyi have long been known to exist, and a third, M. ualabatus (W. bicolor),
has recently been claimed as a member of the fauna of the State by Professor
Wood Jones (4), although the evidence in support of its status as an indigine
is slight.

The literature relating to these South Australian wallabies is very scanty, and
since the observations of Gould (5) on M,. greyt and the bare record of the occur-
rence of M. ruficollis typicus, by Zietz (6), nothing appears to have been published
in regard to them till the appearance in 1924 of F. Wood Jones’ “Mammals of
South Australia.” In this last, for reasons connected with the scope and purpose
of the book, their treatment was necessarily brief, and much remains to be done
in the way of defining their local distribution, their present position in the fauna,
and recording such details of their habits and natural economy as can be gleaned.

The need for so doing is increased by the fact that M. greyi is almost exclu-
sively South Australian in occurrence, has many peculiar characters which render
it very distinct, and is at present on the very verge of extinction, while in the case
of M. ruficollis typicus the South Australian animal is the extreme westerly repre-
sentative of a species which has been studied from eastern material only, and
which, although still well established elsewhcre, is here greatly reduced in numbers,
and until recently was unrepresented in the State Museum.

Apart from the rapid disappearance of the animals themselves, another factor
which lends urgency to the need for a more complete record is the equally rapid
passing of the generation of men who knew them in the day of their plenty and
whose circumstances in the early days of the colony brought them intimately in
contact with the fauna under conditions which were very favourable for observa-
tion. Indeed, the purpose of the writer is as much to make public the impressions
and opinions of these pioneers, as to record the somewhat meagre results which
accrue from observations to-day, under circumstances which the advance of
settlement has made comparatively adverse.

In South Australia the subgenus occupies but a small fraction of the total
area of the State, and to that extent it is not an important element in its fauna.

At the time of the first settlement of the colony it is probable that its range
was constituted by all that portion of the State which lies east of the 139th
meridian and south of the 35th parallel, but its distribution throughout this tract
was not uniform, and showed, rather, an increasing density from north to south
and, probably, also a considerable hiatus in the mallee country of its north-eastern
corner.

Both species appeared to have crossed the Murray, but the extent of their
tenure of the river flats is difficult to estimate, and from this north-western part
of their range they were carly driven, or greatly reduced, by the rapid advance
of closer settlement. Their former presence in the lower part of the county of
Sturt is vouched for by many residents of that part of the country still living, but
I have been unable to gather any reliable evidence of their occupation of any part
of the Mount Lofty range system. A small wallaby, probably the mainland
M. eugenit (now extinct), was well known in the hill country, but this species,
together with the black-faced kangaroo, M. gigantcus, var. melanops, seem to have
been the only members of the genus in the highlands south of the 35th parallel.
In the case of M. greyi, this failure to occupy the hill country might be antici-

365

pated from what is known of its habits, but with M. ruficollis it is somewhat
remarkable, as the same species in eastern Australia is to be found well established
in rugged mountainous country, where the climate is much more rigorous and
conditions of forage far less attractive than in many parts of the Mount Lofty
range.

With the exception caused by the vacation of Trans-Murray district, the
range of the subgenus in South Australia remains much as before, but throughout
the whole its members have been greatly reduced, and over large areas have
disappeared altogether.

The tract of country defined above is made up of the whole of the South-
eastern Division of the State, plus the south-western portion of the Murray Mallee
Division, and, judged by its topography and vegetation, may be divided into an
upper and lower district. The upper district forms part of what has come to be
known as the Ninety-mile Desert, and, with a few inconsiderable oases, is char-
acterised by a uniform sandy soil and an undulating surface which rises at frequent
intervals to form sharp ridges, sometimes of exposed limestone, more frequently
of sand. Between the ridges are long trough-like depressions or flats, and occa-
sional claypans in the latter provide the site for the infrequent surface waters of
the area. The ridges are commonly bare or, at most, sparsely clothed with dwarf
banksias and casuarinas, but the flats and gullies are rather densely covered by
very stunted mallee. Although not without a certain grim attraction, the general
aspect of the country is in keeping with its name, and, in spite of the fact that the
mallee is not altogether destitute of undergrowth and the rainfall is nowhere less
than 15 inches, its grazing value is low, and it remains the most sparsely settled
area south of Adelaide.

The absence of any abrupt transition renders it difficult to set a southern
limit to this type of country, but the counties of MacDonnell, Robe, and Grey
may be said to constitute a second lower district which, on the whole, is in marked
contrast to the upper. This is a notably flat, low-lying atea with a rainfall
increasing from 20 inches in the north to over 30 inches in the extreme south, and
it affords far greater variation in the types of its soils and vegetation than the
upper. These variations are most noticeable when the country is traversed from
east to west, and it may be said to consist of comparatively narrow strips of rich
loams or silts rapidly alternating with poor sands, and in the south the former
merge with the wider areas of voleanic soils about Mount Gambier and Millicent.

Both types of country were, originally, well timbered, but with quite distinct
species, the sandy stretches supporting the rough-barked £2. viminalis (locally
called a stringy-bark), in belts or clumps which are isolated from one another by
open heaths of small xanthonheas, leptospermums, and banksias (B. ornata),
while the richer country is more densely and uniformly clothed by smooth-barked
eucalypts (chiefly E. rostrata and E. leucoxylon), together with the large Banksia
marginata or honeysuckle. Here the undergrowth is practically absent, being
replaced by grasses, and in encouraging the growth of the latter by felling the
timber the face of the country, in certain parts of the district, has been completely
changed during the period of settlement.

In the sandy country the surface is frequently elevated to form low ridges,
usually running north and south, and these are densely timbered and clothed also
with a thick undergrowth of bracken (Pteridiwm sp.), interspersed with the
smaller species of the surrounding heath. These ridges are locally dignified by
the name of “ranges,” but few of them are high enough to break the flat montony
of a general view. The coastal belt is distinct from either of these two main
types of country and for many miles is backed by low ranges, of which the Woak-
wine and Black Ranges are the most considerable. On the more northerly of these
hills the mallee, characteristic of the desert, reappears, but, in general, eucalypts

366

are less in evidence here than melalucas, and in many places on the eastern slopes
acacias and melalucas, either singly or in combination, form dense tangled thickets
of a kind not represented further inland.

Although destitute of permanent streams, the whole of the lower district is
particularly well favoured with subterranean water supplies, which are tapped, in
most localities, with the greatest ease and which supply permanent waterholes,
both artificial and natural, scattered liberally over the whole face of the country.
In this respect the lower district contrasts strongly with the upper in which
surface waters are both few and fugitive, and the contrast is heightened when in
winter, from causes not entirely dependent on the local rainfall. great areas of
low-lying country are converted into swamps.

From the faunal point of view the lower district is of far greater importance
than the upper, and the combination of rich, well-watered grasslands, flanked
everywhere by the scrubby “ranges” and wid= heaths, with its consequent attrac-
tions of easy forage and shelter, has in the past supported a marsupial population
which in variety and density is equalled by few other areas in Australia,

PART I.
Macropus (WALLABIA) GREYI. (Gray, 1843.)

History—This wallaby appears to have been first brought under notice by
Sir George Grey, who, while Governor of the colony, presented skins and skulls
of a male and female to the British Museum. These specimens were listed in
1843 by J. E. Gray (7) and the species named in honour of the donor, but the
first extended description is that of Waterhouse (8) in 1846. Gould collected
the animal in the south-east of South Australia, and in 1863 (5) published some
account of its habits and figured it in two beautifully-coloured plates. In 1888
Oldfield Thomas (1) redescribed the species and drew attention to the cranial
characters which distinguish it from its associates in the subgenus. Wood Jones
(9) in 1925 described the hair-tracts of the pouch-young, and redescribed (4) the
external characters of the adult from material in the South Australian Museum,
giving at the same time some measurements of the skulls available, and brief notes
on its natural history. In addition to these major contributions, the species is
mentioned in several lists and compilations such as those of Krefft, Zietz, and
Lyddeker, without, however, anything being added to what was already known.

Although the descriptions of Waterhouse, O. Thomas, and Wood Jones have
embraced most of the external characters of the species, the examination of fresh
material acquired by the South Australian Museum, the examination and photo-
graphing of a living example on several occasions, and, more particularly, the
weighing and sifting of information gathered during seven years from residents
of long standing in the South-eastern District, enables the writer to confirm much
that has been written, and to add a little to these previous accounts.

Distribution in the past, and present position im the Fauna-—The former
range of M. greyi in South Australia“ was approximately that of the subgenus
as defined above, but the extent of its occurrence northwards is difficult to ascer-
tain, owing partly to the confusion which is introduced by the application of
different popular names to the satne species in different districts; thus, whercas
in the lower district and in the “desert” the present species was invariably known
as “Toolach”,@) across the Murray this name was given also to a much smaller

(1) The species was not exclusively confined to South Australia, but occurred also
through a small strip of Victorian territory contiguous to the border.

(2) Although presumably aboriginal in origin, I have been unable to obtain reliable
information as to the etymology of this word; the spelling adopted here is that of Wood
Jones, but it may be noted that, by the majority of settlers, the word is pronounced
Toe-lait-shee, with the accent on, the second syllable.

367

wallaby than M. greyi, probably the mainland form of M. eugenu, Nevertheless,
the striking characters of the Toolach early attracted the attention of the settlers,
and the fact of its inhabiting relatively “open” country easily accessible from, and
indeed often contiguous to, the settled areas, has made it one of the best known
native animals throughout its habitat. It can scarcely be said that the memories
of the “Old Timers” have yielded up a wealth of information regarding it, but
there is an approach to unanimity in the main features of their accounts which is
conspicuously absent from the impressions left by many other more obscurely
living species,

The Toolach was essentially a clear-country wallaby, avoiding both heavy
timber and thick scrub, and in all parts of its range showed a marked partiality
for grass country, not simply as a teeding-ground, but as a “beat” in which prac-
tically the whole time of the animal, both fceding and resting, was ‘spent. In
the typical desert country of the counties of Russell and Buccleuch, where grass
flats are few and far between, it occurred but sparsely, and here appeared to be
comparatively solitary, but in the lower south-east, where richer soils permit a far
greater development of grasses, its undoubted instinct towards gregariousness
asserted itself, and when the country was first settled it was here established in
a series of isolated colonies, moderately well delimited and very frequently situated
on what is known locally as the “fringe” or “Black Rush” country (pl. xvi., fig. 1).
This may be described as a transition belt between the light sandy soils and the
richer loams and clays; between the stringy-bark and heath, on the one hand, and
the smooth-barked gum and grass country on the other. Flat, or at most gently
undulating, (hese areas become swampy in winter, and the depressions are filled by
a low matted growth of small rush (Lepidosperma laterale) which earns for the
locality one of its local names. Alternating with the rush are patches of tall,
coarse grasses, the most conspicuous of which are Poa caespitosa and the so-
called kangaroo grass, Themeda triandra. There is little big timber, but honey-
suckle (Banksia marginata) occurs both singly and in little groves, and there are
frequent clumps of dwarf Xanthorrhea and the little Banksia ornata. Although
“fringe” country is very extensive in the district, the whole of it was not occupied
by Toolaches, the groups of which showed marked partiality for certain quite
restricted areas, from which they were only driven by persistent persecution, and
to which they returned again and again. In spite of many changes caused by
closer settlement of the country, the sites of many of these Toolach colonies are
still well remembered, though the wallaby itself has long gone.

It has been stated that the Toolach was at one time exceedingly numerous and,
for instance, “swarmed in the neighbourhood of Kingston” (4), but in accepting
these statements it is necessary to bear in mind that they apply to relatively small
areas only, and a considerable weight of evidence inclines me to the belief that in
point of numbers M. greyi fell far short of the four other species of Macropus in
the district. Although human persecution and the occupation of its chosen
country early reduced its numbers and broke up and dispersed its larger colonies,
it was still far from unconmnon even as late as 1910, and scattered bands were
still to be found in suitable localities, The chief of these were along the edges of
the long strip of grass country extending from a little north of Millicent to the
vicinity of Bull Island and Reedy Creek, and known locally as the Avenue Valley,
on the Biscuit Flat between Robe and Kingston, the Mosquito Plain between Nara-
coorte and Penola, and in the country between Clay Wells and Conmurra, and
probably also in the sandhill country of its northern district. Its rapid dis-
appearance in the last twenty years may be attributed with some confidence to the
invasion and enormous increase of the English fox, which has been proved without
doubt to take a heavy toll of the young, cven of the large kangaroos, and indeed
in the almost unoccupied desert country where man has had little influence on its

368

destinies, it seems that the fox has been the sole factor in effecting its extermina-
tion. Its chief natural enemies before the advent of the white man and the fox
seems to have been the wedge-tailed eagle (Uroaetus audax), which, like the latter,
chiefly attacked the young. These attacks were by no means always successful,
and were sometimes thwarted by the courage of the females. Mr. Andrew
Robson, of Robe, on whose property of “Comung” the species was once well
established, relates that he once witnessed such an attack, in which the eagle, flying
very low, persistently followed a female with a large joey. The bird manoeuvred
continually with the patent intention of keeping the two separate, and the whole
energies of the doe were equally obviously bent on preventing this separation, but
her task was rendered difficult by the frequent panic-stricken rushes and bewil-
dered halts of the joey. Matters continued thus for several minutes when one
such rush brought the latter within striking distance; but as the bird dropped to
3 feet to seize him the doe sprang at the attacker, and with both hind feet struck
the peculiar slashing blow common to most of the macropods. Whether the blow
went home or not the observer was not able to see, but the sally was sufficiently
diconcerting to cause the wedge-tail to beat a retreat, during which the joey
regained the doe’s pouch and with it safety. ‘

The outcome of these encounters was not usually so satisfactory (to present-
day sentiments), and I learn from another source that small boys in a certain
district were in the habit of periodically visiting the sites of eagles’ nests to recover
the scalps from the remains of young Toolaches to be found lying underneath;
this at a time when a bonus of sixpence was paid on all marstpial scalps.

By 1923 the species had become exceedingly rare. Isolated pairs were no
doubt scattered through the rougher stringy-bark country, but the sole remnant
of the Toolach population which continued living in country and under circum-
stances which might be regarded as typical of that formerly obtaining, was a small
band of perhaps fourteen individuals, located on the south end of Konetta sheep
run, some twenty-six miles south-east of Robe.

Public attention was first called to the rapidly approaching extinction of the
Toolaeh by Professor Wood Jones, who repeatedly stressed the urgent need for
rigid protection of this group at Konetta. In May, 1923, as there appeared little
prospect of effective conservation in the south-cast, an organised attempt was
made on a considerable scale to capture living specimens for transference to the
sanctuary on Kangaroo Island. This, and a later attempt in 1924, failed in their
main objective, since as a result of overmuch driving the four examples obtained
were either dead or died shortly after capture, but were not altogether fruitless,
as much-needed Museum material was thus acquired.

The subsequent history of the species consists of a resumption of the ex-
terminating process. Owing to the extensive publicity given to the two expeditions
noted above, local attention was focussed on the Toolach to a degree hitherto
unknown. Much of this attention was undoubtedly sympathetic to the idea of
conservation, but the realization of the great rarity of the wallaby roused the
cupidity of an unscrupulous few, and that survivors of the 1924 attempt have been
wantonly killed for the sake of the pelt as a trophy, is an assertion based on the
admission of at least one of the slayers. The constant hunting of foxes with
dogs over the Toolach country has been made the excuse for some of this killing,
the plea being advanced that it is impossible to prevent the dogs running anything
and everything that is put up. The pretext is a flimsy one, however, and not
only is there an obvious expedient in avoiding the locality altogether, but interroga-
tion usually elicits the fact that “nothing spoils a dog like checking him.” This
peculiar solicitude for the dog’s training has borne very heavily on the Toolach
and still bears very heavily on his cousin the brusher. Occasionally, however, a
better spirit prevails, and recently a Toolach doe was promptly rescued from two

369

kangaroo dogs which had seized her, and, in the patient care of Mr. J. Brown, of
Rohe, she has survived the rough handling received. She may well represent the
last of her tace in this State, as a careful and extended examination of the beat of
the Konetta band by the writer in February of this year failed to reveal any recent
traces, either in the shape of tracks or dejecta, and the opinion is expressed by the
resident who knows the country best that the band has been entirely extirpated.

The species is very poorly represented in Museums, and enquiries recently
instituted in all the States indicate that there are six skins and seven skulls in the
public collections of Australia ; of these, four skins and five skulls are preserved
in the South Australian Museum.

Habits—Apart from the semi-gregariousness mentioned in discussing its local
distribution, in the main features of its habits relating to such routine matters as
feeding, lying up, and breeding, M. greys appears to have offered little of contrast
with the other members of the genus. On the other hand, in many of its physical
attributes the species is markedly distinct from all others in eastern Australia, and,
as already mentioned, this fact has been instrumental in creating unusually clear
impressions regarding it. Three attributes have chiefly served to create this
impression—its speed, its gait, and the elegance of its form and bearing and
ornamentation.

The speed of the Toolach is a matter which has become almost traditional in
the districts which it formerly inhabited, and the regular coursing of the wallaby
with dogs has provided the material for a rich fund of anecdote. That it was by
far the swiftest of all the native animals in the district is the universal testimony
of those who have coursed it, but the attempt to set up a standard of comparison
by means of which its speed may be more strictly defined is a matter of difficulty
owing to the variety and heterogeneous breeding of the dogs used in its chase.

After sifting the evidence from a great many independent sources, it may
be accepted that in open grass country, on firm, dry soil, and with a close-up start,
the chances were somewhat heavily against a Toolach holding its own with a grey-
hound, and a somewhat sticky soil confers a further advantage on the latter. This
is not to say, however, that such runs, even under these conditions (when the dog
is prepared and the wallaby probably not), were always fatal to the wallaby.
There appear to have been Toolachs of exceptional pace, and probably in this
species, as in most others of the genus, there was a marked sexual difference in
this regard, the adult female being considerably slimmer, more lightly built, and
fleeter than the male at a comparable stage of growth. In making these com-
parisons it is well to bear in mind also that the greyhound is exceeded in speed by
very few of the monodelphian cursorial mammals. It is a somewhat striking
attribute to the possibilities of the saltatory mode of progression, and a tribute
which may be sufficient to acquit that mode of any inherent inferiority, that the
little Toolach is able on occasion to hold its own with a breed of dog which has
recently been shown to be capable, for short sprints, of the enormous speed of
42 miles per hour. The slight advantage in speed which the greyhound possessed
in an open unobstructed run was to a large extent lost when the ‘oolach succeeded
in gaining one of the belts of low scrub and tussocks which fringe the grass
country. Here progress is only effected by frequent and abrupt changes of
direction, and in avoiding obstacles at speed the bipedal, higher-jumping wallaby
was far more adroit than the dog, and the escape of the former under these
circumstances scems to have been regarded almost as a foregone conclusion.

Even more striking than its fleetness was the staying power of the Toolach
and its ability to maintain a high speed over relatively long distances. This is a
character which is not shared by many of the macropods. Of the larger kangaroos
M. rufus, and, to a lesser extent, MM. giganteus, are accustomed to covering great
distances in moving from one feeding ground to another, and their tireless

370

endurance when allowed to adhere to a certain chosen and apparently almost
effortless stride has excited the admiration of many observers. Further, the
kangaroos, and some of the larger wallabies, under the influence of fright or the
pain of a minor wound, are capable of amazing bursts of speed for short distances,
but the respiratory apparatus of most species seems to he ill adapted to meet the
strain of such effort for more than a few hundred yards, and a very noticeable
and even abrupt slowing down then takes place. This fact is well known to
kangarooers throughout the mallee, and in hunting the black-faced kangaroo with
dogs it is during the ensuing period of partial but temporary exhaustion that most
dogs of mixed breed make their kills; 1f the dog fails to close at this stage, a long
chase ensues, in which (if he refrains from “sticking-up” to fight) the odds
steadily increase in favour of the kangaroo.

The capabilities of M. greyi, however, seem to have been in a different
category, and when flushed it almost at once attained a speed sufficiently great to
extend the best of dogs, but this speed it continued to increase over a considerable
distance, and even with greyhounds very long runs were the rule rather than the
exception. Its endurance was strikingly illustrated during the ill-fated attempt
to obtain living specimens at Konetta in 1923, and Mr. Edgar R.Waite, who was
present, informs me that at one stage a pair was chased by a band of horsemen
over the entire length of the paddock; they then turned short, retraced their
course, with the pursuers still following, and finally, after a four-mile run, jumped
a fence and passed within a short distance of their original starting point, with
“speed apparently undiminished.”

In the character of its stride, which is very long and low, and made with the
greater part of its body extended in an almost horizontal direction, it was readily
distinguished from M. ruficollis, which species, although usually frequenting a
very different type of country, appears occasionally to have associated with
M. greyi. In addition to this peculiarity of the individual leaps, however, it could
be at once recognised also by certain features in its gait which are usually summed
up in the statement that “it took two short hops and then a long one,”‘) though
less frequently the alternative “two long hops and a short one” is substituted. This
impression of some irregularity in its progression has been so generally received
by settlers in all parts of the district that there seems no doubt that it rests on a
substratum of fact. ‘lhe matter is not so simple, however, as is implied in the
above statement, and to the obvious enquiry as to whether the two short hops
were followed by a long one constantly, under all conditions, at all speeds, aind
over both open and unobstructed ground, I have received somewhat unsatisfactory
and widely different answers. A minority of those questioned on the matter (and
these not the least entitled by experience to credence) are of the opinion that any
irregularity of the kind indicated was noticeable only when the Toolach was hotly
pursued on rough ground; the long hop, according to these observers, did not
recur at regular intervals, but was made only occasionally, and then at a sharp:
angle to the former line of flight, On this view it represented only a sudden
change of direction either to avoid some obstacle or to embarrass the pursuer, a
trick which is practised by all the kangaroos and wallabies to a greater or less
extent, and in which the so-called “native hare” (Lagorchestes leporoides) has
acquired an almost uncanny proficiency.

On the few occasions when the writer has been able to observe Toolaches
under natural conditions, the observations were made at some distance and in
country where the height of the undergrowth prevented any clear impression
being received, and the single example which has been examined in captivity,

(3) This statement is commonly modified by the settlers, who prefer to say that it
toak “two long hops and then a much longer one”; in this form, and embellished with
suitable adjectives, it is a long-established joke in the Toolach country.

371

although almost constantly on the move, throws little light on the matter owing to
the short distance which she has to traverse.

If it be true that the species did actually progress, either at all times, or under
special circumstances only, by leaps which were of unequal length, but of definite
sequence, it would appear to have possessed a trait unique among the Macropodidae
and rich in speculative interest.

In discussing the saltatory habit of some of the small marsupials of Central
Australia, Sir Baldwin Spencer (10) has suggested that an animal which proceeds
by leaps and bounds may be less easily struck down by a bird of prey than one
which progresses cursorially, and in view of the fact that the rapidly alternating
movements in a vertical plane are greater in the case of an animal which hops than
in the case of an animal which runs, this supposition would appear to be well
founded. The plentiful occurrence and aggressive habits of the wedge-tailed
eagle, in the habitat of the Toolach, has already been noted, and it seems not
unreasonable to assume that the gait of the latter may have been acquired for the
purpose of further increasing the difficulties of an attack from the air by adding
an element of irregularity to the already undulatory character of its advance.

External Characters—The early settlers were ill-disposed to see beauty in
any of the native animals, but a partial exception was made of the Toolach, which
is very generally spoken of with some approach to admiration, even by those who
have played a leading part in its destruction. In a group which comprises several
handsome animals it is a matter of difficulty, and one determined largely by indi-
vidual taste, to assign pride of place to any one of them; still, it would be gener-
ally conceded that of the species which are sufficiently well established to be
familiar, two are conspicuously well favoured—M. parryt, of the east, the claims of
which to distinction rest largely on the elegance of its form; and M, ima, of the
west, which is unrivalled in the striking yet harmonious character of its ornamenta-
tion, and, in considering the place of the Toolach, it-may justly be said to share and
blend many of the beauties of cach,

‘The examination of Museum material, although it may suffice for the deter-
mination of gross external characters, conveys in the present case but a very
inadequate impression of the animal in nature, and of the finer details of its
general appearance and bearing, and for opportunities of observing these matters
I am greatly indebted to Mr. J. Brown, of Robe, who, as already noted, possesses
the only example of the species in captivity at the present time. This specimen
is a female, apparently adult, and when captured was observed to have a large
pouch young, which, however, most unfortunately she has failed to rear. At the
time of my visit she was still exceedingly nervous and timid, and difficult to
approach; but this, although adding greatly to the difficulties of photography, was
no bar to observation, as the enclosure was small. In spite of !this nervous-
ness and agitation, she gives ample evidence of the intense curiosity which is so
marked a feature in all the Macropodidae; her flights from the human intruder
are of short duration, and if one remains quiet, are followed by periods when
there is an obvious and amusing struggle between curiosity and fear, which adds
not a little to the pleasure and interest of observation. In size this example is quite
equal to the average adult female of M. ruficollis typicus, found in the same district,
but the two species form a marked and interesting contrast in build and deport-
ment. The Toolach is an exceedingly lithe and graceful wallaby, and all its
movements are made with a delicate precision somewhat reminiscent of the rock
wallabies. It is built on fine long lines, lending an air of slimness to its appear-
ance, which is heightened by its erect carriage, and although the hind limbs are
strongly developed and the fore limbs greatly reduced, there is less disproportion
between the abdominal and thoracic portions of the trunk than commonly obtains,
and which is so remarkable in the females of the kangaroos. The head is set on a

372

relatively long neck, and in its general relation to the shoulders as well as in certain
intrinsic qualities is suggestive of M. rufus. It at once attracts attention on
account of the very bold, sharply-defined cheek stripes (pl. xvi., fig. 2), the long,
rufous-backed, pricked ears (which are less mobile than in many wallabies, and
which are noticeably notched towards the extremity on the posterior margin), and
the peculiar shape of the muzzle, This last is long, parallel-sided, and very deep
from above downward, and it terminates somewhat bluntly in a large, naked, black
rhinarium, the area of which is made to appear greater than it is by a half-inch
wide border of black fur separating it from the light grey of the face, and by the
circumstance that the median portion of the upper lip is also black. This departure
from the somewhat rapidly tapering conical muzzle gencral in Wallabia and
Thylogale confers a peculiar character on the physiognomy of the species which
may be crudely expressed by saying that in a front view it appears always to be
“looking down its nose.”

The fore limb, as compared with that of M. ruficollis, M. ualabatus, M. parryi,
and M. agilis, is short and feeble, and the manus is very small indeed; in that
respect, and also in the shortness of the digits and the great relative breadth of the
palm, it is very similar to that of M. irma. The small size of the forearm is dis-
guised to some extent by its being clothed by fluffy, almost upright hairs, which are
a glistening yellowish-white in colour, 25-30 mm. long, and sharply contrasted with
the short grey fur of the proximal part of the limb and shoulder. At the carpus the
long upright hairs are replaced abruptly by short yellow ones which, being closely
adpressed, give the appearance of a sudden constriction at the wrist and contribute
to the appearance of diminutiveness of the hand. ‘Vhis condition at once attracts
attention in the living animal, and although it is very apparent also in all four
filled skins which have been examined, appears not to have been previously
described.

When moving at some speed its arms are pressed closely to its sides and chest,
and the hands are then necessarily approximated; but apart from this, whenever
it assumes the upright position, and, in fact, under almost all circumstances when
not actually in use, the hands are brought forward away from the body and are
held together, sometimes with the palm of one resting on the back of the other,
but more usually with both palms together and the digits partially interlocking
(pl. xvi., fig. 2).

The hind limb is large, but in the relative length of the femur and tibia
(1: 1-48) it shows no departure from the proportion existing in other large
wallabies. Those who have closely examined and skinned many Toolaches assure
me, however, that the shape of the foot was distinct from that of M. ruficollis (the
natural standard of comparison in the district) in that it was bowed outward
somewhat between heel and toes. I have not been able to observe this in the
example under consideration and examination of the metatarsi of two part
skeletons, and of the pes in filled skins, gives no indication of any such condi-
tion. The pes and its digits are slender and delicate, and the fifth toe is relatively
long. The nail of the fourth toe is also conspicuously long, as noted by Gould and
OQ. Thomas, but the statement of the former (5) that it exceeds in length that of
all other wallabies is more generally correct when applied to M. agilis,; the length
of the central nail, however, is very inconstant, and subject to considerable varia-
tion in all species. The granular sole of the pes is continuous from the heel to
the extremity of the fourth digit, but its width is not nearly uniform throughout
its length as in other large wallabies, but is suddenly constricted to one-third of
its breadth at a point about one-third of the total length from the heel, and it
continues thus constricted for about an equal interval, widening again suddenly as
it approaches the main interdigital pad. The condition is reminiscent of that
obtaining in M. rufus and M. giganteus, except that the encroaching of the hair

373

from the sides of the pes is never sufficient to interrupt the continuity of the sole.
The white thigh stripe is quite noticeable in the living animal (pl. xvii., fig. 1),
but does not contrast as strongly with its background of light grey as in M. agilis
and M. dorsalis.

The tail is but moderately long, rather thin, evenly tapering, and, for the
greater part of its length, circular in section. Its most noteworthy feature is the
conspicuous crest of long white hairs, which is erected from the dorsal surface of
its distal third (pl. xvii., fig. 2). This crest has been little emphasised in pre-
vious descriptions. It is not mentioned by Gould, nor Wood Jones; Thomas (1)
states that “indistinct upper and lower crests of white hairs developed on its distal
half,” and Waterhouse (8) states specifically that 1. greyi “may be distinguished
from H. manicatus by its having no crests to the apical portion of the tail.” hese
discrepancies and partial oversights are probably due to the fact that once the skin
is separated from the underlying muscles, the crest subsides to a considerable
extent, and is thus less prominent in a filled skin than in life, and in a flat skin is
easily overlooked. There may be, and probably are, variations in its relative devel-
opment, but it is sufficiently constant to have attracted the attention of the early
settlers, and is evident in all four skins in the South Australian Museum.

The exact condition of the pelage of the tail as it exists in the filled skin of
an adult female (South Austr. Mus. Reg. No. M2121) is as follows :—The
hairs on the dorsal surface of the base of the tail are very long (45-50 mm.), grey-
fawn at the base, ashy-grey terminally and loosely packed. There is no sudden
transition from body hairs to specialized tail hairs, as is usual in Macropus, but
proceeding distally there is a gradual increase in coarseness and degree of
adpression till a point about 150 mm. from the base is reached, from which its
texture remains unchanged to the tip, but throughout the whole of its length the
degree of adpression is less than in other wallabies of the group. At or about the
150 mm. point also, the superficial ashy-grey becomes more fawn, but from here,
distally, the basal portion of all the hairs is dark brown or black. From the mid-
point of the dorsal surface the hairs lengthen so gradually that it is dificult to
define the length of the crest, but the erection of the hairs above the general
surface of the tail becomes obvious 150 mm. from the tip, and for the terminal
50 mm. the hairs are 40 mm. long, uniform pale yellowish-white in colour and
considerably elevated. The hairs of the ventral and lateral surfaces are generally
short and stiff as in other species, but there is a distinct lengthening for the
terminal 50 mm., which, however, is not accompanied by any considerable elevation,
and which, therefore, does not result in a brush or tuft, as in Petrogale, nor in a
second ventral crest as in M. wma.

The tail is very flexible and capable of greater and more varied movement
than in other members of the genus that I have observed at close quarters, and
when the animal is apprehensive, the terminal third is sometimes lifted just clear
of the ground and is rapidly flicked from side to side, in the manner of an angry
cat. Even during the course of its immense leaps and when still in mid-air this
flexibility seems to be in part retained, and in place of being held rigid and
strongly convex to the ground surface, it remains almost straight, and has the
appearance of streaming out behind (pl. xvii., fig. 1). The same characteristic is
noticeable in the tails of the Petrogale.

One of the most interesting and curious of its external characters is the trans-
verse banding of the dorso-lumbar region, and this is also one of the many
characters which it shares with M. irma, and it is somewhat remarkable that in
neither case were the bands noticed, or at least commented on, by the original
describer. It is true that they are somewhat obscured in flat skins, and that their
visibility varies with the position of the observer, but they are unmistakably present
in all skins of both species which I have examined, and this in the winter as well

374

as in the summer pelage. Gilbert (11), whose observation was generally both
keett and accurate, and who was well acquainted with the western specics in its
native habitat, gives no indication of being aware of the banding in his notes on
M. ima in 1844. In the case of M. irma the omission was made good by
Krefft (12) in 1871, and, in the case of M. grevi, by Wood Jones (4) in 1924. In
the living animal the banding of the back is very prominent, and at once attracts
attention, but the exact condition existing I have not been able to ascertain owing
to the difficulties of a close approach.

In the filled skins in the South Australian Museum there is a substantial,
though not absolute agreement, in the main features of the banding, and the
description of the example in which they are most marked is applicable, with very
slight modification, to them all. In this skin (that of an adult female, Reg, No.
M2121) twelve bands of alternate light and dark-grey are visible in a posterior
view, arising, as stated by Wood Jones, slightly anterior to the costal margin and
continuing to the base of the tail, Of the series, six in the anterior lumbar region
are much better defined than the remainder, and here the light bands are twice as
wide as the dark. Their visibility varies greatly with the incidence of the light,
and they are at all times plainest when the illumination is diffused or even dull.
The banding seems to be produced chiefly by an alternating difference in the
length of the fur, the light bands corresponding to areas of long hairs, the dark
bands to areas of short hairs, and in certain lights the presence in the general
surface of the coat of these elevations and depressions causes a shadow effect in
the latter. In addition to this, however, the black-tipped hairs which are present
over the whole of the dorsal surface show a tendency to concentrate in the narrow
valleys. The invasion of the lateral surface by the bands is nowhere very con-
siderable, but is greatest in the anterior portion of the series; those at the hinder
end approaching the tail are the shortest, and are not visible in a side view. The
unilateral slip in the pattern, which has been emphasised by Wood Jones (4) as
of frequent occurrence in banded marsupials of several families, is not here
apparent, but it may be pointed out that the Hands are not strictly transverse to
the long axis of the trunk through the whole of their length, but approach the
dorsal mid-line somewhat obliquely, and thus acquire a slightly boomerang outline
when viewed from behind.

Cranial Characters-—Five skulls have been available for examination (South
Austr. Mus., Reg. Nos. M1760, M1761, M1762, M2120, M2121), and of these the
first four form a fairly uniform series as to relative dimensions and general out-
line, although two only (M1762 and M2121) are adult in the sense that the
permanent premolar has erupted.

In the high facial index, the wide tnconstricted interorbital region, the
relatively complete palate and the extremely small size of the second and third
incisors, the main cranial characters enumerated for this species by Oldfield
Thomas (1) are very evident. ‘The latter author, however, states that the nasal
bones “are short, broad, and enormously expanded behind.” In all four of the
skulls enumerated above the whole of the muzzle region, and with it the nasals, is
very long, and although the posterior expansion is considerable in all, it cannot be
described. as enormous in any one of them. In the two slightly immature skulls
the expansion may be said to be marked as compared with other large wallabies,
but it falls considerably short of the condition figured by Thomas, and in the two
adults is scarcely greater than frequently occurs in M. ruficolis. With regard to
the length of the nasals, it is apparent from the measurements given by Thomas
that the term “short” can hardly apply. The mean value of the ratio of the length
of the nasals to the basal length of the skull in the two examples measured by him
is 2°00, which is less than the value of the same ratio in M. irma and M., agilis
(2:02 and 2:15, respectively), both of which are said to have long nasals. In the

375

two adult skulls in the South Australian Museum the ratio has fallen to 1°98,
which indicates in M. greyia relative length of the nasals greater than that of any
other species of the subgenus.

It is very noticeable in all five skulls that the teeth are in excellent condition ;
not only is there an almost complete freedom from the usual incrustation of the
molars, but all the teeth, both cheek teeth and incisors, show very little signs of wear.
In most of the species of all three groups of Macropus the wear on the incisors
is so considerable that, by the time the last molar is in place, the enamel of the
first incisor has been reduced to two-thirds, or even onc-half, of its original area.
In the two adult skulls at hand, however, although the fourth molar has been in
use for some time the size and shape of the first incisors show no modification
from that of the same teeth in the three immature skulls. In all, the enamel
surface of the tooth extends to the alveolar margin without disclosing any sign of
the dentine root. ‘This long duration of the incisors is no doubt correlated with
the marked preference of the Voolach for a grazing, rather than a browsing, habit.

In connection with the teeth it may also be noted that in one skull (M2121)
the appearance of the permanent premolar has been delayed to such an extent
that it has been preceded in the jaw by the fourth molar. Using the British
Museum Catalogue nomenclature, it may be said that in the right upper jaw of
this skull, P3 and MP* coexist with M*, while P* is still beneath the bone. This
extraordinary condition is of rare occurrence in Macropus, and the only other
example of it which I have observed was presented by a skull of M. irma.

From a consideration of the general characters of the skull and its dentition
Thomas (1) has advanced the view that M. greyi is in reality “a comparatively
recently enlarged member of the group of small wallabies,” and there is some sup-
port for his contention in certain of its habits. This is particularly true of its semi-
gregariousness and localised, discontinuous distribution throughout its range,
which are both strongly reminiscent of the mode of occurrence of the small
wallabies.

Within the limits of the subgenus W’allabia its relationships are undoubtedly
closest to M. irma, as pointed out by both Gould and Waterhouse. In the skull
this is evinced by the diminutiveness of the second and third incisors, but the reten-
tion of a broad unconstricted interorbital region throughout life, and by the
relatively complete palate. Externally it is shown in the great reduction in the
size of the fore limb and mants, by several peculiarities in the structure of the
pes, by the presence of a caudal crest, and by a general correspondence in the
details of their ornamentation, this last being especially marked in the common
possession of a system of loin bands absent in all other species of the genus
Macropus, and paralleled by only one other species in the entire family
Macropodidae.

Af. ma is a western species which to-day is isolated from M. greyi by an
immense tract of country totally unfitted as a habitat for either, and it is of con-
siderable interest, therefore, that the affinities of the latter should be with the
isolated M. irma rather than with the five other species, whose several habitats in
Eastern Australia are practically continuous with one another, and linked also
with its own.

According to the views of Bensley (13) the mutual relationships of the two
species are not derivative, but are to be attributed rather to the parallel and quite
independent evolution of two Large Wallabies from a common ancestral Small
Wallaby, probably Thylogale eugenti. The explanation is an attractive one, but
its unreserved acceptance is not without difficulties, and further enquiry is ham-
pered by the fact that the Thylogale of the South Australian mainland has been
exterminated before its identity was properly established.

376

SKULL MEASUREMENTS OF MACROPUS GREYI, IN S.A. Museum.

(in millimetres.)

M1760. Imm. | M1761. Imm. M1762. M2121. M2120.

{no sex) {no sex) Male. Adult. |Female. Aduilt.| Male. Imm.

Greatest length .. .. ..| 120 119 124 124 | 98 (ca)

Basal length* bie Tad 101 101.5 109.5 110 82 (ca)
Zygomatic breadth... 60 58 59 58 58
Nasals, length : Pe 51 53 57.5 56 42
Nasals, greatest breadth .. 20.5 24 22 21 f 18
Nasals, overhang .. .. .. 9 10 9 9 —
Depth of muzzlet Mio ih 22 23 27.5 24.5 20
Constriction .. .. .. ../ 20.5 Cinter-| 21.5 (inter-| 18 (inter- (21.5 (inter- =

orbital) {| orbital) temporal) | temporal)

Palate, length 66 | 68.5 73.5 73 52
Palate, breadth inside M2 .. 21 ; 21.5 23 22 | 17
Palatal foramina... .. .. 7 : 7 6.5 8 =
Diastema Pasa ae chong bs 30 31 33 34 —
Basi-cranial axis .. .. .. 29 | 28 31 31 25
Basi-facial axis .. .. .. 76 77.5 82.5 83 60
Facial index .. .. 01. es. 262 ; 277 266 267 240
Molars 1-3... ee 20 20 195 | 19.5 ots
Pt os: — — | 6 : = —
Antero- posterior length 11 x 45 12 x 4.5 105 x 5 | 115 x 45 i
a x vertical height 5x35 | 45 x 3 45 x 3 5x 3 =
I3 J (of enamel) 5.5 x 4 45 x 3.5 45 x4 4x45 —

*From the anterior margin of the foramcn magnum to the most anterior point on the
premacxillae.

7Measured by a perpendicular through the mid-point of the diastema.

List or REFERENCES.

1. O. Tuomas, “Catalogue of Marsupialia and Monotremata in the British
Museum.” 1888.

ANGEL CaBRERA, “Genera Mammalium: Monotremata and Marsupialia.”
Madrid, 1919.

3. H. Loneman, “Memoirs of the Queensland Museum,” vii., 1922, p. 298.

bo

4. F. Woop Jones, “Mammals of South Australia, 1923-1925.” Adelaide.

5. Joun Goutp, “Mammals of Australia,” ii, 1863. London.

6. A, Zietz, “List of South Australian Kangaroos and Wallabies,” Trans.
Roy. Soc. S. Austr., xv., 1892, p. 18.

7. J. E. Gray, “List of Mammals in the British Museum.” 1843.

G. R. WaTerHousE, “A Natural History of the Mammalia,” i. 1846.

9. F. Woop Jongs, “The Hair Pattern of a Kangaroo: a Study of Cause and
Effect,” Journ. of Mammalogy, vi., No. 1, 1925, p. 13.

10. BaLpwin Spencer, “Report on the Work of the Horn Scientific Expedi-
tion to Central Australia, 1896,” pt. 1, Mammalia, p. 41.

11. J. Grigert, Proceedings of the Zoological Society, London, xii., 1844, p. 33.
12, Gerarp Krerrt, “The Mammals of Australia,” 1871. Sydney.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI

. Plate XVI.

Fig. 1.

Typica

oi

Soolach country,’ County Grey, South Australia.

Fig. 2.
M. greyi (adult female), showing characters of head and usual position of hands.

Photo by H. H. Finlayson. Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate XVII.

Fig. 1.
M. greyi (adult female), showing general bearing and carriage of tail when
moving at speed.

Fig. 2.

M. greyi (adult female), showing dorsal banding and caudal crest.

Photo by H. H. Finlayson, Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927 Vol. LI,

Fig. 3.
Lateral, superior and palatal views of skull of MW. greyi
(adult male, South Australian Museum. M1762).

Photo by T. M. A. Boys Gillingham & Co. Limited,

Printers,

Plate XVITT.

Adelaide.

377

13. B. Artuur Benstey, “On the Evolution of the Australian Marsupialia,
with remarks on the Relationships of the Marsupials in general.”
Transactions of the Linnean Society (London), (2), ix., pp. 83-217
(1903).

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES XVI. tro XVIII.

PiLate XVI.

Fig. 1. Typical “Toolach country,” County of Grey, South Australia.
Fig. 2. M. greyi (adult female), showing characters of head and usual position of hands.

Pirate XVII.

Fig. 1. M. greyi (adult female), showing general bearing and carriage of the tail
when moving at speed.

Fig. 2. M. greyi (adult female), showing dorsal banding and caudal crest.

Pirate XVITT,

Figs- 1, 2, and 3. Lateral, superior and palatal views of skull of M. grevi
(adult male, South Australian Museum, M1762).

378

ADDITIONS TO THE FLORA OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA.
No, 25.

By J. M. Brack.
[Read October 13, 1927.]

(CYPERACEAE.

Heleocharis halmaturina, n. sp. Planta parva glabra gracilis perennis,
caulibus tenuibus sed rigidiusculis 4-8 cm. longis subcompressis } mm. latis
secus unum latus sulcatis arcuatis vel subflexuosis, foliis fere ad vaginas
brunneas basilares reductis, vaginis supremis in acumen subulatum 2-5 mm.
longum desinentibus, spiculis solitariis terminalibus linearibus acutis 6-7 mni.
longis vix 1 mm. latis, glumis circ. 6, infima subulata ad basin duabus auriculis
membranaceis instructa erecta bracteiformi reliquum spiculae subaequante,
secunda breviuscula obtusé mucronata, ceteris glumis lineari-oblongis acutis
subaequalibus rubellis dorso uninervibus, gluma terminali florem solitarium
bisexualem cum gluma minuta includente, staminibus 3, styli ramis 3 elon-
gatis ejusque basi conica persistente puberula 3 mm. longa, setis hypogynis
6 superne barbellatis, nuce matura non visa.

Rocky River, Kangaroo Island, coll. J. B. Cleland. The solitary terminal
flower is peculiar, but in other respects this little plant agrees with Heleocharts.
The spikelet closely resembles that of Cladinm capilaceum but is always terminal
and solitary and is also distinguished by the presence of hypogynous bristles.

Gahnia hystrix, n. sp. Plantula perennis hystriciformis 4-15 cm. alta,
caulibus confertis erectis ramosis basin versus vaginis fuscis veterum foliorum
obtectis, foliorum laminis teretibus rigidis pungentibus erectis 2-5 cm. longis
circ. } mm. latis confertis paniculam parvam spiciformem terminalem super
antibus et fere celantibus, spiculis subsessilibus cire. 4, supremis geminis,
ceteris solitariis, omnibus primo albidis angulatisque denique brunneis et
ovoideo-acutis 6-7 mm. longis in vaginis bractearum foliosarum plus minusve
inclusis, glumis 5, 4 inferioribus latis subaequalibus breviter aristatis, quarta
florem solitarium bisexualem glumamque quintam minimam includente,
staminibus 6, stylo brevi tereti caduco breviter trifido, setis hypogynis nullis,
nuce obovoidea albo nitente inferne trigono cum punctillo apicali nigro dis-
junctionem styli notante.

Cape du Couédic, Kangaroo Island, coll. J. B. Cleland; Cape Borda, coll.
J. G. O. Tepper. ‘The flowering glume is as large as the others, but the 6 stamens
and the absence of any swelling towards the base of the style indicate Gahnia
rather than Cladium.

PORTULACACEAE.

Calandrinia sphaerophylla, J. M. Black. Herbula annua 1-2 cm, alta,
caulibus adscendentibus, foliis carnosis 3-5 mim. longis obovoideis vel sub-
sphaericis basin versus parum attenuatis, racemis paticifloris, bracteis parvis
acutis, pedicellis 3-5 mm. longis fructiferis reflexis vel patentibus, sepalis
roseis orbicularibus fere 2 mm. longis, petalis 5 albidis ovatis sepala aequanti-
bus, staminibus 6 vel interdum paucioribus inferne in annulum_ coalitis,
antheris globosis, stylis 3 brevibus latis, capsula rosea ovoidea calyci sub-
aeyuilonga 3-valvi, seminibus ca. 15 nitentibus sed minute granulatis Vix
4 mm. diam.

Near Port Lincoln. Resembles C. pygmaea in size, but differs in the reflexed
pedicels, thinner not deciduous sepals, obtuse petals, filaments united about the
middle, broad not slender styles and pale capsule splitting almost to base. Collected
in 1925 without indication of exact locality.

379

Calandrinia dipetala, n. sp. Herbula annua, caule singulari erecto
5-10 mm, alto racemum terminalem saepius 3-florum ferente, foliis paucis
carnulentis obovoideis 2-3 mm. longis, pedicellis 2-4 mm. longis ad basin
minute bracteatis fructiferis patentibus vel reflexis, sepalis suborbicularibus
rubellis apiculatis circa 2 mm. longis, petalis 2 obovatis purpurascentibus
cuin sepalis alternantibus et eis denique fere duplo longioribus, staminibus 3
liberis, antheris globosis albis, stylis 3 brevibus, capsula membranacea calycem
paulo superante, ovulis circa 10 sed tantum 2 anipliatis et maturescentibus,
seminibus maturis non visis.

Myponga; coll. J. B. Cleland. This is probably the smallest of all Calan-
drinias, and as it grows among moss is liable to be overlooked. The leaves are
much like those of C. sphaerophylla, but rather smaller. The single weak stem,
the 2 petals, alternate with the sepals, the 3 free stamens and the longer capsule
distinguishes it from that species,

Calandrinia stagnensis, n. sp. Herbula annua, caulibus adscendentibus
7-10 cm. longis, foltis tereti-clavatis superne ca. 2 mm. crassis, radicalibus
1-3 cm. longis, caulinis 5-15 mm. longis, floribus 3-5 in racemos terminales
foliosos vel paniculas breves cymosas dispositis, pediccllis 4-8 mm. longis
fructiferis erectis folio aequilongo et bractea parva scariosa suffultis, sepalis
latis apiculatis florentibus 24 mm. longis fructiferis 4 mm. longis, staminibus
8-9, flamentis base valde dilatatis, styli ramis 4 latis plumosis, capsula conica
obtusa quam calyx sublongiore 4-valvi, ovulis numerosis, seminibus rubellis
lacvibus nitentibus ca. 4 mm. diam.

Ross’s waterhole, Macumba River, coll. J. B. Cleland. Differs from
C. ptychosperma in the narrower leaves, leafy racemes and smooth seeds, which
closely resemble those of C. pumila.

CHTENOPODIACEAE.

Kochia enchylaenoides, n. sp. Suffrutex, caule cum ramis et foliis tomento
lanoso albo obtectis, foliis linearibus obtusis crassiusculis patentibus 5-10 mm.
longis | mm. latis, floribus solitariis in omnibus axillis ramorum brevium
patentium, perianthio fructifero depresso-globoso in sicco nigrescente 4-5 mm.
lato cum ala angusta horizontali ca. 1 mm. lata apicem tubi hemisphaerici
laevis cingente, toto perianthio glaberrimo praeter lohos minimos ciliatos,
radicula parvam gibbam lateralem formante ut in fructu Enchylaenae
tomentosae.—K. tomentosa (Mog.) F. v. M. var. enchylaenoides, J. M. Black
in Trans. Roy. Soc. S.A. 47: 368 (1923).

Yellow Cliff, near Charlotte Waters. Coll. S. A. White. None of the fruits
are quite ripe, so that the wing may possibly become somewhat broader. Differs
from K. tomentosa in the whiter more woolly tomentum and the thicker very
narrow wing or border surrounding the summit of the perianth-tube. The fruiting
perianth resembles that of Enchylaena tomentosa in its depressed shape and also
in the small protuberance on one side to accommodate the tip of the radicle;
probably when ripe and fresh it is somewhat succulent. The chief difference is
that E, tomentosa has no wing, and K. enchylaenoides may perhaps be regarded
as a transition form connecting the 2 genera.

LEGUMINOSAE.

Swainsona Behriana (F. v. M. Herb.), n. sp. Herba perennis gracilis
10-20 cm. alta pilis brevibus basifixis pubescens, caulibus adscendentibus,
foliolis 5-13 obtusis emarginatis vel acutis lineari-lanceolatis usque ad
oblongo-cuneata plus minusve pubescentibus interdum supra subglabris et
margine subincurvis 4-20 mm. longis 1-4 mm. latis, foliolis foliorum inferiorum
saeplus quam ea superiorum latioribus, stipulis late lanceolatis ca. 3 mm.
longis, pedunculis gracilibus 4-10 cm, longis folia multo superantibus

380

umbellam terminalem 3-8-Aoram vel raro racemum brevissimum ferentibus,
floribus purpureis, pedicellis 2-5 mm. longis, bracteis parvis, bracteolis
minutis, calyce 4-5 mm. longo pilis nigris pubescente, dentibus lanceolatis
tubo fere aequilongis, vexillo ca. 8 mm. Jongo 10 mm. lato haud vel paene
emarginato omnino vel fere ecalloso, carina obtusa non sacculata alas vix
superante vexillum fere aequante, stylo tota longitudine breviter barbato ad
apicem abrupte inflexo, legumine oblongo obtuso pubescente 12-15 mm. longo
5-6 mm. lato.—S. lessertitfolia, DC. var. tephrotricha, Benth. Fl. Aust. 2:222
(1864) in parte; S. oroboides, F, v. M. var. hirsuta, J. M. Black, FL S. Aust.
320 (1924).

Southern districts to southern part of Flinders Range; Murray lands.—
Victoria: New South Wales.

Belongs to section Basitrichae, Differs from S$. oroboides in more
numcrous, shorter, often obtuse or notched leaflets, broader stipules and usually
smaller calyx with black hairs and broader teeth rather shorter than the tube,
whereas in S. oroboides the hairs of the calyx are white and the teeth slender and
distinctly longer than the tube; from S. lessertiifolia by the fewer, smaller, more
hairy leaflets, the much fewer and umbellate flowers and the style abruptly
inflexed at summit; from S. tephrotricha it is widely removed by the basal attach-
ment of the hairs, the usually thinner pubescence, the fewer mostly umbellate
flowers, the shape of the style, the keel without pouches, &c. The name
S. Behriana was published by Mueller without description in a letter to the South
Australian Register printed 19th Feb. 1850, and is attached to the type specimen
preserved in the Kew Herbarium and kindly lent to me. The label reads :—
“Scvainsona Behriana, F, Miller. In planitie graminosa ad Adelaide. Dr. F:
Miller—Herbar. W. Sonder.” The specimen, of which co-types can still be
found on the Adelaide plains, was evidently sent by Mueller to Dr. Sonder, of
Hamburg, and was doubtless named alter Dr. Behr, a physician and botanist then
practising at Gawler. In the Kew Herbarium it is placed under S. lessertiufolia,
DC. yar. tephrotricha (F, v. M.) Benth. (=S. tephrotricha, F. v. M.), an error
which doubtless goes back to Bentham’s time and has been the source of much
confusion in the naming of Australian specimens. It stands nearest to S. reticu-
lata, having the same comparatively short calyx-teeth, but the hairs are mostly
black, giving the calyx a darker appearance; and the flowers are umbellate rather
than racemose. In the typical form, which extends from Encounter Bay to
Jamestown, and is found in several parts of Victoria, the flowers are a deep
purple, fading into blue, the standard without any calli and with 2 greenish spots
near the base of the lamina, but in some specimens from the northern areas and
the Murray lands the flowers are not so strictly umbellate, the standard has 2
small calli and there is a tendency to pass aver into S, reticulata. S. tenuis,
E. Pritzel in Engl. Bot. Jahrb. 35; 270 (1904), a West Australian species of which
I have not seen a specimen, appears to be nearer to S. oroboides than S. Behriana.
Judging by the strong resemblance of the drawing, S. tephrotricha, Maiden, Ill.
N.S.W. PL 77, plate 28 (1911), non F. v. M,, figured from Victorian specimens,
is S. Behriana.

Swainsona rigida (Benth.) n. sp. Herba perennis erecta 60 cm. usque ad
1 m. alta vel ultra, caulibus rigidis glabris, foliis distantibus inconspicuisque,
foliolis ca. 15 subsessilibus obovato-cuneatis emarginatis caducis 2-5 mm.
longis pilis basifixis adpresso-pubescentibus, stipulis parvis ovatis pubescenti-
bus, pedunculis usque ad 25 cm, longis superne racemum laxum sub-20-florum
ferentibus, floribus flavis, bracteis et bracteolis minutis, calyce 5 mm. longo
sparse pubescente minute dentato, vexillo ovato ecalloso ca, 15 mm. longo
10 mm. lato, stylo ut in S. Jaxd, legumine planiusculo oblique ovato ca. 12 mm.

381

longo 7-8 mm. lato reticulato glabro saepius tantum unum alterumve semen
maturante, stipite calycem subaequante—S, lava, R, Br. var. (?) rigida, Benth,

Minnie Downs, near Diamantina (Warburton) River, coll, L. Reece; near
Lake Callabonna, coll. J. B. Cleland. Differs from S. lava in much smaller hairy
leaflets, longer peduncles, larger and pubescent calyx with teeth only 4 the length
of the tube, while S. Jaxa has teeth nearly as long as the tube. Belongs to the
section Basitrichae.

Swainsona fissimontana, n. sp. Herba perennis 20-30 cm. alta, caulibus
erectis vel adscendentibus pilis centrifixis adpresso-pubescentibus, foliolis
7-11 similiter pubescentibus 8-15 mm. longis, iis foliorum inferiorum oblongis
foliorum superiorum lineari-lanceolatis, stipulis lineari-lanceolatis 5-8 mm.
longis, pedunculis rigidiusculis glabrescentibus 12-20 cm. longis prope apicem
racemum laxum 5-9-florum ferentibus; calyce 5-6 mm. longo pilis nigris
pubescente, dentibus lanceolatis tubo fere aequilongis, vexillo rubello ecalloso
ca. 12 mm. longo 15 mm. lato, carina saturate rubra incurva ad unum latus
torta bisacculata, alis quam carina brevioribus, stylo prope basin torto fere
tota longitudine barbato a basi incurvo sed apice haud abrupte inflexo,
legumine oblongo 25-30 cm. longo adpresso-pubescente secus suturam impresso.

Boolcoomatta and Koonamore Stations (north of the Broken Hill Railway
in South Australia;) coll. A. Morris—Broken Hill district, N.S. Wales. Section
Mesotrichae. Differs from S. stipularis in the stouter rigid almost glabrous
peduncles, narrower stipules, ustially narrower leaflets and longer pods; from
S. Morrisiana in the broader shorter leaflets, larger flowers, standard darker and
not streaked, the keel pouched and the style not so much twisted nor with an
almost terminal ring of hairs; from S. phacoides in the thinner coating so that
the leaflets appear greener, smaller flowers, absence of calli on the standard and
pod not cylindrical but broader and dilated about the middle; from S. tephrotricha
by a greener appearance, usually fewer flowers in the raceme and the twisted
keel and style; from all these other species of the section Mesotrichae it differs
in the glabrous or almost glabrous peduncles. ‘The type-specimens are Mr. Motris’s
numbers 26, 1346, 1449, 1450, from Koonamore, S.A. and Thompson’s Siding,
near Broken Hill. ‘The species is the most common Swainsona near that town and
has been named after it. Color of flowers “magenta,” according to the collector.

S. tephrotricha, F.v. M. The type of this species is in the Kew Herbarium
and agrees in all respects with specimens collected east of the Flinders Range
towards the country lying between Lake Frome and the Burra. ‘The label of the
type-specimen is inscribed :—“Sw. tephrotricha, F, Mull. Nov. Holl. austr. inter.
Dr. F. Miiller, Herbar. W. Sonder.” The species has not so far been found in
any of the other States. The only genuine localities quoted by Bentham, Fi. Aust.
2: 222 (1864) are “Broughton, Hutt and Hill Rivers” (erroneously placed in Vic-
toria instead of South Australia) and “Burra-Burra.” The specimens quoted as
from other localities are referable to S. Behriana or some other species .

I have examined, by the courtesy of Mr. J. W. Audas, Curator of the Vic-
torian National Herbarium, 4 specimens included under the name of Swaisona
stipularis in Baron v. Mueller’s time. The first has the following label :-—~
“S2vainsona stipularis (S. phacifolia). Akaba, Nov. Iloll. aust. interior, Oct. 1850
vy. 1851, coll. F. Mueller.” (“Akaba” is a clerical error for “Arkaba,” an error
repeated in the Flora Australiensis. “Akaha” is preceded by the name “Cudnaka,”
which has been’ struck through by the pen, Mueller being apparently in doubt as
to the exact locality. “Cudnaka,” which occurs on the labels of several specimens
collected by Mueller on his journey to the neighbourhood of Lake Torrens, is not
known in the South Australian Land Office, but is probably the same as Kanyaka,
which lies on the direct route from Melrose to Arkaba. In the year 1851 Melrose
was the most northerly town in South Australia). The leaflets are 7-13 in number,

382

oblong-cuneate, 10-15 mm. long, 2-3 mm. broad and bluntly notched at summit,
like those of S. adenophylla, but without the gland; the stipules are broadly ovate,
acute, 6-12 mm. long, 6-8 mm. broad near the base, with a few coarse teeth on the
margin. The whole plant is hoary with appressed basifixed hairs; racemes
8-9-flowered. The name S. phactfolia was published (as S. phacaefolia) in the
South Australian Register of 19th Feb., 1850, without any description and has
since then remained a nomen nudum, because Mueller renamed and described it in
Linnaea 25: 393 (1852) as S. stipularis. The description and the locality given
in Linnaea leave no doubt as to the identity of the plant:—‘Pilis appressis
canescens, foliolis 5-6-jugis lineari-cuneatis emarginatis, racemis brevibus longe
pedunculatis 6-9-floris, stipulis magnis triangularibus acutis grosse paucidentatis,
stylo postice apicem versus barbato. Prope Arkaba.” S. phacifolia is therefore
merely a synonym of S. stipularis. Specimens similar to the Arkaba type can be
gathered to-day at Quorn, Hawker, Arkaba, Leigh’s Creek, Nilpena and other
places in the Flinders Range as far north as Lake Eyre, eastward thereof at
Carrieton, Orroroo and Boolcoomatta, and over the New South Wales border into
the Broken Hill country. The leaflets vary much in size; they are often merely
obtuse, not notched, and those of the upper leaves may be lanceolate and acute.
The stipules, although always broad at base, are sometimes entire. The dis-
crepancy between the date of publishing the name of S. phactfolia (Feb. 1850) and
the date of collection in Oct. 1850 or 1851 (in Fragm. 9: 154 Mueller defines it,
under the name S. phacifolia, as 1851), is puzzling. It is possible that Mueller
at first intended giving it to some other South Australian plant, then affixed it to
his Arkaba specimen and finally: decided to replace it by what he considered the
more appropriate one of S. stipularis. It is under the latter name that the species
appeared in his Census and in his Key to the System of Victorian Plants; in the
Key S. phacifolia is quoted as a synonym.

The second specimen received from the Melbourne Herbarium is labelled
“S. phacifolia. Towards Spencer’s Gulf; coll. Warburton.” It is the one alluded
to by Mueller in Fragm. 9:154 (1875) and agrees entirely with the type of
S. stipularis,

The third specimen is labelled “S. phacifolia. Between the Wimmera and
Richardson Rivers; coll. H. Curdie.’” This is S. Morrisiana.

The fourth specimen is labelled “S. phacifolia, Mount Kingston; coll. J. M.
Stuart.” Mount Kingston is situated west of Lake Eyre, about 12 miles from
Algebuckina station on the Oodnadatta railway. This is a small plant, hoary with
appressed centrifixed hairs, 5-7 rather long linear leaflets, linear-lanceolate stipules,
small flowers and the style abruptly inflexed at summit, as in S. oroboides and
S. Behriana. It is not S. stipularis and is probably an undescribed species. It
appears to be the only specimen of the kind which has been collected.

S. adenophylla, described in these Transactions 50:284 (1926), is near
S. stipularts, but appears to be constantly distinguished by the gland in the sinus
of the obtusely notched leaflets, the smaller bright purple flowers and the slender
style shortly bearded all the way, instead of a broader rigid style with a long
beard only towards the summit.

STERCULIACEAE,

Hermannia Guesii, F. v. M. Fragm. 9:42 (1875). This genus and species
must be added to the flora of South Australia, because investigation has shown
that Corchorus longipes, Tate (Hymenocapsa longipes (Tate) J.“M. Black) does
not belong to the tamily Tiliaceae, but is really the same as Hermannia Guilesii
and must therefore be placed in the section Hermannieae of Sterculiaceae. This
result is due to the careful observations of Mr. M. Burret, of the Berlin Botanical
Garden and Museum (Beitrage zur Kenntnis der Tiliaceen in Notizbl. des Bot.
Gart. u. Mus. Berlin-Dahlem, 9: 1173 (1927). The only 2 known specimens are

383

the typical one, collected by Giles near Charlotte Waters (National Herbarium of
Victoria), and the one in the Tate Herbarium collected near Farina, in the Flinders
Range. They differ somewhat as regards the shape and size of the leaf, but not
in a specific degree, as far as one can judge from the somewhat scanty material.
lé it should ever be considered necessary to separate them specifically, the new
name would be H. longipes (Tate) Burret, Lc. Mr. Burret, however, agrees with
me that we have not at present any evidence to justify the creation of a new
species. Mr. J. W. Audas, Curator of the Victorian Herbarium, informs me that
H. Gilesii was recorded as collected by J. D. Batt near Eucla in 1889, but unfor-
tunately the specimen is not in the Herbarium.

VIOLACEAE.

Hymenanthera angustifolia, R. Br. was found in the gorge of the Onkaparinga
in 1882. Since then—a period of 45 ycars—it has not been recorded, until in Sep-
tember of this year it was discovered by Professor J. B. Cleland on Mount
Remarkable and by myself close to the Torrens Valley Road.

BIGNONIACEAE,

Tecoma doratoxylon, n. sp. Frutex glaber 3-5 m. altus, ramis strictis non
volubilibus, foliolis 5-11, anguste lanceolatis 2-5 cm. longis 3-8 mm. latis
integris, rhachi canaliculata, floribus paniculas terminales foliosas formanti-
bus, calyce campanulato 4-5 mm. longo obtuse breviterque 5-lobato, corolla
inf{undibuliformi circiter 25 mm. longo albido, tubo glabro rubello-striato
quater longiore quam limbus intus et extus puberulus, capsula longa valvis
cymbiformibus dehiscente; seminibus planis late alatis—T. australis, Benth.
non R. Br.

Alberga River westward to Musgrave Range. Also in Central Australia.
Known to bushmen as “Spearwood Bush.” The long straight stems are used by
the natives for making spears. Nearest to 7. Oxleyi, A. Cunn., which has
twining stems and branches and smaller and narrower leaflets.

GOODENIACEAE.

Goodenia unilobata, n. sp. Herba, caule gracili tereti ad apicem crispulo-
incano ceterum glabro (parte inferiore ignota), foltis caulinis pedunculos
subtendentibus subglabris oblongis obtusis tenuibus 2-3 cm. longis 4-5 mm.
latis integris vel margine denticulatis et basi in lobum oblongum patentem
unilateralem 3-12 mm. longum productis, petiolo tantum 2 mm. longo,
pedunculis solitariis 1-floris folio brevioribus prope medium duabus bracteolis
angusto-linearibus instructis, sepalis linearibus acutis 6-7 mm. longis quam
receptaculum obconicum primo incanum longiore, corolla flava 20-25 inm.
longa extus sparsim pubescente intus glabra, 2 lobis superioribus auriculatis
et impariter alatis, stylo 7-8 mm. longo fere glabro, indusio subglabro ad
apicem brevissime ciliato, dissepimento ovarium longitudine fere acquante,
ovulis circ. 18 biserialibus, capsula non visa.

Only known by a fragmentary specimen in the Tate Herbarium labelled
“Qoldea,” without collector’s name, The peduncles bibracteolate about the
middle bring this species near to the geniculata group, but the leaves—of which
only the upper ones are known—are peculiar, terminating, as most of them do, in
a large basal unilateral lobe, which resembles a prolongation of the leaf
downwards.

Goodenia subintegra, F. v. M. in Vict. Nat. 5:13 (1888). Herba perennis,
caulibus erectis vel adscendentibus 5-30 cm, longis sparse adpresso-
pubescentibus, foliis plus minusve adpresso-pubescentibus, radicalibus cum
petiolo 3-10 cm. longis 4-18 mm. latis, junioribus caducis late lanceolatis vel

384

obovatis saepe obtusis integris vel paucidentatis interdum lyratis vel grosse
crenatis, serioribus latiuscule lanceolatis acutis saepius integris, foliis caulinis
1-3 petiolatis lanceolatis vel lineari-lanceolatis, pedunculis 2-7 cm. longis
pubescentibus axillaribus 1-floris ebracteolatis quam folia floralia angusta
saepius multo longioribus interdum ad apicem caulium fasciculatis, sepalis
lanceolatis 4-5 mm. longis pubescentibus, corolla flava 15-25 mm. longa extus
argenteo-pubescente, lobis 2 inferioribus auriculatis, stylo 3-6 mm. longo
glaberrimo vel interdum intus prope apicem barbato, indusii dorso glabro,
antheris apiculatis, capsula obovoided subcompressé basin versus saepius
angustata 7-10 mm. longa, dissepimento trientem usque ad fere dimidium
capsulae aequante, seminibus brunneis planis ovatis punctulatis 5-7 mm.
longis ala alba 1-2 mm. lata adnumerata,—G. glauca, F. v. M. var. sericea,
Benth, (1869).

Murray lands to Flinders Range and Far North—Western Victoria and New
South Wales; Central Australia.

G. subintegra was very imperfectly described by Mueller in the Victorian
Naturalist as a distinct species or a variety of G. glauca, and his statement that
Bentham had already treated it as a variety of that species shows that Mueller
considered it equivalent to var. sericea. The comparison with other species and
the localities quoted by Mueller go to prove the same thing. As a varietal name
sericea has a priority of nearly 20 years, but when that variety is raised to specific
rank (as I think it should be) Mueller’s specific name takes precedence in accord-
ance with art. 49 of the international rules.

G, subiniegra differs from G. glauca in the appressed clothing, which is some-
times silky, the style glabrous or almost so, the indusium glabrous on back, the
capsule larger and obovoid instead of globular, the seeds much larger and more
broadly winged. It is to the observations of Mr. A. Morris, who cultivated this
species in his garden at Broken Hill, that we owe accurate knowledge about the
broad early lobate caducous leaves, which differ so much from the later lanceolate
leaves that early and late plants could easily be taken for distinct species or at
least varieties.

Goodenia lunata, n. sp. Herba perennis, caulibus erectis vel adscendenti-
bus 6-20 cm. longis basi lanatis, foltis subrigidis adpresse incano-pubescenti-
bus, radicalibus oblongo-lanceolatis acutis 4-7 cm. longis in petiolo longius-
culo angustatis, exterioribus saepe integris, plerisque in lobos lanceolatos
acutos patentes 8-20 mm. longos pinnatifidis, lobo terminali lateralibus
longiore, foliis caulinis nullis vel tantum uno lanceolato integro, foliis florali-
bus angustis quam pedunculi erecti pubescentes 1-flori axillares vel fasciculato-
terminales ebracteolati vix brevioribus, sepalis 3-4 mm. longis, corolla flava
circ. 15 mm. longa extus et intra tubum pubescente, lobis omnibus late alatis
2 superioribus auriculatis, stylo glabro brevi, indusii dorso glabro ejusque
apice brevissime sparsimque ciliato, capsula ovoided 7-10 mm. longa, dis-
sepimento minimo lunato quadrantem capsulae vix aequante, seminibus
suborbicularibus brunneis cum ala lata circ. 5 mm. permetientibus.

Cordillo Downs and Macumba River, coll. J. B, Cleland; Alberga River, H.
W. Andrew. Differs from G. subintegra, F. v. M. in the more rigid leaves with
longer lobes, the inconspicuous ciliation of the indusium and the minute
dissepiment.

Goodenia argentea, n. sp. Herba debilis adpresse denseque argenteo-
pubescens, caulibus tenuibus erectis vel adscendentibus 10-20 cm. longis, foliis
radicalibus lineari- vel oblongo-lanceolatis basin versus angustatis cum petiolo
longo 3-12 cm. longis, 2-7 mm. latis integris vel 2-4 lobis dentibusve linearibus
4-20 mm. longis marginatis, foliis caulinis 1-2 angusto-linearibus, foliis florali-
bus angustissimis pedunculos filiformes axillares 1-floros ebracteolatos 2-6 cm.

385

longos suhaequantibus, sepalis circ. 3 mm. longis, corolla alba (vel dilute
flava?) 14-16 mm. longa extus et intra tubum pubescente, lobis omnibus late
rotundato-alatis duobus superioribus auriculatis, antheris apiculatis, stylo
3 min. longo glabro, indusii dorso et apice fere glabris, dissepimento medium
ovarli attingente marginibus piloso, ovulis circ. 12 alatis, fructu non viso.

Strangways Springs (west of Lake Eyre) coll. W. L. Cleland; Yadlakina
Soakage (east of Lake Torrens). Differs from G. subintegra, F. v. M. in the
very slender weak stems, narrower flaccid leaves and the cilia of the indusium
almost obsolete.

G. heteromera F. v. M.n. var. deminuta. Forma pumila basi lanata, foliis
radicalibus cum petiolo 5-15 mm. longis, pedunculis filiformibus sub flore
valde lanatis modo omnibus radicalibus 15-20 mm. longis modo in caulem
brevem insertis, indusit dorso glabro.

Near the Wilson River, south-western Queensland and not far from our
border, coll. W. D, K. MacGillivray.

Goodenia anfracta, n. sp. Herba perennis humilis glabra absque axillis
lanulatis, caulibus procumbentibus anfractis tenuibus sed rigidis circ. 10 cm.
longis, foliis radicalibus omnino vel fere integris lanceolatis vel obovato-
cuneatis cum petiolo breyi 15-20 mm. longis, foliis caulinis linearibus crassius-
culis distantibus ramos pedunculosque subtendentibus basin versus paulo
angustatis 20-25 mm. longis circ. 1 mm. latis saepe falcatis, pedunculis soli-
tariis 1-floris axillaribus filiformibus folia subaeqtiantibus ebracteolatis saepius
reflexis, sepalis 3 mm. longis lineari-lanceolatis pubescentibus quam recepta-
culum longioribus, corolla flava, (vel alba?) circ, 12 mm. longa extus et intra
tubum puberula, lobis ad apicem parvi-alatis duobus superioribus conspicue
auriculatis, stylo 3-4 mm. longo glabro, indusii dorso pubescente ejusque apice
breviter ciliolato, dissepimento tere apicem ovarii attingente, ovulis circ. 12
biserialihus, fructu non viso.

Cootanoorinna (between Warrina and Arkaringa Creek) coll. R. Helms,
May, 1891; one specimen preserved in the Tate Herbarium. Very distinct in
aspect, with its slender but rigid zigzag stems and thick linear distant usually
curved stem-leaves. Perhaps nearest to G. linifolia, W. V. Fitzg. ex Krause, of
North-West Australia. but differs in the much shorter stem-lcaves, longer
peduncles, glabrous style and procumbent habit.

G. Hawlandii, Maiden et Betche nov. var. pawperata. Caulibus tantum
3-8 cm. longis, foliis radicalibus brevioribus angustioribus omnino vei fere
integris, pedunculis axillaribus 5-10 mm. longis, dissepimento minuto crasso
ad apicem piloso ut in typo.

Near Ooldea, coll. Daisy M. Bates. The same variety was collected by R.
Helms in the Victoria Desert, W.A., 15th Sept. 1891, Camp 53.

Scaevola bursariifolia, n. sp. Irutex glaber, ramulis viscidis, foliis
crassiusculis obovato-cuneatis vel oblanceolatis cum brevissimo petiolo
10-15 mm. longis approximatis sed non fasciculatis, floribtus paucis solitariis
axillaribus subsessilibus folia subaequantibus, pedunculo crasso 1-2 mm, longo
duabus hracteolis linearibus quam receptaculum dimidio brevioribus instructo,
sepalis rotundatis circ. § mm. longis, corolla verisimiliter flava 8-9 mm.
longa extus glabra intus barhbata, tubo lobis fere exalatis his terque longiore,
stylo glabro 4-5 mm. longo, indusii dorso pubescente, ovariit dissepimento
tenul apicem non attingente, fructu ignoto.

Collected by Professor Ralph Tate in Feb. 1879 on the “Bunda Plateau,”
extending from north of Fowler’s Bay along the Great Bight towards Eucla.
Differs from S. myrtifolia (De Vriese) Krause in the viscid branchlets, smaller
thicker obtuse leaves, shorter stout peduncles, smaller corolla with almost obsolete
wings and shorter glabrous style.

M

386

GEOLOGICAL NOTES ON AN AREA ALONG THE NORTH-EASTERN
MARGIN OF THE NORTH-EASTERN PORTION OF THE
WILLOURAN RANGE.

By Doveras Mawsoy, Kr., D.Sc., PRLS.
[Read October 13, 1927.]

These brief remarks are from field notes made in May, 1920, when on an
inspection of copper prospects in the north-eastern portion of the Willouran
Range. Howchin has published notes,“ made during a visit in the year 1906, on
the area immediately west and south-west of Marree. The observations now
tendered refer particularly to the region further to the south and south-west,
carrying the section into the high broken country of the Willouran Range proper.

Between Mundowdna and Marree the railway line traverses a plains country,
little relieved by irregularities of the surface. Beyond, to the west and south-
west, the Willouran Range can be seen from the passing train, standing out in
bold relief as a jumble of hills culminating in Mount Willouran.

The Jess relieved country traversed by the railway line is occupied by a series
of ancient rocks, for the most part constituted of slates. These will be referred
to as the “Mundowdna Series.” Rocks of this group can be noted outcropping
a little to the east of Mundowdna Siding and following the railway line north
for about three miles, when they pass beneath alluvial accumulations and later
formations. To the west of Mundowdna, except for several patches covered by
a surface mantle of Recent age, this slaty series continues for eight miles to the
foothills of the Willouran Range. To the north it everywhere passes out of sight
beneath the gibber-strewn plains before arriving at the latitude of Marree, where
the underlying rocks are of Cretaceous age. This latter formation apparently
junctions with the slate series several miles to the south of the township.

On the road from Marree to Mundowdna, at a point about one and a half
miles from the former, was noted a flat-topped rise found to consist largely of a
gypseous formation. This exhibits a bluff face to the north-west, and is otherwise
of a build suggesting a possible former lake terrace. The following note was
made at the time: “It seems to have been an old lake level. Town of Marree
probably 50 feet below the level of the top of this terrace.”’

The low country between the railway line aud the Willouran Range was
traversed on a course almost due west of Mundowdna Siding. The Breaden’s
Hill copper mine, which lics N. 35° E. of Hogan's Well, and distant about one
mile therefrom, was the first objective. The workings here are along a low rise
which constitutes the western margin of the slaty region of small relief, and is at
the same time the first decided physiographic element of the Wilfouran Range
encountered west of Mundowdna. At this point there is an immediate and
decided break in topography. To the west is the hilly country into which dis-
tinctly different types of rocks enter, and to which the term “Willouran Series”
will be applied.

THe MunpowpNa SERIES.

Tn the intervening region of low relief to the east of Breaden’s Hill mine, the

underlying old rocks showed up at the surface at frequent intervals in belts

() “The Sturtian Tillite in the Willouran Ranges near Marree (Hergott) pr in the
North-eastern portion of the Flinders Range,” by Professor W, Howchin, F.G.S. Reports
Glac. Com., Sect. C, A.A.A.S,, vol. xvii. (1924), pp. 67-76.

387

alternating with stretches obscured by drifted sands and alluvium. A wide belt
of slates outcrops conspicuously in the middle zone of this belt. These dip at
steep angles and strike in a nearly north and south direction, but exhibit a well-
developed slaty cleavage directed approximately south-east to north-west. Over
a considerable area in one part of the section, limonite pscudomorphs after pyrites
cubes weather-out on the surface. Along some belts the slates cleave out per-
fectly into excellent slabs of even thickness as much as 9 feet in length,

On the western side of the main slate belt and about half-way across to
Breaden’s Hill is a strongly-defined outcrop of an interesting breccia dipping
steeply to the west and seen to extend for miles to the north and to the south.
This is a striking rock, composed for the most part of angular fragments, but
several, obviously water-worn, quartzite pebbles up to 7 inches in length were
noted. Fragments of a black slate are conspicuous and the matrix is calcareous.
The hand-specimen collected is that of a gravel breccia, apparently water-laid,
composed of fairly even-sized particles ranging about between $-inch and $-inch
diameter, The components are diverse, though quartzite predominates. The
interstitial filling is somewhat calcareous.

‘Travelling still further to the west, other similar bands but of finer texture
were crossed, The intervening areas are evidently underlain by safter strata, for
they are denuded and buried under alluvium.

These breccia belts are a feature of and are confined to the western side of
the section under review, and culminate in a strong formation of much the same
peculiar type along the eastern slopes of Breaden’s IIill itself. In this latter
locality the rock is in part of the nature of a semi-conglomerate, but elsewhere the
included fragments are so slaty and angular as to constitute a true breccia.
Amongst the included contents were recognised the following: quartzite, quartz
grit, limestone, black slate, white sericitic slate, and light-coloured silicified slate.
In a microscope slide prepared of a specitnen from this locality is to be seen a
fragment of a much-altered ophitic basic igneous rock, suggesting the possibility
that it may have originated in a dyke located amongst the strata half a mile to
the west. Quartzite predominates among the types represented, and a water-
worn pebble of it, as much as 10 inches in length, was observed. The beds were
here dipping to the east and trending, more or less, north and south down the
face of the range.

There can be no doubt that the series just described occupying the low
country between Mundowdna Siding and Breaden’s Hill corresponds to that
described by Howchin © as appearing further to the north extending over a few
miles to the south-west and west of Boorloo Springs. The rocks of that area
are described as slates, slates containing glaciated boulders, some quartzite, and
on the western side bands of breccia with a calcareous base. ‘hese latter are
evidently just such as appear in the vicinity and to the east of Breaden’s Hill. In
my section no quartzite occurred, nor was there observed any defined belt of
glacial tillite or even slates carrying embedded boulders. But stich beds may be
there buried under alluvium, or if but poorly defined may have been missed for
part of the section was traversed hastily in the evening in a failing light.

Nevertheless, though no characteristic glacial tillite was observed, it was
noted at the time that some of the breccias and semi-conglomerates were likely to
be of fluvio-glacial origin. In fact, these were entered in the field notes as
“glacial breccias.” Howchin“ has suggested that this peculiar type of breccia may
“have been formed along sheer planes with autoclastic effects, and include both
the shales and the tillite.”

There certainly has been faulting and dislocation of the sedimentary rocks
along Breaden’s Hill and to the west thereof. So it is possible that there has

388

been a downthrow of the country to the east occupied by the glacial series. But,
though my examination was but cursory and not adequate for a proper study of the
beds, | felt satisfied at the time that the formations in question were sedimentary
breccias quite regularly interbedded in the series.

THE WILLOURAN SERIES.

The country to the west of Breaden’s Hill is rugged in part, and this is due
to one or more thick quartzite formations which stand out boldly. A traverse
was made to the west in this belt for a distance of about four miles, and the
formations encountered were briefly as follows :—

A massive quartzite formation of considerable thickness makes its appearance
shortly to the west of Hogan’s Well and occupies the high central country for a mile
or two to the west. It strikes in a roughly north and south direction, directed towards
Mount Willouran to the south, which prominence apparently owes its existence to
the resistant character of this rock. This quartzite dips to the west on the eastern
side and to the east on the western side, where the average angle is about 45°. It
is, therefore, a north-and-south directed syncline, probably pitching to the south,
for it appears to cut out on the line of strike to the north, and in its place are
slaty and caleareous strata. There also appears to be a swinging of the strike
in accordance with the assumption of a pitching syncline. In this arrangement
the slaty and calcareous strata would underlie the strong quartzite which would
be the highest in the succession of strata in the Willouran Series. This quartzite
in its upper part is light-coloured, fine-grained, and dense. Under the microscope
it is seen to be composed of even-sized grains and to be a purcly fluvial type of
sediment. Besides grains of quartz, there is present acid felspar amounting to
about 10 per cent. of the volume, and clastic particles of certain accessory minerals,
stich as tourmaline. The indications are that this sediment was derived from pre-
existing quartzites or from granitic rocks. Much of it is well laminated and
ripple-marked faces are not uncommon,

Towards the base of the quartzite, nearing the underlying slates and approach-
ing Hogan’s Well, there are interbedded bands of a dark colour, which, scen in the
distance, present the appearance of basalt sills. Microscopically examined they
are seen to be argillaceous quartzites and dark-coloured greywackes. ‘The quartz
grains become noticeably less rounded and more splintery as the underlying series
is approached, In this belt, between Hogan’s Well and Breaden’s Hill, are black
slaty and calcareous rocks, and, in one place, the latter had been partly converted
to a cale-silicate rock.

Another notable feature is the occurrence of a large ophitic dolerite sill in a
calcarcous slate series, beginning about quarter of a mile north-westerly of the
north end of the Breaden’s Hill mine workings, and extending for a great distance
to the north-north-west. Where examined it was 40 yards wide and trended
N. 23° W. The rock is epidotised and uralitized. Tt is quite like some of the
basic igneous types of Wooltana and Blinman in the Flinders Range.

Ore Deposits.

To the westward from the crest of Breaden’s Hill the rocks are seamed in
various places with veins filled by quartz and carbonates. The latter are for the
most part dolomite and siderite. Where these traverse the more calcareous strata
they are richer in carbonates, but in siliccous slates and quartzite they are largely
or entirely quartz. They are fillings from aqueots solutions that have risen
along fracture lines. Where the walls are slate they are seen to be silicified and
bleached, passing outwards into normal dark slate.

389

Splendid examples of this kind constitute what is known as Dun’s mine,
which is four miles to the westward of Breaden’s Hill. There the country rock
is a fissile, dark slate trending N. 60° W., and the lodes underlay for the most
part to the westward. This slate, over a belt about 25 yards wide, is seamed with
quartz veins, individually, from a few inches to a few feet in width. ‘The lode
material is rich in carbonates and carries copper ores and a trace of gold. Some
portion of the main vein was originally capped by a manganifcrous gossan. The
abandoned workings are extensive and there is evidence that a considerable
quantity of copper ore has been mined.

About half a mile cast of Dun’s mine is a long narrow siliceous vein traversing
a slate formation. The outcrop carries iron and manganese oxides, also copper
chloride, carbonate, and silicate. An assay for gold gave 14 dwts. per ton as its
value.

Another cupriferous vein formation is located in black slates at Pissand
Creck, just over two miles to the westward of Breaden’s Hill. Again, two miles
to the southward of this, copper stains appear over a considerable length in
laminated quartzite. Yellow stains of volborthite are also in evidenice.

At Breaden’s Ilill there is much evidence of prospecting activity in the past
and a considerable tonnage of copper ore has evidently been won. The character
of these copper-bearing formations varies considerably, but the dominant type
is that of a combination of fissure veins and metasomatic replacement introduced
into calcareous and siliceous sedimentary rocks which have been fissured and
cracked by dynamic forces. The typical gangue minerals are carthy carbonates
with more or less silica and iron oxide. The original metallic minerals were evi-
dently pyrites and copper pyrites, but these are rarely to be seen in the workings, as
the latter are almost entirely within the zone of oxidised ores. Atacamite, some
grey sulphide and massive cuprite, usually embedded in dolomite or siderite, are
distributed throughout, Native copper and malachite are also present. Secondary
ore concentration has operated to a marked extent in the surface zone. In several
of the outcrops and extending down to a depth of 6 or 8 feet characteristic yellow
stains of a vanadate of copper and calcium were noted, developed as a product
of weathering. This recalls the occurrence at Paul’s mine in the Flinders Range
to the south-east. Black slugs of atacamite are to be found weathered out lying
loosely on the surface amongst the surface débris.

The various workings are not excavations scrially arranged along one line of
lode, but refer to many short and irregular outcrops which are, however, no doubt
all more or less strung together horizontally or in depth. In the formation of the
lodes, the copper-bearing solutions have invaded a cracked and folded rock system,
and the result is the formation of many small and very irregular ore formations.
A cut into the hill would thus be expected to meet repeated recurrences of lode
matter. At the southern end of the workings this condition is particularly
noticeable and, were the veins very rich, the proposition of quarrying the hill on
one face would present itself as a method of mining applicable to the case. The
assays, however, show that the grade of the lode matter is too low to warrant
such procedure. The richest grade proved by assay over a width of 3 feet was
6 per cent. copper distributed in oxidised ores. Gold is present also, but
usually only in traces, and never exceeding several pennyweights per ton of lode
matter.

Roughly parallel, but a couple of hundred yards to the westward of the
Breaden’s Hill line of lode, and situated about half a mile to ihe south-westward,
are other workings largely in a quartzite formation. Here veins of quartz and
earthy carbonates are statned by copper chloride and vanadium. <A portion of
the ferruginous capping returned a gold value of 24 pennyweights per ton.

390

SUMMARY.

The diversity of topography to the east and to the west of the line joining
Breaden’s Hill and Hogan’s Well is also reflected in the rock strata contained
within the respective areas. The Willouran Series is intruded by basic magma
and is abundantly seamed with cupriferous mineral veins, which also are notable
for the occasional presence therein of a little vanadium.

These facts are suggestive oi two distinct ages, respectively, for the rock
series. Further, many of the rock chips in the breccias of the Mundowdna Series
closely resemble the black slates and quartzites of the Willouran Scries. At the
time of inspection I immediately assumed that they were unconformable series,
but the visit was a hasty one, and it may be that certain of the phenomena noted,
supporting the case for an unconformity, are to be explained by fracturing and
dislocation of the strata, the effects of which are certainly in evidence.

As copper and vanadium are both associates of basic magma, it is likely that
the mineral veins are genetically related to the basic magma and the period of
activity responsible for the introduction of the basic igneous intrusion.

391

THE PARALANA HOT SPRING.
By Doueras Mawson, Kr., D.Sc., FR.S.
[Read October 13, 1927.]

Prate XIX,

THe ParaLaANa Hot Spring.

The fact that the water is quite hot as it issues from the ground has caused
much public interest in this spring. Such an occurrence is almost unique in this
State, where igneous activity is practically a matter of the remote past. With the
exception of the insignificant basaltic extrusions of Tertiary to Pleistocene age, on
Kangaroo Island and at Mount Gambier, it seems almost certain that the igneous
rocks of the State are not less recent than the Devonian. It is a matter of interest,
therefore, to put on record what facts have been ascertained regarding the
occurrerice,

TOPOGRAPHIC FEATURES OF THE AREA.

The spring water bubbles forth in the bed of a creek, referred to as “Hot
Spring Creek,” at a point about two miles to the north-westward of the homestead
buildings of Paralana sheep station. At this point the high, rugged, mountainous
country of the north-eastern Flinders Range gives way suddenly to a plains-region
which extends away to the eastward. In an almost clear-cut line from the Hot
Spring to the north-east, past Moolawatana head station, this sudden change in
topography is discernable. It is, indeed, obviously a fault line with an immense
downthrow to the east.

The rugged country, which has been referred to elsewhere as the “Mount
Painter Complex,” is constituted of an ancient series of metamorphosed sedi-
mentary rocks and of igneous rocks, the latter predominating. These igneous
rocks are principally granites, basic rocks being but little in evidence. It is
doubtful whether any of the igneous elements in the series are of later age than
the Cambrian. Rather widely distributed through this series are occurrences of
uranium-bearing minerals such as fergusonite, monazite, autunite, torbernite, and
uraniferous ilmenite. These are principally associated with a belt of potash-rich
granite, some of which strikes across the country through the region of the Hot
Spring. It is an interesting point as to whether the thermal condition of the
spring water is due to the heating effect of radio-active disintegration of the
unusually large content of uranium, thorium, and potassium in the rocks there-
abouts.

Eastward of the north-east to south-west fault line are sedimentary beds com-
posed of shales and sandstones with some pebble beds. These are slightly tilted,
dipping about 5° in a direction ranging between cast and north-east. At the
mouth of the Yudanamutana gorge they are seen to rest upon a platform of red
potash granite. Along the fault line they butt up against the Mount Painter
Complex. This series of rocks has been referred to“) by Woolnough as the
Winton division of the Cretaceous. The surface rocks of this section exhibit
marked silicification and residual gibbers are richly strewn over the surface. Jack

CD “Preliminary note on the occurrence of large erratic blocks. probably of glacial
origin, on the eastern escarpment of the Flinders Range, South Australia.” A.A.S.A.
Reports, vol. xvii. (1924), pp. 81-84.

392

and Ward,@ from evidence supplied by boring operations, regard this area as
underlain by the rocks of the great artesian water basin. They include Paralana
Hot Spring within the artesian basin, but at the very edge thereof; the margin
of the basin, thereabouts, is figured as following down the fault line from Moola-
watana and swinging to the south-east at the Hot Spring. There can be no
doubt, therefore, that the Jurassic-Cretaceous artesian basin does butt against the
Flinders Range in this neighbourhood. It may well be, however, that the upper-
most strata of this plains-area, leading to Lake Frome, are of Tertiary to Recent
age overlying the Cretaceous. But this does not affect the present matter under
consideration.

Examination of the rock formations in the neighbourhood of the Hot Spring
revealed the fact that both the older and the newer rocks, though more particu-
larly the latter, have been seriously altered over a zone of several hundred yards
in width. The changes wrought in the rocks are so profound that it is sometimes
difficult to discriminate what were originally Cretaceous sediments and what were
igneous rocks. In general, the change has been a breaking-down of the silicates
to kaolin and elsewherc a general silification. Immediately along the present line
of exuding water is a vertical, reef-like belt rich in chalcedonic silica with occa-
sional inclusions of iron pyrites. An assay of this “reef” formation was made
for gold, but with a negative result.

This change in the neighbouring rocks is evidently to be ascribed to the rising
hot waters, and the indications are that such waters formerly exuded at other
spots in the locality. In fact, the extent of the belt affected by alteration suggests
that, in former times, the hot spring waters were altogether more abundant.

From the Hot Spring, the junction of the older series and of the Cretaceous
sediments runs away to the south-east, approximately, at right angles to the fault
line from the north-east, to which reference has already been made. The topo-
graphy suggests this may also be a line of fault, throwing down the Cretaceous
rocks to the north.

The eastern entrance to the Yudanamutana gorge is close to, and immediately
south of, the Hot Spring. The first section of the gorge proper, entering from
this end, is determined by the existence thereabouts of a remarkable crush zone in
the granitic rocks. ‘This is evidently a great line of fault of ancient age. This
line appears also to extend through the altered belt around the Hot Spring. In
the other direction it makes for the locality of Mount Painter, which crush zone
has been notably impregnated by solutions with depositions of silica, iron oxide,
and uraniferous minerals.

The location of the Hot Spring is, therefore, somewhat remarkable, being
at the same time on a faulted margin of the Artesian Basin and on a crush zone
extending through the chief radium-bearing belt of the Mount Painter Complex.

Tue Hor Sprinc.

‘The Hot Spring creek is one of a number of streams thereabouts, which rise
in the ranges and flow through deeply-incised torrential courses to the plains.
These are perfectly dry except during actual periods of rain, though in the case
of the Hot Spring creck the spring maintains a certain amount of water in its
bed for some distance below the outlet.

The water rises through fissures in the rock and through the sands of the bed
of the stream, over a length of about 20 yards (pl. xix., fig. 1). The temperature

(2) “Some developments in shallow water areas in the north-east of South Australia.”
Geol. Survey of S. Austr., Bull. 11 (1925).

xr gallon

rains pe

nm
1 3

fo
Wa

15

10

cl

394

is sufficient to kill small creatures stich as frogs and crustaceans, the remains of
which appear in the waters close to the source. Within a few yards down stream
a growth of a kind of reed appears at the margins of the stream. A few yards
further down a slimy, green algal growth, almost entirely covers the surface of
the water. Much of this was dead and bleached at the time of our visit (pl. xix.,
fig. 2). In this section the water is still hot, but the temperature has fallen off
appreciably.

Much of the water travels through the gravels and is not seen at the surface.
At 300 yards below the spring a swampy area choked with reeds is maintained
by the waters. The creek bed is then dry for a further quarter mile, when a pool
about 100 yards or more in length is usually to be found. This pool rises and
falls in an arbitrary fashion, evidently controlled by accessions through the under-
lying gravels. Below this point, the creek docs not hold water except during
periods of rain. There can be no doubt, therefore, that below this point at least
the stream bed is traversing the region of newer sediments.

In November, 1924, the author, in company with R. G. Thomas, B.Sc., and
A. R, Alderman, B.Sc., made an examination of the spring. The water was then
issuing at a temperature of 144° F. An excavation of the sand to bed rock was
made at one point on the Jine of issue, and the water escaping there gauged
at 250 gallons per hour. But as this was only a portion of the escaping area, it
was reckoned that the total volume of rising hot water would not be less than
1,000 gallons per hour,

The water is quite clear and of good drinking quality, as indicated by the
analysis. Gas, in irregular, intermittent bursts of bubbles was escaping through
the water at the outlet examined at the time of our visit. The quantity of the gas
escaping at the orifice examined was judged to amount to between one-half and
one litre per minute. Probably further gas was escaping into the gravels at other
points along the line of issue. Great care was taken in securing and transporting
to. Adelaide for examination a sample of this gas, for it was hoped that it would
be found rich in helium.

Unfortunately about two months elapsed before either the water or the gas
could be tested for radio-activity, and when the test was made no appreciable
activity was recorded.

Since that date, however, Dr. C. Fenton, who visited the spring early this
year with a view to testing its therapeutic qualities, tested the gas on the spot for
activity. He was able to record activity, but was not able to pursue the investiga-
tion on account of damage sustained by the electroscope. However, Dr. Fenton
forwarded post haste to Adelaide a sample of the gas, which was examined by
R. G. Thomas within a few days of despatch. Mr. Thomas found the gas to be
highly active, the activity falling off gradually but not in accordance with the
curve for radium emanation. He hopes to continue further with the investiga-
tion, for the curve of rate of decay of the emanation presents novel features.

Dr. W. T. Cooke undertook a chemical examination of the gas collected by
us. He reported helium, if present at all, to be in not more than mere traces,
whilst the presence of the gas neon is quite distinct.

Two miles away to the south-east of the Hot Spring is the Paralana home-
stead, and there, on the north side of the house, on sloping ground, two wells are
excavated a few feet apart. These are only a few feet deep, but water rises in
them to within a foot or two of the surface. Though so close together the water
in one is clear, whilst in the other it is somewhat milky. A sample of the clearer
water was taken for analysis, and the result appears under the title of ‘“Home-
test Spring.” These are at a level close on 100 feet below that of the Hot

pring.

395

A further spring occurs on the rising ground above the level of the Home-
stead Spring, situated about half a mile to the south. This is referred to as
“Back Spring” by the Paralana residents, but appears on the pastoral plan as
“Black Spring.” As there is nothing black about this spring, and as it is at the
back of the station buildings, it is probable that the term “Back Spring” was the
original one, and will be adopted here. Here, water slowly trickles away from
boggy ground in the bed of a small watercourse. A sample of this water also was
taken for examination.

In neither of these cases is the water hot, though it is rumoured that the
Back Spring water may be 2° or 3° above normal. It is interesting to compare
the composition of these waters with that of the Hot Spring as set out in the
tabular statement herewith. These analyses were executed by Mr. W. T. Chapman,
of the Assay Department, School of Mines :—

Analysis in Grains, Hot Homestead Back

per gallon. Spring. Spring. Spring.

Cl e uh ae ae 22°83 29°50 30-59
SO, .. a “4 wet 10°67 10-05 10-71
CO, .. be em ott 9-30 10-05 10-05
Na... ae Be Bes 21°50 22°15 25°42
K a / A 7 2°33 2°40 2-64
Ca 3°29 4-64 3°50
Mg : an es aes 0-19 1:42 0-86
SiO... te i acs 5:60 3°60 2°60
Total saline matter .. 4 75°73 83°81 86°37
Nitto, as ozs. per gallon 0-17 0-19 0°20

Assumed Composition of Salts.
Calcium Carbonate .. ¥, 8°22 11-60 8:75
Caleitum Sulphate .. xf — _ —
Calcium Chloride .. am — =

Magnesium Carbonate as 0-66 4°32 3-01
Magnesium Sulphate is ne 0°95 —
Magnesium Chloride — — —
Sodium Carbonate .. t 6°89 — 4°68
Sodium Sulphate .. mm 15-78 13°74 15-84
Sodium Chloride .. 4 34-09 45-02 46°45
Potassium Chloride . . are 4-49 4°58 5°04
Silica ee he ip 5-60 3°60 2°60
Hardness (in degrees, English).
Hardness, total dt hk. 9-01 17°52 12°34
eh temporary = 9-O1 16°73 12°34
i permanent 1s Nil 0°79 Nil
4f due to Calcium .. 8°22 11-60 8°75
” due to Magnesium 0:79 5°92 3:59

There is a close parallelism in these analyses. That the Hot Spring is some-
what less saline may be explained by the fact that it has a much more abundant
and rapid flow, whilst the others are stationary or sluggish, allowing of evapora-
tion. That the [lot Spring is at a higher level than those at and near Paralana
homestead is not incompatible with their all being controlled by the underground
waters of the Artesian Basin, for there is a slight dip of the Artesian Basin beds
from the Hot Spring towards Paralana station buildings.

396

The Source of the Hot Spring Water.

As the Hot Spring is on the faulted edge of the Cretaceous basin it scems
likely that it is merely the escaping waters of the Artesian Basin. If so, it
represents a temperature equivalent to that of waters oi about 2,000 feet below
the surface in the neighbouring area, as shown by the temperature of issuing
waters from existing bores. An offset against this simple explanation is that
waters naturally escaping from the Artesian Basin elsewhere do not ordinarily
exhibit an abnormal temperature. However, Dr. L. K. Ward informs me that
he found the temperature of one of the natural effluents at Dalhousie Springs to
be about 118° F.

An alternative source for underground waters in the area between the
Flinders Range and Lake Frome has been shown by Jack to be that of shallow
waters replenished by outflow from the ranges, which has entered the outcrops
of the surrounding later formations which are for the most part certain beds of
the Upper Cretaceous (Winton Series). These waters are, in general,
comparatively fresh. For purposes of comparison the mean figures of three of
the bore waters from the shallow water area of Wootana are quoted below. The
cases chosen, namely, 1, 12, and 37 of Jack’s report, are such as have a total
saline content approximating to that of the Hot Spring water :—

Selected Wootana Artesian Basin
Shallow Wells. Water, selected Bores.
Cl oy as be .e 19-29 11-41
SO, .. 3 = ts, 8:70 0:12
CO, .. Fya of es 10-03 35°25
Na te ts 4 nN 12-01 11-95
K we = _ wat = 1°72
Ca - a: i a 4:71 0-95
Me... 7 _ 4 3°57 0-21
SiO. .. Fae oss ss 1-40 2°45
Fe and Al Oxides 44 — 0°32
Total grains per gall. ne 59°71 84-36
Total hardness An ve 26°81 3°23
Temporary hardness a 16:72 3°23
Permanent hardness = 10-08 —
Hardness due to Ca .. Ay, 11°77 2:36
Hardness due to Mg i 15°03 0-87

The composition of normal Artesian Basin water of bores in that part of the
basin is given also; these figures are the mean of analyses of waters from the
Quartpot and Meteor bores. This is a carbonated type of water typical of that
entering the Great Basin from the castern margin and standard for the Artesian
Basin in the area under discussion. Jack has shown that the waters of the
Artesian Basin further to the west are sulphatic and not carbonated, due to the
fact that the intake beds on that side of the basin are located in an arid region
where the surface waters are, of course. all of that class. At Paralana the eastern
carbonated type of water is to be expected in the main artesian supply, whilst
the shallow waters percolated into the outcropping beds along the margin of the
neighbouring ranges should be somewhat sulphated at least on account of the low
annual rainfall of the locality.

A comparison of the Hot Spring water with that of the deep basin and of the
shallow wells in the vicinity is hest represented graphically (text fig.). This
comparison of analyses does not point unequivocally to either the shallow or the
deep waters as source, though it is clear that the water cannot be merely the
eastern intake water of the Great Artesian Basin.

Trans. and Proc, Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LL, Plate NIX.

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

397

The composition could easily be satisfied by assuming the spring to be of
primary waters out of the older series of rocks, but there is no constituent in the
water which is not in that of the Artesian Basin. Further, it occurs along the
margin of the Artesian Basin, and not wholly within the old complex. In the
absence of any definite feature limiting the source of the water to the older series,
it must be regarded as partly or wholly a leakage from the deeper Artesian Basin.
The sulphate content indicates contamination of the eastern intake waters with
those of the arid western areas; this, it is assumed, is effected by commingling with
the local shallow ground waters.

The thermal effect may be due to a rapid rise of the waters from the great
depth along the fault line. Or the heat may be augmented by the probable
existence of a high temperature gradient, locally arising from the abnormal
accession of heat from radio-active disintegration.

A further source of heat in this locality would arise from the exothermic
reaction entailed in the kaolinization of the highly-felspathic underlying granite.
As already mentioned, such kaolinization has proceeded to a marked degree in
the granite along the contact with the Cretaceous water-bearing beds.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XIX.

Fig. 1. The hot water is seen rising in a pool in the sands of Hot Springs Creek,
and trickling away to the Icft picture. The stick is pointing to the spot where
bubbles of gas are rising.

Fig. 2. The effluent stream of hot water at a point about 30 yards down stream

from the source. A growth of reeds extends along the margins, from which

extends inwards from both sides towards the centre a surface mat of green slimy
alga, partly living and partly dead.

398

THE GEOLOGY OF THE WILLUNGA SCARP.

By C. T. Mapican, M.A., B.Sc.
{Read October 13, 1927. |
PLATE XX,

The series of rock formations now known as the Adelaide Series has mainly
been studied by Professor Howchin, in the type locality, the Mount Lofty Ranges
in the neighbourhood of Adelaide, and his diagrammatic section from the River
Torrens to the sea at Hallett’s Cove is well known. This section shows a series
from basal grits, resting on Archaeozoic rocks (Pre-Cambrian), through lime-
stones, phyllites, quartzites, the Sturtian tillite and Tapley’s Hill slates to the
Brighton limestone, which group Howchin refers to the Lower Cambrian, but
which is, perhaps, now more generally known by the uncontroversial title of the
Adelaide Series, and above these and terminating with the sea coast, a short series
of slates, quartzites, and a gritty limestone, of a general purple colour, referred
to the Upper Cambrian by Howchin, and generally known as the “Purple Slates”
Series. ‘the whole has been considered a continuous thick series, for the lack of
any obvious unconformities. The fossiliferous Cambrian beds are considered to
overlie these purple slates, but to be cut out of the section and hidden by the
waters of the gulf.

The nearest occurrence of fossiliferous Cambrian is at Sellick’s Till, in the
Willunga Ranges, 12 miles to the southward of the Brighton limestone, at Noar-
lunga, and it seemed that here was a place worthy of further investigation with
a view to obtaining more evidence as to the relationship of the fossiliferous
Cambrian to the Adelaide Series, by working from the {known to the unknown.
The Adelaide Series along the north-western scarp of the Mount Lofty Ranges
is much folded and faulted, and the relationship between the component beds
themselves is very difficult to follow, so that details from a new area would also
provide a valuable check on the accepted order of the series. With these objects
in view a month has been spent in the field in the area, in camp at various points,
and the ground thoroughly covered between Wickham’s Hill in the north to
Normanville in the south, an area about 24 miles long in a north-east and south-
west direction, by four miles wide.

Plate xx. shows the results of the geological survey of this arca. Topo-
graphically the region consists of the scarp of the Willunga Range, which trends
north-east and south-west and terminates in the sea, south-westerly, af Carricka-
linga Head. The area is bounded on the northern side, in part, by the Aldinga
plain of recent alluvial outwash underlain by Tertiary deposits; and, in part, by
the sea, at Aldinga Bay, at the south-westerly end. The southern boundary of
the area at the north-eastern end is the boundary between the Hundreds of
Willunga and Kuitpo, and further to the south-west the Hundred of Myponga is
entered, where the Myponga-Yankalilla road forms the southern limit.

The southern boundary of the Hundred of Willunga follows the top of the
watershed of the Willunga Range, from Wickham’s Hill to Sellick’s Hill, from
whence it descends to the sea, but the watershed continues on into the Hundred
of Myponga to Carrickalinga Head, being cut through in one place only by the
deep course of the Myponga River. The scarp forms the northern side of this
watershed with a fall of 700 feet in a mile and a half. It is deeply incised by
watercourses, and but thinly mantled with soil, so that outcrops are frequent and
formations easily followed. The top of the watershed averages about 700 feet

399

above the plain and gradually rises from 841 feet at Carrickalinga Hill, 1,094 feet
at Mount Jeffcoat, 1,164 feet at Sellick’s Hill, to 1,250 feet at Wickham’s Hill.

On the northern side the drainage is all westerly, towards the sea. On the
southern side of the watershed the fall is much less, and the drainage on this side
is divided into two parts, in the depression running parallel to the range. At the
tiorth-eastern end, down as far as Victor Harbour road from Willunga, the
country falls gently to the Meadows Credk, which flows south-westerly to near
this point, where it swings easterly and joins the Finniss, The Victor Harbour
road marks a slight divide in the depression. From it a creek flows south-westerly,
almost in a straight line for 12 miles, parallel to the range, joining the Myponga
River at Myponga, and, finally, cutting through the range into the sea at Myponga
Jetty. The scarp is well established as a fault scarp with downthrow to the
north (1), and the valley along the southern side probably represents another
parallel fault line. This valley, throughout, is filled with recent alluvial and
resorted Permian glacial sands, so that outcrops and exposures are few to the
south of the watershed. Very little undisturbed fluvio-glacial deposits of Permian
age occur in the area under review, so they have been neglected in the mapping.
‘The chief occurrences are near Haycock Point (south of Carrickalinga Head)
and in Section 715, Hundred of Myponga, where there are beds of white sands
overlying buff-coloured sandstone on the highlands. Howchin recognised glacial
deposits on the main road in this neighbourhood in 1897 (Trans. Roy. Soc. 8.
Austr., vol. xxi, p. 65).

ITUNpRED oF WILLUNGA.,

Work was begun from Sellick’s Hill. The most conspicuous formations in
this well-known section are the calcareous series containing the Archaeocyathinae
beds, near the bottom of the hill, and three bands of white compact quartzite
forming ridges across the hills, and causing the conspicuous kinks in the road.
These formations were individually followed along the scarp till they disappeared
successively beneath the alluvial of the outwash fans, never to appear again along
the scarp, as was afterwards seen. ‘These and all the other beds traced were
found gradually to swing northerly in their strike, which is, in general, north-
easterly, and thus to curve obliquely across the scarp and enter the plain. The
Archaeocyathinae Series ends in the northern corner of Section 545, being last
seen in two small creeks near their junction, in a wheat field at the foot of the
scarp five miles from Sellick’s Hill. The beds have here taken a decidedly northern
trend, the strike being N. 34° E., and dip 50° S.E. The three quartzite beds out-
crop higher up on the hillsides, with slates between them. The section below was
run here up the hillsides across the strike.

Fig, 1.
Section across the strike, showing beds above (?) the Archaeocyathinae limestone, with

true thickness, at the end of the limestone outcrop, Section 545, Hundred of Willunga.
Strike N. 34° E., dip 50° S.E.

400

The slate immediately above the lowest quartzite is a deep purple for a thick-
ness of 141 feet, grading into a lighter-coloured siliceous slate, but below it there
is a thickness of 723 feet of buff-coloured calcareous slates before the mottled
limestone is entered. The two lower quartzites end in the plain a little further on,
in Section 745, The lowest outcrop in this Section is seen in the creek in the
south-westerly corner of the Section, where there is an exposure of soft purple
slate for a thickness of 140 feet, obscured below beneath the alluvial, and giving
way above to buff slates and then the quartz bands. The highest quartzite on
Sellick’s Hill, and the most conspicuous, ends in Section 303, near the old Colville
homestead, at Willunga South.

Above these three quartzites, with the interbedded siliceous slates, lies a belt
of somewhat arenaceous slate, about 900 feet thick, of homogeneous texture, with-
out quartzite bands. It is seen at the upper end of the Sellick’s Hull road, where
it ig banded and mottled in a variety of colours—red, purple, and yellow. It is
well exposed in the creek in Section 276, Willunga South, where it is buff coloured
in the lower parts, changing to a bluish slate with good cleavage in the upper.
The dip is there only 30° S.E. In the description of the area, the term “upper”
is used to indicate beds higher up the scarp. An upper bed does actually overlie
a lower one, the dip being everywhere to the south-east, but the real stratigraphical
position of the upper beds will be discussed later.

Above this thick slate comes a well-defined quartzite, which was traced from
Section 578, Hundred of Willunga, along the deep creek in Section 750; across
the two stone reserves in Section 746, in the northerly one of which there is a big
quarry; through the quarry in the glebe, Willunga South; and the quarry in the
road cutting on the road between Willunga and Willunga South, where the dip
has flattened to 30° S.E.; on into a small quarry, in Section 703, where it ends.
This quartzite maintains a very uniform thickness of 100 feet. In the quarry in
the reserve, on the northern side of Section 746, it dips 35° 5.E., strike N. 21° E.,
and in the quarry on the main road south of Willunga, 30° S.E., with a strike of
N.30° E. It isa fine-grained, rather porous, quartzite, with frequent well-defined
narrow bands of coarser grit, a quarter of an inch or so wide and a half to one
inch apart. This quartzite is the lowest bed of a very arenaceous belt 320 feet
thick, ending in an upper, better-defined quartzite 60 feet thick. A good section
of this arenaceous belt is shown in the creek in Section 755, Willunga South,
which creck crosses the strike at right angles. Above these quartzose beds follows
another 300 feet of bluish slates overlain by yet another quartzite bed. The creek,
from Section 756, follows the strike of this quartzite on its eastern side, but turns
north-westerly at right angles in the centre of Section 755, crossing the quartzite
in a small waterfall.

Next come 600 feet of typical slates of good cleavage and purplish colour,
followed by a dense limestone bed which in Section 755 is 18 feet wide. This
limestone was considered to be the Archaeocyathinae limestone by Professor
Elowchin, who followed it from a point south of Willunga to near its termina-
tion, 24 miles north-easterly of Willunga. It is described in a postscript to his
paper (2). He leaves a gap between the last appearance of the Archaeocyathinae
Series, followed from Sellick’s Hill to Section 545, and this limestone first
encountered by him south of Willunga. The detailed mapping of the area shows
the beds to be on quite different horizons. This limestone is easily traced south-
westerly up to the cottage on the Hundred boundary in Section 751 by its con-
tinuous outcrop, and for some distance down the other side of the divide, where
it can be followed by the red band of soil in the arable land, which marks its
presence. It is then temporarily lost under the alluvium, to be picked up further
along its line of strike in the Hundred of Myponga.

401

For the four miles from the top of the scarp almost to the bottom in Section
766, cast of Willunga, the limestone is narrow and compact. Where it crosses the
road up the scarp on the east side of Section 748, at the old church, it is 26 feet
thick, a yellowish marble, dipping 60° S.E. In Section 756, below the Willunga
Slate Quarry, now in operation, its width is 18 feet. It has been opened up in a
small quarry here. The stone is a grey to dark-blue marble, shot through by white
veins of calcite. Frequent pyrites crystals are a prominent feature.

Another small quarry has been opened in block 634, Willunga South, on the
side of the road up to the old slate quarry. The thickness is here 25 feet and
dip 50° S.E. The upper portion is dark-blue marble, the centre grey, and ‘the
lower yellow and dolomitic. Pyrites crystals are disseminated through it. The
narrow bed continues north-easterly between the slates. In Section 306 it is
25 feet wide, pink, impure and dolomitic below, blue and compact above. In
Section 766, on the south side of the creek, there is a widening out of the bed,
which is largely obscured by a travertine covering. The slates above and below
are very calcareous. The calcareous belt here appears to be about 150 feet wide.
‘he limestone narrows down again on the north side of the creek.

Near the end of the outcrop, in Sections 520 and 305, the limestone widens out
very considerably. Brown’s Quarry is in Section 305, at Water Reserve No. 2, where
there are good perennial springs. ‘The quarry is opened to expose a thickness of
AR feet of solid limestone, with slaty walls. It is mainly a dense blue limestone,
with a foot or two of pink marble below. Above, there is a further thickness of
IAQ feet of calcareous slates with frequent bands ol purer limestone; and, below,
calcareous slates extend for another 144 feet, giving a total thickness of 540 feet
of calcareous beds. Pyrites is again a conspicuous feature of the limestone
which is honeycombed in places by the weathering out of this mineral, or again
reddened by its oxidation. The dip is 54° S.E., and strike N. 29° E.

The outcrop crosses the shoulder of the hill on the north-eastern side of
Section 305, in a broad band 90 yards across, mainly marked by a travertine crust,
but with many outcrops of marble. It has narrowed down again by the time the
foothills road is met, where the last exposure ig seen in some patches of marble
showing through the soil of the unmade road. Half a mile further along the road,
in Section 34, an extensive sheet of travertine and calcareous slate is exposed,
indicating an upward extension of the calcareous beds.

Next above the limestone comes a great thickness of slates, 3,000 feet, in
which the Willunga Quarries are situated. ‘To the south of Willunga the dip of
the beds increases as one goes up the scarp. ‘The dip in the slates rises from 50°
to 70° S.E. The best: slate is in the centre of the belt, on which line all the
quarries have been opened. There are no quattzites in all this 3,000 feet. The
broad belt of slates is crossed by the Victor Tlarbour road as it mounts the scarp
from Willunga, The upper limits of the formation are just below the Tundred
boundary in the vicinity of Willunga, where a dense quartzite runs parallel to the
boundary. This bed is seen in the quarry hear the top of the Willunga Hill.
Here it is 35 feet thick, with a dip 73° to the NW. and strike N. 61° E. The
stone is white, dense, coarse-grained, and of somewhat porous and mottled appear-
ance, due to being iclspathic, with the felspar grains cither kaolinised or weathered
right out. The outcrop can be followed for seven miles in a south-westerly
direction, till it is lost in the alluvial near the road at the foot of the south side
of Sellick’s Hill. It crosses the divide in the south-western corner of Section 758.
To the north-east it was traced for five miles. It curves down the scarp to a
northerly strike and disappears in the foothills in Section 524. This quartzite
ushers in a thick series of arenaceous beds, siliceous slates with numerous belts
of coarse-grained felspathic and pyritic quartzites which occupy the whole of the
scarp onwards to Wickharm’s Hill, It was at the northern extremity of the first

402

quartzite that the most important discovery was first made, in the more northerly
of the two creeks crossing Section 562, and close to the north-western boundary
fence of the Section, a few hundred yards behind the residence of Mr. J.
McMurtrie. Here, immediately underlying the quartzite, tillite was found, a bed
150 feet wide across the strike, the rock bearing a striking resemblance to the
tillite from the Sturt gorge. Small angular fragments and pebbles up to facetted
stones 6 inches in diameter are embedded in a fine-grained matrix of bluish-green
colour, weathering to buff in shallower zones. The boulders are here mainly of
quartzite, white and somewhat coarse-grained, sometimes micaceous, The over-
lying quartzite contains a white, dense band about 10 feet thick, in laminae an,
inch wide. There are numerous small quarries in this band in the vicinity. The
strike is here only a few degrees east of north. The tillite does not make such a
bold outcrop as the quartzite, but may be traced in a south-westerly direction with
the help of the quartzite. It narrows gradually, and finally pinches out in the
slates in Section 33. As it dwindles it tends to leave the contact with the quartzite
and enter the slates. The slates above and below the pebbly horizon are in many
places banded in shades of blue, with some narrow coarse grit bands. The section
below is exposed in the deep creck in Section 557, close to the road up the scarp.

Fig. 2.
Sketch section showing beds associated with the tillite, Section 557, four miles
north-east of Willunga.

The outcrop is here continuous for over a mile and a half, before it fades
out in the slate, not to appear again till well down below the divide in the Hundred
of Myponga, where there is an extensive development. The tillite is obviously
a phase of the upper portion of the slates, which show indications of varve banding
in many places, not only in juxtaposition with the tillite, but also where true
tillite is absent. It could be expected to make and fade out along this horizon,
which was found to be the case.

As mentioned above, next to the tillite comes a great thickness of quartzose
sediments with many bands of quartzite. Several of the more important of these
bands were followed and mapped in to show the trend of the country, but a detailed
description of them would not serve any useful purpose at the present. On the
map, the boundaries of the broader formations have been faithfully plotted, but
in the case of the narrow ones, stich as these quartzites and the narrow limestone,
the position only is indicated by the symbol, the true width being too
small to represent accurately on the scale used.

From the point on the scarp due east of McLaren Vale, about where the tillite
disappears, and five miles north-easterly of Willunga, the dip of the beds flattens
out to from 20° to 30°, and the strike becomes almost due north. Some of the

403

higher quartzites do not disappear beneath the plain, as the tillite does, but skirt
round the scarp, and even rise again. Two such bands were followed from Sec-
tion 565, where the dip is almost vertical, past Water Reserve No. 1, through
a quarry in the west of Section 568, by which time the dip had decreased to 20°,
and thence up the scarp towards the summit of Wickham’s Hill, with a north-
easterly trend again.

Thus, from Sellick’s Hill to five miles north-easterly of Willunga, the beds
cut across the face of the scarp at a small angle, and owing to their steep dip
appear almost as straight lines on the map, little displaced by spurs and gullies,
and swinging distinctly northwards at the foot of the scarp, but beyond this point,
where the dip flattens out, the outcrops become much more winding, with the
dips east to south-east. The scarp is becoming less conspicuous at Wickham’s
Hill, and beyond it the triangular Aldinga plain is drawing to its vertex, the foor
rises, and the scarp is lost in a confusion of hills and valleys.

A good deal of the arenaceous series above the tillite is exposed in the cut-
tings of the new road up Wickham’s Ilill. At the foot of the hill the road is im
slate. This slate is of greenish colour, thin-bedded, and more phyllitic than those
below the tillite. They are somewhat calcareous at this point, and travertine up
to a foot in thickness occurs on the surface in Sections 301 and 530. It is used
for agricultural purposes. Towards the top of the hill two well-defined beds of
quartzite occur, with shallow dip, and crossing the road at a low angle, so that the
cutting gives long exposures of them. The lower one is 9 feet thick, and is a
coarse grit of very even grain, somewhat friable, the grains being coated in places
with ferric oxide, giving a bright mottled appearance. ‘The upper quartzite is
12 feet thick and has been quarried for road metal near the top of the hill, The
stone is coarse-grained and argillaceous in places, tending to a freestone similar
in appearance to that of the Mount Lofty quarries. The associated slates are
thin-hedded, flaggy, and siliceous. The quartzites vary very much in character
when traced along their outcrop. On the road they are loosely cemented, but both
north and south-west they become, in places, very dense and flinty, and sometimes
remarkably highly pyritic. The lower one is particularly pyritic. Betwcen these
two belts of quartzite and the tillite there are several other quartzite beds, the more
important being indicated on the map.

From the top of Wickham’s Hill, along the watershed to a point some three
miles south-westerly of the Willunga Hill, the country is very stony and poor and
has never been cleared. Looking up at the scarp from the plain, the tree-line
marks very clearly the upper limit of the slates and the beginning of the arenaceous
series, on which the native vegetation is undisturbed. Towards Sellick’s Hill the
slates cross the divide and the country is cleared, and is good agricultural and
grazing land.

Hunprep or Myponca.

All the formations occurring in the area have now been mentioned in the above
description of the scarp. From Sellick’s Hill they may be traced in the Hundred
of Myponga south-westward to the neighbourhood of Yankalilla, The coastal
area has already been described in a former paper (3). Had the coastal sections
only been run a little further inland, the tillite would have been met. The section
south from Myponga Jetty stopped within a mile of the tillite, and that up
Carrickalinga Creek within a hundred yards. The presence of tillite in the area
was not then suspected, but Howchin subsequently noted an occurrence in a road
cutting in Section 445, Hundred of Myponga (4), near the Carrickalinga Creek.

The thin limestone, and the quartzite overlying the tillite, in the Willunga
scarp, were carcfully traced into the Tlundred of Myponga, and were discovered

404

outcropping in exactly the expected places wherever there were rock exposures.
The quartzite, marked by the belt of scrub, crosses the watershed two miles south-
westward of Willunga Hill, and again gives good exposures in the gullies on the
southern side of the scarp, north of the Honeysuckle Flat road, and here the
tillite 1s again well developed. The creck in Section 723 crosses the tillite just
inside the northern boundary of the Section. ‘The bed is here 130 feet thick, with
a steep south-easterly dip. The rock again closely resembles the Sturtian tillite.
Most of the boulders are of quartzite, but several of a decomposed quartz-felspar
rock were noted, much quartz in a kaolinized matrix, seen in section to be an
aplite. Quartzites and slates cross the gully between the tillite and the road, in
scrub country, but above the tillile the land, overlying the slates, has once been
tilled, and in it were noted indications of the limestone.

The next good tillite exposure is in the creek between Sections 550 and 721,
the first creek east of the road on the southern side of Sellick’s Hill, near Mr.
Lowe’s house. It occurs just above the quartzite, which is here white and flinty.
The tillite is only exposed in the creek, but the ridge of quartzite makes a white
band across the length of Section 721, and can be seen as one descends from
Sellick’s Hill. Between this quartzite and the Honeysuckle Flat road, four more
dense quartzites cross the creek, from 10 to 30 feet thick, the first four close
together, and the fifth somewhat separated and near the road.

Where the tillite and first quartzite should meet the road from Sellick’s Hill,
the small cuttings in the roadside disclose only a ferruginous gravel, containing
many large and very smooth round boulders of pink quartzite. These appear to
be Pleistocene gravels, possibly resorted Permian glacial material. Slates are
seen crossing the road just above the point where the gravels come in.

The limestone next makes its appearance in the Myponga River, in Sections
628, 622, and 682, the river crossing it twice. The strike is here almost east and
west, and the dip 60° southerly. The calcareous beds are 600 feet across. They
are impure and banded with occasional bands of purer limestone. They are
underlain by buff-coloured slates to the north, and overlain by grey slates to the
south. To the south and west of this point, where the tillite would be expected,
the country is covered with a mantle of Permian fluvio-glacial deposits, but two
miles to the south-west, and half a mile northward of the main Yankalilla road,
in the creek, in Section 91, the tillite makes the best exposure of all. It is here
150 feet thick. It is overlain on the downhill side by a 10-feet bed of dense blue
quartzite, dipping at 35° S.S.E., followed by siliceous slates and quartzites, and
overlain by 75 feet of rather less compact and somewhat felspathic quartzite,
dipping at 50°, followed by a great thickness of slates. The accompanying sec-
tion, {rom Myponga Jetty southwards, gives the complete sticcession from
Archacocyathinae limestone to the tillite.

The intermediate limestone is seen in the creek in Section 661, north side,
near the boundary fence. It has here narrowed down again and become
reduced to calcareous slates with a few bands of limestone.

The east-west road, passing just north of Carrickalinga Hill, is on the top
of the watershed, and there are no exposures in its vicinity. The limestone
cannot be traced across it, but its presence is shown to the southward by travertine
and calcareous slates on the western side of Section 445, and in the Carrickalinga
Creek, itself, calcareous slates are seen with a few feet of limestone bands, at
the common boundary of Sections 1178 and 1179. The beds are here much
etushed and squeezed together, and the tillite occurs in the creek only 300 yards
above the limestone, at the road. he exposures are not good, and what is seen
is poor in boulders. Better exposures are higher up the road in a cutting, at
Howchin’s locality.

N

405

The new deviation of the Sellick’s Hill
road, which is marked on the map, gives
another good section of the beds in the

Pa
eS 3 Archaeocyathinae zone. The three quartzites
| fa ee above the limestone may be traced to this
— e, Se 5 road and across the deep gully to the west of
| & % pS f it, where they cause a waterfall on the
| x Key 2 . : ee am
4 | 8a es southern side of Section 273. They con-
®& S Se tinue on to form Black Hill and Mount
SR s &= Jeffcoat, with the calcareous series to the
NS Fe north of them. The quartzites above them
St Ss form the ridges between these points and the
S 8 Ss Myponga River to the south.
Ses
NS 8
iS Discussion.
SIS
» a The geological map (pl. xx.) discloses a
2 . ra . .
re series of formations running through the

f
a

area with remarkable continuity and parallel-
ism. The absence of cross-faulting is notable.
The succession from the north-eastern end is
a group of phyllites, siliceous slates and
quartzites, follawed by tillite, then thick slates,
limestone, another serics of siliceous slates and
qtartzites, the calcareous series containing the
Archaeocyathinae limestone, and arenaceous
slates with nodules. This agrees exactly with
the upper portion of the Adelaide Series, the
first beds mentioned corresponding with the
Mitcham and Glen Osmond quartzites and
phyllites, then the Sturtian tillite, followed by
the Tapley’s Hill slates, the Brighton lime-

Fig
Section from Myponga Jetty southward for three and a half miles.

%

S§ stone, the purple slates, and the Archaeocya-

Se thinae limestone, thus confirming the order

se | accepled in the Adelaide Series, and showing

as | 2 on the map the unbroken succession from each
@ bed to the next.
8 ‘he evidence is so strong that there is no
Me, hesitation in applying the Adelaide Series
= names to the hetched areas on the map. A
< few further points of resemblance between the
3S beds may, however, be emphasised. The

quartzites of the Wickham’s [hl] area are, 19
many places, dense, blue, and pyritic, identicai
with specimens from the Glen Osmond
Quarries, and also from the quarries near

SSHUHaN
Tillite
TT —Tap,
ny Ie

_ = Blackwood. The tillite, in the hand specimen,
es is indistinguishable from specimens from the
g = Sturt Valley. Also, the tillite is striking north
gs as it disappears under the plain in the Wil-
=< lunga scarp. Five miles to the northward,

across the top of the Aldinga plain, the tillite
is met again in the Onkaparinga Valley,
where the succession through Tapley’s Hill

406

slate, Brighton Hmestone, and purple slates as one goes towards the west, is the

same (5).

The slates next the tillite are banded in celours, and resemble the ribbon slates
of Tapley’s Hill, in places, more aad ste in contact with the tillite. The
Willunga slate quarries occur in them, but they show little signs of ribbon structure
in the horizon of the quarries.

The limestone agrees very closely with the Brighton limestone. In Brown’s
Quarry it is 45 feet thick, with pink limestone above and dense blue pyritic lime-
stone below, followed by a considerable thickness of calcareous slates. Weathered
boulders and exposed surfaces of this limestone were searched throughout the
outcrop for traces of Archaeocyathinae, but none were found, nor were any
indications shown in several microscope sections, though Howchin says (11) of this
locality, ““No fossils could be detected on examination of the stone by the naked
eye, but subsequent treatment of the limestone, by sectioning and examination
under the microscope, revealed the presence of Archaeocyathinae in a form that
was of very open structure”; but the pink band was seen under the microscope to
be composed of a mass of minute, beautifully even-sized, oolitic grains. This
oolitic structure in the “pink limestone” of the Brighton limestones was noted as
a special feature by Howchin, and with the thickness, occurrence of pyrites, etc.,
his description of the Brighton limestone (6) closely tallies with the occurrence
in Brown’s Quarry. The same features were noted throughout the Willunga scarp
outcrop, but the thickness varied.

The series between the Brighton limestone and the Archaeocyathinae beds,
referred to by the broad term of “purple slates,” consists of half a dozen bands
of quartzite in siliceous slates and shales. The slates vary a great deal in colour,
being deep purple in some places, buff coloured in others, and again mottled, as
seen near the top of Sellick’s Hill. It is to be noted that caution must be used in
assigning a colour toa slate. It is perhaps a less fixed characteristic than is
generally supposed, in older formations, being surely very susceptible to change
with varying chemical conditions of weathering in neighbouring areas over vast
periods of time. Surprising lateral variations in colour were noted in the same
beds in this series. In some places they were purple at the surface, in others
bright yellow. Again, a bed described as yellow in one place may be found to
be blue, green, or purple when seen at greater depth im a quarry or cutting.

However, in the series under discussion, there was a predominant purple note,
and the beds were very similar to those exposed at Hallett’s Cove and Ochre
Cove, south of Port Noarlunga, at both of which places dense quartzites are
associated with the slates, and, in fact, are as conspicuous as the slates.

The Archaeocyathinae beds need not be discussed further here.

Fig. 4 shows the series of beds occurring on the scarp, with the maximum
thickness of each formation. The figure does not represent a section at any
particular point.

Next comes the question of the stratigraphical order of succession. It is
generally accepted as being that shown in the vertical column of fig, 4. The order
of the formations is confirmed by the mapping of this area, but the mapping also
emphasises a troublesome point frequently met with by all who have worked in
the Mount Lofty Ranges. On a study of this area alone, the column would have
been placed the other way up, with the Archaeocyathinae beds at the bottom. The
dips on the scarp of the ranges from Sellick’s Hill to the north-east are every-
where to the south-east, and this is a feature of the whole of the Mount Lofty
Ranges. as noted by Woolnough (7) and R. L. Jack (unpublished section from
Port Adelaide to Murray Bridge). It would be rank heresy to suggest that the

407

(800+. Purple and yellow Spates, with
black nodules, Siweowse flaggy in parts.

Hithacocyarnae }
Limestone Cres 850

_Passible Unconformily.

850 Calcareous Series

-60' Quartzite 1250 Quottztes and
Sates, purple jn part

0’ Quarfrite

Fi wre Slates JI3G0 ‘ | G00 Arenaceous Slates

100. Quarreite
160, Shite

EHIGQHTONLNTMESTONEGE

Tapleys Hilt ;

Sales 3000 3000 Slates colcaresus part, bonded in part,

Containing Willenge quarries.

StotHanTiHthte (50

Possible Uncongormity.

Milcham Qarlz at ee , Herlzfes,
5 & Slales £500 + od BritrcQuartrite ~&300+., Phylites;
’ . Gad Ares,

0 Quartile

Fig, 4.
Table of strata represented along the Willunga scarp.

408

Sturtian tillite lies stratigraphically higher than the Archaeocyathinae limestone,
so that its actual position there demands explanation. The position is aggravated
in the Willunga scarp by the fact that as one goes north-easterly along the scarp,
the dips become less, with the tillite changing from nearly vertical to nearly
horizontal. The most obvious explanation is in reversal of dip, but this demands
an almost complete overturning of the lower beds, not, of course, an impossible
event. Howchin noted (8) that in the Onkaparinga section the tillite is seen
overlying the Tapley’s Hill slates, both dipping at the gentle angle of 20°, and he
explains it as an overthrust.

It has been suggested that isoclinal folding has taken place between Sellick’s
Hill and Normanville. This is discounted by the non-repetition of beds, particu-
larly in the case of the more easily recognised tillite and Archacocyathinae
limestone.

Selwyn (9) long ago suggested an anticlinal structure down the eastern coast
of Gulf St. Vincent, pointing out that the coastal dips were westward, changing
to eastward inland. This would also cause repetition of beds, unless the axis
were exactly along the coast. From Sellick’s Hill to Normanville it does look
possible for the Archaeocyathinae limestone to form the axis of an anticline, but
this would necessitate the beds inland forming the eastern limb of the anticline,
the beds more remote from the coast, including the Sturtian tillite, overlying those
nearer, One was inclined to this theory before the discovery of the tillite inland.

Westerly dips are noted along the coast at Hallett’s Cove, at the end of the
gully up which the Sellick’s Hill deviation runs, and at Carrickalinga Head. At
other points, notably Myponga Jetty, the dips are easterly. In a former paper (3)
by the author, a section was given inland from Garrickalinga Head, and also up
the Carrickalinga Creek (Nos. 3 and 4, pp. 200 and 201). The change over of
dip is shown in these sections. Owing to the tillite occurring further inland, the
westerly dip would now appear to be the normal, and the easterly the reversed, in
opposition to the views expressed in that paper. Further, the slate with phosphatic
nodules, which underlies the Archaeocyathinae limestone at Sellick’s Hill, but
overlies it further south, would appear to be definitely above the limestone.
Annelid trails and borings described by the author (10) occur at this horizon at
Myponga Jetty, and were formerly considered to be below the limestone.

‘The parallelism of the outcrops in the map is another important feature.
There were no obvious unconformities noted in the whole area, and, in fact, no
unconformities or disconformities have so far been postulated in the Adelaide
Series. It is remarkable if none such exist in so thick a series, so diversified
lithologicaily as to contain every class of sedimentary rock.

Two very likely places for disconformities are at the tillite and at the
Archaeocyathinae limestone. In the Willunga scarp there is little evidence of any
break in the neighbourhood of the tillite, but in the Onkaparinga there has been
the over-thrust, and near Blackwood there is considerable disturbance, the
quartzites below the tillite being very much folded and crushed, with herringbone
structure in the slates. This was also noted below the tillite in the creek in
Section 653, Hundred of Myponga. Several contacts between tillite and under-
lying beds in the railway cuttings above Eden suggest unconformities.

As to the Archaeocyathinae limestone, this, too, runs parallel in outcrop with
the other formations in the area under review, but there is a suggestion of uncon-
formity on the western side of the gully up which the Sellick’s Hill deviation road
runs. This is well viewed from the new road. The sketch section (fig. 5)
represents the beds seen across the gully. The limestones show a monoclinal fold,
with a general dip to the north-west, being almost horizontal in the centre and
steeply inclined towards the sea. The underlying quartzites are almost vertical,
and nowhere show a westerly dip, which is confined in all sections in this area

Trans. and Proc. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., 1927. Vol. LI., Plate XX.

a =

oes
“ Bs <n = veaiaa=
Carrickalinga CE

cron HGS ~
>in
My J

pon
{| Pr

yy
VA
f s. { va fe
> i SS fe f fo
A Pr ~~, por y j
yi ~/ |
os nH, _< / SECTION FIQs [
= Sd rt ‘ 2 ; |

W'S SRN NS SO 3
Ss Qi iW 5

py SNS a
7, S\N 8

x ff i

LU Rt
: Lily j

GS
Uys

YY Lp YY GA \ . \N SS : LAMA
ARK Mad : | ~ . se, ; ) Hig iA Yj _

4
/
. S : ! IN I “ IL Slates. above the Archaeocyathinae Limestone
~ ff y, Ji ny / ; 4 — \a sey sHill | Calcareous Series, contng. Archaeocyathinae Lmstn. aeons
/ ~ x / | va Sa hes 9 Whe Tig <7 \ 4 ai Purple Slates, Slotes and Quarizites
—/ aE Uy, Wickhan's Hill
‘ in ines FD Sook Y/ Yj aN LI Lb ii Brighton Limestone
ae if \Y \\ 7 1) x ; | I i h Je” Tapleys Kill Slates
LOG SS Ye a it } Sturtian Tillite
ERE ys Vj, _ We 1 : in ; Mitcham Quartzites. Phyllites ete.
a NESS UH Wy4YY Y Yj iui | f | SCALE ie Atimeataue: 4
a em ee a ne
YZ / } ma sctilil Land Sections 731 Roads / Lines of Sectione———» Quarries & Strikes Dip gX — Quartzites esrreee

CONTINUE,
nk SS
\\

\ | 4 res
HAAANNIV 4

op)
rm
oe)
ae
©
=
C2
>
in
=
a
ru
Co
a
—-+
—
rr
WN
€A2
>
- 2)
ru
oe,
—+
<x
m
r
Tae
=
=
op)
>
2)
>
orn
fen
ae
:
2

=
————_ ss
———
————

Gillingham & Co. Limited, Printers, Adelaide.

409

to the limestone and higher beds. This particular section suggests the possibility
of a very distinct unconformity between the Archaeocyathinae limestone of
Middle Cambrian age, and the older Adelaide Series. In this case it is not
impossible that the order of beds in the upper part of the Adelaide Series, the tillite,
Tapley’s Hill slates, Brighton limestone, and purple slates and quartzites, might be
correctly reversed, with the purple slates and quartzites (arkose in places) at the
base. This would at least satisfy the demands of the dips in this area, and also
in the upper part of the Onkaparinga section.

SE. NW.

Fig. 5.
Sketch of west side of gully, Sellick’s Hill deviation road, one and a half miles:
a, purple slates, banded; b, quartzites; c, dolomitic limestone, uppermost in Sel-
lick’s Hill road section; d, impure and slaty limestone, weathering to yellow clay
in many parts; e, Archaeocyathinae limestone; {, slates, siliceous in part, purple
and yellow, with black nodules.

List OF REFERENCES.
llowcHin, W., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxv., 191], p. 55.
Howcu.n, W., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxi., 1897, p. 85.
Mapican, C. T., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlix., 1925, p. 198, ef seq.
Howcuin, W., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. 1., 1926, p. 97.
Howcuin, W., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxviii., 1904, p. 269, af seq,
Howciin, W., [bid, p. 262.
Wootnoucn, W. G., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxii., 1908.
Howcuin, W., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxviii, 1904, p. 278.
Setwyn, A. R. C., Geological Notes, S. Austr. Parl. Paper, No. 20, 1860.
Manican, C. T., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. 1., 1926, p. 31.
Howcuin, W., Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlix., 1925, p. 3.

HK SOON DUE WN >

pet

410

NOTE ON THE GEOLOGICAL HORIZON OF THE ARCHAEOCYATHINAE.
By Proressor T. W. Epceworts Davin, K.B.E., D.S.O., D.Sc., F-R.S., ete.
[Read August 11, 1927.]

I. Inrropuction.

The following short note is written with a view to at once modify an opinion
which the author has expressed to this Society in a previous paper.“ It is not
intended to anticipate the detailed discussion of the whole subject which will
appear in the chapter on the Cambrian rocks of Australia by the author in
collaboration with Dr. F. W. Whitehouse, in his book on the Geology of the Com-
monwealth; but as some time may yet elapse before that work is published, the
author considers that in fairness to his colleague, Professor Howchin, he should
forthwith place on record some of his reasons for a change of opinion which brings
the author’s views into a close accord with the earlier views of Professor Howchin.

The special point herein discussed is that of the geological horizons through-
out the world of the Archacocyathinae, that wonderful and mysterious group of
organisms, which formed the first analogues of the modern coral reef, and has
nowhere any finer representatives than in the magnificent reefs of South
Australia.

The gist of this note is in the table and diagram which the author has com-
piled from all the sources available to him, though it is still far from being
complete.

An earlier table of this kind was published through this Society by Professor
T. Griffith Taylor, in his valuable memoir on the Archaeocyathinae, to which
since its publication in 1910 palaeontologists have added but little. The list,
however, as given by Taylor, has now been somewhat extended by the author,
and an attempt made to define the horizon of the Archacocyathinae in various
areas where they occur as precisely as possible,

Il. Vue Tarie anp Dracram.

These show that the oldest known horizon of the Archaeocyathinae is on
the western side of the United States of America, in Eastern California at Silver
Canyon, Inyo County, California. The Californian reefs are 100 feet in thick-
ness, and are associated with such primitive types of trilobites as Holmia rowei
and Holmia weeksi.

Walcott “ states, as follows, in regard to the exact age of the Archaeo-
cyathinae reefs of Silver Canyon, White Mountain Range of Inyo County,
California :—“Just what its relations to the Olenellus fauna of Central Nevada
and British Columbia are 1 am at present unable to state, except that I believe it
to be older than the Olenellus fauna of Central Nevada.”

In another passage “ he states :—“One of them [the trilobites Holunia rowei
and folmia weeksi, Walcott, T. W. E. D.| is more primitive than such forms as
Olenellus thompsont, Hall, and Holmia bréggeri, Walcott, of the upper portions
of the Lower Cambrian Section.”

() “Occurrence of Remains of Small Crnstacea. m the Proterozoic (?) ob Lower Cam-
brian (?) Rocks of Reynella, near Adelaide.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr,, vol. xlvi., 1922,
pp. 6-8.

"The Archaeocyathinae from the Cambrian of South Australia.” Mem. Roy. Soc.
S. Austr., vol. ii., pt. 2, p. 68.

(3) Walcott, C. D., “Lower Cambrian Rocks in Eastern California.” Amer. Jour. Sci.,
Ser. 3, xlix., pp. 141-144, 1895.

() Journ. of Geology, 17, 1909, p. 198.

Locality.

California Inyo Co.

Nevada, Waucobia, Barrell
Springs, Silver Peak.

New York, Troy.

Labrador, Strait of Belle Isle.

Scotland.

France, Normandy,
Carteret (in Cotenton).

Geological Horizon.

MIDDLE CAMBRIAN

PASSAGE BEDS

Anseau Loup.

LOWER CAMBRIAN

Reef 100 feet thick
Protopharetra

Coscinocyathus
Archaeocyathus

Olenellus sp.

Archaeocyathus ailantew
Ethmophyllum whitneyi
Olenellus gilberti
Holmia rowet

Holmia meeksi

Ethmophyllum rarum
Ethmophyllum rensslaericum

Olenellus asaphoides

Ethmophyllum profundum
Archaeocyathus atlanticus
Olenellus thompsoni
Salterella pulchella

Salterella rugosa

Archaeoscyphia (not Archaeo-
cyathinae) in Durness

Limestone, dolomitic and
cherty, passing down into
grits and quartzite, with

Cryptosoa (?)
Ptychoparia
Opisthoparia (?)
Archaeocyathinae
cf. Spirocyathus

» Protopharetra
» Ethmophyllum
» Archaeocyathus

Salterella beds at base,

and Olenellus = “Serpulite
grit,” “Fucoid Beds”

Dolomitic shale, limestone,
and mudstone with Olenellus

Pyrenees, Montaigne Noire.

Paradoxides rugulosus (Corda)
Conocephalites coronatus, Barr

Ptychoparia rouairouxi

Archaeocyathinae

Archaeocyathus

Coscinocyathus, etc.

Sardinia, Canal Grande.

Fragments of Archaeocyathinae

Paradoxides rugulosus (Corda)

Sao Sarda

Anomocare

Epiphytum flabellatum

Siphonema incrustans (= Gir-
vanella)

Archaeocyathinae Reefs with
Ptychoparia and Olenopsis
soppii

And Palaeospongia

Siberia, Torgoschino
or Yenisei.

Liostracus maydelli

a
Anomocare rawlowski
Agnostus csckanowskii, Olenek

Archaeo-
cyathinae
reefs with
Dorypyge
and
Olenellus
(Olenopsis)
kjerulfi

Torgoschino

India, Spiti.

Zacanthoides and

China, Wutai.

Australia.

Kimberley.

Templeton River.

South Australia.

Antarctica.

Ee

Dorypyge richthofeni, laevis

Oryctocephalus, Coscinocyathus| Agraulos

cf. corbicula,

Girvanella

Bornemann Anomocare Salterella hardmani
Agnostus

Ptychoparia (8 species) Ptychoparia Ptychoparia australis (?)
Coscinocyathus elvira Ptychoparia Bathyuriscus

|

Redlichia Redlichia Redlichia (?) Redlichia pritchardi.
and forms allied to
| Mesonacis Redlichia thetlei, Chap-

man

Archaeocyathinae

Epiphyton fasciculatum
Epiphyton grande
Archacocyathinae

Typical Fossils near to
or associated with the
Archaeocyathinae

horizon

GEOLOGICAL HORIZON OF ARCHAEOCYATHINAE SHOWN DIAGRAMMATICALLY.

MIDDLE CAMBRIAN

LOWER CAMBRIAN

ow

= =~ Horizon of Archaeocyathinae.

¢~

|

Paradoxides rugulosus Zone
Bathyuriscus Zone
Olenopsis Zone

4, Olenellus Zone

3. Callavia Zone

2. Elliptocephala Zone

1. Nevadia Zone

Zone Fossils shown
in relation to the
Archaeocyathinae
horizon

411

He adds that this primitive Cambrian fauna is some 5,000 feet lower in the
series than the Olenellus fauna proper. This appears to be the oldest horizon
to which the Archaeocyathinae have as yet been traced in any part of the world,

These oldest Cambrian reefs contain Ethmophyllum whitneyi, Meek, in great
abundance; also Protopharetra, Coscinocyathus, and Archaeocyathus (? ).

At Silver Peak, Nevada, Archaeocyathus and Ethmophyllum are associated
with Olenellus gilberti, and are considered by Walcott to belong to the base of
the Middle Cambrian or top of the Lower Cambrian,

At Troy, New York, Ethmophyllum is associated with Olenellus thompsoni
as well as at Anse au Loup in the Strait of Belle Isle.

lt may be observed that, as has already been suggested by Professor T.
Griffith Taylor,“ no true Archaeocyathinae originally recorded from the Cam-
brian Durness limestones of Scotland have ever really been found there, the
forms mistaken for Archaeocyathinae being really referable to sponges, like
Archaeoscyphia. Lately, Bigot has recorded Archaeocyathinae in a pre-
liminary note, from Carteret in the Cotentin in Normandy, France.

The forms of Archaeocyathinae present scem allied to Spiocyathus
atlanticus, Billings, to Protopharetra, Archaeocyathus, and Ethmophylhun. ‘lhe
trilobites, not yet described in detail, appear to belong mostly to the genus
Pltychoparia. Possibly Opisthoparia is represented.

There are also present fossils figured by Bigot, remarkably like the so-called
Cryptozoa collected by Dr. C. Chewings from the Macdonnell Ranges described
and figured by Howchin,‘”) and those from Italowie Creek, in the N.E, Flinders
Ranges, figured and described by Mawson.

In the Pyrenees, Bergeron has described Archaeocyathus and Coscino-
cyathus as occurring in Montaigne Noire in a limestone underlying the
Paradoxides rugulosus zone of the Middle Cambrian. The Archaeocyathinae
belong there, in his opinion, to the Georgian (Lower Cambrian) rather than to
the Acadian (Middle Cambrian) zone. At the same time they appear to be near
the passage beds from Middle to Lower Cambrian,

In Spain, in the Province of Seville, Ethmophvlam marianum, Roemer, has
been recorded from El Pedroso by Macpherson.’ Hernandez-Pacheco records
Archaeocyathus, Ethmophyllum, Dictyecyathus, Coscmocyathus, and Pro-
topharetra.

The stratigraphical evidence there is not yet very clear, but the Paradowides
rugulosus zone is represented in places in Spain, and the Archaeocyathinae
horizon is, presumably, below it,

In Sardinia, the Archaeocyathinae is described in the classic work of Borne-
mann, 0)

S. Austr., vol. ii., pt. 2, footnote to p. 69.

(6) Bigot, A., “Sur le Cambrien de l'Est du Massif armoricain.” Bull, de la Soc. Linn. de
Normandie, 7 Séries, i-viii, Caen 1925, pp. 93-113, pl. i., and ibid, pp. 136-144, pls. iv.-vin.
“Sur les Caleaires Cambriens de la Région de Carteret et leur l‘aune.”

©) Howchin, Professor Walter, “The Occurrence of the genus Crypfosoén in the
(?) Cambrian of Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xxxviii., pp. 1-10, pls. i.-v.

_ (8) Mawson, Sir Douglas, “Evidence and Indications of Algal Contributions in the Cam-
brian and Pre-Cambrian Limestones of South Australia.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr. vol.
xlix., pp. 186-190, pls. xiit.-xv.

(9) Macpherson, J., ‘Sobre la existencia de la Fauna primordial en Ja Provincia de Sevilla.”
Anal. de la Suc. Espan. de Hist. Nat. Tomo., vii. 1878, pp. 280-284, and also N. Jahr., 1879,
p. 930. See also Hernandez-Pacheco, E. La Sierra Morena y la Llanura Bética, (Sinthesis
Geologica), xiv., Congreso Geologico International, Madrid, 1926.

a Bornemann, Dr. J. G., “Die Versteinerungen des Cambrischen Schichtsystems der Insel
Sardinien.” Nova Acta der Ksl. Leop-Carol. Deutsch Akad. der Naturforscher. Band li., Nr. 1,
pp. 1-84, pls. i.-xxxiii,

412

The Archacocyathinae reefs there overlie conformably strata containing the
trilobite Olenopsis zoppii, Born. and appear to be below the Paradoxides
rugulosus zone (middle of Middle Cambrian) of that island.

Walcott “) considers that Olenopsis occurs “either in passage beds from the
Lower to the Middle Cambrian or in the Upper beds of the Lower Cambrian.”

“Qlenopsis is below the horizon of the Middle Cambrian in Pennsyl-
yania,” and it is “in the passage beds at the base of the Middle Cambrian in
Montana, Alberta, and British Columbia.”

At Torgoschino, near Krasnoiarsk, on the Yenesei River, in Siberia, von
Toll’s (2) important memoir concludes (op. cit., p. 54) that these Archaeo-
cyathinae limestones (which he regarded as of algal origin) are not older than
the zone of Olenellus kjerulfi, and probably not younger than the zone of Parad-
oxides oclandicus. Vhat is, their zone is near the passage beds between Lower
and Middle Cambrian.

In India one form only of the Archaeocyathinae has as yet been found, a
Coscinocyathus OY

Reed describes Coscinocyathus cf. corbicula, Born., from his (Reed’s)
horizon No. 2, which he considers belongs to the lower stage of the Middle Cam-
brian. Associated with the Coscinecyathus are the trilobites Zacanthoides,
Orvetocephalus, Microdiscus griesbachi, and Ptychoparia; Coscinocyathus cl.
corbicula, is comparable (op. cil., p. 64) with a form occurring in Sardinia, and
probably in Siberia. Zacanthoides (op. cit., p. 9) appears to be characteristic of
and restricted to the Middle Cambrian, and has previously only been recorded
from America. Z. indicus, Reed, occurs on the Parahio River Valley, Spit.

Oryctocephalus salteri, Reed, Orvyctocephalus, has been referred to the
Olenidae. lt occurs in the Middle Cambrian of Mount Stephen, British
Columbia, and from a similar horizon in Nevada, that is Middle Cambrian.

In India one form only attributed to the Archacocyathinae has been recorded
by I. R. Cowper Reed.C#

In China also a Coscinocyathus (C. elvira) has been signalled by Walcott.4
This occurs just above the top of the Man-t’o formation containing the trilobite
Redlichia, and therefore of Lower Cambrian age. In China, therefore, Coscino-
cyathws is Middle Cambrian.

The geological horizon of the Archacocyathinae of Antarctica is not yet
known, In Australia it is doubtful whether the Archaeocyathinae have been
definitely identified in the Kimberley, or Northern Territory, or North-west
Queensland areas. It is not proposed here to discuss the Australian literature
dealing with the Archaeocyathinac. The whole subject of the Australian Cam-
brian fauna is being reviewed by F. Chapman, and particularly by Dr. F. W.
Whitehouse; but it is clear from the evidence of the age of the Archaeocyathinae
in general throughout the world, and also from the nature of the trilobites
immediately and conformably overlying the Archaeocyathinae, that if the
Archacocyathinae of South Australia go down into the Lower Cambrian at all,
they only descend into the top portion of that formation. There should, there-
fore, he room for perhaps many thousands of feet of strata below the base of
the Archaeocvathinae limestones of South Australia before the true base of the
Lower Cambrian series is reached.

(1) Journ. of Geol. 17, 1909, p. 240.

(12) Toll, E. von, “Beitrage zur Kenntniss des Sibirischen Cambrium,.” Mem. Acad. Imp.
des Sci. St. Petersburg, vol. viii. (Ser. viit.), 1898, pp. 1-57, pls. i-viii.

(3) Reed, F. R. Cowper, “Himalayan Fossils--The Cambrian Fossils of Spiti.’ Pal.
Indica, Ser. xv., vol. vii, Mem. No. 1, 1910, p. 58, pl. vi., fig. 33.

(14) Reed, F. R. C., “Himalayan Fossils—Cambrian Fossils of Spiti.” Pal. Ind. Ser. xv.,
vol. vii, Mem. No. 1, 1910, pp. 1-70, pls. t.-wi.

(15) Walcott, C. D., “Cambrian Faunas of China.” Proc, U.S.A. Nat. Mus., vol. 29,
1908, pp. 1-106, and iid, vol. 30, 1906, pp. 563-595.

413

This accords with the views originally put forward and so consistently
adhered to by Professor Howchin, viz., that the whole of what the author has
termed the Adelaide Series, comprising some 10,000 feet or more of strata
(including the glacial stages), may be of Lower Cambrian age, rather than late
Proterozoic. At the same time, it would not necessarily follow that there is an
entire absence of Proterozoic strata in the Flinders Ranges.

Mawson “® has recorded a distinct unconformity below the Sturtian glacial
series at Yudnamutana, a considerable thickness of sedimentary rocks inter-
vening between these basal conglomerates marking the unconformity and the
hasal crystalline series of quartz-porphyries, etc. The locality is Bolla-Bolama
Gorge. It is, however, possible that this unconformity may mark the coming in
of a belt of Ordivician rock similar to that which is developed in the Macdonald
Ranges (?). Dr. L. K. Ward” has suggested the probability of such an
occurrence.

Again, Mawson “®) suggests a slight break above the Wooltana volcanic
series, but concludes that no considerable erosion interval separated the volcanic
period from the ice age. A slight difficulty in the way of at once placing the
whole of the Adelaide Series in the Lower Cambrian is that if, as according to
both Professor Howchin and C. T. Madigan, “”) the ilmenitic grits, near Yanka-
lilla Gorge, are of Cambrian age, and Madigan’s view is correct, that there is aj
conformable upward sequence into the mica schists (which are intersected by
the Monazite-bearing pegmatite, close by), the geological age of which, as deduced
by R. G. Thomas, and interpreted by Dr. Arthur Holmes, is indicated at
about 840 millions of years; the age is somewhat too great for Cambrian, the
downward limit of which is fixed as about 600 millions of years.

SuM MARY.

1. The Archaeocyathinae limestones of the world, with the exception of
those of Western North America, occur either at the top of the Lower Cambrian
or at the base of the Middle Cambrian. Only in the case of Coscinocyathus has
it been so far proved that it ascends somewhat above the base of Middle
Cambrian.

2. The Australian Archaeocyathinae, which all appear to lie on, about the
same geological horizon in regard to one another, appear to be of about the same
age as those of Siberia and Sardinia, wiz., base of Middle Cambrian or top of
Lower Cambrian. The trilobite and brachiopod fauna which immediately succeed,
in conformable strata, confirm this view.

3. Up to the present the known Cambrian strata in South Australia above
the Archacocyathinae limestones are for the most part Middle Cambrian, and
their fossils are compatable to those of the Albertan Series of British Columbia.

4, ‘The correctness of Professor Howchin’s views as to the Lower Cambrian
age of the greater part, if not the whole, of the Adelaide Serics is rendered very
probable when account is taken of the general geological horizons of the Archaeo-
cyvathinae throughout the world.

5. More information is needed, particularly in the Italowie and Yudnamutana
region and to the northern extremity of the Flinders Ranges, ctc., before the
exact sequence of the rocks below the Archaeocyathinae limestones and above
the undoubted Pre-Cambrian crystalline complex can be ascertained.

(16) Mawson, D., “Igneous Rocks of the Mount Painter Belt.” Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. xlvii., 1923, p. 382.

(17) Ward, L. K. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlix., 1925, p. 79.

(18) Mawson, D., “The Wooltana Basic Igneous Belt.” [bid, vol. 1., 1926, pp. 195, 196.

(19) Madigan, C. T., “Geology of the Fleurieu Peninsula,” etc. Trans. Roy, Soc. S. Austr.,
vol. xlix., 1925, pp. 204, 205.

(20) Thomas, R. Grenfell. Trans. Roy. Soc. S. Austr., vol. xlvili, 1924, pp. 258-268, pls.
xxiii, xxiv. and Holmes, Arthur, ‘The Age of the Farth,” 1927, p. 74, Benn’s Sixpenny
Library, No. 102.

414

MISCELLANEA.

ISLANDS IN BASS STRAIT UPON WHICH KANGAROO AND WALLABY
ARE FOUND.

By Epwin Asupy, F.L.S., Ere.

In October last, in company with Mr. A. J. Campbell, I visited the famous
Mutton Bird Rookery at Cape Wallomai, with a view to negotiating the setting
apart of that Cape as a Public Reserve. A Mr. John Burgess was staying with
our host, Mr. J. B. Cleland, at the same time. Mr. Burgess is the skipper of a
ketch engaged in the crayfish industry throughout the islands of Bass Strait, in fact
he has spent most of his life amongst these islands. It was a unique opportunity
to obtain particulars of the many bird rookeries scattered throughout that area;
these details I am publishing in an Ornithological journal.

In addition to this information Mr. Burgess gave me a list of those islands
upon which he has seen kangaroo and wallaby. I have in this note retained the
vernacular name made use of by Capt. Burgess; but it may be presumed that the
species referred to under the name “kangaroo” is some form of Bennett’s wallaby
(Macropus bennetti), usually termed in Tasmania brush kangaroo, and that the
term ‘“wallaby” refers to some form of the rufous-bellied wallaby (Macropus
billardieri). I believe some of this information is new, and so furnish these par-
ticulars in the hope that workers who have the opportunity will investigate the
forms existing on these various islets, for surely it is still possible that on one
or other of these, a hitherto overlooked insular race may be found.

List or IsLANnps.

In the Kent Group, kangaroo occur on Deal Island. Flinders Island, both
kangaroo and wallaby. Barren Island, both kangaroo and wallaby. Van Sittart
Island, kangaroo only. Clark Island, wallaby only. Hummock Island, wallaby
only. Babel Island, both kangaroo and wallaby. Hast and West Sisters, wallaby
only. In all Mr. Burgess has seen these marsupials on nine different islands.

Evening Meeting, July 14, 1927.

NOTE ON THE GEOLOGICAL AGE OF THE STURTIAN TILLITE OF
SOUTH AUSTRALIA.

By J. W. Grecory, D.Sc., Professor of Geology in the University of Glasgow.
(Communicated by Professor Walter Howchin.)

“In regard to the Canadian Cobalt [|Huronian or Newer Pre-Cambrian]
glaciation, I think the whole tendency at present is against its recognition as
glacial. I have twice searched the deposit for an ice-scratched stone, but found
nothing but stones scratched by the matrix. Various American and Canadian
geologists have done the same with the same result. I found mixed up with the
loose weathered boulders some Pleistocene striated rocks. At the visit of the
British Association two years ago all the men whose opinion counted stated that
the relation of the deposit to the underlying rocks showed that it was not glacial ;
you may have seen Bain’s last paper on “Is the Gowganda [Cobalt| Con-
glomerate Glacial?” in last year’s ‘American Geologist,’ in which he has shown
that the argument from the supposed level character of the country, at the time
of this conglomerate is all wrong, and that the big boulders lie at the foot of a
former highland. If the only argument for your glacials not being Cambrian is
the correlation with those at Cobalt, they may as well stop at Cambrian.”—
{|Ewtract from letter dated University, Glasgow, May 19, 1927.|

Evening Meeting, August 11, 1927.

415

ABSTRACT OF THE PROCEEDINGS

OF THE
ROYAL SOCIETY OF SOUTH AUSTRALIA
(Incorporated)

FOR THE YEAR NoveMBER 1, 1926, ro Octonrer 31, 1927.

Orpinary Meetinc, NovEMsBer 1], 1926.
Mr. E. R. Warrte in the chair.

Nominations.—H. H. Finlayson, Assistant Lecturer, University of Ade-
laide, and A. R. Alderman were nominated as Fellows.

Exections.—P. D. Riddell, Director Technical High School, Broken Hill,
N.S.W., and P. S. Stapleton were unanimously elected Fellows.

Visrror.—Dr. Geissler, of the University of Halle, was welcomed as a visitor.

ParErs—
R. S. Rocrrs, M.A., “Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia.”
R. H. Puiierne, “The Aboriginal Occupation of the Tallywalka Lake
System of New South Wales.”

A. R. ALDERMAN (communicated by C. T. Madigan), “Petrographic Notes
on Tonalite from the Palmer District, and Biotite-Norite from South Black Hill.”

H, Suearp: “Aboriginal Rock Carvings at Devon Downs, River Murray,
South Australia.”

N. B. Trnpace and H. SHearp, “Aboriginal Rock Paintings, South Para
River, South Australia.”

C. S. Hicxs, “Ancient Trade Weights.”

Exuipits—Mr. Waite exhibited a paper with illustrations of Varanus
kommodensis, Many exhibits were laid on the table by readers of the above
papers.

Orpinary Meerine, Apri 14, 1927.

Tue Vice-Presipent (Dr. J. B. Cleland) in the chair. Forty members
present.

CoRRESPONDENCE.—A letter from Professor Wood Jones was read resigning
his position as President of the Society. The TrEAsuRER (Mr. Roach) moved—
“That the Royal Society of South Australia, in accepting the resignation of
Professor Wood Jones, F.R.S., as President of the Royal Society of South Aus-
tralia, desires to express its regret that, because of his accepting a position at
Honolulu, he has been unable to finish his term of office, and to express to him its
profound thanks for the high services he has rendered science during his seven
years’ sojourn in South Australia.” Carried unanimously.

Evecrions.—-President, Professor T. G. B. Osborn; Representative Governor,
Professor T. Harvey Johnston; Fellows, H. H. Finlayson, Assistant Lecturer,

416

Adelaide University, and A. R. Alderman, Adelaide University, were elected
unanimously.
PAPERS—
Adelaide University Field Anthropology:
(1) Tf. D. Campsetr and C. J. Hacxerr, “Introduction, Descriptive.
and Anthropometric Observations.”
(2) W. Ray, “Physiological Observations.”
(3) J. B. CLELanp, “Blood Grouping.”
(4) E. H. Davies (communicated by W. Ray), “Aboriginal Songs and
Music.”
These papers were illustrated by specimens and by gramophone
records taken and demonstrated by Dr. Davies.
J. B. Creranp, “Notes on a collection of Australian Myxomycetes identified
by Miss Gulielma Lester.”
. B. Creranp and J. M. Brack, “An enumeration of the Vascular Plants
of Kangaroo Island.” (The Orchids by R. S. Rocrrs.)

Exuisits.—Mr. Mavican exhibited the phragmacone of a Belemnite from
Arkeringa Station, via Oodnadatta, presented by Master C. J. McLeod to the S.A,
Museum, described by request. This is a remarkably well-preserved phragmacone
in a block of Cretaceous limestone. Portions of Belemnite guards also are visible
in the specimen, with molluscan remains. The only other recorded phragmacone
from South Australia is in the Tate collection, Adelaide University, described and
figured in the Memoirs of this Society, vol. 11, p. 17, by R. Etheridge, jun. Mr.
Madigan said that in this specimen the phragmacone is twice the length of the
guard, and he is perfectly satisfied that it is part of a Bclemnite. Mr. A. M, Lea
exhibited a collection of Australian sawflies (Tenthredinadae), including several
new species named by Dr. Rirnar Foisins of Finland; also a large European
longicorn beetle (Lamia textor), recently taken alive in Adelaide from a piece of
dead wood.

Orptnary Meetinc, May 12, 1927.

Tue Presipent (Professor T. G. B. Osborn) in the chair. Twenty
members were present.

Evections.—Mr. E. R. Waite, C.M.Z.S., was elected a Vice-President (pro-
posed by L. K. Ward, seconded by J. F. Bailey), by a unanimous vote. For
Fellows—The following were elected unanimously :-—F.. H. Davies, Mus.Doc.,
University, Adelaide; E. W. Holden, B.Sc., Motor Manufacturer, Adelaide; C. J.
Hackett, Medical Student, University, Adelaide; P. B. Paltridge, B.Sc., Univer-
sity, Adelaide; L. N. Birks, Motor Engineer, Adelaide; . M. A. Boys, Photo-
grapher, Adelaide.

Nominations.—Harold Woodlands, F.R.H.S., Gardener, Adelaide, and
Robert Frewer Kemp, Nurseryman, Cross Roads, Kingswood, were nominated as
Fellows.

Exuupits.—Professor Howcitin spoke on the phragmacone exhibited at last
_ meeting by Mr. Madigan. The Professor exhibited a series of specimens indi-
cating the range in size of the Belemnites, some from England, and one from
Australia. He thought that there was a prospect of obtaining from the Australian
Cretaceous rocks, guards larger than any previously recorded. Professor Howchin
also showed a fragment of a glaciated floor from Luke Margaret in Tasmania, due
to the Pleistocene glaciation. Sir Douctas Mawson showed a specimen of
limestone outwardly resembling Halimeda limestone, obtained from the Flinders
Range. The specimen had been examined by Mr. I’. Chapman of the National

417

Museum, Melbourne, whose remarks would be conveyed in the form of a paper.
The geological horizon was well above the tillite and overlying slates. It came
from the Ammonia Mine, near Wooltana. Mr. C. T. Mapican showed excessively
fine-grained galena and fibrous-radiating rhodochrosite. Miss Macktrn showed
five species of Casuarina, occurring in South Australia, which have all been pre-
viously called Casuarina distyla. The same difficulty and confusion had occurred
in New South Wales. In Victoria the condition was the same. Some work done
in South Australia has enabled five species here, and one in New South Wales, to
be defined. Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited two species of giant Horntails (Sires), one
got from Baltic spruce used in motor body building, the other a serious menace
to Pinus insignis in New Zealand. The insects showed the danger of importation
of species without their attendant parasites. Mr. Lea said it was most difficult
to entirely prevent importation of insect pests. Professor J. B. CLELAND showed
a sugary exudate on Leptospermum pubescens in South Australia. A similar
exudation on eucalypts attracted honeyeaters in New South Wales. The exuda-
tion is possibly formed by an extraneous micro-organism, Mr, A. H. Evstow
showed the cotton boll weevil (Anthonomus grandis), the specimens coming from
Texas, U.S.A., and described the methods employed in combating the ravages of
this menace. The Presipent discussed the modern methods of attacking pests
with dust sprays. Dr. T. D. Campnecy, showed drawings dealing with the work
of Mr. Alan Rowe, formerly of Adelaide, in Egyptology. Mr. Rowe is now field
director of the Philadelphia University Museum. The section shows the results
of some recent work in Palestine, where excavations had proved eight horizons
dating back to 1400 B.C. Dr. Campbell also showed a photograph of aboriginal
scats commonly seen on the left shoulder, and gave an account of the explanations
given for this form of adornment.

Orpinary Meetine, JUNE 9, 1927.

Tue Prestoent (Professor T, G. B. Osborn) in the chair. Twenty-six
members present.

Evecrions.—Mr. J. M. Black was elected a member of the Council; Harold
Woodlands, F.R.H.S., and Robert Frewer Kemp were elected Fellows. The
Presipent referred to the valuable contributions of Mr. Black to the botany of
South Australia. THis great industry and singleness of purpose have given us a
thoroughly reliable and modern Flora for our own State.

Nomination. —Bernard Dawson, M.D., F.R.C.S., as Fellow.

Papers—

Mr. Freperick Cuapman, A.L.S., “On a new Genus of Calcareous Algae.”
Sir Douctas Mawson said that more material is required to fix the geological
horizon of the species which is at present in doubt.

Mr. A. M. Lea, “On the Genus Emplesis (Curculionidae).” These are the
small weevils which are gregarious under bark, especially of eucalypts. Mr. Lea
mentioned the loss to science of one of its great Australian supporters, the late
H. L. White, of Belltrees, Scone, N.S.W., and moved that the Society send a note
of condolence to the relatives. This was carried unanimously.

Exuteirts.Mr. E. Asupy exhibited 44 species of humming birds, and gave
an account of the Trochilidae. He discussed the possibility of introducing the
Trochilidae into Australia. Dr. PuLLerine exhibited some tropical Nephilas,
spiders notable for their gigantic orb webs, which were collected by the natives of
the Northern Pacific and Indian Oceans for making baits for their fishing kites.
Mr. Krmper exhibited a number of fossil teeth of sharks, and fine specimens of
Spondylus arenicola, all from Port Willunga. Dr. T. D. Campsert exhibited a

N

418

denture made during the war, in which the teeth were made of hard white rubber;
also some Testaments and school books in the Dieri language, which is now seldom
spoken, Mr, E. R. Warre exhibited birds sent by Dr. Deland from Vanikoro.
He stated that the feathers of one of them (a honeyeater) were those used in
making the tavau. Mr. Waite also showed a roll of tavau. The paper Mr. Waite
is publishing in the “Records of the S.A. Museum” will correct a long-standing
error as to the origin of the red feathers used in making the tavau. which up till
now were believed to have come from a species of Trichoglossus.

Orninary MEETING, Juty 15, 1927.

Tue Vice-Presipent (Professor J. B. Cleland) in the chair. Forty
members present.

Professor J. A. Prescott and Sir Douglas Mawson were nominated delegates
to the Hobart meeting of the A.A.A.S. next January.

Nominations——Mr. H. C. Trumble, M.Ag.Sc., and Dr. S. W. Pennycuick
were nominated as Fellows.

Evection—Dr. Rernard Dawson, M.D. (Lond.),. F.R.C.S. (Eng.), was
elected a Fellow.

PapPERS—

Mr. B. F. Goovr, B.Se., “The Mannum Granite and Associated Basic
Dyke,”’ communicated by Sir Douglas Mawson, who said that the outcrop was the
best on the Murray for hundreds of miles, and approached to the form called
adamellite, with dykes of lamprophyre.

Mr. H. L. SHearp, “Aboriginal Rock Carvings and Shelters—three localt-
ties on the Lower Murray.”

Professor T. Harvey Jounston, ‘New Trematodes from an Australian
Siluroid Fish.” The freshwater cat-fish Tandanus of the Queensland rivers, he
said, was infested by flukes similar to those found im other cat-fish in India and
Japan, and that these parasites infested the swim-bladder of the fish.

Dr. J. B. Cuetanp and Mr, Hackerr, “Description of a New-born
Aboriginal Infant.” An aboriginal child was born at the Queen’s Home, but did
not survive birth. It was, at first, light in colour, but darkened very much within
a few hours. It weighed 12 Ibs.. which is above the average weight and size.
The hair was abundant and curly.

Exripits—Mr. A. M. Lea exhibited a collection of insects, including several
new species from New Guinea, also rabbits’ fur and bones from the Hawker Agri-
cultural Bureau, which they cousidered to be probably ejected by one of the larger
birds of prey. Dr. R. H. Putverne exhibited a series of highly mineralized bones
of some large marsupial (probably Diprotedon) from Hamilton Downs, Alice
Springs, in the MacDonnell Ranges, where they were found by Mr. E. Harris, who
reported that they were very abundant over an area of four acres, at the highest
part of the ranges. Mr. E. Asupy exhibited a graft of a pear showing a large
callosity, and referred to the sterility of the trees which were affected with
callosities. “his condition was a source of great trouble to orchardists in recent
years. ‘Lhe only remedy was to destroy the tree. Mr. Watrr exhibited a rain-
stone from the Diamantina River, presented to the Museum by Dr. Angas Johnson,
and described its use and the accompanying ceremonials. He also exhibited a large
aboriginal grinder found near Moorook, on the River Murray. Sir DoucLAs Mawson
showed some photographs from the Kimberley district (South Africa) of polished
rock pavements, laid bare by erosion, showing the marks of glacial action mixed
with the petroglyphs of animals and other objects, carved by bushmen, and pro-
hably of great antiquity.

419

Orpinary Mrerinc, Aucusr 11, 1927.

Tue Presment (Professor ‘I. G. B, Osborn) in the chair. ‘Thirty members
present.
Nomination.—F. K. Godfree, Merchant, Payneham, as Fellow.

ELecrions—H, C. Trumble, M.Ag.Sc., Assistant Agronomist, Waite Insti-
tute, and Dr, Pennyecuick, D.Sc., Lecturer on Physical Chemistry, Adelaide
University, were elected Fellows.

Vistror.—Mr. W. Condell was present as a visitor and exhibited precious
opal, cut and uncut, from Stuart Range; precious stones from MacDonnell
Ranges, Leigh’s Creek and elsewhere, aerolites and part of a meteorite from
Western Australia; also telluride from Western Australia.

Motion.—Moved by Mr. W. H. Sr_way, seconded by Mr. E. Asupy—
“That this Society deplores the action taken by the Queensland Government in
proclaiming an open scason for the destruction of the koala, and respectfully sug-
gests to the Prime Minister that the export of their skins be prohibited.’ Carried
unanimously.

Parers—

A. M. Lea, F-E.S., “The Clawless and apparently Clawless Curculionidae
of Australia.” The paper dealt with Australian weevils, rendered remarkable by
the absence, or apparent absence, of the claw joint from cach foot.

Professor T, W. E. Davin, “Note on the Geological Horizon of the
Archaeocyathinae.” This was illustrated by an elaborate diagram of the world-
wide occurrences of Archaeocyathinae. Sir Dovctas Mawson stated that the
present paper discusses the occurrence of Archaeocyathinae and associated fossils
in various regions of the world, with a view to determining as closely as possible
its exact chronological position in the geological scale. Such determination has
an important bearing on the age of the great series of Archaeocyathinae-bearing
rocks in South Australia, already well described by Professor Howchin. The
evidence collected indicates a Lower-Middle Cambrian as the age of Archaeo-
cyathinae, and this is in accordance with Professor Howchin’s expressed views.

Professor J. W, Grecory (communicated by Professor Howchin), “Note
on the Geological Age of the Sturtian ‘illite of South Australia.” Mr. Mapican
stated that Professor Lawson, of California, had expressed to Dr. Ward his con-
viction that the Animikean conglomerates of Ontario were definitely tillites, thus
opposing Gregory, Glacial indications are now being discovered in almost every
geological period, and correlation is becoming very difficult.

J.C. Jennison, “The Language of the Elcho Island Tribe, called by them-
selves Kokalango Mala.” In some introductory notes he drew attention to the
absence of sibilants and the sound of the letter “f.”” A silent breathing, similar
to that in Tongan, was noted in many words. Malayan influence was proved by
the occurrence of several words either exactly or closely similar to the Malay
names for the same things, but these were all articles or activities foreign to the
native tribes. The word for water was shown to be the same as that used by
several Central Australian tribes. In discussing Mr. Jennison’s paper, Mr.
TINDALE said that in recording the native dialects of the western half of Arnhem
Land, he had also met with Malay words among the coastal native tribes. Most
of them were of the Buginese dialect of Celebes, but a few old Dutch words
indicated that the latter people had also visited the coast. One of the native words
for “gun” was “jinipa,” which could be traced back to the old Dutch word for
a “musket.” All the introduced words related to trade, or to new objects and
materials brought by the strangers. He also had traced the distribution of the word
for water “papu” over Australia. It underwent a gradual metamorphosis as one

420

came south, but in its several forms was found from Sharks’ Bay in Western
Australia to the vicinity of Adelaide. Further east it was replaced by forms of
two or three other words, such as “nukku,” Dr. Camppewv said, in reference to
Mr. Jennison’s paper, that he would be interested to know if Mr. Jennison had
recorded his vocabulary in accordance with the phonetic values internationally
agreed upon. ‘This was essential in order to make etymological records scientific-
ally valuable,

P. C. Mountrorp, “On Certain Aboriginal Stone Structures in South
Australia,” and mentioned that these are the first to be recorded. Six examples
were found, and the most perfect example, at the instance of Professor F. Wood
Jones, was dismantled and presented to the South Australian Muscum. He also
mentioned that other examples had been photographed in the North Flinders
Ranges.

Exiopits.—Messrs. H. L. SHearp and P. C. Mounrrorp exhibited the
desiccated remains of an aboriginal child found near Swan Reach, A paper was
read describing the circumstances of the discovery, and Mr, C. J. Ilackerr dealt
with the anatomical peculiarities of the exhibit and showed some interesting photo-
graphs. Dr. CAMPBELL said, in reference to the remains of the aboriginal child,
that the teeth were of special interest, as, irom the dentation, some reasonably
close estimate could be made as to the age of the specimen. The deciduous molars
were typical of the Australian native as to their size; they were extremely large
teeth compared with those of modern white people. Mr. pwin Asusy exhibited
four bird skins of unusual interest. The largest was the skin of a White-breasted
Sea Eagle (Haliaetus leucegaster) which had been picked up dead on Ackland’s
Hill, near Blackwood, on July 30 last. It was a young female, which, instead
of having the beautiful white and grey plumage of the adult, was still in the dark
plumage resembling that of the Wedge-tailed Eagle, except that the tail is white.
The span of the wings was 7 feet 2 inches, and in its stomach were the remains
of a rabbit. The second specimen was a female Osprey, or Fish Llawk (Pandion
haliaetus); this was shot in the valley of the Sturt, near Blackwood, on April 13,
1907, and had evidently been taking perch out of the River Sturt, for several of
these fish were in its crop. The third specimen was that of the Square-tailed
Kite (Lophoictinia isura), also a female; in its stomach were the remains of egg-
shell and fledgelings, probably of wattle birds or birds of about that size. We
believe there is no other record of the occurrence of this bird within one, probably
two, hundred miles of Adelaide; this was shot at Blackwood, on October 12,
1913. If it is strange that the two first-named birds of prey should be seeking
their food so far away from their usual haunts, it is even more remarkable that
the Square-tailed Kite should be found so far south of its usual habitat. The
habit of searching in birds’ nests for their young and their eggs is not unusual in
this species, but surely it is a prostitution of its power of flight; its wings are, in
proportion to its weight, seemingly well developed, and suited to both sustained
and rapid flight. The fourth skin shown was that of the Royal Spoon-bill
(Platalea regia); the specimen was sent down from Scheutze’s landing on the
Murray on July 4 last, in a somewhat unsavoury condition. The long, black,
spoon-like bill, black face and black legs set off the white plumage. While the
Yellow-billed Spoonbill is fairly common on the Lower Murray, the Royal Spoon-
bill is quite rare in that part of the river.

Orpinary Meretinc, Sepremper 8, 1927,
THe Prestpent (Professor T. G. B. Osborn) in the chair. Forty members
present.
NominatTion.—Herbert Henry Woollard, Elder Professor of Anatomy,
University, Adelaide.

421

Enection.—F. K. Godfrey, Payneham, as a Fellow.

PapErs—

Crarces Fenner, D.Sc., “Adelaide, South Australia: A Study in Human
Geography.” The paper dealt chiefly with the physiographical features of the
metropolitan region, under such characteristics as the Rift Valley, the Gulf Region,
Adelaide Plains, Mount Lofty Ranges, the ‘lorrens and its Estuary, the Tribu-
taries of the Torrens and associated streams, and the Effects of Geographical
Control on Human Conditions.

R, S. Rocers, M.D., “Contributions te the Orchidology of Australia.” The
paper dealt principally with a new genus, Goadbyella, from Western Australia,
which in its character lay midway between Prosophyllum and Microtis.

Etren D, Mackin, B.Sc., “A Revision of the ‘Distyla complex’ of the
Genus Casuarina.”

Exuisirs.—Professor Prescotr exhibited test-tube specimens of earth in
illustration of his paper. Mr. A. M. Lea, a section of a white ant’s nest from the
Mount T.ofty Ranges, and worker and soldier ants; also, remarkable clawless
weevils from Central Australia.

AnnvuaL MEETING, Ocroper 13, 1927.

Tue Presipenr (Professor T. G. B. Osborn) in the chair. Forty-five
members present.

Professor J. B, CLELAND read Obituary Notices of Professor Rennie and
Dr. Ferguson, and Mr. B. S. Roacn read an Obituary Notice of Mr. Samuel
Dixon. The former are published following the Annual Report, and the latter is
incorporated in the Annual Report.

Evection.—Professor H. H. Woollard, M.1)., Elder Professor of Anatomy,
as a Fellow.

ELection or Orricrrs.—President, Professor J. B. Cleland; Vice-Presidents,
Mr. E. R. Waite and Dr. L. Keith Ward; Hon. Treasurer, Mr. B. S. Roach ;
Members of Council, Dr. C. Fenner and Professor J. A. Prescott.

Nomrnation.—Miss Violet Taylor, Business Manager, 40 Eton Street,
Malvern, as a Fellow.

Sir JosepH Verco made reference to the appointment of Professor T. G. B.
Osborn to the Chair of Botany at the Sydney University, and referred to the
valuable contributions to science and scientific work performed by Professor and
Mrs. Osborn during their fourteen years’ residence in South Australia.

PaPERS—

Professor W. Howcrin, “On the Sturtian Tillite in the Neighbourhood
of Eden and in the Hundreds of Kapunda, Neales, and English.” Ie said Eden
and Viaduct Gully formed the northern limit of a great faulted block of tillite.
It measured two miles in a north and south direction, and was one and three-
quarter miles wide—the largest spread of these glacial beds known in South
Australia, Another line of exposure occurred in the ITundred of Kapunda on
the eastern slopes of the Allandale Range, between Tarlee and Kapunda. The
glacial beds were strongly exposed on the public road between those two towns
as well as on adjoining paddocks, on Ross’ Creek, and Hawker’s Creek. They
curved round to the River Light, near Fords, on the Kapunda railway, in a line
of outcrop seven miles in length. There was a third line of outcrop roughly
parallel to the last-named, but 16 miles to the eastward forming the scarp hills
that overlooked the Murray Plains, taking in the townships of Eudunda. Point

422

Pass, and Robertstown in a lineal direction through the Hundreds of Neales and
English, and having a length of 19 miles.

C. T. Mapican, “The Geology of the Willunga Scarp.” The author sub-
mitted a Map covering an area from Wickham’s Hill, in the north-east, to the
Carrickalinga Creek, in the south-west. He said that area provided evidence of
the relationship which the members of the Adelaide Scries bore to the Archaeo-
cyathinae limestone of the Middle Cambrian age. In it were recognised the
Mitcham quartzites, the Sturtian tillite, Vapley’s Hill slates, Brighton limestone.
and purple slates, in that order, from Wickham’s Hill to Sellick’s Till along the
scarp. All of them apparently rested on the Archaeocyathinae limestone. The
apparent reversal of order was explained by the reversal of dip.

Professor F. Woop Jones (communicated by E. R. Waite), “The Mammals
of Kangaroo Island.” Mr. Warts said there were nine terrestrial mammals listed
as occurring on the island. Four had been introduced by the Fauna and Flora
Board—the ring-tailed opossum, the native bear, the rat kangaroo, and the wombat.
The alien introduction of the pig and feral cat had been destructive to the native
fauna and flora, but rabbits placed on the island many years ago had, fortunately,
failed to establish themselves.

E. R. Waite, “The Reptiles and Amphibians of Kangaroo Island.” The
reptilian fauna included two marine turtles and fourteen lizards, of which the
“iguana” was the only indigenous carnivorous animal on the island. The shingle-
back (or sleepy lizard) had been introduced. The only snake found on the
island was the tiger snake, but there it was so subject to melanism, or blackness,
that the characteristic dark bands were almost lost in the general depth of colour.
There were five species of amphibians, which were all common to the mainland.

H. M. Hate, “The Crustacea of Kangaroo Island.” The paper dealt with
ninety species of Crustacea taken on or near the shores of Kangaroo Island,
including a new Isopod, an inhabitant of sca grasses.

Sir Douctas Mawson, “Geological Notes on an Area along the North-
Eastern margin of the North-Eastern portion of the Willouran Range.” Rocks
in the neighbourhood of Mundowdna siding were of the nature of slates and
breccias. Travelling west they gave way at Hogan’s Well to quartzites and other
rocks of a different nature. The latter formation was traversed by a basic igneous
formation, and was intersected by many mineral veins carrying copper ores with
traces of gold and vanadium. Sir Douctas Mawson also read a short paper
on “The Paralana Flot Spring.”

Il. H. Fixtayson, “Observations on the South Australian Members of the
Sub-genus Wallabia, Part J.” This paper treated, after a brief introduction, with
the history of the species in literature, its past and present position in the fauna
of the State, its distribution and habits, impressions gained from examination
and photographing of a living example, and included a description of certain
external and cranial characters previously either overlooked or incorrectly
recorded.

J. B. CLeranp, “Australian Fungi, Notes and Descriptions, No. 6.”
Apert H. Exsron, “Revision of the Australian Elateridae, Part I.”

P. S. Staprrron, “Supposed Aboriginal arrangement of Pebbles at
Pedler’s Creek, South Australia.”

J. M. Brack, “Additions to the Flora of South Australia, No. 25.”
The Annuat Report and Financia, STATEMENTS were read and adopted.

423

ANNUAL REPORT.
FOR YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1927.

The Society has continued to show great activity during the past year,
1926-1927, This is evinced by the good attendance of Fellows at the monthly
meetings and by the number and variety of the papers presented. The number
(34) is greater than that for any previous year in the history of the Society.

Papers of local Anthropological interest have been prominent, largely
owing to the contributions of members of the Adelaide University Field
Anthropological Expedition to Central Australia in January last. When we
recall the difficulties that attended the collection of data published in some of
the earlier volutnes, it is a matter of intercst to note the comparative ease with
which this Expedition was conducted as well as the value of the results it
achieved.

Geological papers, as usual, bulk large in our annual volume, including
contributions from Professor Sir Douglas Mawson, Professor Hlowchin, Dr. C.
Fenner, and Mr. Madigan. Professors Sir Edgeworth David and Gregory have
also used our Transactions as a medium for the publication of results of special
local interest.

Botanical papers have been contributed by Dr. Rogers, Mr. Black, and
Miss Macklin.

On the Zoological side, Messrs. Lea and Elston have added largely to
our knowledge of the Australian Coleoptera, and Mr. Hale has continued his
untiring work on Crustacea.

The number and excellence of the exhibits have contributed largely to the
interest of the meetings, and in this connection Messrs. Ashby and Lea have
consistently helped.

The departure of our President, Professor F. Wood Jones, F.R.S., for
Honolulu, caused general regret. He left with the sincere good wishes of all
the Fellows for his success in his important new work. Professor T. G. B.
Osborn, President, 1925-1926, was elected to the chair for the remainder of
the session.

Professor Harvey Johnston was elected our Representative Governor on
the Board of the Public Library, Museum and Art Gallery for the remainder
of Professor Wood Jones’ term, and has been re-appointed for the ensuing
year.

The Council has met on eight occasions. The attendances are as
follow -—President: (Prof. Osborn), 5. Vice-Presidents: Prof. Cleland, 6;
Mr. Waite, 8. Sir Joseph Verco, 8; Prof. Lowchin, 8; Drs. Fenner and Ward,
8; Mr. Lea, 7; Prof, Harvey Johnston, 6; Mr. Black, 4 (elected during the
year): Hon. Treasurer and Hon. Secretary, 7.

The Library Committee reports that binding has progressed as far as
the grant permits, but that the arrears are still heavy. The question ot
additional shelving is urgent.

The membership roll is as follows:—llon. Members, 6; Fellows, 142.
Total, 148.

It is a pleasure to record that the honour of Companion of the Most
Distinguished Order of St. Michael and St. George was conferred by His
Majesty on Professor W. Chapman in June last.

During the past year the Society has suffered loss by the deaths of three
of its Fellows—Mr. Samuel Dixon, Professor Rennie, and Dr. Ferguson.
Obituary Notices of Professor Rennie and Dr. Ferguson, contributed by Pro-
fessor J. B. Cleland at the Council’s request, appear below.

424

Mr. Samuel Dixon was elected a Fellow in 1887. He served on the
Council from 1889 until 1918, when increasing age and its accompanying
deafness caused him to resign. Mr. Dixon contributed 5 papers to these
Transactions: Hydatid Disease in Sheep, vol. vi.; Notes on the Supposed
Coal-beds of the Fitzgerald River, vol. vil.; Remarks on some Indigenous
Shrubs, vol. viii: On a Subterranean Water Supply for the Broken Hill
Mines, vol. xiv., and Effects of Settlement upon the Indigenous Vegetation,
vol. v. Perhaps he will best be remembered for his great interest and vigorous
support of all movements connected with afforestation and preservation of
native fauna and flora. Vor 23 years he was chairman of the Native Fauna
and Flora Protection Committce of the Field Naturalists’ Section of this
Society. Vol. xxxv. of these Transactions contains his valedictory address.
In this he referred to his connection with the early phases of the National
Park, Belair, important Nature reserve, as well as playground for the people,
that was nearly lost to the State. Mr. Dixon was actively associated with the
movements extending over a period of 27 years for the foundation of a Flora
and Fauna Reserve on Kangaroo Island. Flinders Chase, founded 1919, owes
much to his championship. He served on the Board of Governors of the Chase
as a representative of this Society from the foundation of the Board in 1919
until 1921,

T. G. B. Ossorn, President.

Ropert PuLLerne, Secretary.
October 13th, 1927.

425

OBITUARY NOTICES.

PROFESSOR E, H. RENNIE.

The Society has suffered a heavy loss in the sudden death on January 8th,
1927, of Edward Ilenry Rennie, M.A., D.Sc., Angas Professor of Chemistry
in the University of Adclaide, whose personality, ability, and services have
meant so much to the Society itself and to its officers and members during
the many years of his residence in Adelaide. Almost immediately after his
arrival in Adelaide, and before he had commenced his lectures in Chemistry,
he was elected a Fellow of the Society on March 3rd, 1885, and at the time
of his death had thus been associated with the Society for nearly 42 years.
During this long period, he occupied a seat at the Council table from the end
of 1885 till 1921, 36 years in all, being President from 1886 till 1889, and again
from 1900 till 1903, and being a Vice-President from 1903 till 1919. Such a
period of service, and the bestowal on him of such high and honourable offices,
are in themselves clear indications of the value attached to his counsels and
advice. Those who have had associations with him, in the Society as well as
in the University, in scientific circles, and in friendship, know how well he
deserved the trusts placed in him. His conscientiousness was proverbial, his
scholarly attainments were high, his scientific ability was universally acknow-
ledged, and his tact and sound judgment were of great value. Underneath
a quiet exterior, with perhaps a suggestion of a somewhat gloomy outlook
on things in general, there lay a keen appreciation of the lighter side of the
amenitics of life. He was a serious and enthusiastic fisherman and an
excellent companion on a long country ramble, but it was in the mtimacy
rendered possible by vacations at the seaside, under the same roof, that one
really felt that one knew him and could appreciate his sterling qualities and
realise his services to the State.

Professor Rennie was born at Sydney on August 19th, 1852, the son of
Edward Alexander Rennie, later Auditor-General of New South Wales, and
a grandson of James Rennie, Professor of Zoology at King’s College and
author of “Insect Architecture.” He took his B.A. degrce in Sydney in 1870,
and his M.A. in 1876. He was a master in the Sydney Grammar School from
1870 to 1875, and in the Brisbane Grammar School in 1876-7. He then pro-
ceeded to London and graduated D.Sc., Lond., in 1881. For two years he
was assistant to Dr. C. R. Alder Wright in the Chemical Department of St.
Mary’s Hospital Medical School, and on his return to Australia was connected.
with the Government Analyst’s Department in Sydney. In 1884 he was
appointed to the Angas Chair in the young University of Adelaide, taking
up duties in February, 1885. For some years he was also Government Analyst
for South Australia. Through his hands, in Adelaide, have passed a long list
of medical, dental and science students who have all appreciated the
excellence of his lectures and the soundness of his teaching. As the number
of his students increased, the inadequacy of the accommodation added greatly
to the demands on the teaching staff, and though from time to time makeshift
additions were made, the building of a special Chemical Block has long been
urgent, The time when this will be accomplished now seems not far distant,
but to our great regret the man by whom it would have been most appre-
ciated, as the crowning point of his University labours, is no longer with us.
Though the needs of his department were great, Dr. Rennie’s fair-mindedness
allowed him to appreciate when those of other departments were even greater.
He thus strongly supported the measures that ctilminated in the fine new

426

block housing the Departments of Physics and Engineering. As an example
of his conscientiousness as a teacher, it may be noted that when Chemistry
entered some years back on a new phase of development and became more
closely linked with Physics, Professor Rennie mastered the principles of the
new outlook so as to be able to impart the necessary knowledge in his usual
lucid manner—a task requiring no mean effort in a man no longer young.

On November 27, 1889, he was elected a member of the University
Council, a position calling for still further inroads on his time and energies.
He resigned from the Council in 1898, but was again a member from 1909
till the time of his death. Thereby the University gained much, though the
Angas Professor found his time for research work still further reduced, time
already gravely encroached on by the necessities of teaching. The experience
gained at the University Council led to his being appointed Acting Vice-
Chancellor during the absence of the Vice-Chancellor, Professor, now Sir
William Mitchell, during 1924-5 and 1925-6, In August, 1926, he held the
highest office open to a man of science in Australasia—that of President of
the Australasian Association for the Advancement of Science.

On December 12, 1917, he delivered the Annual University Commemora-
tion Address, entitled, “The Importance of Chemistry in Connection with the
War.” Dr. Rennie was a Fellow of the Chemical Societies of London and
Berlin and of the Institute of Chemistry of Great Britain and [reland, and a
member of the Australian National Research Council. He was also Chairman
of the State Committee of the Commonwealth Institute of Science and
Industry, the fore-runner of the present Council for Scientific and Industrial
Research, and consequently had a seat on the Executive Council of the former.
He delivered three Presidential addresses to our Society, viz. : in 1888 (vol. x1,

. 225), on “The Present State of Industries in South Australia in which
Chemical Science is Involved”; in 1901 (vol. xxv., p. 157), on “Agriculture
in its Relation to Biology and Chemistry”; and in 1903 (vol, xxvii, p. 319),
on “The Fisheries of Australia.” He contributed the following papers :—
“Analysis of Water from the Dry Creek Bore” (vol. tit, p. 179); “Poison-
ing by Tinned Foods” (vol. ix., p. 10); “Notes on the Colouring Matter
of Drosera Whittakeri” (vol. x., p. 72); “On some so-called South Australian
Garnets” (vol. xi, p. 17); “The Fluorescence of Bursaria spinosa’ (vol. xiii.,
p. 237). With E. F, Turner: “Note on a Voleanic Ash from the Island of
Tanna, New lebrides” (vol. xiv., p. 256), and “On the Poisonous Con-
stituents of Stephania hernandifolia” (vol. xvii., p. 186). With A. J. Higgin:
“Notes on Supposed Volcanic Dust from the Northern Territory” (vol, xxvil.,
p. 205); and with W. T. Cooke: “Preliminary Analytical Notes on Certain
New Minerals” (vol. xxx., p. 193).

DR. EK. W. FERGUSON.

Dr. Eustace William Ferguson was born at Invercargill, N.Z., on
October 24, 1884, and died in Sydney, after a long illness, on July 18, 1927. At
the age of ten he came to Sydney with his parents, the Reverend John Fer-
guson and Mrs. Ferguson. He graduated M.B., Ch.M., Syd., with honours, in
1908, and recently added the Diploma of Public Health to these qualifications.
In June, 1913, he was appointed Assistant Microbiologist to the Department
of Public Health, N.S.W. From 1915 to 1918 he served as Captain with the
Australian Army Medical Corps in France and Palestine, his knowledge of
entomology, and especially of mosquitoes, being of great value in connection
with the control of malaria in the latter field of operations. He succeeded,
in 1920, to the position of Principal Microbiologist of the Health Department

427

when Dr. J. B. Cleland was appointed to the Chair of Pathology in Adelaide.
and retained this position till his death. As well as a pathologist and
bacteriologist of high repute, he was an entomologist of distinction, being an
authority op the Amycterides (Coleoptera) and on the Diptera, He con-
tributed many papers on entomology to the Linnaean Society of New South
Wales, and to other societies, and applied his knowledge of this subject with
great sticcess to medical and veterinary problems.

On May 8, 1914, he was elected a Fellow of this Society, and contributed
in that year Part I. of “Notes on the Amycterides in the South Australian
Museum, with Descriptions of New Species” (vol. xxxviii., p. 11), and Part IL.
in the following year (vol. xxxix., p. 57). In 1922 he was elected President
of the Royal Zoological Society of New South Wales, and in 1926 President
of the Linnaean Society of New South Wales. His medical contributions,
many of which had an entomological bearing, have appeared chiefly in “The
Medical Journal of Australia,” and in the Annual Reports of the Micro-
biological Laboratory, Department of Public Health, N.S.W. Quiet and
unobtrusive in manner, thoroughly reliable and capable, it was a pleasure to
work with him as a colleague and to feel that responsibilities were shared.
In our Proceedings (vol. xxxi., p. 157), Mr. A. M. Lea described a new cur-
culionid beetle as Mandalotus fergusoni after its discoverer, Dr. E. W. Ferguson.
A tenebrionid beetle, named by Mr. H. J. Carter as Oltrinius ferguson, is a
synonym of Cardiothorax politicollis, Bates. Dr, Ferguson’s name is also per-
petuated in the following :—Genus Fergusonina, Malloch (Diptera, Fam. Agro-
myzidae); the mosquito Culicada fergusoni, Taylor (Aedes (Ochlerotatus)
fergusoni, Taylor); an anthomyid fly, Phaonia fergusom, Malloch; a sand fly,
Simulium fergusoni, Tonnoir; a tachinid fly, Schizotachina fergusoni, Bezzi;
a muscid fly, Viviparomusca (Musca) fergusoni, Johnston and Bancroft; the fly
Sarcophaga fergusoni, Johnston and Tiegs; and the March fly, Silvius fergusont,
Riccardo. THis valuable collection of Amycterides (weevils) has been presented
by his widow to the Macleay Museum, University of Sydney.

428

T

9

wma

Poel1ojsuRly,

T 059 a
£ b 96
@ £ #SS
08
Ci gpg tier on
9 £ 0
0 ST 9
9 F ¢%
0 61 ¢
TZ
8 fl b
9 61 eT
9 FP OF
0S
96F
6 6 IT
8 $$ ZéI
6 6 @I¢

Biseyeljsny jo yueg

‘WS jo yueg sBuravg
—-9Z61 ‘OE Joqtuaidag ‘sourleg
puny JUstuMOopuy 0}
syunoIdy sioqmay of

Janey tuardig ye sony Surly

dOUBINSUT

ATOUOTTEYS pue asejsog ‘Sunurig

; Bunysry pue Sues
—salipuns

SNOSTLTIISI PY
Sulpurqyoog
uBiteiqry]
—AICIGUT
UOMIIS SISYBINIeN platy~—juessy
Surysryqn
Suryesysnyyy
Surlyulig

6c

“

¢

“

“

—suoloesursy, Ag

SLNAWAVE

€ 0 SBEly
6 8 be
£
é
0 TT 9F
9 OL Z
eS 86e
0
P
€ 6 FIZ
¢
0
§ ST 819
‘Past =p

est

roa iS

O OST

puny JUSUIMOPUA Well pattosurs
yunooy yueg ssurars

—Jso101 UT

suoHeoyqn gy Jo ayes

So1}BI90G Jayjyo Aq Woy jo asy

SUOTJERTYSIAUT
IYyMUWaIS pue syoday sununig 40.7
_ : suoljdrissqng ug
—JUSUIMISA0F) TOI syuRIn

YOHDaS SISYRINIVN play
i Sue drsans.

9261

“SLdIGOda

“

“

‘“

‘T daqgopg ‘asurjeg oy

“LZ6I ‘Of Jequiaidag papuq seax ay} Jo} }UNOOSy sjuamseg pure sjdiasey

(GELVYOMYOONI) VITVULSAVY HLNOS HO ALAIDOS TVAON

429

L261 ‘£ PYOWO ‘pry

_ GVaNGLIHM CGYYMOH
LLAMIVH NOICWVHSD “M

‘yQe1109 punoy pue psypny

‘saopipny §

‘wamsees], “UOT ‘YOVOU 'S “a upp]

S Pl 2Se'bF i S ph ZS2'bF
O19 690°? —————— |
I & Ff ~ yUNO.IYy Wavg SBWABS “ i
6 ST 90'F |
1 2 £ est Paalaoo41 JsodO UT “
0 0 SZ8 HES 2) YQOIS “AON “WS CfaF * | 0 0 O8 sioqmayy ony“
0 0 006, BE O JOOS WA0L) “YS NOEF "| ‘og Foquua}d9S—/z6T
0 OL 4661 BEE D yooig “yor “W's OON'ZF “| OL 9 6868
6 § Ze SF @ soos "yaoyH “ws oOSF © I 3 Ff yurg ssuparg
££ est ~ ~ Junosoy antiaaay AY 6 BE PR6'e HOO}S JuUSUTBAODH “W'S ‘ooueyeq OL,

‘gg Jaquiaydas—/76T

1 19q0RO—9Z6T

(POT ‘SO 690'FF ender)

‘ANOA ENAWMOUNG

430

DONATIONS TO THE LIBRARY
FOR THE YEAR ENDED SEPTEMBER 30, 1927.

TRANSACTIONS, JOURNALS, REPORTS, ETC.,
presented by the respective governments, societies, and editors.

AUSTRALIA.
AUSTRALASTAN ANTARCTIC Ixpepition, 1911-14. Sci. rep., s. C., v. 8, pt. 3.
AUSTRALASIAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE. Proc., 1924.
AUSTRALASIAN Instircte or Mininc. Proc., no. 60-63. Melb., 1925-26.
Ausrratta, Bureau of Census and Statistics. Yearbook, no. 19, 1926.

Council for Sci. and Industrial Research, Bull, 30-32. Journ., v. 1. no. 1.
Science abstracts, v. 5, no. 4; 6, no. 1-3. Melb. 1926-27.

Dept. of Health. Service publication, no. 32-33; tropical, no. 9.
—— Fisheries. S. “Endeavour” Zool. results, v. 5, pt. 4, 6-7. Melb.
Meteorology. WRain-map of Australia, 1926. Melb.

AUSTRALIAN JOURNAL or EXPERIMENTAL Brotocy, v. 3, pt. 3-4; 4, pt. 1-2.
AUSTRALIAN VETERINARY ASSOCIATION. Journ., v. 2, no. 3-4; 3, no. 1. Syd.

SOUTH AUSTRALIA,
ApDELAIDE University. Animal Products Research. Rep., no. 6. Adel. 1926.
Pustic Lrsrary, Museum anp Arr GALLERY or S.A. Rep., 1925-26. Adel.
Records of S.A. Museum, v. 3, no. 3. Adel. 1927.
Sotto Austratia. Botanic Garden. Report, 1926-27. Adel.
Dept. of Mines. Review, no. 44-45. Adel. 1926-27.
——— Geological Survey. Bull., no. 12. Report, 1925. . Adel.
Woods and Forests Dept. Report, 1925-26, Adel. 1926.
South AustTRALIAN NATURALIST, v. 7, no. 4; 8, no. 1-3. Adel. 1926-27.
SouTH AUSTRALIAN OrnirHococist, v. 8, pt. 8; 9, pt. 1-3. Adel. 1926-27.
SoutH AusTraLIAn ScHoot or Mrnes. Report, 1926. Adel. 1927.

NEW SOUTIL WALES.
AustraLian Muszum. Museum magazine, v. 2, no. 12; 3, no. 1-3.
Records, v. 14, no. 5; 15, no. 2-5. Report, 1925-26. Syd.
LINNEAN Society or N.S.W. Proc., v. 51, pt. 3-5; 52, pt. 1-2. Syd. 1926-27.
Mawwen, J. H. Critical revision of the genus Eucalyptus, pt. 67-68. Syd.
New Sout Wars. Dept. of Agric. Gazette, v. 37; 38, pt. 1-9. Sei. bull. 28.
Dept. of Mines. Report, 1926. Syd. 1927.
Public Library. Report, 1926. Syd. 1927,
Royat Society or N.S.W. Journ. and proc., v. 59, 1925. Syd. 1926.
Roya. ZooLocicat Soctery or N.S.W. Australian zoologist, v. 4, pt. 5-6. Syd.

QUEENSLAND.
QueEENSLAND. Dept. of Agriculture. Journ., v. 26-27; 28, pt. 1-3. Brisb.
Geological Survey. Publications, no. 268, 277. Brisb. 1926.
Qurenstanp Museum, Mem., v. 9, pt. 1. Brisb. 1927.
Roya. Society or QUEENSLAND. Proc., v. 38. Brisb. 1927,

TASMANITA.
RovaL Society oF TASMANIA, Proc., 1926. Ilobart. 1927.
TasMANIA, Dept. of Mines. Underground water-supply paper, no. 4.
Geological Survey. Bull. no. 37. Hobart. 1926.

431

VICTORIA.
Roya. Socrery or Victoria. Proc., v. 39, pt. 1. Melb. 1926.
Victoria. Dept. of Agriculture. Journ., v. 24, pt. 9-12; 25, pt. 1-8. Melb.
Geological Survey. Bull. no. 49. Melb. 1926,
National Museum. Mem. no. 7. Melb. 1927.
Vicror1An Naturauist, v. 43, no. 6-12; 44, no. 1-5. Melb. 1926-27.

WESTERN AUSTRALIA.
Roya Socirry or W.A. Journ., v. 12, Perth. 1925-26.
Western Austratia. Dept. of Agriculture. Journ., v. 3, no. 3-4; 4, no. 1-2.
Geological Survey. Bull., no. 84, 86-87, 90-91, 93. Perth.

ENGLAND,
British Musrum (Nar. Hist.). Economic ser., no. 2,44. Guide to meteorites.
Lepidoptera phalaenas, new genera. Lond. 1926.
Camprince PurtosopuicaL Society. ‘Trans., v. 23, no. 10.
Biological Science. Proc., v. 3, no, 1-3. Camb. 1926-27.
Camermce University. Solar Physics Observatory, Report, 1925-26.
CoxcHonocicaL Society. Journ., v. 18, no. 2-5. Lond. 1926-27.
Dove Marine Lanoratory. Report, 1926. Cullercoats.
Ewromo.oarcat Society. Proc., v. 1; 2, pt. 1. Trans., v. 74; 75, pt. 1. Lond.
GronocicaL Society or Lonpon. Journ., v. 82, pt. 3-4; 83, pt. 1-2. 1926-27.
ImpertaL Burcau or Enromoiocy. Review, v. 14; 15, no. 1-7.
ImpertaL Institute. Bull. v. 24; 25, no. 1-2; and 21 pamphlets.
Linnean Society. Journ.: bot., no. 316-17; zool., no. 244-6. List, 1926-27.
Proc., 1925-26. Trans. zool., v. 19, pt. 1. Lond.
Laverroor BroLocicaL Soctmry. Trans., v. 39-40. 1925-26.
MANCHESTER LITERARY AND PriosopHtcaL Society. Mem., v. 70, 1925-26.
NATIONAL PuysicaL LABORATORY. Collected researches, v. 19. Rep., 1926.
RoyvaL Boranic Garpens, Kew. Bull, 1926. Lond. 1927.
Royat Corona Instirute., United Empire, v. 17, no. 11-12; 18, no. 1-7.
1925-26.
RovaL GEOGRAPHICAL SocieTy. Journ., v. 68-69; 70, no, 1-2. Lond. 1926-27.
Rovat MicroscopicaL Socizty Journ., 1926, pt. 3-4; 1927, pt. 1-2. Lond.
Rovat Society, Proc. A., v. 112-114; B., v. 100-101. Yearbook, 1927, Lond.
Zoo.ocicar. Society or Lonpon. Proc., 1906-26. Trans., v. 22, pt. 1-2.

SCOTLAND.
Royat PuystcaL Society or EpinpureH. Proe., v. 21, pt. 2. 1926.
Roya Society or EptnnurcH. Proc., v. 37, pt. 4; 43, pt. 1; 46, pt. 3-4; 47,
pt. 1. Trans., v. 54, pt. 3; 55, pt. 1. 1912-27.

IRELAND.
Roya Dueitrn Sociery. Proc.: economic, v. 2, no. 16; sci., v. 18, no. 17-28.
Roya Iris Acanemy. Proc., v. 37: A., pt. 6-9; B., pt. 10-21; C., pt. 7-12.

ARGENTINE.
Acap. NaAcIoNaL bE Crencias. Bull. 28, no. 2; 29, no. 1-3. Cordoba. 1925-26.

AUSTRIA.
AKAD. DER WisseNSCHAFTEN. Math.-Nat. Klasse. Jahr, 64. Mitt., no. 62-64.
Sitz., Bd. 134, H. 3-10; 135, H. 1-6. Wien. 1925-26.
GroLociscHe BuUNDESANSTALT. Abh., Bd. 24, H. 1-2. Verh., 1926-27. Wien.

432

NATURILISTORISCHEN Hormusrtums. Ann., Bd. 40. Wien. 1926.
ZooL.-Bor. GESELLSCHAFT IN WiEN. Verh., Bd. 74-77. 1926-27.

BELGIUM.

Acap, RoyaLe pe Betcigue. Classe des Sciences. Bull. 1926, no. 3-6. Mém.

in 4°, t. 7; 8, f. 1-2. Mém. in 8°, t. 8, f. 10-12. Brux. 1926-27.
Instituts Sotvay. Revue, 1925-26, t. 2, no. 2-3; 1927, no. 1-2.
Isis, ed. by Geo. Sarton, no. 9, 10, 13. Brux. 1921-23.
SocikréE RoyaLe pes Scrences pe Likce. Mém., t. 13. Brux. 1926.
SociETE Royare Zoo.tocrgur, Ann., t. 56. Brux. 1925.
Louvain University. Lab. d’Astronomie. Publications, v. 1-2.

BRAZIL.

Instituto OswaLpo Cruz. Mem., t. 18, f. 1; 19, f. 1-2. Rio de Jan.
Museu Paurista. Revista, t. 14. S. Paulo.

CANADA.

Canapa. Geological Survey. Economic geol., no. 2-3. Mem. 113, 148-150.
Museum bull., no. 43, 45. Ottawa. 1926-27.

— Mines. Report, 1926; and six publications.

Royar Canapian Instrrure. Trans. v. 15, pt. 2; 16, pt. 1. Ottawa, 1926-27,

Roya Society or Canapa. Proc. and trans., vy. 20. Ottawa. 1926.

CEYLON.
Cotomzo Museum. Spolia Zeylanica, v. 14, pt. 1. 1927.

DENMARK.

ConsEIL PERMANENT INT. pouR L’ Expror. pe ra Mer. Bull: hydro., 1925-26;
stat., 1924. Pub. de cire., no. 88. Rapports, v. 37-43. Cpng.

Dansk NaturnistorisK Forentne. Vid.-med., Bd. 81-82. Cpng. 1926.

KopenHavn Universirets Zoot. Mustum. Publications, no. 44-48. 1926,

KK. Dansk VibENSKABERNES SELSKAB. Liol.-med. 6, no. 1-3. Oversigt, 1926.
Math.-fys. med. 7. Nat. og Math., t. 11, no. 1-2. Cpng. 1925-27,

FINLAND.
Socreras Enromoziocica Hetstnerorsrensis. Not. entom., v. 2-4; 6.

FRANCE.
Mustum Nationa n’Hist. Nat. Bull. 1925, no. 5-6; 1926, no. 1-5. Par.
Socrirk pes Sciences NAT. DE L’ Quest pe LA France. Bull, t. 5. Nantes.
Socrert, ENroMOLOGIQUE DE France. Ann., v. 88-90; 95; 96, pt. 1-2.
Bull., 1926; 1927, no. 1-10. Par.
SocieTh LINNEENNE pE Normanpiz, Bull, v. 8. Caen. 1926.
Socrtrt LiInN&ENNE pE Borpeaux. Actes, t. 77. 1925.

GERMANY,
Bayer. AKAD. DER WISSENSCHAFTEN. Abh., Bd. 31, no. 1-3. Sitz., 1926.
BERLINER GESELLSCHAFT FUR ANTHROPOLOGIE. “Zeits., 1926, H. 1-6.
BoTANISCHEN GarTtENs U. Museums. Notizb., no. 89-91. Berl. 1926-27.
DevutscHe EntomM. GeseLyscHart. Zeits., 1926; 1927, HI. 1-2. Berl.
DeutscHe Entom. Museum. Mitt., Bd. 15; 16, no. 1-4. Berl. 1926-27.
Feppe, . Repertorium, ete., Bd. 20-23; 24, no. 1-3. Berl. 1924-27.

433

GESELLSCITAFT DER WISSENSCHAFTEN, GOTTINGEN. Gesch. Mitt., 1925-26.

Math-phys. Klasse. Nach., 1926, H. 1-3. Gottingen.

GESELLSCHAFT FUR ErpKUNDE, Erganz. II. Zeits., 1926; 1927. Berl.

K. Deurscue AKAD. DER Nature. zU Harrie. Leopoldina, Bd, 2.

NASSAUISCHEN VEREIN FUR Naturkunne, Jahrb., no. 78. Wiesb. 1926.

NATURFORSCHENDE GESELLSCHAFT ZU Freipurc. Berichte, Bd. 26; 27, H. 1-2.

Naturuist. GESELLSCHAFT zu Ntrwperc. Abh., Bd. 21. Jahr., 1925-26.

NATURIIISTORISCHE Museum, Hampurc. Mitt., Bd. 42. 1926.

OBERRESSISCHE GESELLSCIUAFT FUR Natur.-u. Hem. Med. Abt., Bd. 9-13.
Nat. Abt., Bd. 6-8. Giessen. 1915-22.

PREUSSISCHE AKAD, DER WISSENSCHAFTEN. Sitz., 1926; 1927, pp. 1-58. Phil.
Hist., 1926; 1927, no. 1-11. Phys.-Math., 1926; 1927, no, 1-11. Berl.

SENCKENBERGISCHE Naturr. Gesecyscirarr. Berichte, Bd. 56, H. 7-11.

Senckenhergiana, Bd. 8, II. 3-4. Frankfirta M. 1926.

HAWAIIAN ISLANDS.
Bernice Pauanr Bisnop Museum. Bull., no. 24-33. Honolulu. 1925-26.

IITUNGARY.
Muste NationaL Honcrors, Ann., v. 21, 23-24, Budapest. 1924-26.

INDIA.
InpiA. Catalogue of Indian insects, pt. 11. Calc. 1926.
Geological Survey. Palaeontologica Indica, v. 7, no. 3; 8, no. 4:9, no. 2;
10, no. 1-2; 14. Records, v. 59; 60, pt. 1. Cale. 1926-27.
— Zoological Survey. Annual report, 1923-26, Calc.
InpIAN Museum. Records, v. 27, pt. 5-6; 28, pt. 1-4. Cale.
Panyan Untversity. Dept. of Zoology. Mem., v. 1, pp. 1-18 JT ahore.
Royat Asratic Society, Bompay Br. Journ., v. 2, no. 2, 1926.

ITALY.
LABORATORIO pI ZOOLOGIA GENERALE E AGRARIA. Bull. 19. Portici. 1926.
SocierA pt ScrENzE Natura ED EconomiIcuHe. Bull, v. 4-8, 1922-26.
Giornale, v. 34, 1924-26, Palermo.
SocietA Extromorocica Iratiana. Anno. 58; 59, no. 2-6. Mem., v. 5, £. 1.
SocierA IraniANA pi Scienze Narurati. Atti, v. 65, f: 2-4. Milan.
SocrerA Toscana bi ScienzE Naturart. Mem., v. 35-37. Proc., v. 32-35. Pisa.

JAPAN,
ImpeRTAL AcAapEeMy, Tokyo. Proc., v. 2, no. 6-10; 3, no. 1-6. 1926-27.
ImpPerraL University or Toxyo. Journ., S.1,v.1, pt. 5; 5S. 2, v. 1, pt. 8, 2, pt. 1.
Kyoro Imvrrtan Untversity. College of Engineering. Mem. 4, no. 3-5.
College of Science. Mem., various, 1926-27, Kyédto.
Nationa. Rresearcu Counci.. Jap. journ.: astron., v. 4; bot., v. 3, no. 3;
engin. abstr., v. 4-5; geol., v. 4, no. 1-2; math., v. 3; 4, no. 1; phys., v. 4,
no. 2.
Téuoxu Iwrrrta. University. Sci. rep., I, v. 15; 16, no. 1-5; IL, v. 9; 10,
no. 2-3; III, v. 3, no. 1. Tech. report, v. 6, no, 2-4. Sendai. 1926-27,
TéroKku MatnEematicaL JOURNAL, v. 27, no. 3-4; 28, no. 1-2. Sendai. 1926-27.
Toxyvo University. College of Science. Journ., v. 44-45. 1922-25.

JAVA,
Natuur. VEREENIGING IN Nep.-Inp. Tijds, Deel 86, no. 2-3. Welt.

434

MALAYA.
Royar Asiatic Society (Br.) Journ., v. 4, pt. 2. Singap. 1926.

MEXICO.
Instriruto GroLocico p—E Mexico. An., t. 2, no. 1-4. Bull, 43, 45.
Mexico. Dept. de Salubridad. Bull. 1926, no. 3: 1927, no. 1-2.
SoctepAD Crentirica “ANTONIO ALZATE.” Mem., vy. 45-46. Mex. 1926.

NEW ZEALAND.
CANTERBURY Museum. Records, v. 3, no. 1. Christchurch. 1926.
Dominion LarporaTory. Annual report, 58, 59. Well, 1926.
Dominion Museum. Bull, no. 6,8. Well.
New ZeaLanyv. Board of Science and Art, Journ., v. 8; 9, no. 1-2. Well.
Dept, of Mines. Palaeontological bull., no. 11-12. Well. 1926-27.
Geological Survey. Bull., no. 29. Well. 1927.
New ZeaLanp Institute. Trans., v. 57; 58, pt. 1-2. Well. 1927.

NORWAY.
Brercens Museum. Aarsb., 1926, pt. 1, 3. Bergen. 1925-27.
K. Norske VIpDENSKABERS SELSKAB. Aarsb., 1925. Skr., 1925-26. ‘Trond.
Norske Vip.-AKap. 1 Osto. Mat.-Nat. KI. Skr., 1924, no. 3; 1925, no. 8-11.
STavANGER Musrum. Aarshefte, 1924-25. Stavanger. 1927.

PERU.
Cuerpo DE INGENTEROS DE Minas. Boletin, no. 108. Lima. 1926.

PHILIPPINE ISLANDS.
Bureau or Scrence. Journ., v. 31-33. Report, 24. Manila. 1926-27.

POLAND.
Socritr BoTanigur pe Potocne. Actes, v. 2, no. 3-4. Warsaw. 1924-25.

RUSSIA.
ACADEMIE DES SCIENCES DE Russte. Bull., t. 19-20; 21, no. 1-2. Comptes rendus,
1926-27. Pacific Russian scientific investigations. 1926.
SociETE Russe p—E MinéRatocige. Mem, vy. 51-54. Moscow. 1918-25.
Matériaux pour la géologie de Russie, v. 26, pt. 1. 1918.

SPAIN,
Instiruto GENERAL y Thcnrco pe VaLencra. Nat. Hist. An,, v. 14.
Reat ACAD. DE Crencras y Arres. Mem., v. 15-17; 19; 20, no. 1. Barcelona.

SWEDEN.
Enromo.ocisKa F6rENINGEN y StocKHoLM. Tidsk., Arg. 47. 1926.
GroLocisKA FORENINGEN. JFforh., Bd. 48; 49, H. 1-2. Stockholm.

SWITZERLAND.
Groc.-ETHNoG. GESELLSCITAFT IN ZURICH. Mitt., 1924-26.
Institut Nationat Genevors. Bull., t. 47. Geneva.
NATURFORSCHENDE GESELLSCHAFT IN ZCRICTI. Viert., 1926, H. 1-4.
Soc. pe Prysiour er pv’ Hisr. Nat. Compte rendu, v. 43, no. 3; 44, no. 1.
Soc, NEUCHATELOISE DES SCIENCES NATURELLES, Bull, t. 50, 1925.
Soc. VAupoIsE pres Scrences Nat. Bull. 218. Mem. 10, 14. Lausanne.

435

UNION OF SOUTH AFRICA.

Durpan Corporation Museum. Report, 1926.

GroLocicaL Socarry or SoutH Arrica, Trans., 1926. Johannesb. 1927.
Royat Society or S.A. Trans., v. 13, pt. 4; 14, pt. 1-3; 15. Cape Town.
S.A. Assoc. ror ADVANCEMENT oF Science. Journ., v. 23. Cape Town.
S.A. Museum. Ann., v. 20, pt. 6; 23, pt. 3; 25, pt. 1; 3 guides; rep., 1926.

UNITED STATES.

ACADEMY oF Natura. Sciences. Proc., v. 78. Yearbook, 1925. Philad.

Amrrican ACADEMY OF ARTS AND SctENCES. Proc., v. 61; 62, no, 1-2. Bost.

AMERICAN CHEMICAL Society, Journ., v. 48; 49, no. 1-8. Easton, Pa.

AMERICAN GEOGRAPHICAL Society. Review, v. 16; 17, no. 1-3. Index, 1916-25.

AMERICAN MicroscoricaL Socrery. Trans., v. 44-45; 46, no. 1-3. 1926-27.

American Museum or Narurat History. Anthrop., v. 28, pt. 1. Bull. 52, 55.
Guide, 38, 53, 61-65. Handb. 12. Mem. 13, pt. 3. “Natural History,”
v. 26; 27, no. 1-2. Novitates, no. 212-241. Report, 1925.

AMERICAN PutLosopHicat Society. Proc., v. 65, 1926. Philad.

Arnonp ArnoretuM. Journ., v. 6-7; 8, no, 1-2. Camb., Mass.

Boston Sociery or Natura History. Occas. papers, v. 5, pp. 197-234. Proc.,
v., 37; 38, no. 1-7. Bost. 1923-25.

Brooktyn Institute. Museum qrly., v. 13, no. 3-4; 14, no. 1. 1926-27.

CALIFORNIA ACADEMY OF ScIENCES. Occas., no. 12. Proc., v. 2, no. 18; 10,
11-12; 14, no. 18-20; 15, no. 1-16; 16, no. 2. San Fran.

CaLiForNntA. Mines. Bull. 97. Oilfields, v.11; 12, no. 1-8. Report, v. 22,

CatirorniA University. Publications: arch., v. 18, no. 3; 19, no, 2-3; 21, no. 7;
23, no. 1; bot., v. 12, no. 4-8; 13, no. 7-10; entom., v. 4, no. 1-4; geol.,
y. 16, no. 3-4; zool., v. 21, no. 18; 24, no. 4; 28, no, 21-23; 29, no. 1-8;
30, no. 1-5.

Carnecic Instirution or Wasuineton. Hydrostatic system of trees, 1926.
Samoan foraminifera, 1924. Yearb., 1926.

Conn. Acap, or Arts AND Sciences. Trans., v. 28, pp. 79-293. New Haven.

Conn. GEoLocicaL AND Nat. Hist. Survey. Bull, 33-37. Hartford.

Cornett University. Agr. Exp. Station. 11 bull. 5 mem. Ithaca, N.Y,

Denison University. Sci. Lab. Journ., v. 21, 5-7; 22, 1-4. Granv., O.

Frerp Museum. Publications: bot. v. 6, no. 1; guide, pt. 6; report, v. 6, no. 5;
zool., v. 12, pt. 12-13; 13, pt. 4; 16, pt. 1-2. Chic.

Franxiin Institute. Journ., v. 202-3; 204, no. 1-2. Yearb., 1927. Philad.

Tiarvarp CortEce Museum. Bull., v. 67, no. 12-15; 68, no. 2-3. Rep., 1926.

Intrnots. State Lob. Nat. Hist. Bull, v. 15, art. 8-9; 16, art. 1-3, Urbana.

Intinots University. Biological Monog., v. 10, no. 2-3. Urbana. 1926.

INDIANA ACADEMY oF ScteNcE. Proc., v. 35, 1925. Indianapolis. 1926.

Jouns Hopkins University. Studies, v. 43-44; 45, no. 1. Balt. 1925-27.

Kansas University. Bull.: humanistic studies, v. 4, no. 1. Jawr. 1926.

Maxine Brorocrcar Lar., Woov’s Horr, Mass. Bull, v. 51-52; 53, no. 1.

Minnesota, Geol. and Nat. Hist. Survey. Bull., no. 19-21, Minneap.

Minwesora Universtry. Studies: biol., no. 5; lang., no. 9; social, no. 17.

Missourt Botanic GARDEN. Ann., v.13. St. Louis. 1926.

NarionaL ACADEMY OF SCIENCES. Proc., v. 13, no. 2-8. Rep., 1921-26. Wash.

NationaL Grocrapitic Macazine, v. 50-51; 52, no. 1-2. Wash. 1926-27.

New Yore Pustic Liprary. Bull., v. 30; 31, no. 1-7. N-Y. 1926-27.

New York State Musrum. Bull., no. 268-273. Albany. 1926-27.

New York Zootoctcat Society. ‘‘Zoologica,” v. 4, no. 5; 7, no. 2-3; 8, no. 1-3.

N. Carotina. Geol. Surv. “Natural Resources,” v. 4. Rep., 1925-26.

436

ORERLIN COLLEGE, Laboratory bull., no. 49. 1926.
Outro University. Bull. v. 31, no. 5. Journ. of sci., v. 26; 27, no. 1-4.
San Disco Soctety or Nat. Hisr. Ann. rep., 1923-26. California.

mammals, by F. Stephens. Trans.. v. 1-4; 5, no. 1-6. 1905-27.
SMITHSONIAN Instirution, Annual report, 1925. Wash. 1926.
Sranrorp Uwniversiry. University ser.: biological sciences, v. 4, no. 1-3.
TENNESSEE. Geological Survey. Bull, no. 36. Nashville. 1925.
Unitep States. Coast and Geodetic Survey. Ser. na., 110, 118, 271. Wash.
Dept. of Agric. Bull. 1423, 1521. Exp. st. ree., v. 54-55; 56, no. 1-2, 7-8,
Jour., v. 33-34. N.A. fauna, no. 48. Yearb., 1925. Wash.
Geological Survey. Mineral res., 1923-24. Rep. 47. Various bulls., etc.
Library of Congress. Report, 1926. Wash.
National Museum. Proc., v. 66. Rep. 1925-26, and 6 bull.
WAGNER INsrrruTe or SclENCE. Announcement, 1926-27. Bull. 1-5. Phil.
WasHincTon University, St. ours. Studies, v. 13, no. 2. 1926.

URUGUAY.
Museo Nacionat pE Monrevipro. Anales, ser. 2, t. 2, entr. 1-2.

437

LIST OF FELLOWS.
AS EXISTED ON SEPTEMBER 30, 1927.

Those marked with an asterisk (*) have contributed papers published in the Society’s
‘Transactions. ‘hose marked with a dagger ({) ave Lite Members.

Any change in address or any other changes should be notified to the Secretary.

Note—The publications of the Society will not be sent to those whose subscriptions
are in arrear.

Date of Honorary FELLows.
Hlection.

1910. *Bracc, Sir W. H., K.B.E.,, M.A., D.Sc, F.R.S., Director of the Royal Institution,
Albemarle Street, London (Fellow 1886) .

1926. *CHapMan, F., AL's, National Museum, Melbourne,

1897. *Davin, Sir T. W.. Encr wortH, K.B.E., C.M.G., S.0., B.A, D.Sc. F.R.S.
EG S., Emeritus Professor of Geology, University of Sydney, Coringah, Sherbroke
Road, "Hornsby, N.S.W.

1898. *MEVRICK, E. T., B.A, F.R.S., F.Z.S., Thornhanger, Marlborough, Wilts, England.

1926. Spencer, Prof. Sir W. BaLpwin, K. CM.G., Litt.D., M.A., D.Sc, F.RS., Emeritus
Professor of Biology in the University of Melbourne, Director of the National
Museum, Melbourne.

1894. *Wutson, J. T., M.D., Ch.M., Professor of Anatomy, Cambridge University, England

FEttows.
1926, Aser, L. M., Victor Harbour.
1925, AbEY, W. x Military Road, Grange.
1927, * ALDERMAN, A. R., B.Sc., West Terrace, Kensington Gardens, S.A.
1895, *;Asupy, Epwry, FL. S., M.B.O. U,, Blackwood, S.A.
1917. Bairry, J. If, ‘Director Botanic Garden, Adelaide.
1902. *Baxer, W. H., King’s Park, S.A.
1926. Brcx, B. B., 127 Fullarton Road, Myrtle Bank, S.A.
1902. *Biack, J. M., 82 Brougham Place, North Adelaide.
1912. *BroucHton, A. C., The “Grosvenor,” North Terrace, Adelaide.
1911. Brown, Encar J., M.B., D.P.H., 172 North Terrace.
1883. *Brown, H. Y. L., 286 Ward Street, North Adelaide.
1924. Brownt, J. W., B.Ch., 169 North Terrace, Adelaide.
1916. *Buiit, Lioner B., D.V.Sc., Laboratory, Adelaide Hospital.
1923. Burnon, Roy S., B.Sc., University of Adelaide.
1921. Burron, R. J., Belair.
1922. *Camprett, T. D., D.D.Sc., Dental Dept., Adelaide Hospital, Frome Road.
1925. Carr, W. B., Partridge Street, Glenelg.
1924, Cavewacu-Marnwarine, W. R., M.B., B.S., 207 North Terrace.
1907. *CHapman, R. W,, C.M.G., M.A., B.C.E., F.R.A.S., Professor of Engineering and
Mechanics, University of Adelaide.
1904, Curtstrr, W., c/o Griffiths Bros., [Hindmarsh Square, Adelaide.
1895. *CLELAND, Joun B., M.D., Professor of Pathology, University of Adelaide.
1907. *Cooxr, W. T., D.Sc., Lecturer, University of Adclaide.
1924, on Crespiany, C. T. C., D.S.O., M.D., 172 North Terrace, Adelaide.
1916. Daritne, H. G., Franklin Street, Adelaide.
1927. *Davies, Prof. E. Harotp, Mus.Doc., The University, Adelaide.
1927. Dawsox, Bernarp, M.D., F.R.C.S., 8 King William Street, Adelaide.
1915. *Donp, ALan P., Prickly Pear Laboratory, Sherwood, Brisbane.
1921. Dutton, G. H., B.Sc., F.G.S., Agricultural High School, Murray Bridge.
1911. Dutton, IT. H, B.A., Anlaby, S.A.
1902. *Epourst, A. G, "49 Farrell Street, Glenelg.
1918. *Exston, A. H. F.E.S., “Hatherley, ” Commercial Road, Unley Park.
1925. Ewncrann, H. A, B.Sc., 21 Davenport Terrace, Wayville West.
1917. *Fenner, Cuas, A. E., D.Se., 42 Alexandra Avenue, Rose Park.
1927. *Frnrayson, H. H., The University of Adelaide,
1923, Fry, H. K., D.S.O., M.B., B.S., B.Sc., Glen Osmond Road, Parkside.
1919 +GLasronspury, O. A., Adelaide Cement Co., Brookman Buildings, Grenfell Street.
1923, Grover, C. J. R., Stanley Street, North Adelaide.
1927, Gonrrey, F. K., Robert Street, Payneham, S.A.
1904. Gornonx, Davin, 72 Third Avenue, St. Peters.

438

Date of
Election.

1880.

1910.
1922.
1904.
1916.

1927,

1922.
1922,
1916.

1924.
1896.
1923.
1926.
1927,
1925.
1924.
1883.
1918.
1912,
1893.

1918.

1910.
1910.

1920.

1923.
1926,
1918.
1915.
1897,
1884.
1922,
1925.
1927,

1922.

1923.
1923.
1914,
1905.
1919,
1920.
1926.
1920.
1907.
1924.
1925.
1897,
1924.
1926,
1926.
1921,
1927,
1925.
1913.
1927.
1924,
1924,
1926.
1925.

1926.
1927.

+Gosse, J. H., 31 Grenfell Street, Adelaide.

*Goyvper, Grorcr, A.M., B.Sc., F.C.S., 228 North Terrace.

*Grant, Kerr, M.Sc., Professor of Physics, University of Adelaide.
Grant, R. L. T., M.B., B.S., M.R.C.P., Caius Chambers, 169 North Terrace, Adelaide.
GrirFitu, H., Hove, Brighton.

THacxetr, W. Cuamrion, 35 Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town,

*Hackett, C. J., 196 Prospect Road, Prospect, 5.A.

*Hare, H. M., S.A. Museum, Adelaide.

*HAM, WILLA, F.LR.E.S., "University of Adelaide.
+Hancocx, H. Lipson, A.M.LC. E., M.1.M.M., M.Am.I.M.E., Bundarra Road, Bellevue

Hill, Sydney.
HAwKer, Captain C. A. S., M.A., North Bungaree, via Yacka, South Australia.
Hawker, E. W., M.A., LL.B., F.C.S., East Bungaree, Clare.
Hiri, Frorence M.. B.S., M.D., University of Adelaide.
Ho.tpaway, F. G., M.Sc., The University of Minnesota, U.S.A.
Houten, E. W., B.Sc., Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town, S.A.
Homeurc, Hon. H., Grenfell Street, Adelaide.

*Hossretp, Paut S., M.Sc., Carey Street, Magill.

*Howcuin, Professor Wattrr, F'.G.S., “Stonycroft,” Goodwood East, S.A.

*Isinc, Ernest H., c/o Superintendent’s Office, S.A. Railways, Adelaide.
*Jacx, R. L, BLE, F.GS., Assistant Government Geologist, Adelaide.
James, ‘Tuomas, M.R.C.S., 9 Watson Avenue, Rose Park.

*JENNISON, Rev. J. C., Mallala, S.A.

*Jounson, E. A., M.D., M.R.C.S., Town Hall, Adelaide.

*Jounston, Professor I. Harvey, M.A., D.Sc., University of Adelaide.

*Jones, F. Woon, M.B., B.S., M.R.C.S., L.R.C.P., D.Sc, F.R.S., Honolulu.
Junenr, Lester M. W., B.Sc., Jamestown.

Jutrus, Eown., Conservator of Forests, Adelaide.

Kiuper, W. J., 28 Second Avenue, Joslin.

*Laurip, D. F., Agricultural Department, Victoria Square.

*Lea, A. M., F.E.S.. South Australian Museum, Adelaide.

Lennon, A, ‘A. M.D., M.R.C.S., 66 Brougham Place, North Adelaide.
Lennon, Guy A,, MB. B.S., MRCP, North Terrace.

Lewis, A., M.B., B.S., "Adelaide Hospital.

*MACKLIN, E. db, Miss, M.Sc., The University, Adelaide.

*Manican, C. T., M.A., B.Sc., University of Adelaide.

Macaruy, W. A., LL.B., Pirie Strect.

MarsHau., J. C,, Payneham,

Maruews, ies M., F.R.S.E,, F.L.S., F.Z.S., Foulis Court, Fair Oak, Hants, England.

*MaAwson, SIR Doucias, D.Sc., B.E., E.R. Ss, ‘Professor of Geology, University, Adelaide.
Mayo, Hrien M,, M.D., 47 Melbourne Strect, North Adelaide.

Mavo, HERBERT, LLB, Brookman Buildings, Grenfell Street.
McCoy, H. A.. M.B., Ch.M., 163 North Terrace, Adelaide.
McGirv, Joun Netz, Napicr Terrace, King’s Park.

Mexrose, Rorert T., Mount Pleasant.

Messent, P. S., M.S., 192 North Terrace.

{Mircueit, Professor W., M.A., D.Sc., The University, Adelaide.
*Morcan, A. M., M.B., Ch.B., 46 North Terrace.

Mortson, A. J., Deputy Town Clerk, Town Hall, Adelaide.
Moorr, A. P. R., D.D.Se., 193 North Terrace, Adelaide.

*Mountrorp, C. P., 52 West Street, Torrensville.

Moutnen, Owen M., M.B., B.S., Unley Road, Unley.

TMurray, Hon. Sir Grorce, K.C.M.G., B.A, LL.M., Magill, S.A.
Nortu, Rev. WM. O., Methodist Manse, Netherby.

*Osporn, T. G. B., D.Sc., Professor of Botany, University of Sydney.
Partripcr, T. B., B.Sc., The University of Adelaide.

Pearce, C., 33 Capper Street, Kent Town.
Prrxins, A. J., Director of Agriculture, Victoria Square.
Piver, C. S., B.Sc., Waite Agric. Research Institute, Glen Osmond.

PRRs ER OTR J. A, M.Se, A.LC., Waite Agric. Research Institute, Glen

smone
Prick, A, Grenrett, M.A., F.R.G.S., St. Mark's College, North Adelaide.
Prockter, HH. A, 20 Pier Street, Glenelg.

2907. +*Puiierne, R. IT, M.B.. ChM., ’North Terrace, Adelaide.

1916.
1925.
1926,
1911.

¥*Ray, WiiuiaM, M.B.. B.Sce., Liberal Club Building, North Terrace, Adelaide.
Ricuarpsox, Professor A. E. V., M.A., D.Sc. “Urrbrae,” Glen Osmond.
Ruwpect, P. D., Technical College, Broken Hill.

Roacu, B. S., Education Department, Flinders Street, Adelaide.

439
Date of
Election.
1919, *Ronerrson, Professor T. B., D.Sc., D.Ph., University of Adelaide.
1924. Roxrcer, Miss M. T. P., c/o Central School, Goodwood.
1925. Rocers, L. S., B.D.Sc., Verco Buildings, North Terrace.
1905. *Rocers, R. S.. M.A., M.D., 52 Hutt Street.
1922. *Samuet, Grorrrey, M.Sc., University of Adelaide.
1924. Sanvrorn, J. Wattacr, 75 Grenfell Street.
1924. Srenit, R. W., M.A,, B.Sc. Architect-in-Chief’s Office, Victoria Square, Adelaide.
1891. SeLway, W. H., Treasury, Adelaide.
1926. *SuEarp, HaAroip, Gawler.
1920. Simpson, A. A. C.M.G., C.B-E., Lockwood Road, Burnside.
1924. Simpson, Fren. N., Dequetteville Terrace, Kent Town.
1925. Smiru, Ermer, Ph.D., Se.D., 1281 Paterson Plank Road, Secaucus, N.J., U.S.A.
1925. +Smiru, T. E. Barr, B.A, 25 Curric Street, Adelaide.
1906. Swxow, Francis H., National Mutual Buildings, King William Strcet.
1923. Srropv, M. W., M.B., B.S., Moseley Street, Glenelg,
1927. Stareton, P. S., Henley Beach, South Australia.
1923. Srronc, Professor Sir Arcuigarn, M.A., D.Litt., University of Adelaide
1922, Surron, J., Fullarton Road, Netherby.
1925. Symons, Ivor G., Church Street, Highgate.
1923. Tuomas, J. F., Tenterfield, N.S.W.
1923. *Txomas, R. G., B.Sc., 5 Trinity Street, St. Peters, 5.A.
1921. *Tircs, Oscar W., D.Sc., University of Melbourne.
1923. *Tinparr, N. B., South Australian Museum, Adelaide.
1804, *Turner, A. Jerrerts, M.D., F.E.S.. Wickham Terrace, Brisbane, Queensland.
1925. Turxer, Duptey C., National Chambers, King William Street, Adclaide.
1878. *Verco, Sir Josrpn C., M.D., F.R.C.S., North Terrace, Adelaide.
1926. Watnweicut, J. W., B.A., 32 Florence Strect, Fullarton Estate.
1914. *Warte, Evcar R., F.L.S., C.M.Z.S., Director, South Australian Muscum.
1924. Watxer, W. D., M.B., B.S., B.Sc., St. Mark’s College, Pennington Terrace, N.A.
1912. *Warp, Leonarn Keitu, B.A, B.E., D.Sc., Government Geologist, Adelaide.
1920. Werpensacu, W. W., Rabaul, Papua.
1904. Wuursreap, Howarn, c/o A. M. Bickford & Sons, Currie Street.
1912, *Wurrs, Capt. S. A, C.M.B.O.U., “Wetunga,” Fulham.
1920, *Wuitrox, Professor J. R., D.Sc. University of Adelaide.
1923. *Woov, J. G, B.Sc, Caius College, Cambridge, England.
1927. Wooptanns, Harotn, F.R.H.S., Adelaide.
1927. Wootrarp, H. H., M.D., Professor of Anatomy, University of Adelaide.

440

APPENDIX.
FIELD NATURALISTS’ SECTION

OF TILE
Royal Society of South Australia (Incorporated).

FORTY-FOURTH ANNUAL REPORT OF THE COMMITTEE

FOR THE YEAR ENDED AvuGustT 31, 1927,

The Committee has pleasure in presenting the following report for the
information of members.

MeMBERSItIp.——The number of members on the roll at the close of last year
was 186, out of which 149 were financial. During the year under review 33 new
members were enrolled; on the other hand, 40 have resigned, making a grand
total of 179. Out of this total 138 are financial.

Excursions.—During the session 28 excursions have been held. ‘he
subjects dealt with have been Botany, Bird Life, Orchids, Cultivated Wild
Flowers. Geology, Glacial Features, Autumn Tints, Shells and Fossils, Physio-
graphy, the Native Currant, Foothill Gams. Fungi. and general subjects. The
best thanks of the Section are deserved by those who have led excursions and
otherwise entertained the members.

Lectures AND E:xuipirs.—We are much indebted to the following gentlemen
who favoured the Section with lectures during the year on the subjects men-
tioned:—September 21, 1926, Mr. W. J. Kimber, “On the Cephalopods
(Mollusca); October 19, Dr. II. Basedow, “Primitive Australia,” illustrated by
lantern slides; November 19, Mr. H. M. Hale, a lantern lecture on “Defensive
Devices of Marine Animals’; March 15, 1927, Miss E. D. Macklin, B.Sc.,
“Seaweeds”; April 19, Dr. C. Fenner, Mr. W. Ham, F.R.E.S., and Mr. E. H.
Ising lectured on a “Trip to Western Victoria.” Three lantern lectures followed
on trips undertaken, viz.. May 17, Mr. H. M. Hale, “A Naturalist in North
Quecnstand”; June 21, Mr. G. F. Hussey, “Across two Continents—Europe and
America,” and Mr. Edgar R. Waite, F.1.S., “A Naturalist Abroad”; August 16,
“West Australian Evening,” by Messrs. J. F. Bailey, A. M. Lea, F.E.S., H. M.
Hale, Dr. C. Fenner, and Mr. E. H. Ising.

Lecturers have usually shown a good series of exhibits which have proved
interesting and educational. The Committee invites more members to take part
in this important part of the activities of the Section.

“Tre Sourn Austrarian Naturarrst.”——Our Journal has been published
each quarter, and under the capable guidance of Mr. W. Ham, the Editor, some
interesting articles have been published. Anthropology has been represented by
articles from Messrs. N. B. Tindale. H. M. Hale, and J. W. Hosking;
Entomology, by Mr. F. G, Heldaway, B.Se.; Conchology. by Mr. F. Trigg, Hon.
Sec. Shell Collectors’ Club; Botany, by Messrs. J. M. Black, L. Reese, J. F.
dailey, Prof. J. B. Cleland, and Mr. f. H. Ising; and general topics by Mr. W.
Ham. The cost of printing Nos. 1 to 3 of Volume 8 is approximately £50. The
part No. 4, to be issued shortly, will complete Volume 8.

441

Excuancrs—Local, Interstate, and Foreign exchanges are still maintained,
and it is hoped that members may make full use of the publications received.

Flower Snow, 1926-—The Seventh Annual Flower Show, held on
October 15 and 16, in the Adelaide Town Hall, was very successful excepting
financially. Only £25 4s. 1d. was cleared this year as compared with £43 6s. 4d.
last year, i.e., 1925. There is no doubt about the educational value of the exhi-
bition, and it is hoped that efforts will be redoubled this year to make it known as
widely as possible and to make it still more attractive.

Herparium.—The work of the Herbarium is well maintained through the
indefatigable efforts of Prof. J. B. Cleland and several members. There is
still plenty of work to do in sorting and identifying specimens, and the Committee
will welcome volunteers. Several collections have been received during the year,
amongst others from Mr. and Mrs. C. Pearce, Thevenard; Mr. L. J. Nesting (head
teacher), Mavis Elefson, Lionel Mudge, Alex. Lovegrove, Wirrulla School,
Eyre’s Peninsula; and Mr. F. D. Warren, Finniss Springs, via Marree. A fine
lot of flowers was pressed from the various Schools’ Exhibits sent down to the
Show.

AUSTRALASIAN ASSOCIATION FOR THE ADVANCEMENT OF SCIENCE,
Horart, January, 1928.—Receiving an invitation to send delegates to this
mecting, Dr. C. Fenner and Mr. E. H. Ising were appointed.

W. Cuampion Hackett, Chairman.

Ernesr H. Istnc, Hon. Sec.

THIRTY-NINTH REPORT OF THE FLORA AND FAUNA
PROTECTION COMMITTEE.

FOR THE YEAR ENDED Aucust 31, 1927.

The chief business for the year concerned the protection of the Native
Currant, Letters were received from Mr. Fred. C. Richards, Assistant Secretary
Central Agricultural Bureau, mentioning that a resolution was carried at the Con-
ference of Lower North Branches of the Agricultural Bureau which read as
follows "That the Government be requested to take steps to ensure the protec-
tion of the Native Currant (Acrotriche depressa) on Crown lands by the addition
of a suitable clause in the agreement.”

Letters were also received from residents of Williamstown District. regretting
the wholesale destruction of the Native Currant trees by persons visiting the dis-
trict; also from Mr. I, Coleman, Saddleworth, and Mr. Edwin Ashby.

At a meeting held on March 22, 1927, the matter was deferred until the next
meeting, which was held on June 30, 1927. At this meeting Mr. E. H. Ising
resigned his office (as Secretary pro, tem.), and Mr, Machell was appointed
Secretary. The question of the protection of the Native Currant was further
discussed, and the Secretary instructed to see what could be done in the matter.

Captain S. A. White was granted leave of absence during his trip abroad.
Mr. W. Champion Hackett was appointed Acting Chairman.

A letter of thanks was sent to the Minister of Agriculture for action taken
in curtailing the open season for opossums. An appropriate reply was received.

At a meeting held on July 21, 1927, a report was presented by the Secretary
re protection of Native Currants, It was found that no Act was in force to

442

ensure protection. Notices against destruction of plants in parks and reserves
were posted, from time to time, and similar notices had at one time or another
appeared on certain Crown lands having reference to the destruction of Native
Currants, etc.

The Secretary for Lands intimated that if a request for such notices to be
posted were sent from this Committee it would receive consideration.

The Secretary of the Williamstown Agricultural Bureau was written to with
regard to the notices, but reply was reccived that their effectiveness was doubted.
However, the Secretary for Lands had been communicated with on the matter,
and the Secretary of the Flora and Fauna Committee is proceeding to push the
work further.

It is to be hoped that members will take a keen interest in the work of the
coming year and lend all support possible.

W. Crampton Hackett, Act. Chairman.
(Sed.) J. E. Lewis Macwe t,
Hon. Sec. F. and F. Protection Committee.

ANNUAL REPORT OF THE SHELL COLLECTORS’ COMMITTEE.

This Club held 20 Evening Meetings during the year just closed, the average
attendance being 13 out of a total of 18 members.

Much useful work was accomplished during this period, members having
applied themselves to the study of South Australian Mollusca in a most
encouraging manner.

At each meeting definite families of shells were under survey, specimens of
which were exhibited and viewed microscopically when necessary. Most of the
known facts concerning them were mentioned, different authorities consulted, and
many new thoughts and theories were expressed relative to them by members.

A preliminary review of all known South Australian Bivalves and Univalves
has now been completed, comprising over 1,000 varieties. It is the intention of
this Club to immediately begin a closer and more specialized study of these forms.

All members are now in possession of a complete Catalogue of South Aus-
tralian Mollusca revised up to date. For this we have to express thanks to Sir
Joseph Verco. These lists have been typed at the expense of Club members.
‘Thanks are also due to the Royal Society for providing better lighting on the table,
which became very necessary, especially when dealing with small material. Most
members have assiduously collected specimens during the year, catalogued and
mounted them for reference, and should now be possessed of a fair elementary
knowledge of this interesting and fascinating branch of scientific study.

(Sed.) W. J. Kimper, Chairman.

F. Trice, Hon. Sec.
Adelaide, August 30, 1927.

: “2261 ‘Te insny ;
‘sioypny NOSINOW ‘{ “XHTV “AOMNSBOTT “UOH OOTAL “A
wH lt “WdOd ‘Gaaa ‘d YaALIVM
7091109 punoy pur pazipny

8 eT SSty 8 ft SSlF

2 slot o* es .: - aourjeg yueg “
T 0 98T ————_

te oe A}91905 [ehoy 0} JuauTAeday “ OI. ZZ
ns = snoanreyaostyq st 9

443

U 8r
é
t¢
Io ° . “ sosusdxq suypsaviy, “

oe oe oe ‘349 ‘sa8u}s0g “

i
ee oe oe ran ae Sutsyio apy “
oe ae oan oe ve Buryulig &g

‘2-961

Wm OOCMOANNS

‘aanyipusdxy “s}d1a02 yf

PL SCL GIF ‘L261 ‘1 dag psemsoy 3yBno1q aourjeg oy,

SHOIUETIISIPT
i jsotaquy yueg
- MOYS IBMOTT

Knee jeAoy Wor yURID

shay myig “
ie suoldiosqng “
PreMiO} JYSNOIG sduRTVY OF

‘TL ‘3d29S—2-9261

“ENNODDV IVAANAD
“LZ6L “TE ysnsny pepus IvaxX Joy ainjipusdxq pue sjdis.ay jo JUSUIEReIS

‘VITVALSNV HLINOS dO ALAIOOS TVAOWN AHL AO NOILDES SLSITVYNLIVN GTAla

444

GENERAL INDEX.

[Generic and specific names in italics indicate that the forms described

are new to sciencc.|

Ablepharus lineo-ocellatus, 328

Aboriginals, Central Australia, 65, 76, 78, 81;
Child’s Remains from the Lower Murray,
South Australia, 173; Infant, New-born,
141: Rock Carvings at Devon Downs,
River Murray, 18; Rock Paintings, South

Para River, 14; Rock Shelters and Carv- |

ings—Three Localities on the Lower Mur-
ray, 137; Songs, 81; Stone Structures in
South Australia, 169
Aborigines, Language of the Elcho Island, 177
Acacia, 40
Acaena, 40
elchelocis, 107: 4.
Achnophora, 58
Acianthus, 32
Acrotriche, 53
Actaea calculosa, 311; peronii, 311 ,
Actumnus setifer, 312
Adelaide Plains, Physiography of, 193; Ade-
laide, Study in Human Geography, 193
Adelaide University Field Authropology, Cen-
tral Australia.
No. 1. Introduction: Descriptive
Anthropometric Observations, 65
No. 2. Physiological Observations, 76
No. 3. Blood-Grouping of
Aboriginals at Oodnadatta
Springs, 78
No. 4. Aboriginal Songs, 81
Adenanthos, 35
Adiantum, 25
Adriana, 44
Agropyrum, 28
Aira, 28
Ajuga, 54
Alchemilla, 40
Alderman, A. R., Petrographic Notes on
Tonalite from the Palmer District and
Biotite-Norite from South Black Hill, 20
Algae, New genus of Calcareous. from the
Lower Cambrian (#), 123
Alope australis, 308
Alternanthera, 37.
Althenia, 26
Alyxia, 54
Amanita anyistispora, 298; straminea, 299
Amphibians of Kangaroo Island, 326
Amphibolurus decresii, 327
Amphihromus, 28
Amphoroidella clliptica, 310
Anagallis, 53
Angianthus, 59
Anguillaria, 31
Annual Report, 423
Anthocereis, 55
Aolles, 155; A. albus, 161; barbatus, 164;
basalis, 159; basipennis, 160; fasciatus, 157;
ferrugineus, 161; inconspicuns, 164; inter-
medius, 162; intermixtus, 162; latirostris,

rudis, 168

and

and Alice

See Errata, p. 4

Australian |

163: lituratus, 165; longirostris, 156;
maculipennis, 159; marmoratus, 157, mini-
mus, 156; multimaculatus, 162; orbiculatus,
157; ornatipennis, 156; parvus, 163; picatus,
164: pictus, 158; puncticollis, 156; quangue-
| carinatus, 160; rostralis, 161; rufirostris,
i 158: tibialis, 156; uniformis, 156: verte-
bralis, 160
| Apium, 52
| Appendix, 440
| Archaeocyathinae,
Horizon of, 410
Arctocephalus cinereus, 324; doriferus, 324
Arcyria cinerea, 64; denudata, 64; ferruginea,
64: insignis, 64; nutans, 64
' Armillaria colossa australis, 299; muscicola,
299
Arthrocnemum, 37
Ashby, E., Islands in Bass Strait upon which
Kangaroo and Wallaby are found, 414;
|. Exhibits of humming birds, 417; Graft of
pear, 418; Hawks, ctc., 420
Asperula, 56
Asterolasia, 44
' Astroloma, 52
' Atelicus, 146; A. fusiformis, 147; guttatus,
/ 146; inaequalis, 146; lefericollis, 147
' Atriplex, 37
' Australomysis incisa, 321
' Avena, 28
Axius plectorhynchus, 309

Note on the Geological

Badhamia capsulifera, 62; folticola, 62
Baeckea, 48

Balaena australis, 324

Balaenoptera musculus, 324

Balance-sheets, 425

Banksia, 35

Bartlingia, 31

Bauera, 39

Bertya, 45

Betaeus australis, 308

Betongia lesucuri, 323

Beyeria, 44

Billardiera, 39
: Biotite-Norite from South Black Hill, 20
: Black, J. M., Additions to the Flora of South
_ Australia, No. 25, 378
- Black, J. M., J. B. Cleland, and R. 8. Rogers,
| Enumeration of the Vascular Plants of
| Kangaroo Island, 24

Blechnum,26

Boronia, 43

Brachycome, 59

Brachyloma, 53

Brachynotus octodentatus, 312

Briza, 28

Brizula, 30

Bromus, 28

445

Buechnera, 56

Bulbine, 31
Bulbophyllum Elisac, 2
Burchardia, 31
Bursaria, 39

Cakile, 39

Caladenia, 33; C. alpina, 12; Andasti, 2953 j

carnea, 13; c. gigantea, 13; c. pygmaca, 13;
lavandulacea, 11; radialts, 296; triangu-
laris, 10

Calamagrostis, 27

Calandrinia, 38; C. dipetala, 379; sphaero-
-phylla, 378; staynensis, 379

Caleana Sullivani, 9

Callistemom, 48

Callitris, 26

Calocephalus, 59

Calochilus, 32; C. imberbis, 4

Calythrix, 50

Campbell, T. D., Exhibit of drawings in
Egyptology; of aboriginal scars, 417; of
denture of hard white rubber, 417; books
in the Dieri language, 418

Campbell, T. D., and C. J. Hackett, Field
Anthropology. Introduction Descriptive
and Anthropometric Observations, 65

Cambrian (Lower), New Genus of Calcareous
Algae in, 123

Cantharellus brusmneus, 302; granulosus, 302;
rugosus, 302

Capsella, 38

Carduus, 61

Caretta caretta, 326

Carex, 30

Cassinia, 59

Cassytha, 38

Casuarina, 34; Revision of the “Distyla Com-

plex,” 257; C. distyla, 274; Muelleriana,
275, 283; paludosa, 270; p. robusta, 271;
pusilla, 272; rigida, 269; striata, 267;

stricta, 278, 280

Caustis, 30

Celsea, 55

Centaurea, 61

Centella, 51

Centipeda, 59

Centrolepis, 30

Ceradocus rubromaculatus, 314

Cerastium, 38

Ceratiomyxa fruticulosa, 62

Cerceis acuticaudata, 319

Chamaescilla, 31

Chapman, F., New Genus of Calcareous
Algae, from the Lower Cambrian (?), west
of Wooltana, South Australia, 123

Cheilanthes, 25

Cheiranthera, 39

Chenopodium, 36

Chorctrum, 36

Chorizandra, 29

Cirolana cranchii australiense, 315

Cirsium, 61

Cladium, 29

Clawless and apparently
lionidae of Australia, 144

Cleland, J. B., Notes on a collection of Aus-
tralian Myxomycetes, 62; Blood Grouping

clawless Curcu-

of Australian Aboriginals at Ocdnadatta
and Alice Springs, 78; Australian Fungi:
Notes and Descriptions, No. 6, 298; Exhibit
of Sugary FExudate from Leptospermum
pubescens, 417

Cleland, J. B., J. M. Black, and R. S. Rogers,
Enumeration of the Vascular Plants of
Kangaroo Island, 24

Cleland, J. B., and C. J. Hackett, Observa-
tions on a New-born Australian Aboriginal
Infant, 141

Clematis, 38

Clitocybe brunneo-ceracea, 300; peragyreyata,
300; semioceulta, 300

Codonophilus imbricatus, 315

Comatricha typhoides, 63

Comesperma, 44

Condell, W., Exhibit
aerolites, &c., 419

Conospermum, 35

Convolvulus, 54

Coronopus, 39

Correa, 43

Cortinarius ochracens, 304; ruber, 303; sub-
arvinaceus, 304

Corysanthes, 32; C. undulata, 8

Cotula, 59

Crabyzos longicaudatus, 317

Crangon edwardsi, 308; novae-zelandiae, 308;
praedator, 308; villosus, 307

Crassula, 39

Cratoscelocis, 154; C. foveicollis, 155

Crinia signifera, 329

Crustacea of Kangaroo Island, 307

Cryptandra, 46

Cryptodromia octodentata, 310

Cryptostemna, 61

Cryptostylis subulata, 6

Cubaris ambitiosus, 320

Curculionidae, 93, 144

Cyclograpsus audouinii, 312

Cymodacea, 26

Cymodoce longicaudata, 319

Cymbonotus, 61

Cyperus, 28

Cyrtostylis, 32

of precious stones,

Dactylis, 28

Dampiera, 58

Danthonia, 28

Darwinia, 50

Dasyurus viverrinus, 322

Datura. 55

Daucus, 52

David, T. W. Edgeworth, Note on the Geol-
ogical Horizon of the Archaeocyathinae,
410

Davies, E. H., Aboriginal Songs, 81

Daviesia, 41

Delphinus delphis, 324

Dermochelys coriacea, 326

Deto marina, 320

| Diachaea leucopoda, 63

Dianella, 31

Dichelachne, 27

Dichondra, 54

Dichopogon, 31
Dictydiaethalium plumbeum, 63

446

Didiscus, $2

Didymium nigripes, 63
Didymotheca, 37
Dillwynia, 42

Diplotaxis, 38

Distichlis, 28

Diuris, 34; D. fastidiosa, 6
Dixon, S., Obituary of, 424
Dodonaca, 45

Donations to Library, 430
Dromia bicavernosa, 310
Dromicia concimna, 323
Dromidiopsis cxcavata, 310
Drosera, 39

Echidna aculeata, 322

Echinopogon, 27

Fden, Tillite at, 331

Egernii whitii, 327

Elcho Island Aborigines, 177

Elamena unguiformis longirostris, 310

Elateridae, Revision of Australian, 350

Elston, A H., Revision of the Australian
Elateridae.
hibit of insects, 417

Emplesis, 93; E. albifasciata, 113; albifrons,
112: alphabelica, 98; alternata, 106
angusta, 114; apiciventris, 106; assimilis,
93; bastpennis, 115; bifoveata, 117; betuber-
culata, 97; brachyderes, 94; brevimana,
100; composita, 121; cordipennis, 116; costi-
rostris, 103; curvirostris, 99; cylindtrostris,
95; ferruginea, 118; grata, 121; grisca, 105;
ignobilis, 94; ilota, 104; imscripta, 108;
intermirta, 96; interocularis, 104; imter-
rupta, 102; intricata, 106; invenusta, 105;
lata, 121; leucomela, 122; leucophaca, 109;
Hilliputana, 114; longicollis, 120; macro-
slicta, 99; masculina, 118; medfasctata,
103; mervidionalis, 95; microsticta, 100;
aiscella, 1073; nana, 116; nigriclava, 102;
nigrirostris, 101; nigrofasciata, 94; obliqua,
lll; ovalisticta, 94; pallida, 109; paralis,
120; parvidens, 119; picta, 112; piclipennis,
113; pulicosa, 98; rectirostris, 108; seti-
pennis, 115; sordida, 110; squamirostris,
101; squanvivaria, 99; stenoderes, 122; sub-
lecta, 107; submunda, 96; subtibialis, 110;
subuniformis, 97; suturalis, 95; tarsalis,
117: tfasmanicensis, 97; tibialis, 110; fri-
sinuala, 114; vitticollis, 100.

Enchylaena, 37

Epacris, 53

Ephippias endeavouri, 310

Epilobium, 51

Erechthites, 60

Eremophila, 56

Eriocheir spinosus, 312

Eriochilus, 32; FE. cucullatus, 10

Eriochlamys, 59

Eriostemon, 44

Erodium, 43

Errata, p. 4

Eruma hispidium, 310

Eryngium, 52

Erythraea, 54

Eucalyptus, 49

Eudunda, Tillite at, 345

Coleoptera, Part ii, 350; Ex-

,

Euidotea bakeri, 315; cacruleotincta, 316;
peronii, 315; stricta, 315

Euphorbia, 44

Euphrasia, 56

Eurystheus atlanticus, 315

Eu-Sarcochilus, 1

Eutaxia, 41

Exocarpus, 36

Exosphaeroma bicolor, 318

Fauna of Kangaroo Island, Crustacea, 307;
Mammals, 322; Reptiles and Amphibians,
326

Fellows, List of, 437

Fenner, C., Adelaide, South Australia:
Study in Human Geography, 193

Ferguson, E, W., Obituary oi, 428

Festuca, 28

Field Naturalists’ Section, 440

Finlayson, H. H., Observations on the South
Australian Members of the Subgenus Wal-
labia, 363

Flora of South Australia, 378

Foeniculum, 52

Fords, Tillite at, 343

Frankenia, 47

Fuligo cinerea, 63; septica, 62; s candida, 63

Fungi, Australian, 298

Tusanus, 36

A

Gahnia, 29; G. hystrix, 378

Galinm, 56

Gastrodia, 31; G. sesamoides, 2

Geijera, 44

Geochus, 166; G. hozensis, 167

Geological Horizon of the Archacocyathinae,
410

Geology of the Willunga Scarp, 398

Geranium, 42

Gleichenia, 26

Glossostigma, 55

Glyceria, 28

Gnaphalium, 60

Goadbyella, 294; G. gracilis, 294

| Gompholobium, 41

Goode, B. F., Mannum Granite, 126

Goodenia, 57; G. anfracta, 385; argentca,
384; Tunata, 384; subintegra, 383; wni-
lobata, 383

Goodia, 42

Granite at Mannum, 126

Gratiola, 55

Gregory, J. W., Note on the Geological Age
of the Sturtian Tillite of South Australia,
414

Grevillea, 35

Gulf Region, Physiography of, 193

Gymnodactylus miliusii, 326

Gymnogramme, 26

Gyrostemon, 37

Hackett, C. J. H. L. Sheard, and C. P.
Mountford, Unusual Disposal of an Abor-
iginal Child's Remains from the Lower
Murray, South Australia, 173

Hackett, C. J., and T. D. Campbell, Field
Anthropology. Introduction: Descriptive
and Anthropometric Observations, 65

447

Hackett, C. J., and J. B. Cleland, Observa-
tions on a New-born Australian Aboriginal
Infant, 141

Hakea, 35

Hale, H. M., Fauna of Kangaroo Island,
Crustacea, 307

Halgania, 54

Halicarciims ovatus, 310; rostratus, 310

Ualophila, 27

Halorrhagis, 51

Hardenbergia, 42

Hawker's Creek, Tillite at, 339

Veleocharis, 29; Halmaturina, 378

Helichrysum, 60

Helipterum, 60

Hemichroa, 37

Hemiergis decresicnsis, 328; peronii, 328

Hermannia Grilesii, 382

Hibbertia, 47

Hinulia quoyi, 328

Hippolyte tenuirostris, 308

Hordeum, 28

Hot Spring, Paralana, 391

Howchin, W., Sturtian Tillite in the Neigh-
bourhood of Téden, and in the Hundreds of

Kapunda, Neales and English, South Aus- ,

tralian, 330; Exhibit of phragmacones of
Belemnites from England and Australia,
416; Fragment of glaciated floor from
Tasmania, 416

Huenia protcus, 311

Human Geography, Study in, 193

Hutchinsia, 38

Hydrurga leptonyx, 325

Hypericum, 47

Hypochaeris, 61

Hypolaena, 30

Hydrocotyle, 52

Hyla ewingii, 329

Hymenanthera angustifolia, 383

Ibla quadrivalvis, 321
Icilius australis, 315
Index, 444

Tnula, 60

Isoetes, 26

Isoetopsis, 59
Isoodon obesulus, 322
Isoparochis /andani, 129
Isopogon, 34
Ixiolacna, 59

Ixodia, 59

Jasus lalandii, 309

Jennison, J. C., Notes on the Language
the Elcho Island Aborigines, 177

Johnston, T. H., New Trematodes from an
Australian Siluroid, 129

Jones, F. Wood, and E. R. Waite, Fauna of
Kangaroo Island, South Australia, No. 2,
Mammals, 322

Juncus, 30

of

Kangaroo Island, Crustacea, 307; Mammals,
322; Orchids, 24; Reptiles and Amphibians,
326; Vascular plants, 24

Kangaroo and Wallaby on Islands in Bass
Strait, 414

Kennedya, 42

Kimber, W. J., Exhibit of fossil teeth of
sharks, 417

Koala, Motion of regret for open season in
Queensland, 419

Kochia, 37; E. enchylacnoides, 379

Kunzea, 48

| Lacon aquilus, 360; badius, 350; bellator,
354: brevipennis, 360; caslaneus, 358;
cinerasceus, 359; conspiciendus, 3533

cruentatus, 351; farinosus, 355; fergusoni,
350; hackeri, 357; lateralis, 352; sulti-
punctatus, 358; praclongus, 335; puncta-
tissinms, 362; rufulus, 361; semivestitus,
352; stigmosus, 352; subcompactus, 356

Lactarius Clarkei, 302

Lagenophora, 58

| Lagurus, 28

Language of the Elcho Island Aborigines, 177

Lasiopetalum, 46

Lavatera, 46

Lea, A. M., New Species of Emplesis, 93;
Clawless and apparently clawless Curcu-
lionidae of Australia, 144; Exhibits of
insects, 416, 417, 418

Leander intermedius, 309; serenus, 309

Leiopisma metallicum, 328

Lemna, 30

Lepas anserifera, 321; hillii, 321

Lepidosperma, 30

Lepidium, 38

| Leptoceras, 32

Leptocarpus, 30

Leptomeria, 36

Leptomithrax australiensis,
costulatus, 311

Leptonia virido-marginaia, 303

Leptespermum, 48

| Lepturus, 28. See Errata, p. 4

Lepyrodia, 30

Leucopogon, 52

Levenhookia, 58

] hotzkya, 50

Library, Donations to, 430

Ligia australicnsis, 320

Lilacopsis, 52

| Limnodynastes
329

Limosella, 55

Lindsaya, 25

Liocarcinus corrugatus, 311

Lissanthe, 52

Lister, G., Australian Myxomycetes, identified
by, 62

| Lithospermum, 54

Litocheira bispinosa, 312

Lobelia, 57

Logania, 53

Lolium, 28

| Lotus, 42

| Loudonia, 51

| Luzula, 31

| Lycium, 55

' Lycogala epidendrum, 63

: Lycopodium, 26

Lyperanthus, 32

3il;

sterno-

dorsalis, 329; tasmaniensis,

448

Lysiosquilla perpasta, 307
Lythrum, 48

Macklin, E. D., Revision of the “Distyla
Complex” of the Genus Casuarina, 257;
Exhibit of species of Casuarina, 417

Macropus eugenti, 323; fuliginosus, 323;
greyi, 366
Madigan, C. T., Geology of the Willunga

Searp, 398; Exhibit of phragmacone of
Belemnite; ine-grained galena and
fibrous-radiating rhodochrosite, 417

Malva, 46

Mammals of Kangaroo Island, 322

Mannum Granite, 126

Marasmius alveolaris, 302

Marianthus, 39

Marrubium, 54

Mawson, D., Geological Notes on an Arca
along the North-Eastern Margin of the
North-Eastern Portion of the Willouran
Range, 386; Paralana hot spring, 391;
Exhibit limestone outwardly resembling
Halimeda, from Flinders Range, 416;
Photographs of South African polished rock
pavements, 418

Mawsonella, 124; M. wooltanensis, 124

Medicago, 42

Meetings, Ordinary, 415-420; Annual, 421

Mcgametope rotundifrons, 311

Melaleuca, 48

Melilotus, "42

Melita fresnelii, 314

Mesembrianthemum, 37

Micranthemum, 44

Micraonychus, 165; M. coelostcrius, 166;
iNotus, 165; interruptus, 166; nigrirostris,
165

Microcyhbe, 44

Microlaena, 27

Micromyrtus, 50

Microseris, 61

Microtis, 32; M. orbicularis, 6

Millotia, 59

Mimulus, 55

Miscellanea. Islands in Bass Strait upon
which Kangaroo and Wallaby are found,
414; Note on the Geological Age of the
Sturtian Tillite of South Australia, 414

Misophrice, 147; M. albolineata, 150; barretti,
153; dispar, 152; gloriosa, 149’; GTISeQ,
151; lata, 150; obliquialba, 152; oblonga,
148: sordida, 153; soror, 149; subvariabilis,
151; ursa, 149; vittata, 149; wardi, 153

Mitrasacme, 53

Mountford, C. P., Aboriginal Stone Struc-
tures in South Australia, 169: Exhibit of
remains of aboriginal child, 420

Mountford, C. P., H. L. Sheard, and C. J.
Hackett, "Unusual Disposal of an Aboriginal
Child’s Remains from the Lower Murray,
South Australia, 173

Mount Lofty Ranges, eines cuats of, 193

Mucilago spongiosa solida,

Muehlenbeckia, 36

Mycena subeulgaris, 299

Myoporum, 56

Mvosotis, 54

; Myriocephalus, 59

Myriophylum, 51
Myxamicium, 303
Myxomycetes, Australian, 62

| Naxia aurita, 310; tumida, 310
| Nectocarcims integrifrons, 311;

tuberculosus,
311

Neobalaena marginata, 324

Neurachne, 27

Nicotiana, 55

Nitraria, 43

Notechis scutatus, 328

Nyctophilus geoffroyi, 325

Obituary : Dixon, S., td Rennie, E. H., 427;
Ferguson, E, W,,

Oenothera, 51

Olax, 36

Olearia, 58

Onopordon, 61

Opercularia, 56

Ophioglossum, 26

eee ee of Australia, Contributions to,

291

Orthrosanthus, 31

Osborn, T. G. B. Appointment to Sydney
University, 421

Ottelia, 27

| Ovalipes bipustulatus, 311

Oxalis, 43
Ozius truncatus, 311

Paguristes frontalis, 310; sulcatus, 310
Palaemon australis, 309
Papaver,

Paracilicaea hamata, 319
Paragrapsus gaimardi, 312
Paralana hot spring, 391
Paramicippa tuberculosa, 311
Paridotea ungulata, 317°
Parietaria, 34

Patersonia, 31

Paxillus infundibulifor mis, 304
Pelargonium, 43

_ Peneus latisulcatus, 307

Pentidotea australis, 318

Perichacna depressa, 64

Peropus variegatus, 326

Petalomera lateralis, 310

Petrographic Notes on Tonalite and Biotite-
Norite, 20

Petrophila, 34

| Phalaris, 27

Phascolarctus cinereus, 323

Phasolomys latifrons, 323

Phebalium, 44

Phlyxia intermedia, 313

Philyra laevis, 313

Pholiota rufo-fulva, 303; subpunla, 303
Phyllanthus, 44

Phyllodactylus marmoratus, 326
Phylloglossum, 26

' Phyllota, 42

Physaruin cinereum, 62;
didermoides, 62; nutans,
62; viride, 62

compressum, 62;
62; reniforme,

449

Physeter macrocephalus, 324

Physiolog ical Observations on Aboriginals, 76

Picris, 61

Pilumuus fissifrons, 312; tomentosus, 312

Pimelea, 47

Pinnotheres subglobosa, 312

Pittosporum, 39

Plagianthus, 46

Plagusia chabrus, 313

Plantago, 56

Platylobium, 42

Pleurotus cincrascens, 301;

Poa, 28

Podolepis, 59

Podosperma, 59

Point Pass, Tillite at, 347

Polycheria antarctica, 314

Polygonum, 36

Polypogon, 27

Polypompholyx, 56

Pomaderris, 45

Poranthera, 44

Porcellana dispar, 309

Porcellio laevis, 320

Porcellionides pruinosus, 320

Posidonia, 26

Potamogeton, 26

Prasophyllum, 32; P.
Tlartii, 8; Nublingii,
validuam,

Pratia, 57

Prescott, J. A., Reaction of South Australian
Soils, 287 ; Exhibit of test tube specimen of
earth Irom Adelaide, 421

Prostanthera, 55

Psathyrella subprona, 306

Pseudochirus lJaniginosus,

Pseudedelma impar, 326

Pseudaphryne bibronii, 329

Psilocybe coprophila, 306; stercicela, 305;
subaeruginosa, 305; subammophila, 306

Pteridium, 25

Pterostylis, 34; P. robusia, 296

Pulleine, A. R., Exhibit of spiders, 417;
mineralised hones, probably of Diprotodon,
418

Pultcnaca, 41

subapplicalus, 301

acuminatum,

293; Ruppii, 292;

322

Ranunculus, 38

Rattus greyi, 324

Ray, W., Field Anthropology,
Observations, 76

Rennie, FE. H., Obituary, 427

Reptiles of Kangaroo Island, 326

Reseda, 39

Reticularia Lycoperdon, 63

Rhagodia, 36

Rhodona bougainvillti, 328

Robertstown, Tillite at, 346

Rogers, R. S., Contributions to the Orchid-
ology ol Australia, 1, 291;
Kangaroo Island, 24

Rosa, 40

Ross’ Creek,

Rubus, 40

Rumex, 36

Physiological

Tillite at, 336

201; |

' Stemonitis herbatica, 63
: Stenothoe valida, 314
| Stipa, 27

- Stone Structures in South Australia, Aborig-

~ Ruppia, 26

Russula purpurco-flava, 301

; Sagina, 38

Salicornia, 37

Salsola, 37

Samolus, 53

Sarcochilus dilatatus, 291; spathulatis, 1

Sebaea, 54

Selaginella, 26

Selliera, 57

Senecio, 60

Scabiosa, 57

Seaevola, 57; S. bursariifotia, 385

Scaprella scaura, 315

Schizaea, 26

Schizophrys aspera, 311

Schoenus, 28

Scirpus, 29

Scutellaria, 54

Sheard, H. L., Aboriginal Rock Carvings at
Devon Downs, River Murray, South Aus-
tralia, 18; Aboriginal Rock Shelters and
Carvings—Three Localities on the Lower
Murray, 137; Exhibit of Remains of
Aboriginal Child, 420

Sheard, H. L., C. P. Mountford, and C. J.
Hackett, Unusual Disposal of an Aborig-
inal Child’s Remains from the Lower
Murray, South Australia, 173

Sheard, H. L., and N. B. Tindale, Aboriginal
Rock Paintings, South Para River, South
Australia, 14

Shell Collectors’ Committee, Anuual Report,
442

Siegesbeckia, 59

Silene, 38

Siluroid, Trematodes from an Australian, 129

Silybum, 61

Siriella australis,
Sisymbrium, 38

321

S: vils, Reaction of South Australian, 287

solanem, 55

Sonchus, 61

South Para River, Aboriginal Rock Paint-
ings. 14

Spergularia, 38

Spinifex, 27

Sporobolus, 27

Sprengelia, 53

Springbank, Tillite at, 335

Spyridium, 45

Stackhousia, 45,

Stellaria, 38

: splendens, 63

inal, 169

Stuartina, 60
Orchids of |

Sturtian Tillite at Eden, and in the Hun-
dreds of Kapunda, Neales and Tinglish,
330; of South Australia, 414

Stvlidium, 58

Styphelia, 52

' Suaeda, 37

450

Swainsona, 42; S. BeAriana, 379; fissimontana,
381; rigida, 380
Synalpheus maccullochi, 308

Talorchestia novae-hollandiae, 315

Tandanicola, 133; T. bancrofti, 133

Tecoma doratoxrylon, 383

Templetonia, 42 |

Tetragonia, 37

Tetratheca, 44

Thechia cinerascens, 154; mollis, 154

Thelymitra, 32; T. chasmegama, 4; Eliza-
bethae, 5

Themeda, 27

Thomasia, 47

Threlkeldia, 37

Thyrolambrus excavatus, 311

Thryptomene, 50

Thysanotus, 31

Tillite at Eden, 331; Ross’ Creek, 336;
Hawker’s Creek, 339; Fords, 343; Eudunda,
345; Robertstown, 346; Point Pass, 347;
Springbank, 335; Sturtian, 414

Tindale, N. B., and H. L. Sheard, Aboriginal
Rock Paintings, South Para River, South
Australia, 14

Tonalite from the Palmer District, 20

Torilis, 52

Torrens River and its Estuary, Physiography
of, 193

Toxanthus, 59

Trachymene, 52

Trachysaurus rugosus, 327

Trematodes from an Australian Siluroid, 129

Trichia floriformis, 64; varia, 64; verru-
cosa, 64

Trichinium, 37

Trichosurus vulpecula, 323

Tricoryne, 31

Trifolium, 42

Triglochin, 26

Trimalium, 45

Trithuria, 30

Tubifera ferruginosa, 63

Tunica, 38
Tympanocryptis lineata, 327
Typha, 26

Upogebia bowerbankii, 309; simsani, 309
Urtica, 34
Utricularia, 56

Valisneria, 27
Varanus varius, 327
Verbascum, 55
Veronica, 55

Vicia, 42

Villarsia, 54
Viminaria, 41

Viola, 47
Vittadinia, 58

| Wahlenbergia, 57

Waite, E. R., Fauna of Kangaroo Island,
South Australia, No. 3. Reptiles and
Amphibians, 326; Exhibit of birds from
Vanikoro, 418; Roll of tavau, 418; Rain-
stone from Diamantina River, 418;
Aboriginal grinder from River Murray, 418

Waite, E. R., and F. Wood Jones, Fauna of
Kangaroo Island, South Australia, No. 2.
Mammals, 322

Waldeckia chevreuxi, 314; Kroyeri, 314

Wallabia, Observations on the Subgenus,
363; W. greyi, 366

Westringia, 55

Willouran Range, Geological Notes on, 386

Willunga Scarp, Geology of, 398

Wilsonia, 54

Xanthorrhoea, 31
Xanthosia, 51

Zieria, 43

Zostera, 26

Zuzara venosa, 319
Zygophyllum, 43

Plate _xiii. : “ ite eG a _ < 59 si i = page a
Prescott, Pror. J. A.: The Reaction of South Australian Soils 3 : st 287
“Rogers, Dr. R.S.: Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia .. i 8 .~ 291
Crgrann, Pror. J. B.: Australian Fungi: Notes and Descriptions. No, 6 .. ee .. 208

CONTENTS.

/ Page

Rocers, Dr. R. S.; Contributions to the Orchidology of Australia .. ¥ ae asese a
Trnparte, Norman B., and) Haroip 1. SHEARD: Aboriginal Rock Paintings, South Para
River, South Australia, Plates i. and it, es See sie ae a Ds ane
SuHEArD, Harotp L.: Aboriginal Rock Carvings at Devon Downs, River Murray, South

Australia. Plates iii. to y. : = re a = rie a ~ tee
ALDERMAN, A. R. (Communicated by C. T. Madigan) : Petrographic Notes on Tonalite
from the Palmer District and Biotite-Norite from South Black Hill 20

CiFLAND, Pror. J. B. and J. M. Brack: An Enumeration of the Vascular Plants of Kan-
garvo Island. (Orchids by Dr. R. S. Rocers) .. ea ae i se = Pmt
CLELAND; Pror. J. B.: Notes on a Collection of Australian Myxom-cetes. Identified by

Miss Gulielma Lister ae i 3 Mr bee age 62
AvELAIDE UNiverstry Firtp ANTHROPOLOGY : Central Australia—
Gamppett, Dr. T. D., and Ceci J. Hacxert. No- 1, Introduction: Deseriptive and
Anthropometric Observations x 65

Ray, Dr. Wits. No. 2, Physiological Observations |. 2 2) 1)
CLELAND, Pror. J. B. No, 3, Blood-Grouping of Australian Aboriginals at Oodnadatta

and Alice Springs i ss ee a as eB
Davies, Dr. E. Hanoy. No. 4, Aboriginal Songs -., Fi 23 a = Bagi
Lea, Artaur M.: On New Species of Emplesis (Curculionidae) a) = 256-593
CuapMan, Frepx,: Ona New Genus of Calcareous Algae, from the Lower Cambrian (7),
West of Wooltana, South Australia, Plate Vio an = ay 3 e : 2. 123
Goope, B. F. (Communicated by Sir D. Mawson): The Mannum Granite _: ; ».. 126
JOHNSTON, Pror. T. Harvey: New Trematodes from an Australian Siluroid = e429.
SHEARD. Haroip L.: Aboriginal Rock Shelters and Carvings—Three Localities on the
Lower Murray 137

Creras | Pror, J. B.. and Ceci. J. Hacxerr: Observations on a New-born Australian
Aborigiaal Infant, Plates vii. and vill... Ses ee = ie = = S
Lea, Arruur M.: The Clawless and Apparently Clawless Curculionidae of Australia... 144
Mounrrorp, C. P.: Aboriginal Stone Structures in South Australia. Plates ix. and x. .. 169
Sear, H. LC. P. Mocnrvorp, and C. J. Hackerr: An unusual disposal of an Ahorig- -

inal Child's Remains from the Lower Murray, South Australia. Plates XI. and xii.°.. 173 ~
JeNyison, Rev. J. C.: Notes on the Language of the Elcho Island Aborigines _. iF
Fenner, Dr. C.; Adelaide, South Australia: A Study in Human Geography =e . 193

Macmin, Eiien D.: A Revision of the “Distyla Complex” of the Genus Casuarina.

Fauna or KAnGARoo tstanp, Sour Ausrratia—
iiaLe,. Hw N.<--No-4:The Crustacea... ve ie e oe = +: 4
Warsre, E. R., atid Pror. F. Woop Jones. No. 2,The Mammals .. ee a aeouee
Wixtre, Rico. 3° Ehe Reptiles and Amphibians = es: = 3% ee

Howcutn, Pror. W.: The Sturtian Tillite in the Neighbourhood of Eden, and in the Hun-
dreds of Kapunda, Neales and English, South Australia. Plates xiv. and xv. .. .. 330

Evston, A, H.: Revision of the Australian Elateridae. Coleoptera. Part ij. ra OTS

Fintayson, H. H.: Observations on the South Australian Members of the SSegenus
“Wailabia.” Plates xvi. to xviii... Zs i = ie 3 : ‘3 :

Brack, J. M.: Additions to the Flora of South Australia. No, 25 F = oF

Mawson, Sir D.: Geological Notes on an Area along the North-eastern Margin of the

North-easccrn Portion of the Willouran Range ©; : 386
Mawson, Sir D.: The Paralana Hot Spring. Plate xix... % = = .» 391
Manican, C. ‘T.: The Geology of the Willunga Scarp. Plate xx, __ iS ie .. 398
Davin, Pror. T. W. Enceworti: Note on the Geological Horizon of the Archaeocyathinae 410
MISCELLANEA ; x Ss = = i = be Ge ee AS 3 .. 414
Apstrac™ *> Prockrprxes es = =r os = - sa Pe os ». 415
ANNU.L Report .. oe = ee Ps os Sig eae = a ze -. 423
BALAN CE-SHEETS = 24 = A 2. fr Sy ‘* a és -. 425
Osituary Notices = as sm ze a 8 , =i Roe eee
Donations to Liprary .. = = & Ss ss . a x = zs
Last or Fertows” ets 5 as Pascoe oo Ss =a * -. 437
APPENDIX—

Field Naturalists’ Section: Annual Report, ete. e Ss Sey S er .. 440

TL rty-ninth Report of the F lora and Fauna Protection Committee Be fap! .. 44]

Annual Report of the Shell Collectors’ Committee —__. = =a ae as .. 442
INDEX ae =e a = ws we res Ste Z ee ee .. 444

+

es sei